diff options
Diffstat (limited to '25645.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 25645.txt | 24131 |
1 files changed, 24131 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/25645.txt b/25645.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bdbc9f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/25645.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24131 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Principal Navigations, Voyages, +Traffiques and Discoveries of the English Nation. Vol. XIII. America. Part +II. by Richard Hakluyt + + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with almost no +restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under +the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or +online at http://www.gutenberg.org/license + + + +Title: The Principal Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques and Discoveries of + the English Nation. Vol. XIII. America. Part II. + +Author: Richard Hakluyt + +Release Date: May 29, 2008 [Ebook #25645] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: US-ASCII + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PRINCIPAL NAVIGATIONS, VOYAGES, TRAFFIQUES AND DISCOVERIES OF THE ENGLISH NATION. VOL. XIII. AMERICA. PART II.*** + + + + + + The Principal + + Navigations, Voyages, Traffiques, + + And + + Discoveries + + Of The English Nation + + Collected By + + Richard Hakluyt, Preacher + + And Edited By + + Edmund Goldsmid, F.R.H.S. + + Vol. XIII. America. Part II. + + + + + +CONTENTS + + +Transcriber's Note. +Part I. + I. Sir George Peckham's true Report of the late discoueries. continued. + II. A letter of Sir Francis Walsingham to M. Richard Hakluyt then of + Christchurch in Oxford, incouraging him in the study of Cosmographie, + and of furthering new discoueries, &c. + III. A letter of Sir Francis Walsingham to Master Thomas Aldworth + merchant, and at that time Maior of the Citie of Bristoll, concerning + their aduenture in the Westerne discouerie. + IV. A letter written from M. Thomas Aldworth merchant and Maior of the + Citie of Bristoll, to the right honourable Sir Francis Walsingham + principall Secretary to her Maiestie, concerning a Westerne voyage + intended for the discouery of the coast of America, lying to the + Southwest of Cape Briton. + V. A briefe and summary discourse vpon the intended voyage to the + hithermost parts of America: written by Captaine Carlile in April, + 1583. for the better inducement to satisfie such Merchants of the + Moscouian companie and others, as in disbursing their money towards the + furniture of the present charge, doe demand forthwith a present returne + of gaine, albeit their said particular disbursements are required but + in very slender summes, the highest being 25. li. the second at 12. li. + 10. s. and the lowest at 6. pound fiue shilling. + VI. Articles set downe by the Committies appointed in the behalfe of + the Companie of Moscouian Marchants, to conferre with M. Carlile, vpon + his intended discouerie and attempt into the hithermost parts of + America. + VII. A relation of the first voyage and discouerie of the Isle Ramea, + made for Monsieur de La Court Pre Ravillon and Grand Pre, with the ship + called the Bonauenture, to kill and make Traine oyle of the beasts + called the Morses with great teeth, which we haue perfourmed by Gods + helpe this yeere 1591. + VIII. A letter sent to the right Honourable Sir William Cecil Lord + Burghley, Lord high Treasurer of England &c. From M. Thomas Iames of + Bristoll, concerning the discouerie of the Isle of Ramea, dated the 14 + of September. 1591. + IX. A briefe note of the Morsse and the vse thereof. + X. The voyage of the ship called the Marigold of M. Hill of Redrife + vnto Cape Briton and beyond to the latitude of 44 degrees and an halfe, + 1593. Written by Richard Fisher Master Hilles man of Redriffe. + XI. A briefe note concerning the voyage of M. George Drake of Apsham to + Isle of Ramea in the aforesayd yere 1593. + XII. The voyage of the Grace of Bristoll of M. Rice Iones, a Barke of + thirty-fiue Tunnes, vp into the Bay of Saint Laurence to the Northwest + of Newfoundland, as farre as the Ile of Assumption or Natiscotec, for + the barbes or fynnes of Whales and traine Oyle, made by Siluester Wyet, + Shipmaster of Bristoll. + XIII. The voyage of M. Charles Leigh, and diuers others to Cape Briton + and the Isle of Ramea. + XIV. The first relation of Iaques Carthier of S. Malo, of the new land + called New France, newly discovered in the yere of our Lord 1534. + XV. A shorte and briefe narration of the Nauigation made by the + commandement of the King of France, to the Islands of Canada, + Hochelaga, Saguenay, and diuers others which now are called New France, + with the particular customes, and maners of the inhabitants therein. + XVI. The third voyage of discouery made by Captaine Iaques Cartier, + 1540. vnto the Countreys of Canada, Hochelaga, and Saguenay. + XVII. A letter written to M. Iohn Growte student in Paris, by Iaques + Noel of S. Malo, the nephew of Iaques Cartier, touching the foresaid + discouery. + XVIII. Vnderneath the aforesaid vnperfite relation that which followeth + is written on another letter sent to M. Iohn Growte student in Paris + from Iaques Noel of S. Malo, the grand nephew of Iaques Cartier. + XIX. Here followeth the course from Belle Isle, Carpont, and the Grand + Bay in Newfoundland vp the Riuer of Canada for the space of 230. + leagues, obserued by Iohn Alphonse of Xanctoigne chiefe Pilote to + Monsieur Roberual, 1542. + XX. The Voyage of Iohn Francis de la Roche, knight, Lord of Roberual, + to the Countries of Canada, Saguenai, and Hochelaga, with three tall + Ships, and two hundred persons, both men, women, and children, begun in + April, 1542. In which parts he remayned the same summer, and all the + next winter. + XXI. The voyage of Monsieur Roberual from his Fort in Canada vnto + Saguenay, the fifth of Iune, 1543. + XXII. A Discourse of Western Planting, written by M. Richard Hakluyt, + 1584. + XXIII. The letters patents, granted by the Queenes Maiestie to M. + Walter Ralegh now Knight, for the discovering and planting of new lands + and Countries, to continue the space of 6. yeeres and no more. + XXIV. The first voyage made to the coasts of America, with two barks, + wherein were Captaines M. Philip Amadas, and M. Arthur Barlowe, who + discouered part of the Countrey now called Virginia Anno 1584. Written + by one of the said Captaines, and sent to sir Walter Ralegh knight, at + whose charge and direction, the said voyage was set forth. + XXV. The voiage made by Sir Richard Greenuile, for Sir Walter Ralegh, + to Virginia, in the yeere 1585. + XXVI. An extract of Master Ralph Lanes letter to M. Richard Hakluyt + Esquire, and another Gentleman of the middle Temple, from Virginia. + XXVII. An account of the particularities of the imployments of the + English men left in Virginia by Richard Greeneuill vnder the charge of + Master Ralph Lane Generall of the same, from the 17. of August 1585. + vntil the 18. of Iune 1586. at which time they departed the Countrey; + sent and directed to Sir Walter Ralegh. +Part II. + XXVIII. The third voyage made by a ship sent in the yeere 1586, to the + reliefe of the Colony planted in Virginia at the sole charges of Sir + Walter Ralegh. + XXIX. A briefe and true report of the new found land of Virginia: of + the commodities there found, and to be raised, aswell merchantable as + others: Written by Thomas Heriot, seruant to Sir Walter Ralegh, a + member of the Colony, and there imployed in discouering a full + tweluemonth. + XXX. The fourth voyage made to Virginia with three ships, in yere 1587. + Wherein was transported the second Colonie. + XXXI. The names of all the men, women and children, which safely + arriued in Virginia, and remained to inhabite there. 1587. Anno regni + Reginae Elizabethae. 29. + XXXII. A letter from John White to M. Richard Hakluyt. + XXXIII. The fift voyage of M. Iohn White into the West Indies and parts + of America called Virginia, in the yeere 1590. + XXXIV. The relation of John de Verrazano of the land by him discovered. + XXXV. A notable historie containing foure voyages made by certaine + French Captaines into Florida: Wherein the great riches and + fruitefulnesse of the Countrey with the maners of the people hitherto + concealed are brought to light, written all, sauing the last, by + Monsieur Laudonniere, who remained there himselfe as the French Kings + Lieutenant a yeere and a quarter. + XXXVI. The relation of Pedro Morales a Spaniard, which sir Francis + Drake brought from Saint Augustines in Florida, where he had remayned + sixe yeeres, touching the state of those parts, taken from his mouth by + Master Richard Hakluyt 1586. + XXXVII. The relation of Nicholas Burgoignon, alias Holy, whom sir + Francis Drake brought from Saint Augustine also in Florida, where he + had remayned sixe yeeres, in mine and Master Heriots hearing. + XXXVIII. Virginia Richly Valued, by the Description of the Maine Land + of Florida, Her Next Neighbour: Out of the Foure Yeeres Continuall + Trauell and Discouuerie, For Aboue One Thousand Miles East and West, of + Don Ferdinando De Soto, and Sixe Hundred Able Men in his Companie. +Footnotes + + + + + + +TRANSCRIBER'S NOTE. + + +This book is a transcription of a 17th century book, which had the +spelling and printing conventions of that time: our "v" was often printed +as a "u", and sometimes vice versa, our "j" was printed as an "i", etc. +Those have been preserved in this book. There are other conventions which +are converted into more modern usage; for instance, several words (such as +"Lord" and "which") were often printed in abbreviated form (such as an "L" +and a superscript "d", or "w" with a superscript "ch"), which have been +transcribed in expanded form (such as "Lord" and "which"). In the plain +ASCII version, indicators like (M10) refer to marginal notes, originally +printed in the left or right margins of the page, and here printed at the +end of the book; similarly, indicators like (10) refer to footnotes, also +printed at the end of the book. + + + + + +PART I. + + + + +I. Sir George Peckham's true Report of the late discoueries. continued. + + + +The second Part or Chapter sheweth, that it is lawfull and necessarie to +trade and traffique with the Sauages: And to plant in their Countries: And +diuideth planting into two sorts. + + +And first for traffique, I say that the Christians may lawfully trauell +into those Countries and abide there: whom the Sauages may not iustly +impugne and forbidde in respect of the mutuall societie and fellowshippe +betweene man and man prescribed by the Law of Nations. + +For from the first beginning of the creation of the world, and from the +renewing of the same after Noes flood, all men haue agreed, that no +violence should be offered to Ambassadours: That the Sea with his Hauens +should be common: That such as should fortune to be taken in warre, should +be seruants or slaues: And that strangers should not be driuen away from +the place or Countrey whereunto they doe come. + +If it were so then, I demaund in what age, and by what Law is the same +forbidden or denied since? For who doubteth but that it is lawfull for +Christians to vse trade and traffique with Infidels or Sauages, carrying +thither such commodities as they want, and bringing from thence some part +of their plentie? + +A thing so commonly and generally practised, both in these our dayes, and +in times past, beyond the memorie of man, both by Christians and Infidels, +that it needeth no further proofe. + +And forasmuch as the vse of trade and traffique (be it neuer so +profitable) ought not to be preferred before the planting of Christian +faith: I will therefore somewhat intreate of planting, (without which, +Christian Religion can take no roote, be the Preachers neuer so carefull +and diligent) which I meane to diuide into two sortts. + +(M1) The first, when Christians by the good liking and willing assent of +the Sauages, are admitted by them to quiet possession. + +The second, when Christians being vniustly repulsed, doe seeke to attaine +and mainteine the right for which they doe come. + +And though in regard of the establishment of Christian Religion, eyther of +both may be lawfully and iustly exercised: (Whereof many examples may be +found, as well in the time of Moyses and Iosua, and other rulers before +the birth of Christ, as of many vertuous Emperours and Kings sithence his +incarnation:) yet doe I wish, that before the second be put in practise, a +proofe may be made of the first, sauing that for their safetie as well +against the Sauages, as all other foreigne enemies, they should first well +and strongly fortifie themselues: which being done, then by all fayre +speeches, and euery other good meanes of perswasion to seeke to take away +all occasions of offence. + +As letting them to vnderstand, how they came, not to their hurt, but for +their good, and to no other ende, but to dwell peaceably amongst them, and +to trade and traffique with them for their owne commoditie, without +molesting or grieuing them any way: which must not be done by wordes onely +but also by deedes. + +For albeit, to maintaine right and repell iniury, be a iust cause of +warre: yet must there hereof be heedefull care had, that whereas the +Sauages be fearefull by nature, and fond otherwise, the Christians should +doe their best endeuour to take away such feare as may growe vnto them by +reason of their strange apparell, Armour, and weapon, or such like, by +quiet and peaceable conuersation, and letting them liue in securitie, and +keeping a measure of blamelesse defence, with as little discommoditie to +the Sauages as may bee: for this kinde of warre would be onely defensiue +and not offensiue. + +And questionlesse there is great hope and likelyhoode, that by this kinde +of meanes we should bring to passe all effects to our desired purposes: +Considering that all creatures, by constitution of nature, are rendred +more tractable and easier wonne for all assayes, by courtesie and +mildnesse, then by crueltie or roughnesse: and therefore being a principle +taught vs by naturall reason, it is first to be put in vse. + +For albeit as yet the Christians are not so thoroughly furnished with the +perfectnesse of their language, eyther to expresse their mindes to them, +or againe to conceiue the Sauages intent: Yet for the present +opportunitie, such policie may be vsed by friendly signes, and courteous +tokens, towards them, as the Sauages may easily perceiue (were their +sences neuer so grosse) an assured friendship to be offered them, and that +they are encountered with such a nation, as brings them benefite, +commoditie, peace, tranquilitie and safetie. To further this, and to +accomplish it in deedes, there must bee presented vnto them gratis, some +kindes of our pettie marchandizes and trifles: As looking glasses, Belles, +Beades, Bracelets, Chaines, or collers of Bewgle, Chrystall, Amber, Iet, +or Glasse, &c. For such be the things, though to vs of small value, yet +accounted by them of high price and estimation: and soonest will induce +their Barbarous natures to a liking and a mutuall societie with vs. + +Moreouer, it shall be requisite eyther by speeche, if it be possible +either by some other certaine meanes, to signifie vnto them, that once +league of friendship with all louing conuersation being admitted betweene +the Christians and them: that then the Christians from thenceforth will +alwayes be ready with force of Armes to assist and defend them in their +iust quarrels, from all inuasions, spoyles and oppressions offered them by +any Tyrants, Aduersaries, or their next borderers: and a benefite is so +much the more to be esteemed, by how much the person vpon whom it is +bestowed standeth in neede thereof. + +For it appeareth by the relation of a Countreyman of ours, namely Dauid +Ingram, (who trauelled in those countries xi. Moneths and more) That the +Sauages generally for the most part, are at continuall warres with their +next adioyning neighbours, and especially the Cannibals, being a cruell +kinde of people whose foode is mans flesh, and haue teeth like dogges, and +doe pursue them with rauenous mindes to eate their flesh, and deuoure +them. + +And it is not to be doubted, but that the Christians may in this case +iustly and lawfully ayde the Sauages against the Cannibals. So that it is +very likely, that by this meanes we shall not only mightily stirre and +inflame their rude mindes gladly to embrace the louing company of the +Christians, proffering vnto them both commodities, succour and kindnesse: +But also by their franke consents shall easily enioy such competent +quantity of Land, as euery way shall be correspondent to the Christians +expectation and contentation, considering the great abundance that they +haue of Land, and how small account they make thereof, taking no other +fruites thereby then such as the ground of it selfe doeth naturally +yeelde. And thus much concerning the first sort of planting, which as I +assuredly hope, so I most heartily pray may take effect and place. + +(M2) But if after these good and fayre meanes vsed, the Sauages +neuerthelesse will not bee herewithall satisfied, but barbarously will goe +about to practise violence eyther in repelling the Christians from their +Ports and safe-landings, or in withstanding them afterwards to enioy the +rights for which both painfully and lawfully they haue aduentured +themselues thither. + +Then in such a case I holde it no breach of equitie for the Christians to +defend themselues, to pursue reuenge with force, and to doe whatsoeuer is +necessarie for the attaining of their saftie: For it is allowable by all +Lawes in such distresses, to resist violence with violence: And for their +more securitie to increase their strength by building of Forts for +auoyding the extremitie of iniurious dealing. + +Wherein if also they shal not be suffered in reasonable quietnesse to +continue, there is no barre (as I iudge) but that in stoute assemblies the +Christians may issue out, and by strong hand pursue their enemies, subdue +them, take possession of their Townes, Cities, or Villages, and (in +auoyding murtherous tyrannie) to vse the Law of Armes, as in like case +among all Nations at this day is vsed: and most especially to the ende +they may with securitie holde their lawfull possession, lest happily after +the departure of the Christians, such Sauages as haue bene conuerted +should afterwards through compulsion and enforcement of their wicked +Rulers, returne to their horrible idolatrie (as did the children of +Israel, after the decease of Ioshua) and continue their wicked custome of +most vnnaturall sacrificing of humane creatures. + +And in so doing, doubtlesse the Christians shall no whit transgresse the +bonds of equitie or ciuilitie, forasmuch as in former ages, (yea, before +the incarnation of Christ) the like hath bene done by sundry Kings and +Princes, Gouernours of the children of Israel: chiefly in respect to begin +their planting, for the establishment of Gods worde: as also since the +Natiuitie of Christ, mightie and puissant Emperours and kings haue +performed the like, I say to plant, possesse, and subdue. For proofe +whereof, I wilt alledge you examples of both kindes. + +Wee reade in the olde Testament, how that after Noes flood was ceased, +restauration of mankinde began onely of those fewe of Noes children and +familie as were by God preelected to bee saued in the Arke with him, whose +seede in processe of time, was multiplyed to infinite numbers of Nations, +which in diuers sortes diuided themselues to sundry quarters of the earth. +And foreasmuch as all their posteritie being mightily encreased, followed +not the perfect life of Noe their predecessour, God chose out of the +multitude a peculiar people to himselfe, to whom afterwardes being vnder +the gouernment of Moyses in Mount Sinay, hee made a graunt to inherite the +Land of Canaan, called the Land of promise, with all the other rich and +fertile Countries next adioyning thereunto. Neuerthelesse, before they +came to possession thereof, hauing bene afflicted with many grieuous +punishments and plagues for their sinnes, they fell in despayre to enioy +the same. + +But being encouraged and comforted by their rulers, (men of God) they +proceeded, arming themselues with all patience, to suffer whatsoeuer it +should please God to send: and at last attaining to the Land, they were +encountered with great numbers of strong people, and mighty Kings. + +(M3) Notwithstanding, Iosua their Leader replenished with the Spirite of +God, being assured of the iustnesse of his quarrell, gathered the chiefe +strength of the children (M4) of Israel together, to the number of 40000. +with whom he safely passed the huge riuer Iordon, and hauing before sent +priuie spies for the discouerie of the famous citie Ierico, to vnderstand +the certaintie of the Citizens estate, he forthwith came thither, and +enuironed it round about with his whole power the space of seuen dayes. + +In which respite, perceiuing none of the Gentiles disposed to yeeld or +call for mercie, he then commanded (as God before had appointed) that both +the citie Ierico should be burned, yea, and all the inhabitants, as well +olde as young, with all their cattell should be destroyed, onely excepted +Rahab, her kindred and familie, because shee before had hid secretly the +messengers of Iosua, that were sent thither as spies. As for all their +golde, siluer, precious stones, or vessels of brasse, they were reserued +and consecrated to the Lords treasurie. + +(M5) In like maner he burned the citie Hay, slew the inhabitants thereof, +and hanged vp their King. (M6) But for so much as the Gebionites (fearing +the like euent) sent Ambassadours vnto Iosua to entreate for grace, +fauour, and peace: hee commaunded that all their liues should bee saued, +and that they should be admitted to the children of Israel. Yet +vnderstanding afterwards they wrought this by a pollicie, he vsed them as +drudges to hewe wood and to carie water, and other necessaries for his +people. (M7) Thus beganne this valiant Captaine his conquest, which he +pursued and neuer left till hee had subdued all the Hethites, Cananites. +Peresites, Heuites, and Iebusites, with all their princes and Kings, being +thirtie and one in number, and diuers other strange nations, besides whose +lands and dominions he wholy diuided among Gods people. + +(M8) After that Iosua was deceased, Iuda was constituted Lord ouer the +armie, who receiuing like charge from God, pursued the proceedings of the +holy captaine Iosua, and vtterly vanquished many Gentiles, Idolaters, and +aduersaries to the children of Israel, with all such Rulers or Kings as +withstoode him, and namely Adonibezek the most cruell tyrant: whose +thumbes and great toes he caused to be cut off, for so much as hee had +done the like before vnto seuentie Kings, whom being his prisoners, he +forced to gather vp their victuals vnderneath his table. In this God +shewed his iustice to reuenge tyrannie. (M9) We reade likewise, that +Gedeon a most puissant and noble warriour so behaued himselfe in following +the worthy acts of Iosua and Iuda, that in short time he not only +deliuered the children of Israel from the hands of the multitude of the +fierce Madianites, but also subdued them and their Tyrants, whose landes +he caused Gods people to possesse and inherite. + +I could recite diuers other places out of the Scripture, which aptly may +be applyed hereunto, were it not I doe indeuour my selfe by all meanes to +be briefe. Now in like maner will I alledge some fewe Inductions out of +the autenticall writings of the Ecclesiasticall Historiographers, all +tending to the like argument. And first to begin withall, we doe reade: +That after our Sauiour Iesus Christ had suffered his passion, the Apostles +being inspired with the holy Ghost, and the knowledge of all strange +languages, did immediatly disperse themselues to sundry parts of the +world, to the preaching of the Gospel. Yet not in so generall a maner, but +that there remayned some farre remote Countries vnvisited by them, among +the which it is reported that India the great, called the vttermost India, +as yet had received no light of the word. (M10) But it came to passe, that +one Metrodorus, a very learned and wise Philosopher in that age, being +desirous to search out vnknowen lands, did first discouer the same finding +it wonderfull populous and rich, which vpon his returne being published, +and for certaine vnderstood, there was another graue Philosopher of Tyrus +called Meropius, being a Christian, who did resolue himselfe (following +the example of Metrodorus) to trauaile thither, and in a short time +assisted but with a fewe, in a small Vessel arriued there, hauing in his +company two yong youths, Edesius and Frumentius, whom (being his +schollers) he had thoroughly instructed both in liberall Sciences, and +christian Religion. Now after that Meropius somewhile staying there, had +(as hee thought) sufficient vnderstanding of the Indians whole estate: He +determined to depart, and to bring notice thereof vnto the Emperour, whom +he meant to exhort to the conquest of the same. + +But by misfortune he was preuented, for being in the middest of his course +on the Sea homeward, a sore tempest arose, and perforce droue him backe +againe, to an unknowen Port of the said land: where he by the most cruell +barbarous Indians on the sudden was slaine with all his company, except +the two young (M11) schollers aforesayde, whom the barbarous Indians, by +reason they were of comely stature and beautifull personages, tooke, and +forthwith presented them to their King and Queene: which both being very +well liked of, the King courteously entreated, and ordeined Edesius to be +his Butler, and Frumentius his Secretarie, and in few yeeres by reason of +their learning and ciuill gouernment, they were had in great fauour, +honour, and estimation with the Princes. But the King departing this life, +left the Queene his wife with her yong sonne to gouerne, and gaue free +scope and liberty to the two Christians, at their best pleasure to passe +to their natiue soyles, allowing them all necessaries for the same. Yet +the Queene who highly fauoured them was very sorrowfull they should +depart, and therefore most earnestly intreated them to tarie and assist +her in the gouernment of her people, till such time as her yong sonne +grewe to ripe yeeres, which request they fulfilled. + +(M12) And Frumentius excelling Edesius farre in all wisedome, ruled both +the Queene and her subiects at his discretion, whereby he tooke occasion +to put in practise priuily, that the foundation of Christian religion +might be planted in the hearts of such as with whom he thought his +perswasion might best preuaile, and that soonest would giue eare vnto him: +which being brought to passe accordingly, hee then with his fellow Edesius +tooke leaue of the Queene to returne to his natiue countrey. And so soone +as he was arriued there, he reuealed to the Emperour Constantine, the +effect of all those euents: who both commending his deedes and wholy +allowing thereof, by the aduise and good liking of Athanasius then Bishop +of Alexandria, did arme and set forth a conuenient power for the ayde of +Frumentius, in this his so godly a purpose. And by this meanes came the +Emperour afterwards by faire promises, and by force of armes together, +vnto the possession of all the Indians countrey. (M13) The author of this +storie Ruffinus receiued the trueth hereof from the very mouth of Edesius +companion to Frumentius. Moreouer Eusebius in his Historie +Ecclesiasticall(1) in precise termes, and in diuers places maketh mention +how Constantine the great not onely enlarged his Empire by the subduing of +his next neighbours, but also endeauoured by all meanes to subiect all +such remote Barbarous and Heathen nations, as then inhabited the foure +quarters of the worlde. For (as it is written) the Emperour thoroughly +ayded with a puissant armie of valiant souldiers whom he had before +perswaded to Christian religion, in proper person himselfe came euen vnto +this our country of England, then called the Island of Britaines, bending +from him full West, which he wholy conquered, made tributarie, and setled +therein Christian faith, and left behinde him such Rulers thereof, as to +his wisedome seemed best. From thence hee turned his force towardes the +North coast of the world, and there vtterly subdued the rude and cruell +Nation of the Scythians, whereof part by friendly perswasions, part by +maine strength, hee reduced the whole to Christian faith. Afterwards he +determined with himselfe to search out what strange people inhabited in +the vttermost parts of the South. And with great hazard and labour, making +his iourney thither, at last became victour ouer them all euen to the +countrey of the Blemmyans, and the remote AEthiopians, that now are the +people of Presbyter Iohn, who yet till this day continue and beare the +name of Christians. + +In the East likewise, what Nation soeuer at that time he could haue notice +of, he easily wonne and brought in subiection to the Empire. So that to +conclude, there was no region in any part of the world, the inhabitants +whereof being Gentiles, though vnkowen vnto him, but in time he ouercame +and vanquished. + +This worthy beginning of Constantine, both his sonnes succeeding his +roome, and also diuers other Emperours afterward to their vttermost +endeauour followed and continued, which all the bookes of Eusebius more at +large set foorth. (M14) Theodoretus likewise in his Ecclesiasticall +historie maketh mention how Theodosius the vertuous Emperour imployed +earnestly all his time, as well in conquering the Gentiles to the +knowledge of the holy Gospel, vtterly subuerting their prophane Temples +and abominable Idolatry, as also in extinguishing of such vsurping tyrants +as with Paganisme withstoode the planting of Christian religion. (M15) +After whose decease his sonnes Honorius and Arcadius were created +Emperours, the one of the East, the other of the West, who with all the +stout godlinesse most carefully imitated the foresteps of their Father; +eyther in enlarging theyr territories, or increasing the christian flocke. + +Moreouer, it is reported by the sayd author, that Theodosius iunior the +Emperour, no whit inferior in vertuous life to any of the aboue named +Princes, with great studie and zeale pursued and prosecuted the Gentiles, +subdued their tyrants and countries, and vtterly destroyed all their +idolatry, conuerting their soules to acknowledge their onely Messias and +Creator, and their Countries to the enlargement of the Empire. To be +briefe, who so listeth to read Eusebius Pamphilus, Socrates Scholasticus, +Theodoritus Hermia, Sozomen, and Euagrius Scholasticus, which all were +most sage Ecclesiasticall writers, shall finde great store of examples of +the worthy liues of sundry Emperours, tending all to the confirmation of +my former speeches. + +And for like examples of later time, (yea euen in the memorie of man) I +shall not neede to recite any other then the conquest made of the West and +East Indies by the Kings of Spaine and Portugall, whereof there is +particular mention made in the last chapter of this booke. Herein haue I +vsed more copy of examples then otherwise I would haue done, sauing that I +haue bene in place, where this maner of planting the Christian faith hath +bene thought of some to be scarce lawfull, yea, such as doe take vpon them +to be more then meanely learned. To these examples could I ioyne many moe, +but whosoeuer is not satisfied with these fewe, may satisfie himselfe in +reading at large the authors last aboue recited. Thus haue I (as I trust) +prooued that we may iustly trade and traffique with the Sauages, and +lawfully plant and inhabite their Countries. + + + +The third Chapter doeth shew the lawfull title which the Queenes most +excellent Maiestie hath vnto those countries, which through the ayde of +Almighty God are meant to be inhabited. + + +(M16) And it is very euident that the planting there shal in time right +amply enlarge her Maiesties Territories and Dominions, or (I might rather +say) restore to her Highnesse ancient right and interest in those +Countries, into the which a noble and worthy personage, lineally descended +from the blood royall, (M17) borne in Wales named Madock ap Owen Gwyneth, +departing from the coast of England, about the yeere of our Lord God 1170. +arriued and there planted himselfe and his Colonies, and afterward +returned himselfe into England, leauing certaine of his people there, as +appeareth in an ancient Welsh Chronicle, where he then gaue to certaine +Ilands, beastes, and foules sundry Welsh names, as the Iland of Pengwin, +which yet to this day beareth the same. + +There is likewise a foule in the saide countreys called by the same name +at this day, and is as much to say in English, as Whitehead, and in trueth +the said foules haue white heads. There is also in those countreis a fruit +called Gwynethes which is likewise a Welsh word. Moreouer, there are +diuers other Welsh wordes at this day in vse, as Dauid Ingram aforesaid +reporteth in his relations. All which most strongly argueth, the sayd +prince with his people to haue inhabited there. And the same in effect is +confirmed by Mutezuma(2) that mightie Emperour of Mexico, who in an +Oration vnto his subiects for the better pacifying of them, made in the +presence of Hernando Cortes, vsed these speeches following. + +(M18) My kinsmen, friends, and seruants, you doe well know that eighteene +yeres I haue bene your King, as my fathers and grandfathers were, and +alwayes I haue bene vnto you a louing Prince, and you vnto me good and +obedient subiects, and so I hope you will remaine vnto mee all the dayes +of my life. You ought to haue in remembrance, that either you haue heard +of your fathers, or else our diuines haue instructed you, that wee are not +naturally of this countrey, nor yet our kingdome is durable, because our +forefathers came from a farre countrey, and their King and Captaine, who +brought them hither, returned againe to his naturall Countrey, saying that +he would send such as should rule and gouerne vs, if by chance he himselfe +returned not, &c. + +These be the very wordes of Mutezuma set downe in the Spanish Chronicles, +the which being thoroughly considered, because they haue relation to some +strange noble person, who long before had possessed those countreys, doe +all sufficiently argue the vndoubted title of her Maiestie: forasmuch as +no other Nation can truely by any Chronicles they can finde, make +prescription of time for themselues, before the time of this Prince Madoc. +(M19) Besides all this, for further proofe of her highnesse title sithence +the arriuall of this noble Briton into those parts (that is to say) in the +time of the Queenes grandfather of worthy memory, King Henry the seuenth, +Letters patents were by his Maiestie granted to Iohn Cabota an Italian, to +Lewis, Sebastian and Sancius, his three sonnes, to discouer remote, +barbarous and heathen Countreys, which discouery was afterwardes executed +to the vse of the Crowne of England, in the sayde Kings time, by Sebastian +and Sancius his sonnes, who were borne here in England: in true testimony +whereof there is a faire hauen in Newfoundland, knowen, and called vntill +this day by the name of Sancius hauen, which proueth that they first +discouered vpon that coast from the height of 63 vnto the cape of Florida, +as appeareth in the Decades. + +And this may stand for another title to her Maiesty: but any of the +foresayd titles is as much or more then any other Christian Prince can +pretend to the Indies, before such time as they had actuall possession +thereof, obtained by the discouery of Christopher Columbus, and the +conquest of Vasques Nunnes de Balboa, Hernando Cortes, Francisco Pizarro, +and others. And therefore I thinke it needlesse to write any more touching +the lawfulnesse of her Maiesties title. + + + +The fourth chapter sheweth how that the trade, traffike, and planting in +those countreys is likely to proue very profitable to the whole realme in +generall. + + +Now to shew how the same is likely to prooue very profitable and +beneficiall generally to the whole realme: it is very certaine, that the +greatest iewell of this realme, and the chiefest strength and force of the +same, for defence or offence in marshal matter and maner, is the multitude +of ships, masters and mariners, ready to assist the most stately and +royall nauy of her Maiesty, which by reason of this voyage shall haue both +increase and maintenance. (M20) And it is well knowen that in sundry +places of this realme ships haue beene built and set forth of late dayes, +for the trade of fishing onely: yet notwithstanding the fish which is +taken and brought into England by the English nauy of fishermen, will no +suffice for the expense of this realme foure moneths, if there were none +els brought of strangers. And the chiefest cause why our English men doe +not goe so farre Westerly as the especiall fishing places doe lie, both +for plenty and greatnesse of fish, is for that they haue no succour and +knowen safe harbour in those parts. But if our nation were once planted +there, or neere thereabouts; whereas they now fish but for two moneths in +the yeere, they might then fish as long as pleased themselues, or rather +at their comming finde such plenty of fish ready taken, salted, and dried, +as might be sufficient to fraught them home without long delay (God +granting that salt may be found there) whereof Dauid Ingram (who trauelled +in those countreys as aforesayd) sayth that there is great plenty: and +withall the climate doth giue great hope, that though there were none +naturally growing, yet it might as well be made there by art, as it is +both at Rochel and Bayon, or elsewhere. Which being brought to passe, +shall increase the number of our shippes and mariners, were it but in +respect of fishing onely: but much more in regard of the sundry +merchandizes and commodities which are there found, and had in great +abundance. + +Moreouer, it is well knowen that all Sauages, aswell those that dwell in +the South, as those that dwell in the North, so soone as they shall begin +but a little to taste of ciuility, will take maruelous delight in any +garment, be it neuer so simple; as a shirt, a blew, yellow, red, or greene +cotton cassocke, a cap, or such like, and will take incredible paines for +such a trifle. + +For I my selfe haue heard this report made sundry times by diuers of our +countreymen, who haue dwelt in the Southerly parts of the West Indies, +some twelue yeeres together, and some of lesse time; that the people in +those parts are easily reduced to ciuility both in maners and garments. +Which being so, what vent for our English clothes will thereby ensue, and +how great benefit to all such persons and artificers, whose names are +quoted in the margent,(3) I do leaue to the iudgement of such as are +discreet and questionlesse; hereby it will also come to passe, that all +such townes and villages as both haue beene, and now are vtterly decayed +and ruinated (the poore people thereof being not set on worke, by reason +of the transportation of raw wooll of late dayes more excessiuely then in +times past) shal by this meanes be restored to their pristinate wealth and +estate: all which doe likewise tend to the inlargement of our nauy, and +maintenance of our nauigation. + +To what end need I endeuour my selfe by arguments to proue that by this +voyage our nauie and nauigation shalbe inlarged, when as there needeth +none other reason then the manifest and late example of the neere +neighbours to this realme, the kings of Spaine and Portugall, who since +the first discouery of the Indies, haue not onely mightily inlarged their +dominions, greatly inriched themselues and their subiects: but haue also +by iust account trebled the number of their shippes, masters and mariners, +a matter of no small moment and importance? + +(M21) Besides this, it will prooue a generall benefit vnto our countrey, +that through this occasion, not onely a great number of men which do now +liue idlely at home, and are burthenous, chargeable, and vnprofitable to +this realme, shall hereby be set on worke, but also children of twelue or +fourteene yeeres of age, or vnder, may bee kept from idlenesse, in making +of a thousand kindes of trifling things, which wil be good merchandize for +that countrey. (M22) And moreouer, our idle women (which the Realme may +well spare) shall also be imployed on plucking, drying, and sorting of +feathers, in pulling, beating, and working of hempe, and in gathering of +cotton, and diuers things right necessary for dying. All which things are +to be found in those countreys most plentifully. And the men may imploy +themselues in dragging for pearle, woorking for mines, and in matters of +husbandry, and likewise in hunting the whale for Trane, and making casks +to put the same in: besides in fishing for cod, salmon, and herring, +drying, salting and barrelling the same, and felling of trees, hewing and +sawing of them, and such like worke, meete for those persons that are no +men of Art or Science. + +Many other things may bee found to the great reliefe and good employments +of no small number of the naturall Subiects of this Realme, which doe now +liue here idlely to the common annoy of the whole state. (M23) Neither may +I here omit the great hope and likelyhood of a passage beyond the Grand +Bay into the South Seas, confirmed by sundry authors to be found leading +to Cataia, the Molluccas and Spiceries, whereby may ensue as generall a +benefite to the Realme, or greater then yet hath bene spoken of, without +either such charges, or other inconueniences, as by the tedious tract of +time and perill, which the ordinary passage to those parts at this day +doeth minister. + +And to conclude this argument withall, it is well knowen to all men of +sound iudgement, that this voyage is of greater importance, and will be +found more beneficiall to our countrey, then all other voyages at this day +in vse and trade amongst vs. + + + +The fift chapter sheweth, that the trading and planting in those countreis +is likely to proue to the particular profit of all aduenturers. + + +I must, now according to my promise shew foorth some probable reasons that +the aduenturers in this iourney are to take particular profit by the same. +It is therefore conuenient that I doe diuide the aduenturers into two +sorts: the noblemen and gentlemen by themselues, and the Merchants by +themselues. For, as I doe heare, it is meant that there shall be one +societie of the Noblemen and Gentlemen, and another societie of the +merchants. And yet not so diuided, but that eche society may freely and +frankely trade and traffique one with the other. + +And first to bend my speech to the noblemen and gentlemen, who doe chiefly +seeke a temperate climate, wholesome ayre, fertile soile, and a strong +place by nature whereupon they may fortifie, and there either plant +themselues, or such other persons as they shall thinke good to send to bee +lords of that place and countrey: to them I say, that all these things are +verie easie to be found within the degrees of 30 and 60 aforesaid, either +by South or North, both in the Continent, and in Islands thereunto +adioyning at their choise: but the degree certaine of the eleuation of the +pole, and the very climate where these places of force and fertility are +to be found, I omit to make publike, for such regard as the wiser sort can +easily coniecture: the rather because I doe certainly vnderstand, that +some of those which haue the managing of this matter, knowe it as well or +better then I my selfe, and do meane to reueale the same, when cause shall +require, to such persons whom it shall concerne, and to no other: so that +they may seat and settle themselues in such climate as shall best agree +with their owne nature, disposition, and good liking: and in the whole +tract of that land, by the description of as many as haue bene there, +great plentie of minerall matter of all sorts, and in very many places, +both stones of price, pearle and christall, and great store of beasts, +birds and fowles both for pleasure and necessary for vse of man are to be +found. + +(M24) And for such as take delight in hunting, there are Stagges, Wilde +bores, Foxes, Hares, Cunnies, Badgers, Otters, and diuers other such like +for pleasure. Also for such as haue delight in hauking, there are haukes +of sundry kinds, and great store of game, both for land and riuer, as +Fezants, Partridges, Cranes, Heronshawes, Ducks, Mallards, and such like. +(M25) There is also a kinde of beast much bigger then an Oxe, whose hide +is more then eighteene foote long, of which sort a countreyman of ours, +one Walker a sea man, who was vpon that coast, did for a trueth report in +the presence of diuers honourable and worshipfull persons, that he and his +company did finde in one cottage aboue two hundred and fortie hides, which +they brought away and solde in France for fortie shillings an hide: and +with this agreeth Dauid Ingram, and describeth that beast at large, +supposing it to be a certaine kinde of Buffe; (M26) there are likewise +beasts and fowles of diuers kinds, which I omit for breuities sake, great +store of fish both in the salt water and in the fresh, plentie of grapes +as bigge as a mans thumbe, and the most delicate wine of the Palme tree, +of which wine there be diuers of good credit in this realme that haue +tasted: and there is also a kind of graine called Maiz, Potato rootes, and +sundry other fruits naturally growing there: so that after such time as +they are once settled, they shall neede to take no great care for +victuall. + +And now for the better contentation and satisfaction of such worshipfull, +honest minded, and well disposed Merchants, as haue a desire to the +furtherance of euery good and commendable action, I will first say vnto +them, as I haue done before to the Noblemen and Gentlemen, that within the +degrees abouesayde, is doubtlesse to bee found the most wholesome and best +temperature of ayre, fertilitie of soyle, and euery other commoditie or +merchandize, for the which, with no small perill we doe trauell into +Barbary, Spaine, Portugall, France, Italie, Moscouie and Eastland. All +which may be either presently had, or at the least wise in very short time +procured from thence with lesse danger then now we haue them. And yet to +the ende my argument shall not altogether stand vpon likelihoods and +presumptions, I say that such persons as haue discouered and trauelled +those partes, doe testifie that they haue found in those countreys all +these things following, namely: + +Of beasts for furres: Marterns, Beauers, Foxes, blacke and white, +Leopards. + +Of wormes: Silke wormes great and large. + +Of Birds: Hawkes, Bitters, Curlewes, Herons, Partridges, Cranes, Mallards, +Wilde geese, Stocke dooues, Margaus, Blacke birds, Parrots, Pengwins. + +Of Fishes: Codde, Salmon, Seales, Herrings. + +Of Trees: Palme trees yeelding sweet wines, Cedars, Firres, Sasafras, +Oake, Elme, Popler, and sundry other strange Trees to vs vnknowen. + +Of fruites: Grapes very large, Muskemellons, Limons, Dates great, +Orrenges, Figges, Prunes, Raisins great and small, Pepper, Almonds, +Citrons. + +Of Mettals: Golde, Siluer, Copper, Lead, Tinne. + +Of Stones: Turkeis, Rubies, Pearls great and faire, Marble of diuers +kindes, Iasper, Christall. + +Sundry other commodities of all sorts: Rosen, Pitch, Tarre, Turpentine, +Frankincense, Honny, Waxe, Rubarbe, Oyle Oliue, Traine oyle, Muske codde, +Salt, Tallow, Hides, Hempe, Flaxe, Cochenello and dies of diuers sorts, +Feathers of sundrie sorts, as for pleasure and filling of Featherbeds. + +And seeing that for small costs, the trueth of these may be vnderstood +(whereof this intended supply will giue vs more certaine assurance) I doe +finde no cause to the contrary, but that all well minded persons should be +willing to aduenture some competent portion for the furtherance of so good +an enterprise. + +Now for the triall hereof, considering that in the articles of the +societie of the aduenturers in this voyage, there is prouision made, that +no aduenturer shall be bound to any further charge then his first +aduenture: and yet notwithstanding keepe still to himselfe his children, +his apprentises and seruants, his and their freedome for trade and +traffique, which is a priuiledge that aduenturers in other voyages haue +not: and in the said articles it is likewise prouided, that none other +then such as haue aduentured in the first voyage, or shal become +aduenturers in this supply, at any time hereafter are to be admitted in +the said society, but as redemptionaries, which will be very chargeable: +therefore generally I say vnto all such according to the olde prouerbe, +Nothing venture, nothing haue. For if it do so fall out, according to the +great hope and expectation had, (as by Gods grace it will) the gaine which +now they reap by traffique into other farre countries, shal by this trade +returne with lesse charge, greater gaine, and more safety: Lesse charge, I +say, by reason of the ample and large deepe riuers at the very banke, +whereof there are many, whereby both easily and quietly they may transport +from the innermost parts of the main land, all kind of merchandize, yea in +vessels of great burden, and that three times, or twise in the yere at the +least. (M27) But let vs omit all presumptions how vehement soeuer, and +dwel vpon the certainty of such commodities as were discouered by S. +Humfrey Gilbert, and his assistants in Newfound land in August last. For +there may be very easily made Pitch, Tarre, Rosen, Sope ashes in great +plenty, yea, as it is thought, inough to serue the whole realme of euery +of these kindes: And of Traine oyle such quantity, as if I should set +downe the value that they doe esteeme it at, which haue bene there, it +would seeme incredible. + +It is hereby intended, that these commodities in this abundant maner, are +not to be gathered from thence, without planting and setling there. And as +for other things of more value, and that of more sorts and kindes then one +or two (which were likewise discouered there) I doe holde them for some +respects, more meete for a time to be concealed then vttered. + +Of the fishing I doe speake nothing, because it is generally knowen: and +it is not to be forgotten, what trifles they be that the Sauages doe +require in exchange of these commodities: yea, for pearle, golde, siluer, +and precious stones. All which are matters in trade and traffique of great +moment. But admit that it should so fall out, that the aboue specified +commodities shall not happily be found out within this first yeere: Yet it +is very cleere that such and so many may be found out as shall minister +iust occasion to thinke all cost and labour well bestowed. For it is very +certaine, that there is one seat fit for fortification, of great safety, +wherein those commodities following, especially are to be had, that is to +say, Grapes for wine, Whales for oyle, Hempe for cordage, and other +necccessary things, and fish of farre greater sise and plenty, then that +of Newfound land, and of all these so great store, as may suffice to serue +our whole realme. + +Besides all this, if credit may be giuen to the inhabitants of the same +soile, a certaine riuer doth thereunto adioyne, which leadeth to a place +abounding with rich substance: I doe not hereby meane the passage to the +Molluccaes, whereof before I made mention. + +And it is not to be omitted, how that about two yeeres past, certaine +merchants of S. Malo in France, did hyre a ship out of the Island of +Iersey to the ende that they would keepe that trade secret from their +Countreymen, and they would admit no mariner, other then the ship boy +belonging to the said ship, to goe with them, which shippe was about 70. +tunne. I doe know the shippe and the boy very well, and am familiarly +acquainted with the owner, which voyage prooued very beneficiall. + +To conclude, this which is already sayd, may suffice any man of reasonable +disposition to serue for a taste, vntill such time as it shall please +almighty God through our owne industrie to send vs better tydings. In the +meane season, if any man well affected to this iourney, shall stand in +doubt of any matter of importance touching the same, he may satisfie +himselfe with the iudgement and liking of such of good calling and +credite, as are principall dealers herein. For it is not neccessary in +this treatise, publikely to set forth the whole secrets of the voyage. + + + +The sixth Chapter sheweth that, the traffique and planting in those +countries, shall be vnto the Sauages themselues very beneficiall and +gainefull. + + +Now to the end it may appeare that this voyage is not vndertaken +altogether for the peculiar commodity of our selues and our countrey (as +generally other trades and iournies be) it shall fall out in proofe, that +the Sauages shall hereby haue iust cause to blesse the houre when this +enterprise was vndertaken. + +First and chiefly, in respect of the most happy and gladsome tidings of +the most glorious Gospel of our Sauiour Iesus Christ, whereby they may be +brought from falshood to trueth, from darknesse to light, from the hie way +of death to the path of life, from superstitious idolatrie to sincere +Christianity, from the deuill to Christ, from hell to heauen. And if in +respect of all the commodities they can yeelde vs (were they many moe) +that they should but receiue this onely benefit of Christianity, they were +more then fully recompenced. + +But hereunto it may bee obiected, that the Gospel must bee freely +preached, for such was the example of the Apostles: vnto whom although the +authorities and examples before alledged of Emperors, Kings and Princes, +aswel before Christs time as since, might sufficiently satisfie: yet for +further answere, we may say (M28) with S. Paul, If wee haue sowen vnto you +heauenly things, doe you thinke it much that we should reape your carnall +things? And withall, The workman is worthy of his hire. These heauenly +tidings which those labourers our countreymen (as messengers of Gods great +goodnesse and mercy) will voluntarily present vnto them, doe farre exceed +their earthly riches. Moreouer, if the other inferiour worldly and +temporall things which they shall receiue from vs, be weighed in equall +ballance, I assure my selfe, that by equal iudgement of any indifferent +person, the benefits which they then receiue, shall farre surmount those +which they shall depart withall vnto vs. And admit that they had (as they +haue not) the knowledge to put their land to some vse: yet being brought +from brutish ignorance to ciuilitie and knowledge, and made then to +vnderstand how the tenth part of their Land may be so manured and +employed, as it may yeeld more commodities to the necessary vse of mans +life, then the whole now doeth: What iust cause of complaint may they +haue? And in my private opinion, I do verily thinke that God did create +land, to the end that it should by culture and husbandry yeeld things +necessary for mans life. + +But this is not all the benefit which they shall receiue by the +Christians: for, ouer and beside the knowledge how to till and dresse +their grounds, they shal be reduced from vnseemly customes to honest +maners, from disordered riotous routs and (M29) companyes to a well +gouerned common wealth, and withall, shalbe taught mechanicall +occupations, arts, and liberall sciences: and which standeth them most +vpon, they shalbe defended from the cruelty of their tyrannicall and +bloodsucking neighbors the Canibals, whereby infinite number of their +liues shalbe preserued. And lastly, by this meanes many of their poore +innocent children shall be preserued from the bloody knife of the +sacrificer, a most horrible and detestable custome in the sight of God and +man, now and ever heretofore vsed amongst them. Many other things could I +heere alledge to this purpose were it not that I doe feare lest I haue +already more then halfe tired the reader. + + + +The seuenth Chapter sheweth that the planting there, is not a matter of +such charge or difficultie, as many would make it seeme to be. + + +Now therefore for proofe, that the planting in these parts is a thing that +may be done without the ayde of the Princes power and purse, contrary to +the allegation of many malicious persons, who wil neither be actors in any +good action themselues, nor so much as afoord a good word to the setting +forward thereof: and that worse is, they will take vpon them to make +molehilles seeme mountaines, and flies elephants, to the end they may +discourage others, that be very well or indifferently affected to the +matter, being like vnto Esops dogge, which neither would eate Hay +himselfe, nor suffer the poore hungry asse to feede thereon: + +I say and affirme that God hath prouided such meanes for the furtherance +of this enterprise, as doe stand vs in stead of great treasure: for first +by reason that it hath pleased God of his great goodnesse, of long time to +hold his merciful hand ouer this realme, in preseruing the people of the +same, both from slaughter by the sword, and great death by plague, +pestilence, or otherwise, there are at this day great numbers (God he +knoweth) which liue in such penurie and want, as they could be contented +to hazard their liues, and to serue one yeere for meat, drinke and +apparell only, without wages, in hope thereby to amend their estates: +which is a matter in such like iourneyes, of no small charge to the +prince. Moreouer, things in the like iourneyes of greatest price and cost +as victuall (whereof there is great plentie to be had in that countrey +without money) and powder, great artillery, or corselets are not needefull +in so plentifull and chargeable maner, as the shew of such a iourney may +present: for a small quantitie of all these, to furnish the Fort only, +will suffice vntill such time as diuers commodities may be found out in +those parts, which may be thought well worthy a greater charge. Also the +peculiar benefit of archers which God hath blessed this land withall +before all other nations, will stand vs in great stead amongst those naked +people. + +Another helpe we haue also, which in such like cases is a matter of +marueilous cost, and will be in in this iourney procured very easily (that +is to say) to transport yeerely as well our people, as all other +necessaries needfull for them into those parts by the fleet of merchants, +that yeerely venture for fish in Newfound-land, being not farre distant +from the countrey meant to be inhabited, who commonly goe with emptie +vessels in effect, sauing some litle fraight with salt. And thus it +appeareth that the souldier, wages, and the transportation may be defrayed +for farre lesse summes of money then the detractors of this enterprise +haue giuen out. Againe, this intended voyage for conquest, hath in like +maner many other singular priuiledges wherewith God hath, as it were, with +his holy hand blessed the same before all others. For after once we are +departed the coast of England, wee may passe straight way thither, without +danger of being driuen into any the countries of our enemies, or doubtfull +friends: for commonly one winde serueth to bring vs thither, which seldome +faileth from the middle of Ianuarie to the middle of May, a benefite which +the mariners make great account of, for it is a pleasure that they haue in +a few or none of other iourneyes. Also the passage is short, for we may +goe thither in thirtie or fortie dayes at the most, hauing but an +indifferent winde, and returne continually in twentie or foure and twentie +dayes at the most. And in the same our iourney, by reason it is in the +Ocean, and quite out of the way from the intercourse of other countreyes, +we may safely trade and traffique without peril of piracy: neither shall +our ships, people, or goods there, be subiect to arrest or molestation of +any Pagan potentate, Turkish tyrant, yea, or Christian prince, which +heretofore sometimes vpon slender occasion in other parts haue stayed our +ships and merchandizes, whereby great numbers of our countrymen haue bene +vtterly vndone, diuers put to ransome, yea, and some lost their liues: a +thing so fresh in memorie as it neede no proofe, and is well worthy of +consideration. + +Besides, in this voyage we doe not crosse the burnt line,(4) whereby +commonly both beuerage and victuall are corrupted, and mens health very +much impayred, neither doe we passe the frozen seas, which yeelde sundry +extreame dangers but haue a temperate climate at all times of the yeere, +to serue our turnes. And lastly, there neede no delayes by the way for +taking in of fresh water and fewell, (a thing vsually done in long +iournies) because, as I sayd aboue, the voyage is not long, and the fresh +waters taken in there, our men here in England at their returne home haue +found so wholesome and sweete, that they haue made choise to drinke it +before our beere and ale. + +Behold heere, good countreymen, the manifold benefits and commodities and +pleasures heretofore vnknowen, by Gods especiall blessing not onely +reueiled vnto vs, but also as it were infused into our bosomes, who though +hitherto like dormice haue slumbred in ignorance thereof, being like the +cats that are loth for their prey to wet their feet: yet if now therefore +at the last we would awake, and with willing mindes (setting friuolous +imaginations aside) become industrious instruments to our selues, +questionlesse we should not only hereby set forth the glory of our +heauenly father, but also easily attaine to the end of all good purposes +that may be wished or desired. + +And may it not much encourage vs to hope for good successe in the countrey +of the Sauages, being a naked kinde of people, voyde of the knowledge of +the discipline of warre, seeing that a noble man, being but a subiect in +this realme (in the time of our king Henry the second) by name Strangbow, +then earle of Chepstow in South Wales, by himselfe and his allies and +assistants, at their owne proper charges haue passed ouer into Ireland, +and there made conquest of the now countrey, and then kingdome of +Lynester, at which time it was very populous and strong, which History our +owne chronicles do witnesse: And why should we be dismayed more then were +the Spanyards, who haue bene able within these few yeeres to conquer, +possesse, and enioy so large a tract of the earth, in the West Indies, as +is betweene the two tropikes of Cancer and Capricorne, not onely in the +maine firme land of America, which is 47. degrees in latitude from South +to North, and doth containe 2820. English miles at the least, that the +king of Spaine hath there in actuall possession, besides many goodly and +rich Islands, as Hispaniola, now called S. Domingo, Cuba, Iamaica, and +diuers other which are both beautifull and full of treasure, not speaking +any whit at all, how large the said land is from East to West, which in +some places is accounted to be 1500. English miles at the least from East +to West, betweene the one Sea and the other. + +(M30) Or why should our noble nation be dismaid, more then was Vasques +Nunnes de Valboa, a priuate gentleman of Spaine, who with the number of +70. Spaniards at Tichiri, gaue an ouerthrow vnto that mighty king +Chemaccus, hauing an armie of an hundred Canoas and 5000. men, and the +said Vasques Nunnes not long after, with his small number, did put to +flight king Chiapes his whole armie. + +(M31) Likewise Hernando Cortes, being also but a priuate gentleman of +Spaine, after his departure from the Islands of Cuba and Acuzamil, and +entring into the firme of America, had many most victorious and triumphant +conquests, as that at Cyntla, where being accompanied with lesse then 500. +Spanish footmen, thirteene horsemen and sixe pieces of Ordinance only, he +ouerthrew 40000. Indians. The same Cortes with his sayd number of +Spanyards, tooke prisoner that mighty Emperour Mutezuma in his most chiefe +and famous citie of Mexico, which at that instant had in it aboue the +number of 50000. Indians at the least, and in short time after obtained +not onely the quiet possession of the said citie, but also of his whole +Empire. + +(M32) And in like maner in the Countrey of Peru, which the king of Spaine +hath now in actuall possession, Francisco Pysarro, with the onely ayd of +Diego de Almagro, and Hernando Luche, being all three but priuate +gentlemen, was the principall person that first attempted discouerie and +conquest of the large and rich countrey of Peru, which through the ayd of +the almighty, he brought to passe and atchieued in the Tambo of Caxamalca, +(which is a large place of ground, enclosed with walles) in which place he +tooke the great and mightie prince Atabalipa prisoner, midst the number of +60000. Indians his subiects, which were euer before that day accounted to +bee a warlike kind of people, which his great victorie it pleased God to +grant vnto him in the yeere of our Lord God 1533. he not hauing in his +company aboue the number of 210. Spaniards, whereof there were not past +threescore horsemen in all: after the taking of which prince Atabalipa, he +offered vnto Pyzarro for his ransome, to fill a great large hall full of +gold and siluer, and such golde and siluer vessels as they then vsed, euen +as high as a man might reach with his arme. And the sayd prince caused the +same hall to be marked round about at the sayd height, which ransome +Pyzarro granted to accept. And after when as this mighty prince had sent +to his vassals and subiects to bring in gold and siluer for the filling of +the hall, as aforesaid, as namely to the cities or townes of Quito, +Paciacama and Cusco, as also to the Calao of Lima, in which towne, as +their owne writers doe affirme, they found a large and faire house, all +slated and couered with gold: and when as the said hall was not yet a +quarter ful, a mutinie arose amongst the Spanyards, in which it was +commonly giuen out, that the said prince had politikely offered this great +ransome vnder pretence to raise a much more mightie power, whereby the +Spanyards should be taken, slaine and ouerthrowen: wherevpon they grew to +this resolution, to put the sayd prince to death, and to make partition of +the golde and siluer already brought in, which they presently put in +execution. And comming to make perfect Inuentorie of the same, as well for +the Emperour then king of Spaine, his fift part, as otherwise, there was +found to be already brought in into the sayd hall, the number of 132425. +pound weight of siluer, and in golde the number of 1828125. pezos, which +was a riches neuer before that nor since seene of any man together, of +which there did appertaine to the Emperour for his fift part of golde +365625. pezos, and for his fift part of, siluer 26485. pound waight, and +to euery horseman eight thousand pezos of gold, and 67. pound waight of +siluer. Euery souldier had 4550. pezos of gold and 280. pound waight of +siluer. Euery Captaine had some 30000. some 20000. pezos of gold and +siluer proportionally answerable to their degrees and calling, according +to the rate agreed vpon amongst them. + +Francis Pizarro as their generall, according to his decree and calling +proportionally, had more then any of the rest, ouer and besides the massie +table of gold which Atabalipa had in his Letter, which waighed 25000. +pezos of gold: neuer were there before that day souldiers so rich in so +small a time, and with so little danger And in this iourney for want of +yron, they did shoe their horses, some with gold, and some with siluer. +This is to be seene in the generall historie of the West Indies, where as +the doings of Pizarro, and the conquest of Peru is more at large set +forth. + +To this may I adde the great discoueries and conquests which the princes +of Portugall haue made round about the West, the South, and the East parts +of Africa, and also at Callicut and in the East Indies, and in America, at +Brasile and elsewhere in sundry Islands, in fortifying, peopling and +planting all along the sayd coastes and Islands, euer as they discouered: +which being lightly weyed and considered, doth minister iust cause of +yncouragement to our Countreymen, not to account it so hard and difficult +a thing for the subiects of this noble realme of England, to discouer, +people, plant and possesse the like goodly lands and rich countreys not +farre from vs, but neere adioyning land offring themselues vnto vs (as is +aforesayd) which haue neuer yet heretofore bene in the actuall possession +of any other Christian prince, then the princes of this Realme. All which +(as I thinke) should not a little animate and encourage vs to looke out +and aduenture abroad, vnderstanding what large Countreys and Islands the +Portugals with their small number haue within these few yeeres discouered, +peopled and planted, some part whereof I haue thought it not amisse, +briefly in particular to name both the Townes, Countreys, and Islands, so +neere as I could vpon the sudden call them to remembrance: for the rest I +doe referre the Reader to the histories, where more at large the same is +to be seene. First, they did winne and conquere from the princes of +Barbary the Island of Geisera and towne of Arzila, not past an 140. mile +distant from their Metropolitane and chiefe citie of Fesse: and after that +they wonne also from the said princes the townes of Tanger, Ceuta, +Mazigan, Azamor, and Azaffi, all alongst the Sea coasts. And in the yeere +of our Lord, 1455. Alouis de Cadomosta(5) a Gentleman Venetian, was hee +that first discouered for their vse Cape Verd, with the Islands adioyning, +of which he then peopled and planted those of Bonauista and Sant Iago +discouering also the riuer Senega, otherwise called Niger, and Cape Roxo +and Sierra Leone, and in few yeeres after they did discouer the coast of +Guinea, and there peopled and built the castle of Mina: then discouered +they further to the countreys of Melegettes, Benin, and Congo, with the +Islands of Principe, da Nabon, S. Matthewe, and S. Thomas vnder the +Equinoctiall line, which they peopled, and built in the said Island of S. +Thomas the hauen towne or port of Pauosan. After that, about the yeere of +our Lord, 1494. one Bartholomew Dias was sent forth, who was the first man +that discouered and doubled that great and large Cape called de Bon +Esperanze, and passing the currents that run vpon the said coast, on the +Southeast part of Africa, betweene the said maine land and the Island of +S. Laurence, otherwise called of the ancients, Madagascar, he discouered +to the harbor named the Riuer of the Infant. (M33) After that since the +yeere of our Lord God, 1497. and before the ful accomplishment of the +yeere of Christ, 1510. through the trauailes and discoueries of Vasques de +Gama,(6) Peter Aluares, Thomas Lopes, Andrew Corsale, Iohn de Empoli, +Peter Sintia, Sancho de Toar, and that noble and worthy gentleman Alonzo +de Albuquerque,(7) they did discouer, people, and plant at Ceffala, being +vpon the East side of Africa, in the twenty degrees of latitude of the +South Pole, and direct West from the Island of S. Laurence (at which port +of Ceffala, diuers doe affirme that king Salomon did fetch his gold) as +also vpon the said East side of Africa, they did afterward discouer +people, and plant at Mozambique, Quiola, Monbaza, and Melinde, two degrees +of Southerly latitude, and so vp to the Streight of Babell-Mandell at the +entring of the red sea, all vpon the East coast of Africa, from whence +they put off at the Cape Guarda Fu, and passed the great gulfe of Arabia +and the Indian Sea East to Sinus Persicus, and the Island of Ormus, and so +passing the large and great riuer Indus, where he hath his fall into the +maine Ocean, in 23. degrees and an halfe, vnder the tropike of Cancer, of +Septentrional latitude, they made their course againe directly towardes +the South, and began to discouer, people, and plant vpon the West side of +the hither India at Goa, Mangolar, Cananor, Calecut and Cochin, and the +Island of Zeilam.(8) + +And here I thinke good to remember to you, that after their planting vpon +this coast, their forces grewe so great that they were able to compel all +the Moores, the subiectes of the mightie Emperour of the Turkes to pay +tribute vnto them, euer as they passed the gulfe of Arabia, from the port +of Mecca in Arabia Foelix, where Mahomet lieth buried, or any of the other +portes of the sayd land, euer as they passed to and from the hauens of +Cochin, Calecut, and Cananor, and by their martiall maner of discipline +practised in those partes, the great and mightie prince the Sophie +Emperour of the Persians, and professed enemie to the Turke, came to the +knowledge and vse of the Caliuer shot, and to interlace and ioyne footemen +with his horsemen, sithence which time the Persians haue growen to that +strength and force, that they haue giuen many mighty and great ouerthrowes +to the Turke, to the great quiet of all Christendome. + +(M34) And from the Island of Zeilam aforesayd they all discouered more +East in passing the gulfe of Bengala, and so passed the notable and famous +riuer of Ganges, where hee hath his fall into the maine Ocean, vnder the +tropike of Cancer, and to the Cape of Malaca, and vnto the great and large +Islands of Sumatra, Iaua maior, Iaua minor, Mindanao, Palobane, Celebes, +Gilolo, Tidore, Mathin, Borneo, Machian, Terenate, and all other the +Islands of Molucques and Spiceries, and so East alongst the coasts of +Cathaia, to the portes of China, Zaiton and Quinsay, and to the Island of +Zipango and Iapan, situate in the East, in 37. degrees of Septentrionall +latitude and in 195. of longitude. These are their noble and worthie +discoueries. Here also is not to bee forgotten, that in the yeere of our +Lord. 1501, that famous and worthy gentleman Americus Vespucius did +discouer, people, and plant to their vse the holdes and forts which they +haue in Brasill, of whom (he but being a priuate gentleman) the whole +countrey or firme land of the West Indies, is commonly called and knowen +by the name of America. + +I doe greatly doubt least I seeme ouer tedious in the recitall of the +particular discoueries and Conquests of the East and West Indies, wherein +I was the more bold to vrge the patience of the Reader, to the end it +might most manifestly and at large appeare, to all such as are not +acquainted with the histories, how the king of Portugall, whose Countrey +for popularity and number of people, is scarce comparable to some three +shires of England, and the king of Spaine likewise, whose natural Countrey +doth not greatly abound with people, both which princes by means of their +discoueries within lesse then 90. yeeres past, haue as it appeareth both +mightily and marueilously enlarged their territories and dominions through +their owne industrie by the assistance of the omnipotent, whose aid we +shall not need to doubt, seeing the cause and quarrell which we take in +hand tendeth to his honour and glory, by the enlargement of the Christian +faith. + +To conclude, since by Christian dutie we stand bound chiefly to further +all such acts as do tend to the encreasing the true flock of Christ by +reducing into the right way those lost sheepe which are yet astray: And +that we shall therein follow the example of our right vertuous +predecessors of renowned memorie, and leaue vnto our posteritie a diuine +memoriall of so godly an enterprise: Let vs I say for the considerations +alledged, enter into iudgement with our selues, whether this action may +belong to vs or no, the rather for that this voyage through the mighty +assistance of the omnipotent God, shall take our desired effect (whereof +there is no iust cause of doubt.) Then shal her Maiesties dominions be +enlarged, her highnesse ancient titles iustly confirmed, all odious +idlenesse from this our Realme vtterly banished, diuers decayed townes +repaired, and many poor and needy persons relieued, and estates of such as +now liue in want shail be embettered, the ignorant and barbarous idolaters +taught to know Christ, the innocent defended from their bloodie tyrannical +neighbours, the diabolicall custome of sacrificing humane creatures +abolished. + +All which (no man doubteth) are things gratefull in the sight of our +Sauiour Christ, and tending to the honour and glory of the Trinitie. Bee +of good cheere therefore, for he that cannot erre hath sayd: That before +the ende of the world, his word shall bee preached to all nations. Which +good work I trust is reserued for our nation to accomplish in these parts: +Wherefore my deere countreymen, be not dismayed: for the power of God is +nothing diminished, nor the loue that he hath to the preaching and +planting of the Gospel any whit abated. Shall wee then doubt he will be +lesse ready most mightily and miraculously to assist our nation in this +quarell, which is chiefly and principally vndertaken for the enlargement +of the Christian faith abroad, and the banishment of idlenes at home, then +he was to Columbus, Vasques, Nunnes, Hernando Cortes, and Francis Pizarro +in the West: and Vasques de Gama, Peter Aluares, et Alonso de Albuquerque +in the East: Let vs therefore with cheerefull minds and couragious hearts, +giue the attempt, and leaue the sequell to Almightie God: for if he be on +our part, what forceth it who bee against vs: Thus leauing the correction +and reformation vnto the gentle Reader, whatsoeuer is in this treatise too +much or too little, otherwise vnperfect, I take leaue and so end. + + + + +II. A letter of Sir Francis Walsingham to M. Richard Hakluyt then of +Christchurch in Oxford, incouraging him in the study of Cosmographie, and +of furthering new discoueries, &c. + + +I vnderstand aswel by a letter I long since receiued from the Maior of +Bristoll, as by conference with Sir Iohn Pekham, that you haue endeuoured, +and giuen much light for the discouery of the Westerne partes yet +vnknowen: as your studie in those things is very commendable, so I thanke +you much for the same; wishing you do continue, your trauell in these and +like matters, which are like to turne not only to your owne good in +priuate, but to the publike benefice of this Realme. And so I bid you +farewell. From the Court the 11. of March. 1582. + +Your louing Friend, +FRANCIS WALSINGHAM. + + + + +III. A letter of Sir Francis Walsingham to Master Thomas Aldworth +merchant, and at that time Maior of the Citie of Bristoll, concerning +their aduenture in the Westerne discouerie. + + +After my heartie commendations, I haue for certaine causes deferred the +answere of your letter of Nouember last till now, which I hope commeth all +in good time. Your good inclination to the Westerne discouerie I cannot +but much commend. And for that sir Humfrey Gilbert, as you haue heard long +since, hath bene preparing into those parts being readie to imbarke within +these 10. dayes, who needeth some further supply of shipping then yet he +hath, I am of opinion that you shall do well if the ship or 2. barkes you +write of, be put in a readinesse to goe alongst with with him, or so soone +after as you may. I hope this trauell wil prooue profitable to the +Aduenturers and generally beneficiall to the whole realme: herein I pray +you conferre with these bearers M. Richard Hackluyt, and M. Thomas +Steuenton, to whome I referre you: And so bid you heertily farewell. +Richmond the 11. of March. 1582. + +Your louing Friend, +FRANCIS WALSINGHAM. + + + + +IV. A letter written from M. Thomas Aldworth merchant and Maior of the +Citie of Bristoll, to the right honourable Sir Francis Walsingham +principall Secretary to her Maiestie, concerning a Westerne voyage +intended for the discouery of the coast of America, lying to the Southwest +of Cape Briton. + + +Right honourable, vpon the receit of your letters directed vnto me and +deliuered by the bearers hereof M. Richard Hakluyt and M. Steuenton, +bearing the date the 11. of March, I presently conferred with my friends +in priuate, whom I know most affectionate to this most godly enterprise, +especially with M. William Salterne deputie of our company of merchants: +whereupon my selfe being as then sicke, with as conuenient speede as he +could, hee caused an assembly of the merchants to be gathered: where after +dutifull mention of your honourable disposition for the benefite of this +citie, he by my appointment caused your letters being directed vnto me +priuately, to be read in publike, and after some good light giuen by M. +Hakluyt vnto them that were ignorant of the Countrey and enterprise, and +were desirous to be resolued the motion grew generally so well to be +liked, that there was eftsoones set downe by mens owne hands then present, +and apparently knowen by their own speach, and very willing offer, the +summe of 1000. markes and vpward: which summe if it should not suffice, we +doubt not but otherwise to furnish out for this Westerne discouery, a ship +of threescore, and a barke of 40. tunne, to bee left in the countrey vnder +the direction and gouernment of your sonne in law M. Carlile, of whom we +haue heard much good, if it shall stand with your honors good liking and +his acceptation. In one of which barks we are also willing to haue M. +Steuenton your honours messenger, and one well knowen to vs as captaine. +And here in humble maner, desiring your honour to vouchsafe vs of your +further direction by a generall letter to my selfe, my brethren, and the +rest of the merchants of this city, at your honors best and most +conuenient leisure, because we meane not to deferre the finall proceeding +in this voyage, any further then to the end of April next comming, I +cease, beseeching God long to blesse and prosper your honourable estate. +Bristol. March 27. 1583. + + + + +V. A briefe and summary discourse vpon the intended voyage to the +hithermost parts of America: written by Captaine Carlile in April, 1583. +for the better inducement to satisfie such Merchants of the Moscouian +companie and others, as in disbursing their money towards the furniture of +the present charge, doe demand forthwith a present returne of gaine, +albeit their said particular disbursements are required but in very +slender summes, the highest being 25. li. the second at 12. li. 10. s. and +the lowest at 6. pound fiue shilling. + + +When the Goldsmith desireth to finde the certaine goodnesse of a piece of +golde, which is newly offered vnto him, he presently bringeth the same to +the touchstone, where by comparing the shewe or touch of this new piece +with the touch or shew of that which he knoweth of old, he forthwith is +able to iudge what the value is of that, which is newly offered vnto him. +After the example whereof I haue thought it good to make some briefe +repetition of the particular estate of many other forren voyages and +trades already frequented and knowen vnto vs, whereby we may be the better +able to conceiue and iudge what certaine likelihood of good there is to be +expected in the voyage, which is presently recommended vnto your knowledge +and resolution. + +And first to lay downe that of Moscouia, whose beginning is yet in the +remembrance of many: It is well knowen, that what by the charges of the +first discouery, and by the great gifts bestowed on the Emperour and his +Nobilitie, togither with the leud dealing of some of their seruants, who +thought themselues safe enough from orderly punishment, it cost the +company aboue fourescore thousand pounds, before it could be brought to +any profitable reckoning. And now that after so long a patience and so +great a burthen of expences, the same began to frame to some good course +and commoditie: It falleth to very ticklish termes, and to as slender +likelihood of any further goodnesse, as any other trade that may be named. + +For first the estate of those Countreys and the Emperours dealings, are +things more fickle then are by euery body vnderstood. + +Next, the Dutchmen are there so crept in as they daily augment their trade +thither, which may well confirme that vncertainty of the Emperours +disposition to keepe promise with our nation. + +Thirdly, the qualitie of the voyage, such as may not be performed but once +the yeere. + +Fourthly, the charges of all Ambassadours betweene that Prince and her +Maiesty, are alwayes borne by the merchants stocke. + +And lastly, the danger of the king of Denmarke, who besides that presently +he is like to enforce a tribute on vs, hath likewise an aduantage vpon the +ships in their voyage, either homewards or outwards whensoeuer he listeth +to take the opportunitie. + +The badde dealings of the Easterlings are sufficiently knowen to be such +towards our merchants of that trade, as they doe not onely offer them many +iniuries ouerlong to bee written, but doe seeke all the meanes they can, +to depriue them wholy of their occupying that way: and to the same purpose +haue of late cleane debarred them their accustomed and ancient priuiledges +in all their great townes. + +The traffique into Turkie, besides that by some it is thought a hard point +to haue so much familiaritie with the professed and obstinate enemie of +Christ: It is likewise a voyage which can not be made but at the deuotion, +and as it were in the danger of many states, who for sundry respects are +apt to quarell with vs vpon sudden occasions, and the presents to be giuen +away in Turkie this yeere, cost little lesse then two thousand pounds. + +As for the trades into all the parts of Italie, it may easily be +considered by euery one of iudgement, that the same stand in the like +termes touching the passages, as that of Turkie, and that many times our +shippes being taken in the way by the Gallies of Alger, our poore Mariners +after the losse of their goods and trauell, are set at such excessiue +ransoms before they can bee freed of their slauerie, as for the most part +they are no way able to discharge. As for example, at this instant there +are some prisoners, poore ordinarie Mariners, for whose releasing there +must be payed two hundred Duckets the man, for some three hundred, yea, +foure or fiue hundred Duckets the man for some of them. And how enuiously +the Venetians doe already oppose themselues against our frequenting into +their parts, may appeare by the late customs which they haue imposed as +well vpon our English merchandize which we bring them, as also vpon such +their merchandize which we fetch from them. + +The trade into Barbarie groweth likewise to worse termes then before +times, and when it was at the best, our merchants haue bene in danger of +all their goods they had there, whensoever it happened the king to die. +For vntill a new were chosen, the libertie of all disordered persons is +such, as they spoile and wrong whom they list, without any redresse at +all. + +(M35) Touching Spaine and Portugall, with whom wee haue very great trade, +and much the greater, by meanes of their venting a good part of our wares +in their Indies, as also of the prouision they haue from the same, +wherewith are made many of our returnes from them againe: It falleth out +that twise the yeere ordinarily we send our Fleetes into those parts: So +that whensoeuer the king of Spaine listeth to take the opportunitie, hee +may at these seasons depriue vs not onely of a great number of our very +good ships, but also of our honestest and ablest sort of Mariners that are +to bee found in our whole Realme againe, which is a matter of no small +consequence: for it is to bee noted, that when hee shall take a quarrell +in hand, though it be but his owne particularly, yet hath he the meanes to +put in hazard as well those our shippes which are in his owne Countreys of +Spaine and Portugall, as also all others which shall bee bound to any the +partes of all Italie or of Turkie either. And further whosoeuer hee bee +that is but meanely affected in Religion, as of necessitie becommeth euery +ordinarie man and good Christian to be, cannot but be agrieued in his +heart to consider, that his children and seruants whom hee desireth to +haue well brought vp, are in these trades of Spaine and Portugall, and all +Italie, forced to denie their owne profession, and to acquaint themselues +with that which the Parents and Masters doe vtterly deny and refuse, yea +which many of them doe in their owne hearts abhorre as a detestable and +most wicked doctrine. + +But who shall looke into the qualitie of this voyage, being directed to +the latitude of fortie degrees or thereaboutes, of that hithermost part of +America, shal find it hath as many points of good moment belonging vnto +it, as may almost be wished for. + +(M36) 1 As first it is to be vnderstood, that it is not any long course, +for it may be perfourmed too and fro in foure moneths after the first +discouerie thereof. + +2 Secondly, that one wind sufficeth to make the passage, whereas most of +your other voyages of like length, are subiect to 3. or 4. winds. + +3 Thirdly, that it is to be perfourmed at all times of the yeere. + +4 Fourthly, that the passage is vpon the high sea, wherby you are not +bound to the knowledge of dangers, on any other coast, more then of that +Countrey, and of ours here at home. + +5 Fiftly, that those parts of England and Ireland, which lie aptest for +the proceeding outward or homeward vpon this voyage. are very well stored +of goodly harbours. + +6 Sixtly, that it is to bee accounted of no danger at all as touching the +power of any foreine prince or state, when it is compared with any the +best of all other voyages before recited. + +7 And to the godly minded, it hath this comfortable commoditie, that in +this trade their Factours, bee they their seruants or children, shall haue +no instruction or confessions of Idolatrous Religion enforced vpon them, +but contrarily shall be at their free libertie of conscience, and shall +find the same Religion exercised, which is most agreeable vnto their +Parents and Masters. + +As for the merchandising, which is the matter especially looked for, +albeit that for the present we are not certainely able to promise any such +like quantitie, as is now at the best time of the Moscouian trade brought +from thence: So likewise is there not demanded any such proportion of +daily expences, as was at the first, and as yet is consumed in that of +Moscouia and other. + +(M37) But when this of America shall haue bene haunted and practised +thirtie yeeres to an ende as the other hath bene, I doubt not by Gods +grace, that for the tenne shippes that are now commonly employed once the +yeere into Moscouia, there shall in this voyage twise tenne be imployed +well, twise the yeere at the least. And if for the present there doe fall +out nothing els to bee found then the bare Fishing, yet doubt I not after +the first yeeres planting but by that matter only to serue halfe a dozen +of your best sorts of ships, although my supply of people doe not follow +me so substantially, as in all reason may be well looked for. + +(M38) But when it is asked what may be hoped from thence after some +yeeres, it is first to be considered, that this situation in fourtie +degrees, shall bee very apt to gather the commodities either of those +parts which stand to the Southward of it, as also of those which are to +the Northward. + +In the Northerlie may be expected not onely an especiall good fishing for +Salmon, Codde, and Whales, but also any other such commodities, as the +Easterne Countreys doe yeeld vs now: as Pitch, Tarre, Hempe, and thereof +cordage, Masts, Losshe hides, rich Furres, and other such like without +being in any son beholding to a king of Denmarke, or other prince or state +that shall be in such sort able to command our shippes at their pleasure, +as those doe at this day, by meanes of their strait passages and strong +shipping. + +As for those partes which lie West and to the Southwardes, it may well bee +hoped they will yeeld Wines with a small helpe, since the grapes doe growe +there of themselues alreadie very faire and in great abundance. Oliues +being once planted, will yeelde the like Oyle as Spaine, Prouince and +Italie. The Countrey people being made to know, that for Waxe and honie, +we will giue them such trifling things as they desired of vs, and shewing +them once the means how to prouide the same, the labour thereof being so +light, no doubt but in short time they will earnestly care to haue the +same in good quantitie for vs. (M39) Besides, what great likelihoode there +is of good meanes to make Salt, which may serue for the fishing of those +partes, may well appeare vnto them, who can iudge the qualitie of such +places as are required to make the same in. + +Thus much for the beginning, because they may bee had with an easie kinde +of trauell: but when it may haue pleased God to establish our people there +any such time as they may haue planted amongst them in sundry partes of +the Countrey, and that by gentle and familiar treating them, they bee made +to see what is better for them then they doe as yet vnderstand of, and +that in so many sorts of occasions as were infinite to be set downe: It is +to bee assuredly hoped, that they will daily by little and little forsake +their barbarous and sauage liuing, and growe to such order and ciuilitie +with vs, as there may be well expected from thence no lesse quantitie and +diuersitie of merchandize then is now had out of Dutchland, Italie, France +or Spaine. And as the bordering neighbours are commonly the aptest to fall +out with vs, so these parts being somewhat remote, are the liker to take, +or giue lesse occasion of disquiet. But when it is considered that they +are our own kindred, and esteemed our own countrey nation which haue the +government, meaning by those who shall be there planted, who can looke for +any other then the dealing of most louing and most assured friends? + +There are further to be considered these two poynts of good importance, +concerning the matter of trade. The one is, that by the good prospering of +this action, there must of necessitie fall but a very liberall vtterance +of our English Clothes into a maine Country, described to bee bigger then +all Europe, the larger part whereof bending to the Northward, shall haue +wonderfull great vse of her sayde English Clothes, after they shall come +once to knowe the commoditie thereof. The like will bee also of many other +things, ouer many to bee reckoned, which are made here by our Artificers +and labouring people, and of necessitie must bee prouided from hence. + +The other is, if there be any possible meanes to finde a sea passage or +other fresh water course, which may serue in some reasonable and +conuenient sort, to transport our Merchandize into the East Indian Sea, +through any of these Northerly partes of America, it shall be soonest and +most assuredly perfourmed by these who shall inhabite and first grow into +familiaritie with the Inland people. + +What minerall matter may fall out to bee found, is a thing left in +suspence, vntill some better knowledge, because there be many men, who +hauing long since expected some profits herein, vpon the great promises +that haue bene made them, and being as yet in no point satisfied, doe +therevpon conceiue that they be but wordes purposely cast out for the +inducing of men to bee the more ready and willing to furnish their money +towards the charge of the first discouerie. + +But nowe to answere some others who begin with an other objection, saying: +That it is not for the Marchants purse to continue the charges of +transporting and planting: and that once these hundred men which are nowe +to bee planted will cost foure thousand pound: It is then to bee thought, +that the charge of a farre greater number, will bee also a farre greater +summe of money. + +Whereunto I answere, that in all attempts vnknowen, especially such a one +as this is, wherewith wee are presently in hand, the first charges are +commonly aduentured in more desperate kinde, then those that followe vpon +some better knowledge: and therewith it falleth out, that whereas one +aduentureth in the first enterprise, an hundred for that one will of +themselues bee willing and desirous to aduenture in the next, if there bee +neuer so little more appearance, that the intended matter is by some +knowledge of our owne, found true in some poynts of our first presumption. + +The examples are many, and may easily bee remembred by those who be +Merchants, euen in their ordinarie and dayly trades, as well as in +extraordinarie attempts, which of late yeeres haue fallen into those +termes of some likelyhood, as is aforesayde.(9) So then no doubt, but when +certaine reports shall bee brought by them who directly came from thence, +that such a Countrey and people they haue themselues seene, as is by vs +spoken of, but that then there will come forwarde a greater number of +those, who haue nowe neither heard any thing of the matter, as also of +others, who presently make such friuolous scruple, and will not otherwise +be satisfied, then by the report of Saint Thomas. I speake not this by the +Marchants whom for their fredoms of trade I would not haue pressed to any +further charge then this first preparation, but rather as such as haue +great affection to hazard the changing of their estates, and would be well +content to goe in the voyage if they might onely be assured that there is +such a Countrey, and that their money should not be wasted to nothing in +the preparations. + +The right examination of this point must bee the contrary sequell of the +common Prouerbe that is vsed, Nothing venture, nothing haue: so on the +other side by venturing, many great good profites are found out, to the +wonderfull benefite of Common weale, and to those especially in priuate, +who take on them the hazard of their life and trauell, or substance in the +first attempts: and therefore I would wish that they, who (God be thanked) +are well able to spare that which is required of each one towardes the +vndertaking of this aduenture, be well content and willing to imploy the +same, since the sequell in good and substantiall reasons doth promise, not +onely a great commoditie in particular to the Marchant, who shall here at +home exercise the trade of Marchandise: but also to an infinite number of +other, who presently liue in poore estate, and may by taking the +opportunitie of this discouerie, alter the same to a far better degree. +Wherefore to make some conclusion vpon this point of the Marchants +misdoubt, who suspecteth lest this first disbursement without returne of +present gaine, should not be all his charge, but that afterwards he might +yet further be vrged to continue the like again, as hath happened in the +discouery of the Moscouian trade: It may suffice to consider, that this is +not an action which concerneth onely the Marchants particularly, but a +great deale more the generall sort of people throughout all England: And +that when such relation shall be returned, as that it may bee found a +matter worthy the following, the whole generalitie will not refuse to +contribute towards the furtherance thereof, rather then it should sinke, +for want of any reasonable supply. + +But as it is a very little time, since I haue beene throughly resolued to +trie my fortune in the matter, so it is more then time the preparation +were in hand already, and therefore no fit time now to make any number of +ignorant men to vnderstand with reason the circumstance that belongeth to +a matter of so great consideration and importance. + +To those who haue any forward mindes in well doing to the generalitie of +mankind, I say thus much more, that Christian charitie doth as greatly +perswade the furtherance of this action, as any other that may be layed +before vs, in as much as thereby wee shall not onely doe a most excellent +worke, in respect of reducing the sauage people to Christianitie and +ciuilitie, but also in respect of our poore sorte of people, which are +very many amongst vs, liuing altogether vnprofitable, and often times to +the great disquiet of the better sort. For who knoweth not, how by the +long peace, happie health, and blessed plentifulnesse, wherewith God hath +endued this Realme, that the people is so mightily encreased, as a great +number being brought vp, during their youth in their parents houses, +without any instruction how to get their liuings after their parents +decease, are driuen to some necessitie, whereby very often for want of +better education they fall into such disorders, and so the good sort of +people, as I sayde before, are by them ordinarily troubled, and themselues +led on to one shamefull ende or other, whereas if there might bee found +some such kinde of imployment as this would be, no doubt but a greater +part of them would be withheld from falling into such vile deedes: and +insteade thereof, prooue greatly seruiceable in those affaires, where they +might be so imployed. + +(M40) This I speake of mine owne experience, hauing seene diuers come ouer +to the warres of the lowe Countreys during my residence in the same, who +here had bene very euill and idle liuers, and by some little continuance +with vs, haue growen to be very industrious in their facultie, which I can +assure you, was a more painefull maner of liuing then in this action is +like to fall out, and withall to a purpose of farre lesse value, in +respect of their particular recompence, then with an assured kind of good +hope is looked for in this. + +Thus you see in euery point that may bee wished for in a good action and +voyage, there is matter and reason enough to satisfie the well disposed. +But nowe to growe somewhat neerer the quicke, and to shewe you some +greater appearance, then hath bene yet spoken of touching the trade which +is the onely subiect wherewith I doe meane to intermeddle at this time, +because my addresse hereby is chiefly to men of such like facultie: you +may vnderstande by that which followeth, the circumstance of a little +discourse, which doeth concerne these matters, very directly. + +In the yeere 1534. Iames Carthier, of S. Malo made his first discouerie of +those partes of America, which lie to the Westwardes, and as it were on +the backside of Newfoundland. In which voyage his principall intention was +to seeke out the passage, which hee presumes might haue bene found out +into the East Indian Sea, otherwise called the passage to Cathaya, but +this yeere he went no higher then the Island of the Assumption in the +great bay of S. Laurence, and so returned backe into France. + +The next yeere following hee went with greater prouision into the Grand +bay againe, where he keping the Northerly shoare, ran vp the great Riuer +that comes downe from Canada and other places, vntill at last with his +small pinnesses, (hauing left his great shipping by the way) be arriued at +Hochelaga towne, being three hundreth leagues within the entrance of the +Grand bay. In which trauaile he had spent so much of the yeere, that it +was nowe the moneth of October, and therefore thought it conuenient for +the better enforming himselfe at large in this discouerie, to winter it +out in those partes, which he did at a place called by himselfe Holy +Crosse. This winter fell out to bee a very long and hard winter, as many +times the like happeneth with vs in these partes, and the sauage people, +who for the most part make but a slender kinde of prouision, euen as it +were from hande to mouth, fell into some scarcitie of victuals; yet did +they not refuse to serue the Frenchmen, with any thing they had all the +winter long, albeit at somewhat higher prices towardes the ende when the +neede was most, as with our selues the like happeneth at such times. + +But when the French had their wants serued all the yeere and that as yet +they sawe not any appearance of their intended matter, which was the +discouerie of the passage, and yet imagining by the signes, wherewith the +willing people endeuoured to declare their knowledge in that poynt, that +some good matter might bee had from them, if they might haue beene well +vnderstoode, they resolued with themselues to take some of the +sufficientest men of that countrey home into France, and there to keepe +them so long, as that hauing once atchieued the French tongue, they might +declare more substantially their minde, and knowledge in the sayde +passage, concluding this to be the meane of least charge, of least +trauaile, and of least hazard. + +And when they came to bethinke themselues, who might bee meetest for it, +they determined to take the King, as the person who might bee best +infourmed of such partes as were somewhat remote from his owne Countrey, +as also that for the respect of him, the people would bee alwayes readie, +and content to doe them any further seruice, when it should happen them to +returne thither againe about the discouerie. + +Thus the poore king of the Countrey, with two or three others of his +chiefe companions comming aboorde the French shippes, being required +thither to a banquet, was traiterously caryed away into France, where hee +liued foure yeeres, and then dyed a Christian there, as Theuet the French +Kings Cosmographer doeth make mention. (M41) This outrage and iniurious +dealing did put the whole Countrey people into such dislike with the +French, as neuer since they would admit any conuersation or familiaritie +with them, vntill of late yeeres, the olde matter beginning to grow out of +minde, and being the rather drawen on by gifts of many trifling things, +which were of great value with them, they are as (I sayde) within these +two or three yeeres content againe to admit a traffique, which two yeeres +since was begunne with a small barke of thirtie tunnes, whose returne was +found so profitable, as the next yeere following, being the last yeere, by +those Marchants, who meant to haue kept the trade secret vnto themselves, +from any others of their owne Countrey men, there was hired a shippe of +fourescore tunnes out of the Isle of Iersey, but not any one Mariner of +that place, sauing a shipboy. This shippe made her returne in such sorte, +as that this yeere they haue multiplyed three shippes, to wit, one of nine +score tunnes, another of an hundreth tunnes, and a third of fourescore +tunnes: which report is giuen by very substantiall and honest men of +Plimmouth, who sawe the sayd shippes in readinesse to depart on their +voyage, and were aboord of some of them. + +Here is at this instant in the towne a man of Guernsey, Lewis de Vike, who +reporteth to haue credibly heard, that by this last yeeres voyage the +Frenchmen got foureteene or fifteene hundreth for euery one hundreth: But +how soeuer it be, it carrieth good likelyhood of some notable profite, in +asmuch as they doe so greatly, and thus suddenly encrease the burthen and +number of their ships this present yeere. + +(M42) Nowe if in so little as two yeeres time this voyage of the Northerne +partes bee growen to such good passe as hath beene declared vnto you: it +is worth the thinking on to consider what may be hoped for from the +Southerne part, which in all reason may promise a great deale more. And +so, as one who was neuer touched with any indirect meaning, I presume to +wish and perswade you to some better taking of this matter to heart, as a +thing which I do verely thinke will turne to your greater and more assured +commodity, then you receiue by any other voyage, as yet frequented of so +short and safe a course as this hath: dealing herein no otherwise with you +for your seuerall small summes, then I doe with myselfe, both for more of +mine owne, then is required of any one of you: besides the hazard and +trauaile of my person, and the totall imployment of my poore credit, which +(I thanke God) hath hitherto passed cleare and vnspotted in matters of +greater importance and difficultie, then is like to fall out in this +matter betweene you and me. + + + + +VI. Articles set downe by the Committies appointed in the behalfe of the +Companie of Moscouian Marchants, to conferre with M. Carlile, vpon his +intended discouerie and attempt into the hithermost parts of America. + + +The names of the Committies. + + Master Alderman Hart. + Master Alderman Spencer. + Master Hoddesden. + Master William Burrough. + Master Slany. + Master Towerson. + Master Staper. + Master Iohn Castelin. + Master Leake. + +First the Committies are well perswaded, that the Countrey whereunto this +action is intended, is very fruitfull, inhabited with sauage people of a +milde and tractable disposition. And that of all other places which are +vnfrequented at this day, it is the onely most fit and most commodious for +vs to intermeddle withall. + +The conuenientest manner of attempting this enterprise is thought to bee +thus: That there should be one hundreth men conueyed thither to remaine +there one whole yeere: who with friendly intreatie of the people, may +enter into better knowledge of the particular estate of the Countrey, and +thereby gather what commoditie may be hereafter, or presently looked for. + +(M43) The charge to transport these hundreth men, to victuall them, and to +furnish them of munition and other needefull things, will not be lesse +then foure thousand poundes: whereof hath bene very readily offered by the +Citie of Bristoll one thousand poundes, the residue being three thousande +poundes, remaineth to bee furnished by this Citie of London, or any others +who will aduenture their money in this first preparation. + +The Committies thinke it conuenient that a Priuilege should be procured by +Master Carlile from her Maiesty, by vertue whereof these conditions and +Articles following may be effectually prouided for. + +First, that they who shall disbursse their money for the first preparation +shall be named Aduenturers, and shall haue the one halfe of all such +landes, territories, townes, mines of gold and siluer, and other metals +whatsoeuer, as shall bee found, gotten, obtained, as conquered by this +discouery: yeelding to her Maiestie the fift part of all such gold and +siluer, as shall happen to be had out of any mines that so shall be found. + +That those parties which doe employ themselues personally in the present +discouerie, shall be named Enterprisers, and shall haue the other halfe, +of all the Lands, Territories, Townes, Mines of Gold and Siluer and other +mettals, yeelding to her Maiestie the fift part of the Gold and Siluer as +the Aduenturers do: The same to bee distributed by the Generall, with the +consent of the greatest part of twelue discreet persons to bee chosen out +of the whole number of the Enterprisers. + +Also, that all trade of Merchandise which shall be vsed to and from those +partes, which by this discouerie shall bee found out, shall apperteine +onely to the Aduenturers which first shall disbursse their money for this +discouery, which prohibition to all other her Maiesties subiects, and +other Marchants to deale in the sayd parts, without the consent of the +first Aduenturers, vpon losse of shippe and goods, and punishment of their +persons, that so shall aduenture in trade of merchandise: or otherwise by +imprisonment at the Companies pleasure. + +That no person shall hereafter aduenture in this discouerie as Aduenturers +for the profits mentioned in the first Articles, but such onely as doe +disbursse their money in the first preparation: and they shall not +aduenture hereafter any greater summe, then ratably according to their +proportion of this their first aduenture. + +Also, the profite which by this discouerie shall be attained vnto, either +by lande which may bee conquered, or otherwise gotten: as also such +profite which by this discouerie shall bee obtained by mines, or otherwise +gotten, that eche one shall haue his part rate and rate, like, according +to the proportion of their first aduenture, and not otherwise. + +The Aduenturers in this first preparation shall at their owne free will +and libertie, choose whether they will supply hereafter any further charge +or not: if there doe fall out any such occasion to require the same. And +yet withall shall for euer holde to them the freedome of the trade which +shall growe in any of these partes: notwithstanding their sayd refusall to +beare any further charge. + +That in the Patent which is to bee obteined, be graunted, that all her +Maiesties subiects may transport themselues thither that shall be +contented to goe. And that the Patentee or his assignes may shippe thither +from time to time, so many and such persons, men, women, and children, as +they shall thinke meete. And the same persons to inhabite or remaine there +at their pleasure, any lawe to the contrary notwithstanding, with expresse +prohibition, as is mentioned in the third article, against all others, +which shall go thither without the licence of the patentee or his assignes +first obteined. + +That it shall not be lawful for any of her Maiesties subiects, or any +other to inhabite or traffique within one hundred leagues any way of the +place, where the Generall haue setled his chiefest being or residence. + + + + +VII. A relation of the first voyage and discouerie of the Isle Ramea, made +for Monsieur de La Court Pre Ravillon and Grand Pre, with the ship called +the Bonauenture, to kill and make Traine oyle of the beasts called the +Morses with great teeth, which we haue perfourmed by Gods helpe this yeere +1591. + + +(M44) For the performance of our said voyage, we departed from S. Malo +with the fleete that went for Canada, and kept companie with the ships +called The Soudil and the Charles halfe the way, and then lost them, a +violent wind arising at Northwest, which separated vs. + +After which we had faire wether, and came to the coast of Cape Rase, and +had no further knowledge thereof, because the winde was at the Southwest +but a scarce gale: and we came to the sounding Southwest of the Isles of +S. Peter about 10. leagues, where we found 20. fathoms water, and we +sayled Northwest one quarter of the North, and came within 12. leagues of +Cape de Rey. + +The next day being the 6. of May 1591. we were come to Cape de Rey, and +saw a ship Southwest of vs, and stayed there that night. + +The next day being the seuenth of the sayd moneth, we came to the Isles of +Aponas, where we put foorth our boat, because we had not past 8. leagues +to our hauen, which we kenned very clearly, although the coasts lay very +low: and because the night approched, and the wind grew very high, we +sought not to seeke our port, because it is very hard to find it when the +wind is lofty, because of the shoalds that are about it. And we thought to +keepe our course vntill the next morning between the Isle of Biton and the +Isle of Aponas. But there arose so great a tempest at the Southwest, that +without the helpe of God we had bene in great danger among these Isles. +And we trauersed vp and downe eleuen dayes, making our prayers vnto God to +ende the tempest and to send vs faire weather, that we might obteine our +hauen: which of his goodnesse he gaue vs. The last of May we ranged the +Isle Ramea on the Northnorthwest side, vnto the contrary part of the land, +where it trendeth to the Southsoutheast: and seeing no land on the West +side, wee ranged the sayd land to the East one quarter to the North at the +least 15. leagues, and being from the shore some eight leagues, we found +15 fathoms water, and passed betweene the Isle of Duoron and the Isle of +Ramea, where goeth a chanel of 3. leagues bredth; in the midest whereof +you shall haue 7. 8. and 9. fathoms water. And the lowe poynt of the Isle +Ramea, and the Isle Duoron lie Northnortheast, and Southsouthwest. And +take heede you come not neere the low point of the Isle Ramea by a great +league, for I haue sounded it at 3. fathoms water. The Isle is marked. And +the harbour of the Isle Ramea lyeth Northeast and Southwest, one quarter +to the East and West. And if you would enter the sayd harbour, keepe you a +league off the shoare: for often times there is great danger. + +(M45) And that you may know the sayd hauen, to the Eastnortheast of the +sayde Isle there are high lands appearing to them that are without on all +sides like a number of Islands, but in very deede they are all firme land: +and if you come on the South and Southwest side, you shall see a hill +diuided into 3. parts, which I called The three hillockes, which is right +within the hauen. (M46) And for another better marke of the sayd harbour, +you shall see an Isle like vnto a Floure de lice, distant from the sayd +hauen 6. leagues at the least: and this Isle and the sayd hauen lie +Northeast and Southwest, a quarter to the North and South. And on the sayd +Isle there is good pebble (M47) stone to drie fish vpon: But to the West +thereof there is a very faire countrey: and there is a banke of sande, +which runneth the length of a cable, hauing not past one fathom water vpon +it. From the sayd Isle along the firme land the coast lyeth East and West, +and you shall see as it were a great forrest running eastward: and the +Easterne Cape is called Cape du Chapt, and is great and red toward the +Sea. And betweene the sayd lands you shall see as it were a small Island, +but it ioyneth to the firme land on the Southwest part: and there is good +shingle to drie fish on. (M48) And you must coast the shore with boates +and not with ships, by reason of the shallowes of the sayd coast. For I +haue seene without Cape du Chapt in faire weather the ground in two +fathoms water, neere a league and an halfe from shore, and I iudged by +reason of the highnesse of the land, that there had bene aboue thirtie +fathoms water, which was nothing so: and I haue sounded comming neere the +shore, in more or lesse depth. (M49) The coast stretcheth three leagues to +the West from Lisle Blanche or the white Isle, vnto the entrance of a +riuer, where we slewe and killed to the number of fifteene hundred Morses +or Sea oxen, accounting small and great, where at full sea you may come on +shoare with boates, and within are two or three fathoms water. From thence +the coast trendeth foure leagues to the West 1/4 to the Northwest vnto the +Isle Hupp, which is twentie leagues in circuit, and is like the edge of a +knife: vpon it there is neither wood nor grasse: there are Morses vpon it, +but they bee hard to be taken. From thence the coast trendeth to the +Northwest and Northnorthwest: which is all that I haue seene, to wit, the +two sides and one ende of the Isle. And if I had had as good lucke as my +Masters, when I was on the Northwest side with my shippe, I would haue +aduentured to haue sayled South-southeast, to haue discouered the Easterne +shoare of the sayd Isle. + +(M50) In your returne to the East, as you come from the hauen of Cape du +Chapt vnto the sayde hauen are sandes and sholds. And three good leagues +from Cape du Chapt there is a small Island conteining about a league of +ground: where there is an hauen toward the Southeast: and as you enter +into the sayd hauen on the starreboord side; a dented Cape all of redde +land. (M51) And you cannot enter into the sayd hauen but with the flood, +because of a barre which lieth halfe a league without the poynts of the +sayd hauen. The tydes are there at Southeast and Northwest; but when the +wind is very great, it bloweth much into the hauen at halfe flood. But +ordinarily it floweth fiue foote and an halfe. (M52) The markes to enter +into the sayd hauen are to leaue the Isle Blanche or White Island at your +comming in on the starreboord; and the poynt of the hauen toward the West +hath a thick Island, which you shall see on the other side, and it hath a +little round Buttresse, which lyeth on the East side of the Island. There +are also two other buttresses more easie to be seene then hidden: these +are not to the East but to the West, and they haue markes on them. Here +you shall not haue aboue two fathom and an halfe at a full sea vpon this +barre. And the sounding is stone and rough ground. (M53) At your entring +in, when you shall finde white sand which lyeth next the Southeast of the +Cape, then you are vpon the barre: and bee not afrayd to passe vp the +chanell. And for markes towarde the West athwart the barre, when you haue +brought an Island euen, which lyeth to the westward without, with the +thicke part of the high land which lyeth most to the West, you shall bee +past the barre: and the chanell runneth due North. (M54) And for your +anchoring in the sayd hauen, see that you carefully seeke the middest of +the sayd Thicke land, which lyeth in the bottome of the sayd hauen: for +you must anchor betweene two bankes of sand, where the passage is but +narrow. And you must anker surely: for there goeth a great tyde: for the +Sea runneth there as swiftly. There is good ground and ankorage here: and +you shall ride in three fathom water. And within the sayde hauen there is +nothing to hurt you, for you are free from all winds. (M55) And if by +chance you should be driuen Westward of the sayd hauen, you may seeke an +entrance, which is right ouer against the small Island named before, which +is called The Isle of Cormorants; and you may enter in there as at the +other hauen at a full sea: And you must passe vpon the West side, and you +shall finde on the Barre at a full sea fourteene foote water, and great +depth when you are entred in: for the Sea runneth very swiftly in that +place: and the entrie thereof lyeth Southeast and Northwest. + +Right ouer against you on the other side, you may passe with boates at a +full sea. And all these entrances make all but one hauen, which is good +within. I say this, because I haue passed into the maine Sea by the one +and the other passage. And the said Isle is not past two leagues ouer in +the middest. It is but two bankes of sande, whereof one is like to that of +S. Malo, which let the Sea from passing through the middest of all the +Isle: But the two endes are high mountaines with Islands altogether cut +and separated with streames and riuers. + +To anker in the sayd harbour, you must not ride farther then fiue or sixe +cables length from the sayd hauen. + + + + +VIII. A letter sent to the right Honourable Sir William Cecil Lord +Burghley, Lord high Treasurer of England &c. From M. Thomas Iames of +Bristoll, concerning the discouerie of the Isle of Ramea, dated the 14 of +September. 1591. + + +Right Honourable, my humble duetie to your good Lordship done, I thought +good humbly to aduertise your honour of the discouery of an Island made by +two smal shippes of Saint Malo; the one 8 daies past being prised neare +Silley by a ship of which I am part owner, called the Pleasure, sent by +this citie to my Lord Thomas Howard, for her Maiesties seruice. Which +prise is sent backe to this Port by those of the sayd shippes, with +upwards of fortie tunnes of Traine. The Island lyeth in 47. degrees, some +fiftie leagues from the grand Bay, neere Newfoundland: and is about +twentie leagues about, and some part of the Island is flat Sands and +shoulde: and the fish commeth on banke (to do their kinde) in April May +and Iune, by numbers of thousands, which fish is very big: and hath two +great teeth: and the skinne of them is like Buffes leather: and they will +not away from their yong ones. The yong ones are as good meat as Veale. +And with the bellies of fiue of the saide fishes they make a hogshead of +Traine, which Traine is very sweet, which if it will make sope, the king +of Spaine may burne some of his Oliue trees. Humbly praying your Lordship +to pardon herein my boldnes, betaking your Honour to the keeping of the +Almightie. From Bristoll this 14 of September. 1591. Your Honours most +humbly at commandement. THOMAS IAMES. + + + + +IX. A briefe note of the Morsse and the vse thereof. + + +In the first voyage of Iaques Carthier, wherein he discouered the Gulfe of +S. Laurence and the said Isle of Ramea, in the yeere 1534. as you may +reade in pag. 250 of this present volume,(10) he met with these beasts, as +he witnesseth in these words. About the said Island are very great beasts +as great as oxen, which haue two great teeth in their mouthes like vnto +Elephants teeth, and liue also in the sea. Wee sawe one of them sleeping +vpon the banke of the water, and thinking to take it, we went to it with +our boates, but so soone as he heard vs, he cast himselfe into the sea. +Touching these beasts which Iaques Carthier saith to be as big as Oxen, +and to haue teeth in their mouthes like Elephants teeth: True it is that +they are called in Latine Boues Marini, or Vaccae Marinae, and in the +Russian tongue Morsses, the hides whereof I haue seene as big as any Oxe +hide, and being dressed I haue yet a piece of one thicker then any two Oxe +or Buls hides in England. The Leather dressers take them to be excellent +good to make light targets against the arrowes of the Sauages; and I hold +them farre better then the light leather targets which the Moores vse in +Barbarie against arrowes and lances, whereof I haue seene diuers in her +Maiesties stately Armorie in the towre of London. The teeth of the sayd +fishes, whereof I haue seene a dry flat full at once, are a foote and some +times more in length: and haue bene sold in England to the combe and knife +makers, at 8 groats and 3 shillings the pound weight, whereas the best +Iuory is solde for halfe the money: the graine of the bone is somewhat +more yellow then the Iuorie. One M. Alexander Woodson of Bristoll my old +friend, an excellent Mathematician and skilful Phisition, shewed me one of +these beasts teeth which were brought from the Isle of Ramea in the first +prize, which was half a yard long or very little lesse: and assured mee +that he had made tryall of it in ministering medicine to his patients, and +had found it as soueraigne against poyson as any Vnicornes horne.(11) + + + + +X. The voyage of the ship called the Marigold of M. Hill of Redrife vnto +Cape Briton and beyond to the latitude of 44 degrees and an halfe, 1593. +Written by Richard Fisher Master Hilles man of Redriffe. + + +(M56) The ship called the Marigold of 70 tunnes in burthen furnished with +20 men, wherof 10 were mariners, the Masters name being Richard Strong of +Apsham, the Masters mate Peter Langworth of Apsham, with 3 coopers, 2 +butchers to flea the Morsses or sea Oxen (whereof diuers haue teeth aboue +a cubit long and skinnes farre thicker then any buls hide) with other +necessary people, departed out of Falmouth the 1 of Iune 1593 in consort +of another ship of M. Drakes of Apsham, which vpon some occasion was not +ready so soone as shee should haue bene by two moneths. (M57) The place +for which these two ships were bound was an Island within the streightes +of Saint Peter on the backe side of Newfoundland to the Southwest in the +latitude of fortie seuen degrees, called by the Britons of Saint Malo the +Isle of Ramea, but by the Sauages and naturals of the Continent next +adioyning Menquit: On which Isle are so great abundance of the huge and +mightie Sea Oxen with great teeth in the moneths of April, May and Iune, +that there haue bene fifteene hundreth killed there by one small barke, in +the yeere 1591. The two English shipps aforesayde, lost companie before +they came to Newfoundland: and neuer came after together in all their +voyage. + +The ship of M. George Drake fell first with New-foundland, and afterward +very directly came to the Isle Ramea, though too late in the yeere to make +her voyage: where shee found a shippe of Saint Malo three parts fraighted +with these fishes: the men whereof enquiring whence our shippe was and who +was the Master thereof, being answered that shee was belonging to Master +George Drake of Apsham, fearing to bee taken as good prize being of a +Leaguer towne, and at that time out of league with England, fled so +hastily that present night that they left three and twentie men and three +Shallops behinde them, all which our men seazed vpon and brought away as +good prises home. + +Here our men tooke certaine Sea-Oxen, but nothing such numbers as they +might haue had, if they had come in due season, which they had neglected. +The shippe called the Marigolde fell with Cape Saint Francis in +Newfoundland the eleuenth of Iulie, and from thence wee went into the Bay +Rogneuse, and afterward doubled Cape Razo, and sayling toward the straight +of Saint Peter (which is the entrance betweene Newfoundland and Cape +Briton,) being vnacquainted with the place, beate vp and downe a very long +time, and yet missed it, and at length ouer shot it, and fell with Cape +Briton. + +(M58) Here diuerse of our men went on land vpon the very Cape, where, at +their arriuall they found the spittes of Oke of the Sauages which had +roasted meate a litle before. And as they viewed the countrey they sawe +diuers beastes and foules, as blacke Foxes, Deere, Otters, great Foules +with redde legges, Pengwyns, and certaine others. But hauing found no +people here at this our first landing wee went againe on shipboorde, and +sayled farther foure leagues to the West of Cape Briton, where wee sawe +many Seales. (M59) And here hauing neede of fresh water we went againe on +shore. And passing somewhat more into the land, wee founde certaine round +pondes artificially made by the Sauages to keepe fish in, with certaine +weares in them made to take fish. To these pondes wee repayred to fill our +caske with water. (M60) Wee had not bene long here, but there came one +Sauage with blacke long hayre hanging about his shoulders who called vnto +vs, weauing his handes downewardes towardes his bellie, vsing these +wordes, Calitogh Calitogh: as wee drewe towardes him one of our mens +musket vnawares shot off: wherevpon hee fell downe, and rising vp suddenly +againe hee cryed thrise with a loude voyce Chiogh, Chiogh, Chiogh. (M61) +Thereupon nine or tenne of his fellowes running right vp ouer the bushes +with great agilitie and swiftnesse came towardes vs with white staues in +their handes like halfe pikes, and their dogges of colour blacke not so +bigge as a grey-hounde followed them at the heeles; but wee retired vnto +our boate without any hurt at all receiued. Howbeit one of them brake an +hogshead which wee had filled with fresh water, with a great branche of a +tree which lay on the ground. Vpon which occasion we bestowed halfe a +dozen muskets shotte vpon them, which they avoyded by falling flatte to +the earth, and afterwarde retired themselues to the woodes. One of the +Sauages, which seemed to bee their Captaine, ware a long mantle of beastes +skinnes hanging on one of his shoulders. The rest were all naked except +their priuities, which were couered with a skinne tyed behinde. After they +had escaped our shotte they made a great fire on the shore, belike to giue +their fellowes warning of vs. + +The kindes of trees that wee noted to bee here, were goodly Okes, Firre +trees of a great height, a kinde of tree called of vs Quickbeame, and +Cherie trees, and diuerse other kindes to vs vnknowne, because wee stayed +not long with diligence to obserue them: and there is great shewe of +rosen, pitch, and tarre. Wee found in both the places where wee went on +land abundance of Raspeses, Strawberies, Hurtes, and herbes of good smell, +and diuers good for the skuruie, and grasse very ranke and of great +length. (M62) Wee sawe fiue or sixe boates sayling to the Southwestwardes +of Cape Briton, which wee iudged to bee Christians, which had some trade +that way. Wee sawe also, while wee were on shore, the manner of their +hanging vp their fish and flesh with withes to dry in the ayre: they also +lay them vpon raftes and hurdles and make a smoake vnder them, or a softe +fire, and so drie them as the Sauages vse to doe in Virginia. + +(M63) While wee lay foure leagues South of Cape Briton wee sounded and had +sixtie fathomes black ozie ground. And sayling thence Westwarde nine or +ten leagues off the shore, we had twenty foure fathomes redde sande, and +small whitish stones. (M64) Wee continued our course so farre to the +Southwest, that wee brought ourselues into the latitude of fourtie foure +degrees and an half, hauing sayled fiftie or sixtie leagues to the +Southwest of Cape Briton. We found the current betweene this Cape Briton +and Cape Rey to set out toward the Eastsoutheast. (M65) In our course to +the West of Cape Briton we saw exceeding great store of seales, and +abundance of Porposes, whereof we killed eleuen. We sawe Whales also of +all sortes aswel small as great: and here our men tooke many Iberded +Coddes with one teate vnderneath, which are like to the Northeast Cods, +and better then those of Newfoundland. + +(M66) From our arriuall at the hauen of Saint Francis in Newfoundland, +(which was as is aforesayde the eleuenth of Iuly) we continued beating vp +and downe on the coast of Arambec to the West and Southwest of Cape Briton +vntil the twentie eight of September, fully by the space of eleuen weekes: +and then by the perswasion of our Master and certaine others wee shaped +our course homeward by the Isles of the Acores, and came first to Coruo +and Flores, where beating vp and downe, and missing of expected pray, we +sayled by Tercera, and from thence to Saint Michael, where we sought to +boorde a Portugall shippe, which we found too well appointed for vs to +bring along with vs, and so being forced to leaue them behinde and hauing +wasted all our victuals, wee were constrained against our willes to hasten +home vnto our narrowe Seas: but it was the two and twentieth of December +before wee could get into the Downes: where for lacke of winde wee kept +our Christmas with dry breade onely for dropping of our clothes. (M67) One +thing very strange hapened in this voyage: to witte, that a mightie great +Whale followed our shippe by the space of many dayes as we passed by Cape +Razo, which by no meanes wee coulde chase from our ship, untill one of our +men fell ouerboord and was drowned, after which time shee immediatly +forsooke vs, and neuer afterward appeared vnto vs.(12) + + + + +XI. A briefe note concerning the voyage of M. George Drake of Apsham to +Isle of Ramea in the aforesayd yere 1593. + + +In the beginning of the former relation written by Richard Fisher seruant +to the worshipfull Master Hill of Redriffe is, as you reade, a briefe +reporte of their loosing of their consort the shippe of Master George +Drake of Apsham: which though shee came directly to the Isle of Ramea, yet +because shee was not ready so soone by two moneths as she ought to haue +bene, she was not onely the hinderance of her consort the Marigolde, and +lost the season of the yere for the making of her voyage of killing the +Morses or Sea Oxen, which are to be taken in Aprill, May, and Iune: but +also suffered the fit places and harboroughs in the Isle which are but +two, as farre as I can learne, to be forestalled and taken vp by the +Britons of Saint Malo and the Baskes of Saint Iohn de Luz, by comming a +day after the Fayre, as wee say. Which lingering improuidence of our men +hath bene the ouerthrowe of many a worthy enterprize and of the +vndertakers of the same. + +The relation of this voyage at large I was promised by the Authour +himselfe: but the same not comming to my handes in tyme I am constrained +to leaue it out. The want whereof, for the better vnderstanding of the +state of the sayde Island, the frequenting of that gainefull trade by the +aforesayd nations of the Britons and Baskes, may in part be supplyed by +the voyage of Master Charles Leigh to the sayde Island of Ramea: which +also comming much too late thither, as Master George Drake had done, was +wholly preuented and shutte out to his and his friendes no small detriment +and mischiefe, and to the discouraging of others hereafter in the sayde +gainefull and profitable trade. + +Neuerthelesse albeit hitherto the successe hath not answered our +expectation through our owne default, as is abouesaid, yet I was very +willing to set downe in briefe and homely stile some mention of these +three voyages of our owne men. The first of M. George Drake, the second of +M. Siluester Wyet, the third of M. Charles Leigh, because they are the +first, for ought that hitherto is come to my knowledge, of our own Nation, +that haue conducted English ships so farre within this gulfe of S. +Laurence, and haue brought vs true relation of the manifold gaine which +the French, Britaynes, Baskes, and Biskaines do yerely returne from the +sayd partes; while wee this long time haue stood still and haue bene idle +lookers on, making courtesie who should giue the first aduenture, or once +being giuen, who should continue or prosecute the same. + + + + +XII. The voyage of the Grace of Bristoll of M. Rice Iones, a Barke of +thirty-fiue Tunnes, vp into the Bay of Saint Laurence to the Northwest of +Newfoundland, as farre as the Ile of Assumption or Natiscotec, for the +barbes or fynnes of Whales and traine Oyle, made by Siluester Wyet, +Shipmaster of Bristoll. + + +Wee departed with the aforesaid Barke manned with twelue men for the place +aforesaid from Bristoll the 4 of Aprill 1594 and fell with Cape d'Espere +on the coast of Newefoundland the nineteenth of May in the heighth of 47. +We went thence for Cape Raz, being distant from thence 18 or 19 leagues, +the very same day. + +The 20 day we were thwart of Cape Raz. + +Then we set our course Northwest for Cape S. Marie, which is distant from +Cape Raz 19 leagues, and is on the Eastside of the great bay of Placentia +almost at the entrie thereof. + +(M68) From thence we shaped our course for the Islands of S. Pedro passing +by the broken Islands of the Martyers, our course to the Isles of S. Pedro +was West and by North. In these Isles of S. Pedro there is a faire +harbour, which we went into with our barke, and found there 2 ships of +Sibiburo fishing for Cod: where we stayed 2 dayes, and tooke in balest for +our ship. There are as faire and tall firre trees growing therein, as in +any other part of Newfoundland. Then wee departed thence, and as we came +out of the harbours mouth we laid the ship vpon the lee, and in 2 houres +space we tooke with our hookes 3 or 4 hundred great Cods for our prouision +of our ship. Then we departed from the Isle of S. Pedro to enter into the +gulffe of S. Laurence betweene Cape Briton and the said Isle, and set our +course West North West, and fel with Cape de Rey which wee found to be +distant from the Isles of S. Pedro 42 leagues. From Cape de Rey to Cape de +Angullie we set our course Northnorthwest being distant thence 12 or 13 +leagues. From the Cape de Angullie into the Bay of S. George we ran +Northeast and by East some 18 or 19 leagues. + +In this bay of Saint George, we found the wrackes of 2 great Biskaine +ships, which had bene cast away three yeeres before: where we had some +seuen or eight hundred Whale finnes, and some yron bolts and chaines of +their mayne shrouds and fore shroudes: al their traine was beaten out with +the weather but the caske remained still. Some part of the commodities +were spoiled by tumbling downe of the clifts of the hils, which couered +part of the caske, and the greater part of those Whale finnes, which we +vnderstood to be there by foure Spaniards which escaped, and were brought +to S. Iohn de Luz. Here we found the houses of the Sauages, made of firre +trees bound together in the top and set round like a Doue-house, and +couered with the barkes of firre trees, wee found also some part of their +victuals, which were Deeres flesh roasted vpon wooden spits at the fire, +and a dish made of a ryne of a tree, sowed together with the sinowes of +the Deere, wherein was oile of the Deere. There were also foules called +Cormorants, which they had pluckt and made ready to haue dressed, and +there we found a wooden spoone of their making. And we discerned the +tracks of the feete of some fortie or fiftie men, women and children. + +When we had dispatched our businesse in this bay of S. George and stayed +there ten dayes, wee departed for the Northern point of the said Bay, +which is nine or ten leagues broade. Then being enformed, that the Whales +which are deadly wounded in the grand Bay, and yet escape the fisher for a +time, are woont vsually to shoot themselues on shore on the Isle of +Assumption, or Natiscotec, which lieth in the very mouth of the great +riuer that runneth vp to Canada, we shaped our course ouer to that long +Isle of Natiscotec, and wee found the distance of the way to the Estermost +ende thereof to be about fourty foure leagues: and it standeth in the +latitude of 49. (M69) Here wee arriued about the middest of Iune at the +East end, and rode in eighteene fadome water, in faire white sand and very +good ankerage, and for tryall heaued a lyne ouerboorde and found +wonderfull faire and great Cod fish: we went also seuen of vs on shore and +found there exceeding fayre great woods of tall firre trees, and heard and +sawe store of land and sea foules, and sawe the footing of diuers beastes +in the sand when we were on shore. From the Easter end we went to the +Norther side of the Island, which we perceiued to be but narrow in respect +of the length thereof. And after wee had searched two dayes and a night +for the Whales which were wounded which we hoped to haue found there, and +missed of our purpose, we returned backe to the Southwarde, and were +within one league of the Island of Penguin, which lyeth South from the +Eastermost part of Natiscoter some twelue leagues. From the Isle of +Penguin wee shaped our course for Cape de Rey and had sight of the Island +of Cape Briton: then returned wee by the Isles of Saint Pedro, and so came +into the Bay of Placentia, and arriued in the Easterside thereof some ten +leagues vp within the Bay among the fishermen of Saint Iohn de Luz and of +Sibiburo and of Biskay, which were to the number of threescore and odde +sayles, whereof eight shippes onely were Spaniardes, of whom we were very +well vsed and they wished heartily for peace betweene them and vs. There +the men of Saint Iohn and Sibiburo men bestowed two pinnesses on vs to +make vp our voyage with fish. Then wee departed ouer to the other side of +the Bay, where we arriued in an harbour which is called Pesmarck, and +there made our stage and fished so long, that in the ende the Sauages +came, and in the night, when our men were at rest, cut both our pinnesse +and get them againe. Then for feare of a shrewder turne of the Sauages, we +departed for Cape Saint Marie, and hauing passed Cape Kaz, we passed +Northwarde foureteene leagues and arriued in Farrillon, and finding there +two and twentie sayles of Englishmen, wee made vp our fishing voyage to +the full in that harborough the twentieth foure of August to our good +content: and departing thence we arriued first in Combe and staied there a +seuen night, and afterward in Hungrod in the riuer of Bristoll by the +grace of God the 24 of September. 1594. + + + + +XIII. The voyage of M. Charles Leigh, and diuers others to Cape Briton and +the Isle of Ramea. + + +The Hopewell of London of the burthen of 120 tunnes, whereof was M. +William Crafton, and the Chancewel of London of the burthen of 70 tunnes, +whereof was M. Steuen Bennet, bound vnto the riuer of Canada, set to sea +at the sole and proper charge of Charles Leigh and Abraham Van Herwick of +London merchants (the saide Charles Leigh himselfe, and Steuen Van Herwick +brother to the sayd Abraham, going themselues in the said ships as chiefe +commanders of the voyage) departed from Graues-end on Fryday morning the 8 +of April 1597. And after some hindrances, arriuing at Falmouth in Cornewal +the 28 of the said moneth put to sea againe. And with prosperous windes +the 18 of May we were vpon the Banke of Newfoundland. The 19 we lost the +Chancewel. The 20 we had sight of land and entred within the bay of +Assumption, where our men contrary to my knowledge fought with a French +ship: and afterward in the same bay wee met with our consort. Whereupon we +presently put to sea againe: and the next day we arriued at Caplen bay, +where we remained by extremitie of foule weather, and to mend a pinnes of +7 or 8 tunnes (which was giuen vs at Farrillon by M. Wil. Sayer of +Dartmouth the Admiral of that place) vntill the last of May. On which day +departing from thence in the afternoone we put in to Rogneuse to seeke +Shallops but could find none. The first of Iune we set saile from +Rogneuse, and the second we put roome to a bay vnder the Northside of Cape +Raz being inforced in by an extreme storme. The 4 we set saile, and this +day we saw a great Island of yce. The 5 at night we lost the Chancewell in +a fog at the mouth of the bay of Placentia. The 11 at Sunne setting we had +sight of Cape Briton. (M70) And the 12 by reason of contrary windes we +cast anker vnder the Northeast ende of the Isle of Menego to the North of +Cape Briton in 16 fathome reasonable ground. In that place we caught great +store of Cods, which were larger and better fish then any in Newfoundland. +The 13 wee weyed anker againe, and being becalmed about a league from the +shore we fell to fishing where the Cods did bite at least 20 fathomes +aboue ground, and almost as fast as we could hale them into the ship. +(M71) The 14 we came to the two Islands of Birds, some 23 leagues from +Monego: where there were such abundance of Birds, as is almost incredible +to report. (M72) And vpon the lesse of these Islands of Birds, we saw +great store of Morsses or sea Oxen, which were a sleepe vpon the rockes: +but when we approched nere vnto them with our boate they cast themselues +into the sea and pursued vs with such furie as that we were glad to flee +from them. The 16 we arriued at Brians Island, which lyeth 5 leagues West +from the Island of Birds. About this Island ther is as great aboundance of +cods as in any place can be found. In litle more then an houre we caught +with 4 hookes 250 of them. Here we caught also a great Turbut which was an +elle long and a yard broad: which was so great that the hooke could not +hold her into the ship: but when she was aboue water she bent the hooke +and escaped. (M73) In this Island we found exceeding good ground both for +corne and meadow, and great store of wood, but of smal groweth. Springes +of fresh water we found none in all the Island, but some standing pooles +of raine water. The same day at night we weighed anker againe. The 17 we +had stormy weather. The 18 we came to the Isle of Ramea, where we +appointed to meet with our consort. And approching neere vnto the +harborough of Halabolina we cast anker in 3 fadomes water and sent our +great boate into the harborough, with the masters mate and some dozen more +of the company: who when they came in, found 4 ships. Namely 2 of Saint +Malo in Britaigne, and two of Sibiburo adioyning to Saint Iohn de Luz +being the French Kings subiects, whom they supposed to haue bene of +Spaine, and so affirmed vnto vs. Whereupon wee went presently into +harborough, finding but eleuen foote and an halfe of water vpon the barre +and a mightie great current in, when wee had cast anker we sent presently +to speake with the masters of all the ships: but those only of Saint Malo +came aboord, whom wee entertained very friendly, and demaunded of whence +the other two shippes were. They sayde as they thought of Saint Iohn de +Luz or Sibiburo. Then we presently sent our boate for the Masters of both +the sayd shippes, to request them to come aboord, and to bring with them +there Charters parties and other euidences, to the ende we might knowe of +whence they were. At which message one of the sayde Masters came aboord, +with the Pilote and Masters mate of the other shippe: whom when we had +examined, they sayd that they were of Sibiburo, and the French Kings +subiects. We requested them for our better securitie in the harborough +peaceably to deliuer up their powder and munition: promising them that if +we found them to be the French Kings subiects it shoulde be kept in +safetie for them without diminishing. But they woulde not consent +thereunto: whereunto we replyed, that vnlesse they would consent thereunto +we would hold them to be our enemies. They not consenting, we sent the +boate well manned to fetch their powder and munition from aboorde their +ship; but straightly commanded our men not to touch anything else in the +ship vpon their further perill: which they promised to performe. When they +came aboorde the said ships which were mored together, they were resisted +by force of armes, but quickly they got the victorie: which done, they +fell presently to pillaging of the Baskes, contrary to their promise: +whereupon we sent another to forbidde them: but when he came to them, none +was more ready of pillage then he. Whereupon I went my selfe, and tooke +away from our men whatsoever they had pillaged, and gaue it againe to the +owners: onely I sent aboord our owne ship their powder and munition to be +kept in safetie vntil we knew farther what they were. When I had done, I +gaue the Baskes possession of their shippe againe, and tolde them they +should not loose the valewe of one peny if they were the French Kings +subjects. Then I caryed away all our men, and also tooke with me two or +three of the chiefest of them, and when I came aboord went to examining of +them, and by circumstances found one of the ships to belong to France: +whereupon I tolde the master of the said ship, that I was throughly +satisfied that he was of France and so dismissed him in peace. Of the +other ship we had great presumption that she was of Spaine, but had no +certaine proofe thereof, wherefore wee dismissed them likewise in peace. +After I had thus dismissed them, our ships company fell into a mutiny, and +more then half of them resolued to cary one of those ships away. But they +were preuented of their euill purpose by ayde which the saide ships +receiued from their countreymen in the other harborough: (M74) For the +next morning, which was the twentieth of Iune, very early there were +gathered together out of all the ships in both harboroughs, at the least +300 Frenchmen and Britons, who had planted vpon the shore three pieces of +Ordinance against vs, and had prepared them selues in al readinesse to +fight with vs, which so soone as as we had discried them gaue the onset +vpon vs with at least an hundred small shot out of the woods. There were +also in a readines to assault vs about three hundred Sauages. (M75) But +after we had skirmished a while with them, we procured a parley by one of +the men of Saint Malo, whose ship rowed hard by vs: In which parley they +required some of our men to come on shore vnto them: wherevpon wee +requested M. Ralph Hill and the Boatswaines mate to go on shore to them: +whom when they had they detained as prisoners; and then required the +powder and munition, which we had of the Baskes in possession; which we +surrendered vnto them in safetie as our intent alwayes was, which done, +there (M76) came aboord vnto vs one Captaine Charles, who was captaine of +the great ship of Saint Malo, which rode in the other harborough: who +challenged our great boate which we had at Farillon to be his. And while +we were in talke with him about the two Baskes which at first we thought +to be Spaniards, wee had almost bene betraied. For the said Captaine +Charles with halfe a dozen more of his company kept themselues aboord of +our ship and held vs in a talke, while thirtie or fortie others should +haue entred our ship vnawares from one of the ships of S. Malo, which +professed to be our friend, and vnto whom we shewed all courtesie. But we +perceiuing their treacherous intent, threatned to set fire on the said +ship, which was then thwart our hawse, from which they would haue entred. +By which resolution of ours God did discourage them from effecting their +mischieuous purposes. Now the said captaine Charles when he saw himself +preuented of his wicked intents, took his boat presently to go on shore, +and promised that all things should be ended in peace betweene vs, and +that he would send vs our two men againe. But when he was on shore he +presently sent for our great boat which he claimed to be his, and withall +commanded vs out of the harborough, but he sent not our men as he +promised, we being now the weaker side did not only deliuer his boat but +also determined to be gon and then requested them to help vs with our +anker which was on shore; but they would not. Then we desired them to cut +the bent of the cable vpon the anker on shore (for we durst not send our +boat lest they should haue kept from vs both our boat and men) which they +promised to do for vs, as also to send our men; but when they were on +shore, they would do neither. We therefore seeing their falshood in euery +thing, durst no longer tary for feare of farther treachery; wherefore we +concluded to cut our cable in the hawse: which we did, and so departed the +harborow about 9 of the clock, leauing two of our men with our cable and +anker, and 20 fathoms of a new hawser behind vs. And as we were going +away, they made great shewes of friendship, and dranke vnto vs from the +shore; but more for feare then loue, and requested vs to come on shore for +our men, whom then they deliuered. (M77) The same morning in passing ouer +the barre before the harborowes mouth, and by that time that we had all +our men aboord, our ship came on ground vpon the sands; where we lay some +8 houres: during which time, at low water we trimmed our ship without +boord, and by the great prouidence of God found our leake which then we +stopped. About sixe of the clocke at night we got our ship on float +againe, and that night ankered within part of the barre, which then +because of the wind we could not passe. (M78) But it pleased God to send +vs faire weather all that night, and the next day by noone we had gotten +our ship cleane ouer the bar. The 21 day after we got ouer the barre the +wind arose at east and eastsoutheast, we blew right into the bay: which if +it had come before we were cleere of the bar, we had both ship and men +perished in the sands. (M79) The same day, because the wind kept vs within +the bay, we went to the Isle Blanch, where the ships of the other harborow +had their stages: but it was at least two leagues from their ships: where +we hoped by friendship to procure a shallope and assurance of our cable +and anker againe. But when we had approched nere the shore with our ship, +and weaued them with a white flag, they in sted of comming vnto vs, sent +their message by a bullet out of a piece of great ordinance, which they +had placed on shore of purpose against vs; so that they would neither +speake with vs, nor permit vs to come nere them. Thus we departed, and +would haue put to sea that night: but there was much wind at East, which +kept vs within the bay, and inforced vs to come to an anker vnder Isle +Blanch. The next morning being the 22. we put to sea, and about 12 of the +clocke the same day, the wind being at Northeast and foule weather, the +master sayd he could not ply vp to Grande Coste, because of the leeshore, +and the wind against vs, and therefore asked what we should do. (M80) I +asked then how farre we had to the river of cape Briton: he sayd a little +way. Then sayd I, If it be not farre, we were best to go thither to trade +with the Sauages while the wind is contrary, and to take in water and +balist, which we wanted. To which the master sayd, that if I would he +would cary vs thither. I thinking it to be the best course, sayd I was +content, so farre forth as that from thence we tooke the first faire wind +for Grande Coste. Hereupon the master willed him at the helme to keepe his +course southeast and southeast and by south. Presently after I asked him +how many leagues we had to the sayd riuer, and from the sayd riuer to +Grande Coste. He then sayd that we had 40. leagues to the riuer, and from +the riuer to Grande Coste 120 leagues. Hereupon I said I would not consent +to go so far out of our way, but willed him to keep his directest course +for Grande Coste; which he did. Within one halfe houre afterwards the 23 +day the gunner and company of the ship presented me and the master with a +request in writing to returne for England or to goe for the Islands of +Acores for a man of war, for they would not proceed on their voyage to +Grande Coste; and therefore do what I could they turned the the helme +homewards. (M81) The 14 of Iune we sent our boat on shore in a great bay +vpon the Isle of Cape Briton for water. The 25 we arriued on the West side +of the Isle of Menego, where we left some caske on shore in a sandy bay, +but could not tary for foule weather. The 26 we cast anker in another bay +vpon the maine of Cape Briton. (M82) The 27 about tenne of the clocke in +the morning we met with eight men of the Chancewell our consort in a +shallope; who told vs that their ship was cast away vpon the maine of Cape +Briton, within a great bay eighteene leagues within the Cape, and vpon a +rocke within a mile of the shore, vpon the 23 of this moneth about one of +the clocke in the afternoon: and that they had cleered their ship from the +rocke: but being bilged and full of water, they presently did run her vp +into a sandy bay, where she was no sooner come on ground, but presently +after there came aboord many shallops with store of French men, who robbed +and spoiled all they could lay hands on, pillaging the poore men euen to +their very shirts, and vsing them in sauage maner: whereas they should +rather as Christians haue aided them in that distresse. Which newes when +we heard, we blessed God, who by his diuine prouidence and vnspeakeable +mercy had not onely preserued all the men, but brought vs thither so +miraculously to ayd and comfort them. (M83) So presently we put into the +road where the Chancewell lay; where was also one ship of Sibiburo, whose +men that holpe to pillage the Chancewell were runne away into the woods. +But the master thereof which had dealt very honestly with our men stayed +in his ship, and came aboord of vs whom we vsed well, not taking any thing +from him that was his, but onely such things as we could finde of our +owne. And when we had dispatched our businesse, we gaue him one good +cable, one olde cable and an anker, one shallop with mast, sailes, and +other furniture, and other things which belonged to the ship. In +recompence whereof he gaue vs two hogsheads of sider, one barrel of peaze, +and 25 score of fish. The 29 betimes in the morning we departed from that +road toward a great Biskaine some 7 leagues off of 300 tun, whose men +dealt most doggedly with the Chancewels company. The same night we ankered +at the mouth of the harborow, where the Biskain was. The 30 betimes in the +morning we put into the harborow; and approching nere their stage, we saw +it vncouered, and so suspected the ship to be gone: whereupon we sent our +pinnesse on shore with a dozen men, who when they came, found great store +of fish on shore, but all the men were fled: neither could they perceiue +whether the ship should be gone, but as they thought to sea. This day +about twelue of the clocke we tooke a Sauages boat which our men pursued: +but all the Sauages ran away into the woods, and our men brought their +boat on boord. The same day in the afternoone we brought our ship to an +anker in the harborow: and the same day we tooke three hogsheads and an +halfe of traine, and some 300 of greene fish. (M84) Also in the euening +three of the Sauages, whose boat we had, came vnto vs for their boat; to +whom we gaue coats and kniues, and restored them their boate againe. The +next day being the first of Iuly, the rest of the Sauages came vnto vs, +among whom was their king, whose name was Itarey, and their queene, to +whom also we gaue coats and kniues, and other trifles. (M85) These Sauages +called the harborow Cibo. In this place are the greatest multitude of +lobsters that euer we heard of: for we caught at one hawle with a little +draw net aboue 140. The fourth of Iuly in the morning we departed from +Cibo. And the fift we cast anker in a reasonable good harborow called New +Port vnder an Island some eight leagues from Cibo, and within three +leagues from the English port. At this place in pursuing certaine shallops +of a ship of Rochel, one of them came aboord, who told vs, that the +Biskainer whom we sought, was in the English port with two Biskainers +more, and two ships of Rochel. Thereupon wee sent one of our men in the +Rochellers shallop to parle with the admiral and others our friends in the +English port, requesting them ayd for the recouery of our things, which +the other ship called the Santa Maria of S. Vincent (whereof was Master +Iohannes de Harte, and Pilot Adame de Lauandote) had robbed from the +Chancewell. To which they answered, that if we would come in vnto them in +peace, they would assist vs what they might. This answere we had the sixt +day: and the seuenth in the fornoone we arriued in the English port, and +cast anker aloofe from the other ships: which done, I went aboord the +Admirall, to desire the performance of his promise: who sent for Iohannes +de Harte, who was contented to restore most of our things againe: +whereupon I went aboord his ship to haue them restored. This day and the +eighth I spent in procuring such things as they had robbed; but yet in the +end we wanted a great part thereof. Then we were briefe with them, and +willed them either to restore vs the rest of our things which they had, or +els we would both inforce them to doe it, and also haue satisfaction for +our victuals and merchandises which by their meanes were lost in the +Chancewell. The ninth in the morning wee prepared our ship to goe neere +vnto them. Whereupon their Admirall sent his boat aboord, and desired to +speake with mee: then I went aboord vnto him, and desired to haue our +things with peace and quietnesse, proffering to make him and the Masters +of the two ships of Rochel our vmpires, and what they should aduise I +would stand vnto. Heereupon he went aboord the other ship to make peace; +but they would heare no reason, neither yet condescend to restore any +thing els which they had of ours. Then I desired that as I came in peace +vnto them, they would so set me aboord my ship againe: which they denied +to doe, but most vniustly detained me and Stephen van Herwicke who was +with me. A while after our shallop came with foure men to know how I did, +and to fetch me aboord: but so soone as she came to the Admirals ships +side, his men entred, and tooke her away, detaining our men also as +prisoners with vs. Then presently all the three Biskainers made toward our +ship, which was not carelesse to get the winde of them all: and hauing by +the mercy of God obtained the same, shee then stayed for them: but when +they saw they had lost their aduantage, they presently turned their +course, making as great haste in againe as they did out before. Afterwards +I attempted twise to goe aboord, but was still enforced backe by the two +other Biskainers, who sought our liues: so that in the end the Master of +the Admirall was inforced to man his great boat to waft vs: and yet +notwithstanding they bent a piece of great ordinance at vs: for we were to +passe by them vnto our ship: but we rescued our shallop vnder our Masters +great boat; and by that meanes passed in safety. The next morning being +the tenth of the moneth, we purposed if the winde had serued our turne, to +haue made them to repent their euill dealing, and to restore vs our owne +againe, or els to haue suncke their ships if we could. (M86) But the winde +serued not our turne for that purpose; but caried vs to sea: so that the +same morning wee tooke our course toward the bay of S. Laurence in +Newfoundland: where wee hoped to finde a Spanish ship, which as we had +intelligence, did fish at that place. (M87) The thirteenth day we had +sight of S. Peters Islands. And the foureteenth day being foggy and misty +weather, while we made towards the land, we sent our shallop before the +shippe to discouer dangers: but in the fogge, through the mens negligence +which were in her, she lost vs: yet we kept on our course, thinking that +although we could not see them, yet they might see our ship: and comming +into sixteene fathoms water we cast anker, supposing our selues to be +neere the shore: and in the euening it pleased God to giue vs for the +space of one quarter of an houre clere weather, by which we found our +selues to be imbayed, and also had sight of our shallop, which was at the +point of a land about one league from vs. The same night we went further +into the same bay, where we had very good riding. The fifteenth we went on +shore, and in that place found footing of deere, and before we returned we +killed one. (M88) The eighteenth we departed toward S. Laurence: the same +euening we had sight of S. Laurence, and sent off our boat in the night +with our Master and sixteene men to surprise the Spanyard, which lay in +Litle S. Laurence: who presently vpon the entrance of our men surrendered +vp their ship and goods. The nineteenth in the morning before day, the +Master of our ship with two more, and three Spanyards, tooke a boat and +came foorth to meet our shippe, but being foggy, he cast anker by the +mouth of the harborow, thinking in faire weather to put out to our ship, +which through the current and foggy weather was put fiue or sixe leagues +to leeward: and while they were at anker in the boat they were surprised +again by certaine Basks of S. Iohn de Luz who were in Great S. Laurence +hard by. These Basks with their forces (hauing receiued intelligence by +one of the Spanyards, who sleeping on shore, escaped vnto them ouerland) +on the sudden surprised the sayd boat with our Master and others: and then +presently made vnto the ship; but our men aboord defended them off. (M89) +In the end they threatned that vnlesse they would yeeld, they would kill +M. Crafton and our other men before their eyes. So at last vpon M. +Craftons intreaty and our mens, to saue their liues, they yeelded vp the +ship againe, vpon condition, that they should not iniure any of our men, +but should let them all with their weapons peaceably depart: yet when our +men had yeelded, they brake their couenant, profering them great violence, +threatning to kill them, disarming them, stripping their clothes from +their backs, and vsing them more like dogs then men. After they had thus +robbed our men of their prize and weapons, they presently towed the shippe +with their boats out of that harborow into Great S. Laurence, where their +owne shippes did ride, and within lesse then an houre after they had +caried our prize away, our shippe arriued in the bay: where after we had +bene a while at anker, our shallop came aboord vnto vs, with most part of +our sixteene men, who tolde vs the whole story before recited, as also +that captaine Laurence had caried away our Master, and Stephen van +Herwicke prisoners, and turned the rest of our men on shore in the woods, +without either meat, drinke, or almost any apparell. The 20 all our men +came aboord, except the two prisoners: and the same day we tooke with our +boats three of the Spanyards shallops, with fiue hogsheads of traine oile +in ech of them, and in one boat foure Spanyards; but the men of the other +two shallops fled on shore. The same day also we tooke the Master of one +of the ships which was in the harborow with three other of his men, whom +we detained prisoners to ransome M. Crafton and Stephen van Henrick: The +22 captaine Laurence sent them aboord, and we also released all our +prisoners, except one Spanyard, who was boatswaine of the Spanish ship, +whom we kept with vs: and the same day we set from thence. (M90) The 24 we +had aduice of our Spanyard of certain Leagers which were in the harborow +of cape S. Mary. Whereupon the same night, being within fiue or six +leagues of the harborow, I sent off our two shallops with thirty men to +discouer the harborow, and to surprise the enemy. The 25 in the morning we +approched the harborow with our ship, and in the mouth thereof we espied +three shallops, two whereof were ours, and the third of a ship of Rochel, +which they had surprised with foure men in her: who told them that there +were but two ships in the harborow, whereof one was of Rochel, and the +other of Bell isle. And as we were discoursing with the Rochellers, we had +sight of the ships: whereupon we sent our boat aboord the Rocheller to +certifie him that we were his friends, and to request him not to hinder +our fight with the enemy. This message being sent, we made all the haste +we could vnto the ship of Belle isle, which first began with vs with three +great shot, one whereof hit our maintopsaile, but both the other missed +vs. And we also sent one vnto them: then being approched nere vnto them +ten or twelue of vs went in a shallop to enter them, and we caried also a +warpe with vs to make fast vnto their ship, whereby our ship might the +better come vp to ayd vs. And when we boorded them in our boat, they +betooke themselues to their close fights, playing chiefly vpon vs with +shot and pikes out at two ports, between which we entred very dangerously, +escaping neere dangers both by shot and pike. Some of our men were +wounded, but no great harme was done. And mine owne piece in entring, was +shot out of my hand into the sea: which shot also burst one side of the +ladder, by which I entred. We had not long bene aboord, but through the +helpe of God we caused them to yeeld vnto our mercy. (M91) There were of +them in the ship aboue forty men, most whereof we sent aboord our shippe, +there to be kept in holde, with order to our chyrurgion to dresse the +wounded men, one of which was wounded vnto death. That done, we had then +time to view our prize, which we found of great defence, and a notable +strong ship, almost two hundred tun in burden, very well appointed, and in +all things fitted for a man of warre. They had also foureteene or fifteene +men more, which were then absent from the ship; otherwise we should haue +had the hoter fight. The same day we got our sailes to the yard, and our +top masts on end, and rigged the shippe what we could. The 26 day we got +some oile aboord, and there we taried vntill the second of August, fitting +our selues for the sea, and getting fish aboord as weather serued vs. +During our abode there we diuided our men, and appointed to ech ship their +company, my selfe and my friends being resolued to take our passage in the +prize; wherein when we were shipped, and the company, there arose great +enmity against vs by the other shippe, which afterward was quieted. The +second day of August, hauing taken in water and wood, we put to sea from +that harborow in company of the Hopewell, with purpose to go directly to +Parlican, which is an harborow in the North part of Newfoundland, where we +expected another prize. But when we came to sea we found our sailes so +olde, our ropes so rotten, and our prouision of bread and drinke so short, +as that we were constrained to make our resolution directly for England: +whereupon we drew out our reasons the fourth day of August, and sent them +aboord the Hopewell, to certifie them the cause of our resolution for +England: wherat they were generally offended, thinking and saying, that we +in the prize went about to cousin and deceiue them. To conclude, they sent +vs word that they would keepe vs company for England. But I had giuen +William Crafton commission before to go for the Island of the Acores, and +there to spend his victuals for a man of warre. The next day being the +fift of August, hauing a faire winde, we put off from the coast of +Newfoundland, and kept our course directly for England, the Hopewell +keeping vs company vntill midday, whenas hauing lost vs in a fogge, she +shot off two pieces of ordinance, and we answered her with three: +afterwards we spake not with her, supposing that she went for the Islands. +The 27 of August, drawing neere the coast of England, we sounded and found +ground at seuenty fadoms. Some of the mariners, thinking we were in +Bristow channell, and other in Silly channell: so that through variety of +iudgements, and euil marinership we were faine to dance the hay foure +dayes together, sometimes running to the Northeast, sometimes to the +Southeast, then againe to the East and Eastnortheast. Thus did we spend +faire winds, and lose our time vntill the last of August. And then it +pleased God that we fell with the Island of Lundy within the channell of +Bristoll; from whence we shaped our course: and after diuers dangers, the +third of September we met with the Tramontane of the Queene off Dartmouth; +to the captaine whereof we gaue certaine things that he had need of. The +fift of September I landed on the outside of the Isle of Wight, and within +few dayes after it pleased God to bring the ship in safety to London, +where she was made prize as belonging to the enemies of this land. + +Certaine obseruations touching the countreys and places where we +trauelled. + +The Newfoundland we found very subiect to fogs and mists. The ground of it +is very rocky: and vpon it there is great store of firre trees, and in +some places red; and about the shore it hath great abundance of cod fish. +We were on land in it in foure seuerall places: 1 At Caplin bay and +Farrillon: 2 At Cape Rase: 3 At the harborow of Lano, which lieth foure +leagues to the West of Cape Laurence: 4 At S. Marie port. + +The Island of Monego for the soile is much like Newfoundland, but the fish +about it, as also throwout the Grande Bay within Cape Briton, is much +larger and better than that of the Newfoundland. This Island is scant two +leagues long, and very narrow. In the midst of it, a great way within the +wood is a great poole. Here we were thrise on shore: once at the East +side, and twise at the West. + +The three Islands of birds are sandy red, but with the multitude of birds +vpon them they looke white. The birds sit there as thicke as stones lie in +a paued street. The greatest of the Islands is about a mile in compasse. +The second is little less. The third is a very little one, like a small +rocke. At the second of these there lay on the shore in the Sunshine about +thirty or forty sea-oxen or morses: which when our boat came nere them, +presently made into the sea, and swam after the boat. + +Brions Island wee found to be very good, and sandy ground. It hath in it +store of firre trees. It is somewhat more than a league long, and about +three leagues in compasse. Here we were on land once, and went from the +one side of it to the other. + +The Island of Ramea we tooke to be like ground as Brions Island, hauing +also abundance of firre trees. It seemeth to be in length about twelue or +thirteene leagues at least. We were there in harborow, but not on shore, +which we much desired, and hoped to haue bene: but the conflict which we +had there with the Basks and Britons, mentioned before, preuented vs. + +The Isle Blanche likewise seemeth in quality of the ground and bignesse of +it to be much like Brions Island aforesayd, but somewhat lesse. We were +not on shore vpon it, but rode before it at anker. + +The land of Cape Briton we found to be somewhat like the Newfoundland, but +rather better. Here toward the West end of it we saw the clouds lie lower +then the hils: as we did also at Cape Laurence in Newfoundland. The +Easterly end of the land of Cape Briton is nothing so high land, as the +West. We went on shore vpon it in fiue places: 1 At the bay where the +Chancewell was cast away: 2 At Cibo: 3 At a little Island betweene Cibo +and the New port: 4 At the New port: And 5 at Port Ingles, or the English +port. + +Concerning the nature and fruitfulnesse of Brions Island, Isle Blanche, +and of Ramea, they do by nature yeeld exceeding plenty of wood, great +store of wild corne like barley, strawberries, gooseberries, mulberies, +white roses, and store of wilde peason. Also about the sayd Islands the +sea yeeldeth great abundance of fish of diuers sorts. And the sayd Islands +also seeme to proffer, through the labour of man, plenty of all kinde of +our graine, of roots, of hempe, and other necessary commodities. + +Charles Leigh. + + + + +XIV. The first relation of Iaques Carthier of S. Malo, of the new land +called New France, newly discovered in the yere of our Lord 1534. + + + +How M. Iaques Carthier departed from the Port of S. Malo, with two ships, +and came to Newfoundland, and how he entred into the Port of Buona Vista. + + +After that Sir Charles of Mouy knight lord of Meylleraye, and Viceadmirall +of France had caused the Captaines, Masters, and Mariners of the shippes +to be sworne to behaue themselues truely and faithfully in the seruice of +the most Christian King of France, vnder the charge of the sayd Carthier, +vpon the twentieth day of Aprill 1534, we departed from the Port of S. +Malo with two ships of threescore tun apiece burden, and 61 well appointed +men in each one: and with such prosperous weather we sailed onwards, that +vpon the tenth day of May we came to Newfoundland, where we entred into +the Cape of Buona Vista, which is in latitude 48 degrees and a halfe, and +in longitude ----.(13) But because of the great store of the ice that was +alongst the sayd land, we were constrayned to enter into an hauen called +S. Katherins Hauen, distant from the other Port about fiue leagues toward +Southsoutheast: there did we stay tenne days looking for faire weather; +and in the meanwhile we mended and dressed our boats. + + + +How we came to the Island of Birds, and of the great quantity of birds +that there be. + + +Vpon the 21 of May the wind being in the West, we hoisted saile, and +sailed toward North and by East from the cape of Buona Vista vntil we came +to the Island of Birds, which was enuironed about with a banke of ice, but +broken and crackt: notwithstanding the sayd banke, our two boats went +thither to take in some birds, whereof there is such plenty, that vnlesse +a man did see them, he would thinke it an incredible thing: for albeit the +Island (which containeth about a league in circuit) be so full of them, +that they seeme to haue been brought thither, and sowed for the nonce, yet +are there an hundred folde as many houering about as within; some of which +are as big as iayes, blacke and white, with beaks like vnto crowes: they +lie alwayes upon the sea; they cannot flie very high, because their wings +are so little, and no bigger then halfe ones hand, yet do they flie as +swiftly as any birds of the aire leuell to the water; they are also +exceeding fat: we named them Aporath. In lesse then halfe an houre we +filled two boats full of them, as if they had bene with stones: so that +besides them which we did eat fresh, euery ship did powder and salt fiue +or sixe barrels full of them. + + + +Of two sorts of birds, the one called Godetz, the other Margaulx; and how +we came to Carpunt. + + +Besides these, there is another kinde of birds which houer in the aire, +and ouer the sea, lesser than the others; and these doe all gather +themselves together in the Island, and put themselues vnder the wings of +birds that are greater: these we named Godetz. There are also of another +sort, but bigger, and white, which bite euen as dogs: those we named +Margaulx. And albeit the sayd island be 14 leagues from the maine land, +notwithstanding beares come swimming thither to eat of the sayd (M92) +birds: and our men found one there as great as any cow, and as white as +any swan, who in their presence leapt into the sea: and vpon Whitsunmunday +(following our voyage toward the land) we met her by the way, swimming +toward land as swiftly as we could saile. So soone as we saw her, we +pursued her with our boats, and by maine strength tooke her, whose flesh +was as good to be eaten as the flesh of a calf of two yeres olde. (M93) +The Wednesday following, being the 27 of the moneth, we came to the +entrance of the bay of the Castles; but because the weather was ill and +the great store of ice we found, we were constrained to enter into an +harborow about the sayd entrance called Carpunt, where, because we would +not come out of it, we stayed til the ninth of Iune, what time we +departed, hoping with the helpe of God to saile further then the said +Carpunt, which is latitude 51 degrees. + + + +The description of Newfoundland, from Cape Razo to Cape Degrad. + + +The land from Cape Razo to Cape Degrad, which is the point of the entrance +of the bay that trendeth from head to head toward Northnortheast, and +Southsouthwest. All this part of land is parted into Islands one so near +the other, that there are but small riuers betweene them: thorow the which +you may passe with little boats, and therefore there are certaine good +harborows, among which are those of Carpunt and Degrad. In one of these +Islands that is the highest of them all, being the top of it you may +plainly see the two low Islands that are nere to Cape Razo, from whence to +the port of Carpunt they count it fiue and twenty leagues; and there are +two entrances thereat, one on the East, the other on the South side of the +Island. But you must take heed of the side and point of the East, because +that euery where there is nothing els but shelues, and the water is very +shallow: you must go about the Island toward the West the length of halfe +a cable or thereabout, and then to goe toward the South to the sayd +Carpunt. Also you are to take heed of three shelues that are in the +chanell vnder the water: and toward the Island on the East side in the +chanell, the water is of three or four fadome deepe, and cleere ground. +The other trendeth toward Eastnortheast, and on the West you may go on +shore. + + + +Of the Island which is now called S. Katherins Island. + + +Going from the point Degrad, and entring into the sayd bay toward the West +and by North: there is some doubt of two Islands that are on the right +side, one of the which is distant from the sayd point three leagues, and +the other seuen, either more or lesse then the first, being a low and +plaine land, and it seemeth to be part of the maine land. I named it Saint +Katherines Island; in which, toward the Northeast there is very dry soile; +but about a quarter of a league from it, very ill ground so that you must +go a little about. The sayd Island and the Port of Castles trend toward +North northeast, and South southwest, and they are about 15. leagues +asunder. (M94) From the said port of Castles to the port of Gutte, which +is in the northerne part of the said Bay, that trendeth toward East +northeast, and West southwest, there are 12. leagues and an halfe: and +about two leagues from the port of Balances, that is to say, the third +part athwart the saide Bay the depth being sounded it is about 38. +fadomes: and from the said port of Balances to the white Sands towards +West southwest there is 15. leagues, but you must take heed of a shelfe +that lyeth about 3. leagues outward from the said white Sands on the +Southwest side aboue water like a boat. + + + +Of the place called Blanc Sablon or the white Sand: of the Iland of Brest, +and of the Iland of Birds, of the sorts and quantitie of birds that there +are found: and of the Port called the Islettes. + + +White Sand is a Road in the which there is no place guarded from the +South, nor southeast. (M95) But toward South southwest from the saide road +there are two Ilands, one of the which is called Brest Iland, and the +other the Iland of Birds, in which there is great store of Godetz, and +crowes with red beakes and red feete: they make their nestes in holes +vnder the ground euen as Conies. A point of land being passed about a +league from white Sand, there is a Port and passage found called the +Islettes, a better place then white Sand: and there is great fishing. From +the said Port of the Islettes vnto another called Brest, the circuit is +about ten leagues. This Port is in latitude 51. degrees and 55. minutes, +and longitude ----.(14) From the Islettes to that place there are many other +Ilands: and the saide Port of Brest is also amongst those Ilands. Moreouer +the Ilands do compasse more then 3. leagues from the said Brest, being +low, and ouer them are the other lands aboue mentioned seene. + + + +How we with our ships entred into the Port of Brest, and sayling onward +toward the West we passed amidst the Islettes, which were so many in +number, that it was not possible to tell them: and how we named them the +Islettes. + + +Vpon the 10. of June wee with our ships entred into the Port of Brest, to +furnish our selues with water and wood, and to make vs ready to passe the +said Bay. Vpon S. Barnabas day Seruice being heard, we with our boats went +beyond the said Port toward the west, to see what harboroughes were there: +wee passed through the midst of the Islettes, which were so many in number +that it was not possible they might be tolde, for they continued about 10. +leagues beyond the said Port. We to rest our selues stayed in one of them +a night, and there we found great store of ducke egges, and other birds +that there do make their nests, we named them all The Islettes. + + + +Of the Port called S. Antonies Port, S. Seruans Port, Iames Cartiers Port: +of the riuer called S. Iames: of the customes and apparell of the +inhabitants in the Iland of White Sand. + + +The next day we passed the said Ilands, and beyond them all we found a +good hauen, which we named S. Antonies Hauen, and one or two leagues +beyond wee found a little riuer towarde the southwest coast, that is +betweene two other Ilands, and is a good harborough. There we set vp a +Crosse, and named it S. Seruans Port: and on the Southwest side of the +said Port and riuer, about one league there is a small Iland as round as +an Ouen, enuironed about with many other litle Ilands that giue notice to +the said Ports. Further about two leagues there is another greater riuer, +in (M96) which we tooke a good store of salmon, that we named S. Iames his +Riuer. Being in the said riuer, we saw a ship of Rochel that the night +before had passed the Port of Brest, where they thought to haue gone a +fishing: but the Mariners knew not where they were. We with our boats +approched neere vnto it, and did direct it to another Port one league more +toward the West than the said riuer of S. Iames, which I take to be one of +the best in all the world, and therefore wee named it Iames Carthiers +Sound. If the soile were as good as the harboroughes are, it were a great +commoditie: but it is not to be called The new Land, but rather stones and +wilde cragges, and a place fit for wilde beastes, for in all the North +Iland I did not see a Cart-load of good earth: yet went I on shoare in +many places, and in the Iland of White Sand, there is nothing else but +mosse and small thornes scattered here and there, withered and dry. To be +short, I beleeue that this was the land that God allotted to Caine. There +are men of an indifferent good stature and bignesse, but wilde and vnruly: +they weare their haire tied on the top like a wreath of hay, and put a +wooden pinne within it, or any other such thing instead of a naile, and +with them they binde certaine birdes feathers. They are clothed with +beastes skinnes as well the men as women, but that the women go somewhat +straiter and closer in their garments than the men do, with their wastes +girded: they paint themselues with certaine Roan colours: (M97) their +boates are made of the barke of birch trees, with the which they fish and +take great store of Seales, and as farre as we could vnderstand since our +comming thither, that is not their habitation, but they come from the +maine land out of hotter countreys, to catch the saide seales and other +necessaries for their liuing. + + + +Of certaine Capes, that is to say, The double Cape, The pointed Cape, Cape +Royal, and the Cape of Milke: of the mountaines of Granges: of the Ilands +of Doue houses: and of the great fishing of Cods. + + +Vpon the 13. of that moneth we came to our ships againe with our boats on +purpose to saile forwards because the weather was faire, and vpon Sunday +we caused Seruice to be saide; then on Munday being the 15. of the moneth +we departed from Brest, and sailed toward the South to take a view of the +lands that there wee had seene, that seemed vnto vs to bee two Ilands: but +when we were amidst the Bay, we knew it to be firme land, where was a +great double Cape one aboue the other, and therefore wee named it The +double Cape. In the entrance of the Bay wee sounded, and found it to be an +hundred fadome round about vs. From Brest to The double Cape there is +about 20 leagues, and about fiue or sixe leagues beyond we sounded againe +and found 40 fadome water. The said land lieth Northeast and Southwest. +The next day being the 16 of the moneth we sailed along the said coast +toward the Southwest, and by South about 35 leagues from the double Cape, +where we found very steepe and wilde hilles, among the which were seene +certaine smal cabbans, which we in the countrey call Granges, and +therefore we named them The hilles of the Granges. The other lands and +mountaines are all craggie, cleft and cut, and betwixt them and the Sea, +there are other Ilands, but low. The day before through the darke mists +and fogges of the weather, we could not haue sight of any land, but in the +euening we spied an entrance into the land, by a riuer among the said +Hilles of Granges, and a Cape lying toward the Southwest about 3 leagues +from vs. The said Cape is on the top of it blunt-pointed, and also toward +the Sea it endeth in a point, wherefore wee named it The pointed Cape, on +the North side of which there is a plaine Iland. And because we would haue +notice of the said entrance, to see if there were any good hauens, we +strooke saile for that night. The next day being the 17 of the moneth we +had stormie weather from Northeast, wherefore we tooke our way toward the +Southwest, vntill Thursday morning, and we went about 37 leagues, till wee +came athwart a Bay full of round Ilands like doue houses, and therefore +wee named them The doue houses. And from the Bay of S. Iulian, from the +which to a Cape that lieth South and by West, which wee called Cape Roial, +there are 7. leagues, and toward the West southwest side of the saide +Cape, there is another that beneath is all craggie, and aboue round. On +the North side of which about halfe a league there lieth a low Iland: that +Cape we named The Cape of milke. Betweene these two Capes there are +certaine low Ilands, aboue which there are also certaine others that shew +that there be some riuers. About two leagues from Cape royall wee sounded +and found 20 fadome water, and there is the greatest fishing of Cods that +possible may be: for staying for our company, in lesse then an houre we +tooke aboue an hundreth of them. + + + +Of certaine Ilands that lie betweene Cape Royall, and The Cape of milke. + + +The next day being the 18 of the moneth, the winde with such rage turned +against vs, that we were constrained to go backe towards Cape Royal, +thinking there to finde some harborough, and with our boates went to +discouer betweene the Cape Royal, and the Cape of Milke, and found that +aboue the low Ilands there is a great and very deepe gulfe, within which +are certaine Ilands. The said gulfe on the Southside is shut vp. The +foresaid low grounds are on one of the sides of the entrance, and Cape +Royal is on the other. The saide low grounds doe stretch themselues more +then halfe a league within the Sea. It is a plaine countrey, but an ill +soile: and in the middest of the entrance thereof, there is an Iland. The +saide gulfe in latitude is fourtie eight degrees and an halfe, and in +longitude ----.(15) That night we found no harborough, and therefore we +lanched out into the Sea, leauing the Cape toward the West. + + + +Of the Iland called S. Iohn. + + +From the said day vntill the 24 of the moneth being S. Iohns day we had +both stormie weather and winde against vs, with such darknesse and mistes, +that vntill S. Iohns day, we could haue no sight of any land, and then we +had sight of a Cape of land, that from Cape Royal lieth Southwest about 35 +leagues, but that day was so foggie and mistie, that we could not come +neere land, and because it was S. Iohns day, we named it Cape S. Iohn. + + + +Of certaine Ilands called the Ilands of Margaulx, and of the kinds of beas +and birds that there are found. Of the Iland of Brion, and Cape Dolphin. + + +The next day being the 25. of the moneth, the weather was also stormie, +darke, and windy, but yet we sailed a part of the day toward West North +west, and in the euening wee out our selues athwart vntill the second +quarter: when as we departed, then did we by our compasse know that we +were Northwest and by West about seuen leagues and an halfe from the Cape +of S. Iohn, and as wee were about to hoise saile, the winde turned into +the Northwest, wherefore we went Southeast, about 15. leagues, and came to +three Ilands, two of which are as steepe and vpright as any wall, so that +it was not possible to climbe them: and betweene them there is a little +rocke. These Ilands were as full of birds, as any field or medow is of +grasse, which there do make their nestes: and in the greatest of them, +there was a great and infinite number of those that wee call Margaulx, +that are white, and bigger then any geese, which were seuered in one part. +In the other were onely Godetz, but toward the shoare there were of those +Godetz, and great Apponatz, like to those of that Iland that we aboue haue +mentioned: we went downe to the lowest part of the least Iland, where we +killed aboue a thousand of those Godetz, and Apponatz. (M98) We put into +our boates so many of them as we pleased, for in lesse then one houre we +might haue filled thirtie such boats of them: we named them The Ilands of +Margaulx. About fiue leagues from the said Ilands on the West, there is +another Iland that is about two leagues in length, and so much in breadth: +there did we stay all night to take in water and wood. That Iland is +enuironed round about with sand, and hath a very good road about it three +or foure fadome deepe. Those Ilands haue the best soile that euer we saw, +for that one of their fields is more worth then all the New land. We found +it all full of goodly trees, medowes, fields full of wild corne and peason +bloomed, as thicke, as ranke, and as faire as any can be seene in +Britaine, so that they seemed to haue bene plowed and sowed. There was +also a great store of gooseberies, strawberies, damaske roses, parseley, +with other very sweete and pleasant hearbes. (M99) About the said Iland +are very great beastes as great as oxen, which haue two great teeth in +their mouths like vnto Elephants teeth, and liue also in the Sea. We saw +one of them sleeping vpon the banke of the water: wee thinking to take it, +went to it with our boates, but so soone as he heard vs, he cast himselfe +into the Sea. We also saw beares and wolues: we named it Brions Iland. +About it toward Southeast, and Northwest, there are great lakes. As farre +as I could gather and comprehend, I thinke that there be some passage +betweene New found land, and Brions land. If so it were, it would be a +great shortening, aswel of the time as of the way, if any perfection could +be found in it. About foure leagues from that Iland toward West-South-west +is the firme land, which seemeth to be as an Iland compassed about with +litle Ilands of sands. There is a goodly Cape which we named Cape Dolphin, +for there is the beginning of good grounds. On the 27. of Iune we +compassed the said lands about that lie West Southwest: and a farre off +they seeme to be little hilles of sand, for they are but low landes: wee +could neither goe to them, nor land on them, because the winde was against +vs. That day we went 15. leagues. + + + +Of the Iland called Alezai, and of the cape of S. Peter. + + +The next day we went along the said land about 10. leagues, till we came +to a Cape of redde land, that is all craggie, within the which there is a +bracke looking toward the North. It is a very low countrey. There is also +betweene the Sea and a certaine poole, a plaine field: and from that Cape +of land and the poole vnto another Cape, there are about 14 leagues. The +land is fashioned as it were halfe a circle, all compassed about with sand +like a ditch, ouer which as farre as ones eye can stretch, there is +nothing but marrish grounds and standing pooles. And before you come to +the first Cape very neere the maine land there are two little Ilands. +About fiue leagues from the second Cape toward the Southwest, there is +another Iland very high and pointed, which we named Alezai. The first Cape +we named S. Peters Cape, because vpon that day we came thither. + + + +Of the Cape called Cape Orleans: of the Riuer of boates: of Wilde mens +Cape: and of the qualitie and temperature of the countrey. + + +From Brions Iland to this place there is good anckorage of sand, and +hauing sounded toward Southwest euen to the shoare about fiue leagues, wee +found twentie and fiue fadome water, and within one league twelue fadome, +and very neere the shoare six fadome, rather more then lesse, and also +good anckorage. But because wee would bee the better acquainted with this +stonie and rockie ground, wee strooke our sailes lowe and athwart. The +next day being the last of the moneth saue one, the winde blewe South and +by East. Wee sailed Westward vntill Tuesday morning at Sunne rising, being +the last of the moneth, without any sight or knowledge of any lande except +in the euening toward Sunne set, that wee discouered a lande which seemed +to be two Ilands, that were beyond vs West southwest, about nine or tenne +leagues. All the next day till the next morning at sunne rising wee sailed +Westward about fourtie leagues, and by the way we perceiued that the land +we had seene like Ilands, was firme land, lying South southeast, and North +northwest, to a very good Cape of land called Cape Orleans. (M100) Al the +said land is low and plaine, and the fairest that may possibly be seene, +full of goodly medowes and trees. True it is that we could finde no +harborough there, because it is all full of shelues and sands. We with our +boats went on shore in many places, and among the rest wee entred into a +goodly riuer, but very shallow, which we named The riuer of boats, because +that there wee saw boates full of wild men that were crossing the riuer. +We had no other notice of the said wild men: for the wind came from the +sea, and so beat vs against the shore, that wee were constrained to retire +our selues with our boates toward our ships. Till the next day morning at +Sunne rising, being the first of Iuly we sailed Northeast, in which time +there rose great mistes and stormes, and therefore wee strucke our sailes +till two of the clocke in the afternoone, that the weather became cleare, +and there we had sight of Cape Orleans, and of another about seuen leagues +from vs, lying North and by East, and that we called Wilde mens Cape. On +the Northside of this Cape about halfe a league, there is a very dangerous +shelfe, and banke of stones. Whilst wee were at this Cape, we sawe a man +running after our boates that were going along the coast, who made signes +vnto vs that we should returne toward the said Cape againe. We seeing such +signes, began to turne toward him, but he seeing vs come, began to flee: +so soone as we were come on shoare, we set a knife before him and a +woollen girdle on a little staffe, and then came to our ships again. That +day we trended the said land about 9. or 10. leagues, hoping to finde some +good harborough, but it was not possible: for as I haue said already, it +is a very low land, and enuironed round about with great shelues. +Neuerthelesse we went that (M101) day on shore in foure places to see the +goodly and sweete smelling trees that were there: we found them to be +Cedars, ewetrees, Pines, white elmes, ashes, willowes, with many other +sorts of trees to vs vnknowen, but without any fruit. The grounds where no +wood is, are very faire, and all full of peason, white and red +gooseberies, strawberies, blackeberies, and wilde corne, euen like vnto +Rie, which seemed to have bene sowen and plowed. This countrey is of +better temperature then any other that can be seene, and very hote. There +are many thrushes, stockdoues, and other birds: to be short, there wanteth +nothing but good harboroughs. + + + +Of the Bay called S. Lunario, and other notable Bayes and Capes of land, +and of the qualitie, and goodnesse of those grounds. + + +The next day being the second of Iuly we discouered and had sight of land +on the Northerne side toward vs, that did joyne vnto the land abouesaid, +al compassed about, and we knew that it had about ----(16) in depth, and as +much athwart, and we named it S. Lunarios Bay, and with our boats we went +to the Cape toward the North, and found the shore so shallow, that for the +space of a league from land there was but a fadome water. On the Northeast +side from the said Cape about 7. or 8. leagues there is another Cape of +land, in the middst whereof there is a Bay fashioned trianglewise, very +deepe, and as farre off, as we could ken from it the same lieth Northeast. +The said Bay is compassed about with sands and shelues about 10. leagues +from land, and there is but two fadome water: from the said Cape to the +bank of the other, there is about 15. leagues. We being a crosse the said +Capes, discouered another land and Cape, and as farre as we could ken, it +lay North and by East. All that night the weather was very ill, and great +winds, so that wee were constrained to beare a smal saile vntil the next +morning, being the thirde of July when the winde came from the West: and +we sailed Northward to haue a sight of the land that we had left on the +Northeast side, aboue the low lands, among which high and low lands there +is a gulfe or breach in some places about 55. fadome deepe, and 15. +leagues in bredth. By reason of the great depth and bredth of the gulfe, +and change of the lands, (M102) we conceiued hope that we should finde a +passage, like vnto the passage of The Castles. The said gulfe lieth East +Northeast, and West southwest. The ground that lieth on the Southside of +the said gulfe, is as good and easie to be manured, and full of as goodly +fields and meadowes, as any that euer wee haue seene, as plaine and smooth +as any die: and that which lyeth on the North is a countrey altogether +hilly, full of woods, and very high and great trees of sundry sorts: +(M103) among the rest there are as goodly Ceders, and Firre trees, as +possibly can be seene, able to make mastes for ships of three hundred +Tunne: neither did we see any place that was not full of the saide trees, +except two onely that were full of goodly medowes, with two very faire +lakes. The middest of the said Bay is 47. degrees and halfe in latitude. + + + +Of the Cape D'Esperance, or the Cape of Hope, and of S. Martins Creeke, +and how seven boats full of wilde men comming to our boat, would not +retire themselues, but being terrified with our Culuerins which we shot at +them, and our lances, they fled with great hast. + + +The Cape of the said South land was called The Cape of Hope, through the +hope that there we had to finde some passage. The fourth of Iuly we went +along the coast of the said land on the Northerly side to find some +harborough, where wee entred into a creeke altogether open toward the +South, where there is no succour against the wind: we thought good to name +it S. Martines Creeke. There we stayed from the fourth of Iuly vntil the +twelfth: while we were there, on Munday being the sixth of the moneth, +Seruice being done, wee with one of our boates went to discouer a Cape and +point of land that on the Westerne side was about seuen or eight leagues +from vs, to see which way it did bend, and being within halfe a league of +it, wee sawe two companies of boates of wilde men going from one land to +the other: (M104) their boates were in number about fourtie or fiftie. One +part of the which came to the said point, and a great number of men went +on shore making a great noise, beckening vnto vs that wee should come on +land, shewing vs certaine skinnes vpon pieces of wood, but because we had +but one onely boat, wee would not goe to them, but went to the other side +lying in the See: they seeing vs flee, prepared two of their boats to +follow vs, with which came also fiue more of them that were comming from +the Sea side, all which approched neere vnto our boate, dancing, and +making many signes of ioy and mirth, as it were desiring our friendship, +saying in their tongue Napeu tondamen assurtah, with many other words that +we vnderstood not. But because (as we haue said) we had but one boat, wee +would not stand to their courtesie, but made signes vnto them that they +should turne back, which they would not do, but with great furie came +toward vs: and suddenly with their boates compassed vs about: and because +they would not away from vs by any signes that we could make, we shot off +two pieces among them, which did so terrifie them, that they put +themselues to flight toward the sayde point, making a great noise: and +hauing staid a while, they began anew, euen as at the first to come to vs +againe, and being come neere our boat wee strucke at them with two lances, +which thing was so great a terrour vnto them, that with great haste they +beganne to flee, and would no more follow vs. + + + +How the said wilde men comming to our ships, and our men going toward +them, both parties went on land, and how the saide wilde men with great +ioy began to trafique with our men. + + +The next day part of the saide wilde men with nine of their boates came to +the point and entrance of the Creeke, where we with our ships were at +road. We being aduertised of their comming, went to the point where they +were with our boates: but so soone as they saw vs, they began to flee, +making signes that they came to trafique with us, shewing vs, such skinnes +as they cloth themselues withall, which are of small value. We likewise +made signes vnto them, that we wished them no euill: and in signe thereof +two of our men ventured to go on land to them, and carry them kniues with +other Iron wares, and a red hat to giue vnto their Captaine. Which when +they saw, they also came on land, and brought some of their skinnes, and +so began to deale with vs, seeming to be very glad to haue our iron ware +and other things, stil dancing with many other ceremonies, as with their +hands to cast Sea water on their heads. They gave vs whatsoeuer they had, +not keeping any thing, so that they were constrained to go back againe +naked, and made signes that the next day they would come againe, and bring +more skinnes with them. + + + +How that we hauing sent two of our men on land with wares, there came +about 300. wilde men with great gladnesse. Of the qualitie of the +countrey, what it bringeth forth, and of the Bay called Baie du Chaleur, +or The Bay of heat. + + +Vpon Thursday being the eight of the moneth, because the winde was not +good to go out with our ships, we set our boates in a readinesse to goe to +discouer the said Bay, and that day wee went 25. leagues within it. The +next day the wind and weather being faire, we sailed vntil noone, in which +time we had notice of a great part of the said Bay, and how that ouer the +low lands, there were other lands with high mountaines: but seeing that +there was no passage at all, wee began to turne back againe, taking our +way along the coast: and sayling, we saw certaine wilde men that stood +vpon the shoare of a lake, that is among the low grounds, who were making +fires and smokes: wee went thither, and found that there was a channel of +the sea that did enter into the lake, and setting our boats at one of the +banks of the chanell, the wilde men with one of their boates came vnto vs, +and brought vp pieces of Seales ready sodden, puttiug them vpon pieces of +wood: then retiring themselues, they would make signes vnto vs, that they +did giue them vs. We sent two men vnto them with hatchets, kniues, beads, +and other such like ware, whereat they were very glad, and by and by in +clusters they came to the shore where wee were, with their boates, +bringing with them skinnes and other such things as they had, to haue of +our wares. (M105) They were more than 300. men, women, and children: Some +of the women, which came not ouer, wee might see stand vp to the knees in +water, singing and dancing: the other that had passed the riuer where we +were, came very friendly to vs, rubbing our armes with their owne handes, +then would they lift them vp toward heauen, shewing many signes of +gladnesse: and in such wise were wee assured one of another, that we very +familiarly began to trafique for whatsoeuer they had, til they had nothing +but their naked bodies; for they gaue vs all whatsoeuer they had, and that +was but of small value. We perceiued that this people might very easily be +conuerted to our Religion. They goe from place to place. They liue onely +with fishing. They haue an ordinarie time to fish for their prouision. The +countrey is hotter than the countrey of Spaine, and the fairest that can +possibly be found, altogether smooth, and leuel. There is no place be it +neuer so little, but it hath some trees (yea albeit it be sandie) or else +is full of wilde corne, that hath an eare like vnto Rie: the corne is like +oates, and smal peason as thicke as if they had bene sowen and plowed, +white and red gooseberies, strawberies, blackberies, white and red Roses, +with many other floures of very sweet and pleasant smell. There be also +many goodly medowes full of grasse, and lakes wherein great plentie of +salmons be. (M106) They call a hatchet in their tongue Cochi, and a knife +Bacon: we named it The bay of heat. + + + +Of another nation of wilde men: of their manners, liuing, and clothing. + + +Being certified that there was no passage through the said Bay, we hoised +saile, and went from S. Martines Creeke vpon Sunday being the 12. of July, +to goe and discouer further beyond the said Bay, and went along the sea +coast Eastward about eighteene leagues, till we came to the Cape of Prato, +where we found the tide very great, but shallow ground, and the Sea +stormie, so that we were constrained to draw toward shore, between the +said Cape and an Iland lying Eastward, about a league from the said Cape, +where we cast anker for that night. The next morning we hoised saile to +trend the said coast about, which lyeth North Northeast. But there rose +such a stormie and raging winde against vs, that we were constrained to +come to the place againe, from whence we were come: there did we stay all +that day til the next that we hoised vp saile, and came to the middest of +a riuer fiue or sixe leagues from the Cape of Prato Northward, and being +ouerthwart the said Riuer, there arose againe a contrary winde, with great +fogges and stormes. So that we were constrained vpon Tuesday being the +fourteenth of the moneth to enter into the riuer, and there did we stay +till the sixteenth of the moneth looking for faire weather to come out of +it: on which day being Thursday, the winde became so raging that one of +our ships lost an anker, and we were constrained to goe vp higher into the +riuer seuen or eight leagues, into a good harborough and ground that we +with our boates found out, and through the euill weather, tempest, and +darkenesse that was, wee stayed in the saide harborough till the fiue and +twentieth of the moneth, not being able to put out: in the meane time wee +sawe a great multitude of wilde men that were fishing for mackerels, +whereof there is great store. Their boates were about 40, and the persons +what with men, women, and children two hundred, which after they had +hanted our company a while, they came very familiarly with their boats to +the sides of our ships. We gaue them kniues, combes, beads of glasse, and +other trifles of small value, for which they made many signes of +gladnesse, lifting their hands vp to heauen dancing and singing in their +boates. These men may very well and truely be called Wilde, because there +is no poorer people in the world. For I thinke all that they had together, +besides their boates and nets was not worth fiue souce.(17) They goe +altogether naked sawing their priuities, which are couered with a little +skinne, and certaine olde skinnes that they cast vpon them. Neither in +nature nor in language, doe they any whit agree with them which we found +first: their heads be altogether shauen, except one bush of haire which +they suffer to grow vpon the top of their crowne as long as a horse taile, +and then with certaine leather strings binde it in a knot vpon their +heads. They haue no other dwelling but their boates, which they turne +vpside downe, and vnder them they lay themselues all along vpon the bare +ground. They eate their flesh almost raw, saue onely that they heat it a +little vpon imbers of coales, so doe they their fish. Vpon Magdalens day +we with our boates went to the bancke of the riuer, and freely went on +shore among them, whereat they made many signs, and all their men in two +or three companies began to sing and dance, seeming to be very glad of our +comming. They had caused all the young women to flee into the wood, two or +three excepted, that stayed with them, to ech of which we gaue a combe, +and a little bell made of Tinne, for which they were very glad, thanking +our Captaine, rubbing his armes and breasts with their hands. When the men +saw vs giue something vnto those that had stayed, it caused al the rest to +come out of the wood, to the end that that they should haue as much as the +others: These women are about twenty, who altogether in a knot fell vpon +our Captaine, touching and rubbing him with their hands, according to +their manner of cherishing and making much of one, who gaue to each of +them a little Tinne bell: then suddenly they began to dance, and sing many +songs. There we found great store of mackrels, that they had taken vpon +the shore, with certaine nets that they made to fish, of a kinde of Hempe +that groweth in that place where ordinarily they abide, for they neuer +come to the sea, but onely in fishing time. (M107) As farre as I +vnderstand, there groweth likewise a kind of Millet as big as Peason, like +vnto that which groweth in Bresil, which they eate in stead of bread. They +had great store of it. They call it in their tongue Kapaige. They haue +also Prunes (that is to say Damsins) which they dry for winter as we doe, +they call them Honesta. They haue also Figs, Nuts, Apples, and other +fruits, and Beans, that they call Sahu, their nuts Cahehya. If we shewed +them any thing that they haue not, nor know not what it is, shaking their +heads, they will say Nohda, which is as much to say, they haue it not, nor +they know it not. Of those things they haue, they would with signes shew +vs how to dresse them, and how they grow. They eate nothing that hath any +taste of salt. They are very great theeues, for they will filch and steale +whatsoeuer they can lay hold of, and all is fish that commeth to net. + + + +How our men set vp a great Crosse vpon the poynt of the sayd Porte, and +the Captaine of those wild men, after a long Oration, was by our Captain +appeased, and contented that two of his Children should goe with him. + + +(M108) Vpon the 25 of the moneth, wee caused a faire high Crosse to be +made of the height of thirty foote, which was made in the presence of many +of them, vpon the point of the entrance of the sayd hauen, in the middest +whereof we hanged vp a Shield with three Floure de Luces in it, and in the +top was carued in the wood with Anticke letters this posie, Viue le Roy de +France. Then before them all we set it vpon the sayd point. They with +great heed beheld both the making and setting of it vp. So soone as it was +vp, we altogether kneeled downe before them, with our hands toward Heauen, +yeelding God thankes: and we made signes vnto them, shewing them the +Heauens, and that all our saluation, dependeth onely on him which in them +dwelleth: whereat they shewed a great admiration, looking first one at +another, and then vpon the Crosse. And after wee were returned to our +ships, their Captaine clad with an old Beares skin, with three of his +sonnes, and a brother of his with him, came vnto vs in one of their +boates, but they came not so neere vs as they were wont to doe: there he +made a long Oration vnto vs, shewing vs the crosse we had set vp, and +making a crosse with two fingers, then did he shew vs all the Countrey +about vs, as if he would say that all was his, and that wee should not set +vp any crosse without his leaue. His talke being ended, we shewed him an +Axe, faining that we would giue it him for his skin, to which he listned, +for by little and little hee came neere our ships. (M109) One of our +fellowes that was in our boate, tooke hold on theirs, and suddenly leapt +into it, with two or three more, who enforced them to enter into our +ships, whereat they were greatly astonished. But our Captain did +straightwaies assure them, that they should haue no harme, nor any iniurie +offred them at all, and entertained them very friendly, making them eate +and drinke. Then did we shew them with signes, that the crosse was but +onely set vp to be as a light and leader which wayes to enter into the +port, and that wee would shortly come againe, and bring good store of iron +wares and other things, but that we would take two of his children with +vs, and afterward bring them to the sayd port againe: and so wee clothed +two of them in shirts, and coloured coates, with red cappes, and put about +euery ones necke a copper chaine, whereat they were greatly contented: +then gaue they their old clothes to their fellowes that went backe againe, +and we gaue to each one of those three that went backe, a hatchet, and +some kniues, which made them very glad. After these were gone, and had +told the newes vnto their fellowes, in the after noone there came to our +ships sixe boates of them, with fiue or sixe men in euery one, to take +their farewels of those two we had detained to take with vs, and brought +them some fish, vttering many words which we did not vnderstand, making +signes that they would not remoue the crosse we had set vp. + + + +How after we were departed from the sayd porte, following our voyage along +the sayd coast, we went to discover the land lying Southeast, and +Northwest. + + +The next day, being the 25 of the moneth, we had faire weather, and went +from the said port: and being out of the riuer, we sailed Eastnortheast, +for after the entrance into the said riuer, the land is enuironed about, +and maketh a bay in maner of halfe a circle, where being in our ships, we +might see all the coast sayling behind, which we came to seeke, the land +lying Southeast and Northwest, the course of which was distant from the +riuer about twentie leagues. + + + +Of the Cape S. Aluise, and Cape Memorancie, and certaine other lands, and +how one of our Boates touched a Rocke and suddenly went ouer it. + + +On Munday being the 27 of the moneth, about sunne-set we went along the +said land, as we haue said, lying Southeast and Northwest, till Wednesday +that we saw another Cape where the land beginneth to bend toward the East: +we went along about 15 leagues, then doeth the land begin to turne +Northward. About three leagues from the sayd Cape we sounded, and found 24 +fadome water. The said lands are plaine, and the fairest and most without +woods that we haue seene, with goodly greene fields and medowes: we named +the sayd Cape S. Aluise Cape, because that was his day: it is 49 degrees +and an halfe in latitude, and in longitude ----.(18) On Wednesday morning we +were on the East side of the Cape, and being almost night we went +Northwestward for to approch neere to the sayd land, which trendeth North +and South. From S. Aluise Cape to another called Cape Memorancie, about +fifteene leagues, the land beginneth to bend Northwest. (M110) About three +leagues from the sayd Cape we would needes sound, but wee could finde no +ground at 150 fadome, yet went we along the said land about tenne leagues, +to the latitude of 50 degrees. The Saturday following, being the first of +August, by Sunne rising, wee had certaine other landes, lying North and +Northeast, that were very high and craggie, and seemed to be mountaines: +betweene which were other low lands with woods and riuers: wee went about +the sayd lands, as well on the one side as on the other, still bending +Northwest, to see if it were either a gulfe, or a passage, vntill the fift +of the moneth. The distance from one land to the other is about fifteene +leagues. The middle betweene them both is 50 degrees and a terce in +latitude. We had much adoe to go fiue miles farther, the winds were so +great and the tide against vs. And at fiue miles end, we might plainely +see and perceiue land on both sides, which there beginneth to spread it +selfe, but because we rather fell, then got way against the wind, we went +toward land, purposing to goe to another Cape of land, lying Southward, +which was the farthermost out into the sea that we could see, about fiue +leagues from vs, but so soone as we came thither, we found it to be naught +else but Rockes, stones, and craggie cliffes, such as we had not found any +where since we had sailed Southward from S. Iohns Cape: and then was the +tide with vs, which caried vs against the wind Westward, so that as we +were sayling along the sayd coast, one of our boats touched a Rocke, and +suddenly went ouer, but we were constrained to leape out for to direct it +on according to the tide. + + + +How after we had agreed and consulted what was best to be done, we +purposed to returne: and of S. Peters Streight, and of Cape Tiennot. + + +After we had sailed along the sayd coast, for the space of two houres, +behold, the tide began to turne against vs, with so swift and raging a +course, that it was not possible for vs with 13 oares to row or get one +stones cast farther, so that we were constrained to leaue our boates with +some of our men to guard them, and 10 or 12 men went ashore to the sayd +Cape, where we found that the land beginneth to bend Southwest, which +hauing seene, we came to our boats againe, and so to our ships, which were +stil ready vnder saile, hoping to go forward: but for all that, they were +fallen more then foure leagues to leeward from the place where we had left +them, where so soone as we came, wee assembled together all our Captaines, +Masters, and Mariners, to haue their aduice and opinion what was best to +be done: and after that euery one had said, considering that the Easterly +winds began to beare away, and blow, and that the flood was so great, that +we did but fall, and that there was nothing to be gotten, and that stormes +and tempests began to reigne in Newfound land, and that we were so farre +from home, not knowing the perils and dangers that were behind, for either +we must agree to returne home againe, or els to stay there all the yeere. +Moreouer, we did consider, that if the Northerne winds did take vs, it +were not possible for vs to depart thence. All which opinions being heard +and considered, we altogether determined to addresse our selues homeward. +(M111) Nowe because vpon Saint Peters day wee entred into the sayd +Streite, wee named it Saint Peters Streite. Wee sounded it in many places, +in some wee found 150 fadome water, in some 100, and neere the shoare +sixtie, and cleere ground. From that day till Wednesday following, we had +a good and prosperous gale of winde, so that we trended the said North +shore East, Southeast, West Northwest: for such is the situation of it, +except one Cape of low lands that bendeth more toward the Southeast, about +twenty fiue leagues from the Streight. In this place we saw certaine +smokes, that the people of the countrey made vpon the sayd cape: but +because the wind blewe vs toward the coast, we went not to them, which +when they saw, they came with two boates and twelue men vnto vs, and as +freely came vnto our ships, as if they had bene French men, and gaue vs to +vnderstand, that they came from the great gulfe,(19) and that Tiennot was +their Captaine, who then was vpon that Cape, making signes vnto vs, that +they were going home to their Countreys whence we were come with our +ships, and that they were laden with Fish. We named the sayd Cape, Cape +Tiennot. From the said Cape all the land trendeth Eastsoutheast, and +Westnorthwest. All these lands lie low, very pleasant, enuironed with +sand, where the sea is entermingled with marishes and shallowes, the space +of twentie leagues: then doth the land begin to trend from West to +Eastnortheast altogether enuironed with Islands two or three leagues from +land, in which as farre as we could see, are many dangerous shelues more +then foure or fiue leagues from land. + + + +How that vpon the ninth of August wee entred within White Sands, and vpon +the fift of September we came to the Port of S. Malo. + + +From the sayd Wednesday vntill Saturday following, we had a great wind +from the Southwest, which caused vs to run Eastnortheast, on which day we +came to the Easterly partes of Newfoundland, between the Granges and the +Double Cape. There began great stormie windes comming from the East with +great rage: wherefore we coasted the Cape Northnorthwest, to search the +Northerne part, which is (as we haue sayd) all enuironed with Islands, and +being neere the said Islands and land, the wind turned into the South, +which brought vs within the sayd gulfe, so that the next day being the 9 +of August, we by the grace of God entred within the white Sands. And this +is so much as we haue discouered. After that, vpon the 15 of August, being +the feast of the Assumption of our Lady, after that we had heard seruice, +we altogether departed from the porte of White Sands, and with a happy and +prosperous weather we came into the middle of the sea, that is between +Newfoundland and Britanie, in which place we were tost and turmoyled three +dayes long with great stormes and windy tempests comming from the East, +which with the ayde and assistance of God we suffred: then had we faire +weather, and vpon the fift of September, in the sayd yere, we came to the +Port of S. Malo whence we departed. + + + +The language that is spoken in the Land newly discouered, called New +France. + + +God ---- +the Sunne Isnez +the Heauen camet +the Day ---- +the Night aiagla +Water ame +Sand estogaz +a sayle aganie +the Head agonaze +the Throate conguedo +the Nose hehonguesto +the Teeth hesangue +the Nayles agetascu +the Feete ochedasco +the Legs anoudasco +a dead man amocdaza +a Skinne aionasca +that Man yca +a Hatchet asogne +a Cod fish gadagoursere +good to be eaten guesande +Flesh -------- +Almonds anougaza +Figs asconda +Gold henyosco +the priuie members assegnega +an Arrow cacta +a greene Tree haueda +an earthen dish vndaco +a Bow -------- +Brasse aignetaze +the Brow ansce +a Feather yco +the Moone casmogan +the Earth conda +the Wind canut +the Raine onnoscon +Bread cacacomy +the Sea amet +a Ship casaomy +a Man vndo +the Haires hoc hosco +the Eyes ygata +the Mouth heche +the Eares hontasco +the Armes agescu +a Woman enrasesco +a sicke Man alouedeche +Shooes atta +a skinne to couer a mans ouscozon +priuy members +red cloth cahoneta +a Knife agoheda +a Mackrell agedoneta +Nuttes caheya +Apples honesta +Beanes sahe +a Sword achesco + + + + +XV. A shorte and briefe narration of the Nauigation made by the +commandement of the King of France, to the Islands of Canada, Hochelaga, +Saguenay, and diuers others which now are called New France, with the +particular customes, and maners of the inhabitants therein. + + + +Chap 1. + + +In the yeere of our Lord 1535, vpon Whitsunday, being the 16. of May, by +the commandement of our Captaine Iames Cartier, and with a common accord, +in the Cathedrall Church of S. Malo we deuoutly each one confessed our +selues, and receiued the Sacrament: and all entring into the Quier of the +sayd Church, wee presented our selues before the Reuerend Father in +Christ, the Lord Bishop of S. Malo, who blessed vs all, being in his +Bishops roabes. The Wednesday following, being the 19. of May, there arose +a good gale of wind, and therefore we hoysed sayle with three ships, that +is to say, the great Hermina, being in burden about a hundreth, or a +hundreth and twentie tunne, wherein the foresaid Captaine Iames Cartier +was Generall, and master Thomas Frosmont chiefe Master, accompanied with +master Claudius de Pont Briand, sonne to the Lorde of Montceuell, and +Cup-bearer to the Dolphin of France, Charles of Pomeraies, Iohn Powlet, +and other Gentlemen. In the second ship called the little Hermina, being +of threescore tunne burden, were Captaines vnder the sayd Cartier, Mace +Salobert, and Master William Marie. In the third ship called the +Hermerillon, being of forty tunne in burden, were Captains M. William +Britton, and M. Iames Maringare. So we sayled with a good and prosperous +wind, vntill the 20 of the said moneth, at which time the weather turned +into stormes and tempests, the which with contrary winds, and darkenesse, +endured so long that our ships being without any rest, suffered as much as +any ships that euer went on seas: so that the 25 of Iune, by reason of +that foule and foggie weather, all our ships lost sight one of another +againe till wee came to Newfoundland where wee had appointed to meete. +After we had lost one another, wee in the Generals ship were with contrary +winds tost to and fro on the sea, vntill the seuenth of Iuly, vpon which +lyeth from the maine land 14 leagues. This Island is so full of birds, +that all our ships might easily haue bene fraighted with them, and yet for +the great number that there is, it would not seeme that any were taken +away. We to victuall our selues filled two boats of them. (M112) This +Island hath the Pole eleuated 49 degrees, and 40 minutes. (M113) Vpon the +eight of the sayd moneth we sailed further, and with a prosperous weather, +came to the Port called The Port of white sands, that is in the Bay called +The Bay of Castels, where we had purposed to meete and stay together the +15 of the said moneth. In this place therefore we looked for our fellowes, +that is to say, the other two ships, till the 26 of the moneth, on which +day both came together. So soone as our fellowes were come, we set our +ships in a readines, taking in both water, wood, and other necessaries. +And then on the 29 of the sayd moneth, early in the morning we hoised +saile to passe on further, and sayling along the Northerne coast that +runneth Northeast and Southwest, til two houres after Sun-set or +thereabouts, then we crossed along two Islands, which doe stretch further +foorth then the others, which we called S. Williams Islands, being distant +about 20 leagues or more from the Port of Brest. All the coast from the +Castels to that place lieth East and West, Northeast and Southwest, hauing +betweene it sundry little Islands, altogether barren and full of stones, +without either earth or trees, except certain valleys only. The next day +being the 30 of Iuly, we sailed on Westward to find out other Islands +which as yet we had not found 12 leagues and a halfe, among which there is +a great Bay toward the North all full of Islands and great creekes, where +many good harboroughs seeme to be: them we named S. Marthas Islands, from +which about a league and a halfe further into the sea there is a dangerous +shallow, wherein are fiue rockes, which lie from Saint Marthas Islands +about seuen leagues as you passe into the sayd Islands, on the East and on +the West side, to which we came the sayd day an houre after noone, and +from that houre vntill midnight we sailed about fifteene leagues athwart a +cape of the lower Islands, which we named S. Germans Islands. +Southeastward, from which place about three leagues, there is a very +dangerous shallow. Likewise betweene S. Germans cape and Saint Marthas, +about two leagues from the sayd Islands, there lyeth a banke of sand, vpon +which banke the water is but foure fadome deepe, and therefore seeing the +danger of the coast, we strucke saile and went no further that night: The +next day being the last of Iuly, we went all along the coast that runneth +East and West, and somewhat Southeasterly which is all enuironed about +with Islands and drie sands, and in trueth is very dangerous. The length +from S. Germans Cape to the said Islands is about 17 leagues and a halfe, +at the end of which there is a goodly plot of ground full of huge and high +trees, albeit the rest of the coast be compassed about with sands without +any signe or shew of harboroughs, till we came to Cape Thiennot, which +trendeth Northwest about seuen leagues from the foresaid Islands, which +Cape Thiennot we noted in our former voyage, and therefore we sailed on +all that night West and Westnorthwest, till it was day, and then the wind +turned against vs, wherefore we went to seeke a hauen wherein we might +harbour our ships, and by good hap, found one fit for our purpose, about +seuen leagues and a halfe beyond Cape Thiennot, and that we named S. +Nicholas Hauen, it lieth amidst 4 Islands that stretch into the sea: Vpon +the neerest wee for a token set vp a woodden crosse. But note by the way, +that this crosse must be brought Northeast, and then bending toward it, +leaue it on the left hand and you shall find sixe fadome water, and within +the hauen foure. Also you are to take heede of two shelues that leane +outward halfe a league. All this coast is full of shoulds and very +dangerous, albeit in sight many good hauens seeme to be there, yet is +there nought else but shelues and sands. We staied and rested our selues +in the sayd hauen, vntill the seuenth of August being Sonday: on which day +we hoysed sayle, and came toward land on the South side toward Cape +Rabast, distant from the sayd hauen about twentie leagues Northnortheast, +and Southsouthwest: but the next day there rose a stormie and a contrary +winde, and because we could find no hauen there toward the South, thence +we went coasting along toward the North, beyond the abouesayd hauen about +ten leagues, where we found a goodly great gulfe, full of Islands, +passages, and entrances toward what wind soeuer you please to bend: for +the knowledge of this gulfe there is a great Island that is like to a Cape +of lande, stretching somewhat further foorth than the others, and about +two leagues within the land, there is an hill fashioned as it were an +heape of corne. We named the sayd gulfe Saint Laurence his bay. (M114) The +twelfth of the sayd moneth wee went from the sayd Saint Laurence his Bay, +or gulfe, sayling Westward, and discouered a Cape of land toward the +South, that runneth West and by South, distant from the sayd Saint +Laurence his Bay, about fiue and twenty leagues. And of the two wilde men +which wee tooke in our former voyage, it was tolde vs, that this was part +of the Southerne coaste, and that there was an Island, on the Southerly +parte of which is the way to goe from Honguedo (where the yeere before we +had taken them) to Canada, and that two dayes iourney from the sayd Cape, +and Island began the Kingdome of Saguenay, on the North shore extending +toward Canada, and about three leagues athwart the sayd Cape, there is a +hundreth fadome water. (M115) Moreouer I beleeue that there were neuer so +many Whales seen as wee saw that day about the sayd Cape. The next day +after being our Ladie day of August the fifteenth of the moneth, hauing +passed the Straight, we had notice of certaine lands that wee left toward +the South, which landes are full of very great and high hilles, and this +Cape wee named The Island of the Assumption, and one Cape of the said high +countreys lyeth Eastnortheast, and Westsouthwest, the distance betweene +which is about fiue and twenty leagues. The Countreys lying North may +plainely be perceiued to be higher then the Southerly, more then thirty +leagues in length. We trended the sayd landes about toward the South: from +the sayd day vntill Tewesday-noone following, the winde came West, and +therefore wee bended toward the North, purposing to goe and see the land +that we before had spied. Being arriued there, we found the sayd landes, +as it were ioyned together, and low toward the Sea. And the Northerly +mountaines that are vpon the sayd low lands stretch East, and West, and a +quarter of the South. Our wild men told vs that there was the beginning of +Saguenay, and that it was land inhabited, and that thence commeth the red +Copper, of them named Caignetdaze. There is betweene the Southerly lands, +and the Northerly about thirty leagues distance, and more then two +hundreth fadome depth. (M116) The sayd men did moreouer certifie vnto vs, +that there was the way and beginning of the great riuer of Hochelaga and +ready way to Canada, which riuer the further it went the narrower it came, +euen vnto Canada, and that then there was fresh water, which went so farre +vpwards, that they had neuer heard of any man who had gone to the head of +it, and that there is no other passage but with small boates. Our Captaine +hearing their talke, and how they did affirme no other passage to be +there, would not at that time proceede any further, till he had seene and +noted the other lands, and coast toward the North, which he had omitted to +see from S. Laurence his gulfe, because he would know, if between the +lands toward the North any passage anight be discouered. + + + +Chap. 2. How our Captaine caused the ships to returne backe againe, only +to know if in Saint Laurence gulfe there were any passage toward the +North. + + +Vpon the 18 of August being Wednesday, our Captaine caused his shippes to +wind backe, and bend toward the other shore, so that we trended the said +Northerly cost, which runneth Northeast and Southwest, being fashioned +like vnto halfe a bowe, and is a very high land, but yet not so high as +that on the South parts. The Thursday following we came to seuen very high +Islands, which we named The round Islands. These Islands are distant from +the South shore about 40 leagues, and stretch out into the sea about 3 or +4 leagues. Against these there are goodly low grounds to be seene full of +goodly trees, which we the Friday following, with our boats compassed +about. Ouerthwart these lands there are diuers sandy shelues more then two +leagues into the sea, very dangerous, which at a low water remaine almost +dry. At the furthest bounds of these lowe lands, that containe about ten +leagues, there is a riuer of fresh water, that with such swiftnesse +runneth into the sea, that for the space of one league within it the water +is as fresh as any fountaine water. We with our boates entred in the sayd +riuer, at the entrance of which we found about one fadome and a halfe of +water. There are in this riuer many fishes shaped like horses, which as +our wild men told vs, all the day long lie in the water, and the night on +land: of which we saw therin a great number. (M117) The next day being the +21 of the moneth, by breake of day we hoysed saile, and sailed so long +along the said coast, that we had sight of the rest of the sayd Northerne +coast, which as yet we had not seene, and of the Island of the Assumption +which wee went to discouer, departing from the sayd land: which thing so +soone as we had done, and that we were certified no other passage to be +there, we came to our ships againe, which we had left at the said Islands, +where is a good harborough, the water being about nine or ten fadome. +(M118) In the same place by occasion of contrary winds and foggie mists, +we were constrained to stay, not being either able to come out of it, or +hoise saile, till the 24 of the moneth: On which day we departed and came +to a hauen on the Southerly coast about 80 leagues from the said Islands. +This hauen is ouer against three flat Islands that lie amidst the riuer, +because on the midway betweene those Islands, and the sayd hauen toward +the North, there is a very great riuer that runneth betweene the high and +low landes, and more then three leagues into the sea it hath many shelues, +and there is not altogether two fadome water, so that the place is very +dangerous: and neere vnto the said shelues, there is either fifteene or 20 +fadomes from shore to shore. All the Northerly coaste runneth Northeast +and by North, and Southwest and by South. The said hauen wherin we stayed +on the South side, is as it were but a sluce of the waters that rise by +the flood, and but of smal accompt: we named them S. Iohns Islets, because +we found them, and entred into them the day of the beheading of that +Saint. And before you come to the said hauen, there is an Island lying +Eastward about 5 leagues distant from the same: betweene which and the +land there is no passage sauing only for smal boats. The hauen of S. Iohns +Islets dryeth vp all the waters that rise by flowing, although they flow +two fadome at the least. The best place to harborough ships therein is on +the South part of a little Island that is ouer against the said hauen, +whereby the bancke or shore of the Island riseth. (M119) Vpon the first of +September we departed out of the said hauen, purposing to go toward +Canada; and about 15 leagues from it toward the West, and Westsouthwest, +amidst the riuer, there are three Islands, ouer against the which there is +a riuer which runneth swift, and is of a great depth, and it is that which +leadeth, and runneth into the countrey and kingdome of Saguenay, as by the +two wild men of Canada it was told vs. This riuer passeth and runneth +along very high and steepe hils of bare stone, where very little earth is, +and notwithstanding there is great quantity of sundry sorts of trees that +grow in the said bare stones, euen as vpon good and fertile ground, in +such sort that we haue seene some so great as wel would suffise to make a +mast for a ship of 30 tunne burden, and as greene as possibly can be, +growing in a stony rocke without any earth at all. At the entrance of the +sayd riuer we met with 4 boats ful of wild men, which as far as we could +perceiue, very fearfully came toward vs, so that some of them went backe +againe, and the other came as neere vs as easily they might heare and +vnderstand one of our wild men, who told them his name, and then tooke +acquaintance of them, vpon whose word they came to vs. The next day being +the 2 of September, we came out of the sayd riuer to go to Canada, and by +reason of the seas flowing, the tide was very swift and dangerous, for +that on the South part of it there lie two Islands, about which, more then +three leagues compasse, lie many rocks and great stones, and but two +fadome water: and the flowing amidst those Islands is very vnconstant and +doubtful, so that if it had not bene for our boats, we had been in great +danger to lose our Pinnesse: and coasting along the said drie sands, there +is more then 30 fadom water. + +About fiue leagues beyond the riuer of Saguenay Southwest, there is +another Iland on the Northside, wherein are certaine high lands, and +thereabouts we thought to haue cast anker, on purpose to stay the next +tide, but we could sound no ground in a 120 fadome, within a flight shoot +from shore, so that we were constrained to winde backe to the said Iland, +where wee sounded againe and found 35 fadome. The next morning we hoysed +saile and went thence, sayling further on, where we had notice of a +certaine kind of fish neuer before of any man seene or knowen. They are +about the bignesse of a porpose, yet nothing like them, of body very well +proportioned, headed like Grayhounds, altogither as white as snow without +any spot, within which riuer there is great quantitie of them: they doe +liue altogither betweene the Sea and the fresh water. These people of the +Countrey call them Adhothuys, they tolde vs that they be very sauory and +good to be eaten. Moreouer they affirme none to be found elsewhere but in +the mouth of that riuer. The sixth of the month, the weather being calme +and faire, we went about 15 leagues more vpward into the riuer, and there +lighted on an Iland that looketh Northward, and it maketh a little hauen +or creeke wherein are many and innumerable great Tortoyzes, continually +lying about that Iland. There are likewise great quantitie of the said +Adhothuys taken by the inhabitours of the countrey, and there is as great +a current in that place as is at Bordeux in France at euery tide. This +Iland is in length about three leagues, and in bredth two, and is a goodly +and fertile plot of ground, replenished with many goodly and great trees +of many sorts. (M120) Among the rest there are many Filberd-trees, which +we found hanging full of them, somewhat bigger and better in sauour then +ours, but somewhat harder, and therefore we called it The Iland of +Filberds. The seuenth of the moneth being our Ladies euen, after seruice +we went from that Iland to goe vp higher into the riuer, and came to 14 +Ilands seuen or eight leagues from the Iland of Filberds, where the +countrey of Canada beginneth, one of which Ilands is ten leagues in +length, and fiue in bredth, greatly inhabited of such men as onely liue by +fishing of such sorts of fishes as the riuer affordeth, according to the +season of them. (M121) After we had cast anker betwene the said great +Iland, and the Northerly coast, we went on land and tooke our two wild men +with vs, meeting with many of these countrey people, who would not at all +approch vnto vs, but rather fled from vs, vntill our two men began to +speake vnto them, telling them that they were Taignoagoy and Domagaia, who +so soone as they had taken acquaintance of them, beganne greatly to +reioyce, dancing and shewing many sorts of ceremonies: and many of the +chiefest of them came to our boats and brought many Eeles and other sorts +of fishes, with two or three burdens of great Millet wherewith they make +their bread, and many great muske millions. The same day came also many +other boates full of those countreymen and women, to see and take +acquaintance of our two men, all which were as courteously receiued and +friendly entertained of our Captaine, as possibly could be. And to haue +them the better acquainted with him, and make them his friends, hee gaue +them many small gifts, but of small value: neuerthelesse they were greatly +contented with them. The next day following, the Lord of Canada (whose +proper name was Donnacona, but by the name of Lord they call him +Agouhanna) with twelue boats came to our ships, accompanied with many +people, who causing ten of his boates to goe backe with the other two, +approched vnto vs with sixteene men. Then beganne the said Agouhanna ouer +against the smallest of our ships, according to their maner and fashion, +to frame a long Oration, moouing all his bodie and members after a strange +fashion, which thing is a ceremonie and signe of gladnesse and securitie +among them, and then comming to the Generals ship, where Taignoagny and +Domagaia were, he spake with them and they with him, where they began to +tell and shew vnto him what they had seene in France, and what good +entertainement they had had: hearing which things the said Lord seemed to +be very glad thereof, and prayed our Captaine to reach him his arme, that +he might kisse it, which thing he did: their Lord taking it, laid it about +his necke, for so they vse to doe when they will make much of one. Then +our Captaine entred into Agouhannas boat, causing bread and wine to be +brought to make the said Lord and his companie to eate and drinke, which +thing they did, and were greatly thereby contented and satisfied. Our +Captaine for that time gaue them nothing, because he looked for a fitter +opportunity. These things being done, ech one tooke leaue of others, and +the said Lord went with his boats againe to his place of abode. Our +Captaine then caused our boates to be set in order, that with the next +tide he might goe vp higher into the riuer, to find some safe harborough +for our ships: and we passed vp the riuer against the streame about tenne +leagues, coasting the said Iland, at the end whereof, we found a goodly +and pleasant sound, where is a little riuer and hauen, where by reason of +the flood there is about three fadome water. (M122) This place seemed to +vs very fit and commodious to harbour our ships therein, and so we did +very safely, we named it the holy Crosse, for on that day we came thither. +(M123) Neere vnto it, there is a village, whereof Donnacona is Lord, and +there he keepeth his abode: it is called Stadacona, as goodly a plot of +ground as possibly may be seene, and therewithall very fruitfull, full of +goodly trees euen as in France, as Okes, Elmes, Ashes, Walnut trees, Maple +tres, Cydrons, Vines, and white Thornes, that bring foorth fruit as bigge +as any damsons, and many other sortes of trees, vnder which groweth as +faire tall hempe, as any in France, without any seede or any mans worke or +labour at all. Hauing considered the place, and finding it fit for our +purpose, our Captaine withdrew himselfe on purpose to returne to our +ships: but behold, as we were comming out of the riuer we met comming +against vs one of the Lords of the said village of Stadacona, accompanied +with many others, as men, women, and children, who after the fashion of +their country, in signe of mirth and ioy, began to make a long Oration, +the women still singing and dancing vp to the knees in water. Our Captaine +knowing their good will and kindnesse toward vs, caused the boat wherein +they were, to come vnto him, and gaue them certaine trifles, as kniues, +and beades of glasse, whereat they were maruellous glad, for being gone +about leagues from them, for the pleasure they concerned of our comming we +might heare them sing, and see them dance for all they were so farre. + + + +Chap. 3. How our Captaine went to see and note the bignesse of the Iland, +and the nature of it, and then returned to the ships, causing them to be +brought to the riuer of The holy Crosse. + + +After we were come with our boats vnto our ships againe, our Captaine +caused our barks to be made readie to goe on land in the said Iland, to +note the trees that in shew seemed so faire, and to consider the nature +and qualitie of it: which things we did, and found it full of goodly trees +likes to ours. (M124) Also we saw many goodly Vines, a thing not before of +vs seene in those countries, and therefore we named it Bacchus Iland. It +is in length about twelue leagues, in sight very pleasant, but full of +woods, no part of it manured, vnlesse it be in certaine places, where a +few cottages be for Fishers dwellings as before we haue said. The next day +we departed with our ships to bring them to the place of the holy Crosse, +and on the 14 of that moneth we came thither, and the Lord Donnacona, +Taignoagny, and Domagaia, with 25 boats full of those people, came to +meete vs, comming from the place whence we were come, and going toward +Stadacona, where their abiding is, and all came to our ships, shewing +sundry and diuers gestures of gladnesse and mirth, except those two that +he had brought, to wit, Taignoagny, and Domagaia, who seemed to haue +altered and changed their mind, and purpose, for by no meanes they would +come vnto our ships, albeit sundry times they were earnestly desired to +doe it, whereupon we began to mistrust somewhat. Our Captaine asked them +if according to promise they would go with him to Hochelaga? They answered +yea, for so they had purposed, and then ech one withdrew himselfe. The +next day being the fifteenth of the moneth, our Captaine went on shore, to +cause certaine poles and piles to be driuen into the water, and set vp, +that the better and safelier we might harbour our ships there: and many of +those countrey people came to meete vs there, among whom was Donnacona and +our two men, with the rest of their company, who kept themselues aside +vnder a point or nooke of land that is vpon the shore of a certaine riuer, +and no one of them came vnto vs as the other did that were not on their +side. Our Captaine vnderstanding that they were there, commanded part of +our men to follow him, and he went to the saide point where he found the +said Donnacona, Taignoagny, Domagaia, and diuers other: and after +salutations giuen on ech side, Taignoagny setled himselfe formost to +speake to our Captaine, saying that the Lord Donnacona did greatly grieue +and sorrow that our Captaine and his men did weare warlike weapons, and +they not. Our Captaine answered, that albeit it did greeue them yet would +not he leaue them off, and that (as he knew) it was the maner of France. +But for all these words our Captaine and Donnacona left not off to speake +one to another, and friendly to entertaine one another. Then did we +perceiue, that whatsoeuer Taignoagny spake, was onely long of himselfe and +of his fellow, for that before they departed thence our Captaine and +Donnacona entred into a maruellous stedfast league of friendship, +whereupon all his people at once with a loude voyce, cast out three great +cryes, (a horrible thing to heare) and each one hauing taken leaue of the +other for that day, we went aboord againe. The day following we brought +our two great shippes within the riuer and harborough, where the waters +being at the highest, are three fadome deepe, and at the lowest, but halfe +a fadome. We left our Pinnesse without the road to the end we might bring +it to Hochelaga. So soone as we had safely placed our ships, behold we saw +Donnacona, Taignoagny and Domagaia, with more then fiue hundred persons, +men, women and children, and the said Lord with ten or twelue of the +chiefest of the countrey came aboord of our ships, who were all +courteously receiued, and friendly entertained both of our Captaine and of +vs all: and diuers gifts of small value were giuen them. Then did +Taignoagny tell our Captaine, that his Lord did greatly sorrow that he +would go to Hochelaga, and that he would not by any meanes permit that any +of them should goe with him, because the riuer was of no importance. Our +Captaine answered him, that for all his saying, he would not leaue off his +going thither, if by any meanes it were possible, for that that he was +commanded by his king to goe as farre as possibly he could: and that if he +(that is to say Taignoagny) would goe with him, as he had promised, he +should be very well entertained, beside that, he should haue such a gift +giuen him, as he should well content himselfe: for he should doe nothing +else but goe with him to Hochelaga and come againe. To whom Taignoagny +answered, that he would not by any meanes goe, and thereupon they sodainly +returned to their houses. The next day being the 17 of September, +Donnacona and his company returned euen as at the first, and brought with +him many Eeles, with sundry sorts of other fishes, whereof they take great +store in the said riuer, as more largely hereafter shall be shewed. And as +soone as they were come to our ships, according to their wonted use they +beganne to sing and dance. This done, Donnacona caused all his people to +be set on the one side: then making a round circle vpon the sand he caused +our Captaine with all his people to enter thereinto, then he began to make +a long Oration, holding in one of his hands a maiden child of ten or +twelue yeeres old, which he presented vnto our Captaine: then sodainly +beganne all his people to make three great shreeks, or howles, in signe of +ioy and league of friendship: presently vpon that he did present vnto him +two other young male children one after another, but younger then the +other, at the giuing of which euen as before they gaue out shreeks and +howles very loud, with other cerimonies: for which presents, our Captaine, +gaue the saide Lorde great and hearty thankes. Then Taignoagny told our +Captaine, that one of the children was his owne brother, and that the +maiden child was daughter vnto the said Lords owne sister, and the +presents were only giuen him to the end he should not goe to Hochelaga at +all: to whom our Captaine answered, that if they were only giuen him to +that intent, if so he would, he should take them againe, for that by no +meanes he would leaue his going off, for as much as he was so commanded of +his King. But concerning this, Domagaia told our Captaine that their Lord +had giuen him those children as a signe and token of goodwill and +security, and that he was contented to goe with him to Hochelaga, vpon +which talke great wordes arose betweene Taignoagny and Domagaia, by which +we plainely perceiued that Taignoagny was but a crafty knaue, and that he +intended but mischiefe and treason, as well by this deede as others that +we by him had seene. After that our Captaine caused the said children to +be put in our ships, and caused two Swords and two copper Basons, the one +wrought, the other plaine, to be brought vnto him, and them he gaue to +Donnacona, who was therewith greatly contented, yeelding most heartie +thankes vnto our Captaine for them, and presently vpon that he commanded +all his people to sing and dance, and desired our Captaine to cause a +peece of artillerie to be shot off, because Taignoagny and Domagaia made +great brags of it, and had told them maruellous things, and also, because +they had neuer heard nor seene any before: to whom our Captaine answered, +that he was content: and by and by he commanded his men to shoot off +twelue cannons charged with bullets into the wood that was hard by those +people and ships, at whose noyse they were greatly astonished and amazed, +for they thought that heauen had fallen ypon them, and put themselues to +flight, howling, crying, and shreeking, so that it seemed hell was broken +loose. But before we went thence, Taignoagny caused other men to tell vs, +that those men which we had left in our Pinnesse in the road, had slaine +two men of their company, with a peece of ordinance that they had shot +off, whereupon the rest had put themselues all to flight, as though they +should all haue bene slaine: which afterward we found vntrue, because our +men had not shot off any peece at all that day. + + + +Chap. 4. How Donnacona and Taignoagny with others, deuised a prettie +sleight or pollicie: for they caused three of their men to be attired like +Diuels, fayning themselues to be sent from their God Cudruaigny, onely to +hinder our voyage to Hochelaga. + + +The next day being the eighteenth of September, these men still endeuoured +themselues to seeke all meanes possible to hinder and let our going to +Hochelaga, and deuised a prettie guile, as hereafter shalbe shewed. They +went and dressed three men like Diuels, being wrapped in dogges skinnes +white and blacke, their faces besmeered as blacke as any coales, with +hornes on their heads more then a yard long, and caused them secretly to +be put in one of their boates, but came not neere our ships as they were +wont to doe, for they lay hidden within the wood for the space of two +houres, looking for the tide, to the end the boat wherein the Diuels were, +might approach and come neere vs, which when time was, came, and all the +rest issued out of the wood comming to vs, but yet not so neere as they +were wont to do. There began Taignoagny to salute our Captaine, who asked +him if he would haue the boate to come for him; he answered, not for that +time, but after a while he would come vnto our ships: then presently came +that boat rushing out, wherein the three counterfeit Diuels were with such +long hornes on their heads, and the middlemost came making a long Oration +and passed along our ships with out turning or looking toward vs, but with +the boat went toward the land. Then did Donnacona with all his people +pursue them, and lay hold on the boat and Diuels, who so soone as the men +were come to them, fell prostrate in the boate, euen as if they had beene +dead: then were they taken vp and carried into the wood, being but a +stones cast off, then euery one withdrew himselfe into the wood, not one +staying behind with vs, where being, they began to make a long discourse, +so loud that we might heare them in our ships, which lasted aboue halfe an +houre, and being ended we began to espie Taignoagny and Domagaia comming +towards vs, holding their hands vpward ioyned together, carying their hats +vnder their vpper garment, shewing a great admiration, and Taignoagny +looking vp to heauen, cryed three times Iesus, Iesus, Iesus, and Domagaia +doing as his fellow had done before, cryed, Iesus Maria, Iames Cartier. +Our Captaine hearing them, and seeing their gestures and ceremonies, asked +of them what they ailed, and what was happened or chanced anew; they +answered, that there were very ill tydings befallen, saying in French, +Nenni est il bon, that is to say, it was not good: our Captaine asked them +againe what it was, then answered they, that their God Cudruaigny had +spoken in Hochleaga: and that he had sent those three men to shewe vnto +them that there was so much yce and snow in that countrey, that whosoeuer +went thither should die, which wordes when we heard, we laughed and mocked +them saying, that their God Cudruaigny was but a foole and a noddie, for +he knew not what he did or said; then bade we them shew his messengers +from vs, that Christ would defend them all from colde, if they would +beleeue in him. Then did they aske of our Captaine if he had spoken with +Iesus: he answered no, but that his Priests had, and that he told them +they should haue faire weather: which wordes when they had heard, they +thanked our Captaine, and departed toward the wood to tell those newes +vnto their felowes, who sodainly came all rushing out of the wood, seeming +to be very glad for those words that our Captaine had spoken, and to shew +that thereby they had had, and felt great ioy, so soone as they were +before our ships, they altogether gaue out three great shreekes, and +thereupon beganne to sing and dance, as they were wont to doe. But for a +resolution of the matter Taignoagny and Domagaia tolde our Captaine, that +their Lord Donnacona would by no meanes permit that any of them should goe +with him to Hochelaga vnlesse he would leaue him some hostage to stay with +him: our Captaine answered them, that if they would not goe with him with +a good will, they should stay, and that for all them he would not leaue +off his iourney thither. + + + +Chap 5. How our Captaine with all his Gentlemen and fiftie Mariners +departed with our Pinnesse, and the two boates from Canada to goe to +Hochelaga: and also there is described, what was seene by the way vpon the +said riuer. + + +(M125) The next day being the 19 of September we hoysed saile, and with +our Pinnesse and two boates departed to goe vp the riuer with the flood, +where on both shores of it we beganne to see as goodly a countrey as +possibly can with eye be seene, all replenished with very goodly trees, +and Vines laden as full of grapes as could be all along the riuer, which +rather seemed to haue bin planted by mans hand than otherwise. (M126) True +it is, that because they are not dressed and wrought as they should be, +their bunches of grapes are not so great nor sweete as ours: also we sawe +all along the riuer many houses inhabited of Fishers, which take all +kindes of fishes, and they came with as great familiaritie and kindnesse +vnto vs, as if we had beene their Countreymen, and brought vs great store +of fish, with other such things as they had, which we exchanged with them +for other wares, who lifting vp their hands toward heauen, gaue many +signes of ioy: we stayed at a place called Hochelai, about fiue and +twentie leagues from Canada, where the riuer waxeth very narrow, and +runneth very swift, wherefore it is very dangerous, not onely for that, +but also for certaine great stones that are therein. Many boates and +barkes came vnto vs, in one of which came one of the chiefe Lords of the +contrey, making a long discourse, who being come neere vs, did by evident +signes and gestures shew vs, that the higher the riuer went, the more +dangerous it was, and bade vs take heede of our selues. The said Lord +presented and gaue vnto our Capuine two of his owne children, of which our +Captaine tooke one being a wench 7 or 8 yeres old, the man child he gaue +him againe, because it was too yong, for it was but two or three yeeres +old. Our Captaine as friendly and as courteously as he could did +entertaine and receiue the said Lord and his company, giuing them certaine +small trifles, and so they departed toward the shore againe. Afterwards +the sayd Lord and his wife came vnto Canada to visite his daughter, +bringing vnto our Captaine certaine small presents. From the nineteenth +vntill the eight and twentieth of September, we sailed vp along the saide +riuer, neuer losing one houre of time, all which time we saw as goodly and +pleasant a countrey as possibly can be wished for, full (as we haue said +before) of all sorts of goodly trees, that is to say, Okes, Elmes, +Walnut-trees, Cedars, Firres, Ashes, Boxe, Willowes, and great store of +Vines, all as full of grapes as could be, so that if any of our fellowes +went on shore, they came home laden with them: there are likewise many +Cranes, Swannes, Geese, Duckes, Feasants, Partriges, Thrushes, Blackbirds, +Turtles, Finches, Redbreasts, Nightingales, Sparrowes of diuerse kindes, +with many other sorts of Birds, euen as in France, and great plentie and +store. (M127) Vpon the 28 of September we came to a great wide lake in the +middle of the riuer fiue or sixe leagues broad, and twelue long, all that +day we went against the tide, hauing but two fadome water, still keeping +the sayd scantling: being come to one of the heads of the lake, we could +espie no passage or going out, nay, rather it seemed to haue bene closed +and shut vp round about, and there was but a fadome and an halfe of water, +little more or lesse. And therefore we were constrayned to cast anker, and +to stay with our Pinnesse, and went with our two boates to seeke some +going out, and in one place we found foure or fiue branches, which out of +the riuer come into the lake, and they came from Hochelaga. But in the +said branches, because of the great fiercenesse and swiftnesse wherewith +they breake out, and the course of the water, they make certaine barres +and shoulds, and at that time there was but a fadome water. Those Shouldes +being passed, we found foure or fiue fadome, and as farre as we could +perceiue by the flood, it was that time of the yeere that the waters are +lowest, for at other times they flowe higher by three fadomes. All these +foure or fiue branches do compasse about fiue or sixe Ilands very +pleasant, which make the head of the lake: about fifteene leagues beyond, +they doe all come into one. That day we landed in one of the saide +Islands, and met with fiue men that were hunting of wilde beastes, who as +freely and familiarly came to our boates without any feare, as if we had +euer bene brought vp togither. Our boates being somewhat neere the shore, +one of them tooke our Captaine in his armes, and caried him on shore, as +lightly and as easily as if he had bene a child of fiue yeeres old: so +strong and sturdie was this fellow. (M128) We found that they had a great +heape of wild Rats that liue in the water, as bigge as a Conny, and very +good to eate, which they gaue vnto our Captaine, who for a recompence gaue +them kniues and glassen Beades. We asked them with signes if that was the +way to Hochelaga, they answered yea, and that we had yet three dayes +sayling thither. + + + +Chap 6. How our Captaine caused our boates to be mended and dressed to goe +to Hochelaga: and because the way was somewhat difficult and hard, we left +our Pinnesse behinde: and how we came thither, and what entertainment we +had of the people. + + +(M129) The next day our Captaine seeing that for that time it was not +possible for our Pinnesse to goe on any further, he caused our boates to +be made readie, and as much munition and victuals to be put in them, as +they could well beare: he departed with them, accompanyed with many +Gentlemen, that is to say, Cladius of Ponte Briand, Cup-bearer to the +Lorde Dolphin of France, Charles of Pommeraye, Iohn Gouion, Iohn Powlet, +with twentie and eight Mariners: and Mace Iallobert, and William Briton, +who had the charge vnder the Captaine of the other two ships, to goe vp as +farre as they could into that riuer: we sayled with good and prosperous +weather vntill the second of October, on which day we came to the towne of +Hochelaga, distant from the place where we had left our Pinnesse fiue and +fortie leagues. In which place of Hochelaga, and (M130) all the way we +went, we met with many of those countriemen, who brought vs fish and such +other victuals as they had, still dancing and greatly reioycing at our +comming. Our Captaine to lure them in, and to keepe them our friends, to +recompence them, gaue them kniues, beades, and such small trifles, +wherewith they were greatly satisfied. So soone as we were come neere +Hochelaga, there came to meete vs aboue a thousand persons, men, women and +children, who afterward did as friendly and merily entertaine and receiue +vs as any father would doe his child, which he had not of long time seene, +the men dauncing on one side, the women on another, and likewise the +children on another: after that they brought vs great store of fish, and +of their bread made of Millet, casting them into our boates so thicke, +that you would haue thought it to fall from heauen. Which when our +Captaine sawe, he with many of his company went on shore: so soone as euer +we were aland they came clustring about vs, making very much of vs, +bringing their young children in their armes, onely to haue our Captaine +and his company to touch them, making signes and shewes of great mirth and +gladnesse, that lasted more than halfe an houre. Our Captaine seeing their +louing kindnesse and entertainment of vs, caused all the women orderly to +be set in aray, and gaue them Beades made of Tinne, and other such small +trifles, and to some of the men he gaue kniues: then he returned to the +boates to supper, and so passed that night, all which while all those +people stood on the shore as neere our boates as they might, making great +fires, and dauncing very merily, still crying Aguiaze, which in their +tonge signifieth Mirth and Safetie. + + + +Chap. 7. How our Captaine with fiue gentlemen and twentie armed men all +well in order, went to see the towne of Hochelaga, and the situation of +it. + + +(M131) Ovr Captaine the next day very rarely in the morning, hauing very +gorgeously attired himselfe, caused all his company to be set in order to +go to see the towne and habitation of those people, and a certaine +mountaine that is somewhat neere the citie: with whom went also fiue +Gentlemen and twentie Mariners, leauing the rest to keepe and looke to our +boates: we tooke with vs three men of Hochelaga to bring vs to the place. +All along as we went we found the way as well beaten and frequented as can +be, the fairest and best countrey that possibly can be seene, full of as +goodly great Okes as are in any wood in France, vnder which the ground was +all couered ouer with faire Akornes. (M132) After we had gone about foure +or fiue miles, we met by the way one of the chiefest Lords of the citie, +accompanied with many moe, who so soone as he sawe vs beckned and made +signes vpon vs, that we must rest vs in that place where they had made a +great fire, and so we did. After that we had rested our selues there a +while, the said Lord began to make a long discourse, euen as we haue saide +aboue, they are accustomed to doe in signe of mirth and friendship, +shewing our Captaine and all his company a ioyfull countenance, and good +will, who gaue him two hatchets, a paire of kniues and a crosse which he +made him to kisse, and then put it about his necke, for which he gaue our +Captaine heartie thankes. This done, we went along, and about a mile and a +halfe farther, we began to finde goodly and large fieldes, full of such +corne as the countrie yeeldieth. (M133) It is euen as the Millet of +Bresil, as great and somewhat bigger than small peason, wherewith they +liue euen as we doe with ours. (M134) In the midst of those fields is the +citie of Hochelaga, placed neere, and as it were ioyned to a great +mountaine that is tilled round about, very fertill, on the top of which +you may see very farre, we named it Mount Roiall. The citie of Hochelaga +is round, compassed about with timber; with three course of Rampires, one +within another framed like a sharpe Spire, but laide acrosse aboue. The +middlemost of them is made and built, as a direct line, but perpendicular. +The Rampires are framed and fashioned with peeces of timber, layd along on +the ground, very well and cunningly ioyned togither after their fashion. +This enclosure is in height about two rods. It hath but one gate or entrie +thereat, which is shut with piles, stakes, and barres. Ouer it, and also +in many places of the wall, there be places to runne along, and ladders to +get vp, all full of stones, for the defence of it. There are in the towne +about fiftie houses, about fiftie paces long, and twelue, or fifteene +broad, built all of wood, couered ouer with the barke of the wood as broad +as any boord, very finely and cunning ioyned togither. Within the said +houses, there are many roomes, lodgings and chambers. In the middest of +euery one there is a great Court, in the middle whereof they make their +fire. They liue in common togither: then doe the husbands, wiues and +children each one retire themselues to their chambers. They haue also on +the top of their houses certaine garrets, wherein they keepe their corne +to make their bread withall: they call it Carraconny, which they make as +hereafter shall follow. They haue certaine peeces of wood, made hollow +like those whereon we beat our hempe, and with certaine beetles of wood +they beat their corne to powder; then they make paste of it, and of the +paste, cakes or wreathes, then they lay them on a broad and hote stone, +and then couer it with hote stones, and so they bake their bread in stead +of Ouens. (M135) They make also sundry sorts of pottage with the said +corne and also of pease and of beanes, whereof they haue great store, as +also with other fruits, as Muske-Millions, and very great Cowcumbers. They +haue also in their houses certaine vessels as bigge as any But or Tun, +wherein they preserue and keepe their fish, causing the same in sommer to +be dried in the sunne, and liue therewith in winter, whereof they make +great prouision, as we by experience haue seene. All their viands and +meates are without any taste or sauour of salt at all. They sleepe vpon +barkes of trees laide all along vpon the ground being ouer-spread with the +skinnes of certaine wilde Beastes, wherewith they also cloth and couer +themselues. The thing most precious that they haue in all the world they +call Asurgny: it is as white as any snow: they take it in the said riuer +of Cornibotz, in the maner folowing. When any one hath deserued death, or +that they take any of their enemies in Warres, first they kill him, then +with certaine kniues they giue great slashes and strokes vpon their +buttocks, flankes, thighs, and shoulders: then they cast the same bodie so +mangled downe to the bottome of the riuer, in a place where the said +Esurgny is, and there leaue it ten or 12 houres, then they take it vp +againe, and in the cuts find the said Esurgny or Cornibotz. Of them they +make beads, and weare them about their necks, euen as we doe chaines of +gold and siluer, accounting it the preciousest thing in the world. (M136) +They haue this vertue and propertie in them, they will stop or stanch +bleeding at the nose, for we haue prooued it. These people are giuen to no +other exercise, but onely to husbandrie and fishing for their sustenance: +they haue no care of any other wealth or commoditie in this world, for +they haue no knowledge of it, and that is, because they neuer trauell and +go out of their countrey, as those of Canada and Saguenay doe, albeit the +Canadians with eight or nine Villages more alongst the riuer be subiects +vnto them. + + + +Chap. 8. How we came to the Towne of Hochelaga, and the entertainement +which there we had, and of certaine gifts which our Captaine gaue them, +with diuers other things. + + +So soone as we were come neere the Towne, a great number of the +inhabitants thereof came to present themselues before vs after their +fashion, making very much of vs: we were by our guides brought into the +middest of the towne. They haue in the middlemost part of their houses a +large square place, being from side to side a good stones cast, whither we +were brought, and there with signes were commanded to stay: then suddenly +all the women and maidens of the towne gathered themselues together, part +of which had their armes full of young children, and as many as could came +to rubbe our faces, our armes, and what part of the bodie soeuer they +could touch, weeping for very ioy that they saw vs, shewing vs the best +countenance that possibly they could, desiring vs with their signes, that +it would please vs to touch their children. That done, the men caused the +women to withdraw themselues backe, then they euery one sate downe on the +ground round about vs, as if they would haue shewen and rehearsed some +Comedie or other shew: then presently came the women againe, euery one +bringing a foure square Matte in manner of Carpets, and spreading them +abroad on the ground in that place, they caused vs to sit vpon them. That +done, the the Lord and King of the countrey was brought vpon 9 or 10 mens +shoulders, (whom in their tongue they call Agouhanna) sitting vpon a great +Stagges skinne, and they laide him downe vpon the foresaid mats neere to +the Captaine euery one beckning vnto vs that hee was their Lord and King. +This Agouhanna was a man about fiftie yeeres old: he was no whit better +apparelled then any of the rest, onely excepted, that he had a certaine +thing made of the skinnes of Hedgehogs like a red wreath, and that was in +stead of his Crowne. He was full of the palsie, and his members shronke +togither. After he had with certaine signes saluted our Captaine and all +his companie, and by manifest tokens bid all welcome, he shewed his legges +and armes to our Captaine, and with signes desired him to touch them, and +so he did, rubbing them with his owne hands: then did Agouhanna take the +wreath or crowne he had about his head, and gaue it vnto our Captaine: +that done they brought before him diuers diseased men, some blinde, some +criple, some lame and impotent, and some so old that the haire of their +eyelids came downe and couered their cheekes, and layd them all along +before our Captaine, to the end they might of him be touched: for it +seemed vnto them that God was descended and come downe from heauen to +heale them. Our Captaine seeing the misery and deuotion of this poore +people, recited the Gospel of Saint Iohn, that is to say, In the beginning +was the word; touching euery one that were diseased, praying to God that +it would please him to open the hearts of this poore people, and to make +them know his holy word, and that they might receiue Baptisme and +Christendome: that done, he tooke a Seruice-booke in his hand, and with a +loud voyce read all the passion of Christ, word by word that all the +standers by might heare him: all which while this poore people kept +silence, and were maruellously attentiue, looking vp to heauen, and +imitating vs in gestures. Then he caused the men all orderly to be set on +one side, the women on another, and likewise the children on an other, and +to the chiefest of them he gaue hatchets, to the other kniues, and to the +women beads and such other small trifles. Then where the children were, he +cast rings, counters, and brooches made of Tin, whereat they seemed to be +very glad. That done, our Captaine commanded Trumpets and other musicall +instruments to be sounded, which when they heard, they were very merie. +Then we tooke our leaue and went to our boate: the women seeing that, put +themselues before to stay vs, and brought vs out of their meates that they +had made readie for vs, as fish, pottage beanes, and such other things, +thinking to make vs eate, and dine in that place: but because the meates +had no sauour at all of salt, we liked them not, but thanked them, and +with signes gaue them to vnderstand that we had no neede to eate. When wee +were out of the Towne, diuerse of the men and women followed vs, and +brought vs to the toppe of the foresaid mountaine, which we named Mount +Roiall, it is about a league from the Towne. (M137) + +When as we were on the toppe of it, we might discerne and plainly see +thirtie leagues about. On the Northside of it there are many hilles to be +seene running West and East, and as many more on the South, amongst and +betweene the which the Countrey is as faire and as pleasant as possibly +can be seene, being leuell, smooth, and very plaine, fit to be husbanded +and tilled: and in the middest of those fieldes we saw the riuer further +vp a great way then where we had left our boates, where was the greatest +and the swiftest fall of water that any where hath beene seene, and as +great, wide, and large as our sight might discerne, going Southwest along +three faire and round mountaines that wee sawe, as we judged about +fifteene leagues from vs. Those which brought vs thither tolde and shewed +vs, that in the sayd riuer there were three such falles of water more, as +that was where we had left our boates: but because we could not vnderstand +their language, we could not knowe how farre they were from one another. +(M138) + +(M139) Moreouer they shewed vs with signes, that the said three fals being +past, a man might sayle the space of three monethes more alongst that +Riuer, and that along the hilles that are on the North side there is a +great riuer, which (euen as the other) commeth from the West, we thought +it to be the riuer that runneth through the Countrey of Saguenay: and +without any signe or question mooued or asked of them, they tooke the +chayne of our Captaines whistle, which was of siluer, and the dagger haft +of one of our fellow Mariners, hanging on his side being of yellow copper +guilt, and shewed vs that such stuffe came from the said Riuer, and that +there be Agouionda, that is as much to say, as euill people, who goe all +armed euen to their finger ends. Also they shewed vs the manner and making +of their armour: they are made of cordes and wood, finely and cunningly +wrought togither. They gaue vs also to vnderstande that those Agouionda +doe continually warre one against another, but because we did not +vnderstand them well, we could not perceiue how farre it was to that +Countrey. Our Captaine shewed them redde Copper, which, in their language +they call Caignetadze, and looking towarde that Countrey, with signes +asked them if any came from thence, they shaking their heads answered no: +but they shewed vs that it came from Saguenay, and that lyeth cleane +contrary to the other. After we had heard and seene these things of them, +we drewe to our boates accompanied with a great multitude of those people: +some of them when as they sawe any of our fellowes weary, would take them +vp on their shoulders, and carry them as on horsebacke. So soone as we +came to our boates we hoysed saile to goe toward our Pinnesse, doubting of +some mischance. Our departure grieued and displeased them very much, for +they followed vs along the riuer as farre as they could: we went so fast +that on Munday being the fourth of October wee came where our Pinnesse +was. The Tuesday following being the fift of the moneth, we hoysed saile, +and with our Pinnesse and boates departed from thence toward the Prouince +of Canada, to the port of the Holy Crosse, where we had left our ships. +The seuenth day we came against a riuer that commeth from the North, and +entred into that riuer, at the entrance whereof are foure little Ilands +full of faire and goodly trees: we named that riuer The riuer of Fouetz: +But because one of those Ilandes stretcheth it selfe a great way into the +riuer, our Captaine at the point of it caused a goodly great Crosse to be +set vp, and commanded the boates to be made readie, that with the next +tide he might goe vp the saide riuer, and consider the qualitie of it, +which wee did, and that day went vp as farre as we could: but because we +found it to be of no importance, and very shallow, we returned and sayled +down the riuer. + + + +Chap. 9. How we came to the Port of the Holy Crosse, and in what state we +found our ships: and how the Lord of the Countrey came to visite our +Captaine, and our Captaine him: and of certaine particular customes of the +people. + + +Vpon Monday being the 11 of October we came to the Port of the Holy +Crosse, where our ships were, and found that the Masters and Mariners we +had left there, had made and reared a trench before the ships, altogether +closed with great peeces of timber set vpright and verywell fastened +togither: then had they beset the said trench about with peeces of +Artillerie and other necessarie things to shield and defend themselues +from the power of all the countrey. So soone as the Lord of the countrey +heard of our comming, the next day being the twelfth of October, he came +to visite vs, accompanied with Taignoagny, Domagaia, and many others, +fayning to be very glad of our comming, making much of our Captaine, who +as friendly as he could, entertained them, albeit they had not deserued +it. Donnacona their Lord desired our Captaine the next day to come and see +Canada, which he promised to doe: for the next day being the 13 of the +moneth, he with all his Gentlemen and fiftie Mariners very well appointed, +went to visite Donnacona and his people, about a league from our ships. +The place where they make their abode is called Stadaoona. When we were +about a stones cast from their houses, many of the inhabitants came to +meete vs, being all set in a ranke, and (as their custome is) the men all +on one side, and the women on the other, still dancing and singing without +any ceasing: and after we had saluted and receiued one another, our +Captaine gaue them kniues and such other sleight things: then he caused +all the women and children to passe along before him, giuing each one a +ring of Tin, for which they gaue him hearty thankes: that done, our +Captaine was by Donnacona and Taignoagny, brought to see their houses, +which (the qualitie considered) were very well prouided, and stored with +such victuals as the countrey yeeldeth, to passe away the winter withall. +(M140) Then they shewed vs the skins of fiue mens heads spread vpon boards +as we do vse parchment: Donnacona told vs that they were skins of +Toudamani, a people dwelling toward the South, who continually doe warre +against them. Moreouer they told vs, that it was two yeeres past that +those Toudamans came to assault them, yea euen into the said riuer, in an +Iland that lyeth ouer against Saguenay, where they had bin the night +before, as they were going a warfaring in Hognedo, with 200 persons, men, +women, and children, who being all asleepe in a Fort that they had made, +they were assaulted by the said Toudamans, who put fire round about the +Fort, and as they would haue come out of it to saue themselues, they were +all slaine, only fiue excepted, who escaped. For which losse they yet +sorrowed, shewing with signes, that one day they would be reuenged: that +done, we came to our ships againe. + + + +Chap. 10. The maner how the people of that Countrey liue: and of certaine +conditions: of their faith, maners, and customes. + + +This people beleeue no whit in God, but in one whom they call Cudruaigni: +they say that often he speaketh with them and telleth them what weather +shal follow, whether good or bad. Moreouer they say, that when he is angry +with them he casteth dust into their eyes: they beleeue that when they die +they go into the stars, and thence by litle and little descend downe into +the Horizon, euen as the stars doe, and that then they goe into certaine +greene fields full of goodly faire and precious trees, floures, and +fruits. After that they had giuen vs these things to vnderstand, we shewed +them their error, and told that their Cudruaigni did but deceiue them, for +he is but a Diuell and an euill spirit: affirming vnto them, that there is +but one onely God, who is in heauen, and who giueth vs all necessaries, +being the Creatour of all himselfe, and that onely we must beleeue in him: +moreouer, that it is necessarie for vs to be baptised, otherwise wee are +damned into hell. (M141) These and many other things concerning our faith +and religion we shewed them, all which they did easily beleeue, calling +their Cudruaigni, Agouiada, that is to say, nought, so that very earnestly +they desired and prayed our Captaine that he would cause them to be +baptised, and their Lorde, and Taignoagny, Domagaia, and all the people of +the towne came vnto vs, hoping to be baptised: but because we did not +throughly know their minde, and that there was no bodie could teach them +our beliefe and religion, we excused our selues, desiring Taignoagny, and +Domagaia, to tell the rest of their countreymen, that he would come againe +another time, and bring Priests and chrisome with vs, for without them +they could not be baptised: which they did easily beleeue, for Domagaia +and Taignoagny had seene many children baptised in Britain whiles they +were there. Which promise when they heard they seemed to be very glad. +They liue in common togither: and of such commodities as their countrey +yeeldeth they are indifferently well stored, the inhabitants of the +countrey cloth themselues with the skinnes of certaine wilde beasts, but +very miserably. In winter they weare hosen and shoes made of wilde beasts +skins, and in Sommer they goe barefooted. They keepe and obserue the rites +of matrimonie sauing that euery one weddeth 2 or 3 wiues, which (their +husbands being dead) do neuer marrie againe, but for the death of their +husbands weare a certaine blacke weede all the daies of their life, +besmearing al their faces with cole dust and grease mingled togither as +thicke as the backe of a knife, and by that they are knowen to be +widdowes. They haue a filthy and detestable vse in marrying of their +maidens, and that is this, they put them all (after they are of lawfull +age to marry) in a common place, as harlots free for euery man that will +haue to doe with them, vntill such time as they find a match. This I say, +because I haue seene by experience many housen full of those Damosels, +euen as our schooles are full of children in France to learne to reade. +Moreouer, the misrule and riot that they keepe in those houses is very +great, for very wantonly they sport and dally togither, shewing whatsoever +God hath sent them. They are no men of great labour. They digge their +grounds with certaine peeces of wood, as bigge as halfe a sword, on which +ground groweth their corne, which they call Offici: it is as bigge as our +small peason: there is great quantitie of it growing in Bresill. (M142) +They haue also great store of Muske-milions, Pompions, Gourds, Cucumbers, +Peason and Beanes of euery colour, yet differing from ours. There groweth +also a certaine kind of herbe, whereof in Sommer they make great prouision +for all the yeere, making great account of it, and onely men vse of it, +and first they cause it to be dried in the Sunne, then weare it about +their neckes wrapped in a little beasts skinne made like a little bagge, +with a hollow peece of stone or wood like a pipe: then when they please +they make pouder of it, and then put it in one of the ends of the said +Cornet or pipe, and laying a cole of fire vpon it, at the other ende sucke +so long, that they fill their bodies full of smoke, till that it commeth +out of their mouth and nostrils, euen as out of the Tonnell of a chimney. +They say that this doth keepe them warme and in health: they neuer goe +without some of it about them. We ourselues haue tryed the same smoke, and +hauing put it in our mouthes, it seemed almost as hot as Pepper. The women +of that countrey doe labour much more then the men, as well in fishing +(whereto they are greatly giuen) as in tilling and husbanding their +grounds, and other things: as well the men as women and children, are very +much more able to resist cold then sauage beastes, for wee with our owne +eyes haue seene some of them, when it was coldest (which cold was extreme +raw and bitter) come to our ships starke naked going vpon snow and yce, +which thing seemeth incredible to them that haue not seene it. When as the +snow and yce lyeth on the ground, they take great store of wilde beasts, +as Faunes, Stags, Beares, Marterns, Hares and Foxes, with diuers other +sorts whose flesh they eate raw, hauing first dried it in the sunne or +smoke, and so they doe their fish. As farre foorth as we could perceiue +and vnderstand by these people, it were a very easie thing to bring them +to some familiaritie and ciuility, and make them learne what one would. +The Lord God for his mercies sake set thereunto his helping hand when he +seeth cause. Amen. + + + +Chap. 11. Of the greatnesse and depth of the said riuer, and of the sorts +of beasts, birdes, fishes, and other things that we haue seene, with the +situation of the place. + + +The said riuer beginneth beyond the Iland of the Assumption, ouer against +the high mountaines of Hognedo, and of the seuen Ilands. The distance ouer +from one side to the other is about 35 or 40 leagues. In the middest it is +aboue 200 fadome deepe. The surest way to sayle vpon it is on the South +side. And toward the North, that is to say, from the said 7 Ilands, from +side to side, there is seuen leagues distance, where are also two great +riuers that come downe from the hils of Saguenay, and make diuers very +dangerous shelues in the Sea. At the entrance of those two riuers we saw +many and great store of Whales and Sea horses. Ouerthwart the said Islands +there is another little riuer that runneth along those marrish grounds +about 3 or 4 leagues, wherein there is great store of water foules. (M143) +From the entrance of that riuer to Hochelaga there is about 300 leagues +distance: the originall beginning of it is in the riuer that commeth from +Saguenay, which riseth and springeth among high and steepe hils: it +entreth into that riuer before it commeth to the Prouince of Canada on the +North side. That riuer is very deepe, high, and streight, wherefore it is +very dangerous for any vessell to goe vpon it. After that riuer followeth +the Prouince of Canada, wherein are many people dwelling in open boroughes +and villages. There are also in the circuit and territorie of Canada, +along, and within the said riuer, many other Ilands, some great, and some +small, among which there is one that containeth aboue ten leagues in +length, full of goodly and high trees, and also many Vines. You may goe +into it from both sides, but yet the surest passage is on the South side. +On the shore or banke of that riuer Westward, there is a goodly, faire, +and delectable bay or creeke, conuenient and fit for to harborough ships. +Hard by there is in that riuer one place very narrow, deepe, and swift +running, but it is not passing the third part of a league, ouer against +the which there is a goodly high piece of land, with a towne therein: and +the countrey about it is very well tilled and wrought, and as good as +possibly can be seene. That is the place and abode of Donnacona, and of +our two men we tooke in our first voyage, it is called Stadacona. But +before we come to it, there are 4 other peopled townes, that is to say, +Ayraste, Starnatan, Tailla, which standeth vpon a hill, Scitadin, and then +Stadagona, vnder which towne toward the North the riuer and port of the +holy crosse is, where we staied from the 15 of September, vntil the 16 of +May 1536, and there our ships remained dry, as we haue said before. That +place being past, we found the habitation of the people called +Teguenondahi, standing vpon an high mountaine, and the valley of Hochelay, +which standeth in a Champaigne countrey. All the said countrey on both +sides of the riuer as farre as Hochelay and beyond, is as faire and plaine +as euer was seene. (M144) There are certain mountaines farre distaines +diuers riuers descend, which fall into the said riuer. All that countrey +is full of sundry sorts of wood and many Vines, vnless it be about the +places that are inhabited, where they haue pulled vp the trees to till and +labour the ground, and to build their houses and lodgings. (M145) There is +great store of Stags, Deere, Beares, and other such sorts of beasts, as +Connies, Hares, Marterns, Foxes, Otters, Beares, Weasels, Badgers, and +Rats exceeding great and diuers other sortes of wilde beasts. They cloth +themselues with the skinnies of those beasts, because they haue nothing +else to make them apparell withall. (M146) There are also many sorts of +birdes, as Cranes, Swannes, Bustards, wild Geese white and grey, Duckes, +Thrushes, Blackbirdes, Turtles, wilde Pigeons, Lenites, Finches, +Red-breasts, Stares, Nightingales, Sparrowes, and other Birdes, euen as in +France. (M147) Also, as we haue said before, the said riuer is the +plentifullest of fish that euen hath of any man bene seene or heard of, +because that from the mouth to the end of it, according to their seasons, +you shall finde all sorts of fresh water fish and salt. There are also +many Whales, Porposes, Seahorses, and Adhothuis, which is a kind of fish +that we had neuer seene or heard of before. They are as great as Porposes, +as white as any snow, their bodie and head fashioned as a grayhound, they +are wont alwaies to abide between the fresh and salt water, which +beginneth betweene the riuer of Saguenay and Canada. + + + +Chap. 12. Of certaine aduertisements and notes giuen vnto vs by those +countreymen, after our returne from Hochelaga. + + +After our returne from Hochelaga, we dealt, traffickt, and with great +familiaritie and loue were conuersant with those that dwelt neerest vnto +our ships, except that sometimes we had strife and contention with +certaine naughtie people, full sore against the will of the others. Wee +vnderstood of Donnacona and of others, that the said riuer is called the +riuer of Saguenay, and goeth to Sagnenay, being somewhat more then a +league farther Westnorthwest, and that 8 or 9 dayes journeys beyond, it +will beare but small boats. (M148) But the right and ready way to Saguenay +is vp that way to Hochelaga, and then into another that commeth from +Saguenay, and then entreth into the foresaid riuer, and that there is yet +one moneths sayling thither. (M149) Moreouer, they told vs and gave vs to +vnderstand, that there are people clad with cloth as we are, very honest, +and many inhabited townes, and that they haue great store of Gold and red +Copper: (M150) and that about the land beyond the said first riuer to +Hochelaga and Saguenay, is an Iland enuironed round about with that and +other riuers, and that beyond Saguenay the said riuer entereth into two or +3 great lakes, and that there is a Sea of fresh water found, and as they +haue heard say of those of Sanguenay, there was neuer man heard of that +found out the end thereof: for, as they told vs, they themselues were +neuer there. Moreouer they told vs, that where we had left our Pinnesse +when wee went to Hochelaga, there is a riuer that goeth Southwest, from +whence there is a whole moneths sayling to goe to a certaine land, where +there is neither yce nor snow seene, where the inhabitants doe continually +warre one against another, where there is great store of Oranges, Almonds, +Nuts, and Apples, with many other sorts of fruits, and that the men and +women are clad with beasts skinnes euen as they: we asked them if there +were any gold or red copper, they answered no. I take this place to be +toward Florida, as farre as I could perceiue and vnderstand by their +signes and tokens. + + + +Chap. 13. Of a strange and cruell disease that came to the people of +Stadacona, wherewith because we did haunt their company, we were so +infected, that there died 25 of our company. + + +In the moneth of December, wee vnderstood that the pestilence was come +among the people of Stadacona, in such sort, that before we knew of it, +according to their confession, there were dead aboue 50: whereupon we +charged them neither to come neere our Fort, nor about our ships, or vs. +And albeit we had driuen them from vs, the said vnknowen sicknes began to +spread itselfe amongst vs after the strangest sort that euer was eyther +heard of or seene, insomuch as some did lose all their strength, and could +not stand on their feete, then did their legges swel, their sinnowes +shrinke as blacke as any cole. Others also had all their skins spotted +with spots of blood of a purple coulour: then did it ascend vp to their +ankels, knees, thighes, shoulders, and necke: their mouth became +stincking, their gummes so rotten, that all the flesh did fall off, even +to the rootes of the teeth, which did also almost all fall out. With such +infection did this sicknesse spread itselfe in our three ships, that about +the middle of February, of a hundreth and tenne persons that we were, +there were not ten whole, so that one could not help the other, a most +horrible and pitifull case, considering the place we were in, forsomuch as +the people of the countrey would dayly come before our fort, and saw but +few of vs. There were alreadie eight dead, and more then fifty sicke, and +as we thought, past all hope of recouery. Our Captaine seeing this our +misery, and that the sicknesse was gone so farre, ordained and commanded, +that euery one should deuoutly prepare himselfe to prayer, and in +remembrance of Christ, caused his Image to be set vpon a tree, about a +flight shot from the fort amidst the yce and snow, giuing all men to +vnderstand, that on the Sunday following, seruice should be said there, +and that whosoeuer could goe, sicke or whole, should goe thither in +Procession, singing the seuen Psalmes of Dauid, with other Letanies, +praying most heartily that it would please the said our Christ to haue +compassion vpon vs. Seruice being done, and as well celebrated as we +could, our Captaine there made a vow, that if it would please God to giue +him leaue to returne into France, he would go on Pilgrimage to our Ladie +of Rocquemado. That day Philip Rougemont, borne in Amboise, died, being 22 +yeeres olde, and because the sicknesse was to vs vnknowen, our Captaine +caused him to be ripped to see if by any meanes possible we might know +what it was, and so seeke meanes to saue and preserue the rest of the +company: he was found to have his heart white, but rotten, and more then a +quart of red water about it: his liuer was indifferent faire, but his +lungs blacke and mortified, his blood was altogither shrunke about the +heart, so that when he was opened great quantitie of rotten blood issued +out from about his heart: his milt toward the backe was somewhat perished, +rough as it had bene rubbed against a stone. Moreouer, because one of his +thighs was very blacke without, it was opened, but within it was whole and +sound: that done, as well as we could he was buried. In such sort did the +sicknesse continue and increase, that there were not aboue three sound men +in the ships, and none was able to goe vnder hatches to draw drinke for +himselfe, nor for his fellowes. Sometimes we were constrained to bury some +of the dead vnder the snow, because we were not able to digge any graues +for them the ground was so hard frozen, and we so weake. Besides this, we +did greatly feare that the people of the countrey would perceiue our +weaknesse and miserie, which to hide, our Captaine, whom it pleased God +alwayes to keepe in health, would go out with two or three of the company, +some sicke and some whole, whom when he saw out of the Fort, he would +throw stones at them and chide them, faigning that so soone as he came +againe, he would beate them, and then with signes shewe the people of the +countrey that hee caused all his men to worke and labour in the ships, +some in calking them, some in beating of chalke, some in one thing, and +some in another, and that he would not haue them come foorth till their +worke was done. And to make his tale seeme true and likely, he would make +all his men whole and sound to make a great noyse with knocking stickes, +stones, hammers, and other things togither, at which time we were so +oppressed and grieued with that sicknesse, that we had lost all hope euer +to see France againe, if God of his infinite goodnesse and mercie had not +with his pitifull eye looked vpon vs, and reuealed a singular and +excellent remedie against all diseases vnto vs, the best that euer was +found vpon earth, as hereafter shall follow. + + + +Chap. 14. How long we stayed in the Port of the holy Crosse amidst the +snow and yce, and how many died of the said disease, from the beginning of +it to the midst of March. + + +From the midst of Nouember vntill the midst of March, we were kept in +amidst the yce aboue two fadomes thicke, and snow aboue foure foot high +and more, higher then the sides of our ships, which lasted till that time, +in such sort, that all our drinkes were frozen in the Vessels, and the yce +through all the ships was aboue a hand breadth thicke, as well aboue +hatches as beneath, and so much of the riuer as was fresh, euen to +Hochelaga, was frozen, in which space there died fiue and twentie of our +best and chiefest men, and all the rest were so sicke, that wee thought +they should neuer recouer againe, only three or foure excepted. Then it +pleased God to cast his pitiful eye vpon vs, and sent us the knowledge of +remedie of our healthes and recouerie, in such maner as in the next +Chapter shall be shewed. + + + +Chap. 15. How by the grace of God we had notice of a certaine tree, +whereby we all recouered our health: and the maner how to vse it. + + +Ovr Captaine considering our estate (and how that sicknesse was encreased +and hot amongst vs) one day went foorth of the Forte, and walking vpon the +yce, hee saw a troupe of those Countreymen comming from Stadacona, among +which was Domagaia, who not passing ten or twelue dayes afore, had bene +very sicke with that disease, and had his knees swolne as bigge as a +childe of two yeres old, all his sinews shrunke together, his teeth +spoyled, his gummes rotten, and stinking. Our Captaine seeing him whole +and sound, was thereat maruellous glad, hoping to vnderstand and know of +him how he had healed himselfe, to the end he might ease and help his men. +So soone as they were come neere him, he asked Domagaia how he had done to +heale himselfe: he answered, that he had taken the juice and sappe of the +leaues of a certain Tree, and therewith had healed himselfe: For it is a +singular remedy against that disease. Then our Captaine asked of him if +any were to be had thereabout, desiring him to shew him, for to heale a +seruant of his, who whilest he was in Canada with Donnacona, was striken +with that disease: That he did because he would not shew the number of his +sicke men. Domagaia straight sent two women to fetch some of it, which +brought ten or twelue branches of it, and therewithall shewed the way how +to vse it, and that is thus, to take the barke and leaues of the sayd +tree, and boile them togither, then to drinke of the sayd decoction euery +other day, and to put the dregs of it vpon his legs that is sicke: +moreouer, they told vs, that the vertue of that tree was, to heale any +other disease: the tree is in their language called Ameda or Hanneda, this +is thought to be the Sassafras tree. (M151) Our Captaine presently caused +some of that drink to be made for his men to drink of it, but there was +none durst tast of it, except one or two, who ventured the drinking of it, +only to tast and proue it; the other seeing that did the like, and +presently recovered their health, and were deliuered of that sickenes, and +what other disease soeuer, in such sorte, that there were some had bene +diseased and troubled with the French Pockes foure or fiue yeres, and with +this drinke were cleane healed. After this medicine was found and proued +to be true, there was such strife about it, who should be first to take +it, that they were ready to kill one another, so that a tree as big as any +Oake in France was spoiled and lopped bare, and occupied all in fiue or +sixe daies, and it wrought so wel, that if all the phisicians of +Mountpelier and Louaine had bene there with all the drugs of Alexandria, +they would not haue done so much in one yere, as that tree did in sixe +dayes, for it did so preuail, that as many as vsed of it, by the grace of +God recouered their health. + + + +Chap. 16. How the Lord Donnacona accompanied with Taignoagny and diuers +others, faining that they would goe to hunt Stags, and Deere, taried out +two moneths, and at their returne brought a great multitude of people with +them, that we were not wont to see before. + + +While that disease lasted in our ships the lord Donnacona, Taignoagny, +with many others went from home, faining that they would goe to catch +Stags and Deere, which are in their tongue called Aiounesta, and +Asquenoudo, because the yce and snow was not so broken along the riuer +that they could sayle: it was told vs of Domagaia and others, that they +would stay out but a fortnight, and we beleeued it, but they stayed aboue +two moneths, which made vs mistrust that they had bene gone to raise the +countrey to come against vs, and do vs some displeasure, we seeing our +selues so weake and faint. (M152) Albeit we had vsed such diligence and +policie in our Fort, that if all the power of the countrey had bene about +it, they could haue done nothing but looke vpon vs: and whilest they were +foorth, many of the people came dayly to our ships, and brought vs fresh +meat, as Stags, Deere, fishes, with diuers other things, but held them at +such an excessiue price, that rather then they would sell them any thing +cheape, many times they would carie them backe againe, because that yere +the Winter was very long, and they had some scarcity and neede of them. + + + +Chap. 17. How Donnacona came to Stadacona againe with a great number of +people, and because he would not come to visit our Captaine, fained +himselfe to be sore sicke, which he did only to haue the Captaine come see +him. + + +On the one and twentieth day of April Domagaia came to the shore side, +accompanied with diuers lusty and strong men, such as we were not wont to +see, and tolde vs that their lord Donnacona would the next day come and +see vs, and bring great store of Deeres flesh, and other things with him. +The next day he came and brought a great number of men to Stadacona, to +what end, and for what cause wee knew not, but (as the prouerb sayth) hee +that takes heede and shields himselfe from all men, may hap to scape from +some: for we had need to looke about vs, considering how in number we were +diminished, and in strength greatly weakned, both by reason of our +sicknesse and also of the number that were dead, so that we were +constrained to leaue one of our ships in the Port of the Holy Crosse. Our +Captaine was warned of their comming, and how they had brought a great +number of men with them, for Domagaia came to tell it vs, and durst not +passe the riuer that was betwixt Stadacona and vs, as he was wont to doe, +whereupon we mistrusted some treason. Our Captaine seeing this sent one of +his seruants to them, accompanied with Iohn Poulet being best beloued of +those people, to see who were there, and what they did. The sayd Poulet +and the other fained themselues onely to be come to visit Donnacona, and +bring him certaine presents, because they had beene together a good while +in the sayd Donnaconas Towne. So soone as he heard of their comming, he +got himselfe to bed, faining to bee very sicke. That done, they went to +Taignoagny his house to see him, and wheresoeuer they went, they saw so +many people, that in a maner one could not stirre for another, and such +men as they were neuer wont to see. Taignoagny would not permit our men to +enter into any other houses, but still kept them company, and brought them +halfe way to their ships, and tolde them that if it would please our +captaine to shew him so much fauour as to take a Lord of the Countrey, +whose name was Agonna, of whom hee had receiued some displeasure, and +carie him with him into France, he should therefore for euer be bound vnto +him, and would doe for him whatsoeuer hee would command him, and bade the +seruant come againe the next day, and bring an answere. Our Captaine being +aduertised of so many people that were there, not knowing to what end, +purposed to play a prettie prancke, that is to say, to take their Lord +Donnacona, Taignoagny, Domagaia, and some more of the chiefest of them +prisoners, in so much as before hee had purposed, to bring them into +France, to shew vnto our King what he had seene in those Westerne (M153) +parts, and maruels of the world, for that Donnacona had told vs, that he +had bene in the Countrey of Saguenay, in which are infinite Rubies, Gold, +and other riches, and that there are white men, who clothe themselues with +woollen cloth euen as we doe in France. (M154) Moreover he reported, that +hee had bene in another countrey of a people called Piquemians, and other +strange people. The sayd Lord was an olde man, and euen from his +childehood had neuer left off nor ceased from trauailing into strange +Countreys, as well by water and riuers, as by lande. The sayd Poulet and +the other hauing tolde our Captaine their Embassage, and shewed him what +Taignoagny his will was, the next day he sent his seruant againe to bid +Taignoagny come and see him, and shewe what hee should, for he should be +very well entertained, and also part of his will should be accomplished. +Taignoagny sent him word, that the next day hee would come and bring the +Lord Donnacona with him, and him that had so offended him, which hee did +not, but stayed two dayes, in which time none came from Stadacona to our +shippes, as they were wont to doe, but rather fled from vs, as if we would +have slaine them, so that then wee plainely perceiued their knauery. + +(M155) But because they vnderstood, that those of Sidatin did frequent our +company, and that we had forsaken the bottome of a ship which we would +leaue, to haue the olde nailes out of it, the third day following they +came from Stadacona, and most of them without difficulty did passe from +one side of the riuer to the other with small Skiffes: but Donnacona would +not come ouer: Taignoagny and Domagaia stood talking together about an +houre before they would come ouer, at last they came to speake with our +Captaine. There Taignoagny prayed him that hee would cause the foresayd +man to be taken and caried into France. Our Captaine refused to doe it, +saying that his King had forbidden him to bring any man or woman into +France, onely that he might bring two or three yong boyes to learne the +language, but that he would willingly cary him to Newfoundland, and there +leave him in an Island. Our Captaine spake this, onely to assure them, +that they should bring Donnacona with them, whom they had left on the +other side; which wordes, when Taignoagny heard, hee was very glad, +thinking hee should neuer returne into France againe, and therefore +promised to come the next day which was the day of the Holy Crosse, and to +bring Donnacona and all the people with him. + + + +Chap. 18. How that vpon Holyrood day our Captaine caused a Crosse to be +set vp in our Forte: and how the Lord Donnacona, Taignoagny, Domagaia, and +others of their company came: and of the taking of the sayd Lord. + + +The third of May being Holyroode day, our Captaine for the solemnitie of +the day, caused a goodly fayre crosse of 35 foote in height to bee set vp, +vnder the crosset of which hee caused a shield to be hanged, wherein were +the Armes of France, and ouer them was written in antique letters, +Franciscus primus Dei gratia Francorum Rex regnat. And vpon that day about +noone, there came a great number of the people of Stadacona, men, women +and children, who told vs that their Lord Donnacona, Taignoagny, and +Domagaia were comming, whereof we were very glad, hoping to retaine them. +About two of the clocke in the afternoone they came, and being come neere +our ships, our Captaine went to salute Donnacona, who also shewed him a +merie countenance, albeit very fearefully his eyes were still bent toward +the wood. Shortly after came Taignoagny, who bade Donnacona that he should +not enter into our Forte, and therefore fire was brought forth by one of +our men, and kindled where their Lord was. Our Captaine prayed him to come +into our ships to eate and drinke as hee was wont to do, and also +Taignoagny, who promised, that after a while he would come, and so they +did, and entred into our ships: but first it was told our Captain by +Domagaia that Taignoagny had spoken ill of him, and that he had bid +Donnacona hee should not come aboord our ships. (M156) Our Captaine +perceiuing that, came out of the Forte, and saw that onely by Taignoagny +his warning the women ran away, and none but men stayed in great number, +wherefore he straight commanded his men to lay hold on Donnacona, +Taignoagny, and Domagaia, and two more of the chiefest whom he pointed +vnto: then he commanded them to make the other to retire. Presently after, +the said lord entred into the Fort with the Captaine, but by and by +Taignoagny came to make him come out againe. Our Captaine seeing that +there was no other remedy, began to call vnto them to take them, at whose +crie and voice all his men came forth, and tooke the sayd Lord with the +others, whom they had appointed to take. The Canadians seeing their Lord +taken, began to run away, even as sheepe before the woolfe, some crossing +over the riuer, some through the woods, each one seeking for his owne +aduantage. That done, we retired our selues, and laid vp the prisoners +vnder good guard and safety. + + + +Chap. 19. How the said Canadians the night following came before our ships +to seeke their men, crying and howling all night like Woolues: of the +talke and conclusion they agreed vpon the next day: and of the gifts which +they gaue our Captaine. + + +The night following they came before our ships, (the riuer being betwixt +vs) striking their breasts, and crying and howling like woolues, still +calling Agouhanna, thinking to speake with him, which our Captaine for +that time would not permit, neither all the next day till noone, whereupon +they made signes vnto vs, that we had hanged or killed him. About noone, +there came as great a number in a cluster, as euer we saw, who went to +hide themselues in the Forest, except some, who with a loud voice would +call and crie to Donnacona to speake vnto them. Our Captaine then +commanded Donnacona to be brought vp on high to speake vnto them, and bade +him be merrie, for after he had spoken, and shewed vnto the King of France +what hee had seene in Saguenay and other countreys, after ten or twelve +moneths, he should returne againe, and that the King of France would giue +him great reward. Donnacona was very glad, and speaking to the others told +it them, who in token of ioy, gaue out three great cryes, and then +Donaconna and his people had great talke together, which for want of +interpreters, cannot be described. Our Captaine bade Donnacona that hee +should cause them to come to the other side of the riuer, to the end they +might better talke together without any feare, and that he should assure +them: which Donnacona did, and there came a boate full of the chiefest of +them to the (M157) ships, and there anew began to talke together, giuing +great praise to our captaine, and gaue him a present of foure and twenty +chaines of Esurgny, for that is the greatest and preciousest riches they +haue in this world, for they esteeme more of that, then of any gold or +siluer. After they had long talked together, and that their Lord sawe that +there was no remedy to auoide his going into France, hee commanded his +people the next day, to bring him some victuals to serue him by the way. +Our Captaine gaue Donnacona, as a great present, two Frying pannes of +copper, eight Hatchets, and other small trifles, as Kniues, and Beades, +whereof hee seemed to be very glad, who sent them to his wiues and +children. Likewise, he gaue to them that came to speake with Donnacona, +they thanked him greatly for them, and then went to their lodgings. + + + +Chap. 20. How the next day, being the fift of May, the same people came +againe to speake vnto their Lord, and how foure women came to the shore to +bring him victuals. + + +Vpon the fift of May, very early in the morning, a great number of the +sayd people came againe to speake vnto their Lord, and sent a boate, which +in their tongue they call Casnoni, wherein were onely foure women, without +any man, for feare their men should be retained. + +These women brought great store of victuals, as great Millet, which is +their come that they liue withall, flesh, fish, and other things, after +their fashion. + +These women being come to our shippes, our Captaine did very friendly +entertaine them. Then Donnacona prayed our Captaine to tell these women +that hee should come againe after ten or twelue moneths, and bring +Donnacona to Canada with him: this hee sayd only to appease them, which +our Captaine did: wherefore the women, as well by words as signes, seemed +to be very glad, giuing our Captaine thanks, and told him, if he came +againe, and brought Donnacona with him, they would giue him many things: +in signe whereof, each one gaue our Captaine a chaine of Esurgny, and then +passed to the other side of the riuer againe, where stood all the people +of Stadacona, who taking all leaue of their Lord, went home againe. On +Saturday following, (M158) being the sixt of the moneth, we departed out +of the sayd Port of Santa Croix, and came to the harborough a little +beneath the Island of Orleans, about twelue leagues from the Port of the +Holy Crosse, and vpon Sonday we came to the Island of Filberds, where we +stayed vntil the sixteenth of that moneth, till the fiercenesse of the +waters were past, which at that time ranne too swift a course, and were +too dangerous to come downe along the riuer, and therefore we stayed till +faire weather came. (M159) In the meane while many of Dannaconas subiects +came from the riuer of Saguenay to him, but being by Domagaia aduertised, +that their Lord was taken to bee carried into France they were all amazed: +yet for all that they would not leaue to come to our ships, to speake to +Dannacona, who told them that after twelue moneths he should come againe, +and that he was very well vsed by the Captaine, Gentlemen, and Mariners. +Which when they heard, they greatly thanked our Captaine and gaue their +Lord three bundles of Beauers, and Sea Woolues skinnes, with a great knife +of red copper that commeth from Saguenay, and other things. They gaue also +to our Captaine a chaine of Esurgny, for which our Captaine gaue them ten +or twelue Hatchets, and they gaue him hearty thankes, and were very well +contented. The next day, being the sixteenth of May, we hoysed sayle, and +came from the said Island of Filberds, to another about fifteene leagues +from it, which is about fiue leagues in length, and there, to the end we +might take some rest the night following, we stayed that day, in hope the +next day we might passe and auoide the dangers of the riuer of Saguenay, +which are great. (M160) That euening we went a land and found great store +of Hares, of which we tooke a great many, and therefore we called it the +Island of Hares: in the night there arose a contrary winde, with such +stormes and tempest that wee were constrained to returne to the Island of +Filberds againe, from whence wee were come, because there was none other +passage among the sayde Islandes, and there we stayed till the one and +twentieth of that moneth, till faire weather and good winde came againe: +and then wee sayled againe, and that so prosperously, that we passed to +Honguedo, which passage vntill that time had not bene discouered: wee +caused our ships to course athwart Cape Prat which is the beginning of the +Port of Chaleur: and because the winde was good and conuenient, we sayled +all day and all night without staying, and the next day we came to the +middle of Brions Island, which we were not minded to doe, to the end we +might shorten our way. These two lands lie Northwest, and Southeast, and +are about fiftie leagues one from another. The said Island is in latitude +47 degrees and a halfe. Vpon Thursday being the twenty sixe of the moneth, +and the feast of the Ascension of our Lord, we coasted ouer to a land and +shallow of lowe sandes, which are about eight leagues Southwest from +Brions Island, aboue which are large Champaignes, full of trees and also +an enclosed sea, whereas we could neither see, nor perceiue any gappe or +way to enter thereinto. On Friday following, being the 27 of the moneth, +because the wind did change on the coast, we came to Brions Island againe, +where we stayed till the beginning of Iune, and toward the Southeast of +this Island, wee sawe a lande, seeming vnto vs an Island, we coasted it +about two leagues and a halfe, and by the way we had notice of three other +high Islands, lying toward the Sands: after wee had knowen these things we +returned to the Cape of the sayd land, which doeth diuide it selfe into +two or three very high Capes: the waters there are very deepe, and the +flood of the sea runneth so swift, that it cannot possibly be swifter. +That day we came to Cape Loreine, which is in forty seuen degrees and a +halfe toward the South: on which cape there is a low land, and it seemeth +that there is some entrance of a riuer, but there is no hauen of any +worth. Aboue these lands we saw another cape toward the south, we named it +Saint Paules Cape, it is at 47 degrees and a quarter. + +The Sonday following, being the fourth of Iune, and Whitsonday, wee had +notice of the coast lying Eastsoutheast, distant from the Newfoundland +about two and twenty leagues; and because the wind was against vs, we went +to a Hauen, which wee named S. Spiritus Porte, where we stayed till +Tewesday that we departed thence, sayling along that coast vntill we came +to Saint Peters Islands. Wee found along the sayd coast many very +dangerous Islands and shelues, which lye all in the Eastsoutheast and +Westnorthwest, about three and twenty leagues into the sea. Whilest we +were in the sayd Saint Peters Islands we met with many ships of France and +of Britaine, wee stayed there from Saint Barnabas day, being the eleuenth +of the moneth, vntil the sixteenth that we departed thence and came to +Cape Rase, and entred into a Port called Rognoso, where we took in fresh +water, and wood to passe the sea: there wee left one of our boates. Then +vpon Monday, being the nineteenth of Iune, we went from that Port, and +with such good and prosperous weather we sailed along the sea, in such +sorte, that vpon the sixt of Iuly 1536 we came to the Porte of S. Malo, by +the grace of God, to whom we pray, here ending our Nauigation, that of his +infinite mercy he will grant vs his grace and fauour, and in the end bring +vs to the place of euerlasting felicitie. Amen. + +Here followeth the language of the countrey, and kingdomes of Hochelaga +and Canada, of vs called New France: But first the names of their numbers. + + 1 Secada + Tigneni + Hasche + Hannaion + Ouiscon + Indahir + Aiaga + 8 Addigue + Madellon + 10 Assem + +Here follow the names the chiefest partes of men, and other words +necessary to be knowen. + +the Head aggonzi +the Browe hegueniascon +the Eyes higata +the Eares abontascon +the Mouth esahe +the Teeth esgongay +the Tongue osnache +the Throat agonhon +the Beard hebelim +the Face hegonascon +the Haires aganiscon +the Armes aiayascon +the Flanckes aissonne +the Stomacke aggruascon +the Bellie eschehenda +the Thighes hetnegradascon +the Knees agochinegodascon +the Legges agouguenehondo +the Feete onchidascon +the Hands aignoascon +the Fingers agenoga +the Nailes agedascon +a Mans member ainoascon +a womans member castaigne +an Eele esgueny +a Snaile vndeguezi +a Tortois heuleuxima +Woods conda +leaues of Trees hoga +God cudragny +giue me some drink quazahoaquea +giue me to breakfast quase hoa quascaboa +giue me my supper quaza hoa quatfriam +let vs goe to bed casigno agnydahoa +a Man aguehum +a woman agruaste +a Boy addegesta +a Wench agniaquesta +a Child exiasta +a Gowne cahata +a Doublet caioza +Hosen hemondoha +Shooes atha +a Shirt amgoua +a Cappe castrua +Corne osizi +Bread carraconny +Water ame +Flesh quahottascon +Reisins queion +Damsons honnesta +Figges absconda +Grapes ozoba +Nuttes quahoya +a Hen sahomgahoa +a Lamprey zisto +a Salmon ondacon +a Whale ainne honne +a Goose sadeguenda +a Streete adde +Cucumber seede casconda +to Morrowe achide +the Heauen quenhia +the Earth damga +the Sunne ysmay +the Moone assomaha +the Starres stagnehoham +the Winde cohoha +good morrow aignag +let vs go to play casigno caudy +come and speak with me assigniquaddadia +looke vpon me quagathoma +hold your peace aista +let vs go with the boat casigno casnouy +giue me a knife buazahca agoheda +a Hatchet adogne +a Bow ahenca +a Darte quaetan +let vs goe a hunting Casigno donnascat +a Stagge aionnesta +a Sheepe asquenondo +a Hare Sourhanda +a Dogge agaya +a Towne canada +the Sea agogasy +the waues of the sea coda +an Island cohena +an Hill agacha +the yce honnesca +Snow camsa +Colde athau +Hotte odazani +Fier azista +Smoke quea +a House canoca +Beanes sahe +Cinnamom adhotathny +my Father addathy +my Mother adanahoe +my Brother addagrim +my Sister adhoasseue + +They of Canada say, that it is a moneths sayling to goe a lande where +Cinnamom and Cloues are gathered. + +Here endeth the Relation of Iames Cartiers discouery and Nauigation to the +Newfoundlands, by him named New France. + + + + +XVI. The third voyage of discouery made by Captaine Iaques Cartier, 1540. +vnto the Countreys of Canada, Hochelaga, and Saguenay. + + +King Francis the first hauing heard the report of Captaine Cartier his +Pilot generall in his two former Voyages of discouery, as well by writing +as by word of mouth, touching that which hee had found and seene in the +Westerne partes discouered by him in the parts of Canada and Hochelaga, +and hauing also seene and talked with the people, which the sayd Cartier +had brought out of those Countreys, whereof one was king of Canada, whose +name was Donnacona, and others: which after that they had bene a long time +in France and Britaine, were baptized at their owne desire and request, +and died in the sayd countrey of Britaine. (M161) And albeit his Maiestie +was aduertized by the sayd Cartier of the death and decease of all the +people which were brought ouer by him (which were tenne in number) sauing +one little girle about tenne yeeres old, yet he resolued to send the sayd +Cartier his Pilot thither againe, with Iohn Francis de la Roche, Knight, +Lord of Roberual,(20) whome hee appointed his Lieutenant and Gouernour in +the Countreys of Canada and Hochelaga, and the sayd Cartier Captaine +Generall and leader of the shippes, that they might discover more then was +done before in the former voyages, and attaine (if it were possible) vnto +the knowledge of the Countrey of Saguenay, whereof the people brought by +Cartier, as is declared, made mention vnto the King, that there were great +riches, and very good countreys. And the King caused a certaine summe of +money to be deliuered to furnish out the sayd voyage with fiue shippes: +which thing was performed by the sayd Monsieur Roberual and Cartier. After +that they had agreed together to rigge the sayd fiue ships at Saint Malo +in Britaine, where the two former voyages had beene prepared and set +forth. And the said Monsieur Roberual sent Cartier thither for the same +purpose. And after that Cartier had caused the said fiue ships to be built +and furnished and set in good order. Monsieur Roberual came downe to S. +Malo and found the ships fallen downe to the roade, with their yards +acrosse full ready to depart and set saile, staying for nothing else but +the comming of the Generall, and the payment of the furniture. And because +Monsieur Roberual the kings lieutenant had not as yet his artillery, +powder and munitions, and other things necessary come downe, which he had +prouided for the voyage, in the Countreys of Champaigne and Normandie: and +because the said things were very necessary, and that hee was loth to +depart without them, he determined to depart from S. Malo to Roan, and to +prepare a ship or two at Honfleur, whither he thought his things were +come. And that the said Cartier shoulde depart with the fiue shippes which +he had furnished, and should goe before. (M162) Considering also that the +said Cartier had receiued letters from the king, whereby hee did expresly +charge him to depart and set sayle immediatly vpon the sight and receit +thereof, on payne of incurring his displeasure, and to lay all the fault +on him. And after the conclusion of these things, and the said Monsieur +Roberual had taken muster and view of the gentlemen, souldiers, and +mariners which were retained and chosen for the performance of the sayd +voyage, hee gaue vnto Captain Cartier full authoritie to depart and goe +before, and to gouerne all things as if he had bene there in person: and +himselfe departed to Honfleur to make his farther preparation. After these +things thus dispatched, the winde comming faire, the foresayd fiue ships +set sayle together well furnished and victualled for two yeere, the 23. of +May, 1540. (M163) And we sailed so long with contrary winds and continuall +torments, which fell out by reason of our late departure, that wee were on +the sea with our sayd fiue ships full three moneths before wee could +arriue at the Port and Hauen of Canada, without euer hauing in all that +time 30 houres of good wind to serue vs to keepe our right course: (M164) +so that our fiue shippes through those stormes lost company one of +another, all saue that two kept together, to wit that wherein the Captaine +was, and the other wherein went the Viscount of Beaupre, vntill at length +at the end of one moneth wee met all together at the Hauen of Carpont in +Newfoundland. (M165) But the length of time which we were in passing +betweene Britayne and Newfoundland was the cause that we stood in great +neede of water, because of the cattell, aswell Goates, Hogges, as other +beastes which we caried for breede in the Countrey, which wee were +constrained to water with Sider and other drinke. Now therefore because we +were the space of three moneths in sayling on the sea, and staying in +Newfoundland, wayting for Monsieur Roberual, and taking in of fresh water +and other things necessary, wee arriued not before the Hauen of Saincte +Croix in Canada, (where in the former voyage we had remayned eight +moneths) vntill the 23. day of August. (M166) In which place the people of +the Countrey came to our shippes, making shew of ioy for our arriuall, and +namely he came thither which had the rule and gouernment of the Countrey +of Canada, named Agona, which was appointed king there by Donacona, when +in the former voyage we carried him into France. And hee came to the +Captaines ship with 6. or 7. boates, and with many women and children. And +after the sayd Agona had inquired of the Captaine where Donacona and the +rest were, the Captaine answered him, That Donacona was dead in France, +and that his body rested in the earth, and that the rest stayed there as +great Lords, and were maried, and would not returne backe into their +Countrey: the said Agona made no shewe of anger at all these speeches: and +I thinke he tooke it so well because he remained Lord and Gouernour of the +countrey by the death of the said Donacona. (M167) After which conference +the said Agona tooke a piece of tanned leather of a yellow skin edged +about with Esnoguy (which is their riches and the thing which they esteeme +most precious, as wee esteeme gold) which was vpon his head in stead of a +crowne, and he put the same on the head of our Captaine, and tooke from +his wrists two bracelets of Esnoguy, and put them vpon the Captaines +armes, colling him about the necke, and shewing vnto him great signes of +ioy: which was all dissimulation, as afterward it wel appeared. The +captaine tooke the said crowne of leather and put it againe vpon his head, +and gaue him and his wiues certaine smal presents, signifying vnto him +that he had brought certaine new things, which afterward he would bestow +vpon him: for which the sayd Agona thanked the Captaine. And after that he +had made him and his company eat and drinke, they departed and returned to +the shore with their boates. (M168) After which things the sayd Captaine +went with two of his boates vp the riuer, beyond Canada and the Port of +Saincte Croix, to view a Hauen and a small riuer, which is about 4. +leagues higher: which he found better and more commodious to ride in and +lay his ships, then the former. And therefore he returned and caused all +his ships to be brought before the sayd riuer, and at a lowe water he +caused his Ordinance to bee planted to place his ships in more safetie, +which he meant to keep and stay in the Countrey, which were three: which +hee did the day following and the rest remayned in the roade in the +middest of the riuer (In which place the victuals and other furniture were +discharged, which they had brought) from the 26. of August vntill the +second of September, what time they departed to returne for S. Malo, in +which ships he sent backe Mace Iolloberte his brother in lawe, and Steuen +Noel his Nephew, skilfull and excellent pilots, with letters vnto the +king, and to aduertise him what had bene done and found: and how Monsieur +Roberual was not yet come, and that hee feared that by occasion of +contrary winds and tempests he was driven backe againe into France. + + + +The description of the aforesayd Riuer and Hauen. + + +The sayd Riuer is small, not past 50. pases broad, and shippes drawing +three fathoms water may enter in at a full sea: and at a low water there +is nothing but a chanell of a foote deepe or thereabout. (M169) On both +sides of the said Riuer there are very good and faire grounds, full of as +faire and mightie trees as any be in the world, and diuers sorts, which +are aboue tenne fathoms higher then the rest, and there is one kind of +tree aboue three fathoms about, which they in the Countrey call Hanneda, +which hath the most excellent vertue of all the trees in the world, +whereof I will make mention hereafter. Moreouer there are great store of +Okes the most excellent that euer I saw in my life, which were so laden +with Mast that they cracked againe: besides this there are fairer Arables, +Cedars, Beeches, and other trees, then grow in France: and hard vnto this +wood (M170) on the South side the ground is all couered with Vines, which +we found laden with grapes as blacke as Mulberies, but they be not so kind +as those of France because the Vines bee not tilled, and because they grow +of their owne accord. (M171) Moreouer there are many white Thornes, which +beare leaues as bigge as oken leaues, and fruit like vnto Medlers. To bee +short, it is as good a Countrey to plow and mannure as a man should find +or desire. (M172) We sowed seedes here of our Countrey, as Cabages, +Naueaus,(21) Lettises and others, which grew and sprung vp out of the +ground in eight dayes. The mouth of the riuer is toward the South, and it +windeth Northward like vnto a snake: and at the mouth of it toward the +East there is a high and steepe cliffe, where we made a way in manner of a +payre of staires, and aloft we made a Fort to keepe the nether Fort and +the ships, and all things that might passe by the great as by this small +riuer. (M173) Moreouer a man may behold a great extension of ground apt +for tillage, straite and handsome, and somewhat enclining toward the +South, as easie to be brought to tillage as I would desire, and very well +replenished with faire Okes and other trees of great beauty, no thicker +then the Forrests of France. Here we set twenty men to worke, which in one +day had laboured about an acre and an halfe of the said ground, and sowed +it part with Naueaus or small Turneps, which at the ende of eight dayes, +as I said before, sprang out of the earth. And vpon that high cliffe wee +found a faire fountaine very neere the sayd Fort: (M174) adioyning +whereunto we found good store of stones, which we esteemed to be Diamants. +On the other side of the said mountaine and at the foote thereof, which is +towards the great Riuer is all along a goodly Myne of the best yron in the +world, and it reacheth euen hard vnto our Fort, and the sand which we +tread on is perfect refined Myne, ready to be put into the fornace. And on +the waters side we found certaine leaues of fine gold as thicke as a mans +nayle. And Westward of the said Riuer there are, as hath bene sayd, many +faire trees: and toward the water a goodly Medow full of as faire and +goodly grasse as euer I sawe in any Medowe in France: and betweene the +said Medow and the Wood are great store of Vines: (M175) and beyond the +said Vines the land groweth full of Hempe which groweth of it selfe, which +is as good as possibly may be seene, and as strong. And at the ende of the +sayd Medow within an hundred pases there is a rising ground, which is of a +kind of slate stone blacke and thicke, wherein are veines of mynerall +matter, which shewe like gold and siluer: and throughout all that stone +there are great graines of the sayd Myne. And in some places we haue found +stones like Diamants, the most faire, pollished and excellently cut that +it is possible for a man to see, when the Sunne shineth vpon them, they +glister as it were sparkles of fire. + + + +How after the departure of the two shippes which were sent backe into +Britaine, and that the Fort was begun to be builded, the Captaine prepared +two boates to go vp the great Riuer to discouer the passage of the three +Saults or falles of the Riuer. + + +(M176) The said Captaine hauing dispatched two ships to returne to carry +newes, according as hee had in charge from the king, and that the Fort was +begun to be builded, for preseruation of their victuals and other things, +determined with the Vicount of Beaupre, and other Gentlemen, Masters, and +Pilots chosen for counsayle, to make a voyage with two boates furnished +with men and victuals to goe as farre as Hochelaga, of purpose to view and +vnderstand the fashion of the Saults of water, which are to be passed to +goe to Saguenay, that hee might be the readier in the spring to passe +farther, and in the Winter time to make all things needefull in a +readinesse for their businesse. (M177) The foresaid boates being made +ready, the Captaine and Martine de Painpont, with other Gentlemen and the +remnant of the Mariners departed from the sayd place of Charlesburg Royal +the seuenth day of September in the yeere aforesayd 1540. And the Vicount +of Beaupre stayed behind for the garding and gouernement of all things in +the Fort. And as they went vp the riuer, the Captaine went to see the Lord +of Hochelay, which dwelleth betweene Canada and Hochelaga: which in the +former voyage had giuen vnto the said Captaine a little girle, and had +oftentimes enformed him of the treasons which Taignoagny and Domagaya +(whom the Captaine in his former voyage had caried into France) would haue +wrought against him. (M178) In regard of which his curtesie the said +Captaine would not passe by without visiting of him, and to let him +vnderstand that the Captaine thought himselfe beholding vnto him, hee gaue +vnto him two yong boyes, and left them with him to learne their language, +and bestowed vpon him a cloake of Paris red, which cloake was set with +yealow and white buttons of Tinne, and small belles. And withall hee gaue +him two Basons of Laton, and certaine hachet and kniues: whereat the sayde +Lord seemed highly to reioyce, and thanked the Captaine. (M179) This done, +the Captaine and his company departed from that place: And wee sailed with +so prosperous a wind, that we arriued the eleuenth day of the moneth at +the first Sault of water, which is two leagues distant from the Towne of +Tutonaguy. And after wee were arriued there, wee determined to goe and +passe as farre vp as it was possible with one of the boates, and that the +other should stay there till it returned: and wee double manned her to +rowe vp against the course or streame of the sayde Sault. (M180) And after +wee had passed some part of the way from our other boate, wee found badde +ground and great rockes, and so great a current, that wee could not +possibly passe any further with our Boate. And the Captaine resolued to +goe by land to see the nature and fashion of the Sault. And after that we +were come on shore, wee founde hard by the water side a way and beaten +path going toward the sayde Saultes, by which wee tooke our way. And on +the sayd way, and soone after we found an habitation of people which made +vs great cheere, and entertained vs very friendly. (M181) And after that +he had signified vnto them, that wee were going toward the Saults, and +that wee desired to goe to Saguenay, foure yong men went along with vs to +shewe vs the way, and they brought vs so farre that wee came to another +village or habitation of good people, which dwell ouer against the second +Sault, which came and brought vs of their victuals, as Pottage and Fish, +and offered vs of the same. After that the Captaine had enquired of them +as well by signes as wordes, how many more Saults we had to passe to goe +to Saguenay, and what distance and way it was thither, this people shewed +vs and gaue vs to vnderstand, that wee were at the second Sault, and that +there was but one more to passe, that the Riuer was not nauigable to goe +to Saguenay, and that the sayd Sault was but a third part farther then we +had trauailed, shewing vs the same with certaine little stickes, which +they layd vpon the ground in a certaine distance, and afterward layde +other small branches betweene both, representing the Saults. And by the +sayde marke, if their saying be true, it can be but sixe leagues by land +to passe the sayd Saults. + +(M182) After that we had bene aduertised by the sayde people, of the +things abouementioned, both because the day was farre spent, and we had +neither drunke nor eaten the same day, we concluded to returne vnto our +boats, and we came thither, where we found great store of people to the +number of 400 persons or thereabout, which seemed to giue vs very good +entertainment and to reioyce of our comming: And therefore our Captaine +gaue eche of them certaine small trifles, as combs, brooches of tynne and +copper, and other smal toyes, and vnto the chiefe men euery one his litle +hatchet and hooke, whereat they made certaine cries and ceremonies of ioy. +(M183) But a man must not trust them for all their faire ceremonies and +signes of ioy, for if they had thought they had bene too strong for vs, +then would they haue done their best to haue killed vs, as we vnderstood +afterward. (M184) This being done, we returned with our boats, and passed +by the dwelling of the Lord of Hochelay, with whom the Captaine had left +the two youths as hee came vp the riuer, thinking to haue found him: But +hee coulde find no body saue one of his sonnes, who tolde the Captaine +that hee was gone to Maisouna, as our boyes also told vs, saying that it +was two dayes since he departed. But in truth hee was gone to Canada to +conclude with Angona what they should doe against vs. (M185) And when we +were arriued at our Fort, wee vnderstoode by our people, that the Sauages +of the Countrey came not any more about our Fort as they were accustomed, +to bring vs fish, and that they were in a wonderful doubt and feare of vs. +Wherefore our Captaine, hauing bene aduertised by some (M186) of our men +which had bene at Stadacona to visite them, that there were a wonderfull +number of the Countrey people assembled together, caused all things in our +fortresse to bee set in good order: &c. The rest is wanting. + + + + +XVII. A letter written to M. Iohn Growte student in Paris, by Iaques Noel +of S. Malo, the nephew of Iaques Cartier, touching the foresaid discouery. + + +Master Growte, your brother in law Giles Walter shewed me this morning a +Mappe printed at Paris, dedicated to one M. Hakluyt an Englishman: wherein +all the West Indies, the kingdome of New Mexico, and the countreys of +Canada, Hochelaga, and Saguenay are contained. I hold that the Riuer of +Canada which is described in that Mappe is not marked as it is in my +booke, which is agreeable to the booke of Iaques Cartier: and that the +sayd Chart doth not marke or set downe The great Lake, which is aboue the +Saults, according as the Sauages haue aduertised vs, which dwell at the +sayd Saults. In the foresayd Chart which you sent me hither, the Great +Lake is placed too much toward the North.(22) (M187) The Saults or falles +of the Riuer stand in 44. degrees of latitude: it is not so hard a matter +to passe them, as it is thought: The water falleth not downe from any high +place, it is nothing else but that in the middest of the Riuer there is +bad ground. (M188) It were best to build boates aboue the Saults: and it +is easie to march or trauell by land to the end of the three Saults: it is +not aboue fiue leagues iourney. I haue bene vpon the toppe of a mountaine, +which is at the foot of the Saults, where I haue seene the said Riuer +beyond the sayd Saultes, which shewed vnto vs to be broader then it was +where we passed it. (M189) The people of the Countrey aduertised vs, that +there are ten dayes iourney from the Saults vnto this Great Lake. We know +not how many leagues they make to a dayes iourney. At this present I +cannot write vnto you more at large, because the messenger can stay no +longer. Here therefore for the present I will ende, saluting you with my +hearty commendations, praying God to giue you your hearts desire. From S. +Malo in haste this 19 day of Iune. 1587. + +Your louing Friend, +Iaqves Noel. + +Cosin, I pray you doe me so much pleasure as to send me a booke of the +discouery of New Mexico, and one of those new Mappes of the West Indies +dedicated to M. Hakluyt the English Gentleman, which you sent to your +brother in law Giles Walter. I will not faile to informe my selfe, if +there be any meane to find out those descriptions which Captain Cartier +made after his two last voyages into Canada. + + + + +XVIII. Vnderneath the aforesaid vnperfite relation that which followeth is +written on another letter sent to M. Iohn Growte student in Paris from +Iaques Noel of S. Malo, the grand nephew of Iaques Cartier. + + +I can write nothing else vnto you of any thing that I can recouer of the +writings of Captaine Iaques Cartier my uncle disceased, although I haue +made search in all places that I could possibly in this Towne: sauing of a +certaine booke made in maner of a sea Chart, which was drawne by the hand +of my said vncle, which is in the possession of master Cremeur: which +booke is passing well marked and drawne for all the Riuer of Canada, +whereof I am well assured, because I myself haue knowledge thereof as +farre as to the Saults, where I haue bene: The height of which Saults is +in 44. degrees. I found in the sayd Chart beyond the place where the Riuer +is diuided in twaine in the midst of both the branches of the said riuer +somewhat neerest that arme which runneth toward the Northwest, these words +following written in the hand of Iaques Cartier. + +By the people of Canada and Hochelaga it was said, That here is the land +of Saguenay, which is rich and wealthy in precious stones. + +And about an hundred leagues vnder the same I found written these two +lines following in the saide Carde enclining toward the Southwest. Here in +this Countrey are Cinamon and Cloues, which they call in their language +Canodeta. + +Touching the effect of my booke whereof I spake vnto you, it is made after +the maner of a sea Chart, which I haue deliuered to my two sonnes Michael +and Iohn, which at this present are in Canada. If at their returne, which +will be God willing about Magdalene tyde, they haue learned any new thing +worthy the writing, I will not faile to aduertise you thereof. + +Your louing Friend, +Iaqves Noel. + + + + +XIX. Here followeth the course from Belle Isle, Carpont, and the Grand Bay +in Newfoundland vp the Riuer of Canada for the space of 230. leagues, +obserued by Iohn Alphonse of Xanctoigne chiefe Pilote to Monsieur +Roberual, 1542. + + +Belles Isles are in 51 degrees and 2/3. Belles Isles and Carpont are +Northnorthwest and Southsoutheast, and they are ten leagues distant. +Carpont is in 52 degrees. Carpont and Bell Isle from the Grand Bay are +Northeast and Southwest, and the distance from Bell Isle to the Grand Bay +is 7 leagues. The midst of the Grand Bay is in 52 degrees and an halfe, +and on the Northside thereof there is a rocke: halfe a league from the +Isle, ouer against Carpont toward the East there is a small flat Island, +and on the side toward the Northeast there is a flat rocke. And when thou +commest out of the harborough of Carpont thou must leaue this rocke on the +starreboord side, and also on the larboord side there are two or three +small Isles: and when thou commest out on the Northeast side, ranging +along the shore toward the West about two pikes length in the midway there +is a shold which lyeth on thy starboord side: and saile thou by the North +coast, and leaue two partes of the Grand Bay toward the South; because +there is a rocke which runneth 2 or 3 leagues into the sea. And when thou +art come athwart the hauen of Butes, ran along the North shore about one +league or an halfe of, for the coast is without all danger; (M190) Bell +Isle in the mouth of the Grand Bay, and the Isles of Blanc Sablon, which +are within the Grand Bay, neere vnto the North shore lie Northeast, West +and Southwest, and the distance is 30 leagues. The Grand Bay at the +entrance is but 7 leagues broad from land to land vntill it come ouer +against the Bay des Chasteaux: and from thence forward it hath not past 5 +leagues in breadth. And against Blanc Sablon it is 8 leagues broad from +land to land. And the land on the South shore is all low land along the +sea coast. The North shore is reasonable high land, Blanc Sablon is in 51 +degrees 2/3. The Isles of Blanc Sablon and the Isles de la Damoiselle are +Northeast, Westsouthwest, and take a little of the Westsouthwest, and they +are distant 36 leagues: these Isles are in 50 deg. 3/4. And there is a +good hauen: and you may enter by an high Cape which lieth along toward the +Northeast and within the distance of a pike and an halfe, because of a +rocke which lieth on your larrebord side, and you may ancre in 10 fathome +water ouer against a little nooke: and from the great headland vnto the +place where thou doest ancre there is not aboue the length of 2 Cables. +And if thou wouldest go out by the West side, thou must saile neere the +Isle by the starrebord, and giue roome vnto the Isle on the larbord at the +comming forth: and when thou art not past a cables length out thou must +saile hard by the Isles on the larbord side, by reason of a suncken flatte +which lieth on the starrebord, and thou shalt saile so on to the +Southsouthwest, vntill thou come in sight of a rocke which shineth, which +is about halfe a league in the sea distant from the Isles, and thou shalt +leaue it on the larrebord: (and from the Isles of Damoiselle vnto +Newfoundland the sea is not in bredth aboue 36. leagues, because that +Newfoundland euen vnto Cape Briton runneth not but Northnortheast and +Southsouthwest.) Between the Isles de la Damoiselle and the Isles of +Blanck Sablon there be many Isles and good harbours: and on this coast, +there are faulcons and haukes, and certaine foules which seeme to be +feasants. The Isles de la Damoiselle and Cape Tienot are Northeast and +Westsouthwest and take a little of the Northeast and southwest, and they +are distant 18. leagues. Cape Tienot is in 50. deg and 1/4. And there the +sea is broadest. And it may be to the end of Newfoundland, which is at the +entrance of Cape Briton 70 leagues, which is the greatest bredth of the +sea. And there are 6 or 7 Isles between the Isles de la Damoiselle and +Cape Tienot. Cape Tienot hath in the sea 5 or 6 leagues distant from it a +suncken Iland dangerous for ships. (M191) The Cape Tienot and the midst of +the Isle of Ascension are Northeast and southsouthwest, and they are 22. +leagues distant, the midst of the Isle of Ascension is in 49. deg and 1/2. +The said Isle lieth Northwest and Southeast, the Northwest end is in 50. +degrees of latitude and the Southeast end is in 48. degrees and a halfe +and it is about 25. leagues long and 4. or 5. leagues broad: and from the +Northwest end of the Isle vnto the firme land of the North side the Sea is +not aboue seven leagues broad, but vnto the firme land on the South side +are about 15. leagues. Cape Tienot and the end of the Isle of Ascention +toward the Southeast are Northeast and Southwest, and are distant 30. +leagues. The said Cape of Tienot and the Northwest end of the Isle of +Ascension are East and West, and take a little of the Northeast and +Southwest, and they are distant 34. leagues. + +(M192) The Isle of Ascension is a goodly Isle, and a goodly champion land +without any hilles, standing all vpon white rocks and Alablaster, all +couered with trees vnto the Sea shore, and there are al sorts of trees as +there be in France: and there be wild beasts, as beares, Luserns, +Porkespicks.(23) And from the Southeast end of the Isle of Ascension vnto +the entrance of Cape Briton is but 50. leagues. The Northwest end of the +Isle and the Cape des Monts nostre Dame,(24) which is on the maine land +towards the South, are Northeast and Westsouthwest, and the distance +betweene them is 15. leagues. The Cape is in 49. degrees, which is a very +high land. The Cape and end of the Isle of Ascension toward the Southeast +are East and West and there is 15. leagues distance betweene them. The Bay +of Molues or Gaspay(25) is in 48. degrees, and the coast lyeth North and +South, and taketh a quarter of the Northeast and Southwest vnto the Bay of +Heate(26) and there are 3. Isles, one great one and two smal: from the Bay +of Heate vntill you passe the Monts nostre Dame al the land is high and +good ground al couered with trees. Ognedoc is a good Bay and lyeth +Northnorthwest and Southsoutheast, and it is a good Harbour: and you must +saile along the shore on the Northside by reason of the low point at the +entrance therof: and when you are passed the poynt bring your selfe to an +ancre in 15. or 20. fathoms of water toward the South shore, and here +within this Hauen are two riuers, one which goeth (M193) toward the +Northwest, and the other to the South west. + +(M194) And on this coast there is great fishing for Coddes and other fish, +where there is more store then is in Newfoundland, and better fish. And +here is great store of riuer foule, as Malards, wild Geese, and others: +And here are all sorts of trees, Rose trees, Raspesses, Filbrid(27) trees, +Apple trees, Peare trees, and it is better here in Sommer then in France. +The Isle of Ascension and the 7. Isles which lie on the North shore lie +Southeast and Westnorthwest, and are distant 24. leagues. The Cape of +Ognedoc and the 7. Isles are Northnorthwest and Southsoutheast; and are +distant 35. leagues. + +(M195) The Cape of Monts nostre Dame and the 7. Isles are North and South, +and the cut ouer from the one to the other is 25. leagues: and this is the +breadth of this Sea, and from thence vpward it beginneth to waxe narrower +and narrower. The 7. Isles are in 50. degrees and 1/2. The 7. Isles and +the poynt of Ongear lie Northeast and Southwest and the distance betweene +them is 15. leagues, and betweene them are certaine small Islands: and the +point of Ongear and the mountaines Nostre Dame, which are on the South +side of the entrance of the riuer, are North and South: (M196) and the cut +ouer from the one to the other is ten leagues: and this is here the +abredth of the Sea. The poynt of Ongear and the riuer of Caen lie East and +West, and they are distant 12. leagues. And all the coast from the Isle of +Ascension hither is very good ground, wherin growe all sorts of trees that +are in France and some fruits. The poynt of Ongear is in 49. degrees and +1/4. And the riuer of Caen and the Isle of Raquelle lye Northeast and +Southwest, and they are distant 12. leagues. The Isle of Raquelle is in +48. degrees and 1/2. In this riuer of Caen there is great store of fish. + +And here the Sea is not past 8. leagues broad. The Isle of Raquelle is a +very low Isle, which is neere vnto the South shore, hard by a high Cape +which is called the Cape of Marble. There is no danger there at all. And +betweene Raquelle and the Cape of Marble ships may passe. And there is not +from the Isle to the South shore aboue one league, and from the Isle vnto +the North shore about foure leagues. The Isle of Raquelle and the entrance +of Saguenay are Northeast Westsouthwest, and are distant 14. leagues, and +there are betweene them two small Islandes neere the North shore. The +entrance of Saguenay is in 48. degrees and 1/2, and the entrance hath not +past a quarter of a league in breadth, and it is dangerous toward the +Southwest: and two or three leagues within the entrance it beginneth to +waxe wider and wider: and it seemeth to bee as it were an arme of the Sea: +And I thinke that the same runneth into the Sea of Cathay,(28) for it +sendeth foorth there a great current, and there doth runne in that place a +terrible rase or tyde. (M197) And here the riuer from the North shore to +the South shore is not past foure leagues in breadth, and it is a +dangerous passage betweene both the lands, because there lie bankes of +rockes in the riuer. The Isle of Raquelle and the Isle of Hares lye +Northeast and Southwest, and take 1/2 of the East and the West, and they +are distant 18. leagues. The entrance of Saguenay and the Isle of +Liepueres or Hares lie Northnortheast and Southsouthwest, and are distant +5. leagues. The entrance of Saguenay and the Isle of Raquelle are +Northnorthwest, and Southsouthwest, and are distant three leagues. The +Isle of Hares is in 48 and 1/16 of a degree. From the Mountaines of Nostre +Dame vnto Canada(29) and vnto Hochelaga, all the land on the South coast +is faire, a lowe land and goodly champaigne, all couered with trees vnto +the brink of the riuer. And the land on the North side is higher, and in +some places there are high mountaines. And from the Isle of Hares vnto the +Isle of Orleans the riuer is not past 4 or 5 leagues broad. Betweene the +Isle of Hares and the highland on the North side the sea is not past a +league and a halfe broad, and it is very deepe, for it is aboue 100. +fathoms deepe in the middest. To the East of the Isle of Hares there are 2 +or 3 small Isles and rockes. And from hence to the Isle des Coudres or of +Filbeards, all is nothing but Isles and rockes on the South shore: and +towards the North the sea is fayre and deepe. The Isle of Hares and the +Isle of Filbeards lie northeast, West and Southwest, and they are distant +12 leagues. And you must alwayes run along the high land on the north +shore; for on the other shore there is nothing but rocks. And you must +passe by the side of the Isle of Filbeards, and the riuer there is not +past a quarter of a league broad, and you must sayle in the middest of the +Chanel: and in the middest runneth the best passage either at an hie or a +low water, because the sea runneth there strongly, and there are great +dangers of rocks, and you had neede of good ancre and cable. The isle of +Filbeards is a small isle, about one league long, and halfe a league +broad, but they are all banks of sand. The isle of Filberds stands in 47. +deg and 3/4. The isle of Filberds and the isle of Orleans lie northeast +and southwest, and they are distant 10 leagues, and thou must passe by the +high land on the north-side about a quarter of a league, because that in +the midst of the riuer there is nothing but sholds and rocks. (M198) And +when thou shall bee ouer against a round Cape, thou must take ouer to the +South shore southwest, and a quarter toward the south; and thou shalt +sayle in 5. 6 and 7 fathoms: and there the riuer of Canada beginneth to +bee fresh, and the salt water endeth. (M199) And when thou shall be +athwart the point of the isle of Orleans, where the riuer beginneth to be +fresh, thou shalt sayle in the midst of the riuer, and thou shalt leaue +the isle on the starreboord, which is on the right hand: and here the +riuer is not past a quarter of a league broad, and hath 20 and 30 fathoms +water. And towards the South shore there is a ledge of Isles all couered +with trees, and they end ouer against the point of the Isle of Orleans. +And the poynt of the Isle of Orleans toward the Northeast is in 47 degrees +and one terce of a degree. And the Isle of Orleans is a fayre Isle, all +couered with trees even vnto the riuers side: and it is about 5 leagues +long, and a league and an halfe broade. And on the North shore there is +another Riuer, which falleth into the mayne Riuer at the ende of the +Island: and Shippes may very well passe there. From the middest of the +Isle vnto Canada the Riuer runneth West; and from the place of Canada vnto +France-Roy the riuer turneth West Southwest: and from the West ende of the +Isle to Canada is but one league; and vnto France-Roy 4 leagues. And when +thou art come to the end of the Isle thou shalt see a great Riuer which +falleth fifteene or twenty fathoms downe from a rocke, and maketh a +terrible noyse. The Fort of France-roy stands in 47 degrees, and one sixt +part of a degree. + +The extension of all these lands, vpon iust occasion is called New France. +For it is as good and as temperate as France, and in the same latitude. +(M200) And the reason wherefore it is colder in the Winter is, because the +fresh Riuer is naturally more colde then the Sea; and it is also broad and +deepe: and in some places it is halfe a league and aboue in breadth. +(M201) And also because the land is not tylled nor full of people, and is +all full of Woods, which is the cause of colde, because there is not store +of fire nor cattel. And the sunne hath his Meridian as high as the +Meridian at Rochel: and it is noone here when the Sunne is at South +Southwest at Rochel. (M202) And here the north starre by the compasse +standeth North northeast. And when at Rochel it is noone, it is but halfe +an houre past nine at France-Roy. From the sayde place vnto the Ocean sea +and the coast of New France, is not aboue 50 leagues distance. And from +the entrance of Norumbega(30) vnto Florida are 300 leagues: and from this +place of France-Roy to Hochelaga, are about 80 leagues: and vnto the Isle +of Rasus 30 leagues. And I doubt not but Norumbega entereth into the riuer +of Canada, and vnto the Sea of Saguenay. And from the Fort of France-Roy +vntill a man come foorth of the Grand Bay is not aboue 230 leagues. And +the course is Northeast and West Southwest not aboue 5 degrees and 1/3 +difference: and reckon 16 leagues and an halfe to a degree. By the nature +of the climate the lands toward Hocheslaga are still better and better, +and more fruitfull. And this land is fitte for Figges and Peares. (M203) +And I thinke that gold and siluer will be found here, according as the +people of the countrey say. These landes lye ouer against Tartarie, and I +doubt not but that they stretch toward Asia, according to the roundnesse +of the world. And therefore it were good to haue a small Shippe of 70 +tunnes to discouer the coast of New France on the backe side of (M204) +Florida: for I haue bene at a Bay as farre as 42 degrees betweene +Norambega and Florida, and I haue not searched the ende thereof, and I +knowe not whether it passe through.(31) And in all these Countreys there +are okes, and bortz, ashes, elmes, arables, trees of life, pines, +prussetrees, ceders, great wall nut trees, and wilde nuts, hasel-trees, +wilde peare trees, wilde grapes, and there haue bene found redde plummes. +And very faire corne groweth there and peason grow of their owne accord, +gooseberries and strawberries. And there are goodly Forrests, wherein men +may hunt. And there are great store of stagges, deere, porkepicks, and the +Sauages say there bee Vnicornes. Fowle there are in abundance, as +bustards, wilde geese, cranes, turtle doues, rauens, crowes, and many +other birds. All things which are sowen there, are not past two or three +dayes in coming vp out of the ground. I haue tolde in one eare of corne an +hundred and twenty graines, like the corne of France. And ye neede not to +sowe your Wheate vntill March, and it will be ripe in the middest of +August. The waters are better and perfecter then in France. And if the +Countrey were tilled and replenished with people, it would be as hotte as +Rochel. (M205) And the reason why it snoweth there oftener then in France +is, because it raineth there but seldome: for the raine is conuerted into +snowes. + +All things aboue mentioned, are true. + +Iohn Alphonse made this Voyage with Monsieur Roberual. + +There is a pardon to be seene for the pardoning of Monsieur de Saine +terre, Lieutenant of the sayd Monsieur de Roberual, giuen in Canada in the +presence of the sayde Iohn Alphonse. + + + + +XX. The Voyage of Iohn Francis de la Roche, knight, Lord of Roberual, to +the Countries of Canada, Saguenai, and Hochelaga, with three tall Ships, +and two hundred persons, both men, women, and children, begun in April, +1542. In which parts he remayned the same summer, and all the next winter. + + +Sir Iohn Francis de la Roche knight, lord of Roberual, appoynted by the +king as his Lieutenant general in the countreis of Canada, Saguenay, and +Hochelaga, furnished 3. tall Ships, chiefly at the kings cost: And hauing +in his fleete 200. persons, aswel men as women, accompanied with diuers +gentlemen of qualitie, as namely with Monsieur Saineterre his lieutenant, +l'Espiney his Ensigne, captain Guinecourt, Monsieur Noire Fontaine, Dieu +Lamont, Frote, la Brosse, Francis de Mire, la Salle, and Roieze, and Iohn +Alfonse of Xanctoigne an excellent pilot, set sayle from Rochel the 16. of +April 1542. The same day about noone we came athwart of Chefe de boys, +where we were enforced to stay the night following. On Monday the +seuenteenth of the sayde Moneth wee departed from Chefe de boys. The winde +serued vs notably for a time: but within fewe dayes it came quite +contrary, which hindered our iourney for a long space: For wee were +suddenly enforced to turne backe, and to seeke Harborough in Belle Isle, +on the coast of Bretaigne, where wee stayed so long, and had such contrary +weather by the way, that wee could not reach Newfound lande, vntill the +seuenth of Iune. The eight of this Moneth wee entred into the Rode of +Saint Iohn, where wee founde seuenteene Shippes of fishers. While wee made +somewhat long abode heere, Iaques Cartier and his company returning from +Canada, whither hee was sent with fiue sayles the yeere before, arriued in +the very same Harbour. Who, after hee had done his duetie to our Generall, +tolde him that hee had brought certaine Diamonts, and a quantitie of Golde +ore, which was found in the Countrey. Which ore the Sunday next ensuing +was tryed in a Furnace, and found to be good. + +Furthermore, hee enformed the Generall that hee could not with his small +company withstand the Sauages, which went about dayly to annoy him: and +that this was the cause of his returne into France. Neuerthelesse, hee and +his company commended the Countrey to bee very rich and fruitfull. (M206) +But when our Generall being furnished with sufficient forces, commanded +him to goe backe againe with him, hee and his company, mooued as it +seemeth with ambition, because they would haue all the glory of the +discouerie of those partes themselues, stole priuily away the next night +from vs, and without taking their leaues departed home for Bretaigne. + +Wee spent the greatest part of Iune in this Harbour of Saint Iohn, partly +in furnishing our selues with fresh water, whereof wee stoode in very +great neede by the way, and partly in composing and taking vp of a quarell +betweene some of our Countreymen and certaine Portugals. At length, about +the last of the aforesayde Moneth, wee departed hence, and entred into the +Grand Baye, and passed by the Isle of Ascension: and finally arriued foure +leagues Westward of the Isle of Orleans. In this place wee found a +conuenient Harbour for our shipping, where wee cast anchor, went a shoare +with our people, and chose out a conuenient place to fortifie ourselues +in, fitte to command the mayne Riuer, and of strong situation against all +inuasion of enemies. Thus towarde the ende of Iuly, wee brought our +victuals and other munitions and prouisions on shore, and began to +trauaile in fortyfying of our selues. + + + +Of the Fort of France Roy, and that which was done there. + + +Hauing described the beginning, the middest, and the ende of the Voyage +made by Monsieur Roberual in the Countreyes of Canada, Hochelaga, +Saguenay, and other Countreyes in the West partes: He sayled so farre, (as +it is declared in other bookes) that hee arriued in the sayde Countrey, +accompanyed with two hundred persons, souldiers, mariners, and common +people, with all furniture necessary for a fleete. The sayde Generall at +his first arriuall built a fayre Fort, neere and somewhat Westward aboue +Canada, which is very beautifull to beholde, and of great force, situated +vpon an high mountaine, wherein there were two courtes of buyldings, a +great Towre and another of fortie or fiftie foote long: wherein there were +diuers Chambers, an Hall, a Kitchine, houses of office, Sellers high and +lowe, and neere vnto it were an Ouen and Milles, and a stooue to warme men +in, and a Well before the house. And the buylding was situated vpon the +great Riuer of Canada, commonly called France prime, by Monsieur Roberual. +There was also at the foote of the mountaine another lodging, part whereof +was a great Towne of two stories high, two courtes of good buylding, where +at the first all our victuals, and whatsoeuer was brought with vs was sent +to be kept: and neere vnto that Towre there is another small riuer. In +these two places aboue and beneath, all the meaner sort was lodged. + +(M207) And in the moneth of August, and in the beginning of September +euery man was occupied in such woorke as eche one was able to doe. But the +fourteenth of September, our aforesayde Generall sent backe into France +two Shippes which had brought his furniture, and he appointed for Admirall +Monsieur de Saine-terre, and the other captaine was Monsieur Guinecourt, +to carie newes vnto the King, and to come backe againe vnto him the yeere +next ensuing, furnished with victuals and other things, as it should +please the King: and also to bring newes out of France how the King +accepted certaine Diamants which were sent him, and were found in this +countrey. + +(M208) After these two Shippes were departed, consideration was had how +they should doe, and how they might passe out the Winter in this place. +First they tooke a view of the victuals, and it was found that they fell +out short: and they were scantled so, that in eche messe they had but two +loaues weighing a pound a piece, and halfe a pound of biefe. They ate +Bacon at Dinner with halfe a pound of butter: and Biefe at supper, and +about two handfuls of Beanes without Butter. + +On the Wednesday, Friday, and Saturday they did eate dry Cod, and +sometimes they did eate it greene at dinner with butter, and they ate of +Porposes and beanes at supper. + +About that time the Sauages brought vs great store of Aloses, which is a +fish somewhat redde like a Salmon, to get kniues and other small trifles +for them. + +In the ende many of our people fell sicke of a certaine disease in their +legges, reynes, and stomacke, so that they seemed to bee depriued of all +their lymmes, and there dyed thereof about fiftie. + +(M209) Note that the yce began to breake up in April. + +Monsieur Roberual vsed very good iustice, and punished euery man according +to his offence. One whose name was Michael Gaillon, was hanged for his +theft. Iohn of Nantes was layde in yrons, and kept prisoner for his +offence, and others also were put in yrons, and diuers were whipped, as +well men as women: by which meanes they liued in quiet. + + + +The maners of the Sauages. + + +To declare vnto you the state of the Sauages, they are people of a goodly +stature, and well made, they are very white, but they are all naked: and +if they were apparelled as the French are, they would bee as white and as +fayre: but they paynt themselues for feare of heat and sunne burning. + +(M210) In stead of apparell, they weare skinnes vpon them like mantles; +and they haue a smal payre of breeches, wherewith they couer their +priuities, as well men as women. They haue hosen and shooes of lether +excellently made. And they haue no shirts: neither couer they their heads, +but their hayre is trussed vp aboue the crowne of their heads, and playted +or broyded. Touching their victuals, they eate good meate, but all +vnsalted, but they drye it, and afterward they broyle it, as well fish as +flesh. They haue no certaine dwelling place, and they goe from place to +place, as they thinke they must best finde foode, as Aloses in one place, +and other fish, Salmons, Sturgions, Mullets, Surmullets, Barz, Carpes, +Eeles, Pinperneaux, and other fresh water fish, and store of Porposes. +They feede also of Stagges, wilde Bores, Bugles, Porkespynes, and store of +other wilde beastes. And there is as great store of Fowle as they can +desire. + +Touching their bread, they make very good: and it is of great myll: and +they liue very well; for they take care for nothing else. + +They drinke Seale oyle, but this is at their great feasts. + +(M211) They haue a King in euery Countrey, and are wonderfull obedient +vnto him: and they doe him honour according vnto their maner and fashion. +And when they trauayle from place to place, they cary all their goods with +them in their boates. + +The women nurse their children with the breast, and they sit continually, +and are wrapped about the bellies with skinnes of furre. + + + + +XXI. The voyage of Monsieur Roberual from his Fort in Canada vnto +Saguenay, the fifth of Iune, 1543. + + +Monsieur Roberual the kings Lieutenant generall in the Countries of +Canada, Saguenay, and Hochelaga, departed toward the said prouince of +Saguenay on the Tuesday the 5. day of Iune 1543. after supper: and he with +all his furniture was imbarked to make the sayd voyage. But vpon a +certaine occasion they lay in the Rode ouer against the place before +mentioned: but on the Wednesday about sixe of the clocke in the morning +they set sayle, and sayled against the streame: in which voyage their +whole furniture was of eight barks, as well great as small, and to the +number of threescore and ten persons, with the aforesayd Generall. + +The Generall left behinde him in the aforesayde place and Fort thirtie +persons to remayne there vntill his returne from Saguenay, which he +appoynted to be the first of Iuly, or else they should returne into +France. And hee left there behinde him but two Barkes to cary the sayde +thirtie persons, and the furniture which was there, while hee stayed still +in the Countrey. + +And for effectuating hereof, he left as his Lieutenant a gentleman named +Monsieur de Royeze, to whom he gaue commission, and charged all men to +obey him, and to be at the commandement of the sayde Lieutenant. + +The victuals which were left for their mayntenance vntill the sayd first +day of Iuly, were receiued by the sayd Lieutenant Royeze. + +On Thursday the 14. of Iune Monsieur de l'Espiney, la Brosse, Monsieur +Frete, Monsieur Longeual, and others, returned from the Generall, from the +voyage of Saguenay. + +And note that eight men and one Barke were drowned and lost, among whom +was Monsieur de Noire Fontaine, and one named la Vasseur of Constance. + +On Tuesday the 19. of Iune aforesayd, there came from the Generall, +Monsieur de Villeneufe, Talebot, and three others, which brought sixescore +pounds weight of their corne, and letters to stay yet vntill Magdalentyde, +which is the 22. day of Iuly. + +The rest of this Voyage is wanting. + + + + +XXII. A Discourse of Western Planting, written by M. Richard Hakluyt, +1584. + + +Introductory Note. + +[The following Discourse, one of the most curious and valuable +contributions to the History of early discovery in the New World, has +remained practically unknown from the date of its composition to the +present time. Written, as appears from the title page, of which I give a +copy on page 173, by Hakluyt at the request of Mr. Walter Raleigh,(32) it +must, according to the same authority, have been composed between the 17th +of April and the middle of September 1584, the former being the date of +sailing of Raleigh's two ships there mentioned and the latter the date of +their return. The title-page itself must have been added afterwards, as it +speaks of "Mr. Walter Raghly, nowe knight," and the 21st chapter of the +Discourse seemes to have been added at the same time. Its object was +evidently to urge Elizabeth to support Raleigh's adventure, in which he +was then embarked under a patent granted him on 25th March 1584. It is +not, therefore, surprising to find from a letter written by Hakluyt to Sir +Francis Walsingham on the 7th April 1585,(33) and from another paper in +the Rolls Office, indicated in Mr. Lemon's Calendar of State Papers of the +reign of Elizabeth, 1581-90, Vol. cxcv., art. 127, that this Discourse was +presented to the Queen by Hakluyt in the early autumn of 1584.(34) Four +copies were certainly made of this Discourse--the original, which Hakluyt +would probably keep; one for the Queen; one for Walsingham (as appears +from the paper in the Record Office mentioned above); and the copy from +which the present text is taken, and which alone seems to have contained +the 21st Chapter. Perhaps this last copy was made for the Earl of +Leicester, as the paper above alluded to states that the Earl "hath very +earnestly often times writ for it." However this may be, no copy of the +Discourse was known to exist till the sale of Lord Valentia's collection, +when Mr. Henry Stevens bought the manuscript here published. Its value +seems to have been properly appreciated by him, owing perhaps to the +following memoranda written in pencil on the second blank leaf, in the +handwriting, it is believed, of Lord Valentia:-- + +"This unpublished manuscript of Hakluyt's is extremely curious. + +"I procured it from the family of Sir Peter Thomson.(35) + +"The editors of the last edition would have given any money for it, had it +been known to have existed."(36) + +After fruitless endeavours "to find for it a resting place in some public +or private library in America, and subsequently in the British +Museum,"(37) Mr. Stevens sent it to Puttick & Simpson's Auction Rooms, +where it was knocked down to Sir Henry Phillipps for L44. (May, 1854.) + +In the library, then, of Thirlestane House, Cheltenham, did our manuscript +lie till 1867, when Dr. Leonard Woods, late President of Bowdoin College, +was commissioned by the Governor of Maine, in pursuance of the Resolves of +the Legislature in aid of the Maine Historical Society, to procure, during +his travels in England, materials for the early History of the State. An +application made by Dr. Woods to Sir Thomas Phillipps revealed the +existence of Hakluyt's Discourse. Dr. Woods set to work to edit this +valuable document, but a fire destroyed most of his materials, and was +followed by physical infirmity which forbade literary labour. Dr. Charles +Deane's familiarity with the topics suggested by the matter in hand, and +his position as a "Collaborateur" of Dr. Woods for some months, at once +pointed him out as the right man to do the work to the Standing Committee +of the Maine Historical Society. Dr. Deane undertook the task, and an +excellent octavo edition of Hakluyt's Discourse appeared in due course, +entitled:-- + +"Documentary History of the State of Maine. Vol II., containing A +Discourse on Western Planting, written in the year 1584, by Richard +Hakluyt. Published by the Maine Historical Society, aided by appropriation +from the State. Cambridge (Mass.): Press of John Wilson and Son. 1877." + +The text of the MS. has been preserved in every essential particular, but, +following Dr. Deane's example, some capital letters have had liberties +taken with them, and some few abbreviated words have been printed in full. +A few corrections have also been made in the quotations from English and +foreign writers, where a comparison with the originals has shown such +corrections to be necessary. Dr. Deane's notes have been necessarily much +shortened, and are distinguished from my own by the initials C.D. + +This "extremely curious" manuscript, which by some extraordinary oversight +was not included in Hakluyt's Collection of Voyages of 1598-1600, so +appropriately called by Froude "the great prose Epic of the modern English +nation," and which Evans would, according to Lord Valentia, "have given +any money for," for his edition of 1809-12, is now at length inserted in +its proper position. This I owe to the courtesy of Dr. Deane to whom I was +a perfect stranger, save perhaps in my character of corresponding member +of the Nova Scotia Historical Society and of the Oneida Historical +Society. To Dr. Deane, therefore, I venture to tender my warmest +thanks.--E.G.] + +A particuler discourse concerning the greate necessitie and manifolde +comodyties that are like to growe to this Realme of Englande by the +Westerne discoueries lately attempted, written in the yere 1584. by +Richarde Hackluyt of Oxforde, at the requeste and direction of the righte +worshipfull Mr. Walter Raghly, nowe Knight, before the comynge home of his +twoo barkes, and is devided into XXI chapiters, the titles whereof followe +in the nexte leafe. + +[The heads of Chapters are omitted as they are inserted in their proper +places before each Chapter.] + + + +Chap. I. The Western Planting. + + +That this Westerne discoverie will be greately for thinlargemente of the +gospell of Christe, whereunto the princes of the Refourmed Religion are +chefely bounde, amongeste whome her Majestie ys principall. + +Seinge that the people of that parte of AMERICA from 30. degrees in +Florida northewarde unto 63. degrees (which ys yet in no Christian princes +actuall possession) are idolaters; and that those which Stephen Gomes +broughte from the coaste of NORUMBEGA in the yere 1524.(38) worshipped the +sonne, the moone, and the starres, and used other idolatrie, as it ys +recorded in the historie of Gonsaluo de Ouiedo,(39) in Italian, fol. 52. +of the third volume of Ramusius; and that those of Canada and Hochelaga in +48. and 50. degrees worshippe a spirite which they call Cudruaigny, as we +reade in the tenthe chapiter of the seconde relation of Jaques Cartier, +whoe saieth: This people beleve not at all in God, but in one whome they +call Cudruaigny; they say that often he speaketh with them, and telleth +them what weather shall followe, whether goodd or badd, &c.,(40) and yet +notwithstandinge they are very easie to be perswaded, and doe all that +they sawe the Christians doe in their devine service, with like imitation +and devotion, and were very desirous to become Christians, and woulde +faine have been baptized, as Verarsanus witnesseth in the laste wordes of +his relation, and Jaques Cartier in the tenthe chapiter before recited--it +remayneth to be thoroughly weyed and considered by what meanes and by +whome this moste godly and Christian work may be perfourmed of inlarginge +the glorious gospell of Christe, and reducinge of infinite multitudes of +these simple people that are in errour into the righte and perfecte way of +their saluation. The blessed Apostle Paule, the converter of the Gentiles, +Rom: 10. writeth in this manner: Whosoever shall call on the name of the +Lorde shall be saved. But howe shall they call on him in whom they have +not beleved? and how shall they beleve in him of whom they have not +hearde? and howe shall they heare withoute a preacher? and howe shall they +preache excepte they be sente? Then it is necessary for the salvation of +those poore people which have sitten so longe in darkenes and in the +shadowe of deathe, that preachers should be sent unto them. But by whome +shoulde these preachers be sente? By them no doubte which have taken upon +them the protection and defence of the Christian faithe. (M212) Nowe the +Kinges and Queenes of England have the name of Defendours of the +Faithe.(41) By which title I thinke they are not onely chardged to +mayneteyne and patronize the faithe of Christe, but also to inlarge and +advaunce the same. Neither oughte this to be their laste worke, but rather +the principall and chefe of all others, accordinge to the comaundemente of +our Saviour, Christe, Mathewe 6, Ffirste seeke the kingdome of God and the +righteousnes thereof, and all other thinges shalbe mynistred unto you. + +(M213) Nowe the meanes to sende suche as shall labour effectually in this +busines ys, by plantinge one or twoo colonies of our nation upon that +fyrme, where they may remaine in safetie, and firste learne the language +of the people nere adjoyninge (the gifte of tongues beinge nowe taken +awaye), and by little and little acquainte themselves with their manner, +and so with discretion and myldenes distill into their purged myndes the +swete and lively liquor of the gospel. Otherwise, for preachers to come +unto them rashly with oute some suche preparation for their safetie, yt +were nothinge els but to ronne to their apparaunte and certaine +destruction, as yt happened onto those Spanishe ffryers, that, before any +plantinge, withoute strengthe and company, landed in Fflorida, where they +were miserablye massacred by the savages.(42) On the other side, by meane +of plantinge firste, the small nation of the Portingales towardes the +Southe and Easte have planted the Christian faithe accordinge to their +manner, and have erected many bisshoprickes and colledges to traine upp +the youthe of the infidels in the same, of which acte they more vaunte in +all their histories and chronicles, then of anythinge els that ever they +atchieved. And surely if they had planted the gospell of Christe purely, +as they did not, they mighte justly have more rejoyced in that deede of +theirs, then in the conqueste of the whole contrie, or in any other thinge +whatsoever. The like may be saied of the Spaniardes, whoe (as yt is in the +preface of the last edition of Osorius de rebus gestis Emanuelis) have +established in the West Indies three archebisshopricks, to witt, Mexico, +Luna, and Onsco, and thirtene other bisshoprickes there named, and have +builte above CC. houses of relligion in the space of fyftie yeres or +thereaboutes. Now yf they, in their superstition, by meanes of their +plantinge in those partes, have don so greate thinges in so shorte space, +what may wee hope for in our true and syncere relligion, proposinge unto +ourselves in this action not filthie lucre nor vaine ostentation, as they +in deede did, but principally the gayninge of the soules of millions of +those wretched people, the reducinge of them from darkenes to lighte, from +falsehoode to truthe, from dombe idolls to the lyvinge God, from the depe +pitt of hell to the highest heauens. In the 16. of the Actes of the +Apostles, when Paule soughte to preache in Asia and to goe into Bithinia, +the Holy Ghoste suffered him not. But at Troas a vision appered unto him +by night. There stoode a man of Macedonia and prayed hym, sayenge: Come +into Macedonia and helpe us. And after he had seene the vysion, ymmediatly +he prepared to goe into Macedonia, beinge assured that the Lorde had +called him to preache the gospell unto them. Even so wee, whiles wee have +soughte to goe into other countries (I woulde I might say to preache the +gospell), God by the frustratinge of our actions semeth to forbydd us to +followe those courses, and the people of AMERICA crye oute unto us, their +nexte neighboures, to come and helpe them, and bringe unto them the gladd +tidinges of the gospell. Unto the prince and people that shalbe the +occasion of this worthie worke, and shall open their cofers to the +furtheraunce of this most godly enterprise, God shall open the bottomles +treasures of his riches, and fill them with aboundance of his hidden +blessinges; as he did to the goodd Queene Isabella, which beinge in +extreme necessitie, laied her owne jewells to gage for money to furnishe +out Columbus for the firste discovery of the West Indies. + +(M214) And this enterprise the princes of the relligion (among whome her +Majestie ys principall) oughte the rather to take in hande, because the +papistes confirme themselves and drawe other to theire side, shewinge that +they are the true Catholicke churche because they have bene the onely +converters of many millions of infidells to Christianitie. Yea, I myselfe +have bene demaunded of them, how many infidells have been by us converted? +Whereunto, albeit I alleaged the example of the mynisters which were sente +from Geneva with Villegagnon into Bresill,(43) and those that wente with +Iohn Ribault into Florida,(44) as also those of our nation that went with +Ffrobisher Sir Fraunces Drake, and Ffenton;(45) yet in very deede I was +not able to name any one infidell by them converted. But God, quoth I, +hath his tyme for all men, whoe calleth some at the nynthe, and some at +the eleventh houer. And if it please him to move the harte of her Majestie +to put her helpinge hande to this godly action, she shall finde as +willinge subjectes of all sortes as any other prince in all Christendome. +And as for the boastinge of your conversion of such multitudes of +infidells, yt may justly be compted, rather a perversion, seeinge you have +drawen them as it were oute of Sylla into Charibdis, that is to say, from +one error into another. Nowe therefore I truste the time ys at hande when +by her Majesties forwardnes in this enterprise, not only this obiection +and suche like shalbe aunswered by our frutefull labor in Godds harvest +amonge the infidells, but also many inconveniences and strifes amongest +ourselves at home, in matters of ceremonies, shalbe ended. For those of +the clergye which by reason of idlenes here at home are nowe alwayes +coyninge of newe opynions, havinge by this voyadge to set themselves on +worke in reducinge the savages to the chefe principles of our faith, will +become lesse contentious, and be contented with the truthe in relligion +alreadie established by authoritie. So they that shall beare the name of +Christians shall shewe themselves worthye of their vocation, so shall the +mouthe of the adversarie be stopped, so shall contention amongest brethren +be avoyded, so shal the gospell amonge infidells be published. + + + +Chap. II. That all other Englishe trades are growen beggerly or +daungerous, especially daungerous in all the Kinge of Spayne his +domynions, where our men are dryven to flinge their bibles and prayer +bookes into the sea, and to forsweare and renounce their relligion and +conscience, and consequently their obedience to her Majesty. + + +Wee are nowe to consider the qualitie and condition of all the trades +which at this day are frequented by our nation. And firste, to begynne +southwarde, and so come to the northe; leavinge Bresill and Guynea where +wee have little to doe, let us firste speake of our trade in Barbarie. +(M215) If any of our shippes tradinge thither be dryven upon the coaste of +Spaine, and that proofe may be made that wee have bene there, they make it +a very sufficient cause of confiscation of shippe and goodds, and so they +thruste our men into the Inquisition, chardging them that they bringe +armour, munition, and forbidden merchandize to strengthen the infidells +againste these partes of Christendome; which thinge is comitted to printe +and confessed by all our marchants tradinge thither. And thoughe our men +escape the Spaniardes tyrannie, yet at the deathe of the prince in +Barbary, all our mennes goodds there are subjecte to the spoile, the +custome of the contrie permitting the people to robbe and rifle until +another kinge be chosen, withoute making any kinde of restitution. Besides +that inconvenience, the traficque groweth daily to worse termes then +heretofore. I omytt to shewe here howe divers have bene undon by their +servauntes which have become renegadoes, of whome by the custome of the +contrie their masters can have no manner of recovery, neither call them +into justice.(46) + +(M216) In all the Kinge of Spaines domynions our men are either inforced +with wounded consciences to playe the dissemblinge hipocrites, or be +drawen to mislike with the state of relligion mainteyned at home, or +cruelly made away in the Inquisition. Moreouer, he being our mortall +enemye, and his empire of late beinge increased so mightely, and our +necessitie of oiles and colours for our clothinge trade being so greate, +he may arreste almoste the one halfe of our navye, our traficque and +recourse being so greate to his domynions. + +For the new trade in Turky, besides the greate expences in mayneteyninge a +kind of embassador at Constantinople, and in sendinge of presentes to +Selym the Graunde Segnior, and to divers of his insatiable bassoes, our +marchantes are faine with large rewardes to gratifie the Knightes of +Malta, in whose daunger their shippes must often passe. Moreover that +trade is so moche to the detrymente of the State of Venice, and all the +other States of Italie, that they are dayly occupied in seekinge howe they +may overthrow the same. Neither is it the leaste incomoditie that our +shippes are contynually assaulted by the corsaries and pirates and gallies +of Algiers, by which they had a rich shippe, called the Mary Martin, +soncke this yere; and the last yere another was taken at Trypoly in +Barbary, and the master with another hanged, and the reste made slaves. +Besides, the barke Reynoldes was arrested at Malta, and at lengthe with +moche adoe delivered.(47) + +(M217) To leave the Levant and to come to France, the traficque there of +myne owne knowledge(48) is growen to such decaye, partely by the +impositions and taxes which are daily devised by the kinges partely by +their subtil sleights and devices to confiscate our clothes for +insufficient workemanshippe, and partely by their owne labour in makinge +more and better clothe then heretofore they were accustomed, that our men +for the moste parte are wearye of the contrie, and some of them utterly +undone by their subtill and unconcionable wranglinge. (M218) As for all +Flaunders and the Lowe Contries, these eightene yeres moste cruell civill +warres have so spoiled the traficque there, that there is nothinge but +povertie and perill, and that which is worse, there is no hope of any +spedy amendemente. + +(M219) To come to the Esterlinges and the trades with the cities within +the Sounde of Denmarke, they beinge deprived of the olde priviledges of +the Stilliarde here in London, have not only offred our men at home many +injuries in their cities, but seeke all the meanes they can devise wholy +to cutt of all our occupienge that way; and to the same purpose have +lately cleane debarred our men of their accustomed and auncient +priviledges in all their greate townes. (M220) Also the exactions of the +Kinge of Denmarke at our passage in and oute by the Sounde to Lubecke, +Danske, Elvinge, Rye, Revell, and the Narve, besides the power that he +hath to arreste all our shippes within the Sounde at his pleasure, are +twoo no small inconveniences and myschefes. + +(49) Our trade into Muscovye ys the laste, which was so chardgeable in the +begynnynge, what with the coste of the discoverie, what with presentes to +the Emperour, together with the disorderly dealinge of their factors, that +it stoode them in fourscore thousande poundes before they broughte it to +any goodd passe. And nowe after longe hope of gayne, the Hollanders, as +also the men of Diepe, are entred into their trade by the Emperours +permission; yea, whereas at the firste our men paid no custome, of late +yeres, contrarie to their firste priviledge, they have bene urged to pay +yt. Also the chardges of bringinge the Emperours embassador hither, and +mayneteyninge him here, and the settinge furthe of her Majesties +embassadour thither with presentes to the Emperour, lyenge all upon the +poore marchantes neckes, is no easie burden unto their shoulders. And to +encrease the some, the Kinge of Denmarke requireth a tribute of them, +thoughe they touche not upon any of his domynions. And nowe the Emperour +of Russia beinge late deade,(50) yt is greately feared that the voyadge +wilbe utterly ouerthrowen, or els become not worthe the contynuaunce. + +Thus hauinge regarde unto the premisses, yt behoveth us to seeke some newe +and better trade, of lesse daunger and more securitie, of lesse dammage, +and of more advauntage; the rather to avoide the wilfull perjurie of suche +of our Englishe nation as trade to Spaine and other of Kinge Phillipps +domynions, where this oathe followinge ys usually ministred unto the +master of our shippes. Firste, he willeth the master to make a crosse with +his fore finger and his thombe, layenge one ouer the other crosswise. This +beinge don, he saieth these wordes followinge: You shall sweare to speake +the truthe of all thinges that shalbe asked of you, and yf you doe not, +that God demaunde yt of you: and the Englishe master muste saye, Amen. You +shall sweare by that crosse that you bringe no man in your shippe but +suche as are goodd christians, and doe beleue as our Catholicke Churche of +Rome dothe beleve. Nexte, that you bringe no manner of bookes but suche as +are allowed by our Catholicke Churche of Rome; and that you use no manner +of prayers but suche as are allowed by our Churche of Rome. What +marchandize bringe you; suche and suche. We will and commaunde you and +your companie to come on land to masse every Sonday and holy day, upon +paine of discommunication. Then they open their chestes, and looke if the +master and maryners bringe any bookes with them in their chests. This don, +the officers that come with the preestes aske of the master and maryners +chese, butter, befe, bacon, and candles, as beggers, and they give it to +them for feare they have of them, and so they goe from the shippes with +their walletts full of victualls. The master doth pay four ryalls of plate +for the barke that bringeth them aboorde to visite them. Thus is wilfull +perjurye permitted by the governours if they knowe it. Thus the covetous +marchante wilfully sendeth headlonge to hell from day to day the poore +subjectes of this realme. The marchant in England cometh here devoutly to +the communyon, and sendeth his sonne into Spaine to here masse. These +thinges are kepte secrete by the marchantes, and suche as depende upon the +trade of marchandize are lothe to utter the same. + + + +Chap. III. That this westerne voyadge will yelde unto us all the +commodities of Europe, Affrica and Asia, as far as wee were wonte to +travell, and supplye the wantes of all our decayed trades. + + +The nexte thinge ys that nowe I declare unto you the comodities (M221) of +this newe westerne discoverie, and what marchandize are there to be had, +and from thence to be expected; wherein firste you are to have regarde +unto the scituation of the places which are left for us to be possessed. +The contries therefore of AMERICA where unto we have just title, as being +firste discovered by Sebastian Gabote, at the coste of that prudente +prince Kinge Henry the Seaventh, from Florida northewarde to 67. +degrees,(51) (and not yet in any Christian princes actuall possession,) +beinge aunswerable in clymate to Barbary, Egipte, Siria, Persia, Turky, +Greece, all the islandes of the Levant sea, Italie, Spaine, Portingale, +Fraunce, Flaunders, Highe Almayne, Denmarke, Estland, Poland, and +Muscovye, may presently or within a shorte space afforde unto us, for +little or nothinge, and with moche more safetie, eyther all or a greate +parte of the comodities which the aforesaid contries do yelde us at a very +dere hande and with manifolde daungers. + +Firste, therefore, to begyn at the southe from 30. degrees, and to quote +unto you the leafe and page of the printed voyadges of those which +personally have with diligence searched and viewed these contries. John +Ribault writeth thus, in the firste leafe of his discourse, extant in +printe bothe in Frenche and Englishe:(52) Wee entred (saieth he) and +viewed the contrie which is the fairest, frutefullest, and pleasauntest of +all the worlde, aboundinge in honye, waxe, venison, wilde fowle, +fforrestes, woodes of all sortes, palme trees, cipresses, cedars, bayes, +the highest and greatest, with also the fairest vines in all the worlde, +with grapes accordinge, which naturally withoute arte or mans helpe or +trymmynge will growe to toppes of oakes and other trees that be of +wonderfull greatness and heighte. And the sighte of the faire meadowes is +a pleasure not able to be expressed with tongue, full of herons, curlues, +bitters, mallardes, egriphts, woodcockes, and all other kinde of small +birdes, with hartes, hinds, bucks, (M222) wilde swyne, and all other kind +of wilde beastes, as wee perceaved well bothe by their footinge there, and +also afterwardes in other places by their crye and roaringe in the nighte. +Also there be conies and hares, silkewormes in marvelous nomber, a great +deale fairer and better then be our silkewormes. Againe, in the sixte +leafe and seconde page; They shewed unto us by signes that they had in the +lande golde and silver and copper, whereof wee have broughte some home. +Also leade like unto ours, which wee shewed them. Also turqueses and +greate aboundance of perles, which as they declared unto us they tooke +oute of oysters, whereof there is taken ever alonge the rivers side and +amongest the reedes and in the marishes, in so marvelous aboundance as it +is scante credible. And wee have perceaved that there be as many and as +greate perles found there as in any contrie in the worlde. (M223) In the +seaventh leafe it followeth thus: The scituation is under 30. degrees, a +good clymate, healthfull, and of goodd temperature, marvelous pleasaunte, +the people goodd and of a gentle and amyable nature, which willingly will +obey, yea be contented to serve those that shall with gentlenes and +humanitie goe aboute to allure them, as yt is necessarie for those that be +sente thither hereafter so to doe. (M224) In the eighth leafe: It is a +place wonderful, fertile and of stronge scituation, the grounde fatt, so +that it is like that it would bringe forthe wheate and all other come +twise a yere. (M225) In the ninth leafe yt followeth: Wee founde there a +greate nomber of pepper trees, the pepper beinge yet greene and not ready +to be gathered. In the tenth leafe: There wee sawe the fairest and the +greatest vines with grapes accordinge, and younge trees and small wooddes +very well smellinge, that ever weare sene. Thus have you brefely the some +of the comodities which were founde by John Ribault and his companye on +the coaste of America from 30. to 34. degrees. + +Moreouer, Doctor Monardus, that excellent phisition of Civill, writinge of +the trees of the West Indies in his booke called Joyfull Newes out of the +New founde worlde,(53) maketh mention of a tree called Sassafras, which +the Frenchmen founde in Florida, fol. 46 of his booke, in manner +followinge: From the Florida they bringe a woodde and roote of a tree that +groweth in those partes, of greate vertues and excellencies, healinge +therewith grevous and variable deseases. It may be three yeres paste that +I had knowledge of this tree, and a Frenche man that had bene in those +partes shewed me a pece of yt, and tolde me marvells of the vertues +thereof, and howe many and variable diseases were healed with the water +which was made of it, and I judged that, which nowe I doe finde to be true +and have seene by experience. He tolde me that the Frenchemen which had +bene in the Florida, at the time when they came into those partes had bene +sicke the moste of them of grevous and variable diseases, and that the +Indians did shewe them this tree, and the manner howe they shoulde vse yt, +&c; so they did, and were healed of many evills; which surely bringeth +admiration that one onely remedy shoulde worke so variable and marvelous +effectes. The name of this tree, as the Indyans terme yt, is called +Pauame, and the Frenchemen called it Sassafras. To be brefe, the Doctor +Monardus bestoweth eleven leaves in describinge the sovereinties and +excellent properties thereof. + +The nature and comodities of the reste of the coaste unto Cape Briton I +will shewe unto you oute of the printed testymonies of John Verarsanus and +Stephen Gomes, bothe which in one yere, 1524, discovered the said +contries, and broughte home of the people; Verarsana into Ffraunce, and +Gomes into Spaine. + +Verarsana, fallinge in the latitude of 34. degrees, describeth the +scituation and commodities in this manner: Beyonde this wee sawe the open +contrie risinge in heighte above the sandie shoare, with many faire +feeldes and plaines full of mightie greate wooddes, some very thicke and +some very thynne, replenished with divers sortes of trees, and plesaunte +and delectable to beholde as ys possible to ymagine. And your Majestie may +not thinke that these are like the wooddes of Hyrcinia, or the wilde +desertes of Tartaria, and the northerne coastes, full of fruteles trees; +but full of palme, date trees, bayes, and highe cypresses, and many other +sortes of trees to us unknowen in Europe, which yelde moste swete savours +fair from the shoare; neyther doe wee thincke that they, partakinge of the +easte worlde rounde aboute them, are altogether voyde of drugs and +spicerye, and other riches of golde, seinge the colour of the lande dothe +altogether argue yt. And the lande is full of many beastes, as redd dere, +fallowe dere and hares, and likewise of lakes and pooles of freshe water, +with greate plentie of fowles convenient for all plesaunte game. This +lande is in latitude of 34. degrees with goodd and holesome ayre, +temperate, betwene hote and colde; no vehement winds doe blowe in these +regions, &c. Againe, in the fourth leafe as it is in Englishe, speakinge +of the nexte contrie, he saieth: Wee sawe in this contrie many vines +growinge naturally, which springinge upp tooke holde of the trees as they +doe in Lumbardye, which, if by husbandmen they were dressed in goodd +order, withoute all double they woulde yelde excellent wynes; for havinge +oftentymes seene the frute thereof dryed, which was swete and pleasaunte +and not differinge from oures, wee thinke they doe esteme of the same, +because that in every place where they growe, they take away the under +braunches growinge rounde aboute, that the frute thereof may ripen the +better. Wee founde also roses, violetts, lyllies, and many sortes of +herbes and swete and odoriferous flowers. And after, in the sixte leafe, +he saithe: Wee were oftentimes within the lande v. or vj. leagues, which +wee founde as pleasaunte as is possible to declare, apte for any kinde of +husbandrye of corne, wine, and oile. For therein there are plaines 25. or +30. leagues broade, open and withoute any impedymente of trees, of suche +frutefulnes that any seede beinge sowen therein will bringe furthe moste +excellente frule. Wee entred afterwardes into the wooddes, which wee +founde so greate and thicke, that an armye (were it never so greate) +mighte have hydd it selfe therein, the trees whereof were oakes, +cypresses, and other sortes unknowen in Europe. (M226) Wee founde pomi +appij, plommes, and nuttes, and many other sortes of frutes to us +unknowen. There are beastes in greate aboundaunce, as redd dere and +fallowe dere, leopardes and other kindes, which they take with their bowes +and arrowes, which are their chefeste weapons. This lande is scituate in +the parallele of Rome in 41. degrees and 2. terces. And towardes the ende +he saieth: Wee sawe many of the people weare earinges of copper hangings +at their eares. Thus farr oute of the relation of Verarsana. + +Nowe to come to Stephen Gomes, which by the commandemente of the Emperor +Charles the Fyfte discovered the coaste of Norumbega. These are the wordes +of Gonsaluo de Ouiedo in his summarye of the Weste Indies, translated into +Italian, concerninge him, fo. 52: Dapoi ehe vostra Maesta e in questa +citta di Toledo, arriuo qui nel mese di Nouembre il piloto Stephano Gomez, +ilquale nel' anno passato del 1524. per comandamento di vostra Maesta, +nauigo alla parte di Tramontana, e trouo gran parte di terra continouata a +quella che si chiama dellos Bachallaos, doscorrendo a Occidente, e giace +in 40. e 41. grado, e cosi poco piu e meno; del qual luogo meno alcuni +Indiani, e ne sono al presente in questa citta, li quali sono di maggior +grandezza di quelli di terra ferma, secondo che communemente sono, perche +anchora il detto piloto disse hauer visto molti, che sono tutti di quella +medesima grandezza, il color veramente e come quelli di terra ferma; sono +grandi arcieri, e vanno coperti di pelle d'animali saluatichi, e d' altri +animali. Sono in questa terra eccellenti martori, e zibellini, e altre +ricche fodere, delle quali ne porto alcune pelle il detto pilotto. Harmo +argento e rame, e secondo che dicono questi Indiani, et con segni fanno +intendere, adorano il Sole e la Luna, anche hanno altre idolatrie ed +errori, come quelli di terra ferma. + +Another Frenche capitaine of Diepe,(54) which had bene alongeste this +coaste, geveth this testymonie of the people and contrie from 46. to 47. +degrees, as it is in the thirde volume of viages gathered by Ramusius, +fol. 423, pag. secunda: Gli habitatori di questa terra sono genti +trattabili, amicheuoli, e piaceuoli. La terra e abbondantissima d'ogni +frutto; vi nascono aranci, mandorle, vua saluatica e molte altre sorti +d'arbori odoriferi; la terra e detta da paesani suoi Norumbega. + +This coaste, from Cape Briton CC. (200) leagues to the south west, was +again discovered at the chardges of the cardinall of Bourbon by my frende +Stephen Bellinger of Roan, the laste yere, 1583, whoe founde a towne of +fourscore houses, covered with the barkes of trees, upon a rivers side, +about C. leagues from the aforesaid Cape Briton. He reporteth that the +contrie is of the temperature of the coaste of Gascoigne and Guyann. +(M227) He broughte home a kinde of mynerall matter supposed to holde +silver, whereof he gaue me some; a kynde of muske called castor; divers +beastes skynnes, as bevers, otters, marternes, lucernes, scales, buffs, +dere skynnes, all dressed, and painted on the innerside with divers +excellent colours, as redd, tawnye, yellowe, and vermillyon,--all which +thinges I sawe; and divers other marchandize he hath which I saw not. But +he told me that he had CCCC. and xl. crownes for that in Roan, which, in +trifles bestowed upon the savages, stoode him not in fortie crownes. And +this yere, 1584. the Marques de la Roche wente with three hundreth men to +inhabte, in those partes, whose voyadge was overthrowen by occasion that +his greatest shippe of CCC. tonnes was caste away over againste Burwage, +and so the enterprize for this yere ceseth.(55) + +The nature and qualitie of thother parte of America from Cape Briton, +beinge in 46 degrees unto the latitude of 52. for iij. C. leagues within +the lande even to Hochelaga, is notably described in the twoo voyadges of +Jacques Cartier. In the fifte chapiter of his seconde relation thus he +writeth: From the 19 till the 28 of September wee sailed upp the ryver, +neuer loosinge one houre of tyme, all which space wee sawe as goodly a +contrie as possibly coulde be wisshed for, full of all sortes of goodly +trees, that is to say, oakes, elmes, walnut trees, cedars, fyrres, asshes, +boxe, willoughes, and greate store of vynes, all as full of grapes as +coulde be, that if any of our fellowes wente on shoare, they came home +laden with them. There are likewise many cranes, swannes, geese, +mallardes, fesauntes, partridges, thrusshes, black birdes, turtles, +finches, redd brestes, nightingales, sparrowes, with other sortes of +birdes even as in Fraunce, and greate plentie and store. Againe in the +xi'th chapiter of the said relation there ys mention of silver and golde +to be upon a ryver that is three monethes saylinge, navigable southwarde +from Hochelaga; and that redd copper is yn Saguynay. All that contrie is +full of sondrie sortes of woodde and many vines. There is greate store of +stagges, redd dere, fallowe dere, beares, and other suche like sorts of +bestes, as conies, hares, marterns, foxes, otters, bevers, squirrells, +badgers, and rattes excedinge greate, and divers other sortes of beastes +for huntinge. There are also many sortes of fowles, as cranes, swannes, +outardes, wilde geese, white and graye, duckes, thrusshes, black birdes, +turtles, wilde pigeons, lynnetts, finches, redd brestes, stares, +nightingales, sparrowes, and other birdes even as in Fraunce. Also, as wee +have said before, the said ryver is the plentifullest of fyshe that ever +hath bene seene or hearde of, because that from the heade to the mouthe of +yt you shall finde all kinde of freshe and salt water fyshe accordinge to +their season. There are also many whales, porposes, sea horses, and +adhothuis, which is a kinde of fishe which wee have neuer seene nor hearde +of before. And in the xii'th chapiter thus: We understoode of Donnacona +and others that ... there are people cladd with clothe as wee are, very +honest, and many inhabited townes, and that they had greate store of gold +and redde copper; and that within the land beyonde the said ryver unto +Hochelaga and Saguynay, ys an iland envyroned rounde aboute with that and +other ryvers, and that there is a sea of freshe water founde, and, as they +have hearde say of those of Saguynay, there was never man hearde of that +founde oute the begynnynge and ende thereof. Finally, in the postscripte +of the seconde relation, wee reade these wordes: They of Canada saye, that +it is a moones sailinge to goe to a land where cynamonde and cloves are +gathered. + +And nowe, because hitherto I have spoken of the outwarde coaste, I will +also alledge the comodities of the inland, in the latitude of 37. degrees, +about the citie of Ceuola, usinge the very wordes of Vasques de Coronado, +in the thirde chapter of his Relation, written to Don Antonio di Mendoza, +Viceroy of Mexico, which sente him thither with many Spaniardes and iiij. +C. horses and a thousande Indians to discover those contries.(56) He, +speakinge there of the citie of Ceuola, procedeth in this manner: In +questo doue io sto hora alloggiato possono esserui qualche dugento case +tutte circondate di muro, e parmi che con l'altre che non sono cosi +possono arriuare a cinquecento fuochi. V' e un' altra terra vicina, che e +una delle sette, ed e alqoanto maggior di questa, e un altra della +medesima grandezza di questa, e l'altre quattro sono alquanto minori, e +tutte io le mando dipinte a vostra Signoria con il viaggio, e pergamino +doue va la pittura si trouo qui con altri pergamini ... hanno mantelli +dipinti della maniera che io mando a vostra Signoria, non raccolgono +bombaso ... pero ne portano mantelli, come ella vedra per la mostra; ed e +vero che si ritrouo nelle lor case certo bombaso filato: ... et hanno +delle turchine penso in quantita ... si trouaron in una carta due punte di +smeraldi, e certe picciole pierte rotte, che tirano al color di granate, +... ed altre pietre di cristallo ... si trouaron galline ... son +buonissime e maggiori che quelle di Messico. ... Si trouo buonissima herba +ad un quarto di legha di qua. ... Mangiano le migliori tortelle che io +habbia veduto in alcuna parte. ... Hanno buonissimo sale in grano, che +leuano da un lagune che e lunghe una giornata di qua. ... Vi sono di molti +animali, orsi, tigri, leoni, porci spinosi, lepri, conigli, e certi +castrati della grandezza d' un cauallo, con corni molto grandi e code +picciole. ... Vi sono delle capre saluatiche, delle quali ho veduto le +teste, ... e le pelli de i cingiali. Vi sono cacciagioni di cerui, pardi, +caurioli molto grandi ... fanno otto giornate verso le champagne al mare +di settentrione. Quiui sono certe pelli ben concie, e la concia e pittura +gli dan doue uccidon le vacche. In the last chapiter he addeth: Mando a +vostra Signoria una pelle di vacca, certe turchine e duoi pendenti +d'orecchie delle medesime, e quindici pettini de gl'Indiani, e alcune +tauolette guarnite di queste turchine, &c. And for a conclusion he endethe +sayenge: In questo luogo s'e trouato alquanto oro ed argento, che quei che +s'intendon di miniera non l' han reputato per cattiuo. + +And Franciscus Lopez de Gomera, in his Generall Historie of the Indies, +fol. 297. and 298. in treatinge of the seconde voyadge of Franciscus +Vasques de Coronado from Ceuola to Tigues, from Tigues to Cicuic, and from +Cicuic to Quiuira, saieth firste of the contrye about Tigues: Ci sono in +quel paese melloni, e cottone bianco e rosso, del quale fanno piu larghi +mantelli, che in altre bande delle Indie. And of Quiuira he saieth: e +Quiuira in quaranta gradi, e paese temperato di bonissime acque, di molto +herbatico, prugne, more, noci, melloni ed vue che maturanno benissimo; e +vestono pelle di vacche e caprioli; uiddero per la costa navi che +portavano arcatrarzes di oro ed argento per le proe, con mercantie, e +credettero ch'erano del Cataio e China: per che accennavano, che havevano +nauigato trenta di. + +Touchinge Newefounde lande, because no man hath better searched it oute, +and all the comodities thereof, then those that were there the laste yere, +1583, the space of eightene daies on lande, with Sir Humfry Gilbert,(57) I +will make rehersall thereof, as I finde it comitted to printe in a learned +discourse, intituled A Trve Reporte of the late Discoueries and Possessyon +taken in the Righte of the Crowne of England, of the Newfounde Landes, +&c.(58) The wordes are these in the firste leafe: Then Sir Humfry wente to +viewe the contrye, beinge well accompanied with moste of his capitaines +and souldiers. They founde the same very temperate, but somwhat warmer +then England at that time of the yere, replenished with beastes and greate +store of fowle of divers kyndes, and fisshes of sondrye sortes, bothe in +the salte water and in the freshe, in so greate plentie as mighte suffice +to victuall an armye, and they are very easely taken. And in the fifte +chapter of the said discourse I reade in this manner: But let us omitte +all presumtions, howe vehemente soeuer, and dwell upon the certentie of +suche comodities as were discovered and founde by Sir Humfry Gilbert and +his assistantes in Newfoundelande, in Auguste laste; ffor there may very +easely be made pitche, tarr, rosen, sope asshes, in greate plentie, yea, +as it is thoughte, ynoughe to serve the whole realme of every of these +kindes; and of trayne oyle suche quantitie as if I shoulde set downe the +value that they doe esteme it at, which have bene there, it woulde seme +incredible. + +(M228) To this in effecte agreeth that which one Stephanus Parmenius, a +learned Hungarian, borne in Buda, and lately, my bedfelowe in Oxforde,(59) +wrote unto me oute of Newfounde lande, beinge of Sir Humfryes companye: +Piscium (saieth he, writinge in Latin) inexhausta copia, inde huc +commeantibus magnus quaestus. Vix hamus fundum attigit, illico insigni +aliquo onustus est. Terra universa montana et syluestris; arbores ut +plurimum pinus et abietes. Herbae omnes procerae, sed raro a nostris +diuersae. Natura videtur velle niti etiam ad generandum frumentum. Inueni +enim gramina et spicas in similitudinem secalis. Et facile culutra et +satione in vsum humanum assuefieri posse videntur. Rubi in siluis vel +potius fraga arborescentia magna suauitate. Vrsi circa tuguria nonnunquam +apparent et conficiuntur. ... Ignotum est an aliquid metalli subsit +montibus, ... etsi aspectus eorum mineras latentes prae se ferat. (M229) +Nos Admiralio authores fuimus syluas incendere, quo ad inspiciendam +regionem spatium pateret; nec displicebat illi consilium, si non magnum +incommodum allaturum videretur. Confirmatum est enim ab idoneis hominibus, +cum casu quopiam in alia nescio qua statione id accidisset, septennium +totum pisces non comparuisse, exacerbata maris vnda ex terebinthina, quae +conflagrantibus arboribus per riuulos defluebat. (M230) Coelum hoc anni +tempore ita feruidum est vt nisi pisces qui arefiunt solem assidui, +inuertantur, ab adustione defendi non possint. . . . Aer in terra +mediocriter clarus est. Ad orientem supra mare perpetuae nebulae, &c. + +Nowe, to passe from Newfoundelande to 60. degrees, I finde it beste +described by Jasper Corterealis,(60) in the thirde volume of the voyadges +gathered by Ramusius, fol. 417. There I reade as followeth: Nella parte +del mondo nuouo che corre verso Tramontana e maestro all' incontro del +nostro habitabile dell' Europa, v' hanno nauigato molti capitani, ed il +primo (per quel' che si sa) fu Gasparo Cortereale Portoghese, che del +1500. v' ando con due carauelle, pensando di trouar qualche stretto di +mare, donde per viaggio piu breue, che non e l' andare attorno l'Affrica, +potesse passare all' Isole delle Spicerie. Esso nauigo tanto auanti, che +venne in luogo, doue erano grandissimi freddi, et in gradi 60. di +latitudine trouo vn fiume carico di neue, dalla quale gli dette il nome, +chiamandolo Rio Neuado, ne gli basto l'animo di passar piu auanti. Tutta +questa costa, che corre dal detto Rio Neuado infin' al porto di Maluas +leghe 200. ilqual e in gradi 56. la vidde piena di genti, e molto +habitato: sopra laqual dismontato prese alcuni per menargli seco, scoperse +ancho molte Isole per mezo la detta costa tutte populate, a ciascuna delle +quali diede il nome. Gli habitanti sono huomini grandi, ben proportionati, +ma alquanto berrettini, e si dipingono la faccia, e tutto il corpo con +diuersi colori per galanteria. Portano manigli d' argento e di rame, e si +cuoprono con pelli cucite insieme di martori e d' altri animali diversi; +il verno le portono col pelo di dentro, e la state di fuori. Il cibo loro +per la maggior parte e di pesce piu che d'alcuna altra cosa, massimamente +di salmoni, che n'hanno grandissima copia: ed anchora che vi siano diuersi +sorti d'vccelli, e di frutti, nondimeno non fanno conto se non del pesce. +Le loro habitationi sono fatte di legname, delquale hanno abondantia per +esserui grandissimi, ed infiniti boschi, ed in luogo di tegole le cuoprono +di pelli di pesci, che ne pigliano grandissimi, e gli scorticano. Vidde +molti vccelli, e altri animali, massimamente orsi tutti bianchi.(61) + +The reste of this coaste from 60. to 63. is described by Frobisher,(62) +and in freshe memorye, so that I shall not nede to make repetition +thereof. + +(M231) Thus, havinge alleaged many printed testymonies of these credible +persons, which were personally betwene 30. and 63. degrees in America, as +well on the coaste as within the lande, which affirmed unto the princes +and kinges which sett them oute, that they founde there golde, silver, +copper, leade, and perles in aboundaunce; precious stones, as turqueses +and emrauldes; spices and druggs, as pepper, cynamon, cloves, rubarb, +muske called castor, turpentine; silke wormes, fairer then ours of Europe; +white and redd cotten; infinite multitudes of all kinde of beastes, with +their tallowe and hides dressed and undressed; cochenilio, founde last +yere by the men of St. John de Luze, and many other kindes of coulours for +clothinge; millions of all kindes of fowles for foode and fethers; salte +for fisshinge; excellent vines in many places for wines; the soile apte to +beare olyves for oile; all kindes of frutes, as oranges, almondes, +filberdes, figges, plomes, mulberies, raspis, pomi appij, melons; all +kinde of odoriferous trees and date trees, cipresses, cedars, bayes, +sapines, hony and waxe; and in New founde lande aboundaunce of pynes and +firr trees, asshes, and other like, to make mastes and deale boordes, +pitche, tarr, rosen; and hempe for cables and cordage; and, upp within the +Graunde Baye, exceedinge quantitie of all kynde of precious furres +(whereof I sawe twentie thousande French crownes worthe the laste yere +broughte to Paris to Valeron Perosse and Mathewe Grainer, the kinges +skynners); also, suche aboundaunce of trayne oile to make sope, and of +fishe as a third part of Europe ys furnished therewith,--I may well and +truly conclude with reason and authoritie, that all the comodities of all +our olde decayed and daungerous trades in all Europe, Africa, and Asia +haunted by us, (M232) may in shorte space for little or nothinge, and many +for the very workemanshippe, in a manner be had in that part of America +which lieth betwene 30. and 60. degrees of northerly latitude, if by our +slackness we suffer not the Frenche or others to prevente us. + + + +Chap. IV. That this enterprise will be for the manifolde ymployment of +nombers of idle men, and for bredinge of many sufficient, and for +utteraunce of the greate quantitie of the comodities of our realme. + + +It is well worthe the observation to see and consider what the like +voyadges of discoverye and planting in the Easte and Weste Indies hath +wroughte in the kingdomes of Portingale and Spayne; bothe which realmes, +beinge of themselves poore and barren and hardly able to susteine their +inhabitaunts, by their discoveries have founde suche occasion of +employmente, that these many yeres we have not herde scarcely of any +pirate of those twoo nations; whereas wee and the Frenche are moste +infamous for our outeragious, common, and daily piracies. Againe, when +hearde wee almoste of one theefe amongest them? The reason is, that by +these, their new discoveries, they have so many honest wayes to set them +on worke, as they rather wante men than meanes to ymploy them. But wee, +for all the statutes that hitherto can be devised, and the sharpe +execution of the same in poonishinge idle lazye persons, for wante of +sufficient occasion of honest employmente cannot deliver our commonwealthe +from the multitudes of loyterers and idle vagabondes. (M233) Truthe it is, +that throughe our longe peace and seldome sicknes (twoo singuler +blessinges of Almightie God) wee are growen more populous than ever +heretofore; so that nowe there are of every arte and science so many, that +they can hardly lyve one by another, nay rather they are readie to eate +upp one another; yea many thousandths of idle persons are within this +realme, which, havinge no way to be sett on worke, be either mutinous and +seeke alteration in the state, or at leaste very burdensome to the +commonwealthe, and often fall to pilferinge and thevinge and other +lewdnes, whereby all the prisons of the lande are daily pestred and +stuffed full of them, where either they pitifully pyne awaye, or els at +lengthe are miserably hanged, even xx'ti. at a clappe oute of some one +jayle. Whereas yf this voyadge were put in execution, these pety theves +mighte be condempned for certen yeres in the westerne partes, especially +in Newfounde lande, in sawinge and fellinge of tymber for mastes shippes, +and deale boordes; in burninge of the firres and pine trees to make +pitche, tarr, rosen, and sope ashes; in beatinge and workinge of hempe for +cordage; and, in the more southerne partes, in settinge them to worke in +mynes of golde, silver, copper, leade, and yron; in dragginge for perles +and currall; in plantinge of suger canes, as the Portingales have done in +Madera; in mayneteynaunce and increasinge of silke wormes for silke, and +in dressinge the same; in gatheringe of cotten whereof there is plentie; +in tillinge of the soile there for graine; in dressinge of vines whereof +there is greate aboundaunce for wyne; olyves, whereof the soile is +capable, for oyle; trees for oranges, lymons, almondes, figges, and other +frutes, all which are founde to growe there already; in sowinge of woade +and madder for diers, as the Portingales have don in the Azores; in +dressinge of raw hides of divers kindes of beastes; in makinge and +gatheringe of salte, as in Rochel and Bayon, which may serve for the newe +lande fisshinge; in killinge the whale, seale, porpose, and whirlepoole +for trayne oile; in fisshinge, saltinge, and dryenge of linge, codde, +salmon, herringe; in makinge and gatheringe of hony, wax, turpentine; in +hewinge and shapinge of stone, as marble, jeate, christall, freestone, +which will be goodd balaste for our shippes homewardes, and after serve +for noble buildinges; in makinge of caske, oares, and all other manner of +staves; in buildinge of fortes, townes, churches; in powderinge and +barrelling of fishe, fowles, and fleshe, which will be notable provision +for sea and lande; in dryinge, sortinge and packinge of fethers, whereof +may be had there marvelous greate quantitie. + +Besides this, such as by any kinde of infirmitie cannot passe the seas +thither, and now are chardgeable to the realme at home, by this voyadge +shal be made profitable members, by employinge them in England in makinge +of a thousande triflinge thinges, which will be very goodd marchandize for +those contries where wee shall have moste ample vente thereof. + +And seinge the savages of the Graunde Baye, and all alonge the mightie +ryver that ronneth upp to Canada and Hochelaga, are greately delighted +with any cappe or garment made of course wollen clothe, their contrie +beinge colde and sharpe in the winter, this is manifeste wee shall finde +greate utteraunce of our clothes, especially of our coursest and basest +northerne doosens, and our Irishe and Welshe frizes and rugges; whereby +all occupations belonginge to clothinge and knittinge shalbe freshly sett +on worke, as cappers, knitters, clothiers, wollmen, carders, spyners, +weavers, fullers, sheremen, dyers, drapers, hatters and such like, whereby +many decayed townes may be repaired. + +In somme, this enterprice will mynister matter for all sortes and states +for men to worke upon; namely, all severall kindes of artificer: +husbandmen, seamen, marchauntes, souldiers, capitaines, phisitions, +lawyers, devines, cosmographers, hidrographers, astronomers, +historiographers; yea olde folkes, lame persons, women, and younge +children, by many meanes which hereby shall still be mynistred unto them, +shalbe kepte from idlenes and be made able by their owne honest and easie +labour to finde themselves, withoute surchardginge others. For proofe of +the last part of my allegation I will use but onely this one example +followinge. + +In the yere of our Lorde 1564. at what tyme the Flemishe nation were +growen, as they were, to the fulnes of their wealthe and to the heighte of +their pride, and not remembringe what wonderfull gaine they had yerely by +the wolles, clothes, and comodities of England, beganne to contempne our +nation and to rejecte our clothes and comodities, a subjecte of the then +twoo Erles of Emden, a man of greate observation, wrote a notable +discourse to the younge erles, to take occasion of that present tyme by +offer of large priviledges in Emden to the Englishe men.(63) In which +discourse, the said subjecte, for the better inducemente of the said twoo +younge erles, dothe write of his owne knowledge, as he in his discourse +affirmeth, and as also by his reporte appereth in the 22d booke of +Sleydans Comentaries,(64) that, anno 1550. Charles the Fifte, then +Emperour, would have had the Spanishe Inquisition broughte into Andwerpe +and into the Netherlandes; whereaboute there was moche adoe, and that +neither the sute of the towne of Andwerpe, nor the requeste of their +frendes, could perswade the Emperour from it, till at the laste they tolde +him playnely, that if the Inquisition came into Andwerpe and the +Netherlandes that the Englishe marchantes woulde departe oute of the towne +and out of his contries; and upon declaration of this suggestion, searche +was made what profile there came and comoditie grewe by the haunte of the +Englishe marchantes. Then was it founde by searche and enquirie, that +within the towne of Andwerpe alone, there were fourtene thousande persons +fedde and mayneteyned onely by the workinge of Englishe commodities, +besides the gaines that marchantes and shippers with other in the sayd +towne did gett, which was the greatest parte of their lyvinge, which were +thoughte to be in nombre half as many more; and in all other places of his +Netherlandes by the indrapinge of Englishe woll into clothe, and by the +workinge of other Englishe comodities, there were thirtie thousande +persons more mayneteyned and fedd; which in all amounteth to the nomber of +lj.M. persons. And this was the reporte that was geven to this mightie +Emperour, whereby the towne of Andwerpe and the Netherlandes were saved +from the Inquisition. And in the ende of the 45th article of the same +discourse, also, he setteth down by particuler accompte howe the subjectes +of the same Emperour in the Netherlandes dyd gaine yerely onely by the +woll and wollen clothe that came eche yere oute of England, almoste +vi.C.M. (M234) I say almoste sixe hundreth thousande poundes sterling, +besides the gaines they had for sondry other thinges, that were of +marvelous somes. + +Nowe if her Majestie take these westerne discoveries in hande, and plante +there, yt is like that in shorte time wee shall vente as greate a masse of +clothe yn those partes as ever wee did in the Netherlandes, and in tyme +moche more; which was the opinion of that excellent man, Mr Roberte +Thorne, extante in printe in the laste leafe savinge one of his discourse +to Doctor Lea,(65) ambassador for King Henry the Eighte, in Spaine, with +Charles the Emperour, whose wordes are these: And althoughe (saieth he) +wee wente not into the said ilandes of spicerye, for that they are the +Emperours or Kinges of Portingale, wee shoulde by the way, and comynge +once to the lyne equinoctiall, finde landes no lesse riche of golde and +spicerie, as all other landes are under the said lyne equinoctiall; and +also shoulde, yf wee may passe under the northe, enjoye the navigation of +all Tartarye, which should be no lesse profitable to our comodities of +clothe, then those spiceries to the Emperour and Kinge of Portingale. + +This beinge soe, yt commeth to passe, that whatsoever clothe wee shall +vente on the tracte of that firme, or in the ilandes of the same, or in +other landes, ilandes, and territories beyonde, be they within the circle +articke or withoute, all these clothes, I say, are to passe oute of this +realme full wroughte by our naturall subjectes in all degrees of labour. +And if it come aboute in tyme that wee shall vente that masse there that +wee vented in the Base Countries, which is hoped by greate reason, then +shall alt that clothe passe oute of this realme in all degrees of labour +full wroughte by the poore natural subjectes of this realme, like as the +quantitie of our clothe dothe passe that goeth hence to Russia, Barbarie, +Turkye, Persia, &c. And then consequently it followeth, that the like +nomber of people alleaged to the Emperour shal be sett on worke in England +of our poore sujectes more then hath bene; and so her Majestie shall not +be troubled with the pitefull outecryes of cappers, knytters, spynners, +&c. + +And on the other side wee are to note, that all the comodities wee shall +bringe thence wee shall not bringe them wroughte, as wee bringe now the +comodities of Fraunce and Flaunders, &c. but shall receave them all +substaunces unwroughte, to the ymploymente of a wonderfull multitude of +the poore subjectes of this realme in returne. And so to conclude, what in +the nomber of thinges to goe oute wroughte, and to come in unwroughte, +there nede not one poore creature to steale, to starve, or to begge as +they doe. + +(M235) And to answer objections; where fooles for the swarminge of beggars +alleage that the realme is too populous, Solomon saieth, that the honour +and strengthe of a prince consisteth in the multitude of the people. And +if this come aboute, that worke may be had for the multitude, where the +realme hath nowe one thousande for the defence thereof, the same may have +fyve thousande. For when people knowe howe to live, and howe to maynetayne +and feede their wyves and children, they will not abstaine from mariage as +nowe they doe. And the soile thus aboundinge with come, fleshe, mylke, +butter, cheese, herbes, rootes, and frutes, &c., and the seas that envyron +the same so infynitely aboundinge in fishe, I dare truly affirme, that if +the nomber in this realme were as greate as all Spaine and Ffraunce have, +the people beinge industrious, I say, there shoulde be founde victualls +ynoughe at the full in all bounty to suffice them all. And takinge order +to cary hence thither our clothes made in hose, coates, clokes, whoodes, +&c., and to returne thither hides of their owne beastes, tanned and turned +into shoes and bootes, and other skynnes of goates, whereof they have +store, into gloves, &c., no doubte but wee shall sett on worke in this +realme, besides sailers and suche as shalbe seated there in those westerne +discovered contries, at the leaste C.M. subjectes, to the greate abatinge +of the goodd estate of subjectes of forreine princes, enemies, or +doubtfull friends, and this _absque injuria_, as the lawyers say, albeit +not _sine damno_. And having a vente of lynnen, as the Spaniardes have in +the rest of that firme, wee may sett our people, in making the same, +infinitely on worke, and in many other thinges besides; which time will +bringe aboute, thoughe nowe, for wante of knowledge and full experience of +this trade, wee cannot enter into juste accompte of all particulers. + + + +Chap. V. That this voyage will be a greate bridle to the Indies of the +Kinge of Spaine, and a meane that wee may arreste at our pleasure for the +space of tenne weeks or three monethes every yere one or twoo C. saile of +his subjectes shippes at the fyshinge in Newfounde Land. + + +The cause why the Kinge of Spaine, these three or foure yeres last paste, +was at suche intollerable chardges in furnishinge oute so many navies to +wynne Tercera, and the other small ilandes of the Azores adjacent to the +same, was the opportunitie of the places in interceptinge his West India +flete at their returne homewarde, as a matter that toucheth him indeede to +the quicke. But the plantinge of twoo or three strong fortes upon some +goodd havens (whereof there is greate store) betweene Florida and Cape +Briton, woulde be a matter in shorte space of greater domage as well to +his flete as to his westerne Indies; for wee shoulde not onely often tymes +indaunger his flete in the returne thereof, but also in fewe yeres put him +in hazarde in loosinge some parte of Nova Hispania. + +Touchinge the fleete, no man (that knoweth the course thereof, comynge +oute betwene Cuba and the Cape of Florida, alonge the gulfe or straite of +Bahama) can denye that it is caried by the currant northe and northeaste +towardes the coaste which wee purpose, God willinge to inhabite; which +hapned to them not twoo yeres past, as Mr. Jenynges and Mr. Smithe, the +master and masters mate of the shippe called the Toby, belonginge to +Bristowe, infourmed me, and many of the chefest merchauntes of that citie, +whereof they had particuler advertisement at Cadiz in Spaine a little +before by them that were in the same flete the selfe same yere, and were +in person driven upon the same coaste, and sawe the people, which they +reported to be bigge men, somewhat in makinge like the Hollanders, and +lighted on a towne upon a ryvers side, which they affirmed to be above a +quarter of a mile in lengthe. Besides the current, it is also a thinge +withoute controversie, that all southerne and south easterne windes +inforce the Spanish flete returninge home nere or upon the aforesaide +coaste, and consequently will bringe them into our daunger, after wee +shallbe there strongly setled and fortified. + +Wee are moreover to understande that the savages of Florida are the +Spaniardes mortall enemyes, and wilbe ready to joyne with us againste +them, as they joyned with Capitaine Gourgues, a Gascoigne, whoe beinge but +a private man, and goinge thither at his owne chardges, by their aide +wonne and rased the three small fortes, which the Spaniardes aboute xx'ti. +yeres agoe had planted in Florida after their traiterous slaughter of John +Ribault; which Gourgues slewe, and hanged upp divers of them on the same +trees whereon the yere before they had hanged the Frenche. Yea, one +Holocotera, brother to one of the kinges of the savages, leapinge upp on +an highe place, with his owne handes slewe a Spanishe canonier as he was +puttinge fire to a pece of ordynaunce; which storye is at large in printe +sett furthe by Monsieur Poplynier in his book intituled Trois Mondes. + +Also, within the lande on the northe side of Nova Hispania, there is a +people called Chichimici, which are bigg and stronge men and valiaunte +archers, which have contynuall warres with the Spaniardes, and doe +greately annoye them. The Spanishe histories which I have reade, and other +late discourses, make greate mention of them. Yea, Myles Phillipps, who +was xiiij. yeres in those partes, and presented his whole travell in +writinge to her Majestie, confesseth this to be moste certaine.(66) + +Nowe if wee (being thereto provoked by Spanishe injuries) woulde either +joyne with these savages, or sende or give them armor, as the Spaniardes +arme our Irishe rebells, wee shoulde trouble the Kinge of Spaine more in +those partes, then he hath or can trouble us in Ireland, and holde him at +suche a bay as he was never yet helde at. For if (as the aforesaide Miles +Phillipps writeth) yt be true, that one negro which fledd from his cruel +Spanishe master is receaved and made capitaine of multitudes of the +Chichimici, and daily dothe grevously afflicte them, and hath almoste +enforced them to leave and abandon their silver mynes in those quarters, +what domage mighte divers hundreds of Englishe men doe them, being growen +once into familiaritie with that valiaunte nation. + +And this is the greatest feare that the Spaniardes have, to witt, our +plantinge in those partes and joyning with those savages, their +neighbours, in Florida, and on the northe side of Nova Hispania. Which +thinge an Englishe gentleman, Capitaine Muffett, whoe is nowe in Fraunce, +tolde divers tymes this laste winter in my hearinge and others of credite, +namely, that when he was in Spaine, prisoner, not longe since, he hearde +the threasurer of the West Indies say, that there was no suche way to +hinder his master, as to plante upon the coaste nere unto Florida, from +whence by greate ryvers any man mighte easely passe farre upp into the +lande, and joyne with his enemyes, whereof he stoode in contynuall feare; +and said moreover, that that was the occasion why suche crueltie was used +towardes John Ribaulte and his companie upon his seekinge to settle there. + +(M236) Fynally, if wee liste not to come so nere Florida, this is a matter +of no small momente, that if we fortifie ourselves about Cape Briton, nere +Newfounde land, partely by the strengthe of our fortification, and partely +by the aide of our navye of fishermen, which are already comaunders of +others there, havinge our double forces thus joyned together, wee shalbe +able upon every sooden to cease upon one or twoo hundreth Spanishe and +Portingale shipps, which for tenne weekes or three monethes ate there on +fisshinge every yere. This I say will be suche a bridle to him and suche +an advantage vnto us, as wee cannot possibly ymagine a greater. And thus +the Frenche served them in the time of Mounsieurs being in Flaunders, +caryenge awaye oute of some harborowes three or foure Spanishe and +Portingale shippes at ones; and more they woulde have taken, if our +Englishmen, and, namely, one of myne acquaintaunce of Ratclife, had not +defended them. And hither of necessitie they must yerely repaire, beinge +not able to make their provision for land and sea of fishe in any place +els, excepte on the coaste of Ireland, and at Cape Blancke in Africa, +which twoo are nothinge worth in comparison to this thirde place. + +So shall wee be able to crye quittance with the King of Spaine if he +shoulde goe aboute to make any generall arreste of our navye, or rather +terrifie him from any such enterpryse, when he shall bethincke himself +that his navye in Newfounde lande is no lesse in our daunger, then ours is +in his domynions wheresoever. + + + +Chap. VI. That the mischiefe that the Indian treasure wroughte in time of +Charles the late Emperor, father to the Spanishe kinge, is to be had in +consideration of the Queens most excellent Majestie, leaste the contynuall +comynge of the like treasure from thence to his sonne, worke the +unrecoverable annoye of this realme, whereof already we have had very +daungerous experience. + + +It is written in the xxxth. article of the discourse before specified, +dedicated to the twoo younge Erles of Emden, as followeth, verbatim: With +this greate treasure did not the Emperour Charles gett from the French +Kinge the Kingdome of Naples, the Dukedome of Myllaine, and all other his +domynions in Italy, Lombardy, Pyemont, and Savoye? With this treasure did +he not take the Pope prisoner, and sack the sea of Rome? With this +treasure did he not take the Frenche Kinge prisoner, and mayneteyne all +the greate warres with Fraunce, since the yere of our Lorde 1540. to the +yere of our Lord 1560. as is declared in the 12. and 13. article of his +booke? With this treasure hath he not mayneteyned many cities in Italie, +as well againste the Pope as againste the Frenche Kinge, as Parma, +Florence, and such other? With this treasure did he not overthrowe the +Duke of Cleave, and take Gilderland, Groyningelande, and other domynions +from him, which oughte to be a goode warninge to you all, as it shall be +most plainly and truly declared hereafter? With this treasure did he not +gett into his handes the Erledome of Lingen in Westfalia? With this +treasure did he not cause the Erie of Esones, your subject, to rebell +againste your Graces father and againste you? The cause you knowe beste. +And what works this treasure made amongest the princes and townes in +Germany, when the Duke of Saxony and the Launtzgrave Van Hessen were +taken, Sleydan, our owne countryman, by his Chronicle declareth at large. +And did not this treasure, named the Burgundishe asse, walke and ronne in +all places to make bothe warr and peace at pleasure? And tooke he nothinge +from the Empire then? Yes, truly, to moche, as you shall heare. When the +Emperor Charles was firste made Emperour, what were the townes and +contries in the Netherlandes that justly or properly came to him by birthe +or inheritaunce? There was Brabant, Flaunders, Holland, Zeland, Artoys, +and Henego. And yet there is a greate question concerninge Holland, howe +the Emperour Charles and his progenitors came by yt, and what homage and +duetie they oughte to doe for the same; because thereby the house of +Burgundy hath the mouthe of the River Rhene at their commaundemente, which +is to the greate losse, domage, and daunger of Germanye, as hereafter +shalbe declared. Here be all the contries that belonged to the house of +Burgundie when the Emperour Charles was made Emperour. But howe moche hath +bene added to the Netherlandes since by him, contrary to his oathe made? +That are these townes and contries, as yt appereth in Sleydans Chronicle; +viz. Lutzenburge, Lymeburge, Gelderlande, the Erldome of Sutphen, the +Citie and Straite of Vtright,(67) with all the landes in Over Isel, West +Frizeland, the Citie of Groninge, and Groininge land. And, as before it is +saied, he hath by pollicie gotten into his handes the Erldome of Lingen, +standinge in Westfalia; and by the like pollicie, with money, he is become +the defender of the Erledome of Esons, which is parcell of your Graces +contrie of East Frizeland. All these contries and townes, with the +treasure of the Netherlandes, hath he taken from the Empire. + +Thus farr procedeth this excellent man in describinge howe Charles the +Emperour employed his treasure to the afflictinge and oppressinge of moste +of the greatest estates of Christendome. The effecte of these treasures +which he had oute of the West Indies, Peter Martir of Angleria, in the +epistle dedicatory of his Decades to the said Emperour Charles, truly +prognosticated in the begynnynge, before hand, where he writeth thus unto +him: Come therefore and embrace this newe worlde, and suffer us no longer +to consume in desire of your presence. From hence, from hence (I say), +moste noble younge Prince, shall instrumentes be prepared for you whereby +all the worlde shalbe under your obeysaunce. + +And in very deede it is moste apparaunte that riches are the fittest +instrumentes of conqveste, and that the Emperour turned them to that use. + +(M237) To leave the father and come to the sonne, hath not Kinge Phillippe +employed his treasure as injuriously to all princes and potentates of +Europe? Is it not he that with his Indian treasure corrupted the +_Quinqueviri_ in Portingale, that in the interregnum were appointed +overseers of the comon wealthe, and so hath joyned that kingdome to his, +with all the ilandes, townes, domynions belonginge to that crowne? Is it +not he that with his treasure hath gon aboute to hier some ungodlye +murderer to make away with Don Antonio, one while by open proclamation, +and another while _sotto capo_, under hande? Is it not he that by his +treasure hathe hired at sondry times the sonnes of Beliall to bereve the +Prince of Orange of his life?(68) And hath he not suborned by hope of +rewarde other moste ungodly persons to lay violent handes upon other +Christian princes? Hath not he these many yeres geven large pensions to +nombers of English unnaturall rebelles? Doth he not support the semynaries +of Rome and Rhemes to be thornes in the sides of their owne comon +wealthes? Hath not he divers tymes sente forren forces into Ireland, +furnished with money, armor, munition, and victualls? Hath not he sente +rounde somes of money into Scotland, both to the Kinge and those that are +aboute him, to alter the estate there and to trouble oures? And is it not +knowen that this Spanishe asse rometh upp and downe laden throughe all +Fraunce, and, when it coulde not enter into the papistes gates, yt hath +soughte to enter into the courtes of the princes of the Relligion, to +renewe the late intermitted civile warres? What it hath done and nowe +dothe in all the Empire and the Lowe Contries, and is like to worke in +other places unlesse speedy order be taken to hinder it, is described at +large by Mounsieur de Aldegonde, a Germaine gentleman, in a pithie and +moste earnest exhortation (extant in Latine, Italian, Frenche, Englishe, +and Duche) concerninge the estate of Christendome, together with the +meanes to defend and preserve the same, dedicated to all Christian kings, +princes, and potentates.(69) + + + +Chap. VII. What speciall meanes may bringe Kinge Phillippe from his highe +throne, and make him equall to the princes his neighboures; wherewithall +is shewed his weakenes in the West Indies. + + +Firste, it is to be considered that his domynions and territories oute of +Spaine lye farr distant from Spaine, his chefest force; and fair distante +one from another; and are kepte by greate tyrannie; and _quos metuunt +oderunt_. And the people kepte in subjection desire nothinge more then +freedome. And like as a little passage given to water, it maketh his owne +way; so give but a small menne to suche kepte in tyranie, they will make +their owne way to libertie; which way may easely be made. And entringe +into the consideration of the way how this Phillippe may be abased, I +meane firste to begynne with the West Indies, as there to laye a chefe +foundation for his overthrowe. And like as the foundation of the strongest +holde undermyned and removed, the mightiest and strongest walles fall +flatt to the earthe; so this prince, spoiled or intercepted for a while of +his treasure, occasion by lacke of the same is geven that all his +territories in Europe oute of Spaine slide from him, and the Moores enter +into Spaine it selfe, and the people revolte in every forrein territorie +of his, and cutt the throates of the proude hatefull Spaniardes, their +governours. For this Phillippe already owinge many millions, and of late +yeres empaired in credite, bothe by lacke of abilitie of longe tyme to pay +the same, and by his shameful losse of his Spaniardes and dishonors in the +Lowe Contries, and by lacke of the yerely renewe of his revenewe, he shall +not be able to wage his severall garrisons kepte in his severall +frontiers, territories, and places, nor to corrupte in princes courtes, +nor to doe many feates. And this weyed, wee are to knowe what Phillip ys +in the West Indies; and that wee be not abused with Spanish braggs, and +made to beleve what he is not; and so, drawen into vain feare, suffer +fondly and childishly our owne utter spoile. And therefore wee are to +understande that Phillippe rather governeth in the West Indies by opinion, +then by mighte; ffor the small manred of Spaine, of itself being alwayes +at the best slenderly peopled, was never able to rule so many regions, or +to kepe in subjection such worldes of people as be there, were it not for +the error of the Indian people, that thincke he is that he is not, and +that doe ymagine that Phillippe hath a thousande Spaniardes for every +single naturall subjecte that he hath there. And like as the Romaynes, +allured hither into Britaine, perced the Iland, and planted here and there +in the mouthes of rivers and upon straites, and kepte colonies, as at +Westchester upon the River of Dee, at York upon the River of Owse, and +upon the Rivers of Thames and Severne, and yet in truthe never enioyed +more of the contries rounde aboute then the Englishe, planted at Bulloine +and Calice, did of the Frenche soile adjoyninge, nor in effecte had the +Brittishe nation at comaundement; even so hath the Spaniarde perced the +Indies, and planted here and there very thinlye and slenderlye, withoute +havinge the Indian multitude in subjection, or in their townes and fortes +any nomber to holde any of them againste the meanest force of a prince; so +as in truthe the Spaniarde ys very weake there. And it is knowen to Sir +Fraunces Drake, and to Mr. Hawkins, and Miles Phillipps (which Miles lyved +xiiij. yeres in Nova Spania), and to dyvers others of her Majesties +subjectes besides that have been there, that the ilandes there abounde +with people and nations that rejecte the proude and bluddy government of +the Spaniarde, and that doe mortally hate the Spaniarde. And they also +knowe that the Moores, and suche as the Spaniardes have broughte thither +for the mynes and for slavery, have fledd from them into the inlandes, and +of them selves maineteine in many places frontier warres againste the +Spaniarde, and many tymes so prevaile, and especially of late, that the +Spaniardes have bene inforced to sende the Spanishe marchauntes them +selves into the warres, althoughe yt be againste the speciall priviledges +graunted by Charles, the late Emperour, to the marchauntes, as may +plainely appere by Spanishe marchauntes letters taken by Sir Fraunces +Drake passinge in the sea of Sur towarde Panama, to be conveyed into +Spaine. And it is thoughte that Sir Fraunces Drake and some other Englishe +are of so greate credite with the Symerons and with those that mayneteyne +those frontier warrs, that he mighte, bringinge thither a fewe capitaines +and some of our meaner souldiers late trayned in the Base Contries, with +archers and lighte furniture, &c., bringe to passe that, joyninge with +those inland people, Kinge Phillippe mighte either be deprived of his +governmente there, or at the leaste of the takinge of his yerely benefite +of the mynes. Thus with small chardge and fewe men, nowe and then +renewinge this matter by a few sailes to be sent thither for the comforte +of suche as shalbe there resident, and for the incouragemente of the +Symerons, greater effecte may followe then by meetinge with his golden +flete, or by takinge of his treasures once or twise at the sea; for by +this meanes, or by a platforme well to be sett downe, England may enjoye +the benefite of the Indian mynes, or at the leaste kepe Phillippe from +possessinge the same. + +Hereunto yf wee adde our purposed westerne discoueries, and there plante +and people ryally, and fortifie strongly, and there builde shippes and +maineteine a navy in special porte or portes, wee may by the same either +encounter the Indian fleete, or be at hande as it were to yelde freshe +supplye, courage, and comforte, by men or munition, to the Chichimici and +the Symerons, and suche other as shalbe incited to the spoile of the +mynes; which in tyme will, if it be not looked to, bringe all princes to +weake estate, that Phillippe, either for religion or other cause, dothe +hate; as the aforesaide Monsieur de Aldegond, in his pithie and moste +earneste exhortation to all Christian kinges, princes, and potentates to +beware of Kinge Phillipps ambitious growinge, dothe wisely and moste +providently forwarne. + +To this may be added (the realme swarming with lustie youthes that be +turned to no profitable use), there may be sente bandes of them into the +Base Contries in more rounde nombers then are sente as yet. For if he +presently prevaile there, at our doores, farewell the traficque that els +wee have there (whereof wise men can say moche). And if he settle there, +then let the realme saye adewe to her quiet state and safetie. + +If these enter into the due consideration of wise men, and if platformes +of these thinges be sett downe and executed duelye and with spede and +effecte, no doubte but the Spanishe empire falles to the grounde, and the +Spanishe kinge shall be lefte bare as Aesops proude crowe, the peacocke, +the perot, the pye, and the popingey, and every other birde havinge taken +home from him his gorgeous fethers, he will, in shorte space, become a +laughinge stocke for all the worlde; with such a mayme to the Pope and to +that side, as never hapned to the sea of Rome by the practise of the late +Kinge of famous memory, her Majesties father, or by all the former +practises of all the Protestant princes of Germanie, or by any other +advise layde downe by Monsieur de Aldegond, here after by them to be put +in execution. If you touche him in the Indies, you touche the apple of his +eye; for take away his treasure, which is _neruus belli_, and which he +hath almoste oute of his West Indies, his olde bandes of souldiers will +soone be dissolved, his purposes defeated, his power and strengthe +diminished, his pride abated, and his tyranie utterly suppressed. + + + +Chap. VIII. That the lymites of the Kinge of Spaines domynions in the West +Indies be nothinge so large as is generally ymagined and surmised, neither +those partes which he holdeth be of any such forces as is falsly geven +oute by the Popishe clergie and others his fautors, to terrifie the +princes of the relligion and to abuse and blynde them. + + +As the Secretary of Don Antonio, Kinge of Portingale, called Custodio +Etan, tolde me lately at Paris, that the Portingales never had in Guinea, +Bresill, and all the Easte Indies above twelve thousande Portingale +souldiers whensoever they had moste, which was confirmed by one of the +Kinges capitaines borne in Goa, then presente; and that they governed +rather by gevinge oute of greate rumors of power and by secrecie, then by +any greate force which they had in deede; so the like is to be proved of +the Kinge of Spaine in his West Indies; ffor he beinge in those partes +exceedinge weake hath nothinge such nombers of people there as is geven +oute, neither doe his domynions stretche so far as by the ignoraunte ys +ymagined; which hereby easely may appere, seinge he hath no one towne or +forte in actuall possession in all Nova Hispania to the northe of the +Tropick of Cancer, which standeth in 23. degrees and an halfe, excepte the +towne of St. Helen and one or twoo small fortes in Florida; ffor as it is +in the mappe of Culiacan, sett oute twoo yeres paste with all diligence by +Ortelius, Saincte Michael ys the furthest towne nothwarde on the backside +of America; and Panuco and Villa Sancti Jacobi are the moste northerly +colonies upon the Bay of Mexico that the Spaniardes inhabite; as the +aforesaide Ortelius witnesseth in his mapp of those partes sett oute this +presente yere, 1584; which three townes above named are under or within +the Tropicke of Cancer. And so the Kinge of Spaine hath no footinge +beyonde the said tropicke; which is contrary to the opinion of the vulgar +sorte, which ymagine, and by some are borne in hande, that all is his from +the equinoctiall as farr as the lande stretcheth towardes the pooles. + +Againe, that parte from the equinoctiall to the southe ys not inhabited by +the Spaniarde any further then unto the Tropicke of Capricorne, as ys to +be seene by the mappe of Peru this presente yere, 1584. published by +Ortelius; neither is it peopled by the Spaniardes to any purpose savinge +onely alonge the sea coaste. And howe weake they are there, and what +simple shippinge they have, and howe dayly they be afflicted by the +inhabitauntes, Sir Fraunces Drake can tell, and the letters by him +intercepted doe declare. One Peter Benzo de Millano, which was fourtene +yeres in those partes, writeth, that they holde greate townes, some with +tenne, some with sixe, some with foure, and some with twoo souldiers, and +that they commaunded that all the Italians, whome they called Levantines +in contempte, shoulde departe those contries, fearinge they shoulde +reveale their nakednes to the worlde, and encourage others to sett in +footinge there. + +Seinge then they suffer no people of Europe to inhabite there savinge +onely Spaniardes, any reasonable man that knoweth the barenes, desolation, +and wante of men in Spaine, together with these eightene yeres civill +warres that hath wasted so many thousandes of them in the Lowe Contries, +must nedes confesse that they have very simple forces there. The provinces +which he holdeth are indeede many, yet more denuded than ever was any +empire since the creation of the worlde. Some of his contries are +dispeopled, some barren, some so far asonder, also held by tyrannie, that +in deed upon the due consideration of the matter, his mighte and greatenes +is not suche as _prima facie_ yt may seme to be. And weare yt not that he +doth possesse suche at masse of treasure oute of the Indies, the Frenche +kinge, of one onely kingdome, with his onely people of Fraunce, were able +to drive him oute of all his domynions that he hath in the worlde. + +(M238) It is written that Antigonus, beinge to fighte againste certaine of +his enemyes, they appered a farr of to be so huge and mightie, that his +souldiers were halfe afraied to encounter them; but, beinge incouraged by +his valour, they easely overthrewe them in a conflicte; whereof he +stripped one or twoo, which, beinge turned oute of their bombasted and +large apparell, were in deede but very weakelinges and shrimpes; which, +when he had shewed unto his souldiers, they were ashamed of themselves +that ever they had bene afraied of suche wretches. So when wee shall have +looked and narrowly pried into the Spanishe forces in America, wee shalbe +doubtles ashamed of ourselves, that wee have all this while bene afraied +of those dissemblinge and feble scarr crowes. + +This which I say concerninge the weakenes of the Spaniardes in America may +more easelie appere by this note followinge, gathered by an excellent +Frenche capitaine moste experte and privie to the state and force of the +islandes, havens, townes, and fortes of all that parte of America which +lieth upon our ocean; which excedinge large coaste beinge so rarely and +simply manned and fortified, wee may well assure ourselves that the +inlande is mocha more weake and unmanned. + + + +Chap. IX. The names of the riche townes lienge alonge the sea coaste on +the north side from the equinoctiall of the mayne lande of AMERICA, under +the Kinge of Spaine. + + +1. Ouer againest the ilande of Margarita there is a towne called Cumana, +wherein is great store of perle. There be divers boates belonginge to the +towne, which onely dragge perles. This towne is the farthest eastwarde +which the kinge hath on the north side of India. It is environed with +their enemyes, viz., the Indyans and Caribes. The victualls come from this +towne to Margarita. + +2. The next towne westwarde is Carakas, which is very riche of golde. This +towne standeth upon the sea, and hath some victualls, but not plentie, and +is environed likewise with the Indians, their mortall enemyes. + +3. The towne Burborowate was destroyed by 50. Frenchemen, and the treasure +taken awaye. + +4. The nexte towne to the westwarde is called Coro, which hath greate +plentie of golde and victualls. This standeth upon the sea. This is a +civill contrie, and some of the Indians broughte to a civill governemente. + +5. At Rio de Hacha there is a towne called Hacha, where is greate store of +perle and silver, but no golde; and not farr from thence there is a perle +house. There is plentie of victualls, the contrie civill, and some of the +Indians at the Spaniardes comaundement. Mr. John Hawkins told me he won +this towne, and was master of yt three daies, in his laste voyadge. + +6. Further westwarde is a towne called Santa Maren, alias Marta, where is +greate store of golde, but little victualls. This is envyroned with +Indians, enemies to the Spaniardes. + +7. The nexte towne is Carthagena, where is greate store of silver, golde, +and precious stone. This towne hath a nomber of Indians and Symerons to +their enemyes. There is also greate store of victualls. + +8. The nexte towne thereunto is Nombro di Dios. To this towne cometh all +the golde, perle, stone, and jewells that cometh from Chile, Peru, and +Panama oute of the Southe Sea. To this towne cometh halfe the fleete, +which taketh in halfe their treasure, and goeth to Havana, and so throughe +the Gulfe of Bahama unto the Ilandes of Corvo, Flores, and the Azores, and +from thence into Spaine. This towne hath no victualls but such as cometh +from Panama and the ilandes by sea. By this towne is a gulfe called +Gulnata, where the Symerons and Indians have certaine townes, and kepe +warres dayly with the Spaniardes as well as the Indians. At the southende +of the gulfe there is not paste five legues over lande into the South Sea. + +9. The nexte towne is called Vraga, alias Var, where is moche golde and +small store of victualls. This is a civill contrie nere to the towne; the +nexte is Nicaragua. + +10. At Nicaragua is moche golde that cometh out of the Southe Sea, and +there is a place where they make their frigotts. There ys little +victualls; the people are civill. + +11. In the Bay of Hondoras is a towne called Hondoras, alias Tres Islas, +where is golde and hides and greate store of victualls. This towne +standeth upon an hill very strongly, and is but simply manned. This towne +hath within a mile great plentie of Indians, which are at warr with the +Spaniardes. + +12. Then there is a towne called Porto de Cavallos, where is store of +silver, stones, perles, jewells made and sett with precious stones and +perles. To this towne come yerely twoo shippes, that goe from thence to +the Havana, and so into Spaine with all their riches. This towne is full +of victualls. This porte of Cavallos adjoyneth to the Gulfe Dowse.(70) + +13. All the Bay of Mexico is full of Indian townes and full of victualls. +There is one towne named Vera Crux, to which towne cometh all their +treasure, from the citie of Mexico, and from thence to the porte of St. +John de Vlloa, from thence to Havana, and so into Spayne. + +14. In Florida the Spaniardes have one towne, called Sancta Helena, where +they have perles, silver, and greate store of victualls. The Floridians be +a gentle sorte of people, and used somtymes to heade their arrowes with +silver. + +15. There is one principall place called Rio de Jordan, alias Rio de Maio, +where, in an iland, standeth a forte which was Ribaults; which river +ronneth throughe the lande into the Southe Sea, from whence greate plentie +of treasure is brought thither. There are small pynnesses that use the +same river. It is also thoughte that shippes come from Cathaio to the +southwest ende of the said river. This is very full of victualls. (M239) +There was note by Peter Melanda of a river cutt from the Citie of Mexico +to Rio de Maio,(71) so that moche treasure is broughte from thence to this +forte with small pynnesses. + +All that parte of America eastwarde from Cumana unto the River of St +Augustine in Bresill, conteyneth in lengthe alongest to the sea side xxj. +C. miles, in whiche compasse and track there is neither Spaniarde, +Portingale, nor any Christian man, but onely the Caribes, Indians, and +sauages. In which places is greate plentie of golde, perle, and precious +stones. + +On the coaste of Bresill is one goodly ile called Trinidada, conteyninge +C. xx'ti. miles in lengthe, and lxxv. miles in bredthe, and is onely +inhabited by gentle Indians and sauages borne in the said ilande. In this +ilande is greate plentie of maiz, venison, fishe, wooddes, and grasse, +with divers faire frutes and other comodities. Yt hath also divers goodly +havens to harborowe yn, and greate stoare of tymber for buildinge of +shippes. (M240) With the kinge of this ilande wee are in league. + + + +Chap. X. A brefe declaration of the chefe ilandes in the Baye of Mexico, +beinge under the Kinge of Spaine, with their havens and fortes, and what +comodities they yelde. + + +There ys one ilande, as the fleete cometh into the baye, named +Margarita,(72) wherein is greate store of perle; a riche ilande full of +maiz (which is their corne), oxen, shepe, goates, fowle and fishe, greate +store of frutes, grasse and woods. + +Ouer againste the said islande, northewarde, there is one other iland +named St. John de Porto Ricco, which hath store of all manner of victualls +and suger. + +The nexte is a faire iland called Hispaniola, in some parte well +inhabited; havinge one citie called Sancto Domingo, which hath a faire +hauen(73) whereunto many of the shippes of the kinges fleete come, and +there devide themselves. Some goe to St. John de Leu, and some to Nombro +di Dios and other partes of the mayne lande. This is a frutefull iland for +all manner of victuall, hides and suger. + +The nexte ilande is called Jamaica, and hath in it great store of +victualls. + +The nexte is a faire, greate, and longe iland, called Cuba. This iland +hath a forte and haven in it called the Havana, which is the key of all +India. It is called the key of India, for that the Spaniardes cannot well +returne into Spaine but that they muste touche there for victualls, water, +woodde, and other necessaries. It lieth at the mouthe and entraunce into +the Gulfe of Bahama. This ilande hath great plentie of victualls, but it +is not greately inhabited. + +There be divers other ilandes, riche for victualls, as Aeriaba, Corsal, +Marigalante,(74) &c., havinge not in them some xx. some x. Spaniardes a +pece. + +Thus you see that in all those infinite ilandes in the Gulfe of Mexico, +whereof Cuba and Hispaniola are thoughte to be very nere as bigge as +England and Ireland, wee reade not of past twoo or three places well +fortified, as Sancto Domingo in Hispaniola, and Havana in Cuba. I may +therefore conclude this matter with comparinge the Spaniardes unto a +drone, or an emptie vessell, which when it is smitten upon yeldeth a +greate and terrible sound, and that afarr of; but come nere and looke into +them, there ys nothinge in them; or rather like unto the asse which wrapte +himselfe in a lyons skynne, and marched farr of to strike terror in the +hartes of the other beastes, but when the foxe drewe nere he perceaved his +longe eares, and made him a jeste unto all the beastes of the forrest. In +like manner wee (upon perill of my life) shall make the Spaniarde +ridiculous to all Europe, if with pierceinge eyes wee see into his +contemptible weakenes in the West Indies, and with true stile painte hym +oute _ad vivum_ unto the worlde in his fainte colours. + +And if any man woulde objecte, that if by his weakenes he had loste the +treasure of the West Indies, yet the riches of the Easte Indies woulde +holde upp his heade; I answer, that those contries beinge so farr of, and +suche naturall malice beinge betweene the Portingale and the Spaniarde, as +greater cannot be, that it is not possible for him to holde those partes +no more than the other, wantinge the treasure of the West Indies to +supporte his garrisons both there and in Christendome againste his +manifolde and mightie enemyes. + + + +Chap. XI. That the Spaniardes have exercised moste outragious and more +then Turkishe cruelties in all the West Indies, whereby they are every +where there become moste odious unto them, whoe woulde joyne with us or +any other moste willinglye to shake of their moste intolerable yoke, and +have begonne to doe yt already in divers places where they were lordes +heretofore. + + +So many and so monstrous have bene the Spanishe cruelties, suche straunge +slaughters and murders of those peaceable, lowly, milde, and gentle +people, together with the spoiles of townes, provinces, and kingdomes, +which have bene moste ungodly perpetrated in the West Indies, as also +divers others no lesse terrible matters, that to describe the leaste parte +of them woulde require more than one chapiter, especiall where there are +whole bookes extant, in printe, not onely of straungers, but also even of +their owne contreymen (as of Bartholmewe de las Casas, a bisshoppe in Nova +Spania); yea such and so passinge straunge and excedinge all humanitie and +moderation have they bene, that the very rehersall of them drave divers of +the cruel Spanishe, which had not bene in the West Indies, into a kinde of +extasye and maze, so that the sayenge of the poet mighte therein well be +verified:-- + + Quis talia fando, +Myrmidonum Dolopumue aut duri miles Vlissis, +Temperet a lachrimis? + +Nevertheless I will repeate oute of that mightie masse and huge heape of +massacres some fewe, that of them you may make an estymate of the rest, +and consider what small remainder of those moste afflicted Indians have to +revolte from the obedience of the Spaniardes, and to shake of from their +shoulders the moste intollerable and insupportable yoke of Spaine, which +in many places they have already begonne to do of themselves, withoute the +helpe of any Christian prynce. + +Nowe because these moste outeragious and infinite massacres are put downe +by Don Bartholmewe de las Casas, the bisshoppe above mentioned, and +dedicated to Kinge Phillippe that nowe ys, which author testifieth that to +his inspeakable grefe he was an eye witnesse of many of them, therefore it +seemeth best unto me to bringe him in, which in his firste chapiter +describeth the same in manner followinge:-- + +Upon these lambes (meaninge the Indians), so meke, so qualified and +endewed of their Maker and Creator, as hath bene said, entred the +Spanishe, incontinent as they knew them, as wolves, as lyons, and as +tigres moste cruell, of longe tyme famished; and have not don in those +quarters these forty yeres be paste, neither yet doe at this presente, +oughte els then teare them in peces, kill them, martir them, afflicte +them, tormente them, and destroye them by straunge sortes of cruelties, +never either seene or reade or hearde of the like (of the which some +shalbe sett downe hereafter); so farr forthe as of above three millions of +soules that were in the Ile of Hispaniola, and that wee have seene there, +there are not nowe twoo hundreth natives of the contrie. The Ile of Cuba, +which is as farr in lengthe as from Valladolid untill Rome, ys at this +day, as it were, all waste. St John's Ile, and that of Jammaica, bothe of +them very greate, very fertile, and very faire, are desolate. Likewise the +Iles of Lucayos nere to the Ile of Hispaniola, and of the north side unto +that of Cuba, in nomber beinge above three score ilandes, together with +those which they call the Iles of Geant, one with another greate and +little, whereof the very worste is fertiler then the kinges garden at +Civill, and the contrie the helthsomest in the worlde. There were in some +of these isles more then five hundred thousande soules, and at this day +there is not one only creature; for they have bene all of them slaine, +after that they had drawen them oute to labor in their myneralls in the +Ile of Hispaniola, where there were no more lefte of the inborne natives +of that iland. A shippe ridinge for the space of three yeres betwixte +these ilandes, to the ende that after the wyninge of this kinde of vintage +to gleane and cull the remainder of these folke (for there was a goodd +Christian moved with pitie and compassion to converte and wynne unto +Christe suche as mighte be founde), there were not founde but eleven +persons, which I sawe. Other iles, more than thirtie, nere to the Ile of +St. John, have likewise bene dispeopled and massacred. All those iles +conteyne above twoo thousande leagues of lande, and are all dispeopled and +laid waste. + +As touchinge the mayne firme lande, wee are certaine that our Spaniardes, +by their cruelties and cursed doinges, have dispeopled and made desolate +more then tenne realmes greater then all Spaine, comprisinge therein also +Arragon and Portingale; and twise as moche or more lande than there is +from Civill to Jerusalem, which are above a thousand leagues; which +realmes yet, up to this presente day, remain in a wildernes and utter +desolation, havinge bene before time as well peopled as was possible. + +We are able to yelde a goodd and perfecte accompte, that here is, within +the space of forty yeres, by these said tyranies and devilishe doinges of +the Spaniardes, don to deathe unjustly and tyranously more then twelve +million soules, men, women, and children. And I verely doe believe, and +thinke I doe not mistake therein, there are deade more then fiftene +millions of soules. + +Thus havinge hearde of the multitudes of soules slayne, you shall heare +the manner of their slaughter. + +In the chapiter of Hispaniola it thus followeth: + +Nowe after sondry other forces, violences, and tormentes which they +wroughte againste them, the Indians perceaved that those were no men +descended from heaven. Some of them, therefore, hidd their victualls, +others hidd their wives and their children. Some other fledd into the +mountaines to seperate themselves afarr of from a nation of so harde +natured and ghastly conversation. The Spaniardes buffeted them with their +fistes and bastianadoes, pressinge also to lay their handes on the lordes +of the townes. And these cases ended in so greate an hazarde and +desperatnes, that a Spanishe capitaine durste adventure to ravishe +forcibly the wife of the greatest kinge and lorde of this ile. Since which +time the Indians began to searche meanes to caste the Spaniardes oute of +their landes, and sett themselves in arms. But what kinde of armes! Very +weake and feble to withstande or resiste, and of lesse defence. Wherefore +all their warres are no more warres, then the playenge of children when as +they playe at _jogo de cane_ or reedes. The Spaniardes with their horses, +speares, and launces, began to comitt murders and straunge cruelties. They +entred into townes, burroughes, and villages, sparinge neither children +nor olde men, neyther women with childe, neither them that laye in; but +they ripped their bellies and cutt them in peces, as if they had bene +openinge of lambes shutt upp in their folde. They laied wagers with suche +as with one thruste of a sworde, woulde paunche or bowell a man in the +middest, or with one blowe of a sworde most readily and moste deliverly +cut of his heade, or that woulde best perce his entralls at one stroke. +They tooke the little soules by the heeles, rampinge them from their +mothers brestes, and crusshed their heades against the cliftes. Others +they caste into the rivers, laughinge and mockinge; and when they tombled +into the water, they saied: Nowe shifte for thy selfe suche a one's corps. +They put others, together with their mothers, and all that they mett, to +the edge of the sworde. They made certaine gibbetts longe and loughe, in +such sorte that the feete of the hanged one touched in a manner the +grounde; every one enoughe for thirtene, in the honour and worshippe of +our Saviour and his twelve apostles (as they used to speake), and setting +to fire, burned them all quicke that were fastened. Unto all others, whome +they used to take and reserve alive, cuttinge of their twoo handes as nere +as mighte be, and so lettinge them hange, they saied: Go you with those +letters to cary tydinges to those which are fled by the mountaines. They +murdred commonly the lordes and nobilitie on this fashion: they made +certen grates of perches laid on pitchforkes, and made a little fire +underneathe, to the intente that by little and little, yellinge and +despairinge in these tormentes, they mighte give up the ghoste. One time I +sawe foure or five of the principall lordes roasted and broyled upon these +gredyrons; also I thinke that there were twoo or three of the said +gredyrons garnished with the like furniture. And for that they cried oute +piteously, whiche thinge troubled the capitaine that he coulde not then +slepe, he comaunded to strangle them. The serjeant, which was worse then +the hangman, that burned them, (I knowe his name and frendes in Civill,) +woulde not have them strangled, but hymselfe puttinge bulletts in their +mouthes, to the ende they shoulde not crye, put to the fire, until they +were softly roasted after his desire. I have seene all the aforesaide +thinges and others infinite. And forasmuche as all the people that coulde +flee, hidd themselves in the mountaines and, mounted on the toppes of +them, fledd from the men, so, withoute all manhodde, emptie of all pietie, +behavinge themselves as savage beastes, the slaughterers and murderers of +mankinde, they taughte their houndes, fierce doggs, to tear them in peces +at the first viewe; and, in the space that one might say a _credo_, +assailed and devoured an Indian as if it had bene a swine. These doggs +wroughte greate destructions and slaughters. And forasmoche as somtymes +(thougbe seldome) the Indian put to death some Spaniardes upon goodd +righte and lawe of due justice, they made a lawe betwene them, that for +one Spaniarde they had to slaye an hundred Indians. + +(M241) And thus farr oute of the large volume of Don Bartholomewe de las +Casas, bisshoppe of the citie of Chiape in the West Indies, where he lyved +many yeres.(75) + +(M242) Will you nowe heare one testymonie of Johannes Metellus Sequanus, +whoe was a Papiste and favoured the Spanishe superstition; yet he writes +as followeth in the preface of the Historie of Osorius de rebus gestis +Emanuelis, fol. 16: At vero vt semel intelligatur quid Indos toties ad res +nouas contra Hispanos moliendas, et seditiones tanta pertinacia fouendas +impulerit, et quid causae fuerit cur duo illa Christianae Reipublicae summa +capita Indicae nationis libertatem, frementibus quibusdam et inuitis dubio +procul militibus Hispanis, sanctissimo suo calculo comprobarint, paucis +nouorum dominorum in miseros immanitatem, deinde quorundam inexplebilem +auaritiam, et ex his grauiores quosque tumultus, vnde noui orbis pene +totius nunquam satis deploranda vastitas est sequuta, perstringam. + +Principio quidem illud apud plerosque milites Hispanos, pessimo sane +exemplo, in more positum fuit, vti ab oculatis et fide dignis testibus +perscriptum est, vt seruos suos grauissime punirent, si mercedem diurnam +aut non attulissent, aut pensum in auro argentoue effodiendo non +absoluissent, aut si quid leuioris denique delicti perpetrassent. Etenim +vesperi reduces, coenae loco, primum vestimentis exuebant, manibus dein +pedibusque in transuerso palo reuinciebant: mox chorda bubaloue neruo +dirissime verberabant. Sic tractatos, pice oleoue feruenti guttatim +perfundebant; salita post aqua corpus abluebant, et in mensa tamdiu +relinquebant, quamdiu dolorem ferre posse putarentur. Qui mos +animaduertendi ipsis etiam in Christianos seruos domi familiaris esse +dicitur. Post carnificinam huiusmodo, si durior dominus illis contigerat, +viuos in totam noctem collo tenus defodiebant, presentissimum illud ad +plagas remedium esse ludibrio dictitantes. Si quis ex illis prae dolore +moreretur, id quod non raro accidit, dominus singula seruorum capita regi +in occisorum locum sufficiens, ab homicidij poena liberabatur. + +Hanc crudelitatem lege Baionae, quam dicunt, quidem excusant; sed omnibus +impia merito videtur, tanquam omnis pietatis expers. Quamobrem diabolicae +nomen inter Indos iure quidem obtinuit. Ad hanc autem immanitatem in +miseros Indos excercendam nonnullos ingenita quaedam naturae saeuities, +multis iam bellis exasperata, plerosque habendi sitis, impulit. Hinc +Hispanus miles, quasi ad aucupium aut venationem, sic ad praedas hominum +agendas, iam inde ab inuento nouo orbe ferri coepit. Aut igitur bello +captos in seruitutem abripiebat, aut ex eorum mancipio magnam sibi pecuniae +vim conflabat, aut eos ad diurnas operas mittebat, quarum mercedem ab ijs +quotidie perquam importunus exigebat. Fuere qui seruos fodinis +manciparint, in quibus insolito labore fractae, multae seruorum myriades +periere. Alij mercibus illos permutare soliti sunt, alioue modo +distrabere. Idque tam inclementer et auare nonnulli fecerunt, vt +Christianae omnis humanitatis prorsus obliti, e continente abreptos +vtriusque sexus hominis, nulla nec aetatis nec valetudinis habita ratione, +nauibus in vicinas insulas transportarent. Eorum non pauci qui mari non +assueuerant, et in sentinam abdebantur, et fame, foetore, et squallore +crudeliter absorpti sunt. Quid? quod faeminae complures ex Hispanis grauidae, +vna cum innoxio foetu pro ancillis sunt venditae: Atque his quidem modis, +militum aliqui ad summas opes peruenerunt. Alij magnas dignitates domi +forisque sunt consequuti. Alij rem pecuniariam plurimorum damnis sic +auxerunt, vt inuenti sint, qui octo pecudum millia possiderent. Hanc tam +insignem nostrum hominum iniustitiam atque tyrannidem fieri non potuit, +quin magni statim motus et bella, tam ab ipsis inter se, quam ab incolis +in illos excitata sequerentur. After a longe beade roll of moste monstrous +cruelties of the Spanishe nation in every place of the West Indies moste +heynously committed, he concludeth yt thus: Tanta ergo fuit Hispani +militis in India tyrannis, vt ea non solum Indos, verum etiam seruorum +Maurorum animos ad rebellionem impulerit. Dicuntur enim in exigua quadam +insula ad septem millia defecisse. Quos Hispani initio securos et incautos +facilime trucidassent, nisi suo malo vigilantiores factos precibus et +pacifica legatione expugnare potius quam armis frustra tentassent. Multa +denique fugitiui Mauri in Nominis Dei provinciae siluis habitant; qui inita +cum incolis amicitia, ferro, flammaque Hispanos vbicunque persequuntur, et +inuentos frustatim dilacerant. + +This, therefore, I gather of the premisses, that those contries whereof +the Spaniarde ys lorde are partely ruinated, dispeopled, and laid waste by +their incredible, and more then barbarous, and savage, endeles cruelties, +and partely grevously infested by the Indians, Symerons, Moores, +Chichimici revolted; and consequently he is easie to be driven thence, and +turned out of all with moche lesser force then is commonly ymagined: for, +Nullum violentum est diuturnum; et malus diuturnitatis custos est metus. + +(M243) And surely the more I thinke of the Spanishe monarchie, the more me +thinketh it is like the empire of Alexander the Greate, which grewe upp +sooddenly, and sooddenly vpon his deathe was rente and dissolved for +faulte of lawfull yssue. In like manner the the Kinge of Spaine, nowe 59. +yeres of age, as beinge borne in the yere of our Lorde 1526. in the moneth +of May, and beinge subjecte to the fallinge sicknes, in common reason can +be of no longe life; and leavinge no fitt yssue to wealde so greate a +governemente, and a question risinge, whether his younge weake sonne, by +his sister's daughter, be lawfull heire, they are like upon his deathe to +fall together by the eares amongest themselves; and then, as men moste +odious, not onely to the people of the West Indies, but also to all +Christendome, and all the worlde beside, ys it not likely that euery +province wil seke their libertie? And, to say the truthe, what nation, I +pray you, of all Christendome loveth the Spaniarde, the scourge of the +worlde, but from the teethe forwarde, and for advauntage? The Italians, +which sometime were lordes of the earthe, in greate parte nowe broughte +under his vile yoke, doe many wayes shewe the utter mislike of their +satanicall arrogancie and insollencies, and in all their playes and +comedies bringe in the Spanishe souldier as a ravisher of virgins and +wives, and as the boastinge Thraso and _miles gloriosus_; notinge to the +worlde their insupportable luxuriousnes, excessive pride, and shamefull +vaine glorie. The citie of Rome, beinge sackt by Charles the Emperour, the +Pope and Cardinalls taken and ymprisoned, cannot brooke their doinges in +their hartes. The Venecians stande daily in feare of them, almoste as +moche as of the Turke, and doubte that, if they be not with spede +restrained, they will inclose them and use them at their pleasure, beinge +on bothe sides become almoste lordes of the mouthe of the Straites of +Giberaulter. The Frenche, remembringe the takinge of their kinge prisoner, +their crueltie in Florida, the late overthrowe of Strozzi and their +fleete, their takinge of Tercera, and other disgraces, hate them for the +moste parte worse then scorpions. The Princes of Germanie, the Duke of +Saxonie, the Lantsgrave of Hassia, the Duke of Cleve, the Duke Cassimere, +have susteyned wronges sufficient to make them his mortall enemies. His +innumerable outrages in the Netherlandes have inforced the Flemynges to +those termes which nowe they stande at. Their manifolde practises to +supplant us of England give us moste occasion to bethincke ourselves, howe +wee may abate and pull downe their highe myndes. The poore oppressed +prince and people of Portingale doe watche nighte and day when to finde a +conuenient occasion of defection. In fine, there is almoste no nation of +Europe that may not say againste the Spaniarde with the poet: +Distuleratque graues in idonea tempora poenas; and so, Eum multos metuere +necesse est quem multi metuunt; and, Multorum odijs nulla respublica stare +diu potest. + + + +Chap. XII. That the passage in this voyadge is easie and shorte, that it +cutteth not nere the trade of any other mightie princes, or nere their +contries, that it is to be perfourmed at all times of the yere, and nedeth +but one kinde of winde; that Ireland, beinge full of goodd havens on the +southe and weste side, is the nerest parte of Europe to yt, which by this +trade shalbe in more securitie, and the sooner drawen to more civilitie. + + +In this voyadge wee may see by the globe that wee are not to passe +throughe the frozen seas, but in a temperate climate unto a contrie muche +like to those partes of Gascoigne and Guyen, where heretofore our nation +for a longe tyme have inhabited. And it requireth not, as longe voyadges +doe, the takinge in of freshe water by the way in divers places, by reason +it may be sailed in five or sixe weekes. Whereby the marchante nede [not] +to expecte twoo or three yeres for one returne, as in the voyadge of Sir +Fraunces Drake, of Fenton and William Hawkins; but may receave twoo +returnes every yere in the selfe same shippes, I saye, and well repose +themselves at their arryvalls; which thinge I myselfe have seene and +understoode in Ffraunce this presente yere don by the Frenchemen; whoe, +settinge furthe in January, broughte their bancke fishe which they tooke +on the Bancke, forty or three-score leagues from Newefoundelande, to Roan, +in greate quantitie, by the ende of May, and afterwarde retained this yere +againe to the fisshinge, and are looked for at home towardes the fifte of +November. To the spedy perfourmaunce of which voyadge this is a speciall +furtheraunce: that whereas moste of our other voyadges of like lengthe +require twoo or three sortes of windes at the leaste, one onely winde +suffiseth to make this; which was no doubte the cause of the quicke +returne of my frende Stephen Bellinger of Roan, whoe departed from +Newhaven in January was twelve moneths, arryved at Cape Briton in xxii +daies space, and from thence discouered very diligently CC. leagues +towardes Norumbega, and had traficque with the people in tenne or twelue +places; founde a towne conteyninge fourescore houses, and returned home, +with a diligent description of the coaste, in the space of foure monethes, +with many comodities of the contrie, which he shewed me. + +Moreover this passage is neither by the Straites of Giberaulter, nor on +the coastes of Spaine, Portingall, Fraunce nor Flaunders, neither by the +Sounde of Denmarke, nor Wardhouse in Norwey: so as in takinge our course +on the highe seas wee shall not be in daunger of the corsaries in the +Levant, nor of the gallies of Barbarie, nor of the Turke, nor of any state +of Italie, neither of the Spaniarde, the Frenche, nor the Dane, nor of any +other prince nor potentate within the Sounde in the northe, or in the +northeaste partes of the worlde. + +Wee may also trauell thither and perfourme the same at all tymes of the +yere, with the like facilitie as our marchantes of Bristowe, Weymouthe, +and other partes of the West Contries travell for woade to the iles of St. +Mighell and Tercera (which are halfe the way thither) all the yere longe. +For this coaste is never subjecte to the ise, which is never lightly seene +to the southe of Cape Razo in Newfounde lande. + +Besides this, in our way as wee passe to and froe, wee shall have in +tempestes and other necessities the portes of Ireland to our aide, and no +nerer coaste of any enemye. Moreover by the ordinary entercourse wee may +annoye the enemyes to Ireland, and succour the Queens Majesties faithfull +subjects, and drawe the Irishe by little and little to more civilitie, and +in shorte tyme wee may yelde them from the coastes of America whatsoever +comodities they nowe receave at the handes of the Spaniardes. So the +Spaniardes shall wante the ordinarye victualls they receave every yere +from thence, whereby they cannot contynue traficque, nor fall so aptly to +practize againste our governmente there as heretofore by their trade +thither they have don and doe daily, to the greate expences of her +Majestie, and no small indaungeringe and troublinge of our state. + +And to conclude: in tradinge to these contries wee shall not nede, for +feare of the Spanishe bloudy Inquisition, to throwe our bibles and prayer +bookes over boorde into the sea before our arryvall at their portes, as +these many yeres wee have don and yet doe, nor take suche horrible oathes +as are exacted of our men by the Spanishe searchers, to suche dayly +wilfull and highe offence of Almightie God, as we are driven to +continually in followinge our ordinary trafficque into the Kinge of +Spaines dominyons; whereof at large wee have spoken before in the seconde +chapiter. + + + +Chap. XIII. That hereby the revenewes and customes of Her Majestie, bothe +outewarde and inwarde, shall mightily be inlarged by the toll, excises, +and other dueties which withoute expression may be raysed. + + +The manifolde testimonies, verbatim alleaged by me in the thirde chapiter, +of John Ribault, John Verarsanus, Stephen Gomes, Vasques de Coronado, +Jaques Cartier, Gasper Corterialis, and others, which all were the +discoverers of the coaste and inlande of America betwene 30 and 63 +degrees, prove infallibly unto us that golde, silver, copper, perles, +pretious stones, and turqueses, and emraldes, and many other commodities, +have bene by them founde in those regions. To which testimonies I shoulde +have added many more yf I had not feared to be tedious. Nowe the fyfte +parte of all these aforenamed comodities cannot choose but amounte to a +greate matter, beinge yerely reserved unto her Majestie, accordinge to the +tenor of the patent graunted by King Henry the Seaventh in the xj'th. yere +of his raigne to John Gabote and his three sonnes, Lewes, Sebastian, and +Sancius; the wordes whereof it shoulde not be amisse here to sett downe, +as they are printed in my booke of voyadges. These are the wordes: Ex +omnibus fructibus, proficuis, emolumentis commodis, lucris, et +obuentionibus ex huiusmodi nauigatione prouenientibus, prefatus Joannes et +filij ac heredes et eorum deputati teneantur, et sint obligati nobis pro +omni viagio suo toties quoties ad portum nostrum Bristolliae applicuerint +(ad quem omnino applicare teneantur et sint astricti), deductis omnibus +sumptibus et impensis necessarijs per eosdem factis, quintam partem +capitalis lucri facti, siue in mercibus, siue in pecuniis, persoluere.(76) + +What gaines this imposition may turne unto the Crowne of England in shorte +tyme wee may more then gesse, havinge but an eye to the Kinge of Spaines +revenewes, which he nowe hath out of all his domynions in all the West +Indies. + +The like in all respectes may be saied of the revenewes of the Crowne of +Portingale, which, beinge of itselfe one of the smallest and poorest +kingdomes of all Christendome, became in shorte space so riche and +honourable soone after their entringe into their southesterne discoveries, +traficques, and conquestes, that, before the deathe of their late younge +kinge Sebastian, their embassadors woulde strive and chalenge for the +chefest place with the embassadores of the greatest kinges of +Christendome; as I have hearde it dyvers tymes spoken at Paris at my +lordes table by men of greate honour and experience, in which citie moste +princes and states of Christendome have their embassadors comonly +resident. + +To leave them and to come to our nation, I say that amonge other meanes to +encrease her Majesties customes this shalbe one, especially that by +plantinge and fortifieinge nere Cape Briton, what by the strengthe of our +shipps beinge harde at hande, and bearinge the sway already amongest all +nations that fishe at Newfoundelande, and what by the fortes that there +may be erected and helde by our people wee shall be able to inforce them, +havinge no place els to repaire unto so convenient, to pay us soche a +contynual custome as shall please us to lay upon them; which imposition of +twoo or three hundred shippes laden yerely with sondry sortes of fish, +trane oyle, and many kyndes of furres and hides, cannot choose but amounte +to a greate matter, beinge all to be levied upon straungers. And this not +onely wee may exacte of the Spaniardes and Portingales, but also of the +Frenche men, our olde and auncient enemyes. What shoulde I speake of the +customes of the greate multitudes of course clothes, Welshe frise, and +Irishe ruggs, that may be uttered in the more northerly partes of the +lande amonge the Esquimawes of the Grande Bay, and amonge them of Canada, +Saguynay, and Hochelaga, which are subjecte to sharpe and nippinge +winters, albeit their somers be hotter moche then oures. Againe, the +multitudes of small yron and copper workes, wherewith they are exceedingly +delighted, wilt not a little encrease the customes, being transported oute +of the lande. I omitt the rehersall of a thousande other trifinge wares, +which, besides they may sett many women, children, and ympotent persons on +worke in makinge of them, woulde also helpe to the encreasinge of the +customes. Lastly, whatsoever kind of commodyties shoulde be broughte from +thence by her Majesties subjectes into the realme, or be thither +transported oute of the realme, cannot choose but inlarge the revenewes of +the Crowne very mightely, and inriche all sortes of subjectes in +generally. + + + +Chap. XIV. That this action will be for the greate increase, +mayneteynaunce, and safetie of our navie, and especially of greate +shippinge, which is the strengthe of our realme, and for the supportation +of all those occupations that depende upon the same. + + +In the Statutes moste providently ordeyned for increase and maineteynaunce +of our navigation in the Raignes of Kinge Richarde the Seconde, Kinge +Henry the Seaventh, Kinge Henry the Eighth, and her Majestie that nowe ys, +thoughe many and sundry rewardes were proposed to encourage our people +unto the sea, yet still I fynde complaintes of decaye of the navye, +notwithstanding so many goodly priviledges to mayneteine fisshermen, the +ordeyninge of Wendisday to be a newe fishe day for the better utteraunce +of their fishe that they shoulne take at sea, yea, albeit there hath bene +graunted a certene proportionable allowaunce oute of the exchequer to +suche as woulde builde any shippes of burden to serve the prince in tyme +of warr, yet very little hath bene done in that behalfe. For, setting the +Citie of London aparte, goe your waye into the west parte of England and +Wales, and search howe many shippes of CC. tonnes and upwardes those +partes can afforde, and you shall finde (God wotteth) no such nomber as at +firste you did ymagine. At this day I am assured there are scarce twoo of +CC. tones beloninge to the whole citie of Bristowe, and very fewe or none +of the like burden alonge the channell of the Severne from Glocester to +the Landes Ende on the one side, and Milforde Haven on the other. Nowe, +remedie this greate and unknowen wante, no enterprise possibly can be +devised more fitt to increase our great shippinge then this Westerne +fortifienge and planting. For in this action wee are not to cut over the +narrowe seas, in a day or a nighte, betwene Flaunders, Fraunce, or +Ireland, in small barkes of xx. or xxx'ti. tonnes; but wee are to passe +over the breste of the maine ocean, and to lye at sea a moneth or six +weekes together, whereby wee shall be constrayned of our selves, withoute +chardginge of the Prince, to builde greate shippes, as well to avoide the +daunger of tempest as also for the commoditie of portage, whereunto the +greater shippes in longe voyadges are moste conveniente, which the +Portingales and Spaniardes have founde oute by longe experience, whoe for +that cause builde shippes of v. vj. vij. viij. C. and a M. tonnes, to +sende into their Easterne and Westerne Indies. + +The like whereof wee shalbe the rather invited to doe, since by this +voyadge wee shall have many thinges for little or nothinge, that are +necessarie for the furniture of greate shippinge. For beinge possessed of +Newfounde lande, which the last yere was seazed upon in her Majesties +name, wee may have tarr, rosen, mastes, and cordage for the very +workemanshippe of the same. All which comodities cannot choose but +wonderfully invite our men to the buildinge of greate shippinge, +especially havinge store of the best shipwrights of the worlde, whereof +some, for wante of employmente at home, have bene driven to flye into +forren partes, as into Demarke. Moreover, in the judgemente of those that +are experte in sea causes, yt will breed more skillfull, connynge, and +stowte pilott and maryners then other belonginge to this lande. For it is +the longe voyadges (so they be not to excessive longe, nor throughe +intemperate clymates, as those of the Portingales into their West Indies) +that harden seamen, and open unto them the secretes of navigation; the +nature of the windes; the currentes and settinge of the sea; the ebbinge +and flowinge of the mayne ocean; the influence of the sonne, the moone, +and of the rest of the celestiall planetts, and force which they have at +sondry seasons upon that mightie body; whiche skill in sea causes the +Emperour Charles the Fyfte, knowinge howe mooche yt did (M244) ymporte his +state, to the intent that it mighte better encrease amongest the +Spaniardes, in great providence erected a lecture of the arte of +navigation in Civill, and ordeyned that no man shoulde take chardge to the +West Indies that had not hearde the Reader of the same for a certaine +space, and, upon due examynation, were allowed as sufficient by him, and +others adjoyded unto him as assistantes to examyn matters of experience; +which order, if it had bene established in England, such grosse and +insufficient felowes as he that caste away the Admirall of Sir Humfreyes +company, with an C. persons in her, to the west of Newfounde lande, this +tyme twelve moneths, had not bene admittted to take so greate a chardge. + +But to returne to the increase and mayneteynaunce of our shippes and +shippmen; I say that this is not as the voyadge to Muscovy, which is open +not paste foure monethes, but may be passed and repassed at our pleasure +at all tymes of the yere, and so our maryners may be sett on worke all the +yere longe. Neither is the trade likely to prove so small as that of +Muscovy, wherein not past tenne shippes at the moste are employed ones a +yere. For here there is a greate hope, the contrie beinge as bigge as all +Europe, and nothinge in frutefulnes inferior to yt, as I have proved +before at large in the thirde chapiter, that wee shall have twoo fleetes +as bigge as those of the Kinge of Spaine to his West Indies, imployed +twise in the yere at the leaste, especially after our fortifienge in the +contrie, the certene place of our factory beinge there established; +whereby yt muste nedes come to passe that our navye shalbe mightely +increased and mayneteyned, which will not onely be a chefe strengthe and +suertie in tyme of warres, as well to offende as defende, but will also be +the mayneteynaunce of many masters, maryners, and seamen, whereby they +their wyves, and children, shall have their lyvinges, and many cities, +townes, villages, havens, and creeks nere adjoyninge unto the sea coaste, +and the Queenes subjectes, as brewers, bowchers, smithes, ropers, +shipwrights, tailors, shoemakers, and other victuallers and handicraftes +men, inhabitinge and dwellinge nere thereaboutes, shall also have by the +same greate parte of their lyvinge. For proofe thereof wee nede not to +seeke any further then unto oure neighbours of Spaine and Portingale; +whoe, since the firste discoverie of their Indies, have not onely mightely +inlarged their domynions, marvellously enriched themselves and (M245) +their subjectes, but have also by juste accompte trebled the nomber of +their shippes, masters, and maryners,--a matter of no small moment and +importance; insomoche that nowe, of late Kinge Phillippe hath made the +Marques de la Cruz, which laste yere wonne Tercera, Graunde Admirall of +the Ocean Sea, and Prince d'Oria of Genoa, Admirall in the Levant. A taste +of this increase wee have had in our owne selves, even by our trade of +fisshinge in Newfoundelande; which, as yt is well knowen, hath bene +occasion, that in sondry places of this realme divers tall shippes have +bene builte and sett furthe even of late daies; and more would be if, +whereas nowe havinge but twoo moneths or tenne weekes of fisshinge, by +this newe plantinge they mighte be drawen more south-westerly, where the +speciall fisshing places are, bothe for plentie and greateness of fishe; +and beinge oute of daunger and ympedimente of yse, they mighte fishe there +safely the greatest parte of the yere, and by their nereness unto our +fortes there, builte aboute Cape Briton, they mighte yelde succour unto +them, and likewise by their neighbourhoode be themselves in more +securitie. + +(M246) Fynally, their shippes, their goodds, and their persons shoulde not +be subjecte to soodden arrestes of straungers, as they are in all other +trades of Christendome; but shoulde enjoye as greate freedome, libertie, +and securitie as they usually doe in their native contrie; the havens, +townes, and villages in those partes beinge occupied and possessed by +their fellowe subjects; which freedome and liberty will greatly incourage +them to contynewe constantly in this newe traficque. + + + +Chap. XV. That spedie plantinge in divers fitt places is moste necessarie +upon these laste luckye westerne discoveries, for feare of the danger of +beinge prevented by other nations which have the like intention, with the +order thereof, and other reasons therewithall alleaged. + + +Havinge by Gods goodd guidinge and mercifull direction atchieved happily +this presente westerne discoverye, after the seekinge the advauncemente of +the kingedome of Christe, the seconde chefe and principall ende of the +same is traficque, which consisteth in the vent of the masse of our +clothes and other comodities of England, and in receaving backe of the +nedeful comodities that wee nowe receave from all other places of the +worlde. But forasmoche as this is a matter of greate ymportaunce, and a +thinge of so greate gaine as forren princes will stomacke at, this one +thinge is to be don, withoute which it were in vaine to goe aboute this; +and that is, the matter of plantinge and fortificacion, withoute due +consideration whereof in vaine were it to thinck of the former. And +therefore upon the firste said viewe taken by the shippes that are to be +sente thither, wee are to plante upon the mouthes of the greate navigable +rivers which are there, by stronge order of fortification, and there to +plante our colonies. And so beinge firste setled in strengthe with men, +armour, and munition, and havinge our navy within our bayes, havens, and +roades, wee shall be able to lett the entraunce of all subjectes of forren +princes, and so with our freshe powers to encounter their shippes at the +sea, and to renewe the same with freshe men, as the soodden feightes shall +require; and by our fortes shalbe able to holde faste our firste footinge, +and readily to annoye suche weary power of any other that shall seke to +arryve; and shalbe able with our navye to sende advertisemente into +England upon every soodden whatsoever shall happen. And these +fortifications shall kepe the naturall people of the contrye in obedience +and goodd order. And these fortes at the mowthes of those greate portable +and navigable ryvers may at all tymes sende upp their shippes, barkes, +barges, and boates into the inland with all the comodities of England, and +returne unto the said fortes all the comodities of the inlandes that wee +shall receave in exchange, and thence at pleasure convey the same into +England. And thus settled in those fortes, yf the nexte neighboures shall +attempte any annoye to our people, wee are kepte safe by our fortes; and +wee may, upon violence and wronge offred by them, ronne upon the rivers +with our shippes, pynnesses, barkes, and boates, and enter into league +with the petite princes, their neigbboures, that have alwayes lightly +warres one with an other, and so entringe league nowe with the one, and +then with the other, wee shall purchase our owne safetie, and make +ourselves lordes of the whole. + +Contrarywise, withoute this plantinge in due tyme, wee shall never be able +to have full knowledge of the language, manners, and customes of the +people of those regions, neither shall wee be able thoroughly to knowe the +riches and comodities of the inlandes, with many other secretes whereof as +yet wee have but a small taste. And althoughe by other meanes wee mighte +attaine to the knowledge thereof, yet beinge not there fortified and +strongly seated, the French that swarme with multitude of people, or other +nations, mighte secretly fortifie themselves before us, hearinge of the +benefite that is to be reaped of that voyadge; and so wee shoulde beate +the bushe and other men take the birdes; wee shoulde be at the chardge and +travell, and other men reape the gaine. + +To make this plaine by example, in the sixte leafe of the Italian edition +of the Historie of Fernando Cortes, written by Franciscus Lopez de Gomera, +is lively described the folly of John Grijalua for his not inhabitinge +that goodd and riche contrie of Iucaton; which ymmediatly after he had +neglected, the same Fernando Cortes tooke in hande and perfourmed, and +gott all the honour and comoditie from him, leaving greate wealthe and +honour to his posteritie, and to himself an everlastinge name. The story +is thus: Giouan di Grigalua se n'ando a Yucatan, combattete con quelli +Indiani di Ciapoton, et se ne ritorne ferito; entro nel fiume di Tauasco, +che per questo si chiama ora Grijalua, nel qual riscatto o cambio per cose +di poca valuta molto oro, robbe di cottone, et bellissime cose di penne; +stette in San Giouanni di Vilhua, piglio possessione di quel paese per il +Re, in nome del Gouernatore, Diego Velasquez: et cambio la sua merciaria +per pezzi di oro, coperte di cottone et penne; et si hauesse conosciuto la +uentura sua, haueria fatto populatione in paese cosi ricco, come lo +pregauano li suoi compagni et lui saria stato quello che dipoi il Cortes. +Ma tanta uentura non era riseruata per chi non la conosceua ancora che si +scusaua che lui non andaua per populare, se non per riscattare o permutare +le cose che leuaua del Gouernatore; et discoprire se quella terra di +Yucatan era isola o terra ferma. And if any man liste to knowe what +intertainment he had of his uncle at his returne for not inhabitinge upon +the present occasion, yt followeth in the ende of the same chapiter in +these wordes: Et quando arriuo non lo uolse uedere il Gouernatore suo zio, +che li fece quello che lui meritaua. + +The like story wee have, fol. 298. of Franciscus Lopez de Gomera his +Generall Historie of the West Indies, of Vasques de Coronado, which, after +excedinge greate chardges bestowed for royall furnishinge furthe upon his +voyadge to Ceuola and Quiuira, for wante of courage and for other priuate +respectes, neglected plantinge there, had as colde welcome, at his +dastardly and unconsiderate returne, of Don Antonio de Mendoza, viceroy of +Mexico, as Grijalua had of his uncle above mentioned. It is written thus +of him after his returne from Quiuira:-- + +Casco del cauallo in Tiguez Francisco Vasquez, e con il colpo usci di +ceruello et disuariaua; questo caso alcuni credettero che fusse finto, +altri n'hebbero grandissimo dolore; quelli che l'intendeuano a mala parte +stauano male con lui per che non si metteua a popolare. And a little +afterwarde: molto dispiacque a Don Antonio di Mendoza che fusero +ritornati, per che haueua speso piu di sessanta milla pesi d'oro in quella +impresa ... molti uolsero restare la, ma Francesco Vasquez di Coronado, +che ricco era et nuouamente maritato con vna bellissima donna, non volse, +dicendo che non si poteriano sustentarsi ne difendere in cosi povero paesa +et tanto lontani del soccorso; caminarono presso a tre milla miglia di +longo in questa giornata. + +Notwithstandinge these colourable excuses and dispraisinges of the +contrie, yt is described by relation of his owne companions in this manner +in the same leafe: a Quiuira in quaranta gradi a paesa temperato, di +bonissime acque, di molto herbatico, purgne, more, noci, et melloni, et +vue che maturano benissimo; non c'a cottone, et vestono pelle di vacche e +caprioli. + +The greate inconvenience of the delaye and neglecte of plantinge with +spede of goodd contries newe discoured, beinge well weyed and foreseene by +John Ribault, made him to plante and fortefie at his firste voyadge, +thoughe it were with but thirtie men; which, that you may the better +understande, together with the wise course and choice of place which +oughte to be had in plantinge and seatinge at the firste, I will alleage +his owne wordes which are in the laste leafe of his firste printed +voyadge: Wherefore (my lorde), saith he, I truste you will not thincke it +amisse (consideringe the comodities that may be broughte thence) yf we +leave a nomber of men there, which may fortifie and provide themselves of +thinges necessiarie; for in all newe discoveries it is the chefest thinge +that may be don, at the begynnynge to fortifie and people the contrie. I +had not so soone set furthe this to our companie, but many of them offred +to tary there; yea, with suche a goodd will and jolly courage, that suche +a nomber did offer themselves as wee had moche to doe to stay their +opportunitie; and namely, of our shippe masters and pilotts, and suche as +wee woulde not spare. Howebeit, wee lefte there but to the nomber of 30 +men in all, gentlemen, souldiers, and maryners, and that at their owne +sute and prayer, and of their owne free willes, and by the advice and +deliberation of the gentlemen sent on the behalfe of the Prince and yours. +And I have lefte unto them for heade and ruler, followinge therein your +pleasure, Capitaine Albert de la Pierria, a souldier of longe experience, +and the firste that from the begynnynge offred to tary; and further, by +their advise, choice, and will, inscaled and fortified them in an iland on +the northe side thereof, a place of stronge scituation and commodious, +upon a river which wee named Chenonceau, and the habitation and fortres, +Charles Forte. After wee had instructed and duly admonished them of what +they should doe (as well for their manner of procedinge, as for the goode +and lovinge behaviour of them), the xj'th. day of the moneth of June last +paste wee departed from Porte Royall, &c. + +(M247) Nowe, to leave the Spaniardes and Frenche and to come to ourselves; +seinge it hath pleased Almightie God at this instant to reveale unto her +Majestie and the realme that once againe afreshe which was in part +discovered by Sebastian Gabote and other this lande to her moste famous +grandfather, Kinge Henry the Seaventh, was then lefte of and caste aside +and not sufficiently regarded by occasion of the warres of Scotland, as +Sebastian himself writes, and so hath bene intermitted for the space of +aboute foure score and sixe yeares--if nowe the Queene, her Counsell, and +other subjectes, shall never so little delaye the throughe managinge of +the cause and enteringe effectually into the action, let them assure +themselves that they will come to late, and a day after the faire; ffor as +the wise man saieth, _Post est occasio calva_. (M248) For, to speake +nothinge of the laste yeres preparation of the Marques de la Roche to +inhabite and plante in those partes nowe discovered by oure men, which +preparation was luckely overthrowne in respecte of us, by reason that his +greatest shippe was cast away upon the trauers of Burwage, the men of St. +John de Luze sente the laste yere to solicite the Frenche Kinge and his +Counsell to plante there. And nowe our neighboures, the men of St Maloe in +Brytaine, in the begynnynge of Auguste laste paste of this yere 1584. are +come home with five shippes from Canada and the contries upp the Bay of +St. Lawrence, and have brought twoo of the people of the contrie home, and +have founde suche swete in that newe trade that they are preparinge tenne +shippes to returne thither in January nexte, as one John de la Marche and +Mr. Pryhouse of Garnesey affirme; which Mr. Pryhouse, beinge yet in +London, was at St. Malowe within these weekes, and sawe the twoo savages, +the five shippes, and the riche comodities, and understoode of the greate +preparation, and lieth nowe at London, in Philpott lane, at the stone +house there. + +And that it may be knowen that not onely the Frenche affecte this +enterprise, but even the Duche longe since thoughte of yt, I can assure +you that Abraham Ortelius, the great geographer, told me, at his laste +beinge in England, 1577. that if the warres of Flaunders had not bene, +they of the Lowe Contries had meant to have discovered those partes of +America, and the north west straite, before this tyme. And yt semed that +the chefe cause of his comynge to England was to no other ende, but to +prye and looke into the secretes of Ffrobishers voyadge; for yt was even +then, when Ffrobisher was preparinge for his first returne into the north +west. + +To conclude: yf wee doe procrastinate the plantinge (and where our men +have nowe presently discovered, and founde it to be the best parte of +America that is lefte, and in truthe more agreable to our natures, and +more nere unto us, than Nova Hispania), the Frenche, the Normans, the +Brytons, or the Duche, or some other nation, will not onely prevente us of +the mightie Baye of St. Lawrence, where they have gotten the starte of us +already, thoughe wee had the same revealed to us by bookes published and +printed in Englishe before them,(77) but also will depriue us of that +goodd lande which nowe wee have discovered. Which if they doe (as God +defende they shoulde), then it falleth oute that wee shall have our +enemyes or doubtfull frendes rounde aboute us, and shall not onely loose a +singular comoditie and inestymable benefite, but also incurr greate +daunger and inconvenience in sufferinge Papistes, by plantinge rounde +aboute us, to take from us all succours, and to lett them enriche +themselves under our noses, to be better able to supplant or overronne us. + + + +Chap. XVI. Meanes to kepe this enterprise from overthrowe, and the +enterprisers from shame and dishonour. + + +Euery newe enterprise is in the begynnyinge burdenous, chardgeable, and +heavie, and moste comonly hath many greate enemies; which is the cause +that many goodd men, much affected to their contrie in wittie excellent +enterprises, sincke and fainte under their burden. And because that this +enterprise which wee have in hande or in purpose (besides that it is much +maliced, specially by our mightie faction of the Papistes), is an +enterprize that requireth, beside the favour of the Prince, no small +chardge; therefore wee are to devise howe the burden may leste tyme reste +on the backe of the bearer of the same, that he sincke not under the same, +but that he maye stande upp in full strengthe, and goe throughe with ease, +fame, and profitt, withoute shame of all the bymedlers and fauters of the +same. And entred into consideration hereof, this cometh to mynde: that the +firste chardge of the navye to be admitted as for the present deade +chardge for the tyme, howe supply of the chardges followinge may be +mayneteyned and borne; for in that standeth one greate matter that +ymporteth honour, credite, profite, and the whole sequele of the +enterprize. + +Wee are induced by late plaine examples of the Frenche, that have +traficqued in those partes with greate profite, to beleve that upon our +plantinge wee shall as yt were defraye as well the firste chardges as the +chardges followinge, by the comodities in trafficque that wee shall +receave by passinge into the inland by river and otherwise. But admittinge +the worse, that the people will neither receave our comodities nor yelde +us theirs againe, then wee are to devise of ourselves howe wee may +otherwise at the firste countervaile our chardges, and become greate +gayners, will or nill the naturall inhabitantes of those regions or +others; and that is, by enjoyinge certaine naturall comodities of the +landes infinitely aboundinge, in no accompts with them and with us of +greate price, which is this way to be broughte aboute. + +The soiles there upon the seacoaste, and all alonge the tracte of the +greate broade mightie ryvers, all alonge many hundreth miles into the +inland, are infinitely full fraughte with swete wooddes of ffyrr, cedars, +cypres, and with divers other kindes of (M249) goodly trees; and settynge +upp mylles to sawe them, suche as be common in Poland and in all the north +easte regions, wee may with spede possesse infinite masses of boordes of +these swete kindes, and these frame and make ready to be turned into +goodly chestes, cupboordes, stooles, tables, deskes, &c., upon the +returne. And consideringe the present wante of tymber in the realme, and +howe derely the cipres chestes are solde that come from the ilandes of the +Levant seas, and lately from the Azores, to Bristoll and the westerne +havens, these may be bothe amply and derely vented in all the portes of +the realme and of the realmes adjoyninge, consideringe that in this age +every man desireth to fill his house with all manner of goodd furniture. +So that were there no other peculiar comodities, this onely, I say, were +ynoughe to defraye all the chardges of all the begynnynge of the +enterprize, and that oute of hande; for suche mylwrightes may easely be +procured from suche places where they abounde, and some suche (possible) +be in England; for I have herde of a frende of myne, that one suche mill +within these xxx yeres was sett upp in Worcestshere by a knighte of that +contrie. And one man onely were able to directe a thousande of our common +milwrightes in that trade; and carpinters and joyners, the realme may +spare thousandes for a nede. + +And with like ease and shortenes of time wee may make of the woodes there +pitch and tarr, which are thinges fitt for our navie, and marchandizes of +goodd vente and of comon neede. + +And with like ease wee may make of the wooddes there plentie of sope +asshes, a comoditie very dere and of greate and ample vente with us, and +elsewhere in forren kingdomes of Europe. Also wee may there prepare for +pikes, chasinge staves, oares, halberts, and the like for cullen cleftes +for sundry uses, &c. And also wee may there, withoute payeng for the same, +have tymber to builde greate navies, and may bringe them into this realme, +and have goodd sale of the same. + +All this, I say, may be broughte to passe if wee wisely plante, upon our +arryvall, aboute the mouthes of greate rivers and in the ilandes of the +same; and so wee shall have the starte before the Frenche and all others; +and our people, sente thither for the purposes aforesaide, shall be ready +to man our shippes to give repulse at the firste to all suche as shall +come thither to sett foote to our annoye. + +Thus all thinges removed that mighte bringe discouragemente, the firste +that tooke the enterprise in hande have wonne greate honour and highe +estymation with all degrees in England, and, havinge by these former +meanes wonne to defraye all the chardges of the brunte off the enterprise, +they stande full able to followe the same withoute cravinge aide of the +lingringe marchaunte, and have the possibilitie onely to themselves of the +trades of traficque with the people, which they may bringe aboute eyther +with curtesie, or by pollicie and force, as by joyninge now with this +petite kinge, and nowe with that, &c. + +And this once plainely founde and noted in England, what noble man, what +gentleman, what marchante, what citezen or contryman, will not offer of +himselfe to contribute and joyne in the action, forseeinge that the same +tendeth to the ample vent of our clothes, to the purchasinge of riche +comodities, to the plantinge of younger brethren, to the employment of our +idle people, and to so many noble endes? And greate joyninge in +contribution upon so happy begynnynges geveth abilitie to fortifie, to +defende all forren force in divers comodious places even at the firste. + + + +Chap. XVII. That by these colonies the north west passage to Cathaio and +China may easely, quickly, and perfectly be searched oute as well by river +and overlande as by sea; for proofe whereof here are quoted and alleaged +divers rare testymonies oute of the three volumes of voyadges gathered by +Ramusius, and other grave authors. + + +In the thirde volume of Nauigations and Voyadges, gathered and translated +into Italian by Mr. John Baptista Ramusius, fol. 417. pag. 2, I reade of +John Verarsanus as followeth: This unhappy ende had this valiaunte +gentleman, whoe, if this misfortune had not happened unto him (with the +singuler knowledge that he had in sea matters and in the arte of +navigation, beinge also favoured with the greate liberalitie of Kinge +Fraunces), woulde have discovered and opened unto the worlde that parte +also of lande even to the poole. Neither woulde he have contented himselfe +with the outeside and sea coaste onely, but woulde have passed further upp +within the lande so farr as he coulde have gon. And many that have knowen +him and talked with him have told me, that he saied he had in mynde to +perswade the Frenche Kinge to sende oute of Fraunce a goodd nomber of +people to inhabite certaine places of the said coaste, which be of ayre +temperate, and of soile moste fertile, with very faire ryvers, and havens +able to receave any navie. The inhabitants of which places mighte be +occasion to bringe to passe many goodd effectes: and, amongest other, to +reduce those poore, rude, and ignoraunte people to the knowledge of God +and true relligion, and to shewe them the manner of husbandrie for the +grounde, transportinge of the beastes of Europe into those excedinge large +and champion contries; and in time mighte discover the partes within +lande, and see if, amongest so many ilandes there be any passage to the +Southe Sea, or whither the firme lande of Fflorida contynewe still even to +the pole. + +Upon occasion of these laste wordes I thinke it not amisse to alleage +those testimonies tendinge to the proofe of this longe desired north west +passage, which, with no small care these many yeres, I have observed in my +readinges and conferences concerninge the same matter. + +1. My firste authoritie is in the seconde volume of Ramusius, in the +discourse of the discoverie of the ilandes Freseland, Iseland, +Engroneland, Drogeo, and Icaria, made in the northe by Sir Nicholas Zeny, +Knighte, and Mr. Anthony, his brother, in the yere 1380.(78) In which +discourse, amonge many other thinges tendinge to the proofe of this +passage, I finde this recorded: Scoprirono vna isola detta Estotilanda +posta in ponente lontana da Frislanda piu di mille miglia; whereof I +gather, that whereas still he calleth Estotiland an Ilande, and that it is +distant westwarde from Frislande more then a thousande miles, that the sea +is open above five hundreth miles further then Frobisher and his companie +discouered. Ffor he himself confesseth that he never sailed paste five or +sixe hundreth miles to the weste of Ffriselande; and here is mention made, +that those fishermen that discouered the iland of Estotiland founde it to +be more then a M. miles to the weste of the same. + +2. The seconde testimonie to prove this north west passage is in the +preface of the aforesaide Ramusius before his thirde volume, where he +alleageth, in manner followinge, that which Sebastian Gabote wrote unto +him concerninge this matter: Many yeres paste I was written unto by +Sebastian Gabote, our contryman, a Venecian, and a man of greate +experience, and very singuler in the arte of navigation and in the +knowledge of cosmographie, whoe sailed alonge and beyonde Nova Francia, at +the chardges of Kinge Henry the seaventh, Kinge of England; and he +signified unto me, that havinge sailed a longe tyme west and by northe +beyonde those ilandes unto the latitude of 67. degrees and [an half] under +the north pole, on the xj'th day of June, and findinge the sea open and +withoute any manner of ympedymente, he thoughte verely that he mighte have +passed by that way unto Cathaia, which is in the Easte; and he woulde have +done yt, if the mutinie of the shipmaster and unruly mariners had not +inforced him to returne homewardes from that place. But it semeth (saith +Ramusius), that God doth yet reserve to some greate prince the discoverie +of this voyadge to Cathaio by this way, which, for the bringinge of the +spicerie from India into Europe, woulde be the moste easie and shortest of +all others hitherto founde oute. And surely this enterprise woulde be the +moste glorious and of moste importaunce of all other that any coulde +ymagine, to make their name moche more eternall and ymmortale amonge all +ages to come, then these so greate tumultes and troubles of warres, which +are to be seene contynually in Europe amonge the miserable and unhappy +Christians. + +3. Thirdly, the reporte which the people of Hochelaga made to Jacques +Cartier, in the xiij'th. chapter of his seconde relation, of the river +three monethes navigable to the southewarde, dothe not a little confirme +the same. + +4. Fourthly, the relation of the people of Canada in the xij'th. chapiter, +followinge on this manner: Moreover they tolde us, and gave us to +understande, that there are people cladde with clothe as wee are, and that +there are many inhabited townes and goodd people, and that they have +greate store of golde and redd copper, and that upp into the lande, +beyonde the river firste above mentioned, even to Hochelaga and Saguynay, +there is an ile environed aboute with that and other rivers, which beyonde +Saguenay entereth into twoo or three greate lakes; also that there is +founde a sea of freshe water, the heade and ende whereof there was never +man founde that had throughly searched, as farr as they have hearde say of +them of Saguenay, for they (as they signified unto us) had not bene there +themselves. + +5. Fyftly, in the ende of that seconde relation this postscripte is added +as a speciall pointe, to witt: that they of Canada say that it is the +space of a moone (that is to saye a moneth) to saile to a lande where +cynamon and cloves are gathered; and in the Frenche originall which I sawe +in the Kinges Library at Paris, in the Abbay of St Martines,(79) yt is +further put downe, that Donnaconna, the Kinge of Canada, in his barke had +traveled to that contrie where cynamon and cloves are had; yea, the names +whereby the savages call those twoo spices in their owne language are +there put downe in writinge. + +6. Sixtly, this passage is likewise proved by the double reporte of +Vasques de Coronado. For firste, he beinge at Ceuola, which standeth in +37. degrees and an halfe of northerly latitude within the lande, he had +this informacion of the people of that place; Fanno otto giornate verso le +campagne al mare di settentrione: whereby I gather that some parte of the +northerne sea ys within viij. daies journey of Ceuola. Againe, when he was +afterwardes at the towne of Quiuira, which is scituated by the sea side in +the latitude of 40. degrees, he founde there shippes, with maryners, which +had the picture of a birde, called Alcatrazzi, in silver upon their +bonnetts and on the forepartes of their shippes; which signified that they +were thirtie daies sailinge to that place; whence it is saied that they +muste nedes be of Cathaio or China, seinge that there is none but Spanishe +shippinge upon all the coaste of the backside of Noua Spania. + +7. Seaventhly, the people of Florida, at the River of May, in 30. degrees, +signified to John Ribault and his company, that they mighte saile in +boates from thence through the contrie by ryver to Ceuola in xx'ti. These +are the wordes, viz. As wee nowe demaunded of them concerninge the towne +of Ceuola (whereof some have written that it is not farr from thence, and +is scituated within the lande, and towardes the sea called Mare del Sur), +they shewed vs by signes, which wee understoode well ynoughe, that they +mighte goe thither with their boates, by rivers, in xx'ti. daies. + +8. Eightly, Don Antonio di Castillo, embassador to her Majestie from Henry +the Kinge of Portingale, tolde me here in London, the yere before his +departure, that one Anus Corteriall, Capitaine of the Ile of Tercera, in +the yere 1574. sente a shippe to discover the northwest passage, which, +arryvinge on the coaste of America in 57. degrees of latitude, founde a +greate entraunce very depe and broade, withoute impedimente of ise, into +which they passed above xx leagues, and founde it alwayes to tende +towardes the southe. The lande lay lowe and plaine on either side. They +woulde have gon further, but their victualls drawinge shorte, and beinge +but one shippe, they returned backe, with hope at another tyme to make a +full searche of the passage, whereof they sawe not small likelyhoode. + +9. Nynthly, Don Antonio, Kinge of Portingale,(80) shewed me in Paris this +present somer, a greate olde rounde carde (out of which Postellus tooke +the forme of his mappe), that had the northwest straite plainely sett +downe in the latitude of 57. degrees. + +10. Tenthly, there is a mightie large olde mappe in parchemente, made, as +yt shoulde seme, by Verarsanus, traced all alonge the coaste from Florida +to Cape Briton, with many Italian names, which laieth oute the sea, making +a little necke of lande in 40. degrees of latitude, much lyke the streyte +necke or istmus of Dariena. This mappe is nowe in the custodie of Mr. +Michael Locke. + +11. Eleventhly, there is an olde excellent globe in the Queenes privie +gallory at Westminster, which also semeth to be of Verarsanus makinge, +havinge the coaste described in Italian, which laieth oute the very selfe +same streite necke of lande in the latitude of 40. degrees, with the sea +joynninge harde on bothe sides, as it dothe on Panama and Nombre di Dios; +which were a matter of singuler importaunce, yf it shoulde be true, as it +is not unlikely. + +12. Twelvethly, the judgemente of Gerardus Mercator, that excellent +geographer, which his sonne, Rumolde Mercator, shewed me in a letter of +his, and drewe oute for me in writinge, of wise men is not lightly to be +regarded. These were his wordes: Magna tametsi pauca de noua nauigatione +scribis, quam miror ante multos annos non fuisse attentatam. Non enim +dubium est quin recta et breuis via pateat in occidentem Cathaium vsque. +In quod regnum, si recte nauigationem instituant, nobilissimas totius +mundi merces colligent, et multis gentibus adhuc idololatris Christi nomen +communicabunt. You write (saieth he to his sonne) greate matters, thoughe +very brefely, of the newe voyadge, whereat I wonder that it was not these +many yeres heretofore attempted; ffor there is no doubte but there is a +streighte and shorte waye open into the west, even to Cathaio. Into which +kingdome, if they governe their voyadge well, they shall gather the moste +noble marchandize of all the worlde, and shall make the name of Christe to +be knowen to many idolaters and heathen people. + +13. Hereunto agreeth the relation of Monsieur de Leau, an honest gent of +Morleux, in Britaine, which tolde me this springe, in the presence of +divers Englishe men at Paris, that a man of St. Malowe this laste yere +discovered the sea on the back side of Hochelaga. + +14. Moreover, the relation of David Ingram confirmeth the same; for, as he +avowcheth and hath put it downe in writinge, he traveled twoo daies in the +sighte of the North Sea. + +15. Againe, the prohibition which Kinge Philippe hath made, that none of +his pilotts shall discover to the northe wardes of 45. degrees, may seme +chefely to precede of these two causes: the one, leaste passinge further +to the northe, they mighte fall upon the open passage from Mare del Sur +into our Northerne Sea; the other, because they have not people ynoughe to +possesse and kepe the same, but rather in tyme shoulde open a gappe for +other nations to passe that waye. + +16. Lastly, I will ende with the earnest petition and constant assertion +of Ramusius, in his firste volume, fol. 374. where, speakinge of the +severall waies by which the spicery, bothe of olde and of late yeres, hath +bene broughte into Europe, he useth these speaches in the person of +another: Why doe not the princes (saieth he), which are to deale in these +affaires, sende furthe twoo or three colonies to inhabite the contrie, and +to reduce this savage nation to more civilitie, consideringe what a +frutefull soile it is, how replenished with all kinde of graine, howe it +is stored with all kinde of birdes and beastes, with such faire and +mightie rivers, that Capitaine Cartier and his companie in one of them +sailed upp an C. and xx'iiij. leagues, findinge the contrie peopled on +bothe sides in greate aboundaunce; and, moreover, to cause the gouernours +of those colonies to sende furthe men to discouer the northe landes aboute +Terra de Labrador, and west north west towardes the seas, which are to +saile to the contrie of Cathaio, and from thence to the ilandes of +Molucka. These are enterprises to purchase ymmortal praise, which the Lord +Antony de Mendoza, viceroy of Mexico, willinge to put in execution, sente +furthe his capitaines, bothe by sea and lande, upon the northwest of Noua +Spania, and discovered the kingdomes of the seaven cities aboute Ceuola; +and Franciscus Vasques de Coronado passed from Mexico by lande towardes +the northwest 2850. miles, in so moche as he came to the sea which lieth +betwene Cathaio and America, where he mett with the Cathaian shippes; and, +no doubte, if the Frenche men, in this their Nova Francia, woulde have +discovered upp further into the lande towardes the west northwest partes, +they shoulde have founde the sea and have sailed to Cathaio. + +Thus farr Ramusius. + +God, which doth all thinges in his due time, and hath in his hande the +hartes of all Princes, stirr upp the mynde of her Majestie at lengthe to +assiste her moste willinge and forwarde subjectes to the perfourmance of +this moste godly and profitable action; which was begonne at the chardges +of Kinge Henry the vij'th. her grandfather, followed by Kinge Henry the +Eighte, her father, and lefte, as it semeth, to be accomplished by her (as +the three yeres golden voyadge to Ophir was by Salomon), to the makinge of +her realme and subjectes moste happy, and her selfe moste famous to all +posteritie. Amen. + + + +Chap. XVIII. That the Queene of Englandes title to all the West Indies, or +at the leaste to as moche as is from Florida to the Circle articke, is +more lawfull and righte then the Spaniardes, or any other Christian +Princes. + + +To confute the generall claime and unlawfull title of the insatiable +Spaniardes to all the West Indies, and to prove the justenes of her +Majesties title and of her noble progenitours, if not to all, yet at +leaste to that parte of America which is from Florida beyonde the Circle +articke, wee are to sett downe in true order, accordinge to the juste +observation of tyme, when the West Indyes, with the ilandes and continent +of the same, were firste discouered and inhabited, and by what nation, and +by whome. Then are wee to answer in generall and particulerly to the moste +injurious and unreasonable donation graunted by Pope Alexander the Sixte, +a Spaniarde borne, of all the West Indies to the Kinges of Spaine and +their successors, to the greate prejudice of all other Christian Princes, +but especially to the domage of the Kinges of England. + +Ffor the firste pointe, wee of England have to shewe very auncient and +auctenticall chronicles, written in the Welshe or Brittishe tongue, +wherein wee finde that one Madock ap Owen Guyneth, a Prince of North +Wales, beinge wearye of the civill warres and domesticall dissentions in +his contrie, made twoo voyadges oute of Wales, and discovered and planted +large contries which he founde in the mayne ocean south westwarde of +Ireland, in the yere of our Lorde 1170.(81) This historie is also to be +seene in Englishe in printe, in the booke sett furthe this yere of the +Prince of Wales, dedicated to Sir Henry Sidney. And this is confirmed by +the language of some of those people that dwell upon the continent betwene +the Bay of Mexico and the Grande Bay of Newfoundelande, whose language is +said to agree with the Welshe in divers wordes and names of places, by +experience of some of our nation that have bene in those partes. By this +testimonie it appereth, that the West Indies were discovered and inhabited +322. yeres before Columbus made his firste voyadge, which was in the yere +1492. + +Secondly, the acceptation of Columbus his offer of the West Indies by +Kinge Henry the Seaventh, at the very firste, maketh moche for the title +of the Kinges of England, althoughe they had no former interest; which I +will here putt downe as I finde it in the eleventh chapiter of the +historie of Ferdinandus Columbus of the relation of the life and doinges +of his father: This practise, saieth he, of the Kinge of Portingale (which +was secretly to deprive him of the honour of his enterprise), beinge come +to the knowledge of the Admyrall, and havinge lately buried his wife, he +conceaved so greate hatred againste the citie of Lysbone and the nation, +that he determyned to goe into Castile with a younge sonne that he had by +his wife, called Diego Colon, which after his fathers deathe succeded in +his state. But fearinge, yf the Kinges of Castile also shoulde not +consente unto his enterprise, he shoulde be constrayned to begynne againe +to make some newe offer of the same to some other Prince, and so longe +tyme shoulde be spente therein, he sente into England a brother of his +which he had with him, named Bartholmewe Columbus. Nowe Bartholmewe +Columbus beinge departed for England, his fortune was to fall into the +handes of pyrates, which robbed him, and his other companions that were in +his shippe, of all that they had. By which occasion and meanes of his +povertie and sicknes, which cruelly afflicted him in a strange contrie, he +deferred for a longe space his embassage, till, havinge gotten upp a +little money by makinge of seacardes, he began to practize with Kinge +Henry the Seaventhe, the father of Kinge Henry the viij'th which nowe +reigneth; to whome he presented a general carde, wherein these verses were +written, which I will rather here put downe for their antiquitie then for +their elegancie: + +Terrarum quicunque cupis foeliciter oras +Noscere, cuncta decens docte pictura docebit +Quam Strabo affirmat, Ptolomaeus, Plinius atque +Isidorus: non vna tamen sententia cuique +Pingitur hic etiam nuper sulcata carinis +Hispanis Zona illa, prius incognita genti, +Torrida, quae tandem nunc est notissma multis. + +And somewhat more beneath he saied: + +_Pro authore sive pictore_ + +Janna cui patriae est nomen, cui Bartholomaeus +Columbus, de terra rubra, opus edidit istud +Londonijs, Anno Domini 1480 atque insuper anno +Octauo, decimaque die cum tertia mensis +Februarij. Laudes Christo cantentur abundae.(82) + +But to returne to the Kinge of England; I say that after he had sene the +generall carde, and that which the Admyrall Columbus offred unto him, he +accepted his offer with a cherefull countenaunce, and sente to call him +into England. These thinges beinge so, wee nede not to be our owne judges, +but are able to prove, as you see, by a forren testimonie of singuler +greate aucthoritie, that Christopher Columbus, beinge in Portingale, +before he wente into Castile, sente his brother Bartholmewe into England +to practise with Kinge Henry the Seaventh aboute the discovery of the West +Indies, and that his said brother made his generall seacarde of this +secrete voyadge in London, in the yere of our Lorde 1488. the xiijth. of +February, above foure yeres before Christopher was sett oute upon his +firste voyadge by the Princes of Spaine, Ferdinando and Isabella, which +was the thirde of Auguste, 1592. It appereth also, that the onely cause +for his slowe dispatche was his fallings into the handes of pyrates, which +spoiled him and his companie of all that they had; whereby he was inforced +a longe tyme to worke in London in makinge instrumentes and seacardes to +get somewhat aboute him, that he mighte come in some honest furniture to +the Kinges presence. Also, that there was no delaye nor wante of goodd +will of the Kinges parte to sett furthe the action, whoe willingly +condescended to all Columbus demaundes; as is further to be seene in the +60 chapiter of the same historie, where I reade, that Bartholmewe +Columbus, havinge agreed with the Kinge of England upon all capitulations, +and returninge into Spaine by Fraunce to fetche his brother, when he +hearde newes at Paris that he had concluded in the meane season with the +Kinge of Spaine, and was entred into the action for him, was not a little +vexed for his brothers abusinge the Kinge of England, which had so +curteously graunted all his requestes and accepted of his offer. But +Christofer, not receavinge so spedy aunswer as he hoped for from his +brother oute of England, by reason of his fallinge into pirates handes, as +is aforesaide, and not by reason of any slacknes or unwillingnes of the +Kinge, in the meane season, for feare of beinge prevented by the +Portingales, which once before in secrete manner had gon aboute to take +the honour of the action oute of his handes, was stirred, contrary to +honesty, to play on bothe handes, and to deal with the Princes of Spaine +before he had receaved the Kinge of Englandes resolucion. + +But leavinge this abuse offered to the Kinge of England either by +Christopher Columbus or the Kinges of Spaine, in takinge that enterprise +oute of his handes which was first sente to him, and never refused by him, +and to put the case that Columbus firste discovered parte of the ilandes +of Hispaniola and Cuba, yet wee will prove most plainely that a very +greate and large parte, as well of the continent as of the ilandes, were +firste discovered for the Kinge of England by Sebastian Gabote, an +Englishe man, borne in Bristoll, the sonne of John Gabote, a Venesian, in +the yere of our Lorde 1496; as an Italian gent, a greate philosopher and +mathematitian, witnesseth, which harde the same of his owne mouthe; and +there were many then also lyvinge, which wente with him in that voyadge, +which coulde have proved him a liar yf it had bene otherwise. These be the +very wordes of this gent, which be uttered to certen noblemen of Venice +upon the disputation concerninge the voyadges of the spicerye: Know ye not +(quoth he) to this effecte, to goe to finde the Easte Indies by the north +west, that which one of your citie hath done, which is so skilfull in the +arte of navigacion and cosmographie, that he hath not his like in Spaine +at this day? And his sufficiencie hath so greately advaunced him, that the +Kinge hath given him the oversighte of all the pilotts that saile to the +West Indies, so that withoute his licence they cannot meddle in this arte, +by reason whereof they call him the Graund Pilott. This was Segnior +Sebastian Gabote, which I wente to see, beinge myselfe in Cyvill certen +yeres paste, whome I founde to be a moste curteous and gentle person. +After he had made very moche of me, and geven me good entertainment, he +shewed me many singularities which he had; and amonge the rest, a greate +mappe of the worlde, wherein were marked and described all the particular +navigations as well of the Portingales as of the Castilians. And he +declared unto me, that, his father beinge departed from Venyce, he wente +to dwell in England for trade of marchandize, and caried him with him to +the citie of London, thoughe he were very younge; yet for all that not so +younge but that he had studied [letters] of humanitie and the sphere; +moreover, that his father died aboute the tyme that the newes came that +Christopher Colon had discovered the coaste of the West Indies, and there +was no other talke but of that in the Courte of Kinge Henry the vij'th. +which reigned then in England. Whereof every man saied, that yt was rather +a thinge devine then humaine, to have founde out that way never knowen +before, to goe by the west into the easte. This brute of Segnior Columbus +did so inflame my harte, that I determyned also to doe some notable +thinge. And knowinge by the reason of the sphere, that, in directinge my +course righte towarde the north weste, I shoulde shorten the way greately +to goe to the Easte Indies, without delaye I gave the Kinges Majestie to +understande of myne opinion, which was marveylously well pleased; and he +furnished me of twoo shippes, with all thinges necessarie; and this was in +the yere 1496. in the begynnynge of somer. And I began to saile towardes +the north west, thinckinge to finde no lande savinge that where Cathaio +is, and from thence to turne towardes the Indies. But after certaine +daies, I discouered lande which ronneth towardes the northe, wherewithall +I was excedingly agreved; notwithstandinge I ceassed not to ronne alonge +that coaste towardes the northe, to see yf I coulde finde any gulfe which +turned towardes the north weste, until I came to the heighte of 56. +degrees of our pole. (M250) Beinge there, I sawe that the coaste turned +towards the easte, and, beinge oute of hope to finde any straite, I turned +backe againe to searche out the said coaste towarde the equinoctiall, with +intention alwayes to finde some passage to the Indies; and in followinge +this coaste I sailed as farr as that parte which at this present they call +Florida; and nowe my victualls failinge and fallinge shorte, I sailed no +further, but lefte the coaste there, and sailed into England, where I was +no sooner arryved but I founde greate troubles of the people, that were +upp in armes by reason of the warres in Scotland; whereby the voyadge to +those partes was laide aside for that time, and had in no further +consideration. + +Upon this relation, Monsieur Popiliniere, being a Frencheman, in his +seconde booke, Des Trois Mondes, inferreth these speaches: This, then, was +that Gabote which firste discovered Florida for the Kinge of England, so +that the Englishe men have more righte thereunto then the Spaniardes, yf +to have righte unto a contrie, it sufficeth to have firste seene and +discovered the same. + +Howbeit, Gabota did more then see the contrie, for he wente on lande on +divers places, tooke possession of the same accordinge to his patente, +which was graunted to his father, John Gabot, to Lewes, himself, and +Sancius, his brethren, beinge to be sene in the Rolles and extant in +printe: and, moreover, he broughte home three of the savages of the +Indies, as Fabian, in his ancient Chronicle, dothe write, declaringe their +apparell, feedinge, and other manners, which, he saieth, he observed +himselfe in the Courte at Westminster, where he sawe twoo of them, two +yeres after they were broughte into England, in Englishe apparell. Nay, +that which is more, Gabota discovered this longe tracte of the firme lande +twoo yeres before Columbus ever sawe any parte of the continente thereof. +For the firste parte of the firme land, called Paria, and Bocca di +Dragone, that is to say, the Dragons Mouthe, beinge to the southe of the +iland of Hispaniola, was discovered by him in his thirde voyadge; which, +as Peter Martir de Angleria, which was one of the councell of the West +Indies, wryteth, was in the yere 1498; which is confirmed by Ferdinandus +Columbus, his owne sonne, which was with his father in the voyadge (as +Oviedo confesseth, libr. 19. cap 1.), and wrote a journall of that +voyadge, shewinge, in the 67. chapiter of his historie, that his father +firste sawe the firme lande the firste of Auguste in the yere 1498. But +Gabote made his greate discoverie in the yere 1496. as he testifieth in +his relation above mentioned. And the day of the moneth is also added in +his owne mappe, which is yn the Queenes privie gallorie at Westminster, +the copye whereof was sett oute by Mr. Clemente Adams, and is in many +marchantes houses in London. (M251) In which mappe, in the chapiter of +Newfoundelande, there in Latyn is put downe, besides the yere of our +Lorde, even the very day, which was the day of St. John Baptiste; and the +firste lande which they sawe they called Prima Visa or Prima Vista: and +Mr. Roberto Thorne, in his discourse to Doctor Ley, Kinge Henry the Eights +embassador to Charles the Emperour, affirmeth that his father and one +Hughe Elliott, of Bristoll, were the firste persons that descried the +lande. This case is so clere that the Spaniardes themselves, thoughe full +sore againste their willes, are constrained to yielde unto us therein. For +Franciscus Lopez de Gomera, in the 4. chapiter of his seconde booke of his +Generall Historie of the Indies, confesseth that Sebastian was the firste +discoverer of all the coaste of the West Indies, from 58. degrees of +northerly latitude to the heighte of 38. degrees towardes the +equinoctiall. He whiche broughte moste certeine newes of the contrie and +people of Baccalaos, saieth Gomera, was Sebastian Gabot, a Venesian, which +rigged up ij. shippes at the coste of Kinge Henry the Seaventh of England, +havinge greate desire to traficque for the spices as the Portingales did. +He carried with him CCC. men, and tooke the way towardes Island from +beyonde the Cape of Labrador, untill he founde himselfe in 58. degrees and +better. He made relation that, in the moneth of July, it was so colde and +the ise so greate, that he durste not passe any further; that the daies +were very longe, in a manner withoute any nighte, and for that shorte +nighte that they had it was very clere. Gabot, feelinge the colde, turned +towardes the west, refreshing himselfe at Baccalaos; and afterwardes he +sailed alonge the coaste unto 38. degrees, and from thence he shaped his +course to returne into England. + +Moreover, this Fraunces Lopez de Gomera acknowledgeth, in his firste booke +and xxjth. chapiter of the Generall Historie of the Indies, that Columbus +on his thirde voyadge, sett oute from St Lucar of Barameda, in Spaine, in +the ende of May, _anno_ 1497. In which thirde voyadge, at lengthe, after +any greate dangers by the way, he arryved in the firme lande of the +Indies, towardes the province called Paria, which all the Spanishe authors +confesse to have bene the firste of the continent that was discovered for +the Kinges of Spaine. + +So to conclude; whether wee beleve the testemonie of Peter Martir and +Ferdinandus Columbus, which affirme that Christopher Columbus discovered +the firme firste _in anno_ 1498. a greate and large tracte of the +continente of the Indies was discovered by Gabote and the Englishe above +twoo yeres before, to witt, in the yere 1496, in the moneths of June and +July; or whether wee be contente to yelde to Gomera, which saieth Columbus +sett furthe of the discovery of the firme lande, 1497; yet wee of England +are the firste discoverers of the continent above a yere and more before +them, to witt, 1496. or, as Clement Adams saith, 1494. in the chapiter of +Gabbotts mapp _De terra nova_, which is above three yeres before the +Spaniarde, or any other for the Kinges of Spaine, had any sighte of any +parte of the firme lande of the Indies. At leaste wise, by Gomera his owne +confession, from 37. degrees of northerly latitude to 38. towardes the +equinoctiall, we have beste righte and title of any Christian. As for the +discovery of John Ponce de Leon, beinge _in anno_ 1512. yt cannot be +prejudiciall to our title, as beinge made sixtene yeres after Gabotes +voyadge. + + + +Chap. XIX. An aunswer to the Bull of the Donation of all the West Indies +graunted to the Kinges of Spaines by Pope Alexander the VIth, whoe was +himselfe a Spaniarde borne. + + +Whereas Fraunces Lopez de Gomera, in the 19. chapiter of his firste booke +of his Generall Historie of the Indies, putteth downe that Pope Alexander +the VIth, of his proper will and of his owne mere motion, with the +consents of his Cardinalls, gave of his free grace to the Kinges of Spaine +all the iles and firme landes which they shoulde discover towardes the +west, and therewithall alledged the Bull itselfe; I aunswer, that no Pope +had any lawfull aucthoritie to give any such donation at all. For proofe +whereof, I say that, if he were no more than Christes vycar, as Gomera +calleth him in that place, then he must needes graunte that the vicar is +no greater then his Master. Nowe, our Saviour Christe, beinge requested +and entreated to make a lawfull devision of inheritaunce betwene one and +his brother, refused to do that, sayenge, Quis me constituit judicem inter +vos? Whoe made me a judge betwene you? What meaneth, then, the Pope, not +beinge spoken to nor entreated, of his owne proper will and of his owne +mere motion, to meddle in those matters that Christe in no wise, no, not +beinge thereunto instantly requested, woulde not have to deale in? Againe, +oure Saviour Christe confessed openly to Pilate, that his kingdome was not +of this worlde. Why, then, doth the Pope, that woulde be Christes +servaunte, take upon him the devision of so many kingdomes of the worlde? +If he had but remembred that which he hath inserted in the ende of his +owne Bull, to witt, that God is the disposer and distributer of kingdomes +and empires, he woulde never have taken upon him the devidinge of them +with his line of partition from one ende of the heavens to the other. The +historie of the poore boye whome God stirred upp to confounde and deride +the Spaniardes and Portingales, when they were devidinge the woride +betwene themselves alone, is so well knowen as I nede not stand to repeate +it. But it is the Popes manner alwayes to meddle, as in this matter, so in +other thinges, where they have nothinge to doe, and to intrude themselves +before they be called. They mighte rather call to mynde the counsell of +the goodd apostle, who tolde godly Tymothe, the Bisshoppe of Ephesus, that +no man that warreth intangleth himself with the affaires of this presente +life, because he woulde please Him that hath chosen him to be a souldier; +and then they woulde learne to kepe themselves within the lymites of that +vocation and ecclesiasticall function whereunto they are called; which +ecclestiasticall function hath nothinge to doe with absolute donation and +devidinge of mere temporalties and earthly kingdomes. St. Chrisostome, in +his dialogue De dignitate sacerdotali, saieth that the mynisterie is a +chardge geven by God to teache withoute armes or force, and that the same +is no power to give or to take kingdomes, nor to make lawes for the +publique governemente. St. Hillary writes as moche to the Emperour +Constantine againste Auxentius, Bisshoppe of Milan. Our Saviour Christe +himselfe saieth to his desciples, that while they were in the worlde, they +shoulde be broughte before kinges and pollitique magistrates for his names +sake. So then they shoulde not be judges and magistrates themselves, +especially in the devisions of kingdomes; and, to leave all spirituall men +an example, he paid tribute and toll for himselfe and Peter, and submitted +himselfe and his apostles under the civill magistrate and politique +governemente; yet the Pope, whoe saieth that he is Peters successor, will +be a disposer of civill causes and temporall domynions. The apostle +saieth, Romaines the 13: Let every soule be submitted unto the higher +powers. Nowe, if the Popes will not beleve the worde of God withoute the +exposition of the Fathers of the Churche, at leaste let them beleve St +Chrisostome, and give eare to that which he hath written upon this place: +That these thinges be comaunded to all men, saieth he, bothe to prestes +and monckes, and not onely to secular or laymen, the Apostle declareth, +even in the very begynnynge, when he saieth in this manner: Let every +soule be subjecte unto their higher powers, thoughe thou were an apostle, +thoughe thou were an evangeliste, thoughe thou were a prophet, or thoughe +thou were any other whatsoever. For obedience dothe nothinge hinder +godlines. + +But the Popes woulde prove that they may give and bestowe kingdomes upon +whome they please, by Samuels example that annoynted Hazaell Kinge of +Siria insteade of Benhadad, and Jehu Kinge of Israeli insteade of Jehoram; +as, also, by the example of Jehoada, the highe preste, that put the Queene +Athalia to deathe, and placed Joas, the younge sonne of Ochosias in the +kingdome. All those examples make nothinge at all in the worlde for them; +for neither Samuell, nor Elias, nor Elizeus did any thinge in that matter +withoute an expresse commaundement and all circumstances from the mouthe +of God himselfe, as appereth moste evidently by their severall histories +in the Bible. Samuell also did his comission full sore againste his will; +and Elias and Elizeus, with greate feare of their lyves. As for Athalia, +she was an usurper, and had cruelly murdered as many of the lawfull +inheritours of the kingdome as she coulde possibly lay handes on; and +therefore Jehoiada, the highe preste, not of his owne absolute +aucthoritie, but by the helpe of the Kinges officers and joyfull consente +of all the people, caused her moste justely to be deposed and put to +deathe. He was also uncle to the younge Kinge, by mariage of his wife, +Jebosheba, which was sister to Ahasai, the father of the younge kinge, and +therefore bounde, in conscience and affinitie, to helpe him to his righte +and succour him in his mynoritie. Nowe, when the Popes have the like +excellent spirite of prophesie and the like chardges and expresse +commaundementes from Gods owne mouthe, in the behalf of some one by name +againste some one which God by name woulde have deposed, then they may +ymitate them in pronouncinge unto them that God will rente their kingdomes +from this or that kinge for his synnes. But none of the Prophetts made +bulls or donations in their palaces, under their handes and seales and +dates, to bestowe many kingdomes, which they never sawe or knewe, nor what +nor howe large they were, or, to say the truthe, whether they were extant +_in rerum natura_, as the Pope hath done in gevinge all the West Indies to +the Kinges of Spaine. He shoulde firste have don as the prophetts dyd; +that is, he shoulde firste have gon himselfe and preached the worde of God +to those idolatrous kinges and their people; and then, if they woulde not, +by any meanes, have repented, he mighte have pronounced the severe and +heavie judgemente of God againste them, shewinge oute of the worde of God +that one kingdome is translated from another for the sinnes of the +inhabitantes of the same, and that God in his justice, woulde surely +bringe some nation or other upon them, to take vengeaunce of their synnes +and wickednes. And thus moche not onely Popes, but also any other godly +and zealous bisshope or mynister, may doe, beinge called thereunto by God +extraordinarily, or havinge the ordinarye warrante of his worde. + +Yea, but the Popes can shewe goodd recordes that they have deposed +Emperors, that they have translated empires from one people to another, as +that of the Easte unto the Germaines, and that they have taken kingdomes +from one nation and geven them to another. In deede, in some respectes, +they have done so. But how? They never gave that which was in their +actuall possession, yf by any meanes possible they mighte have kepte it +themselves. It is an easie matter to cutt large thonges, as wee say, of +other men's hides, and to be liberall of other men's goodds. Neither ys it +any marvaile thoughe (as Gomera saieth) the Pope gave all the West Indies +of his free grace to the Kinge of Spaine, for they never coste him a +penye. But he that will be in deede and truthe liberall, he muste give of +his owne, and not of other mens. For to take from one that which is his, +to give it to another to whom it is not due, ys plaine injurie and no +liberalitie, thoughe the gifte were bestowed upon him that were in nede. +For as one saieth: Eripere alteri fraudulenter quod alteri des +misericorditer, iniustitia quidem est et non eleemosyna--to take from one +fraudulently to give to another mercifully, is no almes nor charitie, but +plaine iniquitie. The Pope shoulde rather have sent into the West Indies +store of godly pastors of his owne coste freely, then to have geven them +and their gooddes wrongfully to be eaten upp and devoured of such +insatiable and gredy wolves. He should have remembred the worde of our +Saviour, whoe saieth: Beatius est dare quam accipere--it is a blessed +thinge to give rather then to receave. The Popes say they gave Ireland to +Kinge Henry the Seconde and his successors; and indeede they have don it +in wordes. But when gave they that unto him? Forsoothe after he had faste +footinge in it, and when Dermutius, the King of Leynester, had firste +offred to make the Kinge his heire. And for all their donation, yf the +Kinge had not by his force more then by their gifte holpe himselfe, the +Popes donation had stoode him in small stede; neither did the Kinges of +Ireland admitt and allowe of the Popes donation. If they had, they woulde +never have rebelled so ofte againste the Crowne of England. To conclude +this pointe, thoughe wee confesse that the Popes have don this or that, +yet yt is no goodd argumente to say that they did it, and therefore it is +lawfull, unless they coulde shewe that they did it rightfully. De facto +constat, de jure non constat. And they themselves are driven to confess, +that their medlinge on this sorte with kingdomes ys not directly, but +indirectly. But suche indirecte dealinge is warranted neither by lawe of +God nor men. + +Nowe to the donation itselfe, wee are firste to consider, whoe it was that +was the author thereof; secondly, unto whome it was made; thirdly, what +were the causes and inducementes that moved the Pope thereunto; fourthly, +the fourme and manner of donation; fyftly, the inhibition of all other +Christian Princes, and the penaltie of all them that shoulde doe the +contrarye; lastly, the recompence of the Kinges of Spaine to the Sea of +Rome for so greate a gifte. + +1. Touchinge the firste, the author hereof was Pope Alexander the vith +whoe, as Platina and Onuphrius and Bale doe write, was himselfe a +Spaniarde, and borne in Valencia, of the familie called Borgia, and +therefore no marvell thoughe he were ledd by parcialitie to favour the +Spanishe nation, thoughe yt were to the prejudice and domage of all +others; whiche foule faulte of his may hereby appeare, that havinge in all +the tyme of his Popedome created sixe and thirtie Cardinalles, of those +xxxvj. he made xviij. to witt the one halfe, Spaniardes, as Bale dothe +testifie, writinge of his life. Nowe let any man be judge, whether that +were extreame parcialitie and ambition, to make Spaine equal in that +pointe with all the rest of Christendome. No marvaile therefore, thoughe +as in this, so in his donation, he was beyonde all reason caried away with +blynde affection to his nation; which faulte of his had bene more to be +borne withall, yf it had bene in a private or small matter. But in this so +generall and comon cause, yt cannot choose but be altogether intollerable. +If any man liste to see this man painted oute further in his colours, let +him reade John Bale in his Eighte Century, where he shall finde so many of +his badd partes, as a man woulde thinke he coulde not be a fitt man to +make a goodd and uprighte judge in so weightie a matter as this. + +2. The persons to whome he made this donation were Ferdinando and +Isabella, Princes of Spaine, to whome, and to their heires and successors +for ever, he confirmed the same, excludinge all other Christian princes. +These princes, thoughe otherwise very vertuous and commendable, yet at the +tyme of the makinge of this donation, were more unable then divers other +Kinges of Christendome to accomplishe and bringe the same to effecte, as +beinge greately ympoverished with the warres of Granadae, so farr furthe +that they were constrained to seke for helpe of Kinge Henry the VIIth. of +England, to subdue the Moores in their owne contrie. Yea, Queene Isabella +was so poore and bare that she was faine to offer her owne jewells to +gage, to borowe money to sett furthe Columbus in his firste voyadge, as it +is to be seene in the 14. chapiter of the Historie of Ferdinandus +Columbus, his owne sonne, It is also well knowen that the Spaniardes, for +wante of people of their owne contrie, have not bene able nowe, in the +space of xx'iiii. and xij. yeres, to inhabite a thirde or fourthe parte of +those excedinge large and waste contries, which are as greate as all +Europe and Africke. + +3. The inducementes that moved his Holines to graunt these unequall +donations unto Spaine were, firste, (as he saieth) his singuler desire and +care to have the Christian religion and Catholicque faithe exalted, and to +be enlarged and spredd abroade throughoute the worlde, especially in his +daies, and that the salvation of soules shoulde be procured of every one, +and that the barbarous nations shoulde be subdued and reduced to the +faithe, &c. To this I aunswer that, if he had ment as in deede he saieth, +he shoulde not have restrayned this so greate and generall a worke, +belonginge to the duetie of all other Christian princes, unto the Kinges +of Spaine onely, as thoughe God had no servauntes but in Spaine; or as +thoughe other Christian kinges then lyvinge had not as greate zeale and +meanes to advaunce Gods glory as they; or howe mente he that every one +shoulde put their helpinge hande to this worke, when he defended all other +Christian Princes, in paine of his heavie curse and excomunication, to +meddle in this action, or to employe their subjectes, thoughe yt were to +the conversion of the inhabitauntes in those partes. And whereas, to +colour this his donation, he addeth, that the Kinges of Spaine had bene at +greate chardge in that discoverie in respect whereof he was induced to +deale so franckly with them, yt is evident that the Bull was graunted in +the yere 1493. the iiij. of the moneth of May, at what time Columbus had +made but one voyadge, wherein he was furnished onely with one small shippe +and twoo little caravells, and had, in all his companie, but foure score +and tenne men, and the whole voyadge stoode the Kinge of Spaine in 2500. +crownes only. So these 2500. crownes were the greate chardges that the +Pope speaketh of, that induced him to graunte so large a donation; for +that was the uttermoste that Columbus desired, as is to be redd in the 14. +chapiter of his owne sonnes historie. + +Moreover, where the Pope confesseth he was informed, before the donation +of his Bull, that the Kinges of Spaine had purposed, by the aide of God, +to subdue and reduce unto the faithe all those landes and Ilandes, with +their inhabitantes, whiche Columbus had founde in his firste discovery, in +comendinge highly of this their intention, he semeth to confesse that they +mighte have pursued that godly action very lawfully withoute makinge of +him privy to their enterprice, which they did not in their firste sendinge +furthe Columbus. And with what righte he builded and lefte men in +Hispaniola at the firste, before the Popes donation, with the selfe same +righte he mighte have subdued all that he shoulde afterwardes discover. +So, then, the Popes gifte was of no more force, then of that which they +mighte have chalenged by their former righte and interest of discoverie. +And as for their former zeale and resolution to publishe the Christian +faithe in those quarters, which the Pope confesseth to have bene in them +before his donation, whoe seeth not that he stirres them uppe to nothinge, +but to that which he acknowledged to have bene in them already; and so he +did nothinge but _actum agere_. + +Againe; in that he saieth, that in no other respecte, but moved onely by +his mere and francke liberaltie, _and for certeine secrete causes_, he +gave unto them all the ilandes and firme landes which already have bene +founde, and which shoulde afterwardes be founde, which were then +discovered or afterwardes to be discovered, towardes the West and the +Southe, drawinge a straighte line from the pole articke to the pole +antarticke, whether the ilandes or firme landes founde or to be founde +were towardes the Indies or towardes any other quarter; intendinge, +nevertheles, that this line be distant an hundred leagues towardes the +West and the Southe from the iles which are comonly called the Azores, or +those of Cape Verd: to this wee aunswer, that here wee are firste to +consider that yt was no marvell that his Holines, beinge a Spaniarde +borne, sett aparte all other respectes of justice and equitie, and of his +mere motion and francke liberalitie was ready to raise and advaunce his +owne nation, with doinge secrete wronge and injurie as moche as in him +laye, and more, unto all other Princes of Christendome. For what els can +those wordes importe, that he did it also for certen secrete causes, but +give us juste cause to suspect that there wanted uprighte, indifferent, +and sincere dealinges? And surely, if he had meant uprightly, he woulde +have delte more plainely; for truths seketh no secrete comers. But if you +will have me to reveale those secrete causes, to say as the thinge was, +they were nothinge else but the feare and jelousie that he had, that Kinge +Henry the vij'th. of England, with whome Bartholmewe Columbus had bene to +deale in this enterprice, and even aboute this time had concluded with the +Kinge upon all pointers and articles, whoe even nowe was readie to sende +him into Spaine to call his brother Christopher into England, shoulde put +a foote into this action; which, if he had don, he shoulde bothe have +share with the Spaniardes in the profitt, and greatly ecclips their honour +and glorie. Also, he coulde not choose but be privie to the longe +conference that Christopher Columbus had before time with the Kinge of +Portingale, and offer which he made firste of all to the said Kinge of +this discovery, whoe thoughe at the firste delte doubly with Columbus, and +sent other to finde oute that thinge which Columbus offered, yet, they +missinge of their purpose, the Kinge of Portingale woulde have employed +Columbus, and delte effectually with him to that ende; but he conceavinge +a greate displeasure againste the Kinge and his nation for his secrete +seekinge to defraude him of his honour, and benefite of his offer, stole +prively oute of his realme into Castile. But the Pope, fearinge that +either the Kinge of Portingale mighte be reconciled to Columbus, or that +he mighte be drawen into England, by interposinge of his usurped +aucthoritie, thoughte secretly, by his unlawfull division, to defraude +England and Portingale of that benefite. Loe, these were indeede those +secrete causes, sodenly, withoute makinge the other Kinges privie, to make +his generall and universall donation of all the West Indies to the Kinges +of Spaine, by drawinge a lyne of partition from one pole unto another, +passinge a hundred leagues westwarde of the Iies of Azores; which +division, howe God caused to be deryded by the mouthe of a poor, simple +childe, Fraunces Lopez de Gomera, one of the Spaniardes owne +historiographers, dothe specially note in manner followinge: Before I +finishe this chapiter (saieth he), I will recite, to recreate the reader, +that which happened, upon this partition, to the Portingales. As Fraunces +de Melo, Diego Lopes of Sequeria, and others, came to this assembly, and +passed the river by Quidiana, a little infant that kepte his mothers +clothes, which she had washt and honge abroade to drye, demaunded of them, +whether they were those that shoulde come to devide the worlde with the +Emperour; and as they answered yea, he tooke up his shirte behinde and +shewed them his buttocks, sayenge unto them: Drawe your lyne throughe the +middest of this place. This, saieth the author, was published in contempte +all abroade, bothe in the towne of Badayos and also in the assemblye of +these committies. The Portingales were greately angrie therewithall, but +the rest turned yt to a jest and laughed yt oute. + +But what wise man seeth not that God by that childe laughed them to +scorne, and made them ridicullous and their partition in the eyes of the +worlde and in their owne consciences, and caused the childe to reprove +them, even as the dombe beaste, speakinge with mans voyce, reproved the +foolishnes of Balam the Prophett! + +4. The fourthe pointe which I purpose to touche, is the forme and manner +of the stile of the donation itselfe, after a large preface and connynge +preamble; and that begynneth in this manner: Wee therefore, by the +aucthoritie of God Almightie, which is geven to us in the person of +Saincte Peter, and which wee enjoye in this worlde as the vicar of Jhesus +Christe, give unto you all the ilandes and firme landes, with their +seigniories, cities, castells, &c. In which repetition of his donation the +seconde time for failinge, he woulde shewe unto the world by what +aucthoritie and warrant he gave away from all the Indians their landes, +contries, seigniories, cities, castells, places, villages, righte, +jurisdictions, and all other appurtenances and thinges belonginge to the +same, to the Kinges of Spaine onely, and to their heires and successors +for ever. This usurped aucthoritie, as I have plainely confuted and denied +in begynnynge, so nowe, in a worde or twoo, I will shewe, that never gave +unto the Popes any suche aucthoritie. (M252) The chefest and greatest +aucthoritie that ever was geven by Christe to Peter, is mentioned in the +16. chapiter of St. Mathewe, where Christe saieth unto him: I will give +unto thee the keyes of the Kingdome of heaven, and whatsoever thou shalte +binde in earthe shalbe bounde in heaven, and whatsoever thou shalte loose +in earthe shalbe loosed in heaven. St. Hierome, expoundinge of this place, +saieth, that the priestes or bisshops duetie and aucthoritie of the keyes +to binde or loose, is to knowe and declare by the holy Scripture, and by +the judgemente of the Catholicque Churche, where and whoe he is that hath +offended againste the will of God, and whoe beinge once a Christian is +fallen from the societie, or gone astraye oute of the pathe and waye of +the Churche. These are the trewe keyes and twoo swordes which God hath put +into prestes handes. And Peter Lombard, the Master of the Sentences, one +of their owne doctors, is of St. Hieromes opinion. And what aucthoritie in +the place above recited Christe comitted unto Peter, the same gave he also +unto all the rest of his Apostles, John 20. verse 21. sayenge to them all: +Whoesoever synnes yee remitte, they are remitted unto them; and whoesoever +synnes yee retaine, they are retained. But that either Peter or any of the +Apostles did teache or affirme, that they had aucthoritie to give awaye +kingdomes of heathen Princes to those that were so farr from havinge any +interest in them, that they knewe not whether there were any suche +contries in the worlde or noe, I never reade nor hearde, nor any mane +else, as I verely beleve. Which moste injuste and wrongfull dealinge of +the Pope was notably confuted by Atabalipa, beinge an infidell. For after +Fryer Vincent of Valverde, of the companie and traine of Picar, had made +an oration to him, the some whereof was that he shoulde become a +Christyan, and that he shoulde obey the Pope and the Emperor, to whome the +Pope had geven his kingdome, Atabalipa, beinge greately insensed, replied, +that, seeinge he was nowe free, he woulde not become tributarye, nor +thincke that there was any greater lorde then himselfe; but that he was +willinge to be the Emperor's frende and to have his acquaintaunce, for +that he muste nedes be some greate lorde that sente so many armies abroade +into the worlde. He aunswered, moreover, that he woulde not in any wise +obey the Pope, seinge he gave away that which belonged to another, moche +lesse that he woulde leave his kingdome, that came unto him by +inheritaunce, to one which he had never seene in his life. And whereas +Fryer Vincent, beinge displeased at his replye, was gladd to seeke any +waye to wreake his anger upon him, insomoche as when Atabalipa lett his +portesse fall to the grounde, he was so testye that he sett Picar and his +souldiers forwardes, cryenge, Vengeaunce, Christians, vengeaunce! give the +chardge upon them; whereby many Indians, withoute resistaunce, or any +stroke stricken on their partes, were moste pitefully murdred and +massacred, and Atabalipa himselfe taken, and afterwardes trecherously put +to deathe; this Frier himselfe, by Gods juste iudgement, was afterwardes +beaten to deathe with clubbes by the inhabitantes of Puna, as he fledd +from Don Diego de Almagre, as Fraunces Lopez de Gomera precisely and of +purpose noteth, libro 5. cap. 85. of his Generall Historie of the Indies; +and, besides him, all the reste of the chefe that were the executioners of +his rashe counsell, and of the Popes Donation, came to moste wretched and +unfortunate endes, as the aforesaide author there setteth downe in twoo +severall chapiters of Considerations, as he calleth them. + +Moreover, since the fourme of the donation ronneth not absolutely, but +with this condition and chardge moste straightly enjoyned, viz., that the +Kinges of Spaine shoulde sende thither sober and godly men, and cause the +inhabitantes of those contries discovered or to be discovered to be +instructed in the Catholique faithe, and noseled in goodd manners, and +that they shoulde carefully applye themselves thereunto; wee answer, that +these conditions have bene wonderfully neglected, and that neither the +people have bene carefully instructed in relligion nor manners, and +consequently that the conditions beinge not perfourmed the donation oughte +of righte to be voide. For the Kinges of Spaine have sent suche helhoundes +and wolves thither as have not converted, but almoste quite subverted +them, and have rooted oute above fiftene millions of reasonable creatures, +as Bartholmewe de Casas, the Bisshoppe of Chiapa in the West Indies, a +Spaniarde borne, dothe write at large in a whole volume of that argumente. +And Gonsalvo de Ouiedo, another of their owne historiographers, and +Capitaine of the Castle of Sancto Domingo in Hispaniola, affirmeth the +like: For there hath Spaniardes come into these contries, saieth he, +which, havinge lefte their consciences and all feare of God and men +behinde them, have plaied the partes not of men, but of dragons and +infidells, and, havinge no respecte of humanitie, have bene the cause that +many Indians, that peradventure mighte have bene converted and saved, are +deade by divers and sondrie kindes of deathes. And althoughe those people +had not bene converted, yet if they had bene lett to live, they mighte +have bene profitable to your Majestie and an aide unto the Christians, and +certaine partes of the lande shoulde not wholy have bene disinhabited, +which by this occasion are altogether in a manner dispeopled. And they +that have bene the cause of suche destruction call this contrie thus +dispeopled and wasted, the contrie conquered and pacified; but I call it, +quoth Gonsaluo, the contrie which is destroyed and ruyned; yea, so farr +have they bene of from drawinge the Indians to the likinge of +Christianitie and true Relligion, that the sentence of the Apostle may +moste truly be verified of them, whoe saieth: The name of God is +blasphemed amonge the Gentiles throughe you; ffor proofe whereof you shall +not nede to reade but that which Peter Benzo of Milan hath written, whoe +remayned in these Indies, and served in the warres with the Spaniardes +againste the Indians for the space of fourtene yeres. This Benzo saieth +that the Indians, not havinge studied logicke, concluded very pertinently +and categorically, that the Spaniardes, which spoiled their contrie, were +more dangerous then wilde beastes, more furious then lyons, more fearefull +and terrible then fire and water, or any thinge that is moste outeragious +in the worlde. Some also called them the fome of the sea, others gave them +names of the beastes which are moste cruell and lyvinge of praye which +they have in their contrie. There were some likewise that called them +Tuira, as one would say, the Devills goodd grace. + +Those thinges beinge thus, whoe seeth not that the Pope is frustrated of +the ende which he intended in his Donation, and so the same oughte not to +take effecte? + +5. Ffiftly, yf yt be true and that the Pope mente goodd earnest, that all +Emperours and Kinges which should sende their subjectes or others to +discover withoute the Kinge of Spaines leave shoulde be excommunicated by +him, why did he not first excommunicate Kinge Henry the Seaventh for +sendinge furthe Sebastian Gabota with three hundred Englishemen, whoe by +Gomera his owne confession, discovered from 58. degrees in the northe to +38. degrees towardes the equinoctiall? Why did he not the like to Kinge +Henry the Eighte for sendinge to discover westwarde, in the xixth. yere of +his reigne, while he was yet in obedience to the Churche of Rome? Why was +he not offended and incensed againste Queene Mary, whoe suffered her +subjectes, in the yere 1556. to seke oute, by the northeaste, the way to +Cathaio and China, which are bothe within the pretended lymites of his +donation, as John Gaetan and other Spaniardes doe write? Why did he not +exercise his censures ecclesiasticall againste the Kinge of Ffraunce, +Fraunces the Firste, for sendinge furthe Verarsanus twise or thrise, +Iaques Cartier twise, and Robervall once, towardes the southwest and +northwest? Why was not Henry the Seconde of Fraunce excomunicated for +sendinge Villegagnon to inhabite in Brasill under the tropicke of +Capricorne? Or Charles the IXth. for aidinge Ribault firste, and after +Ladoniere, and a thirde tyme Ribault, to fortifie and inhabite in Florida? +Or why did he not thunder againste Emanuell, Kinge of Portingale, for +sufferinge Gasper Corterealis twise to seke to finde oute the northweste +passage, and one of his brothers another time afterwarde? Or wherefore did +he not openly rebuke the Kinge of Denmarke for sufferinge his subjecte, +John Scolno, a Dane, in the yere 1500. to seke the Straighte by the +northweste, of whome Gemma Frisius and Hieronymo Giraua, a Spaniarde, make +mention? Or what shoulde be the reason, that all these kinges of England, +Fraunce, Portingale and Denmarke, beinge otherwise all at these times in +obedience of the Churche of Rome, shoulde, withoute consente as yt were, +disanull and neuer make accompte of this Bull of the Pope? which thinge +doubtles they woulde never have don, yf they had bene fully perswaded in +their consciences, that if any Prince or Emperour, of what estate or +condition soever, shoulde attempte the contrary, as it is in the +conclusion of the said Bull, he shoulde be assured to incurr the +indignation of Almightie God and of the Apostles St. Peter and St. Pawle. +But nowe, seinge all the kinges aforesaide sente all their subjectes to +discover beyonde the Popes partition lyne withoute the leave or permission +of the Spaniarde, they seme with one accorde to testifie unto the worlde, +that they made no reconynge of the breache of that Bull, as of an acte +moste unjuste, moste unreasonable, and moste prejudiciall to all other +Christian princes of the worlde. + +Againe; yt were small charitie in the Popes to curse those Princes that +have bene or are willinge to employe their treasures and people in +advauncinge the honour and glory of God, and the lawfull enrichinge and +benefite of their people. And whatsoeuer Pope shoulde excommunicate or +curse any Christian prince for seekinge to reduce to the knowledge of God +and to civill manners those infinite multitudes of infidells and heathen +people of the West Indies, which the Spaniardes in all this time have not +so moche as discovered, moche less subdued or converted, his curse woulde +lighte upon his owne heade, and, to those which he cursed undeservedly, +woulde be turned to a blessinge. + +To be shorte; thoughe Pope Alexander the vj'th by his unequall division, +hath so puffed upp and inflamed with pride his moste ambitious and +insatiable contrymen, that they are growen to this high conceite of +themselves, that they shall shortly attaine to be lordes and onely +seigniors of all the earthe, insomoche as Gonsaluo de Ouiedo sticketh not +to write to Charles the Emperour, sayenge: God hath geven you these Indies +_accio che vostra Maiesta sia universale et unico monarcha del mondo_--to +the intente that your Majesty shoulde be the universall and onely monarch +of the world; yet God that sitteth in heaven laugheth them and their +partitions to scorne, and he will abase and bringe downe their proude +lookes, and humble ther faces to the duste; yea, he will make them, at his +goodd time and pleasure, to confesse that the earthe was not made for them +onely; as he hath already shewed unto the Portingales, which, not longe +since, takinge upon them to devide the worlde with lynes, doe nowe beholde +the line of Gods juste judgmente drawen over themselves and their owne +kingdome and possessions. And nowe, no doubte, many of them remember that +the threateninge of the prophet hath taken holde upon them, whoe +pronounceth an heavie woe againste all suche as spoile, because they +themselves shall at length be spoiled. + +6. Finally, to come to the sixte and laste pointe, yf you consider what +recompense the Kinges of Spaine have made to the Popes for this so greate +a benefite bestowed upon them, you shall easely see and acknowledge with +me, that they were either moste ungrateful, or, which is moste likely, +that they never thoughte that they helde the Indies as the Popes gifte +unto them, or that their title unto those regions depended upon his +francke almes or liberalitie; ffor, if they had don soe, they coulde have +done no lesse but have geven him the presentation of all archebisshopricks +and bisshoprickes, and other greate ecclesiastical promotions in +recompence of their former and large curtesie, wherein they have don the +flatt contrary, reservinge onely unto themselves the presentation and +patronage of all the archebisshopricks and bisshopricks that they have +erected in the West Indies; ffor, as Gomera saieth in his 6. booke and 23. +chapiter of his Generall Historie of the Indies, the Kinge of Spaine is +patrone of all the archebisshopricks, bysshoprickes, dignities, and +benefices of the West Indies, and so he onely appointeth and presenteth +them, so that he is absolute lorde of the Indies. + +This argueth that the Kinges of Spaine never made any greate accompte of +the Popes Donation, but onely to blinde the eyes of the worlde with the +sea of Rome; ffor doubtles, if they had acknowledged their tenure to +depende, as I saied, of the Popes mere liberalitie, they woulde have don +otherwise, and woulde have requited them farr otherwise then by excludinge +them quite oute, and makinge themselves absolute patrones of all +ecclesiasticall dignities whatsoever. + + + +Chap. XX. A briefe collection of certaine reasons to induce her Majestie +and the state to take in hande the westerne voyadge and the plantinge +there. + + +1. The soyle yeldeth, and may be made to yelde, all the severall +comodities of Europe, and of all kingdomes, domynions, and territories +that England tradeth withe, that by trade of marchandize cometh into this +realme. + +2. The passage thither and home is neither to longe nor to shorte, but +easie, and to be made twise in the yere. + +3. The passage cutteth not nere the trade of any prince, nor nere any of +their contries or territories, and is a safe passage, and not easie to be +annoyed by prince or potentate whatsoever. + +4. The passage is to be perfourmed at all times of the yere, and in that +respecte passeth our trades in the Levant Seas within the Straites of +Juberalter, and the trades in the seas within the Kinge of Denmarkes +Straite, and the trades to the portes of Norwey and of Russia, &c.; for as +in the south weste Straite there is no passage in somer by lacke of +windes, so within the other places there is no passage in winter by yse +and extreme colde. + +5. And where England nowe for certen hundreth yeres last passed, by the +peculiar comoditie of wolles, and of later yeres by clothinge of the same, +hath raised it selfe from meaner state to greater wealthe and moche higher +honour, mighte, and power then before, to the equallinge of the princes of +the same to the greatest potentates of this parte of the worlde: it cometh +nowe so to passe, that by the greate endevour of the increase of the trade +of wolles in Spaine and in the West Indies, nowe daily more and more +multiplienge, that the wolles of England, and the clothe made of the same, +will become base, and every day more base then other; which, prudently +weyed, yt behoveth this realme, yf it meane not to returne to former olde +meanes and basenes, but to stande in present and late former honour, +glorye, and force, and not negligently and sleepingly to slyde into +beggery, to foresee and to plante at Norumbega or some like place, were it +not for any thing els but for the hope of the vent of our woll indraped, +the principall and in effecte the onely enrichinge contynueinge naturall +comoditie of this realme. And effectually pursueinge that course, wee +shall not onely finde on that tracte of lande, and especially in that +firme northwarde (to whome warme clothe shalbe righte wellcome), an ample +vente, but also shall, from the north side of that firme, finde oute +knowen and unknowen ilandes and domynions replenisbed with people that may +fully vent the aboundance of that our comoditie, that els will in fewe +yeres waxe of none or of small value by forreine aboundaunce, &c.; so as +by this enterprice wee shall shonne the ymmynent mischefe hanginge over +our heades, that els muste nedes fall upon the realme, without breache of +peace or sworde drawen againste this realme by any forreine state; and not +offer our auncient riches to scornefull neighboures at home, nor sell the +same in effecte for nothinge, as wee shall shortly, if presently it be not +provaided for. The increase of the wolles of Spaine and America is of +highe pollicie, with greate desire of our overthrowe, endevoured; and the +goodnes of the forren wolles our people will not enter into the +consideration of, nor will not beleve aughte, they be so sotted with +opinion of their owne; and, yf it be not foresene and some such place of +vent provided, farewell the goodd state of all degrees in this realme. + +6. This enterprise may staye the Spanishe Kinge from flowinge over all the +face of that waste firme of America, yf wee seate and plante there in +time, in tyme I say, and wee by plantinge shall lett him from makinge more +shorte and more safe returnes oute of the noble portes of the purposed +places of our plantinge, then by any possibilitie he can from the parte of +the firme that nowe his navies by ordinary courses come from, in this that +there is no comparison betwene the portes of the coastes that the Kinge of +Spaine dothe nowe possesse and use, and the portes of the coastes that our +nation is to possesse by plantinge at Norumbega and on that tracte faste +by, more to the northe and northeaste, and in that there is from thence a +moche shorter course, and a course of more temperature, and a course that +possesseth more contynuance of ordinary windes, then the present course of +the Spanishe Indian navies nowe dothe. And England possessinge the +purposed place of plantinge, her Majestie may, by the benefete of the +seate, havinge wonne goodd and royall havens, have plentie of excellent +trees for mastes, of goodly timber to builde shippes and to make greate +navies, of pitche, tarr, hempe, and all thinges incident for a navie +royall, and that for no price, and withoute money or request. Howe easie a +matter may yt be to this realme, swarminge at this day with valiant +youthes, rustinge and hurtfull by lacke of employment, and havinge goodd +makers of cable and of all sortes of cordage, and the best and moste +connynge shipwrights of the worlde, to be lordes of all those sees, and to +spoile Phillipps Indian navye, and to deprive him of yerely passage of his +treasure into Europe, and consequently to abate the pride of Spaine and of +the supporter of the greate Antechriste of Rome, and to pull him downe in +equalitie to his neighbour princes, and consequently to cut of the common +mischefes that come to all Europe by the peculiar aboundance of his Indian +treasure, and thiss withoute difficultie. + +7. This voyadge, albeit it may be accomplished by barke or smallest +pynnesse for advise or for a necessitie, yet for the distaunce, for burden +and gaine in trade, the marchant will not for profitts sake use it but by +shippes of greate burden; so as this realme shall have by that meane +shippes of greate burden and of greate strengthe for the defence of this +realme, and for the defence of that newe seate, as nede shall require, and +withall greate increase of perfecte seamen, which greate princes in time +of warres wante, and which kinde of men are neither nourished in fewe +daies nor in fewe yeres. + +8. This newe navie of mightie newe stronge shippes, so in trade to that +Norumbega and to the coastes there, shall never be subjecte to arreste of +any prince or potentate, as the navie of this realme from time to time +hath bene in the portes of the empire, in the portes of the Base Contries, +in Spaine, Fraunce, Portingale, &c., in the tymes of Charles the Emperour, +Fraunces the Frenche kinge, and others: but shall be alwayes free from +that bitter mischeefe, withoute grefe or hazarde to the marchaunte or to +the state, and so alwaies readie at the comaundement of the prince with +mariners, artillory, armor, and munition, ready to offende and defender as +shalbe required. + +9. The greate masse of wealthe of the realme imbarqued in the marchantes +shippes, caried oute in this newe course, shall not lightly, in so farr +distant a course from the coaste of Europe, be driven by windes and +tempestes into portes of any forren princes, as the Spanishe shippes of +late yeres have bene into our portes of the Weste Contries, &c.; and so +our marchantes in respecte of a generall safetie from venture of losse, +are by this voyadge oute of one greate mischefe. + +10. No forren commoditie that comes into England comes withoute payment of +custome once, twise, or thrise, before it come into the realme, and so all +forren comodities become derer to the subjectes of this realme; and by +this course to Norumbega forren princes customes are avoided; and the +forren comodities cheapely purchased, they become cheape to the subjectes +of England, to the common benefite of the people, and to the savinge of +greate treasure in the realme; whereas nowe the realme become the poore by +the purchasinge of forreine comodities in so greate a masse at so +excessive prices. + +11. At the firste traficque with the people of those partes, the subjectes +of the realme for many yeres shall chaunge many cheape comodities of these +partes for thinges of highe valor there not estemed; and this to the +greate inrichinge of the realme, if common use faile not. + +12. By the greate plentie of those regions the marchantes and their +factors shall lye there cheape, buye and repaire their shippes cheape, and +shall returne at pleasure withoute staye or restrainte of forreine prince; +whereas upon staies and restraintes the marchaunte raiseth his chardge in +sale over his ware; and, buyenge his wares cheape, he may mainteine trade +with smalle stocke, and withoute takinge upp money upon interest; and so +he shalbe riche and not subjecte to many hazardes, but shalbe able to +afforde the comodities for cheape prices to all subjectes of the realme. + +13. By makinge of shippes and by preparinge of thinges for the same, by +makinge of cables and cordage, by plantinge of vines and olive trees, and +by makinge of wyne and oyle, by husbandrie, and by thousandes of thinges +there to be don, infinite nombers of the English nation may be set on +worke, to the unburdenynge of the realme with many that nowe lyve +chardgeable to the state at home. + +14. If the sea coste serve for makinge of salte, and the inland for wine, +oiles, oranges, lymons, figges, &c. and for makinge of yron, all which +with moche more is hoped, withoute sworde drawen, wee shall cutt the combe +of the Frenche, of the Spanishe, of the Portingale, and of enemies, and of +doubtfull frendes, to the abatinge of their wealthe and force, and to the +greater savinge of the wealthe of the realme. + +15. The substaunces servinge, wee may oute of those partes receave the +masse of wrought wares that now wee receave out of Fraunce, Flaunders, +Germanye, &c.: and so wee may daunte the pride of some enemies of this +realme, or at the leaste in parte purchase those wares, that nowe wee buye +derely of the Frenche and Flemynge, better cheape; and in the ende, for +the part that this realme was wonte to receave, dryve them out of trade to +idlenes for the settinge of our people on worke. + +16. Wee shall by plantinge there inlarge the glory of the gospell, and +from England plante sincere religion, and provide a safe and a sure place +to receave people from all partes of the worlde that are forced to flee +for the truthe of Gods worde. + +17. If frontier warres there chaunce to aryse, and if thereupon wee shall +fortifie, yt will occasion the trayninge upp of our youthe in the +discipline of warr, and make a nomber fitt for the service of the warres +and for the defence of our people there and at home. + +18. The Spaniardes governe in the Indies with all pride and tyranie; and +like as when people of contrarie nature at the sea enter into gallies, +where men are tied as slaves, all yell and crye with one voice, _Liberta, +liberta_, as desirous of libertie and freedome, so no doubte whensoever +the Queene of England, a prince of such clemencie, shall seate upon that +firme of America, and shalbe reported throughe oute all that tracte to use +the naturall people there with all humanitie, curtesie, and freedome, they +will yelde themselves to her governemente, and revolte cleane from the +Spaniarde, and specially when they shall understande that she hath a noble +navie, and that she aboundeth with a people moste valiaunte for theyr +defence. And her Majestie havinge Sir Fraunces Drake and other subjectes +already in credite with the Symerons, a people or greate multitude +alreadye revolted from the Spanishe governmente, she may with them and a +fewe hundrethes of this nation, trayned upp in the late warres of Fraunce +and Flaunders, bringe greate thinges to passe, and that with greate ease; +and this broughte so aboute, her Majestie and her subjectes may bothe +enjoye the treasure of the mynes of golde and silver, and the whole trade +and all the gaine of the trade of marchandize, that none passeth thither +by the Spaniardes onely hande, of all the comodities of Europe; which +trade of marchandise onely were of it selfe suffycient (withoute the +benefite of the rich myne) to inriche the subjectes, and by customes to +fill her Majesties coffers to the full. And if it be highe pollicie to +mayneteyne the poore people of this realme in worke, I dare affirme that +if the poore people of England were five times as many as they be, yet all +mighte be sett on worke in and by workinge lynnen, and suche other thinges +of marchandize as the trade in the Indies dothe require. + +19. The present shorte trades causeth the maryner to be caste of and ofte +to be idle, and so by povertie to fall to piracie. But this course to +Norumbega beinge longer, and a contynuance of the employmente of the +maryner, dothe kepe the maryner from ydlenes and necessitie; and so it +cutteth of the principall actions of piracie, and the rather because no +riche praye for them to take cometh directly in their course or any thing +nere their course. + +20. Many men of excellent wittes and of divers singuler giftes, +overthrowen by sea, or by some folly of youthe, that are not able to live +in England, may there be raised againe, and doe their contrie goodd +service; and many nedefull uses there may (to greate purpose) require the +savinge of greate nombers, that for trifles may otherwise be devoured by +the gallowes. + +21. Many souldiers and servitours, in the ende of the warres, that mighte +be hurtfull to this realme, may there be unladen, to the common profite +and quiet of this realme, and to our forreine benefite there, as they may +be employed. + +22. The frye of the wandringe beggars of England, that growe upp ydly, and +hurtefull and burdenous to this realme, may there be unladen, better bredd +upp, and may people waste contries to the home and forreine benefite, and +to their owne more happy state. + +23. If Englande crie oute and affirme, that there is so many in all trades +that one cannot live for another, as in all places they doe, this +Norumbega (if it be thoughte so goodd) offreth the remedie. + + + +Chap. XXI. A note of some thinges to be prepared for the voyadge, which is +sett downe rather to drawe the takers of the voyadge in hande to the +presente consideration, then for any other reason; for that divers thinges +require preparation longe before the voyadge, withoute the which the +voyadge is maymed. + + +Dead Victuall. + + Hoggs fleshe, barrelled and salted, in greate quantitie. + Befe, barrelled, in lesse quantitie. + Stockfishe, Meale in barrells. + Oatemeale, in barrells, nere cowched. + Ryse, Sallett Oile, barrelied Butter. + Cheese, Hony in barrells. + Currans, Raisons of the sonne. + Dried Prunes, Olives in barrells. + Beanes, dryed on the kill. + Pease, dried likewise. + Canary Wines, Hollocke. + Sacks racked. + Vinegar very stronge. + Aqua Vitae. + Syders of Ffraunce, Spaine, and England. + Bere, brewed specially in speciall tyme. + +Victuall by Rootes And Herbes. + + Turnep Seede. + Passeneape Sede. + Radishe. + Cariott. + Naviewes. + Garlicke. + Onyons. + Leekes. + Melons. + Pompions. + Cowcombers. + Cabage Cole. + Parseley. + Lettis. + Endiffe. + Alexander. + Orege. + Tyme. + Rosemary. + Mustard Seede. + Fennell. + Anny Seedes, newe and freshe to be sowen. + +The Encrese, Renewe, and the Continewe of Victuall at the Plantinge +Places, and Men and Thinges Incident and Tendinge to the Same. + + Bores, Sowes. + Conies, Bucke and Dowe. + Doves, male and female. + Cockes, Hennes. + Duckes, male and female, for lowe soiles. + Turkies, male and female. + Wheat, Rye, Barley. + Bigge, or Barley Bere. + Oates, Beanes. + Pease, Ffacches. + Three square Graine. + Suger cane planters with the plantes. + Vyne planters. + Olyve planters. + Gardiners for herbes, rootes, and for all earthe frutes. + Graffers for frute trees. + Hunters, skilfull to kill wilde beasts for vittell. + Warryners to breede conies and to kill vermyn. + Fowlers. + Sea Fisshers. + Fresh water Fisshers. + Knytters of netts. + Butchers. + Salters and seasoners of vittell. + Salte makers. + Cookes. + Bakers. + Brewers. + Greyhounds to kill deere, &c. + Mastives to kill heavie beastes of rapyne and for nighte watches. + Bloude houndes to recover hurte dere. + +Provisions Tendinge to Force. + + Men experte in the arte of fortification. + Platformes of many formes redied to carry with you by advise of the + best. + Capitaines of longe and of greate experience. + Souldiers well trayned in Fflaunders to joyne with the younger. + Harqubusshiers of skill. + Archers, stronge bowmen. + Bowyers. + Ffletchers. + Arrow head makers. + Bow stave preparers. + Glew makers. + Morryce pike makers, and of halbert staves. + Makers of spades and shovells for pyoners, trentchers, and forte + makers. + Makers of basketts to cary earthe to fortes and rampiers. + Pioners and spademen for fortification. + Salte peter makers. + Gonne powder makers. + Targett makers of hornes, defensive againste savages. + Oylethole doublett makers, defensive, lighte and gentle to lye in. + Turners of targetts of elme, and of other toughe woodds lighte. + Shippes, Pynesses, Barkes, Busses with flatt bottoms, furnished with + experte Seamen. + Swifte boates and barges to passe by winde and oare, covered with + quilted canvas of defence againste shott from the shoare, to perce + ryvers for discoverie, and to passe to and froe, offensive and + defensive againste savages devised by Mr. Bodenham of Spaine. + Shipwrights in some nomber to be employed on the timber. + Oare makers, and makers of cable and cordage. + +Provisions Incident to the First Traficque and Trade of Marchandize. + + Grubbers and rooters upp of cipres, cedars and of all other faire + trees, for to be employed in coffers, deskes, &c., for traficque. + Mattocks, narrowe and longe, of yron to that purpose. + Millwrights, to make milles for spedy and cheap sawinge of timber + and boardes for trade, and first traficque of sucrue. + Millwrights, for corne milles. + Sawyers, for comon use. + Carpinters, for buildinges. + Joyners, to cutt oute the boordes into chests to be imbarqued for + England. + Blacksmithes, to many greate and nedefull uses. + Pitche makers. + Tarr makers. + Burners of asshes for the trade of sope asshes. + Cowpers, for barrells to inclose those asshes. + Tallow chandlers, to prepare the tallowe to be incasked for England. + Waxechandlers, to prepare waxe in like sorte. + Diers, to seeke in that firme that riche cochinilho and other + thinges for that trade. + Mynerall men. + +Artesanes, Servinge our Firste Planters, Not in Traficque But For +Buildinges. + + Brick makers. + Synkers of walles and finders of springes. + Tile makers. + Lyme makers. + Quarrells to digge tile. + Bricklayers. + Roughe Masons. + Tilers. + Carpinters. + Thachers with reedes, russhes, broome, or strawe. + Lathmakers. + +Artesans, Sekvinge Our Firste Planters, and in Parte Servinge for +Traficque. + + Barbors. + Bottlemakers of London. + Launders. + Shoemakers, coblers. + Tailors. + Tanners, white tawyers. + Botchers. + Buffe skynne dressers. + Paile makers. + Shamew skynne dressers. + Burcachiomakers. + +A Present Provision For Raisinge a Notable Trade for the Time to Come. + +The knitt wollen cappe of Toledo in Spaine, called _bonetto rugio +colterado_, so infinitely solde to the Moores in Barbarie and Affricke, is +to be prepared in London, Hereforde, and Rosse, and to be vented to the +people, and may become a notable trade of gaine to the marchaunte, and a +greate reliefe to oure poore people and a sale of our woll and of our +labour; and beinge suche a cappe that every particular person will buye +and may easelie compasse, the sale wil be greate in shorte time, +especially if our people weare them at their first arryvall there. + +Thinges Forgotten May Here Be Noted As They Come To Mynde, and After Be +Placed With The Rest, and After That In All Be Reduced Into The Best +Order.(83) + +That there be appointed one or twoo preachers for the voyadge, that God +may be honoured, the people instructed, mutinies the better avoided, and +obedience the better used, that the voyadge may have the better successe. + +That the voyadge be furnished with Bibles and with Bookes of service. That +the bookes of the discoveries and conquests of the Easte Indies be carried +with you. + +That the bookes of the discoveries of the West Indies, and the conquests +of the same, be also caried, to kepe men occupied from worse cogitations, +and to raise their myndes to courage and highe enterprizes, and to make +them lesse careles for the better shonnynge of comon daungers in suche +cases arisinge. And because men are more apte to make themselves subjecte +in obedience to prescribed lawes sett downe and signed by a prince, then +to the changeable will of any capitaine, be he never so wise or temperate, +never so free from desire of revenge, it is wisshed that it were learned +oute what course bothe the Spaniardes and Portingales tooke, in their +discoveries, for government, and that the same were delivered to learned +men, that had pased most of the lawes of the empire and of other princes +lawes, and that thereupon some speciall orders, fitt for voyadges and +begynnynges, mighte upon deliberation be sett downe and allowed by the +Queenes moste excellent Majestie and her wise counsell; and, faire +ingrossed, mighte in a table be sett before the eyes of suche as goe in +the voyadge, that no man poonished or executed may justly complaine of +manifeste and open wronge offred. + +That some phisition be provided to minister by counsell and by phisicke, +to kepe and preserve from sicknes, or by skill to cure suche as fall into +disease and distemperature. + +A surgeon to lett bloude, and for such as may chaunce, by warres or +otherwise, to be hurte, is more nedefull for the voyadge. + +An apothecarye to serve the phisition is requisite; and the phisition +deinge, he may chaunce (well chosen) to stande in steede of one and +thother, and to sende into the realme, by seede and roote, herbes and +plantes of rare excellencie. + +If suche plentie of honye be in these regions as is saied, yt were to +goodd purpose to cary in the voyadge suche of the servauntes of the Russia +Companie as have the skill to make the drincke called meth, which they use +in Russia and Poland, and nerer, as in North Wales, for their wine; and, +if you cannot cary any suche, to cary the order of the makinge of yt in +writinge, that it may be made for a nede. + +And, before many thinges, this one thinge is to be called, as yt were, +with spede to mynde, that the prisons and corners of London are full of +decayed marchantes, overthrowen by losse at sea, by usuerers, +suertishippe, and by sondry other suche meanes, and dare or cannot for +their debtes shewe their faces; and in truthe many excellent giftes be in +many of these men, and their goodd gtftes are not ymployed to any manner +of use, nor are not like of themselves to procure libertie to employe +themselves, but are, withoute some speciall meane used, to starve by +wante, or to shorten their tymes by thoughte; and for that these men, +schooled in the house of adversitie, are drawen to a degree higher in +excellencye, and may be employed to greater uses in this purposed voyadge, +yt were to greate purpose to use meanes by aucthoritie for suche as +maliciously, wrongfully, or for triflinge causes are deteyned, and to take +of them and of others that hide their heades, and to employe them; for so +they may be relieved, and the enterprice furthered in many respectes. + +(M253) And, in choice of all artesanes for the voyadge, this general rule +were goodd to be observed, that no man be chosen that is knowen to be a +Papiste, for the speciall inclynation they have of favour to the Kinge of +Spaine. + +That also, of those artesanes which are Protestantes, that where you may +have chaunge and choice, that suche as be moste stronge and lusty men be +chosen, and suche as can best handle his bowe or his harquebushe; for the +more goodd giftes that the goers in the voyadge have, the more ys the +voyadge benefited. And therefore (many goinge) yf every mans giftes and +goodd qualities be entred into a booke before they be receaved, they may +be employed upon any necessitie in the voyadge in this or in that, +according as occasion of nede shall require. + +FINIS. + + + + +XXIII. The letters patents, granted by the Queenes Maiestie to M. Walter +Ralegh now Knight, for the discovering and planting of new lands and +Countries, to continue the space of 6. yeeres and no more. + + +Elizabeth by the grace of God of England, France and Ireland Queene, +defender of the faith, &c. To all people to whom these presents shal come, +greeting. Know ye that of our especial grace, certaine science, and meere +motion, we haue giuen and graunted, and by these presents for vs, our +heires and successors doe graunt to our trusty and welbeloued seruant +Walter Ralegh Esquire, and to his heires and assignes for euer, free +liberty and licence from time to time, and at all times for euer +hereafter, to discouer, search, finde out, and view such remote, heathen +and barbarous lands, countreis, and territories, not actually possessed of +any Christian prince, nor inhabited by Christian people, as to him, his +heires and assignes, and to euery or any of them shall seeme good, and the +same to haue, holde, occupy and enioy to him, his heires and assignes for +euer, with all prerogatiues, commodities, iurisdictions, royalties, +priuiledges, franchises and preeminences, thereto or thereabouts both by +sea and land, whatsoeuer we by our letters patents may grant, and as we or +any of our noble progenitors haue heretofore granted to any person or +persons, bodies politique or corporate: and the saide Walter Ralegh, his +heires and assignes, and all such as from time to time, by licence of vs, +our heires and successors, shal goe or trauaile thither to inhabite or +remaine, there to build and fortifie, at the discretion of the said Walter +Ralegh, his heires and assignes, the statutes or act or Parliament made +against fugitiues, or against such as shall depart, remaine or continue +out of our Realme of England without licence, or any other statute, act, +law, or any ordinance whatsoeuer to the contrary in any wise +notwithstanding. + +And we do likewise by these presents, of our especiall grace, meere +motion, and certaine knowledge, for us, our heires and successors, giue +and graunt full authoritie, libertie and power to the said Walter Ralegh, +his heires and assignes, and euery of them, that he and they, and euery or +any of them, shall and may at all and euery time and times hereafter, +haue, take and leade in the sayde voyage, and trauaile thitherward, or to +inhabite there with him or them, and euery or any of them, such, and so +many of our subiects as shall willingly accompany him or them, and euery +or any of them: and to whom also we doe by these presents, giue full +libertie and authoritie in that behalfe, and also to haue, take and +employ, and vse sufficient shipping and furniture for the transportations, +and Nauigations in that behalfe, so that none of the same persons or any +of them be such as hereafter shall be restrained by vs, our heires or +successors. + +And further that the said Walter Ralegh his heires and assignes, and euery +of them, shall haue, holde, occupie and enioy to him, his heires and +assignes, and euery of them for euer, all the soyle of all such landes, +territories, and Countreis, so to be discouered and possessed as +aforesayd, and of all such Cities, Castles, Townes, Villages, and places +in the same, with the right, royalties, franchises, and iurisdictions, as +well marine as other within the sayd landes, or Countreis, or the seas +thereunto adioyning, to be had, or vsed, with full power to dispose +thereof, and of euery part in fee simple or otherwise, according to the +order of the lawes of England, as neere as the same conueniently may be, +at his, and their will and pleasure, to any persons then being, or that +shall remaine within the allegiance of vs, our heires and successors: +reseruing alwayes to vs, our heires and successors, for all seruices, +dueties, and demaunds, the fift part of all the oare of gold and siluer, +that from time to time, and at all times after such discouerie, subduing +and possessing, shall be there gotten and obteined: All which lands, +Countreis, and territories shall for euer be holden of the said Walter +Ralegh, his heires and assignes, of vs, our heires and successors, by +homage, and by the sayd payment of the said fift part, reserued onely for +all seruices. + +And moreouer, we do by these presents, for vs, our heires and successors, +give and grant licence to the said Walter Ralegh, his heires, and +assignes, and euery of them, that he, and they, and euery or any of them, +shall and may from time to time, and at all times for euer hereafter, for +his and their defence, encounter and expulse, repell and resist aswell by +sea as by lande, and by all other wayes whatsoeuer, all and euery such +person and persons whatsoeuer, as without the especiall liking and licence +of the sayd Walter Ralegh, and of his heires and assignes, shall attempt +to inhabite within the sayde Countreys, or any of them, or within the +space of two hundreth leagues neere to the place or places within such +Countreys as aforesayde (if they shall not bee before planted or inhabited +within the limits as aforesayd with the subiects of any Christian Prince +being in amitie with vs) where the sayd Walter Ralegh, his heires, or +assignes, or any of them, or his, or their, or any of their associats or +company, shall within sixe yeeres (next ensuing) make their dwellings or +abidings, or that shall enterprise or attempt at any time hereafter +vnlawfully to annoy, eyther by Sea or Lande the sayde Walter Ralegh, his +heires or assignes, or any of them, or his or their, or any of his or +their companies: giuing and graunting by these presents further power and +authoritie to the sayd Walter Ralegh, his heires and assignes, and every +of them from time to time, and at all times for euer hereafter, to take +and surprise by all maner of meanes whatsoeuer, all and euery those person +or persons, with their Shippes, Vessels, and other goods and furniture, +which without the licence of the sayde Walter Ralegh, or his heires, or +assignes, as aforesayd, shalbe found traffiquing into any Harbour, or +Harbours, Creeke, or Creekes, within the limits aforesayd, (the subiects +of our Realmes and Dominions, and all other persons in amitie with vs, +trading to the Newfound lands for fishing as heretofore they haue commonly +vsed, or being driuen by force of a tempest, or shipwracke onely +excepted:) and those persons, and every of them, with their shippes, +vessels, goods, and furniture to deteine and possess as of good and +lawfull prize, according to the discretion of him the sayd Walter Ralegh, +his heires, and assignes, and euery, or any of them. And for vniting in +more perfect league and amitie, of such Countryes, landes, and +territories, so to be possessed and inhabited as aforesayd with our +Realmes of England and Ireland, and the better incouragement of men to +these enterprises: we doe by these presents, graunt and declare that all +such Countries, so hereafter to be possessed and inhabited as is +aforesayd, from thencefoorth shall be of the allegiance of vs, our heires +and successors. (M254) And wee doe graunt to the sayd Walter Ralegh, his +heires and assignes, and to all, and euery of them, and to all, and euery +other person and persons, being of our allegiance, whose names shall be +noted or entred in some of our Courts of recorde within our Realme of +England, that with the assent of the sayd Walter Ralegh, his heires or +assignes, shall in his iourneis for discouerie, or in the iourneis for +conquest hereafter travaile to such lands, countreis, and territories, as +aforesayd, and to their, and to euery of their heires, that they, and +euery or any of them, being eyther borne within our sayde Realmes of +England or Irelande, or in any other place within our allegiance, and +which hereafter shall be inhabiting within any the Lands, Countryes, or +Territories, with such licence, (as aforesayd) shall and may haue all the +priuiledge of Denizens, and persons natiue of England, and within our +allegiance in such like ample maner and forme, as if they were borne and +personally resident within our said Realme of England, any law, custome, +or vsage to the contrary notwithstanding. + +And forasmuch as vpon the finding out, discouering, or inhabiting of such +remote lands, countries, and territories as aforesaid, it shalbe necessary +for the safety of all men, that shall aduenture themselues in those +iourneyes or voyages, to determine to liue together in Christian peace, +and ciuill quietnesse eche with other, whereby euery one may with more +pleasure and profit enioy that whereunto they shall atteine with great +paine and perill, wee for vs, our heires and successors, are likewise +pleased and contented, and by these presents doe giue and grant to the +said Walter Ralegh, his heires and assigns for euer, that he and they, and +euery or any of them, shall and may from time to time for euer hereafter, +within the said mentioned remote lands and countries, in the way by the +seas thither, and from thence, haue full and meere power and authoritie to +correct, punish, pardon, gouerne, and rule by their and euery or any of +their good discretions and policies, as well in causes capitall, or +criminall, as ciuill, both marine and other, all such our subiects, as +shal from time to time aduenture themselues in the said iourneis or +voyages, or that shall at any time hereafter inhabite any such lands, +countreis, or territories as aforesayd, or that shall abide within 200. +leagues of any of the sayde place or places, where the sayde Walter +Ralegh, his heires or assignes, or any of them, or any of his or their +associats or companies, shall inhabite within 6. yeeres next ensuing the +date hereof, according to such statutes, lawes and ordinances as shall be +by him the sayd Walter Ralegh, his heires and assignes, and euery or any +of them deuised, or established, for the better gouernment of the said +people as aforesaid. So alwayes as the said statutes, lawes, and +ordinances may be, as nere as conueniently may bee, agreeable to the forme +of the lawes, statutes, gouernment, or pollicie of England, and also so as +they be not against the true Christian faith, nowe professed in the Church +of England, nor in any wise to withdrawe any of the subiects or people of +those lands or places from the alleagance of vs, our heires and +successors, as their immediate Soueraign vnder God. + +And further, we doe by these presents for vs, our heires and successors, +giue and grant ful power and authoritie to our welbeloued Counsailour Sir +William Cecill knight, Lord Burghley, our high Treasourer of England, and +to the Lorde Treasourer of England, for vs, our heires and successors for +the time being, and to the priuie Counsaile of vs, our heires and +successors, or any foure or more of them for the time being, that he, +they, or any foure or more of them, shall and may from time to time and at +all times hereafter, vnder his or their handes or Seales by vertue of +these presents, authorise and licence the sayd Walter Ralegh, his heires +and assignes, and euery or any of them by him and by themselues, or by +their, or any of their sufficient Atturneis, Deputies, Officers, +Ministers, Factors, and seruants, to imbarke and transport out of our +Realme of England and Ireland, and the Dominions thereof, all or any of +his or their goods, and all or any the goods of his and their associats +and companies, and euery or any of them, with such other necessaries and +commodities, of any our Realmes, as to the sayde Lorde Treasurer, or foure +or more of the priuie Counsaile, of vs our heires and successors for the +time being (as aforesaid) shalbe from time to time by his or their +wisedomes, or discretions thought meete and conuenient, for the better +reliefe and supportation of him the sayde Walter Ralegh, his heires, and +assignes, and euery or any of them, and of his or their or any of their +associats and companies, any act, statute, law, or any thing to the +contrary in any wise notwithstanding. + +Prouided alwayes, and our will and pleasure is, and wee do hereby declare +to all Christian kings, princes, and states, that if the sayde Walter +Ralegh, his heires or assignes, or any of them, or any other by their +licence or appointment, shall at any time or times hereafter robbe or +spoile by sea or by land, or doe any act of vniust or vnlawfull +hostilitie, to any of the subiects of vs, our heires or successors, or to +any of the subiects of any the kings, princes, rulers, Gouernors, or +estates, being then in perfect league and amitie with vs, our heires and +successors, and that vpon such iniurie, or vpon iust complaint of any such +Prince, Ruler, Gouernour or estate, or their subjects, wee, our heirs and +successors, shall make open Proclamation within any the portes of our +Realme of England, that the saide Walter Ralegh, his heires and assignes, +and adherents, or any to whom these our Letters patents may extende, shall +within the terms to bee limited, by such Proclamation, make full +restitution, and satisfaction of all such iniuries done: so as both we and +the said Princes, or other so complaining, may hold vs and themselues +fully contented: And that if the said Walter Ralegh, his heires and +assignes, shall not make or cause to be made satisfaction accordingly +within such time so to be limitted, that then it shal be lawful to vs, our +heires and successors, to put the sayde Walter Ralegh, his heires and +assignes, and adherents, and all the inhabitants of the saide places to be +discoured (as is aforesaid) or any of them out of our allegeance and +protection, and that from and after such time of putting out of protection +of the sayde Walter Ralegh, his heires, assignes, and adherents, and +others so to be put out, and the said places within their habitation, +possession and rule, shall be out of our allegeance and protection, and +free for all Princes and others to pursue with hostilitie, as being not +our subiects, nor by vs any way to be auouched, maintained, or defended, +nor to be holden as any of ours, nor to our protection, or dominion, or +allegeance any way belonging: for that expresse mention of the cleere +yeerely value of the certaintie of the premisses, or any part thereof, or +of any other gift, or grant by vs, or any our progenitors, or predecessors +to the said Walter Ralegh, before this time made in these presents bee not +expressed, or any other grant, ordinance, provision, proclamation or +restraint, to the contrary thereof, before the time, giuen, ordained, or +prouided, or any other thing, cause, or matter whatsoeuer, in any wise +notwithstanding. In witnesse whereof, wee haue caused these our letters to +be made Patents. (M255) Witnesse our selues, at Westminster, the fiue and +twentie day of March, in the sixe and twentith yeere of our Raigns. + + + + +XXIV. The first voyage made to the coasts of America, with two barks, +wherein were Captaines M. Philip Amadas, and M. Arthur Barlowe, who +discouered part of the Countrey now called Virginia Anno 1584. Written by +one of the said Captaines, and sent to sir Walter Ralegh knight, at whose +charge and direction, the said voyage was set forth.(84) + + +The 27 day of Aprill, in the yere of our redemption 1584, we departed the +West of England, with two barkes well furnished with men and victuals, +hauing receiued our last and perfect directions by your letters, +confirming the former instructions, and commandements deliuered by your +selfe at our leauing the riuer of Thames. And I thinke it a matter both +vnnecessary, for the manifest discouerie of the Countrey, as also for +tediousnesse sake, to remember vnto you the diurnall of our course, +sayling thither and returning: onely I haue presumed to present vnto you +this briefe discourse, by which you may iudge how profitable this land is +likely to succeede, as well to your selfe, (by whose direction and charge, +and by whose seruantes this our discouerie hath beene performed) as also +to her Highnesse, and the Common wealth, in which we hope your wisedome +wilbe satisfied, considering that as much by vs hath bene brought to +light, as by those smal meanes, and number of men we had, could any way +haue bene expected, or hoped for. + +(M256) The tenth of May we arriued at the Canaries, and the tenth of Iune +in this present yeere, we were fallen with the Islands of the West Indies, +keeping a more Southeasterly course then was needefull, because wee +doubted that the current of the Bay of Mexico, disbogging betweene the +Cape of Florida and Hauana, had bene of greater force then afterwardes we +found it to bee. At which Islands we found the ayre very vnwholsome, and +our men grew for the most part ill disposed: so that hauing refreshed our +selues with sweet water, and fresh victuall, we departed the twelfth day +of our arriuall there. These Islands, with the rest adioyning, are so well +knowen to your selfe, and to many others, as I will not trouble you with +the remembrance of them. + +(M257) The second of Iuly, we found shole water, wher we smelt so sweet, +and so strong a smel, as if we had bene in the midst of some delicate +garden abounding with all kinde of odoriferous flowers, by which we were +assured, that the land could not be farre distant: and keeping good watch, +and bearing but slacke saile, the fourth of the same moneth we arriued +vpon the coast, which we supposed to be a continent and firme lande, and +we sayled along the same a hundred and twentie English miles before we +could finde any entrance, or riuer issuing into the Sea. (M258) The first +that appeared vnto vs, we entred, though not without some difficultie, and +cast anker about three harquebuz-shot within the hauens mouth, on the left +hand of the same: and after thankes giuen to God for our safe arriuall +thither, we manned our boats, and went to view the land next adioyning, +and to take possession of the same, in the right of the Queenes most +excellent Maiestie, as rightfull Queene, and Princesse of the same, and +after deliuered the same ouer to your vse, according to her Maiesties +grant, and letters patents, vnder her Highnesse great seale. Which being +performed, according to the ceremonies vsed in such enterprises, we viewed +the land about vs, being (M259) whereas we first landed, very sandie and +low towards the waters side, but so full of grapes, as the very beating +and surge of the sea ouerflowed them, of which we found such plentie, as +well there as in all places else, both on the sand and on the greene soile +on the hils, as in the plaines, as well on euery little shrubbe, as also +climing towardes the tops of high Cedars, that I thinke in all the world +the like abundance is not to be found: and my selfe hauing seene those +parts of Europe that most abound, find such difference as were incredible +to be written. + +(M260) We passed from the Sea side towardes the toppes of those hilles +next adioyning, being but of meane higth, and from thence wee behelde the +Sea on both sides to the North, and to the South, finding no ende any of +both wayes. This lande lay stretching it selfe to the West, which after +wee found to bee but an Island of twentie miles long, and not above sixe +miles broade. Vnder the banke or hill whereon we stoode, we behelde the +vallyes replenished with goodly Cedar trees, and hauing discharged our +harquebuz-shot, such a flocke of Cranes (the most part white) arose vnder +vs, with such a cry redoubled by many ecchoes, as if an armie of men had +showted all together. + +This Island had many goodly woodes full of Deere, Conies, Hares, and +Fowle, euen in the middest of Summer in incredible abundance. The woodes +are not such as you finde in Bohemia, Moscouia, or Hercynia, barren and +fruitles, but the highest and reddest Cedars of the world, farre bettering +the Ceders of the Acores of the Indies, or Lybanus, Pynes, Cypres, +Sassaphras, the Lentisk, or the tree that beareth the Masticke, the tree +that beareth the vine of blacke Sinamon, of which Master Winter brought +from the streighte of Magellan, and many other of excellent smell and +qualitie. (M261) We remained by the side of this Island two whole dayes +before we saw any people of the Countrey: the third day we espied one +small boate rowing towardes vs having in it three persons: this boat came +to the Island side, foure harquebuz-shot from our shippes, and there two +of the people remaining, the third came along the shoreside towards vs, +and wee being then all within boord, he walked vp and downe vpon the point +of the land next vnto vs: then the Master and the Pilot of the Admirall, +Simon Ferdinando, and the Captaine Philip Amadas, my selfe, and others +rowed to the land, whose comming this fellow attended, neuer making any +shewe of feare or doubt. (M262) And after he had spoken of many things not +vnderstood by vs, we brought him with his owne good liking, aboord the +ships, and gaue him a shirt, a hat and some other things, and made him +taste of our wine, and our meat, which he liked very wel: and after hauing +viewed both barks, he departed, and went to his owne boat againe, which +hee had left in a little Coue or Creeke adioyning: assoone as hee was two +bow shoot into the water, he fell to fishing, and in lesse then halfe an +houre, he had laden his boate as deepe, as it could swimme, with which hee +came againe to the point of the lande, and there he diuided his fish into +two parts, pointing one part to the ship, and the other to the pinnesse; +which, after he had (as much as he might) requited the former benefites +receiued, departed out of our sight. + +(M263) The next day there came vnto vs diuers boates, and in one of them +the Kings brother, accompanied with fortie or fiftie men, very handsome +and goodly people, and in their behauiour as mannerly and ciuill as any of +Europe. His name was Granganimeo, and the king is called Wingina, the +countrey Wingandacoa, and now by her Maiestie Virginia. The maner of his +comming was in this sort: hee left his boates altogether as the first man +did a little from the shippes by the shore, and came along to the place +ouer against the ships, followed with fortie men. When he came to the +place his seruants spread a long matte vpon the ground, on which he sate +downe, and at the other ende of the matte foure others of his companie did +the like, the rest of his men stood round about him, somewhat a farre off: +when we came to the shore to him with our weapons, hee neuer mooued from +his place, nor any of the other foure, nor neuer mistrusted any harme to +be offered from vs, but sitting still he beckoned vs to come and sit by +him, which we performed: and being set hee made all signes of ioy and +welcome, striking on his head and his breast and afterwardes on ours, to +shew wee were all one, smiling and making shewe the best he could of all +loue, and familiaritie. After hee had made a long speech vnto vs, wee +presented him with diuers things, which hee receiued very ioyfully, and +thankefully. None of the companie durst speake one worde all the time: +only the foure which were at theother ende, spake one in the others eare +very softly. The King is greately obeyed, and his brothers and children +reuerenced: the King himselfe in person was at our being there, sore +wounded in a fight which hee had with the King of the next countrey, +called Wingina, and was shot in two places through the body, and once +cleane through the thigh, but yet he recouered: by reason whereof and for +that hee lay at the chiefe towne of the countrey, being sixe dayes iourney +off, we saw him not at all. + +After we had presented this his brother with such things as we thought he +liked, wee likewise gaue somewhat to the other that satte with him on the +matte: but presently he arose and tooke all from them and put it into his +owne basket, making signes and tokens, that all things ought to bee +deliuered vnto him, and the rest were but his seruants, and followers. +(M264) A day or two after this we fell to trading with them, exchanging +some things that we had, for Chamoys, Buffe, and Deere skinnes: when we +shewed him all our packet of merchandize, of all things that he sawe, a +bright tinne dish most pleased him, which hee presently tooke vp and clapt +it before his breast, and after made a hole in the brimme thereof and hung +it about his necke, making signes that it would defende him against his +enemies arrowes: for those people maintaine a deadly and terrible warre, +with the people and King adioyning. We exchanged our tinne dish for +twentie skinnes, woorth twentie Crownes, or twentie Nobles: and a copper +kettle for fiftie skins woorth fiftie Crownes. They offered vs good +exchange for our hatchets, and axes, and for kniues and would haue giuen +any thing for swordes: but wee would not depart with any. (M265) After two +or three dayes the Kings brother came aboord the shippes, and dranke wine, +and eat of our meat and of our bread, and liked exceedingly thereof: and +after a fewe days ouerpassed, he brought his wife with him to the ships, +his daughter and two or three children: his wife was very well fauoured, +of meane stature, and very bashfull: shee had on her backe a long cloake +of leather, with the furre side next to her body, and before her a piece +of the same: about her forehead shee had a bande of white Corall, and so +had her husband many times: in her eares shee had bracelets of pearles +hanging downe to her middle, (whereof wee deliuered your worship a little +bracelet) and those were of the bignes of good pease. The rest of her +women of the better sort had pendants of copper hanging in either eare, +and some of the children of the kings brother and other noble men, haue +fiue or sixe in either eare: he himselfe had vpon his head a broad plate +of golde, or copper, for being vnpolished we knew not what mettall it +should be, neither would he by any meanes suffer vs to take it off his +head, but feeling it, it would bow very easily. His apparell was as his +wiues, onely the women weare their haire long on both sides, and the men +but on one. They are of colour yellowish, and their hair black for the +most part, and yet we saw children that had very fine aburne and chesnut +coloured haire. + +After that these women had bene there, there came downe from all parts +great store of people, bringing with them leather, corall, diuers kindes +of dies, very excellent, and exchanged with us: but when Granganimeo the +kings brother was present, none durst trade but himselfe: except such as +weare red pieces of copper on their heads like himselfe: for that is the +difference betweene the noble men, and the gouernours of countreys, and +the meaner sort. And we both noted there, and you haue vnderstood since by +these men, which we brought home, that no people in the worlde cary more +respect to their King, Nobilitie, and Gouernours, then these doe. The +Kings brothers wife, when she came to vs (as she did many times) was +followed with forty or fifty women alwayes: and when she came into the +shippe, she left them all on land, sauing her two daughters, her nurse and +one or two more. The kings brother alwayes kept this order, as many boates +as he would come withall to the shippes, so many fires would hee make on +the shore a farre off, to the end we might vnderstand with what strength +and company he approched. (M266) Their boates are made of one tree, either +of Pine or of Pitch trees: a wood not commenly knowen to our people, nor +found growing in England. They haue no edge-tooles to make them withall; +if they haue any they are very fewe, and those it seemes they had twentie +yeres since, which, as those two men declared, was out of a wracke which +happened vpon their coast of some Christian ship, being beaten that way by +some storme and outragious weather, whereof none of the people were saued, +but only the ship, or some part of her being cast vpon the sand, out of +whose sides they drew the nayles and the spikes, and with those they made +their best instruments. (M267) The manner of making their boates is thus: +they burne downe some great tree, or take such as are winde fallen, +putting gumme and rosen vpon one side thereof, they set fire into it, and +when it hath burnt it hollow, they cut out the coale with their shels, and +euer where they would burne it deeper or wider they lay on gummes, which +burne away the timber, and by this meanes they fashion very fine boates, +and such as will transport twentie men. Their oares are like scoopes, and +many times they set with long poles, as the depth serueth. + +The Kings brother had great liking of our armour, a sword, and diuers +other things which we had: and offered to lay a great box of pearl in gage +for them: but we refused it for this time, because we would not make them +knowe, that we esteemed thereof, vntill we had vnderstoode in what places +of the countrey the pearle grew: which now your Worshippe doeth very well +vnderstand. + +He was very iust of his promise: for many times we deliuered him +merchandize vpon his word, but euer he came within the day and performed +his promise. He sent vs euery day a brase or two of fat Bucks, Conies, +Hares, Fish the best of the world. He sent vs diuers kindes of fruites, +Melons, Walnuts, Cucumbers, Gourdes, Pease, and diuers rootes, and fruites +very excellent good, and of their Countrey corne, which is very white, +faire and well tasted, and groweth three times in fiue moneths: in May +they sow, in Iuly they reape, in Iune they sow, in August they reape: in +Iuly they sow, in September they reape: onely they cast the corne into the +ground, breaking a little of the soft turfe with a wodden mattock, or +pickeaxe: our selues prooued the soile, and put some of our Pease in the +ground, and in tenne dayes they were of fourteene ynches high: they haue +also Beanes very faire of diuers colours and wonderfull plentie: some +growing naturally, and some in their gardens, and so haue they wheat and +oates. + +The soile is the most plentifull, sweete, fruitfull and wholsome of all +the worlde: there were aboue fourteene seuerall sweete smelling timber +trees, and the most part of their vnderwoods are Bayes and such like: they +haue those Okes that we haue, but farre greater and better. After they had +bene diuers times aboord our shippes, my selfe, with seuen more went +twentie mile into the Riuer, that runneth towarde the Citie of Skicoak, +which Riuer they call Occam: and the euening following, wee came to an +Island which they call Raonoak, distant from the harbour by which we +entered, seuen leagues: and at the north end thereof was a village of nine +houses, built of Cedar, and fortified round about with sharpe trees, to +keepe out their enemies, and the entrance into it made like a turne pike +very artificially; when wee came towardes it, standing neere vnto the +waters side, the wife of Granganimeo the kings brother came running out to +meete vs very cheerefully and friendly, her husband was not then in the +village: some of her people shee commanded to drawe our boate on shore for +the beating of the billoe: others she appointed to cary vs on their backes +to the dry ground, and others to bring our oares into the house for feare +of stealing. When we were come into the vtter roome, hauing fiue roomes in +her house, she caused vs to sit downe by a great fire, and after tooke off +our clothes and washed them, and dryed them againe: some of the women +plucked off our stockings and washed them, some washed our feete in warme +water, and shee her selfe tooke great paines to see all thinges ordered in +the best maner shee could, making great haste to dress some meate for vs +to eate. + +After we had thus dryed ourselues, she brought vs into the inner roome, +where shee set on the boord standing along the house; some wheate like +furmentie, sodden Venison, and roasted, fish sodden, boyled and roasted, +Melons rawe, and sodden, rootes of diuers kindes and diuers fruites: their +drinke is commonly water, but while the grape lasteth, they drinke wine, +and for want of caskes to keepe it, all the yere after they drink water, +but it is sodden with Ginger in it, and black Sinamon, and sometimes +Sassaphras, and diuers others wholesome, and medicinable hearbes and +trees. We were entertained with all loue and kindnesse, and with as much +bountie (after their maner) as they could possibly deuise. We found the +people most gentle, louing, and faithfull, voide of all guile and treason, +and such as liue after the maner of the golden age. The people onely care +howe to defende them selues from the cold in their short winter, and to +feed themselues with such meat as the soile affoordeth: their meat is very +well sodden and they make broth very sweet and sauorie: their vessels are +earthern pots, very large, white and sweete, their dishes are wodden +platters of sweet timber: within the place where they feede was their +lodging, (M268) and within that their Idoll, which they worship, of whome +they speake incredible things. While we were at meate, there came in at +the gates two or three men with their bowes and arrowes from hunting, whom +when wee espied, we beganne to looke one towardes another, and offered to +reach our weapons: but assoone as shee espied our mistrust, shee was very +much mooued, and caused some of her men to runne out, and take away their +bowes and arrowes and breake them, and withall beate the poore fellowes +out of the gate againe. When we departed in the euening and would not tary +all night she was very sory, and gaue vs into our boate our supper halfe +dressed, pottes and all, and brought vs to our boate side, in which wee +lay all night, remoouing the same a prettie distance from the shoare: shee +perceiuing our ielousie, was much grieued, and sent diuers men and thirtie +women, to sit all night on the banke side by vs, and sent vs into our +boates fine mattes to couer vs from the raine, vsing very many wordes to +entreate vs to rest in their houses: but because wee were fewe men, and if +wee had miscaried, the voyage had bene in very great danger, wee durst not +adventure any thing, although there was no cause of doubt: for a more +kinde and louing people there can not be found in the worlde, as farre as +we haue hitherto had triall. + +(M269) Beyond this Island there is the maine lande, and ouer against this +Island falleth into this spacious water, the great riuer called Occam by +the inhabitants on which standeth a towne called Pomeiock; and sixe dayes +journey from the same is situate their greatest citie, called Skicoak, +which this people affirme to be very greate: but the Sauages were neuer at +it, only they speake of it by the report of their fathers and other men, +whom they have heard affirme it to bee aboue one houres iourney about. + +Into this riuer falleth another great riuer, called Cipo, in which there +is found great store of Muskles in which there are pearles: likewise there +descendeth into this Occam, another riuer, called Nomopana, on the one +side whereof standeth a great towne called Chawanook, and the Lord of that +towne and countrey is called Pooneno: this Pooneho is not subject to the +king of Wingandacoa, but is a free Lord: beyond this country is there +another king, whom they call Menatonon, and these three kings are in +league with each other. (M270) Towards the Southwest, foure dayes iourney +is situate a towne called Sequotan, which is the Southermost towne of +Wingandacoa, neere unto which, sixe and twentie yeres past there was a +ship cast away, whereof some of the people were saued, and those were +white people, whom the countrey people preserued. + +And after ten dayes remaining in an out Island vninhabited, called +Wocokon, they with the help of some of the dwellers of Sequotan, fastened +two boates of the countrey together and made mastes vnto them and sailes +of their shirtes, and hauing taken into them such victuals as the countrey +yeelded, they departed after they had remained in this out Island 3 +weekes: but shortly after it seemed they were cast away, for the boates +were found vpon the coast cast a land in another Island adioyning: other +then these, there was neuer any people apparelled, or white of colour, +either seene or heard of amongst these people, and these aforesaid were +seene onely of the inhabitantes of Secotan, which appeared to be very +true, for they wondred maruelously when we were amongst them at the +whitenes of our skins, euer coueting to touch our breasts, and to view the +same. Besides they had our ships in marvelous admiration, and all things +els were so strange vnto them, as it appeared that none of them had euer +seene the like. When we discharged any piece, were it but an hargubuz, +they would tremble thereat for very feare, and for the strangenesse of tha +same: for the weapons which themselues vse are bowes and arrowes: the +arrowes are but of small canes, headed with a sharpe shell or tooth of a +fish sufficient ynough to kill a naked man. (M271) Their swordes be of +wood hardened: likewise they vse wooden breastplates for their defence. +They haue beside a kinde of club, in the end whereof they fasten the +sharpe hornes of a stagge, or other beast. When they goe to warres they +cary about with them their idol, of whom they aske counsel, as the Romans +were woont of the Oracle of Apollo. They sing songs as they march towardes +the battell in stead of drummes and trumpets: their warres are very cruell +and bloody, by reason whereof, and of their ciuill dissentions which haue +happened of late yeeres amongst them, the people are maruelously wasted, +and in some places the countrey left desolate. + +(M272) Adioyning to this countrey aforesaid called Secotan beginneth a +countrey called Pomouik, belonging to another king whom they call +Piamacum, and this king is in league with the next king adioyning towards +the setting of the Sunne, and the countrey Newsiok, situate vpon a goodly +riuer called Neus: these kings haue mortall warre with Wingina king of +Wingandacoa: but about two yeeres past there was a peace made betweene the +King Piemacum, and the Lord of Secotan, as these men which we haue brought +with vs to England, haue giuen vs to vnderstand: but there remaineth a +mortall malice in the Secotanes, for many iniuries and slaughters done +vpon them by this Piemacum. They inuited diuers men, and thirtie women of +the best of his countrey to their towne to a feast: and when they were +altogether merry, and praying before their Idol, (which is nothing els but +a meer illusion of the deuill) the captaine or Lord of the town came +suddenly vpon them, and slewe them euery one, reseruing the women and +children: and these two haue oftentimes since perswaded vs to surprize +Piemacum his towne, hauing promised and assured vs, that there will be +found in it great store of commodities. But whether their perswasion be to +the ende they may be reuenged of their enemies, or for the loue they beare +to vs, we leaue that to the tryall hereafter. + +Beyond this Island called Roanoak, are maine Islands very plentifull of +fruits and other naturall increases, together with many townes, and +villages, along the side of the continent, some bounding vpon the Islands, +and some stretching vp further into the land. + +When we first had sight of this countrey, some thought the first land we +saw to bee the continent; but after we entred into the Hauen, we saw +before vs another mighty long Sea: for there lyeth along the coast a +tracte of Islands, two hundreth miles in length, adioyning to the Ocean +sea, and betweene the Islands, two or three entrances: when you are entred +betweene them (these Islands being very narrow for the most part, as in +most places sixe miles broad, in some places lesse, in fewe more) then +there appeareth another great Sea, containing in bredth in some places, +forty, and in some fifty, in some twenty miles ouer, before you come vnto +the continent: (M273) and in this inclosed Sea there are aboue an hundreth +Islands of diuers bignesses, whereof one is sixteene miles long, at which +we were, finding it a most pleasant and fertile ground, replenished with +goodly Cedars, and diuers other sweete woods, full of Corrants, of flaxe, +and many other notable commodities, which we at that time had no leasure +to view. Besides this Island there are many, as I haue sayd, some of two, +or three, of foure, of fiue miles, some more, some lesse, most beautifull +and pleasant to behold, replenished with Deere, Conies, Hares, and diuers +beasts, and about them the goodliest and best fish in the world, and in +greatest abundance. + +Thus Sir, we haue acquainted you with the particulars of our discouery +made this present voyage, as farre foorth as the shortnesse of the time we +there continued would affoord vs to take viewe of: and so contenting our +selves with this seruice at this time, which wee hope hereafter to +inlarge, as occasion and assistance shalbe giuen, we resolued to leaue the +countrey, and to apply ourselues to returne for England, which we did +accordingly, and arriued safely in the West of England about the middest +of September. + +And whereas wee haue aboue certified you of the countrey taken in +possession by vs, to her Maiesties vse, and so to yours by her Maiesties +grant, wee thought good for the better assurance thereof to record some of +the particular Gentlemen, and men of accompt, who then were present, as +witnesses of the same, that thereby all occasion of cauill to the title of +the countrey, in her Maiesties behalfe may be preuented, which otherwise, +such as like not the action may vse and pretend, whose names are: + + Captains: + Master Philip Amadas + Master Arthur Barlow + + Of the companie. + William Greeneuile, + Iohn Wood, + Iames Browewich, + Henry Greene, + Beniamin Wood, + Simon Ferdinando, + Nicholas Petman, + Iohn Hewes, + +We brought home also two of the Sauages being lustie men, whose names were +Wanchese and Manteo. + + + + +XXV. The voiage made by Sir Richard Greenuile,(85) for Sir Walter Ralegh, +to Virginia, in the yeere 1585. + + +The 9. day of April, in the yeere abouesayd, we departed from Plymmouth, +our Fleete consisting of the number of seuen sailes, to wit, the Tyger, of +the burden of seuen score tunnes, a Flie-boat called the Roe-bucke, of the +like burden, the Lyon of a hundred tunnes or thereabouts, the Elizabeth, +of fiftie tunnes, and the Dorothie, a small barke: whereunto were also +adioyned for speedy seruices, two small pinnesses. The principall +Gentlemen of our Companie, were these, M. Ralph Lane, M. Tomas Candish, M. +Iohn Arundel, M. Raymund, M. Stukeley, M. Bremige, M. Vincent, and M. Iohn +Clarke, and diuers others, whereof some were Captaines, and other some +Assistants for counsell, and good directions in the voyage. + +The 14. day of Aprill wee fell with Lancerota and Forteuentura, Isles of +the Canaries, and from thence, we continued our course for Dominica, one +of the Antiles of the West India, wherewith we fell the 7. day of May, and +the 10. day following wee came to an anker at Cotesa, a little Iland +situate neere to the Iland of S. Iohn, where we landed, and refreshed our +selues all that day. + +(M274) The 12. day of May wee came to an anker in the Bay of Moskito, in +the Island of S. Iohn, within a Faulcon shot of the shoare: where our +Generall Sir Richard Greeneuil, and the most part of our companie landed, +and began to fortifie very neere to the Sea side: the riuer ran by the one +side of our forte, and the other two sides were inuironed with woods. + +The 13. day we began to build a new pinnesse within the Fort, with the +timber that wee then felled in the countrey, some part whereof we fet +three miles vp in the land, and brought it to our Fort vpon trucks, the +Spaniard not daring to make or offer resistance. + +The 16. day there appeared vnto vs out of the woods eight horsemen of the +Spaniards, about a quarter of a mile from our Fort, staying about halfe an +houre in viewing our forces: but assoone as they saw ten of our shot +marching towards them, they presently retired into the woods. + +The 19. day Master Candish, who had bene separated from our fleete in a +storme in the Bay of Portugall, arriued at Cotesa, within the sight of the +Tiger: we thinking him a farre off to have beene either a Spaniard or +Frenchman of warre, thought it good to weigh ankers, and to goe roome with +him, which the Tiger did, and discerned him at last to be one of our +consorts, for ioy of whose comming our ships discharged their ordinance, +and saluted him according to the maner of the Seas. + +The 22. day twentie other Spanish horsemen shewed themselues to vs vpon +the other side of the riuer: who beinge seene, our Generall dispatched 20. +footemen towards them, and two horsmen of ours, mounted vpon Spanish +horses, which wee before had taken in the time of our being on the Iland: +they shewed to our men a flagge of truce, and made signes to haue a parle +with vs: whereupon two of our men went halfe of the way vpon the sands, +and two of theirs came and met them: the two Spaniards offered very great +salutations to our men, but began according to their Spanish proud humors, +to expostulate with them about their arriuall and fortifying in their +countrey, who notwithstanding by our mens discreet answers were so cooled, +that (whereas they were told, that our principall intention was onely to +furnish our selues with water and victuales, and other necessaries, +whereof we stood in neede, which we craued might be yeelded vs with faire +and friendly meanes, otherwise our resolution was to practise force, and +to relieue ourselues by the sworde) the Spaniards in conclusion seeing our +men so resolute, yeelded to our requestes with large promises of all +curtesie, and great fauour, and so our men and theirs departed. + +The 23. day our pinnesse was finished, and launched: which being done, our +Generall with his Captaines and Gentlemen, marched vp into the Countrey +about the space of 4. miles, where in a plaine marsh they stayed expecting +the comming of the Spaniards according to their promise, to furnish vs +with victuals: who keeping their olde custome for periurie and breach of +promise, came not, whereupon our Generall fired the woods thereabout, and +so retired to our Fort, which the same day was fired also, and each man +came aboord to be ready to set saile the next morning. + +The 29.(86) day wee set saile from Saint Iohns, being many of vs stung +before vpon shoare with the Muskitos: but the same night wee tooke a +Spanish Frigat, which was forsaken by the Spaniards vpon the sight of vs, +and the next day in the morning very early we tooke another Frigat, with +good and rich fraight, and diuers Spaniards of account in her which +afterwards wee ransomed for good round summes, and landed them in S. +Iohns. + +The 26. day our Lieutenant Master Ralph Lane went in one of the Frigats +which we had taken, to Roxo Bay vpon the Southwest side of Saint Iohn, to +fetch salt, being thither conducted by a Spanish Pilot: as soone as hee +arriued there, hee landed with his men to the number of 20. and intrenched +himselfe vpon the sandes immediatly, compassing one of their salte hils +within the trench: who being seene of the Spaniards, there came downe +towardes him two or three troopes of horsemen and footemen, who gaue him +the looking, and gazing on, but durst not come neere him to offer any +resistance, so that Master Lane maugre their troopes, caryed their salte +aboord and laded his Frigat, and so returned againe to our fleete the 27. +day, which road at S. Germans Bay. The same day we all departed, and the +next day arriued in the Iland of Hispaniola. + +(M275) The 1. day of Iune we anchored at Isabella, on the North side of +Hispaniola. + +The 3. of Iune, the Gouernour of Isabell, and Captaine of the Port de +Plata, being certified by the reports of sundry Spaniards, who had beene +well intertained aboard our shippes by our Generall, that in our fleete +were many braue and gallant Gentlemen, who greatly desired to see the +Gouernour aforesayd, he thereupon sent gentle commendations to our +Generall, promising within fewe dayes to come to him in person, which he +perfourmed accordingly. + +The 5. day the aforesayd Gouernour accompanied with a trusty Fryer, and +twenty other Spaniards, with their seruants, and Negroes, came downe to +the Sea side, where our ships road at anker, who being seene, our Generall +manned immediatly the most part of his boates with the chiefe men of our +Fleete, euery man appointed, and furnished in the best sort: at the +landing of our Generall, the Spanish Gouernour receiued him very +courteeously, and the Spanish Gentlemen saluted our English Gentlemen, and +their inferiour sort did also salute our Souldiers and Sea men, liking our +men, and likewise their qualities, although at the first they seemed to +stand in feare of vs, and of so many of our boates whereof they desired +that all might not land their men, yet in the end, the courtesies that +passed on both sides were so great, that all feare and mistrust on the +Spaniards part was abandoned. + +In the meane time while our English Generall and the Spanish Gouernour +discoursed betwixt them of diuers matters, as of the state of the +Countrey, the multitude of the Townes and people, and the commodities of +the Iland, our men prouided two banquetting houses couered with greene +boughes, the one for the Gentlemen, the other for the seruants and a +sumptuous banquet was brought in serued by vs all in plate, with the sound +of trumpets, and consorte of musicke, wherwith the Spaniards were more +then delighted. Which banquet being ended, the Spaniardes in recompence of +our courtesie, caused a great heard of white buls, and kyne to be brought +together from the mountaines, and appoynted for euery Gentleman and +Captaine that would ride, a horse ready sadled, and then singled out three +of the best of them to bee hunted by horsemen after their maner, so that +the pastime grewe very pleasant for the space of three houres, wherein all +three of the beasts were killed, whereof one tooke the Sea, and there was +slaine with a musket. After this sport many rare presents and gifts were +giuen and bestowed on both parts, and the next day wee played the +Merchants in bargaining with them by way of trucke and exchange of diuers +of their commodities, as horses, mares, kine, buls, goates, swine, sheepe, +bull hides, sugar, ginger, pearle, tobacco, and such like commodities of +the Iland. + +The 7. day we departed with great good will from the Spaniards from the +Iland of Hispaniola: but the wiser sort doe impute this great shewe of +friendship, and courtesie vsed towards vs by the Spaniards rather to the +force that wee were of, and the vigilancie, and watchfulnesse that was +amongst vs, then to any heartie good will, or sure friendly +intertainement: for doubtlesse if they had bene stronger then wee, wee +might haue looked for no better curtesie at their handes, then Master Iohn +Haukins receiued at Saint John de Vilua, or Iohn Oxnam neere the streites +of Dariene, and diuers others of our Countrymen in other places. + +The 8. day wee ankered at a small Iland to take Seales, which in that +place wee vnderstood to haue bene in great quantitie, where the Generall +and certaine others with him in the pinnesse were in very great danger to +haue beene all cast away, but by the helpe of God they escaped the hasard, +and returned aboord the Admirall in safetie. + +(M276) The 9. day we arriued and landed in the Isle of Caycos, in which +Iland we searched for salte-pondes, vpon the aduertisement and information +of a Portugall: who in deede abused our Generall and vs, deseruing a +halter for his hire, if it had so pleased vs. + +The 12 we ankered at Guanima, and landed. + +The 15. and 16. we ankered and landed at Cyguateo. + +The 20. we fell with the maine of Florida. + +The 23. we were in great danger of a wracke on a breach called the Cape of +Feare.(87) + +(M277) The 24. we came to anker in a harbour, where we caught in one tyde +so much fish as would haue yeelded vs twentie pounds in London: this was +our first landing in Florida. + +The 26. we came to anker at Wocokon. + +The 29. wee weighed anker to bring the Tyger into the harbour, where +through the vnskilfulnesse of the Master whose name was Fernando, the +Admirall strooke on ground, and sunke. + +(M278) The 3. we sent word of our arriuing at Wocokon, to Wingina at +Roanoak. + +The 6. M. Iohn Arundel was sent to the maine, and Manteo with him: and +Captaine Aubry and Captaine Boniten the same day were sent to Croatoan, +where they found two of our men left there with 30. other by Captaine +Reymond, some 20. dayes before. + +The 8. Captaine Aubry and Captaine Boniten returned, with two of our men +found by them, to vs at Wocokon. + +The 11. day the Generall accompanied in his Tilt boate with Master Iohn +Arundell, Master Stukeley, and diuers other Gentlemen, Master Lane, Master +Candish, Master Hariot, and twentie others in the new pinnesse, Captaine +Amadas, Captaine Clarke, with ten others in a shipboat, Francis Brooke, +and Iohn White in another ship-boate, passed ouer the water from Wocokon +to the maine land victualled for eight dayes, in which voyage we first +discouered the townes of Pomeiok, Aquascogoc and Secotan, and also the +great lake called by the Sauages Paquique,(88) with diuers other places, +and so returned with that discouery to our Fleete. + +The 12. we came to the Towne of Pomeiok. + +The 13. we passed by water to Aquascogok. + +The 15. we came to Secotan, and were well entertained there of the +Sauages. + +The 16. wee returned thence, and one of our boates with the Admirall was +sent to Aquascogok, to demaund a siluer cup which one of the Sauages had +stollen from vs, and not receiuing it according to his promise, wee burnt, +and spoyled their corne, and Towne, all the people being fled. + +The 18. we returned from the discouery of Secotan, and the same day came +aboord our Fleete ryding at Wococon. + +The 21. our Fleete ankering at Wococon, we weyed anker for Hatoraske. + +The 27. our Fleete ankered at Hatorask, and there we rested. + +The 29. Grangino brother to king Wingina came aboord the Admirall, and +Manteo with him. + +(M279) The 2. the Admirall was sent to Weapomeiok. + +The 5. M. Iohn Arundell was sent for England. + +The 25. our Generall weyed anker, and set saile for England. + +About the 31. he tooke a Spanish ship of 300. tunne richly loaden, +boording her with a boate made with boards of chests, which fell asunder, +and sunke at the ships side, assoone as euer he and his men were out of +it. + +(M280) The 10. of September, by foule weather the Generall then shipped in +the prize, lost sight of the Tyger. + +(M281) The 6. the Tyger fell with the Landes end, and the same day came to +anker at Falmouth. + +The 18. the Generall came with the prize to Plymmouth, and was courteously +receiued by diuers of his worshipfull friends. + +The names of those as well Gentlemen as others, that remained one whole +yeere in Virginia, vnder the Gouernement of Master Ralph Lane. + + Master Philip Amadas, Admirall of the countrey. + Master Hariot. + Master Acton. + Master Edward Stafford. + Thomas Luddington. + Master Maruyn. + Master Gardiner. + Captaine Vaughan. + Master Kendall. + Master Prideox. + Robert Holecroft. + Rise Courtney. + Master Hugh Roger. + Master Thomas Haruie. + Master Snelling. + Master Anthony Russe. + Master Allyne. + Master Michael Polison. + Iohn Cage. + Thomas Parre. + William Randes. + Geffery Churchman. + William Farthow. + Iohn Taylor. + Philip Robyns. + Thomas Philips. + Valentine Beale. + Thomas Foxe. + Darby Glande. + Edward Nugen. + Edward Kelley + Iohn Gostigo. + Erasmus Clefs. + Edward Ketcheman. + Iohn Linsey. + Thomas Rottenbury. + Roger Deane. + Iohn Harris. + Francis Norris. + Matthew Lyne. + Edward Kettell. + Thomas Wisse. + Robert Biscombe. + William Backhouse. + William White. + Henry Potkin. + Dennis Barnes. + Ioseph Borges. + Dougham Gannes. + William Tenche. + Randall Latham. + Thomas Hulme. + Walter Mill. + Richard Gilbert. + Steuen Pomarie. + Iohn Brocke. + Bennet Harrie. + Iames Steuenson. + Charles Steuenson. + Christopher Lowde. + Ieremie Man. + Iames Mason. + Dauid Salter. + Richard Ireland. + Thomas Bookener. + William Philips. + Randall Mayne. + Iames Skinner. + George Eseuen. + Iohn Chandeler. + Philip Blunt. + Richard Poore. + Robert Yong. + Marmaduke Constable. + Thomas Hesket. + William Wasse. + Iohn Feuer. + Daniel. + Thomas Taylor. + Richard Humfrey. + Iohn Wright. + Gabriel North. + Bennet Chappell. + Richard Sare. + Iames Lacie. + Smolkin. + Thomas Smart. + Robert. + Iohn Euans. + Roger Large. + Humfrey Garden. + Francis Whitton. + Rowland Gryffin. + William Millard. + Iohn Twit. + Edward Seclemore. + Iohn Anwike. + Christopher Marshall. + Dauid Williams. + Nicholas Swabber. + Edward Chipping. + Siluester Beching. + Vincent Cheyne. + Hance Walters. + Edward Barecombe. + Thomas Skeuelabs. + William Walters. + + + + +XXVI. An extract of Master Ralph Lanes letter to M. Richard Hakluyt +Esquire, and another Gentleman of the middle Temple, from Virginia. + + +In the meane while you shall vnderstand, that since Sir Richard Greenuils +departure from vs, as also before, we haue discouered the maine to be the +goodliest soyle vnder the cope of heauen, so abounding with sweete trees, +that bring such sundry rich and pleasant gummes, grapes of such +greatenesse, yet wilde, as France, Spaine nor Italie haue no greater, so +many sortes of Apothecarie drugs, such seuerall kindes of flaxe, and one +kind like silke, the same gathered of a grasse, as common there, as grasse +is here. And nowe within these few dayes we haue found here Maiz or Guinie +wheate, whose eare yeeldeth corne for bread 400. vpon one eare, and the +Cane maketh very good and perfect sugar, also Terra Samia, otherwise Terra +sigillata. Besides that, it is the goodliest and most pleasing Territorie +of the world: for the continent is of an huge and vnknowen greatnesse, and +very well peopled and towned, though sauagely, and the climate so +wholsome, that wee had not one sicke since we touched the land here. To +conclude, if Virginia had but horses and kine in some reasonable +proportion, I dare assure my selfe, being inhabited with English, no +realme in Christendome were comparable to it. (M282) For this already we +finde, that what commodities soeuer Spaine, France, Italy, or the East +partes doe yeeld vnto vs, in wines of all sortes, in oyles, in flaxe, in +rosens, pitch, frankensence, corrans, sugers, and such like, these partes +doe abound with the growth of them all, but being Sauages that possess the +land, they know no vse of the same. And sundry other rich commodities, +that no parts of the world, be they West or East Indies, haue, here wee +finde great abundance of. (M283) The people naturally are most curteous, +and very desirous to haue clothes, bvt especially of course cloth rather +then silke, course canuas they also like well of, but copper caryeth the +price of all, so it be made red. Thus good M. Hakluyt and M.H. I haue +inioyned you both in one letter of remembrance, as two that I loue dearely +well, and commending me most heartily to you both I commit you to the +tuition of the Almightie. From the New Fort in Virginia, this third of +September, 1585. + +Your most assured friend. +Ralph Lane. + + + + +XXVII. An account of the particularities of the imployments of the English +men left in Virginia by Richard Greeneuill vnder the charge of Master +Ralph Lane Generall of the same, from the 17. of August 1585. vntil the +18. of Iune 1586. at which time they departed the Countrey; sent and +directed to Sir Walter Ralegh. + + +(M284) That I may proceede with order in this discourse, I thinke it +requisite to diuide it into two parts. The first shall declare the +particularities of such partes of the Countrey within the maine, as our +weake number, and supply of things necessarie did inable vs to enter into +the discouery of. + +The second part shall set downe the reasons generally mouing vs to resolue +on our departure at the instant with the Generall Sir Francis Drake, and +our common request for passage with him, when the barkes, pinnesses, and +boates with the Masters and Mariners meant by him to bee left in the +Countrey, for the supply of such, as for a further time meant to haue +stayed there, were caryed away with tempest and foule weather: In the +beginning whereof shall bee declared the conspiracie of Pemisapan, with +the Sauages of the maine to have cut vs off, &c. + + + +The first part declaring the particularities of the Countrey of Virginia. + + +First therefore touching the particularities of the Countrey, you shall +vnderstand that our discouerie of the same hath beene extended from the +Island of Roanoak, (the same hauing bene the place of our settlement or +habitation) into the South, into the North, into the Northwest, and into +the West. + +The vttermost place to the Southward of any discouery was Secotan, being +by estimation fourescore miles distant from Roanoak. The passage from +thence was through a broad sound within the mayne, the same being without +kenning of lande, and yet full of flats and shoalds:(89) we had but one +boate with four oares to passe through the same, which boate could not +carry aboue fifteene men with their furniture, baggage, and victuall for +seuen dayes at the most: and as for our pinesse, besides that she drew too +deep water for that shallow sound, she would not stirre for an oare: for +these and other reasons (winter also being at hand) we thought good wholly +to leeue the discouery of those parts vntill our stronger supply. + +To the Northward our furthest discouery was to the Chesepians(90) distant +from Roanoak about 130. miles, the passage to it was very shallow and most +dangerous, by reason of the bredth of the sound, and the little succour +that vpon any flawe was there to be had. + +(M285) But the Territorie and soyle of the Chesepians (being distant +fifteene miles from the shore) was for pleasantnes of seat, for +temperature of Climate, for fertilitie of soyle and for the commoditie of +the Sea, besides multitude of Beares (being an excellent good victuall) +with great woods of Sassafras, and Wallnut trees, is not to be excelled by +any other whatsoeuer. + +There be sundry Kings, whom they call Weroances, and Countreys of great +fertility adioyning to the same, as the Mandoages, Tripanicks, and +Opossians, which all came to visite the Colonie of the English, which I +had for a time appointed to be resident there. + +To the Northwest the farthest place of our discouery was to Chawanook +distant from Roanoak about 130. miles. Our passage thither lyeth through a +broad sound,(91) but all fresh water, and the chanell of a great depth, +nauigable for good shipping, but out of the chanell full of shoalds. + +The Townes about the waters side situated by the way are these following: +Passaquenoke, The womans Towne, Chepanoc, Weapomeiok, Muscamunge, and +Metackwem: all these being vnder the iurisdiction of the king of +Weopomeiok, called Okisco: From Muscamunge we enter into the Riuer,(92) +and iurisdiction of Chawanook: There the Riuer beginneth to straighten +vntil it come to Chawanook, and then groweth to be as narrow as the Thames +betweene Westminster and Lambeth. + +Betwene Muscamunge and Chawanook vpon the left hand as wee passe thither, +is a goodly high land, and there is a Towne which we called The blinde +Towne, but the Sauages called it Ohanoak, and hath a very goodly corne +field belonging vnto it: it is subiect to Chawanook. + +(M286) Chawanook it selfe is the greatest Prouince and Seigniorie lying +vpon that Riuer, and that the Towne it selfe is able to put 700. fighting +men into the fielde, besides the force of the Prouince it selfe. + +The king of the sayd Prouince is called Menatonon, a man impotent in his +lims, but otherwise for a Sauage, a very graue and wise man, and of a very +singular good discourse in matters concerning the state, not onely of his +owne Countrey, and the disposition of his owne men, but also of his +neighbours round about him as well farre as neere, and of the commodities +that eache Countrey yeeldeth. When I had him prisoner with me, for two +dayes that we were together, he gaue mee more vnderstanding and light of +the Countrey then I had receiued by all the searches and Sauages that +before I or any of my companie had had conference with: it was in March +last past 1586. Amongst other things he tolde me, that going three dayes +iourney in a Canoe vp his Riuer of Chawanook, and then descending to the +land, you are within foure dayes iourney to passe ouer land Northeast to a +certaine kings countrey, whose Prouince lyeth vpon the Sea, but his place +of greatest strength is an Island situate, as he described vnto mee, in a +Bay, the water round about the Island very deepe. + +(M287) Out of this Bay hee signified vnto mee, that this King had so +greate quantitie of Pearle, and doeth so ordinarily take the same, as that +not onely his owne skinnes that hee weareth, and the better sort of his +gentlemen and followers are full set with the sayd Pearle, but also his +beds, and houses are garnished with them, and that hee hath such quantitie +of them, that it is a wonder to see. + +He shewed me that the sayd King was with him at Chawanook two yeeres +before, and brought him certaine Pearle, but the same of the worst sort, +yet was he faine to buy them of him for copper at a deere rate, as he +thought. Hee gaue mee a rope of the same pearle, but they were blacke, and +naught, yet many of them were very great, and a few amongst a number very +orient and round, all which I lost with other things of mine, comming +aboord Sir Francis Drake his Fleete; yet he tolde me that the sayd King +had great store of Pearle that were white, great, and round, and that his +blacke Pearle his men did take out of shallow water, but the white Pearle +his men fished for in very deepe water. + +It seemed to me by his speach, that the sayd King had traffique with white +men that had clothes as we haue, for these white Pearle, and that was the +reason that hee would not depart with other then with blacke Pearles, to +those of the same countrey. + +The king of Chawanook promised to giue me guids to go ouer land into that +kings countrey whensoeuer I would: but he aduised me to take good store of +men with me, and good store of victuall, for he said, that king would be +loth to suffer any strangers to enter into his Countrey, and especially to +meddle with the fishing for any Pearle there, and that hee was able to +make a great many of men in to the field, which be sayd would fight very +well. + +(M288) Hereupon I resumed with my selfe, that if your supplie had come +before the ende of Aprill, and that you had sent any store of boates or +men, to haue had them made in any reasonable time, with a sufficient +number of men and victuals to haue found vs vntill the newe corne were +come in, I would haue sent a small barke with two pinnesses about by Sea +to the Northward to haue found out the Bay he spake of, and to haue +sounded the barre if there were any, which should haue ridden there in the +sayd Bay about that Iland, while I with all the small boates I could make, +and with two hundred men would haue gone vp to the head of the riuer of +Chawanook with the guids that Menatonon would haue giuen me, which I would +haue bene assured should haue beene of his best men, (for I had his best +beloued sonne prisoner with me) who also should haue kept me companie in +an handlocke with the rest, foote by foote, all the voyage ouer land. + +My meaning was further at the head of the Riuer in the place of my descent +where I would haue left my boates, to haue raised a sconse with a small +trench, and a pallisado vpon the top of it, in the which, and in the guard +of my boates I would haue left fiue and twentie, or thirtie men, with the +rest would I have marched with as much victuall as euery man could haue +caried, with their furniture, mattocks, spades and axes, two dayes +iourney. In the ende of my march vpon some conuenient plot would I haue +raised another sconse according to the former, where I would haue left +fiftene or twentie. And if it would haue fallen out conueniently, in the +way I would haue raised my saide sconse vpon some Corne fielde, that my +company might haue liued vpon it. + +(M289) And so I would haue holden this course of insconsing euery two +dayes march, vntill I had bene arriued at the Bay or Port hee spake of: +which finding to bee worth the possession, I would there haue raised a +maine fort, both for the defence of the harborough, and our shipping also, +and would haue reduced our whole habitation from Roanoak and from the +harborough and port there (which by proofe is very naught) vnto this other +before mentioned, from whence, in the foure dayes march before specified, +could I at al times return with my company back vnto my boates riding +vnder my sconse, very neere whereunto directly from the West runneth a +most notable Riuer, and in all those parts most famous, called the Riuer +of Moratoc.(93) This Riuer openeth into the broad Sound of Weapomeiok.(94) +And whereas the Riuer of Chawanook, and all the other Sounds, and Bayes, +salt and fresh, shewe no current in the world in calme weather, but are +mooued altogether with the winde: This Riuer of Moratoc hath so violent a +current from the West and Southwest, that it made me almost of opinion +that with oares it would scarse be nauigable: it passeth with many creekes +and turnings, and for the space of thirtie miles rowing, and more, it is +as broad as the Thames betwixt Green-wich and the Isle of dogges, in some +places more, and in some lesse: the current runneth as strong, being +entred so high into the Riuer, as at London bridge vpon a vale water. + +And for that not onely Menatonon, but also the Sauages of Moratoc +themselues doe report strange things of the head of that Riuer, it is +thirtie dayes as some of them say, and some say fourtie dayes voyage to +the head thereof, which head they say springeth out of a maine rocke in +that abundance, that forthwith it maketh a most violent streame: and +further, that this huge rock standeth so neere vnto a Sea, that many times +in stormes (the winde comming outwardly from the sea) the waues thereof +are beaten into the said fresh streame, so that the fresh water for a +certaine space, groweth salt and brackish: I tooke a resolution with my +selfe, hauing dismissed Menatonon vpon a ransome agreed for, and sent his +sonne into the Pinnesse to Roanoak, to enter presently so farre into that +Riuer with two double whirries, and fourtie persons one or other, as I +could haue victuall to cary vs, vntil we could meete with more either of +the Moraroks, or of the Mangoaks, which is another kinde of Sauages, +dwelling more to the Westward of the said Riuer: but the hope of +recovering more victuall from the Sauages made mee and my company as +narrowly to escape starving in that discouerie before our returne, as euer +men did, that missed the same. + +(M290) For Pemisapan, who had changed his name of Wingina vpon the death +of his brother Granganimo, had giuen both the Choanists, and Mangoaks +worde of my purpose towarde them, I hauing bene inforced to make him +priuie to the same, to bee serued by him of a guide to the Mangoaks, and +yet hee did neuer rest to solicite continually my going vpon them, +certifying mee of a generall assembly euen at that time made by Menatonon +at Chawanook of all his Weroances, and allies to the number of three +thousand bowes, preparing to come vpon vs at Roanoak, and that the +Mangoaks also were ioyned in the same confederacie, who were able of +themselues to bring as many more to the enterprise: And true it was that +at that time the assembly was holden at Chawanook about vs, as I found at +my comming thither, which being vnlooked for did so dismay them, as it +made vs haue the better hand at them. But this confederacie against vs of +the Choanists and Mangoaks was altogether and wholly procured by Pemisapan +himselfe, as Menatonon confessed vnto me, who sent them continual word, +that our purpose was fully bent to destroy them: on the other side he told +me, that they had the like meaning towards vs. + +Hee in like sort having sent worde to the Mangoaks of mine intention to +passe vp into their Riuer, and to kill them (as he saide) both they and +the Moratoks, with whom before wee were entred into a league, and they had +euer dealt kindly with vs, abandoned their Townes along the Riuer, and +retired themselues with their Crenepos(M291), and their Corne within the +maine: insomuch as hauing passed three dayes voyage vp the River, wee +could not meete a man, nor finde a graine of Corne in any of their Townes: +whereupon considering with my selfe that wee had but two dayes victuall +left, and that wee were then 160. miles from home, besides casualtie of +contrarie windes or stormes, and suspecting treason of our owne Sauages in +the discouerie of our voyage intended, though wee had no intention to bee +hurtfull to any of them, otherwise then for our copper to haue had corne +of them: I at night vpon the Corps of guard, before the putting foorth of +Centinels, aduertised the whole company of the case wee stoode in for +victuall, and of mine opinion that we were betrayed by our owne Sauages, +and of purpose drawen foorth by them vpon vaine hope to be in the ende +starued, seeing all the Countrey fled betore vs, and therefore while wee +had those two dayes victual left, I thought it good for vs to make our +returne homeward, and that it were necessary for vs to get the other side +of the Sound of Weopomeiok in time, where wee might be relieued vpon the +weares of Chypanum, and the womens Towne, although the people were fled. + +Thus much I signified vnto them, as the safest way: neuerthelesse I did +referre it to the greatest number of voyces, whether wee should aduenture +the spending of our whole victuall in some further viewe of that most +goodly Riuer in hope to meete with some better happe, or otherwise to +retire our selues backe againe. And for that they might be the better +advised, I willed them to deliberate all night vpon the matter, and in the +morning at our going aborde to set our course according to the desires of +the greatest part. Their resolution fully and wholy was (and not three +founde to bee of the contrary opinion) that whiles there was lefte but one +halfe pinte of Corne for a man, wee should not leaue the search of that +Riuer, and that there were in the companie two Mastiues vpon the pottage +of which, with Sassafras leaues (if the worst fell out) the company would +make shift to liue two dayes, which time would bring them downe the +current to the mouth of the Riuer, and to the entrie of the Sound, and in +two dayes more at the farthest they hoped to crosse the Sound and to bee +relieued by the weares, which two dayes they would fast rather then be +drawen backe a foote till they had seene the Mangoaks, either as friendes +or foes. This resolution of theirs did not a little please mee, since it +came of themselues, although for mistrust of that which afterwards did +happen, I pretended to haue bene rather of the contrary opinion. + +And that which made me most desirous to haue some doings with the Mangoaks +either in friendship or otherwise to haue had one or two of them +prisoners, was, for that it is a thing most notorious to all the countrey, +that there is a Prouince to the which the said Mangoaks haue recourse and +trafique vp that (M292) Riuer of Moratoc, which hath a marueilous and most +strange Minerall. This Mine is so notorious amongst them, as not onely to +the Sauages dwelling vp the said riuer, and also to the Sauages of +Chawanook, and all them to the Westward, but also to all them of the +maine: the Countreis name is of fame, and is called Chaunis Temoatan. + +The Minerall they say is Wassador, which is copper, but they call by the +name of Wassador euery mettall whatsoeuer: they say it is of the colour of +our copper, but our copper is better then theirs: and the reason is for +that it is redder and harder, whereas that of Chaunis Temoatan is very +soft, and pale: they say that they take the saide mettall out of a riuer +that falleth very swift from the rockes and hils, and they take it in +shallow water: the maner is this. They take a great bowle by their +description as great as one of our targets, and wrappe a skinne ouer the +hollow parte thereof, leauing one part open to receiue in the minerall: +that done, they watch the comming downe of the current, and the change of +the colour of the water, and then suddenly chop downe the said bowle with +the skinne, and receiue into the same as much oare as will come in, which +is euer as much as their bowle will holde, which presently they cast into +a fire, and foorthwith it melteth, and doeth yeeld in fiue parts at the +first melting, two parts of mettall for three partes of oare. Of this +mettall the Mangoaks haue so great store, by report of all the Sauages +adioyning, that they beautify their houses with greate plates of the same: +and this to be true, I receiued by report of all the countrey, and +particularly by yong Skiko, the King of Chawanooks sonne of my prisoner, +who also him selfe had bene prisoner with the Mangoaks, and set downe all +the particularities to me before mentioned: but he had not bene at Chaunis +Temoatan himselfe: for hee said it was twentie dayes iourney ouerland from +the Mangoaks, to the said Minerall Countrey, and that they passed through +certaine other territories betweene them and the Mangoaks, before they +came to the said Countrey. + +Vpon report of the premisses, which I was very inquisitive in all places +where I came to take very particular information of by all the Sauages +that dwelt towardes these parts, and especially of Menatonon himselfe, who +in euery thing did very particularly informe mee, and promised me guides +of his owne men, who should passe ouer with me, euen to the said Country +of Chaunis Temoatan (for ouerland from Chawanook to the Mangoaks is but +one dayes iourney from Sunne rising to Sunne setting, whereas by water it +is seuen dayes with the soonest): These things, I say, made me very +desirous by all meanes possible to recouer the Mangoaks, and to get some +of that their copper for an assay, and therefore I willingly yeelded to +their resolution: But it fell out very contrary to all expectation, and +likelyhood: for after two dayes trauell, and our whole victuall spent, +lying on shoare all night, wee could neuer see man, onely fires we might +perceiue made alongst the shoare where we were to passe, and vp into the +Country, vntill the very last day. In the euening whereof, about three of +the clocke wee heard certaine Sauages call as we thought, Manteo, who was +also at that time with me in the boat, whereof we all being very glad, +hoping of some friendly conference with them, and making him to answere +them, they presently began a song, as we thought, in token of our welcome +to them: but Manteo presently betooke him to his piece, and tolde mee that +they meant to fight with vs: which word was not so soon spoken by him, and +the light horseman ready to put to shoare, but there lighted a vollie of +their arrowes amongst them in the boat, but did no hurt (God be thanked) +to any man. Immediatly, the other boate lying ready with their shot to +skoure the place for our hand weapons to lande vpon, which was presently +done, although the land was very high and steepe, the Sauages forthwith +quitted the shoare, and betooke themselues to flight: wee landed, and +hauing faire and easily followed for a smal time after them, who had +wooded themselues we know not where: the Sunne drawing then towards the +setting, and being then assured that the next day if wee would pursue +them, though we might happen to meete with them, yet wee should be assured +to meete with none of their victuall, which we then had good cause to +thinke of: therefore choosing for the company a conuenient ground in +safetie to lodge in for the night, making a strong Corps of guard, and +putting out good Centinels, I determined the next morning before the +rising of the Sunne to be going back againe, if possibly we might recouer +the mouth of the riuer, into the broad sound, which at my firste motion I +found my whole company ready to assent vnto: for they were nowe come to +their Dogges porredge, that they had bespoken for themselues if that +befell them which did, and I before did mistrust we should hardly escape. +The ende was, we came the next day by night to the Riuers mouth within +foure or fiue miles of the same, hauing rowed in one day downe the +current, much as in foure dayes wee had done against the same: we lodged +vpon an Iland, where wee had nothing in the world to eate but pottage of +Sassafras leaues, the like whereof for a meate was neuer used before as I +thinke. The broad sound wee had to passe the next day all fresh and +fasting: that day the winde blew so strongly, and the billow so great, +that there was no possibilitie of passage without sinking of our boates. +This was vpon Easter eue, which was fasted very truely. Vpon Easter day in +the morning the winde comming very calme, we entred the sound, and by +foure of the clocke we were at Chipanum, whence all the Sauages that we +had left there were left, but their weares did yeeld vs some fish, as God +was pleased not vtterly to suffer vs to be lost: for some of our company +of the light horsemen were farre spent. The next morning wee arriued at +our home Roanoak. + +I haue set downe this Voyage somewhat particularly, to the ende it may +appeare vnto you, (as true it is) that there wanted no great good will +from the most to the least amongst vs, to haue perfited this discouerie of +the Mine: for that the discouery of a good Mine, by the goodnesse of God, +or a passage to the South-sea, or some way to it, and nothing els can +bring this Countrey in request to be inhabited by our nation. And with the +discouery of either of the two aboue shewed, it will bee the most sweet +and healthfullest climate, and therewithall the most fertile soyle (being +manured) in the world: and then will Sassafras, and many other rootes and +gummes there found make good marchandise and lading for shipping, which +otherwise of themselues will not be worth fetching. + +Prouided also, that there be found out a better harborough then yet there +is, which must be to the Northward, if any there bee, which was mine +intention to haue spent this Summer in the search of, and of the Mine of +Chawnis Temoatan: the one I would haue done, if the barkes that I should +haue had of Sir Francis Drake, by his honourable courtesie, had not bene +driuen away by storme: the other if your supply of more men, and some +other necessaries had come to vs in any conuenient sufficiencie. For this +riuer of Moratico promiseth great things, and by the opinion of M. Hariots +the head of it by the description of the Countrey, either riseth from the +Bay of Mexico, or els from very neere vnto the same, that openeth out into +the South sea. + +And touching the Minerall, thus doeth M. Youghan affirme, that though it +be but copper, seeing the Sauages are able to melt it, it is one of the +richest Minerals in the world. + +Wherefore a good harborough found to the Northward, as before is saide, +and from thence foure dayes ouerland, to the Riuer of Choannak sconses +being raised, from whence againe ouerland through the prouince of Choanoak +one dayes voyage to the first towne of the Mangoaks vp the riuer of +Moratico by the way, as also vpon the said Riuer for the defence of our +boats like sconses being set, in this course of proceeding you shall +cleare your selfe from al those dangers and broad shallow sounds before +mentioned, and gaine within foure dayes trauell into the heart of the +maine 200. miles at the least, and so passe your discouery into that most +notable countrey, and to the likeliest parts of the maine, with farre +greater felicitie then otherwise can bee performed. + +Thus Sir, I haue though simply, yet truely set downe vnto you, what my +labour with the rest of the gentlemen, and poore men of our company (not +without both paine and perill, which the Lord in his mercy many wayes +deliuered vs from) could yeeld vnto you, which might haue bene performed +in some more perfection, if the Lord had bene pleased that onely that +which you had prouided for vs had at the first bene left with vs, or that +hee had not in his eternall providence now at the last set some other +course in these things, than the wisedome of man coulde looke into, which +truely the carying away by a most strange and vnlooked for storme of all +our prouision, with Barks, Master, Mariners, and sundry also of mine owne +company, al hauing bene so courteously supplied by the generall Sir +Francis Drake, the same hauing bene most sufficient to haue performed the +greatest part of the premisses, must euer make me to thinke the hand of +God onely (for some his good purpose to my selfe yet vnknowen) to haue +bene in the matter. + + + +The second part touching the conspiracie of Pemisapan, the discouery of +the same, and at the last, of our request to depart with Sir Francis Drake +for England. + + +Ensenore a Sauage father to Pemisapan being the onely friend to our nation +that we had amongest them, and about the King, died the 20. of April 1586. +He alone had before opposed himselfe in their consultations against all +matters proposed against vs, which both the King and all the rest of them +after Grangemoes death, were very willing to haue preferred. And he was +not onely by the meere prouidence of God during his life, a meane to saue +vs from hurt, as poysonings and such like, but also to doe vs very great +good, and singularly in this. + +The King was advised and of himselfe disposed, as a ready meane to haue +assuredly brought vs to ruine in the moneth of March 1586. himselfe also +with all his Sauages to haue runne away from vs, and to haue left his +ground in the Iland vnsowed: which if hee had done, there had bene no +possibilitie in common reason, (but by the immediate hande of God) that +wee could haue bene preserued from staruing out of hande. (M293) For at +that time wee had no weares for fish, neither coulde our men skill of the +making of them, neither had wee one graine of Corne for seede to put into +the ground. + +In mine absence on my voyage that I had made against the Chaonists, and +Mangoaks, they had raised a brute among themselues, that I and my company +were part slaine, and part starued by the Chaonists, and Mangoaks. One +part of this tale was too true, that I and mine were like to be starued, +but the other false. + +Neuerthelesse vntill my returne it tooke such effect in Pemisapans breast, +and in those against vs, that they grew not onely into contempt of vs, but +also (contrary to their former reuerend opinion in shew, of the Almightie +God of heauen, and Iesus Christ whom wee serue and worship, whom before +they would acknowledge and confesse the onely God) now they began to +blaspheme, and flatly to say, that our Lorde God was not God, since hee +suffered vs to sustaine much hunger, and also to be killed of the +Renapoaks, for so they call by that generall name all the inhabitants of +the whole maine, of what prouince soeuer. Insomuch as olde Ensenore, +neither any of his fellowes, could for his sake haue no more credite for +vs: and it came so farre that the king was resolued to haue presently gone +away as is aforesaid. + +But euen in the beginning of this bruite I returned, which when hee sawe +contrary to his expectation, and the aduertisement that hee had receiued: +that not onely my selfe, and my company were all safe, but also by report +of his owne 3. Sauages which had bene with mee besides Manteo in that +voyage, that is to say, Tetepano, his sisters husband Eracano, and +Cossine, that the Chanoists and Mangoaks (whose name and multitude besides +their valour is terrible to all the rest of the prouinces) durst not for +the most part of them abide vs, and that those that did abide vs were +killed, and that we had taken Menatonon prisoner, and brought his sonne +that he best loued to Roanoak with mee, it did not a little asswage all +deuises against vs: on the other side, it made Ensenores opinions to be +receiued againe with greater respects. For he had often before tolde them, +and then renewed those his former speeches, both to the King and the rest, +that wee were the seruants of God, and that wee were not subiect to bee +destroyed by them: but contrariwise, that they amongst them that sought +our destruction, shoulde finde their owne, and not bee able to worke ours, +and that we being dead men were able to doe them more hurt, then now we +could do being aliue: an opinion very confidently at this day holden by +the wisest amongst them, and of their old men, as also, that they haue +bene in the night, being 100. miles from any of vs, in the aire shot at, +and stroken by some men of ours, that by sicknesse had died among them: +and many of them holde opinion, that we be dead men returned into the +world againe, and that wee doe not remaine dead but for a certaine time, +and that then we returne againe. + +All these speeches then againe grewe in ful credite with them, the King, +and all, touching vs, when hee sawe the small troupe returned againe, and +in that sort from those whose very names were terrible vnto them: But that +which made vp the matter on our side for that time was an accident, yea +rather (as all the rest was) the good prouidence of the Almightie for the +sauing of vs, which was this. + +Within certaine dayes after my returne from the sayd iourney, Menatonon +sent a messenger to visite his sonne the prisoner with me, and sent me +certaine pearle for a present, or rather, as Pemisapan tolde mee, for the +ransome of his sonne, and therefore I refused them: but the greatest cause +of his sending then, was to signifie vnto mee, that hee had commaunded +Okisko King of Weopomiok, to yeelde himselfe seruant, and homager, to the +great Weroanza of England, and after her to Sir Walter Raleigh: to +perfourme which commandement receiued from Menatonon, the sayde Okiosko +ioyntly with this Menatonons messenger sent foure and twentie of his +principallest men to Roanoak to Pemisapan, to signifie that they were +ready to perfourme the same, and so had sent those his men to let mee +knowe that from that time forwarde, hee, and his successours were to +acknowledge her Maiestie their onely Soueraigne, and next vnto her, as is +aforesayd. + +All which being done, and acknowledged by them all, in the presence of +Pemisapan his father, and all his Sauages in counsell then with him, it +did for the time thorowly (as it seemed) change him in disposition toward +vs: Insomuch as forthwith Ensenore wanne this resolution of him, that out +of hand he should goe about, and withall, to cause his men to set vp +weares foorthwith for vs: both which he at that present went in hande +withall, and did so labour the expedition of it, that in the end of April +he had sowed a good quantitie of ground, so much as had bene sufficient, +to haue fed our whole company (God blessing the grouth) and that by the +belly, for a whole yere: besides that he gaue vs a certaine plot of ground +for our selues to sowe. (M294) All which put vs in marueilous comfort, if +we could passe from Aprill vntill the beginning of Iuly, (which was to +haue bene the beginning of their haruest,) that then a newe supply out of +England or else our owne store would well ynough maintaine vs: All our +feare was of the two moneths betwixt, in which meane space if the Sauages +should not helpe vs with Chassaui, and Chyna, and that our weares should +faile vs, (as often they did) we might very well starue, notwithstanding +the growing corne, like the staruing horse in the stable, with the growing +grasse, as the prouerbe is: which wee very hardly had escaped, but onely +by the hand of God, as it pleased him to try vs. For within few dayes +after, as before is saide, Ensenore our friend died, who was no sooner +dead, but certaine of our great enemies about Pemisapan, as Osacan a +Weroance, Tanaquiny and Wanchese most principally, were in hand againe to +put their old practises in vse against vs, which were readily imbraced, +and all their former deuises against vs, reneued, and new brought in +question. But that of staruing vs, by their forbearing to sow, was broken +by Ensenore in his life, by hauing made the King all at one instant to sow +his ground, not onely in the Iland, but also at Dasamonquepeio in the +maine, within two leagues ouer against vs. Neuenhelesse there wanted no +store of mischieuous practises among them, and of all they resolued +principally of this following. + +(M295) First that Okisko king of Weopomeiok with the Mandoage should bee +mooued, and with great quantitie of copper intertained to the number of 7. +or 8. hundreth bowes, to enterprise the matter thus to be ordered. They of +Weopomeiok should be inuited to a certaine kind of moneths minde which +they doe vse to solemnise in their Sauage maner for any great personage +dead, and should haue bene for Ensenore. At this instant also should the +Mandoaks, who were a great people, with the Chesepians and their friends +to the number of 700. of them, be armed at a day appointed to the maine of +Dasamonquepeio, and there lying close at the signe of fires, which should +interchangeably be made on both sides, when Pemisapan with his troupe +aboue named should haue executed me, and some of our Weroances (as they +called all our principall officers,) the maine forces of the rest should +haue come ouer into the Island, where they went to haue dispatched the +rest of the company, whom they did imagine to finde both dismayed and +dispersed abroad in the Island, seeking of crabs and fish to liue withall. +The maner of their enterprise was this. + +Tarraquine and Andacon two principall men about Pemisapan, and very lustie +fellowes, with twentie more appointed to them had the charge of my person +to see an order taken for the same, which they ment should in this sort +haue bene executed. (M296) In the dead time of the night they would haue +beset my house, and put fire in the reedes that the same was couered with: +meaning (as it was likely) that my selfe would haue come running out of a +sudden amazed in my shirt without armes, vpon the instant whereof they +would haue knocked out my braines. + +The same order was giuen to certaine of his fellowes, for M. Heriots: so +for all the rest of our better sort, all our houses at one instant being +set on fire as afore is saide, and that as well for them of the fort, as +for vs at the towne. (M297) Now to the ende that we might be the fewer in +number together, and so bee the more easily dealt withall (for in deed +tenne of vs with our armes prepared, were a terrour to a hundred of the +best sort of them,) they agreed and did immediatly put it in practise, +that they should not for any copper sell vs any victuals whatsoeuer: +besides that in the night they should sende to haue our weares robbed, and +also to cause them to bee broken, and once being broken neuer to bee +repaired againe by them. By this meanes the King stood assured, that I +must bee enforced for lacke of sustenance there, to disband my company +into sundry places to liue vpon shell fish, for so the Sauages themselues +doe, going to Hatorask, Croatoan, and other places, fishing and hunting, +while their grounds be in sowing, and their corne growing: which failed +not his expectation. For the famine grew so extreeme among vs, our weares +failing vs of fish, that I was enforced to sende Captaine Stafford with +20. with him to Croatoan my Lord Admirals Iland to serue two turnes in +one, that is to say, to feede himselfe and his company, and also to keepe +watch if any shipping came vpon the coast to warne vs of the same. I sent +M. Pridiox with the pinnesse to Hatorask, and ten with him, with the +Prouost Marshal to liue there, and also to wait for shipping: also I sent +every weeke 16. or 20. of the rest of the company to the maine ouer +against vs, to liue of Casada and oysters. + +In the meane while Pemisapan, went of purpose to Dasamonquepeio for three +causes: The one to see his grounds there broken vp, and sowed for a second +crop: the other to withdrawe himselfe from my dayly sending to him for +supply of victuall for my company, for he was afraid to deny me any thing, +neither durst hee in my presence but by colour and with excuses, which I +was content to accept for the time, meaning in the ende as I had reason to +giue him the iumpe once for all: but in the meane whiles, as I had euer +done before, I and mine bare all wrongs, and accepted of all excuses. + +My purpose was to haue relied my selfe with Menatonon, and the Chaonists, +who in trueth as they are more valiant people and in greater number then +the rest, so are they more faithfull in their promises, and since my late +being there had giuen many tokens of earnest desire they had to ioyne in +perfect league with vs, and therefore were greatly offended with Pemisapan +and Weopomeiok for making him beleeue such tales of vs. + +The third cause of his going to Dasamonquepeio was to dispatch his +messengers to Weopomeiok, and to the Mandoages, as aforesaid, all which he +did with great imprest of copper in hand, making large promises to them of +greater spoile. + +The answere within few dayes after came from Weopomeiok, which was deuided +into two parts. First for the King Okisko, who denied to be of the partie +for himselfe, or any of his especiall followers, and therefore did +immediatly retire himselfe with his force into the maine: the other was +concerning the rest of the prouince who accepted of it: and in like sort +the Mandoags receiued the imprest. + +The day of their assembly aforesaid at Roanoak was appointed the 10. of +June: all which the premises were discouered by Skyco, the King Menatonon +his sonne my prisoner, who hauing once attempted to run away, I laid him +in the bylboes, threatening to cut off his head, whom I remitted at +Pemisapans request: whereupon hee being perswaded that hee was our enemie +to the death, he did not onely feed him with himselfe, but also made him +acquainted with all his practises. On the other side, the yong man finding +himselfe as well vsed at my hande, as I had meanes to shew, and that all +my company made much of him, he flatly discouered al vnto me, which also +afterwards was reueiled vnto me by one of Pemisapans owne men, that night +before he was slaine. + +These mischiefes being all instantly vpon me and my company to be put in +execution, it stood mee in hand to study howe to prevent them, and also to +saue all others, which were at that time as aforesaid so farre from me: +whereupon I sent to Pemisapan to put suspition out of his head, that I +meant presently to go to Croatoan, for that I had heard of the arriual of +our fleete, (though I in trueth had neither heard nor hoped for so good +adventure,) and that I meant to come by him, to borrow of his men to fish +for my company, and to hunt for me at Croatoan, as also to buy some foure +dayes prouision to serue for my voyage. + +He sent me word that he would himselfe come ouer to Roanoak, but from day +to day he deferred, onely to bring the Weopomeioks with him and the +Mandoags, whose time appointed was within eight dayes after. It was the +last of May 1586 when all his owne Sauages began to make their assembly at +Roanoak, at his commandement sent abroad vnto them, and I resolued not to +stay longer vpon his comming ouer, since he meant to come with so good +company, but thought good to go and visit him with such as I had, which I +resolued to do the next day: but that night I meant to giue them in the +Iland a camisado,(95) and at the instant to seize vpon all the canoas +about the Island, to keepe him from aduertisements. + +But the towne tooke the alarme before I meant it to them: the occasion was +this, I had sent the Master of the light horsemen, with a fewe with him, +to gather vp all the canoas in the setting of the Sun, and to take as many +as were going from vs to Dasamonquepeio, but to suffer any that came from +thence, to land. (M298) He met with a canoa, going from the shore, and +ouerthrew the canoa, and cut off two Sauages heads: this was not done so +secretly but he was discovered from the shore; whereupon the cry arose: +for in trueth they, priuy to their owne villanous purposes against vs, +held as good espial vpon vs, both day and night, as we did vpon them. + +The alarme giuen, they tooke themselues to their bowes, and we to our +armes: some three or foure of them at the first were slaine with our shot; +the rest fled into the woods. The next morning with the light horsemen and +one Canoa taking 25 with the Colonel of the Chesepians, and the Sergeant +maior, I went to Dasamonquepeio: and being landed, sent Pemisapan word by +one of his owne Sauages that met me at the shore, that I was going to +Croatoan, and meant to take him in the way to complaine vnto him of +Osocon, who the night past was conueying away my prisoner, whom I had +there present tied in an hand-locke. Heereupon the king did abide my +comming to him, and finding myselfe amidst seuen or eight of his +principall Weroances and followers, (not regarding any of the common sort) +I gaue the watch-word agreed vpon, (which was, Christ our victory) and +immediatly those his chiefe men and himselfe had by the mercy of God for +our deliuerance, that which they had purposed for vs. The king himselfe +being shot thorow by the Colonell with a pistoll, lying on the ground for +dead, and I looking as watchfully for the sauing of Manteos friends, as +others were busie that none of the rest should escape, suddenly he started +vp, and ran away as though he had not bene touched, insomuch as he ouerran +all the company, being by the way shot thwart the buttocks by mine Irish +boy with my petronell. (M299) In the end an Irish man seruing me, one +Nugent, and the deputy prouost, vndertooke him; and following him in the +woods, ouertooke him; and I in some doubt least we had lost both the king +and my man by our owne negligence to haue beene intercepted by the +Sauages, wee met him returning out of the woods with Pemisapans head in +his hand. + +This fell out the first of Iune 1586, and the eight of the same came +aduertisement to me from captaine Stafford, lying at my lord Admirals +Island, that he had discouered a great fleet of three and twentie sailes: +but whether they were friends or foes, he could not yet discerne. He +aduised me to stand vpon as good guard as I could. + +The ninth of the sayd moneth he himselfe came vnto me, hauing that night +before, and that same day trauelled by land twenty miles: and I most +truely report of him from the first to the last, hee was the gentleman +that neuer spared labour or perill either by land or water, faire weather +or foule, to performe any seruice committed vnto him. + +(M300) He brought me a letter from the Generall Sir Francis Drake, with a +most bountifull and honourable offer for the supply of our necessities to +the performance of the action wee were entred into; and that not only of +victuals, munition, and clothing, but also of barks, pinnesses, and boats; +they also by him to be victualled, manned and furnished to my +contentation. + +The tenth day he arriued in the road of our bad harborow: and comming +there to an anker, the eleuenth day I came to him, whom I found in deeds +most honourably to performe that which in writing and message he had most +curteously offered, he hauing aforehand propounded the matter to all the +captaines of his fleet, and got their liking and consent thereto. + +With such thanks vnto him and his captaines for his care both of vs and of +our action, not as the matter deserued, but as I could both for my company +and myselfe, I (being aforehand prepared what I would desire) craued at +his hands that it would please him to take with him into England a number +of weake and vnfit men for any good action, which I would deliuer to him; +and in place of them to supply me of his company with oare-men, +artificers, and others. + +That he would leaue vs so much shipping and victuall, as about August then +next following would cary me and all my company into England, when we had +discouered somewhat, that for lacke of needfull prouision in time left +with vs as yet remained vndone. + +That it woulde please him withall to leaue some sufficient Masters not +onely to cary vs into England, when time should be, but also to search the +coast for some better harborow, if there were any, and especially to helpe +vs to some small boats and oare-men. + +Also for a supply of calieuers, hand weapons, match and lead, tooles, +apparell, and such like. + +He hauing receiued these my requests, according to his vsuall commendable +maner of gouernment (as it was told me) calling his captaines to counsell; +the resolution was that I should send such of my officers of my company as +I vsed in such matters, with their notes, to goe aboord with him; which +were the Master of the victuals, the Keeper of the store, and the +Vicetreasurer: to whom he appointed forthwith for me The Francis, being a +very proper barke of 70 tun, and tooke present order for bringing of +victual aboord her for 100 men for foure moneths, with all my other +demands whatsoeuer, to the vttermost. + +And further, he appointed for me two pinnesses, and foure small boats: and +that which was to performe all his former liberality towards vs, was that +he had gotten the full assents of two of as sufficient experimented +Masters as were any in his fleet, by iudgment of them that knew them, with +very sufficient guide to tary with me, and to employ themselues most +earnestly in the action, as I should appoint them, vntill the terme which +I promised of our returne into England againe. The names of one of those +Masters was Abraham Kendall, the other Griffith Herne. + +While these things were in hand, the prouision aforesaid being brought, +and in bringing aboord, my sayd Masters being also gone aboord, my sayd +barks hauing accepted of their charge, and mine owne officers, with others +in like sort of my company with them (all which was dispatched by the sayd +Generall the 12 of the sayde moneth) the 13 of the same there arose such +an vnwoonted storme, and continued foure dayes, that had like to haue +driuen all on shore, if the Lord had not held his holy hand ouer them, and +the Generall very prouidently foreseene the woorst himselfe, then about my +dispatch putting himselfe aboord: but in the end hauing driuen sundry of +the fleet to put to Sea the Francis also with all my provisions, my two +Masters, and my company aboord, she was seene to be free from the same, +and to put cleere to Sea. + +This storme hauing continued from the 13 to the 16 of the moneth, and thus +my barke put away as aforesayd, the Generall comming ashore made a new +proffer vnto me; which was a ship of 170 tunne, called The barke Bonner, +with a sufficient Master and guide to tary with me the time appointed, and +victualled sufficiently to cary me and my company into England, with all +prouisions as before: but he tolde me that he would not for any thing +vndertake to haue her brought into our harbour, and therefore he was to +leaue her in the road, and to leaue the care of the rest vnto my selfe, +and aduised me to consider with my company of our case, and to deliuer +presently vnto him in writing what I would require him to doe for vs; +which being within his power, he did assure me aswell for his Captaines as +for himselfe, shoulde be most willingly performed. + +Heereupon calling such Captaines and gentlemen of my company as then were +at hand, who were all as priuy as my selfe to the Generals offer; their +whole request was to me, that considering the case that we stood in, the +weaknesse of our company, the small number of the same, the carying away +of our first appointed barke, with those two especiall Masters, with our +principall provisions in the same, by the very hand of God as it seemed, +stretched out to take vs from thence; considering also, that his second +offer, though most honourable of his part, yet of ours not to be taken, +insomuch as there was no possibility for her with any safety to be brought +into the harbour: seeing furthermore, our hope for supply with Sir Richard +Greenuill, so vndoubtedly promised vs before Easter, not yet come, neither +then likely to come this yeere, considering the doings in England for +Flanders, and also for America, that therefore I would resolue my selfe +with my company to goe into England in that fleet, and accordingly to make +request to the Generall in all our names, that he would be pleased to giue +vs present passage with him. Which request of ours by my selfe deliuered +vnto him, hee most readily assented vnto: and so he sending immediatly his +pinnesses vnto our Island for the fetching away of a few that there were +left with our baggage, the weather was so boisterous, and the pinnesses so +often on ground, that the most of all we had, with all our Cards, Books +and writings were by the Sailers cast ouerboard, the greater number of the +fleet being much agrieued with their long and dangerous abode in that +miserable road. + +From whence the Generall in the name of the Almighty, weying his ankers +(hauing bestowed vs among his fleet) for the reliefe of whom hee had in +that storme sustained more perill of wracke then in all his former most +honourable actions against the Spanyards, with praises vnto God for all, +set saile the nineteenth of Iune 1596, and arriued in Portsmouth the seuen +and twentieth of Iuly the same yeere. + +END OF VOL. XIII., PART I. + + + + + +PART II. + + + + +XXVIII. The third voyage made by a ship sent in the yeere 1586, to the +reliefe of the Colony planted in Virginia at the sole charges of Sir +Walter Ralegh. + + +In the yeere of our Lord 1586 Sir Walter Ralegh at his owne charge +prepared a ship of an hundred tunne, fraighted with all maner of things in +most plentifull maner, for the supply and reliefe of his Colony then +remaining in Virginia: but before they set saile from England it was after +Easter, so that our Colony halfe despaired of the comming of any supply: +wherefore euery man prepared for himselfe, determining resolutely to spend +the residue of their life time in that countrey. And for the better +performance of this their determination, they sowed, planted, and set such +things as were necessary for their reliefe in so plentifull a maner as +might haue sufficed them two yeeres without any further labour. Thus +trusting to their owne haruest, they passed the Summer till the tenth of +Iune: at which time their corne which they had sowed was within one +fortnight of reaping: but then it happened that Sir Francis Drake in his +prosperous returne from the sacking of Sant Domingo, Cartagena, and Saint +Augustine, determined in his way homeward to visit his countreymen the +English Colony then remaining in Virginia. So passing along the coasts of +Florida, he fell with the parts where our English Colony inhabited: and +hauing espied some of that company, there be ankered and went aland, where +he conferred with them of their state and welfare, and how things had +passed with them. They answered him that they liued all; but hitherto in +some scarsity: and as yet could heare of no supply out of England: +therefore they requested him that hee would leaue with them some two or +three ships, that if in some reasonable time they heard not out of +England, they might then returne themselues. Which hee agreed to. Whilest +some were then writing their letters to send into England, and some others +making reports of the accidents of their trauels to ech other, some on +land, some on boord, a great storme arose, and droue the most of their +fleet from their ankers to Sea, in which ships at that instant were the +chiefest of the English Colony: the rest on land perceiuing this, hasted +to those three sailes which were appointed to be left there; and for feare +they should be left behinde they left all things confusedly, as if they +had bene chased from thence by a mighty army: and no doubt so they were; +for the hand of God came vpon them for the cruelty and outrages committed +by some of them against the natiue inhabitants of that countrey. + +(M301) Immediatly after the departing of our English Colony out of this +paradise of the world, the ship abouementioned sent and set forth at the +charges of Sir Walter Ralegh and his direction, arriued at Hatorask; who +after some time spent in seeking our Colony vp in the countrey, and not +finding them, returned with all the aforesayd prouision into England. + +(M302) About foureteene or fifteene dayes after the departure of the +aforesayd shippe, Sir Richard Grinuile Generall of Virginia, accompanied +with three shippes well appointed for the same voyage, arriued there; who +not finding the aforesaid shippe according to his expectation, nor hearing +any newes of our English Colony there seated, and left by him anno 1585, +himselfe travelling vp into diuers places of the countrey, aswell to see +if he could heare any newes of the Colony left there by him the yeere +before, vnder the charge of Master Lane his deputy, as also to discouer +some places of the countrey; but after some time spent therein, not +hearing any of them, and finding the places which they inhabited(96) +(M303) desolate, yet vnwilling to loose the possesion of the countrey +which Englishmen had so long held: after good deliberation, hee determined +to leaue some men behinde to reteine possession of the Countrey: whereupon +he landed fifteene men in the Isle of Roanoak, furnished plentifully with +all maner of prouisions for two yeeres, and so departed for England. + +Not long after he fell with the Isles of Acores, on some of which Islands +he landed, and spoiled the townes of all such thinges as were woorth +cariage, where also he tooke diuers Spanyards. With these and many other +exploits done him in this voyadge, aswell outward as homeward, he returned +into England. + + + + +XXIX. A briefe and true report of the new found land of Virginia: of the +commodities there found, and to be raised, aswell merchantable as others: +Written by Thomas Heriot, seruant to Sir Walter Ralegh, a member of the +Colony, and there imployed in discouering a full tweluemonth. + + +Ralfe Lane one of her Majesties Esquiers, and Gouernour of the Colony in +Virginia, aboue mentioned, for the time there resident, to the gentle +Reader wisheth all happinesse in the Lord. + +Albeit (gentle Reader) the credit of the reports in this Treatise +contained can little be furthered by the testimony of one as my selfe, +through affection iudged partiall, though without desert; neuerthelesse, +forasmuch as I haue bene requested by some my particular friends, who +conceiue more rightly of me, to deliuer freely my knowledge of the same, +not onely for the satisfying of them, but also for the true information of +any other whosoeuer, that comes not with a preiudicate minde to the +reading thereof: thus much vpon my credit I am to affirme, that things +vniuersally are so truely set downe in this Treatise by the authour +thereof, an actor in the Colony, and a man no lesse for his honesty then +learning commendable, as that I dare boldly auouch, it may very well passe +with the credit of trueth euen amongst the most true relations of this +age. Which as for mine owne part I am ready any way with my word to +acknowledge, so also (of the certaintie thereof assured by mine owne +experience) with this publique assertion I doe affirme the same. Farewell +in the Lord. + +To the Aduenturers, Fauourers, and Welwillers of the enterprise for the +inhabiting and planting in Virginia. + +Since the first vndertaking by Sir Walter Ralegh to deale in the action of +discouering of that countrey which is now called and knowen by the name of +Virginia, many voyages hauing beene thither made at sundry times to his +great charge; as first in the yere 1584, and afterwards in the yeres 1585, +1586, and now of late this yeere 1587: there haue bene diuers and variable +reports with some slanderous and shameful speeches bruted abroad by many +that returned from thence: especially of that discouery which was made by +the Colony transported by Sir Richard Grinuile in the yere 1585, being of +all others the most principall, and as yet of most effect, the time of +their abode in the countrey being a whole yere, when as in the other +voyage before they stayed but sixe weeks, and the others after were onely +for supply and transportation, nothing more being discouered than had bene +before. Which reports haue not done a little wrong to many that otherwise +would haue also fauoured and aduentured in the action, to the honour and +benefit of our nation, besides the particular profit and credit which +would redound to themselues the dealers therein, as I hope by the sequel +of euents, to the shame of those that haue auouched the contrary, shall be +manifest, if you the aduenturers, fauourers, and welwillers doe but either +increase in number, or in opinion continue, or hauing beene doubtfull, +renew your good liking and furtherance to deale therein according to the +woorthinesse thereof already found, and as you shall vnderstand hereafter +to be requisite. Touching which woorthinesse through cause of the +diuersity of relations and reports, many of your opinions could not be +firme, nor the minds of some that are well disposed be setled in any +certainty. + +I haue therefore thought it good, being one that haue beene in the +discouerie, and in dealing with the naturall inhabitants specially +imployed: and hauing therefore seene and knowen more then the ordinary, to +impart so much vnto you of the fruits of our labours, as that you may know +how iniuriously the enterprise is slandered, and that in publique maner at +this present, chiefly for two respects. + +First, that some of you which are ignorant or doubtfull of the state +thereof, may see that there is sufficient cause why the chiefe enterpriser +with the fauour of her Maiesty, notwithstanding such reports, hath not +onely since continued the action by sending into the countrey againe, and +replanting this last yeere a new Colony, but is also ready, according as +the times and meanes will affoord, to follow and prosecute the same. + +Secondly, that you seeing and knowing the continuance of the action, by +the view hereof you may generally know and learne what the countrey is, +and thereupon consider how your dealing therein, if it proceed, may +returne you profit and gaine, be it either by inhabiting and planting, or +otherwise in furthering thereof. + +And least that the substance of my relation should be doubtfull vnto you, +as of others by reason of their diuersitie, I will first open the cause in +a few words, wherefore they are so different, referring my selfe to your +fauourable constructions, and to be adiudged of, as by good consideration +you shall finde cause. + +Of our company that returned, some for their misdemeanour and ill dealing +in the countrey haue bene there worthily punished, who by reason of their +bad natures, haue maliciously not onely spoken ill of their Gouernours, +but for their sakes slandered the countrey it selfe. The like also haue +those done which were of their consort. + +Some being ignorant of the state thereof, notwithstanding since their +returne amongst their friends and acquaintance, and also others, +especially if they were in company where they might not be gainsayd, would +seeme to know so much as no men more, and make no men so great trauellers +as themselues. They stood so much as it may seeme, vpon their credit and +reputation, that hauing bene a tweluemoneth in the countrey, it would haue +bene a great disgrace vnto them, as they thought, if they could not haue +sayd much, whether it were true or false. Of which some haue spoken of +more then euer they saw, or otherwise knew to be there. Other some haue +not bene ashamed to make absolute deniall of that, which although not by +them, yet by others is most certainly and there plentifully knowen, and +other some make difficulties of those things they haue no skill of. + +The cause of their ignorance was, in that they were of that many that were +neuer out of the Island where we were seated, or not farre, or at the +least wise in few places els, during the time of our abode in the country: +or of that many, that after gold and siluer was not so soone found, as it +was by them looked for, had litle or no care of any other thing but to +pamper their bellies: or of that many which had litle vnderstanding, lesse +discretion, and more tongue then was needfull or requisite. + +Some also were of a nice bringing vp, only in cities or townes, or such as +neuer (as I may say) had seene the world before. Because there were not to +be found any English cities, nor such faire houses, nor at their owne wish +any of their old accustomed dainty food, nor any soft beds of downe or +feathers, the country was to them miserable, and their reports thereof +according. + +Because my purpose was but in briefe to open the cause of the variety of +such speeches, the particularities of them, and of many enuious, +malicious, and slanderous reports and deuices els, by our owne countreymen +besides, as trifles that are not worthy of wise men to be thought vpon, I +meane not to trouble you withall, but will passe to the commodities, the +substance of that which I haue to make relation of vnto you. + +The Treatise whereof, for your more ready view and easier vnderstanding, I +will diuide into three speciall parts. In the first I will make +declaration of such commodities there already found or to be raised, which +will not onely serue the ordinary turnes of you which are and shall be the +planters and inhabitants, but such an ouerplus sufficiently to be yeelded, +or by men of skill to be prouided, as by way of traffique and exchange +with our owne nation of England, will enrich yourselues the prouiders: +those that shall deale with you, the enterprisers in generall, and greatly +profit our owne countrey men, to supply them with most things which +heretofore they haue beene faine to prouide either of strangers or of our +enemies, which commodities, for distinction sake, I call Merchantable. + +In the second I will set downe all the commodities which we know the +countrey by our experience doth yeeld of it selfe for victuall and +sustenance of mans life, such as are vsually fed vpon by the inhabitants +of the countrey, as also by vs during the time we were there. + +In the last part I will make mention generally of such other commodities +besides, as I am able to remember, and as I shall thinke behoouefull for +those that shall inhabit, and plant there to know of, which specially +concerne building, as also some other necessary vses: with a briefe +description of the nature and manners of the people of the countrey. + + + +The first part of Merchantable commodities. + + +Silke of grasse, or Grasse silke. There is a kind of grasse in the +country, vpon the blades whereof there groweth very good silke in forme of +a thin glittering skin to be stript off. It groweth two foot and an halfe +highe or better: the blades are about two foot in length, and halfe an +inch broad. The like groweth in Persia, which is in the selfe same climate +as Virginia, of which very many of the Silke works that come from thence +into Europe are made. Hereof if it be planted and ordered as in Persia, it +cannot in reason be otherwise, but that there will rise in short time +great profit to the dealers therein, seeing there is so great vse and vent +thereof aswel in our countrey as elswhere. And by the meanes of sowing and +planting it in good ground, it will be farre greater, better, and more +plentifull then it is. Although notwithstanding there is great store +thereof in many places of the countrey growing naturally and wild, which +also by proofe here in England, in making a piece of Silke grogran, we +found to be excellent good. + +Worme silke. In many of our iourneys we founde Silkewormes faire and +great, as big as our ordinary Walnuts. Although it hath not bene our hap +to haue found such plenty, as elswhere to be in the countrey we haue heard +of, yet seeing that the countrey doth naturally breed and nourish them, +there is no doubt but if arte be added in planting of Mulberie trees, and +others fit for them in commodious places, for their feeding and +nourishing, and some of them carefull gathered and husbanded in that sort, +as by men of skil is knowen to be necessary: there wil rise as great +profit in time to the Virginians, as thereof doth now to the Persians, +Turks, Italians and Spaniards. + +Flaxe and Hempe. The trueth is, that of Hempe and Flaxe there is no greate +store in any one place together, by reason it is not planted but as the +soile doth yeeld of it selfe: and howsoeuer the leafe and stemme or stalke +do differ from ours, the stuffe by iudgement of men of skill is altogether +as good as ours: and if not, as farther proofe should finde otherwise, we +haue that experience of the soile, as that there cannot be shewed any +reason to the contrary, but that it will grow there excellent well, and by +planting will be yeelded plentifully, seeing there is so much ground +whereof some may well be applied to such purposes. What benefit heereof +may grow in cordage and linnens who cannot easily vnderstand? + +Allum. There is a veine of earth along the sea coast for the space of +fortie or fiftie miles, whereof by the iudgement of some that haue made +triall here in England, is made good Allum, of that kind which is called +Roch allum. The richnesse of such a commodity is so well knowen, that I +need not to say any thing thereof. The same earth doth also yeeld White +coprasse, Nitrum, and Alumen plumeum, but nothing so plentifully as the +common Allum, which be also of price and profitable. + +Wapeih. A kind of earth so called by the naturall inhabitants, very like +to Terra sigillata, and hauing bene refined, it hath bene found by some of +our Physicians and Chyrurgians, to be of the same kinde of vertue, and +more effectuall. The inhabitants vse it very much for the cure of sores +and wounds: there is in diuers places great plenty, and in some places of +a blew sort. + +Pitch, Tarre, Rozen and Turpentine. There are those kinds of trees which +yeeld them abundantly and great store. In the very same Island where we +were seated, being fifteene miles of length, and fiue or sixe miles in +breadth, there are few trees els but of the same kinde, the whole Island +being full. + +Sassafras, called by the inhabitants Winauk, a kind of wood of most +pleasant and sweet smell, and of most rare vertues in physicke for the +cure of many diseases. It is found by experience to be far better and of +more vses then the wood which is called Guaiacum, or Lignum vitae. For the +description, the maner of vsing, and the manifold vertues thereof, I refer +you to the booke of Monardes, translated and entituled in English, The +joyfull newes from the West Indies. + +Cedar. A very sweet wood, and fine timber, whereof if nests of chests be +there made, or timber thereof fitted for sweet and fine bedsteds, tables, +desks, lutes, virginals, and many things els, (of which there hath bene +proofe made already) to make vp fraight with other principall commodities, +will yeeld profit. + +Wine. There are two kindes of grapes that the soile doth yeeld naturally, +the one is small and sowre, of the ordinary bignesse as ours in England, +the other farre greater and of himselfe lushious sweet. When they are +planted and husbanded as they ought, a principall commodity of wines by +them may be raised. + +Oile. There are two sorts of Walnuts, both holding oile; but the one farre +more plentifull then the other. When there are mils and other deuices for +the purpose, a commodity of them may be raised, because there are infinite +store. There are also three seuerall kindes of berries in the forme of +Oke-akornes, which also by the experience and vse of the inhabitants, we +find to yeeld very good and sweet oile. Furthermore, the beares of the +countrey are commonly very fat, and in some places there are many. Their +fatnesse, because it is so liquid, may well be termed oile, and hath many +speciall vses. + +Furres. All along the Sea coast there are great store of Otters, which +being taken by weares and other engines made for the purpose, wil yeeld +good profit. We hope also of Marterne furres, and make no doubt by the +relation of the people, but that in some places of the countrey there are +store, although there were but two skinnes that came to our hands. +Luzernes also we haue vnderstanding of, although for the time we saw none. + +Deere skinnes dressed after the manner of Chamoes, or vndressed, are to be +had of the naturall inhabitants thousands yerely by way of traffike for +trifles, and no more waste or spoile of Deere then is and hath bene +ordinarily in time before. + +Ciuet-cats. In our trauels there was found one to haue bin killed by a +Sauage or inhabitant, and in another place the smel where one or more had +lately bene before, whereby we gather, besides then by the relation of the +people, that there are some in the country: good profit will rise by them. + +Iron. In two places of the countrey specially, one about fourescore, and +the other six score miles from the fort or place where we dwelt, we found +nere the water side the ground to be rocky, which by the triall of a +Minerall man was found to holde iron richly. It is found in many places of +the countrey els: I know nothing to the contrary, but that it may be +allowed for a good merchantable commodity, considering there the small +charge for the labour and feeding of men, the infinite store of wood, the +want of wood and deereness thereof in England, and the necessity of +ballasting of ships. + +Copper. An hundred and fifty miles into the maine in two townes we found +with the inhabitants diuers small plates of Copper, that had bene made as +we vnderstood by the inhabitants that dwell further into the countrey, +where as they say are mountaines and riuers that yeeld also white graines +of mettal, which is to be deemed Siluer. For confirmation whereof, at the +time of our first arriuall in the countrey, I saw, with some others with +me, two small pieces of Siluer grosly beaten, about the weight of a +testron, hanging in the eares of a Wiroans or chiefe lord that dwelt about +fourescore miles from vs: of whom through inquiry, by the number of dayes +and the way, I learned that it had come to his hands from the same place +or neere, where I after vnderstood the Copper was made, and the white +graines of metal found. The aforesayd Copper we also found by tryall to +holde Siluer. + +Pearle. Sometimes in feeding on Muscles we found some Pearle: but it was +our happe to meet with ragges, or of a pide colour: not hauing yet +discouered those places where we heard of better and more plenty. (M304) +One of our company, a man of skill in such matters had gathered together +from among the Sauage people about fiue thousand: of which number he be +chose as many as made a faire chaine, which for their likenesse and +vniformity in roundnesse, orientnesse, and pidenesse of many excellent +colours, with equality in greatnesse, were very faire and rare: and had +therefore beene presented to her Maiesty, had we not by casualty, and +through extremity of a storme lost them, with many things els in comming +away from the countrey. + +Sweet gummes of diuers kinds, and many other Apothecary drugges, of which +we will make speciall mention, when we shall receiue it from such men of +skill in that kinde, that in taking reasonable paines shal discouer them +more particularly then we haue done, and then now I can make relation of, +for want of the examples I had prouided and gathered, and are now lost, +with other things by casualty before mentioned. + +Dies of diuers kinds: There is Shoemake well knowen, and vsed in England +for blacke: the seede of an herbe called Wasebur, little small roots +called Chappacor, and the barke of the tree called by the inhabitants +Tangomockonomindge: which dies are for diuers sorts of red: their +goodnesse for our English clothes remains yet to be prooued. The +inhabitants vse them only for the dying of haire, and colouring of their +faces, and mantles made of Deere skinnes: and also for the dying of rushes +to make artificiall works withall in their mats and baskets, hauing no +other thing besides that they account of, apt to vse them for if they will +not prooue merchantable, there is no doubt but the planters there shall +finde apt vses for them, as also for other colours which we know to be +there. + +Woad: a thing of so great vent and vses amongst English Diers, which can +not be yeelded sufficiently in our owne countrey for spare of ground, may +be planted in Virginia, there being ground enough. The growth thereof need +not to be doubted, when as in the Islands of the Acores it groweth +plentifully, which are in the same climate. So likewise of Madder. + +We carried thither Suger-canes to plant, which being not so well preserued +as was requisite, and besides the time of the yeere being past for their +setting when we arriued, we could not make that proofe of them as we +desired. Notwithstanding, seeing that they grow in the same climate, in +the South part of Spaine, and in Barbary, our hope in reason may yet +continue. So likewise for Orenges and Limmons. There may be planted also +Quinses. Whereby may grow in reasonable time, if the action be deligently +prosecuted, no small commodities in Sugers, Suckets, and Marmelades. + +Many other commodities by planting may there also be raised, which I leaue +to your discreet and gentle considerations: and many also may be there, +which yet we haue not discouered. Two more commoditie of great value, one +of certeinty, and the other in hope, not to be planted, but there to be +raised and in short time to be prouided, and prepared, I might haue +specified. So likewise of those commodities already set downe I might haue +sayd more: as of the particular places where they are found, and best to +be planted and prepared: by what meanes, and in what reasonable space of +time they might be raised to profit, and in what proportion: but because +others then welwillers might be there withall acquainted, not to the good +of the action, I haue wittingly omitted them: knowing that to those that +are well disposed, I haue vttered, according to my promise and purpose, +for this part sufficient. + + + +The second part of such commodities as Virginia is knowen to yeeld for +victuall and sustenance of mans life, vsually fed vpon by the naturall +inhabitants; as also by vs, during the time of our abode: and first of +such as are sowed and husbanded. + + +Pagatowr, a kinde of graine so called by the inhabitants: the same in the +West Indies is called Mayz: English men call it Guinywheat or +Turkey-wheat, according to the names of the countreys from whence the like +hath beene brought. The graine is about the bignesse of our ordinary +English peaze, and not much different in forme and shape: but of diuers +colours: some white, some red, some yellow, and some blew. All of them +yeeld a very white and sweet flowre: being vsed according to its kinde, it +maketh a very good bread. We made of the same in the countrey some Mault, +whereof was brewed as good Ale as was to be desired. So likewise by the +helpe of Hops, therof may be made as good Beere. It is a graine of +maruellous great increase: of a thousand, fifteene hundred, and some two +thousand folde. There are three sorts, of which two are ripe in eleuen and +twelue weeks at the most, sometimes in tenne, after the time they are set, +and are then of height in stalke about sixe or seuen foot. The other sort +is ripe in fourteene, and is about tenne foot high, of the stalks some +beare foure heads, some three, some one, and some two: euery head +containing fiue, sixe, or seuen hundred graines, within a few more or +lesse. Of these graines, besides bread, the inhabitants make victuall, +either by parching them, or seething them whole vntill they be broken: or +boiling the flowre with water into a pap. + +Okingier, called by vs Beanes, because in greatnesse and partly in shape +they are like to the beanes in England, sauing that they are flatter, of +more diuers colours, and some pide. The leafe also of the stemme is much +different. In taste they are altogether as good as our English peaze. + +Wickonzowr, called by vs Peaze, in respect of the Beanes, for distinction +sake, because they are much lesse, although in forme they little differ: +but in goodnesse of taste much like, and are far better then our English +Peaze. Both the beanes and peaze are ripe in ten weeks after they are set. +They make them victuall either by boiling them all to pieces into a broth, +or boiling them whole vntill they be soft, and beginne to breake, as is +vsed in England, either by themselues, or mixtly together: sometime they +mingle of the Wheat with them: sometime also, being whole sodden, they +bruse or punne them in a morter, and thereof make loaues or lumps of +doughish bread, which they vse to eat for variety. + +Macocquer, according to their seueral formes, called by vs Pompious, +Melons, and Gourds, because they are of the like formes as those in +England. In Virginia such of seuerall formes are of one taste, and very +good, and do also spring from one seed. There are of two sorts: one is +ripe in the space of a moneth, and the other in two moneths. + +There is an herbe which in Dutch is called Melden. Some of those that I +describe it vnto take it to be a kinde of Orage: it groweth about foure or +fiue foot high: of the seede thereof they make a thicke broth, and pottage +of a very good taste: of the stalke by burning into ashes they make a +kinde of salt earth, wherewithall many vse sometimes to season their +broths: other salt they know not. We ourselues vsed the leaues for +pot-herbs. + +There is also another great herbe, in forme of a Marigolde, about sixe +foot in height, the head with a floure is a spanne in bredth. Some take it +to be Planta Solis: of the seeds hereof they make both a kinde of bread +and broth. + +All the aforesayde commodities for victuall are set or sowed, sometimes in +grounds apart and seuerally by themselues, but for the most part together +in one ground mixtly: the maner thereof, with the dressing and preparing +of the ground, because I will note vnto you the fertility of the soile, I +thinke good briefly to describe. + +The ground they neuer fatten with mucke, dung, or any other thing, neither +plow nor digge it as we in England, but onely prepare it in sort as +followeth. A few days before they sowe or set, the men with woodden +instruments made almost in forme of mattocks or hoes with long handles: +the women with short peckers or parers, because they vse them sitting, of +a foot long, and about fiue inches in bredth, doe onely break the vpper +part of the ground to raise vp the weeds, grasse, and old stubbes of corne +stalks with their roots. The which after a day or two dayes drying in the +Sunne, being scrapt vp into small heaps, to saue them labour for carrying +them away, they burne into ashes. And whereas some may thinke that they +vse the ashes for to better the ground, I say that then they would either +disperse the ashes abroad, which wee observed they do not, except the +heaps be too great, or els would take speciall care to set their corne +where the ashes lie, which also wee finde they are carelesse of. And this +is all the husbanding of their ground that they vse. + +Then their setting or sowing is after this maner. First for their corne, +beginning in one corner of the plot, with a pecker they make a hole, +wherein they put foure graines, with care that they touch not one another +(about an inch asunder) and couer them with the molde againe: and so +thorowout the whole plot making such holes, and vsing them after such +maner, but with this regard, that they make them in ranks, euery rank +differing from other halfe a fadome or a yard, and the holes also in euery +ranke as much. By this meanes there is a yard spare ground betweene euery +hole: where according to discretion here and there, they set as many +Beanes and Peaze: in diuers places also among the seeds of Macocquer, +Melden, and Planta solis. + +The ground being thus set according to the rate by vs experimented, an +English acre conteining forty pearches in length, and foure in breadth, +doth there yeeld in croppe or ofcome of corne Beanes and Peaze, at the +least two hundred London bushels, besides the Macocquer, Melden, and +Planta solis; when as in England forty bushels of our Wheat yeelded out of +such an acre is thought to be much. + +I thought also good to note this vnto you, that you which shall inhabit, +and plant there, may know how specially that countrey corne is there to be +preferred before ours: besides, the manifold wayes in applying it to +victuall, the increase is so much, that small labor and paines is needful +in respect of that which must be vsed for ours. For this I can assure you +that according to the rate we haue made proofe of, one man may prepare and +husband so much ground (hauing once borne corne before) with lesse then +foure and twenty houres labour, as shall yeeld him victual in a large +proportion for a tweluemoneth, if he haue nothing els but that which the +same ground will yeeld, and of that kinde onely which I haue before spoken +of: the sayd ground being also but fiue and twenty yards square. And if +need require but that there is ground enough, there might be raised out of +one and the selfsame ground two haruests or ofcomes: for they sow or set, +and may at any time when they thinke good, from the midst of March vntill +the end of Iune: so that they also set when they haue eaten of their first +croppe. In some places of the countrey notwithstanding they haue two +haruests, as we haue heard, out of one and the same ground. + +For English corne neuerthelesse, whether to use or not to use it, you that +inhabit may doe as you shall haue further cause to thinke best. Of the +growth you need not to doubt: for Barley, Oates, and Peaze, we haue seene +proofe of, not being purposely sowen, but fallen casually in the woorst +sort of ground, and yet to be as faire as any we haue euer seene heere in +England. But of Wheat, because it was musty, and had taken salt water, we +could make no triall: and of Rie we had none. This much haue I digressed, +and I hope not vnnecessarily: now will I returne againe to my course, and +intreat of that which yet remaineth, appertaining to this chapter. + +(M305) There is an herbe which is sowed apart by it selfe, and is called +by the inhabitants Vppowoc: in the West Indies it hath diuers names, +according to the seuerall places and countreys where it groweth and is +vsed: the Spanyards generally call it Tabacco. The leaues thereof being +dried and brought into pouder, they vsed to take the fume or smoake +thereof, by sucking it thorow pipes made of clay, into their stomacke and +heade; from whence it purgeth superflous fleame and other grosse humours, +and openeth all the pores and passages of the body; by which meanes the +vse thereof not onely preserveth the body from obstructions, but also (if +any be, so that they haue not bene of two long continuance) in short time +breaketh them: whereby their bodies are notably preserued in health, and +know not many grieuous diseases, wherewithall we in England are often +times afflicted. + +This Vppowoc is of so precious estimation amongst them, that they thinke +their gods are maruellously delighted therewith: whereupon sometime they +make hallowed fires, and cast some of the pouder therein for a sacrifice: +being in a storm vpon the waters, to pacifie their gods, they cast some vp +into the aire and into the water: so a weare for fish being newly set vp, +they cast some therein and into the aire; also after an escape of danger, +they cast some into the aire likewise: but all done with strange gestures, +stamping, sometime dancing, clapping of hands, holding vp of hands, and +staring vp into the heauens, vttering therewithall and chattering strange +words and noises. + +We our selues, during the time we were there, vsed to sucke it after their +maner, as also since our returne, and haue found many rare and wonderfull +experiments of the vertues thereof: of which the relation would require a +volume by it selfe: the vse of it by so many of late men and women of +great calling, as els, and some learned Physicians also, is sufficient +witnesse. + +And these are all the commodities for sustenance of life, that I know and +can remember, they vse to husband: all els that follow, are found growing +naturally or wilde. + + +Of Roots. + + +Openauk are a kinde of roots of round forme, some of the bignesse of +Walnuts, some farre greater, which are found in moist and marish grounds +growing many together one by another in ropes, as though they were +fastened with a string. Being boiled or sodden, they are very good meat. +(M306) Monardes calleth these roots, Beads or Pater nostri of Santa +Helena.(97) + +Okeepenauk are also of round shape, found in dry grounds: some are of the +bignesse of a mans head. They are to be eaten as they are taken out of the +ground: for by reason of their drinesse they will neither rost nor seethe. +Their taste is not so good as of the former roots: notwithstanding for +want of bread, and sometimes for variety the inhabitants vse to eat them +with fish or flesh, and in my iudgement they do as well as the housholde +bread made of Rie here in England. + +Kaishucpenauk, a white kinde of roots about the bignesse of hennes egges, +and neere of that forme: their taste was not so good to our seeming as of +the other, and therefore their place and maner of growing not so much +cared for by vs: the inhabitants notwithstanding vsed to boile and eat +many. + +Tsinaw, a kind of root much like vnto that which in England is called the +China root brought from the East Indies. And we know not any thing to the +contrary but that it may be of the same kinde. These roots grow many +together in great clusters, and do bring foorth a brier stalke, but the +leafe in shape farre vnlike: which being supported by the trees it groweth +neerest vnto, will reach or climbe to the top of the highest. From these +roots while they be new or fresh, being chapt into small pieces, and +stampt, is strained with water a iuice that maketh bread, and also being +boiled, a very good spoonmeat in maner of a gelly, and is much better in +taste, if it be tempered with oile. This Tsinaw is not of that sort, which +by some was caused to be brought into England for the China root; for it +was discouered since, and is in vse as is aforesayd: but that which was +brought hither is not yet knowen, neither by vs nor by the inhabitants to +serue for any vse or purpose, although the roots in shape are very like. + +Coscushaw some of our company tooke to be that kinde of root which the +Spanyards in the West Indies call Cassauy, whereupon also many called it +by that name: it groweth in very muddy pooles, and moist grounds. Being +dressed according to the countrey maner, it maketh a good bread, and also +a good spoonmeat, and is vsed very much by the inhabitants. (M307) The +iuice of this root is poison, and therefore heed must be taken before any +thing be made therewithall: either the roots must be first sliced and +dried in the Sunne, or by the fire, and then being punned into floure, +will make good bread: or els while they are greene they are to be pared, +cut in pieces, and stampt: loaues of the same to be layd nere or ouer the +fire vntill it be sowre; and then being well punned againe, bread or +spoonmeat very good in taste and holesome may be made thereof. + +Habascon is a root of hote taste, almost of the forme and bignesse of a +Parsnip: of it selfe it is no victuall, but onely a helpe, being boiled +together with other meats. + +There are also Leeks, differing little from ours in England, that grow in +many places of the countrey; of which, when we came in places where they +were, we gathered and eat many, but the naturall inhabitants neuer. + + +Of fruits. + + +Chesnuts there are in diuers places great store: some they vse to eat raw, +some they stampe and boile to make spoonmeat, and with some being sodden, +they make such a maner of dough bread as they vse of their beanes before +mentioned. + +Walnuts. There are two kinds of Walnuts, and of them infinite store: in +many places where are very great woods for many miles together, the third +part of trees are Walnut trees. The one kind is of the same taste and +forme, or little differing from ours of England, but that they are harder +and thicker shelled: the other is greater, and hath a very ragged and hard +shell: but the kernel great, very oily and sweet. Besides their eating of +them after our ordinary maner, they breake them with stones, and punne +them in morters with water, to make a milke which they vse to put into +some sorts of their spoonemeat: also among their sodde wheat, peaze, +beanes and pompions, which maketh them haue a farre more pleasant taste. + +Medlars, a kinde of very good fruit: so called by vs chiefly for these +respects: first in that they are not good vntill they be rotten, then in +that they open at the head as our Medlars, and are about the same +bignesse: otherwise in taste and colour they are farre different; for they +are as red as cheries, and very sweet: but whereas the chery is sharpe +sweet, they are lushious sweet. + +(M308) Mutaquesunnauk, a kinde of pleasant fruit almost of the shape and +bignesse of English peares, but they are of a perfect red colour as well +within as without. They grow on a plant whose leaues are very thicke, and +full of prickles as sharpe as needles. Some that haue bene in the Indies, +where they haue seene that kind of red die of great price, which is called +Cochinile, to grow, doe describe this plant right like vnto this of +Metaquesunnauk; but whether it be the true Cochinile, or a bastard or +wilde kinde, it cannot yet be certified, seeing that also, as I heard, +Cochinile is not of the fruit, but found on the leaues of the plant: which +leaues for such matter we haue not so specially obserued. + +Grapes there are of two sorts, which I mentioned in the merchantable +commodities. + +Strawberries there are as good and as great as those which we haue in our +English gardens. + +Mulberies, Applecrabs, Hurts or Hurtleberies, such as we haue in England. + +Sacquenummener, a kinde of berries almost like vnto Capers, but somewhat +greater, which grow together in clusters vpon a plant or hearbe that is +found in shallow waters; being boiled eight or nine houres according to +their kinde, are very good meat and holesome; otherwise if they be eaten +they will make a man for the time frantike or extremely sicke. + +There is a kind of Reed which beareth a seed almost like vnto our Rie or +Wheat; and being boiled is good meat. + +In our trauels in some places we found Wilde peaze like vnto ours in +England, but that they were lesse, which are also good meat. + + +Of a kinde of fruit or berry in forme of Acornes. + + +There is a kinde of berry or acorne, of which there are fiue sorts that +grow on seuerall kindes of trees: the one is called Sagatemener, the +second Osamener, the third Pummuckoner. These kinde of acornes they vse to +drie vpon hurdles made of reeds, with fire vnderneath, almost after the +maner as we dry Malt in England. When they are to be vsed, they first +water them vntill they be soft, and then being sod, they make a good +victuall, either to eat so simply, or els being also punned to make loaues +or lumps of bread. These be also the three kinds, of which I sayd before +the inhabitants vsed to make sweet oile. + +Another sort is called Sapummener, which being boiled or parched, doth eat +and taste like vnto Chesnuts. They sometime also make bread of this sort. + +The fift sort is called Mangummenauk, and is the acorne of their kinde of +Oake, the which being dried after the maner of the first sorts, and +afterward watered, they boile them, and their seruants, or sometime the +chiefe themselues, either for variety or for want of bread, do eat them +with their fish or flesh. + + +Of Beasts. + + +Deere, in some places there are great store: neere vnto the Sea coast they +are of the ordinary bignesse of ours in England, and some lesse: but +further vp into the countrey, where there is better food, they are +greater: they differ from ours onely in this, their tailes are longer, and +the snags of their hornes looke backwards. + +Conies. Those that we haue seene, and all that we can heare of are of a +gray colour like vnto Hares: in some places there are such plenty that all +the people of some townes make them mantles of the furre or flue of the +skinnes of those which they vsually take. + +Saquenuckot and Maquowoc, two kinds of small beasts greater then Conies, +which are very good meat. We neuer tooke any of them our selues, but +sometime eat of such as the inhabitants had taken and brought vnto vs. + +Squirels, which are a grey colour, we haue taken and eaten. + +Beares, which are of blacke colour. The beares of this countrey are good +meat. The inhabitants in time of Winter do vse to take and eat many: so +also sometime did we. They are taken commonly in this sort: In some +Islands or places where they are, being hunted for assoone as they haue +spiall of a man, they presently run away, and then being chased, they +clime and get vp the next tree they can: from whence with arrowes they are +shot downe starke dead, or with those wounds that they may after easily be +killed. We sometime shot them downe with our calieuers. + +I haue the name of eight and twenty seuerall sorts of beasts, which I haue +heard of to be here and there dispersed in the countrey, especially in the +maine; of which there are onely twelue kinds that we haue yet discouered; +and of those that be good meat we know only them before mentioned. The +inhabitants sometime kill the Lion, and eat him:(98) and we sometime as +they came to our hands of their Woolues or Wooluish dogs, which I haue not +set downe for good meat, least that some would vnderstand my iudgement +therein to be more simple then needeth, although I could alleage the +difference in taste of those kinds from ours, which by some of our company +haue bene experimented in both. + + +Of Fowle. + + +Tvrkie cocks and Turkie hennes, Stockdoues, Partridges, Cranes, Hernes, +and in Winter great store of Swannes and Geese. Of all sorts of fowle I +haue the names in the countrey language of fourescoure and sixe, of which +number, besides those that be named, we haue taken, eaten, and haue the +pictures as they were drawen, with the names of the inhabitants, of +seuerall strange sorts of water fowle eight, and seuenteene kinds more of +land fowle, although we haue seene and eaten of many more, which for want +of leasure there for the purpose could not be pictured: and after we are +better furnished and stored vpon further discouery with their strange +beasts, fish, trees, plants, and herbs, they shalbe also published. + +There are also Parrots, Faulcons, and Marlin hauks, which although with vs +they be not vsed for meat, yet for other causes I thought good to mention. + + +Of Fish. + + +For foure moneths of the yeere, February, March, Aprill and May, there are +plenty of Sturgeons. And also in the same moneths of Herrings, some of the +ordinary bignesse of ours in England, but the most part farre greater, of +eighteene, twenty inches, and some two foot in length and better: both +these kinds of fish in those moneths are most plentifull, and in best +season, which we found to be most delicate and pleasant meat. + +There are also Trouts, Porpoises, Rayes, Oldwiues, Mullets, Plaice, and +very many other sorts of excellent good fish, which we haue taken and +eaten, whose names I know not but in the countrey language: we haue the +pictures of twelue sorts more, as they were drawen in the countrey, with +their names. + +(M309) The inhabitants vse to take them two maner of wayes: the one is by +a kinde of weare made of reeds, which in that country are very strong: the +other way, which is more strange, is with poles made sharpe at one end, by +shooting them into the fish after the maner as Irish men cast darts, +either as they are rowing in their boats or els as they are wading in the +shallowes for the purpose. + +There are also in many places plenty of these kinds which follow: + +Sea crabs, such as we haue in England. + +Oisters, some very great, and some small, some round, and some of a long +shape: they are found both in salt water and brackish, and those that we +had out of salt water are farre better then the other, as in our countrey. + +Also Muscles, Scalops, Periwinkles, and Creuises. + +Seekanauk, a kinde of crusty shel-fish, which is good meat, about a foot +in bredth, hauing a crusty taile, many legges like a crab, and her eyes in +her backe. They are found in shallowes of waters, and sometime on the +shore. + +There are many Tortoises both of land and sea kinde, their backs and +bellies are shelled very thicke; their head, feet, and taile, which are in +appearance, seeme ougly, as though they were members of a serpent or +venimous beasts; but notwithstanding they are very good meat, as also +their egges. Some haue bene found of a yard in bredth and better. + +And thus haue I made relation of all sorts of victuall that we fed vpon +for the time we were in Virginia, as also the inhabitants themselues, as +farre forth as I know and can remember, or that are specially woorthy to +be remembred. + + + +The third and last part of such other things as are behouefull for those +which shall plant and inhabite to know of, with a description of the +nature and maners of the people of the Countrey. + + +Of commodities for building and other necessary vses. + + +Those other things which I am more to make rehearsal of, are such as +concerne building, and other mechanicall necessary vses, as diuers sorts +of trees for house and ship-timber, and other vses else: Also lime, stone, +and bricke, least that being not mentioned some might haue bene doubted +of, or by some that are malitious the contrary reported. + +Okes there are as faire, straight, tall, and as good timber as any can be, +and also great store, and in some places very great. + +Walnut trees, as I haue said before very many, some haue bene seene +excellent timber of foure and fiue fadome, and aboue fourescore foote +streight without bough. + +Firre trees fit for masts of ships, some very tall and great. + +Rakiock, a kinde of trees so called that are sweete wood, of which the +inhabitants that were neere vnto vs doe commonly make their boates or +Canoas of the forme of trowes, onely with the helpe of fire, hatchets of +stones, and shels: we haue knowen some so great being made in that sort of +one tree, that they haue caried well 20. men at once, besides much +baggage: the timber being great, tall, streight, soft, light, and yet +tough ynough I thinke (besides other vses) to be fit also for masts of +ships. + +Cedar, a sweete wood good for seelings, chests, boxes, bedsteads, lutes, +virginals, and many things els, as I haue also said before. Some of our +companie which haue wandered in some places where I haue not bene, haue +made certeine affirmation of Cyprus, which for such and other excellent +vses is also a wood of price and no small estimation. + +Maple, and also Wich-hazle, whereof the inhabitants vse to make their +bowes. + +Holly, a necessary thing for the making of birdlime. + +Willowes good for the making of weares and weeles to take fish after the +English maner, although the inhabitants vse onely reedes, which because +they are so strong as also flexible, doe serue for that turne very well +and sufficiently. + +Beech and Ashe, good for caske-hoopes, and if neede require, plowe worke, +as also for many things els. + +Elme. Sassafras trees. + +Ascopo a kinde of tree very like vnto Lawrell, the barke is hot in taste +and spicie, it is very like to that tree which Monardes describeth to be +Cassia Lignea of the West Indies. + +There are many other strange trees whose names I know not but in the +Virginian language, of which I am not now able, neither is it so +conuenient for the present to trouble you with particular relation: seeing +that for timber and other necessary vses, I haue named sufficient. And of +many of the rest, but that they may be applied to good vse, I know no +cause to doubt. + +Nowe for stone, bricke and lime, thus it is. Neere vnto the Sea coast +where wee dwelt, there are no kinde of stones to be found (except a few +small pebbles about foure miles off) but such as haue bene brought from +further out of the maine. In some of our voyages we haue seene diuers hard +raggie stones, great pebbles, and a kinde of gray stone like vnto marble +of which the inhabitants make their hatchets to cleaue wood. Vpon inquirie +wee heard that a little further vp into the Countrey were of all sorts +very many, although of quarries they are ignorant, neither haue they vse +of any store whereupon they should haue occasion to seeke any. For if +euery housholde haue one or two to cracke nuts, grinde shels, whet copper, +and sometimes other stones for hatchets, they haue ynough: neither vse +they any digging, but onely for graues about three foote deepe: and +therefore no marueile that they know neither quarries, nor lime-stones, +which both may be in places neerer then they wot of. + +In the meane time vntill there be discouery of sufficient store in some +place or other conuenient, the want of you which are and shalbe the +planters therein may be as well supplied by bricke: for the making whereof +in diuers places of the Countrey there is clay both excellent good and +plentie, and also by lime made of oyster shels, and of others burnt, after +the maner as they vse in the Isles of Tenet(99) and Shepy, and also in +diuers other places of England: Which kinde of lime is well knowen to be +as good as any other. And of oyster shels there is plentie ynough: for +besides diuers other particular places where are abundance, there is one +shallow Sound along the coast, where for the space of many miles together +in length, and two or three miles in breadth, the ground is nothing els, +being but halfe a foote or a foote vnder water for the most part. + +Thus much can I say furthermore of stones, that about 120. miles from our +fort neere the water in the side of a hill, was found by a Gentleman of +our company, a great veine of hard ragge stonnes, which I thought good to +remember vnto you. + + +Of the nature and maners of the people. + + +It resteth I speake a word or two of the naturall inhabitants, their +natures and maners leauing large discourse thereof vntil time more +conuenient hereafter: nowe onely so farre foorth, as that you may know, +how that they in respect of troubling our inhabiting and planting, are not +to be feared, but that they shall haue cause both to feare and loue vs, +that shall inhabite with them. + +(M310) They are a people clothed with loose mantles made of deere skinnes, +and aprons of the same round about their middle, all els naked, of such a +difference of statures onely as wee in England, hauing no edge tooles or +weapons of yron or steele to offend vs withall, neither knowe they how to +make any: those weapons that they haue, are onely bowes made of +Witch-hazle, and arrowes of reedes, flat edged truncheons also of wood +about a yard long, neither haue they any thing to defend themselues but +targets made of barkes, and some armours made of sticks wickered together +with thread. + +Their townes are but small, and neere the Sea coast but fewe, some +contayning but tenne or twelue houses: some 20. the greatest that we haue +seene hath bene but of 30. houses: if they bee walled, it is onely done +with barkes of trees made fast to stakes, or els with poles onely fixed +vpright, and close one by another. + +Their houses are made of small poles, made fast at the tops in round forme +after the maner as is vsed in many arbories in our gardens of England, in +most townes couered with barkes, and in some with artificiall mats made of +long rushes, from the tops of the houses downe to the ground. The length +of them is commonly double to the breadth, in some places they are but 12. +and 16. yards long, and in other some we haue seene of foure and twentie. + +In some places of the Countrey, one onely towne belongeth to the +gouernment of a Wiroans or chiefe Lord, in other some two or three, in +some sixe, eight, and more: the greatest Wiroans that yet wee had dealing +with, had but eighteene townes in his gouernment, and able to make not +aboue seuen or eight hundred fighting men at the most. The language of +euery gouernment is different from any other, and the further they are +distant, the greater is the difference. + +Their maner of warres among themselues is either by sudden surprising one +an other most commonly about the dawning of the day, or moone light,(100) +or els by ambushes, or some subtile deuises. Set battles are very rare, +except it fall out where there are many trees, where either part may haue +some hope of defence, after the deliuery of euery arrow, in leaping behind +some or other. + +If there fall out any warres betweene vs and them, what their fight is +likely to bee, wee hauing aduantages against them so many maner of wayes, +as by our discipline, our strange weapons and deuises else, especially +Ordinance great and small, it may easily bee imagined: by the experience +wee haue had in some places, the turning vp of their heeles against vs in +running away was their best defence. + +In respect of vs they are a people poore, and for want of skill and +iudgement in the knowledge and vse of our things, doe esteeme our trifles +before things of greater value: Notwithstanding in their proper maner +(considering the want of such means as we haue,) they seeme very +ingenious. For although they haue no such tooles, nor any such crafts, +Sciences and Artes as wee, yet in those things they doe, they shew +excellence of wit. And by how much they vpon due consideration shall finde +our maner of knowledges and crafts to exceede theirs in perfection, and +speed for doing and execution, by so much the more is it probable that +they should desire our friendship and loue, and haue the greater respect +for pleasing and obeying vs. Whereby may bee hoped, if meanes of good +gouernment be vsed, that they may in short time bee brought to ciuilitie, +and the imbracing of true Religion. + +Some religion they haue already, which although it be farre from the +trueth, yet being as it is, there is hope it may be the easier and sooner +reformed. + +They beleeue that there are many gods, which they call Mantoac, but of +different sorts and degrees, one onely chiefe and great God, which hath +beene from all eternitie. Who as they affirme, when hee purposed to make +the world, made first other gods of a principall order, to be as meanes +and instruments to be vsed in the creation and gouernment to follow, and +after the Sunne, moone, and starres as pettie gods, and the instruments of +the other order more principal. First (they say) were made waters out of +which by the gods were made all diuersitie of creatures that are visible +or invisible. + +For mankinde they say a woman was made first, which by the working of one +of the gods, conceiued and brought foorth children: And in such sort they +say they had their beginning. But how many yeeres or ages haue passed +since, they say they can make no relation hauing no letters or other such +meanes as we to keepe records of the particularities of times past, but +onely tradition from father to sonne. + +They thinke that all the gods are of humane shape, and therefore they +represent them by images in the formes of men, which they call Kewasowok, +one alone is called Kewas: them they place in houses appropriate or +temples, which they call Machicomuck, where they worship, pray, sing, and +make many times offring vnto them. In some Machicomuck we haue seene but +one Kewas, in some two, and in other some three. The common sort thinke +them to be also gods. + +They beleeue also the immortalitie of the soule, that after this life as +soone as the soule is departed from the body, according to the workes it +hath done, it is either carried to heauen the habitacle of the gods, there +to enioy perpetuall blisse and happinesse or els to a great pitte or hole, +which they thinke to be in the furthest parts of their part of the world +toward the Sunne set, there to burne continually: the place they call +Popogusso. + +For the confirmation of this opinion, they tolde me two stories of two men +that had bene lately dead and reuiued againe, the one happened but few +yeeres before our comming into the Countrey of a wicked man, which hauing +bene dead and buried, the next day the earth of the graue being seene to +moue, was taken vp againe, who made declaration where his soule had bene, +that is to say, very neere entring into Popogusso, had not one of the gods +saued him, and gaue him leaue to returne againe, and teach his friends +what they should do to auoyd that terrible place of torment. The other +happened in the same yeere we were there, but in a towne that was 60. +miles from vs, and it was told me for strange newes, that one being dead, +buried, and taken vp againe as the first, shewed that although his body +had lien dead in the graue, yet his soule was aliue, and had trauailed +farre in a long broad way, on both sides whereof grew most delicate and +pleasant trees, bearing more rare and excellent fruits, then euer hee had +seene before, or was able to expresse, and at length came to most braue +and faire houses, neere which he met his father that had bene dead before, +who gaue him great charge to goe backe againe, and shew his friendes what +good they were to doe to enioy the pleasures of that place, which when he +had done he should after come againe. + +What subtiltie soeuer be in the Wiroances and priestes, this opinion +worketh so much in many of the common and simple sort of people, that it +maketh them haue great respect to their Gouernours, and also great care +what they doe, to auoyd torment after death, and to enioy blisse, although +notwithstanding there is punishment ordeined for malefactours, as +stealers, whoremongers, and other sorts of wicked doers, some punished +with death, some with forfeitures, some with beating, according to the +greatnesse of the facts. + +And this is the summe of their Religion, which I learned by hauing +speciall familiaritie with some of their priests. Wherein they were not so +sure grounded, nor gaue such credite to their traditions and stories, but +through conuersing with vs they were brought into great doubts of their +owne; and no small admiration of ours, with earnest desire in many, to +learne more then wee had meanes for want of perfect vtterance in their +language to expresse. + +Most things they sawe with vs, as Mathematicall instruments, sea +Compasses, the vertue of the load-stone in drawing yron, a perspectiue +glasse whereby was shewed many strange sights, burning glasses, wilde +firewoorkes, gunnes, hookes, writing and reading, spring-clockes that +seeme to goe of themselues, and many other things that wee had were so +strange vnto them, and so farre exceeded their capacities to comprehend +the reason and meanes how they should be made and done, that they thought +they were rather the workes of gods then of men, or at the leastwise they +had bene giuen and taught vs of the gods. Which made many of them to haue +such opinion of vs, as that if they knew not the trueth of God and +Religion already, it was rather to bee had from vs whom God so specially +loued, then from a people that were so simple, as they found themselues to +be in comparison of vs. Whereupon greater credite was giuen vnto that wee +spake of, concerning such matters. + +Many times and in euery towne where I came, according as I was able, I +made declaration of the contents of the Bible, that therein was set foorth +the true and onely God, and his mightie workes, that therein was conteined +the true doctrine of saluation through Christ, with many particularities +of Miracles and chiefe points of Religion, as I was able then to vtter, +and thought fit for the time. And although I told them the booke +materially and of it selfe was not of any such vertue, as I thought they +did conceiue, but onely the doctrine therein conteined: yet would many be +glad to touch it, to embrace it, to kisse it, to holde it to their +breastes and heads, and stroke ouer all their body with it, to shew their +hungry desire of that knowledge which was spoken of. + +The Wiroans with whom we dwelt called Wingina, and many of his people +would bee glad many times to be with vs at our Prayers, and many times +call vpon vs both in his owne towne, as also in others whither hee +sometimes accompanied vs, to pray and sing Psalmes, hoping thereby to be +partaker of the same effects which we by that meanes also expected. + +Twise this Wiroans was so grieuously sicke that he was like to die, and as +he lay languishing, doubting of any helpe by his owne priestes, and +thinking hee was in such danger for offending vs and thereby our God, sent +for some of vs to pray and bee a meanes to our God that it would please +him either that he might liue, or after death dwell with him in blisse, so +likewise were the requests of many others in the like case. + +On a time also when their corne began to wither by reason of a draught +which happened extraordinarily, fearing that it had come to passe by +reason that in some thing they had displeased vs, many would come to vs +and desire vs to pray to our God of England, that he would preserue their +Corne, promising that when it was ripe we also should be partakers of the +fruit. + +There could at no time happen any strange sicknesse, losses, hurts, or any +other crosse vnto them, but that they would impute to vs the cause or +meanes thereof, for offending or not pleasing vs. One other rare and +strange accident, leauing others, wil I mention before I end, which moued +the whole Countrey that either knew or heard of vs, to haue vs in +wonderfull admiration. + +There was no towne where wee had any subtle deuise practised against vs, +wee leauing it vnpunished or not reuenged (because we sought by all meanes +possible to win them by gentlenesse) but that within a few dayes after our +departure from euery such Towne, the people began to die very fast, and +many in short space, in some Townes about twentie, in some fourtie, and in +one sixe score, which in trueth was very many in respect of their numbers. +This happened in no place that we could learne, but where we had bin, +where they vsed some practise against vs, and after such time. The disease +also was so strange, that they neither knewe what it was, nor how to cure +it, the like by report of the oldest men in the Countrey neuer happened +before, time out of minde. A thing specially obserued by vs, as also by +the naturall inhabitants themselves. Insomuch that when some of the +inhabitants which were our friends, and especially the Wiroans Wingina, +had obserued such effects in foure or fiue Townes to follow their wicked +practises, they were perswaded that it was the worke of our God through +our meanes, and that we by him might kill and slay whom we would without +weapons, and not come neere them. And thereupon when it had happened that +they had vnderstanding that any of their enemies had abused vs in our +iourneys, hearing that we had wrought no reuenge with our weapons, and +fearing vpon some cause the matter should so rest: did come and intreate +vs that we would be a meanes to our God that they as others that had dealt +ill with vs might in like sort die, alleadging how much it would bee for +our credite and profite, as also theirs, and hoping furthermore that we +would doe so much at their requests in respect of the friendship we +professed them. + +Whose entreaties although wee shewed that they were vngodly, affirming +that our God would not subiect himselfe to any such prayers and requests +of men: that indeede all things haue bene and were to be done according to +his good pleasure as he had ordeined: and that, we to shewe our selues his +true seruants ought rather to make petition for the contrary, that they +with them might liue together with vs, be made partakers of his trueth, +and serue him in righteousnesse, but notwithstanding in such sort, that +wee referre that, as all other things, to bee done according to his diuine +will and pleasure, and as by his wisedome he had ordeined to be best. + +Yet because the effect fell out so suddenly and shortly after according to +their desires, they thought neuerthelesse it came to passe by our meanes, +and that we in vsing such speeches vnto them, did not dissemble the +matter, and therefore came vnto vs to giue vs thankes in their maner, that +although we satisfied them not in promise, yet in deedes and effect we had +fulfilled their desires. + +This marueilous accident in all the Countrey wrought so strange opinions +of vs, that some people could not tell whether to thinke vs gods or men, +and the rather because that all the space of their sicknes, there was no +man of ours knowen to die, or that was specially sicke: they noted also +that we had no women among vs, neither that we did care for any of theirs. + +Some therefore were of opinion that we were not borne of women, and +therefore not mortal, but that we were men of an old generation many +yeeres past, then risen againe to immortalitie. + +Some would likewise seeme to prophecie that there were more of our +generation yet to come to kill theirs and take their places, as some +thought the purpose was, by that which was already done. Those that were +immediatly to come after vs they imagined to be in the aire, yet inuisible +and without bodies, and that by our intreatie and for the loue of vs, did +make the people to die in that sort as they did, by shooting inuisible +bullets into them. + +To confirme this opinion, their Phisitions (to excuse their ignorance in +curing the disease) would not be ashamed to say, but earnestly make the +simple people beleeue, that the strings of blood that they sucked out of +the sicke bodies, were the strings wherewithall the inuisible bullets were +tied and cast. Some also thought that wee shot them our selues out of our +pieces, from the place where wee dwelt, and killed the people in any Towne +that had offended vs, as wee listed, howe farre distant from vs soeuer it +were. And other some said, that it was the speciall worke of God for our +sakes, as we our selues haue cause in some sort to thinke no lesse, +whatsoeuer some doe, or may imagine to the contrary, specially some +Astrologers, knowing of the Eclipse of the Sunne which we saw the same +yeere before in our voyage thitherward, which vnto them appeared very +terrible. And also of a Comet which began to appeare but a fewe dayes +before the beginning of the saide sicknesse. But to exclude them from +being the speciall causes of so speciall an accident, there are further +reasons then I thinke fit at this present to be alleadged. These their +opinions I haue set downe the more at large, that it may appeare vnto you +that there is good hope they may be brought through discreete dealing and +gouernment to the imbracing of the trueth, and consequently to honour, +obey, feare and loue vs. + +And although some of our company towards the ende of the yeere, shewed +themselues too fierce in slaying some of the people in some Townes, vpon +causes that on our part might easily ynough haue bene borne withall: yet +notwithstanding, because it was on their part iustly deserued, the +alteration of their opinions generally and for the most part concerning vs +is the lesse to be doubted. And whatsoever els they may be, by +carefulnesse of our selues neede nothing at all to be feared. + +The best neuerthelesse in this, as in all actions besides, is to be +endeuoured and hoped, and of the worst that may happen notice to be taken +with consideration, and as much as may be eschewed. + + +The conclusion. + + +Now I haue (as I hope) made relation not of so few and small things, but +that the Countrey (of men that are indifferent and well disposed) may bee +sufficiently liked: If there were no more knowen then I haue mentioned, +which doubtlesse and in great reason is nothing to that which remaineth to +be discouered, neither the soyle, nor commodities. As we haue reason so to +gather by the difference we found in our trauailes, for although al which +I haue before spoken of, haue bene discouered and experimented not farre +from the Sea coast, where was our abode and most of our trauailing: yet +sometimes as we made our iourneys further into the maine and Countrey; we +found the soile to be fatter, the trees greater and to grow thinner, the +ground more firme and deeper mould, more and larger champions, finer +grasse, and as good as euer we saw any in England; in some places rockie +and farre more high and hilly ground, more plentie of their fruites, more +abundance of beastes, the more inhabited with people, and of greater +pollicie and larger dominions, with greater townes and houses. + +Why may wee not then looke for in good hope from the inner parts of more +and greater plentie, as well of other things, as of those which wee haue +already discouered? Vnto the Spaniards happened the like in discouering +the maine of the West Indies. The maine also of this Countrey of Virginia, +extending some wayes so many hundreds of leagues, as otherwise then by the +relation of the inhabitants wee haue most certaine knowledge of where yet +no Christian prince hath any possession or dealing, cannot but yeelde many +kinds of excellent commodities, which we in our discouery haue not seene. + +What hope there is els to bee gathered of the nature of the climate, being +answerable to the Iland of Japan, the land of China, Persia, Iury, the +Ilands of Cyprus and Candy, the South parts of Greece, Italy and Spaine, +and of many other notable and famous Countreys, because I meane not to be +tedious, I leaue to your owne consideration. + +Whereby also the excellent temperature of the aire there at all seasons, +much warmer then in England, and neuer so vehemently hot, as sometimes is +vnder and betweene the Tropikes, or neere them, cannot be knowen vnto you +without further relation. + +For the holsomnesse thereof I neede to say but this much: that for all the +want of prouisson, as first of English victuall, excepting for twentie +dayes, we liued onely by drinking water, and by the victuall of the +Countrey, of which some sorts were very strange vnto vs, and might haue +bene thought to haue altered our temperatures in such sort, as to haue +brought vs into some greuious and dangerous diseases: (M311) Secondly the +want of English meanes, for the taking of beastes, fish and foule, which +by the helpe onely of the inhabitants and their meanes could not bee so +suddenly and easily prouided for vs, nor in so great number and +quantities, nor of that choise as otherwise might haue bene to our better +satisfaction and contentment. Some want also we had of clothes. +Furthermore in al our trauailes, which were most specially and often in +the time of Winter, our lodging was in the open aire vpon the ground. And +yet I say for all this, there were but foure of our whole company (being +one hundred and eight) that died all the yeere, and that but at the latter +ende thereof, and vpon none of the aforesaid causes. For all foure, +especially three, were feeble, weake, and sickly persons before euer they +come thither, and those that knew them, much marueled that they liued so +long being in that case, or had aduentured to trauaile. + +Seeing therefore the aire there is so temperate and holsome, the soyle so +fertile, and yeelding such commodities, as I haue before mentioned, the +also thither to and fro being sufficiently experimented to be performed +twise a yeere with ease, and at any season thereof: And the dealing of Sir +Walter Ralegh so liberall in large giuing and granting land there, as is +already knowen, with many helpes and furtherances else: (The least that he +hath granted hath bene fiue hundreth acres to a man onely for the +aduenture of his person) I hope there remaines no cause whereby the action +should be misliked. + +If that those which shall thither trauaile to inhabite and plant bee but +reasonably prouided for the first yeere, as those are which were +transported the last, and being there, doe vse but that diligence and +care, that is requisit, and as they may with ease: There is no doubt but +for the time following, they may haue victuall that are excellent good and +plentie ynough, some more English sorts of cattell also hereafter, as some +haue bene before and there are yet remayning, may and shall be (God +willing) thither transported. So likewise, our kinde of fruites, rootes, +and hearbes, may be there planted and sowed, as some haue bene already, +and proue well: And in short time, also they may raise so much of those +sorts of commodities which I haue spoken of, as shall both enrich +themselues, as also others that shall deale with them. + +And this is all the fruit of our labours, that I haue thought necessary to +aduertise you of at this present: What else concerneth the nature and +maners of the inhabitants of Virginia, the number with the particularities +of the voyages thither made, and of the actions of such as haue beene by +Sir Walter Ralegh therein, and there imployed, many worthy to be +remembred, as of the first discouerers of the Country, of our Generall for +the time Sir Richard Grinuil, and after his departure of our Gouernour +there Master Ralph Lane, with diuers others directed and imployed vnder +their gouernment: Of the Captaines and Masters of the voyages made since +for transportation of the Gouernour and assistants of those already +transported, as of many persons, accidents, and things els, I haue ready +in a discourse by it selfe in maner of a Chronicle, according to the +course of times: which when time shall be thought conuenient, shall be +also published. + +Thus referring my relation to your fauourable constructions, expecting +good successe of the action, from him which is to be acknowledged the +authour and gouernour, not onely of this, but of all things els, I take my +leaue of you, this moneth of February 1587. + + + + +XXX. The fourth voyage made to Virginia with three ships, in yere 1587. +Wherein was transported the second Colonie. + + +In the yeere of our Lord 1587. Sir Walter Ralegh intending to perseuere in +the planting of his Countrey of Virginia, prepared a newe Colonie of one +hundred and fiftie men to be sent thither, vnder the charge of Iohn White, +whom hee appointed Gouernour, and also appointed vnto him twelue +Assistants, vnto whom he gaue a Charter, and incorporated them by the name +of Gouernour and Assistants of the Citie of Ralegh in Virginia. + + + +April. + + +Our Fleete being in number three saile, viz. the Admirall a shippe of one +hundred and twentie Tunnes, a Flie-boate, and a Pinnesse, departed the +sixe and twentieth of April from Portsmouth, and the same day came to an +ancker at the Cowes in the Isle of Wight, where wee stayed eight dayes. + + + +May. + + +The fift of May, at nine of the clocke at night we came to Plimmouth, +where we remained the space of two dayes. + +The 8 we weyed anker at Plimmouth, and departed thence for Virginia. + +The 16 Simon Ferdinando, Master of our Admirall, lewdly forsooke our +Fly-boate, leauing her distressed in the Bay of Portugal. + + + +Iune. + + +The 19 we fell with Dominica, and the same euening we sayled betweene it, +and Guadalupe: the 21 the Fly-boat also fell with Dominica. + +(M312) The 22 we came to an anker at an Island called Santa Cruz,(101) +where all the planters were set on land, staying there till the 25 of the +same moneth. (M313) At our first landing on this Island, some of our +women, and men, by eating a small fruit like greene Apples, were +fearefully troubled with a sudden burning in their mouthes, and swelling +of their tongues so bigge, that some of them could not speake. Also a +child by sucking one of those womens breasts, had at that instant his +mouth set on such a burning, that it was strange to see how the infant was +tormented for the time: but after 24 houres it ware away of it selfe. + +Also the first night of our being on this Island, we took fiue great +Tortoses, some of them of such bignes, that sixteene of our strongest men +were tired with carying of one of them but from the sea side to our +cabbins. In this Island we found no watring place, but a standing ponde, +the water whereof was so euill, that many of our company fell sicke with +drinking thereof: and as many as did but wash their faces with that water, +in the morning before the Sunne had drawen away the corruption, their +faces did so burne and swell, that their eyes were shut vp, and could not +see in fiue or sixe dayes, or longer. + +The second day of our abode there, we sent forth some of our men to search +the Island for fresh water, three one way, and two another way. The +Gouernour also, with sixe others, went vp to the top of an high hill, to +viewe the Island, but could perceiue no signe of any men, or beastes, nor +any goodnes, but Parots, and trees of Guiacum. Returning backe to our +cabbins another way, he found in the discent of a hill, certaine +potsheards of sauage making, made of the earth of that Island: whereupon +it was iudged, that this Island was inhabited with Sauages, though +Fernando had told vs for certaine the contrary. The same day at night, the +rest of our company very late returned to the Gouernour. The one company +affirmed, that they had seene in a valley eleuen Sauages, and diuers +houses halfe a mile distant from the steepe, or toppe of the hill where +they stayed. The other company had found running out of a high rocke a +very fayre spring of water, whereof they brought three bottels to the +company: for before that time, wee drank the stinking water of the pond. + +The same second day at night Captaine Stafford, with the Pinnesse, +departed from our fleets, riding at Santa Cruz, to an Island, called +Beake, lying neere S. Iohn, being so directed by Ferdinando, who assured +him he should there find great plenty of sheepe. The next day at night, +our planters left Santa Cruz, and came all aboord, and the next morning +after, being the 25 of Iune we weyed anker, and departed from Santa Cruz. + +The seuen and twentieth we came to anker at Cottea, where we found the +Pinnesse riding at our comming. + +The 28 we weyed anker at Cottea, and presently came to anker at S. Iohns +in Musketos Bay,(102) where we spent three dayes vnprofitable in taking in +fresh water, spending in the meane time more beere then the quantitie of +the water came vnto. + + + +Iulie. + + +(M314) The first day we weyed anker at Musketos Bay, where were left +behind two Irish men of our company, Darbie Glauen, and Denice Carrell, +bearing along the coast of S. Iohns till euening, at which time wee fell +with Rosse Bay. At this place Ferdinando had promised wee should take in +salte, and had caused vs before, to make and prouide as many sackes for +that purpose, as we could. The Gouernour also, for that hee understood +there was a Towne in the bottome of the Bay, not farre from the salt +hills, appointed thirty shot, tenne pikes, and ten targets, to man the +Pinnesse, and to goe aland for salt. Ferdinando perceiuing them in a +readines, sent to the Gouernour, vsing great perswasions with him, not to +take in salt there, saying that hee knew not well whether the same were +the place or not: also, that if the Pinnesse went into the Bay, she could +not without great danger come backe, till the next day at night, and that +if in the meane time any storme should rise, the Admirall were in danger +to bee cast away. Whilest he was thus perswading, he caused the lead to be +cast, and hauing craftily brought the shippe in three fadome and a halfe +water, he suddenly began to sweare, and teare God in pieces, dissembling +great danger, crying to him at the helme, beare vp hard, beare vp hard, so +we went off, and were disappointed of our salt, by his meanes. + +The next day sayling along the west end of S. Iohn, the (M315) Gouernour +determined to go aland in S. Germans Bay, to gather yong plants of +Orenges, Pines, Mameas, and Plantanos, to set at Virginia, which we knew +might easily be had, for that they grow neere the shore, and the places +where they grew, well known to the Gouernour, and some of the planters: +but our Simon denied it, saying: he would come to an anker at Hispaniola, +and there land the Gouernour, and some other of the Assistants, with the +pinnesse, to see if he could speake with his friend Alanson, of whom he +hoped to be furnished both of cattell, and all such things as we would +haue taken in at S. Iohn: but he meant nothing lesse, as it plainely did +appeare to vs afterwards. + +The next day after, being the third of Iuly, we saw Hispaniola, and bare +with the coast all that day, looking still when the pinnesse should be +prepared to goe for the place where Ferdinando his friend Alanson was: but +that day passed, and we saw no preparation for landing in Hispaniola. + +The 4. of Iuly, sayling along the coast of Hispaniola, vntill the next day +at noone, and no preparation yet seene for the staying there, we hauing +knowledge that we were past the place where Alanson dwelt, and were come +with Isabella: hereupon Ferdinando was asked by the Gouernour, whether he +meant to speake with Alanson, for the taking in of cattell, and other +things, according to his promise, or not: but he answered that he was now +past the place, and that Sir Walter Ralegh told him, the French Ambassador +certified him, that the king of Spaine had sent for Alanson into Spaine: +wherefore he thought him dead, and that it was to no purpose to touch +there in any place, at this voyage. + +The next day we left sight of Hispaniola, and haled off for Virginia, +about foure of the clocke in the afternoone. + +The sixt day of Iuly we came to the Island Caycos, wherein Ferdinando sayd +were two salt pondes, assuring vs that if they were drie we might find +salt to shift with, vntill the next supply: but it prooued as true as +finding of sheepe at Baque. In this Island, whilest Ferdinando solaced +himselfe ashore, with one of the company, in part of the Island, others +spent the latter part of that day in other parts of the Iland, some to +seeke the salt ponds, some fowling, some hunting Swans, whereof we caught +many. The next day early in the morning we weyed anker, leauing Caycos, +with good hope, that the first land that we saw next should be Virginia. + +About the 16 of Iuly we fel with the maine of Virginia, which Simon +Ferdinando tooke to be the Island of Croatoan, where we came to anker, and +rode there two or three dayes: but finding himselfe deceiued, he weyed, +and bare along the coast, where in the night, had not Captaine Stafford +bene more carefull in looking out, then our Simon Ferdinando, we had bene +all cast away vpon the breach, called the Cape of Feare, for we were come +within two cables length vpon it: such was the carelesnes, and ignorance +of our Master. + +The two and twentieth of Iuly wee arriued safe at Hatorask, where our ship +and pinnesse ankered: (M316) the Gouernour went aboord the pinnesse +accompanied with fortie of his best men, intending to passe vp to Roanoak +foorthwith, hoping there to finde those fifteene Englishmen, which Sir +Richard Grinuile had left there the yeere before, with whom he meant to +haue conference, concerning the state of the Countrey, and Sauages, +meaning after he had so done, to returne againe to the fleete, and passe +along the coast, to the Bay of Chesepiok where we intended to make our +seate and forte, according to the charge giuen us among other directions +in writing, vnder the hande of Sir Walter Ralegh: but assoone as we were +put with our pinnesse from the ship, a Gentleman by the meanes of +Ferdinando, who was appointed to returne for England, called to the +sailers in the pinnesse, charging them not to bring any of the planters +backe again, but to leaue them in the Island, except the Gouernour, and +two or three such as he approued, saying that the Summer was farre spent, +wherefore hee would land all the planters in no other place. Vnto this +were all the saylers, both in the pinnesse, and shippe, perswaded by the +Master, wherefore it booted not the Gouernour to contend with them, but +passed to Roanoak, and the same night at sunne-set went aland on the +Island, in the place where our fifteene men were left, but we found none +of them, nor any signe that they had bene there, sauing onely wee found +the bones of one of those fifteene, which the Sauages had slaine long +before. + +The three and twentieth of Iuly the Gouernour with diuers of his company, +walked to the North ende of the Island, where Master Ralfe Lane had his +forte, with sundry necessary and decent dwelling houses, made by his men +about it the yeere before, where wee hoped to find some signes, or +certaine knowledge of our fifteene men. When we came thither, we found the +fort rased downe, but all the houses standing vnhurt, sauing that the +neather roomes of them, and also of the forte, were ouergrowen with Melons +of diuers sortes, and Deere within them, feeding on those Melons: so wee +returned to our company, without hope of euer seeing any of the fifteene +men liuing. + +The same day order was giuen, that euery man should be employed for the +repayring of those houses, which wee found standing, and also to make +other new Cottages, for such as should neede. + +The 25 our Flyboate and the rest of our planters arriued all safe at +Hatoraske, to the great ioy and comfort of the whole company: but the +Master of our Admirall Ferdinando grieued greatly at their safe comming: +for hee purposely left them in the Bay of Portugal, and stole away from +them in the night, hoping that the Master thereof, whose name was Edward +Spicer, for that he neuer had bene in Virginia, would hardly finde the +place, or els being left in so dangerous a place as that was, by meanes of +so many men of warre, as at that time were abroad, they should surely be +taken, or slaine: but God disappointed his wicked pretenses. + +The eight and twentieth, George Howie, one of our twelue Assistants was +slaine by diuers Sauages, which were come ouer to Roanoak, either of +purpose to espie our company, and what we were, or else to hunt Deere, +whereof were many in the Island. These Sauages being secretly hidden among +high reedes, where oftentimes they find the Deere asleep, and so kill +them, espied our man wading in the water alone, almost naked, without any +weapon, saue only a smal forked sticke, catching Crabs therewithall, and +also being strayed two miles from his company, and shot at him in the +water, where they gaue him sixteen wounds with their arrowes: and after +they had slaine him with their woodden swords, they beat his head in +pieces, and fled ouer the water to the maine. + +On the thirtieth of Iuly Master Stafford and twenty of our men passed by +water to the Island of Croatoan, with Manteo, who had his mother, and many +of his kindred dwelling in that Island, of whom wee hoped to vnderstand +some newes of our fifteene men, but especially to learne the disposition +of the people of the countrey toward vs, and to renew our old friendship +with them. At our first landing they seemed as though they would fight +with vs: but perceiuing vs begin to march with our shot towardes them, +they turned their backes, and fled. Then Manteo their countrey man called +to them in their owne language, whom, assoone as they heard, they +returned, and threwe away their bowes and arrowes, and some of them came +vnto vs, embracing and entertaining vs friendly, desiring vs not to gather +or spill any of their corne, for that they had but little. We answered +them, that neither their corne, nor any other thing of theirs, should be +diminished by any of vs, and that our comming was onely to renew the old +loue, that was betweene vs and them at the first, and to liue with them as +brethren and friends: which answer seemed to please them well, wherefore +they requested vs to walke vp to their Towne, who there feasted vs after +their maner; and desired vs earnestly, that there might bee some token or +badge giuen them of vs, whereby we might know them to be our friends, when +we met them any where out of the Towne or Island. They told vs further, +that for want of some such badge, diuers of them were hurt the yeere +before, being found out of the Island by Master Lane his company, whereof +they shewed vs one, which at that very instant lay lame, and had lien of +that hurt euer since: but they sayd, they knew our men mistooke them, and +hurt them instead of Winginos men, wherefore they held vs excused. + + + +August. + + +The next day we had conference further with them, concerning the peopie of +Secotan, Aquascogoc, and Pomeiok, willing them of Croatoan to certifie the +people of those townes, that if they would accept our friendship, we would +willingly receiue them againe, and that all vnfriendly dealings past on +both parts, should be vtterly forgiuen and forgotten. To this the chiefe +men of Croatoan answered, that they would gladly doe the best they could, +and within seuen dayes, bring the Wiroances and chiefe Gouernours of those +townes with them, to our Gouernour at Roanoak, or their answere. We also +vnderstood of the men of Croatoan, that our man Master Howe was slaine by +the remnant of Winginos men dwelling then at Dasamonguepeuk, with whom +Wanchese kept companie: and also we vnderstood by them of Croatoan, how +that the 15 Englishmen left at Roanoak the yeere before, by Sir Richard +Grinuile, were suddenly set vpon, by 30 of the men of Secota, Aquascogoc, +and Dasamonguepeuk in manner following. They conueyed themselues secretly +behind the trees, neere the houses where our men carelesly liued: and +hauing perceiued that of those fifteene they could see but eleuen onely, +two of those Sauages appeared to the 11 Englishmen calling to them by +friendly signes, that but two of their chiefest men should come vnarmed to +speake with those two Sauages, who seemed also to be vnarmed. Wherefore +two of the chiefest of our Englishmen went gladly to them: but whilest one +of those Sauages traiterously imbraced one of our men, the other with his +sworde of wood, which he had secretly hidden vnder his mantell, strooke +him on the heade and slew him, and presently the other eight and twentie +Sauages shewed them selues: the other Englishman perceiuing this, fled to +his company, whom the Sauages pursued with their bowes, and arrowes, so +fast, that the Englishmen were forced to take the house, wherein all their +victuall, and weapons were: but the Sauages foorthwith set the same on +fire: by meanes wherof our men were forced to take vp such weapons as came +first to hand, and without order to runne forth among the Sauages, with +whom they skirmished aboue an howre. In this skirmish another of our men +was shotte into the mouth with an arrow, where hee died: and also one of +the Sauages was shot into the side by one of our men, with a wild fire +arrow, whereof he died presently. The place where they fought was of great +aduantage to the Sauages, by meanes of the thicke trees, behinde which the +Sauages through their nimblenes, defended themselues, and so offended our +men with their arrowes, that our men being some of them hurt, retyred +fighting to the water side, where their boat lay, with which they fled +towards Hatorask. By that time they had rowed but a quarter of a mile, +they espied their foure fellowes coming from a creeke thereby, where they +had bene to fetch Oysters: these foure they receiued into their boate, +leauing Roanoak, and landed on a little Island on the right hand of our +entrance into the harbour of Hatorask, where they remayned a while, but +afterward departed, whither as yet we know not. + +Hauing nowe sufficiently dispatched our businesse at Croatoan, the same +day we departed friendly, taking our leaue, and came aboord the fleete at +Hatorask. + +The eight of August, the Gouernour hauing long expected the comming of the +Wiroanses of Pomeiok, Aquascogoc, Secota, and Dasamonguepeuk, seeing that +the seuen dayes were past, within which they promised to come in, or to +send their answeres by the men of Croatoan, and no tidings of them heard, +being certainly also informed by those men of Croatoan, that the remnant +of Wingina his men, which were left aliue, who dwelt at Dasamonquepeuk, +were they which had slaine George Howe, and were also at the driving of +our eleuen Englishmen from Roanoak, hee thought to deferre the reuenge +thereof no longer. Wherefore the same night about midnight, he passed ouer +the water, accompanied with Captaine Stafford, and 24 men, wherof Manteo +was one, whom we tooke with vs to be our guide to the place where those +Sauages dwelt, where he behaued himselfe toward vs as a most faithfull +Englishman. + +The next day, being the 9 of August, in the morning so early that it was +yet darke, we landed neere the dwelling place of our enemies, and very +secretly conueyed our selues through the woods, to that side, where we had +their houses betweene vs and the water: and hauing espied their fire, and +some sitting about it, we presently set on them: the miserable soules +herewith amazed, fled into a place of thicke reedes, growing fast by, +where our men perceiuing them, shot one of them through the bodie with a +bullet, and therewith we entered the reedes, among which we hoped to +acquite their euill doing towards vs, but we were deceiued, for those +Sauages were our friends, and were come from Croatoan to gather the corne +and fruit of that place, because they vnderstood our enemies were fled +immediatly after they had slaine George Howe, and for haste had left all +their corne. Tobacco, and Pompions standing in such sont, that al had bene +deuoured of the birds, and Deere, if it had not bene gathered in time: but +they had like to haue payd deerely for it: for it was so darke, that they +being naked, and their men and women apparelled all so like others, wee +knew not but that they were al men: and if that one of them which was a +Wiroances wife had not had a child at her backe, shee had bene slaine in +stead of a man, and as hap was, another Sauage knew master Stafford, and +ran to him, calling him by his name, whereby hee was saued. Finding our +selues thus disappointed of our purpose, we gathered al the corne, Pease, +Pompions, and Tobacco that we found ripe, leauing the rest vnspoyled, and +tooke Menatoan his wife, with the yong child, and the other Sauages with +vs ouer the water to Roanoak. Although the mistaking of these Sauages +somewhat grieued Manteo, yet he imputed their harme to their owne folly, +saying to them, that if their Wiroances had kept their promise in comming +to the Gouernour at the day appointed, they had not knowen that mischance. + +The 13 of August our Sauage Manteo, by the commandement of Sir Walter +Ralegh, was christened in Roanoak, and called Lord thereof, and of +Dasamonguepeuk, in reward of his faithfull seruices. + +The 18 Elenor, daughter to the Gouernour, and wife to Ananias Dare one of +the Assistants, was deliuered of a daughter in Roanoak, and the same was +christened there the Sonday following, and because this child was the +first Christian borne in Virginia, shee was named Virginia. By this time +our ships had vnladen the goods and victuals of the planters; and began to +take in wood, and fresh water, and to new calke and trimme them for +England: the planters also prepared their letters and tokens to send backe +into England. + +Our two ships, the Lion and the Flyboat almost ready to depart, the 21 of +August, there arose such a tempest at Northeast, that our Admirall then +riding out of the harbour, was forced to cut his cables, and put to sea, +where he lay beating off and on sixe dayes before he could come to vs +againe so that we feared he had bene cast away, and the rather for that at +the time that the storme tooke them, the most and best of their sailers +were left aland. + +At this time some controuersies arose betweene the Gouernour and +Assistants, about choosing two out of the twelue Assistants, which should +goe backe as factors for the company into England: for euery one of them +refused, saue onely one, which all other thought not sufficient: but at +length by much perswading of the Gouernour, Christopher Cooper only agreed +to goe for England: but the next day, through the perswasion of diuers of +his familiar friends, hee changed his minde, so that now the matter stood +as at the first. + +The next day, the 22 of August, the whole company both of the Assistants +and planters came to the Gouernour, and with one voice requested him to +returne himselfe into England, for the better and sooner obtaining of +supplies, and other necessaries for them: but he refused it, and alleaged +many sufficient causes, why he would not: the one was, that he could not +so suddenly returne backe againe without his great discredite, leauing the +action, and so many whome hee partly had procured through his perswasions, +to leaue their natiue countrey, and vndertake that voyage, and that some +enemies to him and the action at his returne into England would not spare +to slander falsly both him and the action, by saying, hee went to +Virginia, but politikely, and to no other end but to leade so many into a +countrey, in which hee neuer meant to stay himselfe, and there to leaue +them behind him. (M317) Also he alleaged, that seeing they intended to +remoue 50 miles further vp into the maine presently, he being then absent, +his stuffe and goods might be both spoiled, and most of them pilfered away +in the cariage, so that at his returne he should be either forced to +prouide himselfe of all suche things againe, or else at his comming againe +to Virginia find himselfe vtterly vnfurnished, whereof already he had +found some proofe, being but once from them but three dayes. Wherefore he +concluded that he would not goe himselfe. + +The next day, not onely the Assistants but diuers others, as well women as +men, began to renew their requests to the Gouernour againe, to take vpon +him to returne into England for the supply, and dispatch of all such +things as there were to be done, promising to make him their bond vnder +all their handes and seales for the safe preseruing of all his goods for +him at his returne to Virginia, so that if any part thereof was spoyled or +lost, they would see it restored to him, or his Assignes, whensoever the +same should be missed and demanded: which bond, with a testimony vnder +their hands and seales, they foorthwith made, and deliuered into his +hands. The copie of the testimony I thought good to set downe. + +"May it please you, her Maiesties subjects of England, we your friends and +countrey-men, the planters in Virginia, doe by these presents let you and +euery of you to vnderstand, that for the present and speedy supply of +certaine our knowen and apparent lackes and needes, most requisite and +necessary for the good and happy planting of vs, or any other in this land +of Virginia, wee all of one minde and consent, haue most earnestly +intreated, and vncessantly requested Iohn White, Gouernour of the planters +in Virginia, to passe into England, for the better and more assured help, +and setting forward of the foresayd supplies: and knowing assuredly that +he both can best, and wil labour and take paines in that behalfe for vs +all, and he not once, but often refusing it, for our sakes, and for the +honour and maintenance of the action, hath at last, though much against +his will, through our importunacie, yeelded to leaue his gouernement, and +all his goods among vs and himselfe in all our behalfes to passe into +England, of whose knowledge and fidelitie in handling this matter, as all +others, we doe assure ourselues by these presents, and will you to giue +all credite thereunto, the 25 of August 1587." + +The Gouernour being at the last through their extreame intreating +constrayned to returne into England, hauing then but halfe a dayes respite +to prepare himselfe for the same, departed from Roanoak the seuen and +twentieth of August in the morning and the same day about midnight, came +aboord the Flieboat, who already had weyed anker, and rode without the +barre, the Admirall riding by them, who but the same morning was newly +come thither againe. The same day both ships weyed anker, and set saile +for England: at this weying their ankers, twelue of the men which were in +the Flyboate were throwen from the Capstone, which by meanes of a barre +that brake, came so fast about them, that the other two barres thereof +strooke and hurt most of them so sore, that some of them neuer recouered +it; neuerthelesse they assayed presently againe to wey their anker, but +being so weakened with the first fling, they were not able to weye it, but +were throwen downe and hurt the second time. Wherefore hauing in all but +fifteene men aboord, and most of them by this vnfortunate beginning so +bruised, and hurt, they were forced to cut their Cable, and leese their +anker. Neuerthelesse, they kept company with the Admirall, vntill the +seuenteenth of September, at which time wee fell with Coruo, and sawe +Flores. + + + +September. + + +The eighteenth, perceiuing that of all our fifteene men in the Flyboat +there remained but fiue, which by meanes of the former mischance, were +able to stand to their labour: and that the Admirall meant not to make any +haste for England but to linger about the Island of Tercera for purchase: +the Flyboate departed for England with letters, where we hoped by the +helpe of God to arriue shortly: but by that time we had continued our +course homeward about twentie dayes, hauing had sometimes scarse and +variable windes, our fresh water also by leaking almost consumed there +arose a storme at Northeast, which for sixe dayes ceased not to blowe so +exceeding, that we were driuen further in those sixe then we could recouer +in thirteene daies: in which time others of our saylers began to fall very +sicke and two of them dyed, the weather also continued so close, that our +Master sometimes in foure dayes together could see neither sunne nor +starre, and all the beuerage we could make, with stinking water, dregs of +beere, and lees of wine which remayned, was but three gallons, and +therefore nowe we expected nothing but famine to perish at Sea. + + + +October. + + +(M318) The 16 of October we made land, but we knewe not what land it was, +bearing in with the same land at that day: about sunne set we put into a +harbour, where we found a Hulke of Dublin, and a pinnesse of Hampton(103) +riding, but we knew not as yet what place this was, neither had we any +boate to goe ashore, vntill the pinnesse sent off their boate to vs with 6 +or 8 men, of whom wee vnderstood wee were in Smerwick in the West parts of +Ireland: they also relieued vs presently with fresh water, wine and other +fresh meate. + +The 18 the Gouernour and the Master ryd to Dingen a Cushe,(104) 5 miles +distant, to take order for the new victualing of our Flieboat for England, +and for reliefe of our sicke and hurt men, but within foure daies after +the Boatswain, the Steward, and the Boatswains mate died aboord the +Flieboat, and the 28 the Masters mate and two of our chiefs sailers were +brought sicke to Dingen. + + + +Nouember. + + +The first the Gouernour shipped himselfe in a ship called the Monkie, +which at that time was ready to put to sea from Dingen for England, +leauing the Flyboat and all his companie in Ireland. The same day we set +sayle, and on the third day we fell with the North side of the lands end +and were shut vp the Seuerne, but the next day we doubled the same for +Mounts Bay. + +The 5 the Gouernour landed in England at Martasew, neere Saint Michaels +mount in Cornewall. + +The 8 we arriued at Hampton, where we vnderstood that our consort the +Admirall was come to Portsmouth, and had bene there three weekes before: +and also that Ferdinando the Master with all his company were not onely +come home without purchase, but also in such weaknesse by sicknesse, and +death of their chiefest men, that they were scarse able to bring their +ship into harbour, but were forced to let fall anker without, which they +could not wey againe, but might all haue perished there, if a small barke +by a great hap had not come to them to helpe them. The names of the chiefe +men that died are these, Roger Large, Iohn Mathew, Thomas Smith, and some +other saylers, whose names I knew not at the writing hereof. An. Dom. +1587. + + + + +XXXI. The names of all the men, women and children, which safely arriued +in Virginia, and remained to inhabite there. 1587. Anno regni Reginae +Elizabethae. 29. + + + Iohn White. + Roger Baily. + Ananias Dare. + Christopher Cooper. + Thomas Steuens. + Iohn Sampson. + Dyonis Haruie. + Roger Prat. + George How. + Simon Fernando. + Nicholas Iohnson. + Thomas Warner. + Anthony Cage. + Iohn Iones. + William Willes. + Iohn Brooke. + Cutbert White. + Iohn Bright. + Clement Tayler. + William Sole. + Iohn Cotsmur. + Humfrey Newton. + Thomas Colman. + Thomas Gramme. + Marke Bennet. + Iohn Gibbes. + Iohn Stilman. + Robert Wilkinson. + Iohn Tydway. + Ambrose Viccars. + Edmond English. + Thomas Topan. + Henry Berry. + Richard Berry. + Iohn Spendloue. + Iohn Hemmington. + Thomas Butler. + Edward Powell. + Iohn Burden. + Iames Hynde. + Thomas Ellis. + William Browne. + Michael Myllet. + Thomas Smith. + Richard Kemme. + Thomas Harris. + Richard Tauerner. + Iohn Earnest. + Henry Iohnson. + Iohn Starte. + Richard Darige. + William Lucas. + Arnold Archard. + Iohn Wright. + William Dutton. + Mauris Allen. + William Waters. + Richard Arthur. + Iohn Chapman. + William Clement. + Robert Little. + Hugh Tayler. + Richard Wildye. + Lewes Wotton. + Michael Bishop. + Henry Browne. + Henry Rufoote + Richard Tomkins. + Henry Dorrell. + Charles Florrie. + Henry Mylton. + Henry Paine. + Thomas Harris. + William Nichols. + Thomas Pheuens. + Iohn Borden. + Thomas Scot. + Peter Little. + Iohn Wyles. + Brian Wyles. + George Martyn. + Hugh Pattenson. + Martin Sutton. + Iohn Farre. + Iohn Bridger. + Griffen Iones. + Richard Shabedge. + Iames Lasie. + Iohn Cheuen. + Thomas Hewet. + William Berde. + +Women. + + Elyoner Dare. + Margery Haruie. + Agnes Wood. + Wenefrid Powell. + Ioyce Archard. + Iane Jones. + Elizabeth Glane. + Iane Pierce. + Audry Tappan. + Alis Chapman. + Emme Merrimoth. + Colman. + Margaret Lawrence. + Ioan Warren. + Iane Mannering. + Rose Payne. + Elizabeth Viccars. + +Boyes and children. + + Iohn Sampson. + Robert Ellis. + Ambrose Viccars. + Thomas Archard. + Thomas Humfrey. + Thomas Smart. + George How. + Iohn Prat. + William Wythers. + +Children borne in Virginia. + + Virginia Dare. + Haruie. + +Sauages that were in England and returned home into Virginia with them. + + Manteo. + Towaye. + + + + +XXXII. A letter from John White to M. Richard Hakluyt. + + +To the Worshipful and my very friend Master Richard Hakluyt, much +happinesse in the Lord. + +Sir, as well for the satisfying of your earnest request, as the +performance of my promise made vnto you at my last being with you in +England, I haue sent you (although in a homely stile, especially for the +contestation of a delicate care) the true discourse of my last voyage into +the West Indies, and partes of America called Virginia, taken in hand +about the end of Februarie in the yeare of our redemption 1590. And what +euents happened vnto vs in this our iourney, you shall plainely perceiue +by the sequele of my discourse. There were at the time aforesaid three +ships absolutely determined to goe for the West Indies, at the speciall +charges of M. Iohn Wattes of London Marchant. But when they were fully +furnished, and in readinesse to make their departure, a generall stay was +commanded of all ships thorowout England. Which so soone as I heard, I +presently (as I thought it most requisite) acquainted Sir Walter Ralegh +therewith, desiring him that as I had sundry times afore bene chargeable +and troublesome vnto him, for the supplies and reliefes of the planters in +Virginia: so likewise, that by his endeuour it would please him at that +instant to procure license for those three ships to proceede on with their +determined voyage, that thereby the people in Virginia (if it were Gods +pleasure) might speedily be comforted and relieued without further charges +vnto him. Whereupon he by his good meanes obtained license of the Queenes +Maiestie, and order to be taken, that the owner of the 3 ships should be +bound vnto Sir Walter Ralegh or his assignes, in 3000 pounds, that those 3 +ships in consideration of their releasement should take in, and transport +a conuenient number of passengers, with their furnitures and necessaries +to be landed in Virginia. Neuerthelesse that order was not obserued, +neither was the bond taken according to the intention aforesaid. But +rather in contempt of the aforesaid order, I was by the owner and +Commanders of the ships denied to haue any passengers, or any thing els +transported in any of the said ships, sauing only my selfe and my chest; +no not so much as a boy to attend vpon me, although I made great sute, and +earnest intreatie aswell to the chiefe Commanders, as to the owner of the +said ships. Which crosse and vnkind dealing, although it very much +discontented me, notwithstanding the scarcity of time was such, that I +could haue no opportunity to go vnto Sir Walter Ralegh with complaint: for +the ships being then all in readinesse to goe to the Sea, would haue bene +departed before I could haue made my returne. Thus both Gouernors, +Masters, and sailers, regarding very smally the good of their countreymen +in Virginia; determined nothing lesse then to touch at those places, but +wholly disposed themselues to seeke after purchase and spoiles, spending +so much time therein, that sommer was spent before we arriued at Virginia. +And when we were come thither, the season was so vnfit, and weather so +foule, that we were constrained of force to forsake that coast, hauing not +seene any of our planters, with losse of one of our ship-boates, and 7 of +our chiefest men: and also with losse of 3 of our ankers and cables, and +most of our caskes with fresh water left on shore, not possible to be had +aboard. Which euils and vnfortunate euents (as wel to their owne losse as +to the hinderance of the planters in Virginia) had not chanced, if the +order set downe by Sir Walter Ralegh had bene obserued, or if my dayly and +continuall petitions for the performance of the same might haue taken any +place. Thus may you plainely perceiue the successe of my fift and last +voiage to Virginia, which was no lesse vnfortunately ended then frowardly +begun, and as lucklesse to many, as sinister to my selfe. But I would to +God it had bene as prosperous to all, as noysome to the planters; and as +ioyfull to me, as discomfortable to them. Yet seeing it is not my first +crossed voyage, I remaine contented. And wanting my wishes, I leaue off +from prosecuting that whereunto I would to God my wealth were answerable +to my will. Thus committing the reliefe of my discomfortable company the +planters in Virginia, to the merciful help of the Almighty, whom I most +humbly beseech to helpe and comfort them, according to his most holy will +and their good desire, I take my leaue: from my house at Newtowne in +Kylmore the 4 of February, 1593. + +Your most welwishing friend, + +IOHN WHITE. + + + + +XXXIII. The fift voyage of M. Iohn White into the West Indies and parts of +America called Virginia, in the yeere 1590. + + +The 20 of March the three shippes the Hopewell, the Iohn Euangelist, and +the little Iohn, put to sea from Plymmouth with two small Shallops. + +The 25 at midnight both our Shallops were sunke being towed at the ships +stearnes by the Boatswaines negligence. + +On the 30 we saw a head vs that part of the coast of Barbary, lying East +of Cape Cantyn, and the Bay of Asaphi. + +The next day we came to the Ile of Mogador, where rode, at our passing by, +a Pinnesse of London called the Mooneshine. + + + +Aprill. + + +On the first of Aprill we ankored in Santa Cruz rode, where we found two +great shippes of London lading in Sugar, of whom we had 2 shipboats to +supply the losse of our Shalops. + +On the 2 we set sayle from the rode of Santa Cruz for the Canaries. + +On Saturday the 4 we saw Alegranza, the East Ile of the Canaries. + +On Sunday the 5 of Aprill we gaue chase to a double flyboat, the which, we +also the same day fought with, and tooke her, with losse of three of their +men slaine, and one hurt. + +On Munday the 6 we saw Grand Canarie, and the next day we landed and tooke +in fresh water on the Southside thereof. + +On the 9. we departed from Grand Canary, and framed our course for +Dominica. + +The last of Aprill we saw Dominica, and the same night we came to an anker +on the Southside thereof. + + + +May. + + +The first of May in the morning many of the Saluages came aboord our ships +in their Canowes, and did traffique with vs; we also the same day landed +and entered their Towne from whence we returned the same day aboord +without any resistance of the Saluages; or any offence done to them. + +The 2 of May our Admirall and our Pinnesse departed from Dominica leauing +the Iohn our Viceadmirall playing off and on about Dominica, hoping to +take some Spaniard outwardes bound to the Indies; the same night we had +sight of three small Ilands called Los Santos, leauing Guadeloupe and them +on our starboord. + +The 3 we had sight of S. Christophers Iland, bearing Northeast and by East +off vs. + +On the 4 we sayled by the Virgines, which are many broken Ilands, lying at +the East ende of S. Iohns Iland: and the same day towards euening we +landed vpon one of them called Blanca, where we killed an incredible +number of foules: here we stayed but three houres, and from thence stood +into the shore Northwest, and hauing brought this Iland Southeast off vs, +we put towards night thorow an opening or swatch, called The passage, +lying betweene the Virgines, and the East end of S. Iohn: here the +Pinnesse left vs, and sayled on the South side of S. Iohn. + +The 5 and 6 the Admirall sayled along the North side of S. Iohn, so neere +the shore that the Spaniards discerned vs to be men of warre; and +therefore made fires along the coast as we sailed by, for so their custome +is, when they see any men of warre on their coasts. + +The 7 we landed on the Northwest end of S. Iohn, where we watered in a +good riuer called Yaguana, and the same night following we tooke a Frigate +of tenne Tunne comming from Gwathanelo laden with hides and ginger. In +this place Pedro a Mollato, who knewe all our state ranne from vs to the +Spaniards. + +On the 9 we departed from Yaguana. + +The 13 we landed on an Iland called Mona; whereon were 10 or 12 houses +inhabited of the Spaniards; these we burned and tooke from them a +Pinnesse, which they had drawen a ground and sunke, and caried all her +sayles, mastes, and rudders into the woods, because we should not take him +away; we also chased the Spaniards ouer all the Iland; but they hid them +in caues, hollow rockes, and bushes, so that we could not find them. + +On the 14 we departed from Mona, and the next day after wee came to an +Iland called Saona, about 5 leagues distant from Mona, lying on the +Southside of Hispaniola neere the East end: betweene these two Ilands we +lay off and on 4 or 5 dayes, hoping to take some of the Domingo fleete +doubling this Iland, as a neerer way to Spaine then by Cape Tyburon, or by +Cape S. Anthony. + +On Thursday being the 19 our Viceadmirall, from whom we departed at +Dominica, came to vs at Saona, with whom we left a Spanish Frigate, and +appointed him to lie off and on other fiue daies betweene Saona and Mona +to the ende aforesaid; then we departed from them at Saona for Cape +Tyburon. Here I was enformed that our men of the Viceadmirall, at their +departure from Dominica brought away two young Saluages, which were the +chiefe Casiques sonnes of that Countrey and part of Dominica, but they +shortly after ran away from them at Santa Cruz Iland, where the +Viceadmirall landed to take in ballast. + +On the 21 the Admirall came to the Cape Tyburon, where we found the Iohn +Euangelist our Pinnesse staying for vs: here we tooke in two Spaniards +almost starued on the shore, who made a fire to our ships as we passed by. +Those places for an 100 miles in length are nothing els but a desolate and +meere wildernesse, without any habitation of people, and full of wilde +Bulles and Bores, and great Serpents. + +The 22 our Pinnesse came also to an anker in Aligato Bay at cape Tyburon. +Here we vnderstood of M. Lane, Captaine of the Pinnesse; how he was set +vpon with one of the kings Gallies belonging to Santo Domingo, which was +manned with 400 men, who after he had fought with him 3 or 4 houres, gaue +ouer the fight and forsooke him, without any great hurt done on eyther +part. + +The 26 the Iohn our Vizeadmirall came to vs to cape Tyburon and the Frigat +which we left with him at Saona. This was the appointed place where we +should attend for the meeting with the Santo Domingo Fleete. + +On Whitsunday Euen at Cape Tyburon one of our boyes ranne away from vs, +and at tenne dayes end returned to our ships almost starued for want of +food. In sundry places about this part of Cape Tyburon we found the bones +and carkases of diuers men, who had perished (as wee thought) by famine in +those woods, being either stragled from their company, or landed there by +some men of warre. + + + +Iune. + + +On the 14 of Iune we tooke a smal Spanish frigat which fell amongst vs so +suddenly, as he doubled the point at the Bay of Cape Tyburon, where we +road, so that he could not escape vs. This frigat came from Santo Domingo, +and had but three men in her, the one was an expert Pilot, the other a +Mountainer, and the thirde a Vintener, who escaped all of prison at Santo +Domingo, purposing to fly to Yaguana which is a towne in the West parts of +Hispaniola where many fugitiue Spaniards are gathered together. + +The 17 being Wednesday Captaine Lane was sent to Yaguana with his Pinnesse +and a Frigat to take a shippe, which was there taking in fraight, as we +vnderstood by the old Pylot, whom we had taken three dayes before. + +The 24 the Frigat returned from Captaine Lane at Yaguana, and brought vs +word to cape Tyburon, that Captaine Lane had taken the shippe, with many +passengers and Negroes in the same; which proued not so rich a prize as we +hoped for, for that a Frenchman of warre had taken and spoyled her before +we came. Neuerthelesse her loading was thought worth 1000 or 1300 pounds, +being hides, ginger, Cannafistula, Copper-pannes, and Casaui. + + + +Iuly. + + +The second of Iuly Edward Spicer whom we left in England came to vs at +cape Tyburon, accompanied with a small Pinnesse, whereof one M. Harps was +Captaine. And the same day we had sight of a fleete of 14 saile all of +Santo Domingo, to whom we presently gaue chase, but they vpon the first +sight of vs fled, and separating themselues scattered here and there: +Wherefore we were forced to diuide our selues and so made after them +vntill 12 of the clocke at night. (M319) But then by reason of the +darkenesse we lost sight of ech other, yet in the end the Admirall and the +Moonelight happened to be together the same night at the fetching vp of +the Vizadmirall of the Spanish fleete, against whom the next morning we +fought and tooke him, with losse of one of our men and two hurt, and of +theirs 4 slaine and 6 hurt. But what was become of our Viceadmirall, our +Pinnesse, and Prize, and two Frigates, in all this time, we were ignorant. + +The 3 of Iuly we spent about rifling, romaging, and fitting the Prize to +be sayled with vs. + +The 6 of Iuly we saw Iamayca the which we left on our larboord, keeping +Cuba in sight on our starboord. + +Vpon the 8 of Iuly we saw the Iland of Pinos, which lieth on the Southside +of Cuba nigh vnto the West end or Cape called Cape S. Anthony. And the +same day we gaue chase to a Frigat, but at night we lost sight of her, +partly by the slow sayling of our Admirall, and lacke of the Moonelight +our Pinnesse, whom Captaine Cooke had sent to the Cape the day before. + +On the 11 we came to Cape S. Anthony, where we found our consort the +Moonelight and her Pinnesse abiding for our comming, of whom we vnderstood +that the day before there passed by them 22 saile, some of them of the +burden of 300 and some 400 tunnes loaden with the Kings treasure from the +maine, bound for Hauana: from this 11 of Iuly vntill 22 we were much +becalmed: and the winde being very scarse, and the weather exceeding hoat, +we were much pestered with the Spaniards we had taken: wherefore we were +driuen to land all the Spaniards sauing three, but the place where we +landed them was of their owne choise on the Southside of Cuba neere vnto +the Organes and Rio de Puercos. + +The 23 we had sight of the Cape of Florida, and the broken Ilands thereof +called the Martires.(106) + +The 25 being S. James day in the morning, we fell in with the Matancas, a +head-land 8 leagues towards the East of Hauana, where we purposed to take +fresh water in, and make our abode two or three dayes. + +On Sunday the 26 of Iuly plying to and fro betweene the Matancas and +Hauana, we were espied of three small Pinasses of S. Iohn de Vilua bound +for Hauana exceedingly richly loaden. These 3 Pinasses came very boldly vp +vnto vs, and so continued vntill they came within musket shot of vs. And +we supposed them to be Captaine Harps Pinnesse, and two small Frigats +taken by Captaine Harpe: wherefore we shewed our flag. But they presently +vpon the sight of it turned about and made all the saile they could from +vs toward the shore, and kept themselues in so shallow water, that we were +not able to follow them, and therefore gaue them ouer with expence of shot +and pouder to no purpose. But if we had not so rashly set out our flagge, +we might haue taken them all three, for they would not haue knowen vs +before they had beene in our hands. This chase brought vs so far to +leeward as Hauana: wherfore not finding any of our consorts at the +Matancas, we put ouer againe to the cape of Florida, and from thence +thorow the chanel of Bahama. + +On the 28 the Cape of Florida bare West of vs. + +(M320) The 30 we lost sight of the coast of Florida, and stood to Sea for +to gaine the helpe of the current which runneth much swifter a farre off +then in sight of the coast.(107) For from the Cape to Virginia all along +the shore are none but eddie currents, setting to the South and Southwest. + +The 31 our three ships were clearely disbocked, the great prize, the +Admirall, and the Mooneshine, but our prize being thus disbocked departed +from vs without taking leaue of our Admirall or consort, and sayled +directly for England. + + + +August. + + +On the first of August the winde scanted, and from thence forward we had +very fowl weather with much raine, thundering, and great spouts, which +fell round about vs nigh vnto our ships. + +The 3 we stoode againe in for the shore, and at midday we tooke the height +of the same. The height of that place we found to be 34 degrees of +latitude. Towards night we were within three leagues of the Low sandie +Ilands West of Wokokon. But the weather continued so exceeding foule, that +we could not come to an anker nye the coast: wherefore we stood off againe +to Sea vntill Monday the 9 of August. + +On Munday the storme ceased, and we had very great likelihood of faire +weather: therefore we stood in againe for the shore: and came to an anker +at 11 fadome in 35 degrees of latitude, within a mile of the shore, where +we went on land on the narrow sandy Island, being one of the Ilandes, West +of Wokokon: in this Iland we tooke in some fresh water and caught great +store of fish in the shallow water. Betweene the maine (as we supposed) +and that Iland it was but a mile ouer and three or foure foote deepe in +most places. + +On the 12 in the morning we departed from thence and toward night we came +to an anker at the Northeast end of the Iland of Croatoan, by reason of a +breach which we perceiued to lie out two or three leagues into the Sea: +here we road all that night. + +(M321) The 13 in the morning before we wayed our ankers, our boates were +sent to sound ouer this breach: our ships riding on the side thereof at 5 +fadome; and a ships length from vs we found but 4 and a quarter, and then +deeping and shallowing for the space of two miles, so that sometimes we +found 5 fadome, and by and by 7, and within two casts with the lead 9, and +then 8, next cast 5, and then 6, and then 4, and then 9 againe, and +deeper; but 3 fadome was the last, 2 leagues off from the shore. This +breach is in 35. degr. and a halfe, and lyeth at the very Northeast point +of Croatoan, whereas goeth a fret out of the maine Sea into the inner +waters, which part the Ilandes and the maine land.(108) + +(M322) The 15 of August towards Euening we came to an anker at Hatorask, +in 36 degr. and one third, in fiue fadom water, three leagues from the +shore. At our first comming to anker on this shore we saw a great smoke +rise in the Ile Raonoak neere the place where I left our Colony in the +yeere 1587, which smoake put vs in good hope that some of the Colony were +there expecting my returne out of England. + +The 16 and next morning our 2 boates went a shore, and Captaine Cooke, and +Cap. Spicer, and their company with me, with intent to passe to the place +at Raonoak where our countrymen were left. At our putting from the ship we +commanded our Master gunner to make readie 2 Minions and a Falkon well +loden, and to shoot them off with reasonable space betweene euery shot, to +the ende that their reportes might bee heard to the place where wee hoped +to finde some of our people. (M323) This was accordingly performed, and +twoe boats put off vnto the shore, in the Admirals boat, we sounded all +the way and found from our shippe vntill we came within a mile of the +shore nine, eight, and seuen fadome: but before we were halfe way betweene +our ships and the shore we saw another great smoke to the Southwest of +Kindrikers mountes: we therefore thought good to goe to that second smoke +first, but it was much further from the harbour where we landed, then we +supposed it to be, so that we were very sore tired before wee came to the +smoke. But that which grieued vs more was that when we came to the smoke, +we found no man nor signe that any had bene there lately, nor yet any +fresh water in all this waye to drinke. Being thus wearied with this +iourney we returned to the harbour where we left our boates, who in our +absence had brought their caske a shore for fresh water, so we deferred +our going to Roanoak vntill the next morning, and caused some of those +saylers to digge in those sandie hills for fresh water whereof we found +very sufficient. That night wee returned aboord with our boates and our +whole company in safety. + +The next morning being the 17 of August, our boates and company were +prepared againe to goe vp to Roanoak, but Captaine Spicer had then sent +his boat ashore for fresh water, by meanes whereof it was ten of the +clocke afternoone before we put from our ships which were then come to an +anker within two miles of the shore. The Admirals boat was halfe way +toward the shore, when Captaine Spicer put off from his ship. The Admirals +boat first passed the breach, but not without some danger of sinking, for +we had a sea brake in our boat which filled vs halfe full of water, but by +the will of God and carefull styrage of Captaine Cooke we came safe +ashore, sauing onely that our furniture, victuals, match and powder were +much wet and spoyled. For at this time the winde blue at Northeast and +direct into the harbour so great a gale, that the Sea brake extremely on +the barre, and the tide went very forcibly at the entrance. (M324) By that +time our Admirals boat was halled ashore, and most of our things taken out +to dry, Captaine Spicer came to the entrance of the breach, with his mast +standing vp, and was halfe passed ouer, but by the rash and vndiscreet +styrage of Ralph Skinner his Masters mate, a very dangerous sea brake into +their boate and ouerset them quite, the men kept the boat some in it, and +some hanging on it, but the next sea set the boat on ground, where it beat +so, that some of them were forced to let goe their hold, hoping to wade +ashore: but the Sea still beat them downe, so that they could neither +stand nor swimme, and the boat twise or thrice was turned the keele +vpward, whereon Captaine Spicer and Skinner hung vntill they sunke, and +were seene no more. But foure that could swimme a little kept themselues +in deeper water and were saued by Captaine Cookes meanes, who so soone as +he saw their ouersetting, stripped himselfe, and four other that could +swimme very well, and with all haste possible rowed vnto them, and saued +foure. There were 11 in all and 7 of the chiefest were drowned, whose +names were Edward Spicer, Ralph Skinner, Edward Kelly, Thomas Beuis, Hance +the Surgion, Edward Kelborne, Robert Coleman. This mischance did so much +discomfort the saylers, that they were all of one mind not to goe any +further to seeke the planters. But in the end by the commandement and +perswasion of me and Captaine Cooke, they prepared the boates: and seeing +the Captaine and me so resolute, they seemed much more willing. Our boates +and all things fitted againe, we put off from Hatorask, being the number +of 19 persons in both boates: but before we could get to the place where +our planters were left, it was so exceeding darke, that we overshot the +place a quarter of a mile: there we espied towards the North ende of the +Island the light of a great fire thorow the woods, to which we presently +rowed: when wee came right ouer against it, we let fall our Grapnel neere +the shore and sounded with a trumpet a Call, and afterwardes many familiar +English tunes and Songs, and called to them friendly; but we had no +answere, we therefore landed at day-breake, and comming to the fire, we +found the grasse and sundry rotten trees burning about the place. From +hence we went thorow the woods to that part of the Island directly ouer +aguinst Dasamongwepeuk, and from thence we returned by the water side, +round about the North point of the Iland, vntill we came to the place, +where I left our Colony in the yeere 1586. In all this way we saw in the +sand the print of the Saluages feet of 2 or 3 sorts troaden the night, and +as we entered vp the sandy banke vpon a tree, in the very browe thereof +were curiously carued these faire Romane letters C R O: which letters +presently we knew to signifie the place, where I should find the planters +seated, according to a secret token agreed vpon betweene them and me at my +last departure from them, which was, that in any wayes they should not +faile to write or carue on the trees or posts of the dores the name of the +place where they should be seated; for at my comming alway they were +prepared to remoue from Roanoak 50 miles into the maine. Therefore at my +departure from them in An. 1587 I willed them, that if they should happen +to be distressed in any of those places, that then they should carue ouer +the letters or name, a Crosse + in this forme, but we found no such signe +of distresse. And hauing well considered of this, we passed toward the +place where they were left in sundry houses, but we found the houses taken +downe, and the place very strongly enclosed with a high palisado of great +trees, with cortynes and flankers very Fortlike, and one of the chiefe +trees or postes at the right side of the entrance had the barke taken off, +and 5 foote from the ground in fayre Capitall letters was grauen CROATOAN +without any crosse or signe of distresse; this done, we entered into the +palisado, where we found many barres of iron, two pigges of lead, foure +yron fowlers, Iron sacker-shotte, and such like heauie thinges, throwen +here and there, almost ouergrowen with grasse and weedes. From thence wee +went along by the water side, towards the poynt of the Creeke to see if we +could find any of their botes or Pinnesse, but we could perceiue no signe +of them, nor any of the last Falkons and small Ordinance which were left +with them, at my departure from them. At our returne from the Creeke, some +of our Saylers meeting vs, told vs that they had found where diuers chests +had bene hidden, and long sithence digged vp againe and broken vp, and +much of the goods in them spoyled and scattered about, but nothing left, +of such things as the Sauages knew any vse of, vndefaced. Presently +Captaine Cooke and I went to the place, which was in the ende of an olde +trench, made two yeeres past by Captaine Amadas: wheere wee found fiue +Chests, that had bene carefully hidden of the Planters, and of the same +chests three were my owne, and about the place many of my things spoyled +and broken, and my bookes torne from the couers, the frames of some of my +pictures and Mappes rotten and spoyled with rayne, and my armour almost +eaten through with rust; this could bee no other but the deede of the +Sauages our enemies at Dasamongwepeuk, who had watched the departure of +our men to Croatoan; and assoone as they were departed digged vp euery +place where they suspected any thing to be buried: but although it much +grieued me to see such spoyle of my goods, yet on the other side I greatly +ioyed that I had safely found a certaine token of their safe being at +Croatoan, which is the place where Manteo was borne, and the Sauages of +the Iland our friends. + +When we had seene in this place so much as we could, we returned to our +Boates, and departed from the shoare towards our shippes, with as much +speede as we could: For the weather beganne to ouercast, and very likely +that a foule and stormie night would ensue. Therefore the same Euening +with much danger and labour, we got our selues aboard, by which time the +winde and seas were so greatly risen, that wee doubted our Cables and +Anchors would scarcely holde vntill Morning: wherefore the Captaine caused +the Boate to be manned by fiue lusty men, who could swimme all well, and +sent them to the little Iland on the right hand of the Harbour, to bring +aboard sixe of our men, who had filled our caske with fresh water: the +Boate the same night returned aboard with our men, but all our Caske ready +filled they left behinde, impossible to bee had aboard without danger of +casting away both men and Boates: for this night prooued very stormie and +foule. + +The next Morning it was agreed by the Captaine and my selfe, with the +Master and others, to way anchor, and goe for the place at Croatoan, where +our planters were: for that then the winde was good for that place, and +also to leaue that Caske with fresh water on shoare in the Iland vntill +our returne. So then they brought the cable to the Capston, but when the +anchor was almost apecke, the Cable broke, by meanes whereof we lost +another Anchor, wherewith we droue so fast into the shoare, that wee were +forced to let fall a third Anchor: which came so fast home that the Shippe +was almost aground by Kenricks mounts: so that we were forced to let +slippe the Cable ende for ende. And if it had not chanced that wee had +fallen into a chanell of deeper water, closer by the shoare then wee +accompted of, wee could neuer haue gone cleare of the poynt that lyeth to +the Southwardes of Kenricks mount. Being thus cleare of some dangers, and +gotten into deeper waters, but not without some losse: for wee had but one +Cable and Anchor left vs of foure, and the weather grew to be fouler and +fouler; our victuals scarse, and our caske and fresh water lost: it was +therefore determined that we should goe for Saint Iohn or some other Iland +to the Southward for fresh water. And it was further purposed, that if wee +could any wayes supply our wants of victuals and other necessaries, either +at Hispaniola, Sant Iohn, or Trynidad, that then we should continue in the +Indies all the Winter following, with hope to make 2. rich voyages of one, +and at our returne to visit our countreymen at Virginia. The captaine and +the whole company in the Admirall (with my earnest petitions) thereunto +agreed, so that it rested onely to knowe what the Master of the +Moone-light our consort would doe herein. (M325) But when we demanded them +if they would accompany vs in that new determination, they alleaged that +their weake and leake Shippe was not able to continue it; wherefore the +same night we parted, leauing the Moone-light to goe directly for England, +and the Admirall set his course for Trynidad, which course we kept two +dayes. + +On the 28. the winde changed, and it was sette on foule weather euery way: +but this storme brought the winde West and Northwest, and blewe so +forcibly, that wee were able to beare no sayle, but our fore-course halfe +mast high, wherewith wee ranne vpon the winde perforce, the due course for +England, for that wee were driuen to change our first determination for +Trynidad, and stoode for the Ilands of Acores, where wee purposed to take +in fresh water, and also there hoped to meete with some English men of +warre about those Ilands, at whose hands wee might obtaine some supply of +our wants. And thus continuing our course for the Acores, sometimes with +calmes, and sometimes with very scarce windes, on the fifteenth of +September the winde came South Southeast, and blew so exceedingly, that +wee were forced to lye atry(109) all that day. At this time by account we +iudged our selues to be about twentie leagues to the West of Cueruo and +Flores, but about night, the storme ceased, and fayre weather ensued. + +On Thursday the seuenteenth wee saw Cueruo and Flores, but we could not +come to anker that night, by reason the winde shifted. The next Morning +being the eighteenth, standing in againe with Cueruo, we escryed a sayle a +head vs, to whom we gaue chase: but when wee came neere him, wee knew him +to be a Spanyard, and hoped to make sure purchase of him: but we +vnderstood at our speaking with him, that he was a prize, and of the +Domingo fleete already taken by the Iohn our consort, in the Indies. We +learned also of this prize, that our Viceadmirall and Pinnesse had fought +with the rest of the Domingo fleete, and had forced them with their +Admirall to flee vnto Iamaica vnder the Fort for succour, and some of them +ran themselues aground, whereof one of them they brought away, and tooke +out of some others so much as the time would permit. And further wee +vnderstood of them, that in their returne from Iamaica about the Organes +neere Cape Saint Anthony, our Viceadmirall mette with two Shippes of the +mayne land, come from Mexico, bound for Hauana, with whom he fought: in +which fight our Viceadmirals Lieutenant was slaine, and the Captaines +right arme strooken off, with foure other of his men slaine, and sixteene +hurt. (M326) But in the ende he entred, and tooke one of the Spanish +shippes, which was so sore shot by vs vnder water, that before they could +take out her treasure she sunke; so that we lost thirteene Pipes of siluer +which sunke with her, besides much other rich marchandize. And in the +meane time the other Spanish shippe being pearced with nine shotte vnder +water, got away; whom our Viceadmirall intended to pursue: but some of +their men in the toppe made certaine rockes, which they saw aboue water +neere the shoare, to be Gallies of Hauana and Cartagena, comming from +Hauana to rescue the two Ships; Wherefore they gaue ouer the chase, and +went for England. After this intelligence was giuen vs by this our prize, +he departed from vs, and went for England. + +On Saturday the 19. of September we came to an Ancre neere a small village +on the North side of Flores, where we found ryding 5. English men of +warre, of whom we vnderstood that our Viceadmirall and Prize were gone +thence for England. One of these fiue was the Moonelight our consort, who +vpon the first sight of our comming into Flores, set sayle and went for +England, not taking any leaue of vs. + +On Sunday the 20 the Mary Rose, Admirall of the Queenes fleete, wherein +was Generall Sir Iohn Hawkins, stood in with Flores, and diuers other of +the Queenes ships, namely the Hope, the Nonpareilia, the Rainebow, the +Swift-sure, the Foresight, with many other good merchants ships of warre, +as the Edward Bonauenture, the Marchant Royal, the Amitie, the Eagle, the +Dainty of sir Iohn Hawkins, and many other good ships and pinnesses, all +attending to meete with the king of Spaines fleete, comming from Terra +firma of the West Indies. + +The 22. of September we went aboard the Raynebow, and towards night we +spake with the Swift-sure, and gaue him 3. pieces. The captaines desired +our company; wherefore we willingly attended on them: who at this time +with 10. other ships stood for Faial. But the Generall with the rest of +the Fleete were separated from vs, making two fleetes, for the surer +meeting with the Spanish fleete. + +On Wednesday the 23. we saw Gratiosa, where the Admiral and the rest of +the Queenes fleete were come together. The Admirall put forth a flag of +counsel, in which was determined that the whole fleete should go for the +mayne, and spred themselues on the coasts of Spaine and Portugal, so farre +as conueniently they might, for the surer meeting of the Spanish fleete in +those parts. + +The 20. we came to Faial, where the Admiral with some other of the fleete +ankered, other some plyed vp and downe betweene that and the Pico vntill +midnight, at which time the Anthony shot off a piece and weyed, shewing +his light: after whom the whole fleete stood to the East, the winde at +Northeast by East. + +On Sunday the 27. towards Euening wee tooke our leaue of the Admirall and +the whole fleete, who stood to the East. But our shippe accompanied with a +Flyboat stoode in again with S. George, where we purposed to take in more +fresh water, and some other fresh victuals. + +On Wednesday the 30. of September, seeing the winde hang so Northerly, +that wee could not atteine the Iland of S. George, we gaue ouer our +purpose to water there, and the next day framed our due course for +England. + + + +October. + + +The 2. of October in the Morning we saw S. Michaels Iland on our Starre +board quarter. + +The 23. at 10. of the clocke afore noone, we saw Vshant in Britaigne. + +On Saturday the 24. we came in safetie, God be thanked, to an anker at +Plymmouth.(110) + + + + +XXXIV. The relation of John de Verrazano of the land by him discovered. + + +To the most Christian King of France, Francis the first. + +The relation of Iohn de Verrazzano a Florentine, of the land by him +discouered in the name of his Maiestie. Written at Diepe the eight of +Iuly, 1524. + +I wrote not to your Maiesty, most Christian king, since the time we +suffered the tempest in the north partes, of the successe of the foure +Shippes, which your Maiestie sent forth to discouer new lands by the +Ocean, thinking your Maiestie had bene already duely enformed thereof. Now +by these presents I will giue your Maiestie to vnderstand, how by the +violence of the windes we were forced with two ships, the Norman and the +Dolphin (in such euill case as they were) to land in Britaine. Where after +wee had repayred them in all poynts as was needefull, and armed them very +well, we tooke our course along by the coast of Spaine, which your +Maiestie shall vnderstand by the profite that we receiued thereby. +Afterwards with the Dolphin alone we determined to make discouerie of new +Countries, to prosecute the nauigation we had already begun, which I +purpose at this present to recount vnto your Maiestie to make manifest the +whole proceeding of the matter. + +(M327) The 17 of Ianuary the yeere 1524. by the grace of God we departed +from the dishabited rocke by the isle of Madera, apperteining to the king +of Portugal, with 50. men, with victuals, weapons, and other ship-munition +very well prouided and furnished for 8 moneths: And sayling Westwards with +a faire Easterly winde, in 25. dayes we ran 500. leagues, and the 20. of +Februarie we were ouertaken with as sharpe and terrible a tempest as euer +any saylers suffered: whereof with the diuine helpe and mercifull +assistance of Almighty God, and the goodnesse of our shippe, accompanied +with the good happe of her fortunate name, we were deliuered, and with a +prosperous winde followed our course West and by North. (M328) And in +other 25. dayes we made aboue 400. leagues more, where we discouered a new +land, neuer before seene of any man either ancient or moderne, and at +first sight it seemed somewhat low, but being within a quarter of a league +of it, we perceiued by the great fires that we saw by the Sea coast, that +it was inhabited: and saw that the land stretched to the Southwards. In +seeking some conuenient Harborough wherein to anchor and to haue knowledge +of the place, we sayled fiftie leagues in vaine, and seeing the land to +runne still to the Southwards, we resolued to return back againe towards +the North where wee found ourselues troubled with the like difficulty. At +length being in despaire to finde any Port, wee cast anchor vpon the +coast, and sent our Boate to shore, where we saw great store of people +which came to the sea side: and seeing vs approch, they fled away, and +sometime would stand still and looke backe, beholding vs with great +admiration: but afterwards being animated and assured with signes that we +made them, some of them came hard to the Sea side, seeming to reioyce very +much at the sight of vs, and marueiling greatly at our apparel, shape and +whitenesse, shewing vs by sundry signes where we might most commodiously +come aland with our Boat, offering vs also of their victuals to eat. Now I +wil briefly declare to your Maiestie their life and maners, as farre as we +could haue notice thereof: These people goe altogether naked, except only +that they couer their priuie parts with certaine skins of beastes like +vnto Martens, which they fasten vnto a narrow girdle made of grasse very +artificially wrought, hanged about with tayle of diuers other beastes, +which round about their bodies hang dangling downe to their knees. Some of +them weare garlands of byrdes feathers. The people are of colour russet, +and not much unlike the Saracens: their hayre blacke, thicke and not very +long, which they tye together in a knot behind and weare it like a litle +taile. They are well featured in their limbes, of meane stature, and +commonly somewhat bigger then we: broad breasted, strong armed, their legs +and other parts of their bodies well fashioned, and they are disfigured in +nothing, saving, that they have somewhat broade visages, and yet not all +of them: for we saw many of them wel favoured, having blacke and greate +eyes, with a cheerefull and steady looke, not strong of body, yet sharpe +witted, nymble and exceeding great runners, as farre as we could learne by +experience, and in those two last qualities they are like to the people of +the East partes of the world, and especially to them of the uttermost +parts of China. We could not learne of this people their maner of living, +nor their particular customs, by reason of the short abode we made on the +shore, our company being but small, and our ship ryding farre off in the +Sea. And not farre from these we found another people, whose living wee +thinke to be like unto theirs; (as hereafter I wil declare unto your +Majestie) shewing at this present the situation and nature of the foresayd +land. The shore is all covered with small sand, and so ascendeth upwards +for the space of 15 foote, rising in forme of litle hils about 50 paces +broad. And sayling forwards, we found certaine small Rivers and armes of +the Sea, that fall downe by certaine creekes, washing the shoare on both +sides as the coast lyeth. And beyond this we saw the open Countrey rising +in height above the sandy shoare with many faire fields and plaines, full +of mighty great woods, some very thicke, and some thinne, replenished with +divers sorts of trees, as pleasant and delectable to behold, as is +possible to imagine. And your Majesty may not thinke that these are like +the woods of Hercynia or the wilde deserts of Tartary, and the Northerne +coasts full of fruitlesse trees: But they are full of Palme trees, Bay +trees, and high Cypresse trees, and many other sorts of trees unknowen in +Europe, which yeeld most sweet savours farre from the shoare, the +propertie whereof we could not learne for the cause aforesayd, and not for +any difficulty to passe through the woods, seeing they are not so thicke +but that a man may passe through them. Neither doe we thinke that they +partaking of the East world round about them, are altogether voyd of drugs +and spicery, and other riches of golde, seeing the colour of the land doth +so much argue it. And the land is full of many beastes, as Stags, Deere +and Hares, and likewise of Lakes and Pooles of fresh water, with great +plentie of Fowles, conuenient for all kinde of pleasant game. This land is +in latitude 34. degrees, with good and wholesome ayre, temperature, +betweene hot and colde, no vehement windes doe blowe in those Regions, and +those that doe commonly reigne in those coasts, are the Northwest and West +windes in the summer season, (in the beginning whereof we were there) the +skie cleere and faire with very little raine: and if at any time the ayre +be cloudie and mistie with the Southerne winde, immediatly it is dissolued +and waxeth cleere and fayre againe. The Sea is calme, not boysterous, the +waues gentle: and although all the shore be somewhat sholde and without +harborough, yet it is not dangerous to the saylers, being free from rocks +and deepe, so that within 4. or 5. foote of the shore, there is 20. foote +deepe of water without ebbe or flood, the depth still increasing in such +vniforme proportion. There is very good ryding at Sea: for any ship being +shaken in a tempest, can neuer perish there by breaking of her cables, +which we haue prooued by experience. For in the beginning of March (as it +is vsuall in all regions) being in the Sea oppressed with Northerne +windes, and ryding there, wee found our anchor broken before the earth +fayled or mooued at all. (M329) We departed from this place, stil running +along the coast, which we found to trend toward the East,(111) and we saw +euery where very great fires, by reason of the multitude of the +inhabitants. While we rode on that coast, partly because it had no +harborough, and for that we wanted water, we sent our boate ashoare with +25. men: where by reason of great and continuall waues that beat against +the shoare, being an open Coast, without succour, none of our men could +possibly goe ashoare without loosing our boate. (M330) Wee saw there many +people which came vnto the shoare, making diuers signes of friendship, and +shewing that they were content we should come aland, and by trial we found +them to be very courteous and gentle, as your Maiestie shal vnderstand by +the successe. To the intent we might send them of our things, which the +Indians commonly desire and esteeme, as sheetes of paper, glasses, bels, +and such like trifles; we sent a young man one of our Mariners ashoare, +who swimming towards them, and being within 3. or 4. yards of the shore, +not trusting them, cast the things vpon the shoare: but seeking afterwards +to returne, he was with such violence of the waues beaten vpon the shore, +that he was so bruised that he lay there almost dead: which the Indians +perceiuing, ranne to catch him, and drawing him out, they caried him a +litle way off from the sea. The yong man perceiuing they caried him, being +at the first dismaied, began then greatly to feare, and cried out +piteously: likewise did the Indians which did accompany him, going about +to cheere him and to giue him courage, and then setting him on the ground +at the foote of a litle hil against the sunne, they began to behold him +with great admiration, marueiling at the whitenesse of his flesh: And +putting off his clothes, they made him warme at a great fire, not without +our great feare which remayned in the boate, that they would haue rosted +him at that fire, and haue eaten him. The young man hauing recouered his +strength, and hauing stayed a while with them, shewed them by signes that +he was desirous to returne to the ship: and they with great loue clapping +him fast about with many imbracings, accompanying him vnto the sea, and to +put him in more assurance, leauing him alone, went vnto a high ground and +stood there, beholding him vntill he was entred into the boate. This yong +man obserued, as we did also, that these are of colour inclining to Blacke +as the other were, with their flesh very shining, of meane stature, +handsome visage, and delicate limmes, and of very litle strength, but of +prompt wit: farther we obserued not. + +(M331) Departing from hence, following the shore which trended somewhat +toward the North, in 50. leagues space we came to another land which +shewed much more faire and ful of woods, being very great, where we rode +at anker: and that we might haue some knowledge thereof, wee sent 20. men +aland, which entred into the countrey about 2 leagues, and they found that +the people were fled to the woods for feare. They saw onely one olde woman +with a young maide of 18. or 20. yeeres old, which seeing our company, hid +themselues in the grasse for feare: the olde woman caried two Infants on +her shoulders, and behind her necke a child of 8. yeeres old. The young +woman was laden likewise with as many: but when our men came vnto them, +the women cried out: the olde woman made signes that the men were fledde +vnto the woods. Assoone as they saw vs to quiet them and to winne their +fauour, our men gave them such victuals as they had with them, to eate, +which the old woman receiued thankfully: but the yong woman disdained them +all, and threw them disdainfully on the ground. They tooke a child from +the olde woman to bring into France, and going about to take the yong +woman which was very beautiful and of tall stature, they could not +possibly, for the great outcries that she made, bring her to the sea: and +especially hauing great woods to passe thorow, and being farre from the +ship, we purposed to leaue her behind, bearing away the child onely. We +found those folkes to be more white then those that we found before, being +clad with certaine leaues that hang on boughs of trees, which they sewe +together with threds of wilde hempe: their heads were trussed vp after the +same maner as the former were: their ordinary food is of pulse, whereof +they haue great store, differing in colour and taste from ours; of good +and pleasant taste. Moreouer they liue by fishing and fowling, which they +take with ginnes, and bowes made of hard wood, the arrowes of Canes, being +headed with the bones of fish, and other beasts. The beasts in these parts +are much wilder then in our Europe, by reason they are continually chased +and hunted. (M332) We saw many of their boats made of one tree 20 foote +long, and 4 foote broad, which are not made with yron or any other kind of +metall (because that in all this countrey for the space of leagues which +we ranne, we neuer saw one stone of any sort:) they helpe themselues with +fire, burning so much of the tree as is sufficient for the hollowness of +the boat; the like they doe in making the sterne and the forepart, vntil +it be fit to saile vpon the sea. The land is in situation goodnes and +fairenesse like the other: it hath woods like the other, thinne and full +of diuers sorts of trees: but not sweete, because the countrey is more +Northerly and colde. + +(M333) We saw in this Countrey many Vines growing naturally, which growing +vp, tooke holde of the trees as they doe in Lombardie, which if by +husbandmen they were dressed in good order, without all doubt they would +yeeld excellent wines: for hauing oftentimes seene the fruit thereof +dryed, which was sweete and pleasant, and not differing from ours, wee +thinke that they doe esteeme the same, because that in euery place where +they growe, they take away the vnder branches growing round about, that +the fruit thereof may ripen the better. + +We found also roses, violets, lilies, and many sorts of herbes, and sweete +and odoriferous flowers different from ours. We knewe not their dwellings, +because they were farre vp in the land, and we iudge by many signes that +we saw, that they are of wood and of trees framed together. + +We doe beleeue also by many coniectures and signes, that many of them +sleeping in the fields, haue no other couert then the open sky. Further +knowledge haue we not of them: we thinke that all the rest whose countreys +we passed, liue all after one maner. Hauing made our aboade three dayes in +this countrey, and ryding on the coast for want of harboroughs, we +concluded to depart from thence, trending along the shore betweene the +North and the East, sayling onely in the daytime, and riding at anker by +night. In the space of 100. leagues sayling we found a very pleasant place +situated amongst certaine litle hils: (M334) from amidst the which hils +there ran downe into the sea an exceeding great streme of water, which +within the mouth was very deepe, and from the sea to the mouth of the same +with the tide which we found to rise 8. foote, any great ship laden may +passe vp. + +But because we rode at rode at anker, in a place well fenced from the +wind, we would not venture ourselues without knowledge of the place: and +we passed vp with our boat onely into the sayd Riuer, and saw the countrey +very well peopled. (M335) The people are almost like vnto the others, and +are clad with the feathers of fowles of diuers colours: they came towards +vs very cheerefully, making great showts of admiration; shewing vs where +we might come to land most safely with our boat. We entered vp the sayd +river into the land about halfe a league where it made a most pleasant +lake about 3 leagues in compasse: on the which they rowed from the one +side to the other to the number of 30. of their small boates, wherein were +many people which passed from one shore to the other to come and see vs. +(M336) And behold vpon the sudden (as is woont to fall out in sayling) a +contrary flaw of wind comming from the sea, we were inforced to returne to +our ship, leauing this lande to our great discontentment, for the great +commodity and pleasantnesse thereof, which we suppose is not without some +riches, all the hils shewing minerall waters in them. (M337) We weyed +anker, and sayled toward the East, for so the coast trended, and so +alwayes for 50. leagues being in the sight thereof, we discouered an Iland +in forme of a triangle, distant from the maine land 10. leagues, about the +bignesse of the Iland of the Rhodes: it was ful of hils couered with +trees, well peopled, for we saw fires all along the coast: wee gaue it the +name of your Maiesties mother, not staying there by reason of the weather +being contrary. + +And we came to another land being 15. leagues from the Iland, where we +found a passing good hauen, wherein being entred, we found about 20. small +boats of the people, which with diuers cries and wondrings came about our +ship, comming no neerer then 50. paces towards vs: they stayed and beheld +the artificialnesse of our ship, our shape and apparel: then they all made +a loud showt together, declaring that they reioyced. When we had something +animated them, vsing their gestures, they came so neere vs, that we cast +them certaine bels and glasses, and many toyes, which when they had +receiued, they looked on them with laughing, and came without feare aboard +our ship. There were amongst these people 2. kings of so goodly stature +and shape as is possible to declare: the eldest was about 40. yeeres of +age, the second was a young man of 20. yeeres olde. Their apparell was on +this maner: the elder had vpon his naked body a Harts skin wrought +artificially with diuers branches like damaske: his head was bare with the +hayre tyed vp behind with diuers knot: about his necke he had a large +chaine, garnished with diuers stones of sundry colours: the yong man was +almost apparelled after the same maner. This is the goodliest people, and +of the fairest conditions that we haue found in this our voyage. They +exceed vs in bignes: they are of the colour of brasse, some of them +incline more to whitenesse: others are of yellow colour, of comely visage, +with long and blacke haire, which they are very careful to trim and decke +vp: they are blacke and quicke eyed, and of sweete and pleasant +countenance, imitating much the old fashion. I write not to your Maiestie +of the other parts of their body, hauing al such proportion as +apperteineth to any handsome man. The women are of the like conformitie +and beautie: very handsome and well fauoured, of pleasaunt countenance, +and comely to behold: they are as wel manered and continent as any women, +and of good education: they are all naked saue their priuy partes, which +they couer with a Deeres skin branched or embrodered as the men vse: there +are also of them which weare on their armes very rich skinnes of Luzernes: +they adorne their heads with diuers ornaments made of their owne haire, +which hang downe before on both sides their brestes: others vse other +kinde of dressing themselues like vnto the women of Egypt and Syria, these +are of the elder sort: and when they are maried, they weare diuers toyes, +according to the vsage of the people of the East, as well men as women. + +Among whom we saw many plates of wrought copper, which they esteeme more +then golde, which for the colour they make no account of Azure and Red. +The things that they esteeme most of all those which we gaue them, were +bels, christall of Azure colour, and other toyes to hang at their eares or +about their necke. They did not desire cloth of silke or of golde, much +lesse of any other sort, neither cared they for things made of steele and +yron, which wee often shewed them in our armour which they made no wonder +at, and in beholding them they onely asked the arte of making them: the +like they did at our glasses, which when they beheld, they suddenly laught +and gaue them vs againe. They are very liberall, for they giue that which +they haue: wee became great friends with these, and one day we entred into +the Hauen with our ship, whereas before we rode a league off at Sea by +reason of the contrary weather. They came in great companies of their +small boats vnto the ship with their faces all bepainted with diuers +colours, shewing vs that it was a signe of ioy, bringing vs of their +victuals, they made signes vnto vs where we might safest ride in the Hauen +for the safegard of our ship keeping still our company: and after we were +come to an anker, wee bestowed 15 dayes in prouiding our selues many +necessary things, whither euery day the people repaired to see our ship +bringing their wiues with them, whereof they were very ielous: and they +themselues entring abord the ship and staying there a good space, caused +their wiues to stay in their boats, and for all the entreatie we could +make, offring to giue them diuers things, we could neuer obtaine that they +would suffer them to come abord our ship. And oftentimes one of the two +kings comming with his queene, and many gentlemen for their pleasure to +see vs, they all stayed on shore 200. paces from vs, sending a small boat +to giue vs intelligence of their comming, saying they would come to see +our ship: this they did in token of safety, and assone as they had answere +from vs, they came immediatly, and hauing staied awhile to behold it, they +wondered at hearing the cries and noyses of the mariners. The queene and +her maids stayed in a very light boat, at an Iland a quarter of a league +off, while the king abode a long space in our ship vttering diuers +conceits with gestures, viewing with great admiration all the furniture of +the ship, demanding the property of euery thing particularly. He tooke +likewise great pleasure in beholding our apparell, and in tasting our +meats, and so courteously taking his leaue departed. And sometimes our men +staying 2 or 3 daies on a litle Iland neere the ship for diuers +necessaries (as it is the vse of seamen) he returned with 7 or 8 of his +gentlemen to see what we did, and asked vs oftentimes if we meant to make +any long abode there, offring vs of their prouision: then the king drawing +his bow and running vp and down with his gentlemen, made much sport to +gratifie our men: (M338) we were oftentimes within the land 5 or 6 +leagues, which we found as pleasant as is possible to declare, very apt +for any kind of husbandry of corne, wine and oyle: for that there are +plaines 25 or 30 leagues broad, open and without any impediment, of trees +of such fruitfullnesse, that any seed being sowed therein, wil bring forth +most excellent fruit. We entred afterwards into the woods, which we found +so great and thicke, that any army were it neuer so great might haue hid +it selfe therein, the trees whereof are okes, cipresse trees, and other +sortes vnknowen in Europe. We found Pomi appii, damson trees, and nut +trees, and many other sort of fruit differing from ours: there are beasts +in great abundance, as harts, deere, luzerns, and other kinds which they +take with their nets and bowes which are their chiefe weapons: the arrowes +which they vse are made with great cunning, and in stead of yron, they +head them with flint, with iasper stone and hard marble and other sharp +stones which they vse in stead of yron to cut trees, and to make their +boates of one whole piece of wood, making it hollow with great and +wonderful art, wherein 10 or 12 men may sit commodiously: their oares are +short and broad at the end, and they vse them in the sea without any +danger, and by maine force of armes, with as great speedines as they list +themselues. (M339) We saw their houses made in circular or round forme, 10 +or. 12 paces in compasse, made with halfe circles of timber separate one +from another without any order of building, couered with mattes of straw +wrought cunningly together, which saue them from wind and raine; and if +they had the order of building and perfect skil of workmanship as we haue +there were no doubt but that they would also make eftsoones great and +stately buildings. (M340) For all the sea coasts are ful of cleare and +glistering stones, and alablaster, and therefore it is full of good hauens +and harboroughs for ships. They mooue the foresaid houses from one place +to another according to the commodity of the place and season wherin they +wil make their abode, and only taking of the mattes, they haue other +houses builded incontinent. The father and the whole family dwell together +in one house in great number: in some of them we saw 25 or 30 persons. +They feed as the other doe aforesaid of pulse which grow in that Countrey +with better order of husbandry then in the others. They obserue in their +sowing the course of the Moone and the rising of certaine starres, and +diuers other customes spoken of by antiquity. Moreouer they liue by +hunting and fishing. (M341) They liue long, and are seldome sicke, and if +they chance to fall sicke at any time, they heale themselues with fire +without any phisitian, and they say that they die for very age. They are +very pitifull and charitable towards their neighbours, they make great +lamentations in their aduersity: and in their miserie, the kinred reckon +vp all their felicitie. At their departure out of life, they vse mourning +mixt with singing, which continueth for a long space. This is as much as +we could learne of them. (M342) This land is situated in the Paralele of +Rome, in 41. degrees and 2. terces: but somewhat more cold by accidentall +causes and not of nature, (as I wil declare vnto to your highnesse +elsewhere) describing at this present the situation of the foresaid +Countrey, which lieth East and West, I say that the mouth of the Hauen +lieth open to the South halfe a league broad, and being entred within it +betweene the East and the North, it stretcheth twelue leagues: where it +waxeth broader and broader, and maketh a gulfe about 20. leagues in +compasse, wherein are fiue small Islands very fruitfull and pleasant, full +of hie and broade trees, among the which Islandes any great Nauie may ride +safe without any feare of tempest or other danger. Afterwards turning +towardes the South in the entring into the Hauen on both sides there are +most pleasant hils, with many riuers of most cleare water falling into the +Sea. + +In the middest of this entrance there is a rocke of free stone growing by +nature apt to build any Castle or Fortresse there, for the keeping of the +hauen. The fift of May being furnished with all things necessarie, we +departed from the said coast keeping along in the sight thereof, and wee +sailed 150. leagues finding it alwayes after one maner; but the land +somewhat higher with certaine mountaines, all which beare a shew of +minerall matter, wee sought not to land there in any place, because the +weather serued our turne for sailing: but wee suppose that it was like the +former, the coast ranne Eastward for the space of fiftie leagues. And +trending afterwards to the North, we found another land high full of +thicke woods, the trees whereof were firres, cipresses and such like as +are wont to grow in cold Countreys. (M343) The people differ much from the +other, and looke how much the former seemed to be courteous and gentle: so +much were these full of rudenesse and ill maners, and so barbarous that by +no signes that euer we could make, we could haue any kind of traffike with +them. They cloth themselues with Beares skinnes and Luzernes and Seales +and other beasts skinnes. Their food, as farre as we coulde perceiue, +repairing often vnto their dwellings, we suppose to be by hunting and +fishing, and of certaine fruits, which are a kind of roots which the earth +yeeldeth of her own accord. They haue no graine, neither saw we any kind +or signe of tillage, neither is the land, for the barennesse thereof, apt +to beare fruit or seed. If at any time we desired by exchange to haue any +of their commodities, they vsed to come to the sea shore vpon certaine +craggy rocks and we standing in our boats, they let downe with a rope what +it pleased them to giue vs, crying continually that we should not approch +to the land, demanding immediatly the exchange, taking nothing but kniues, +fishookes, and tooles to cut withall, neyther did they make any account of +our courtesie. And when we had nothing left to exchange with them, when we +departed from them, the people shewed all signes of discourtesie and +disdaine, as were possible for any creature to inuent. We were in despight +of them 2 or 3 leagues within the land, being in number 25 armed men of +vs: And when we went on shore they shot at vs with their bowes making +great outcries, and afterwards fled into the woods. We found not in this +land (M344) any thing notable, or of importance, sauing very great woods +and certaine hilles, they may haue some minerall matter in them, because +wee saw many of them haue beadstones of Copper hanging at their eares. +(M345) We departed from thence keeping our course Northeast along the +coast, which we found more pleasant champion and without woods, with high +mountaines within the land continuing directly along the coast for the +space of fiftie leagues, we discouered 32 Islands lying al neere the land, +being small and pleasant to the view, high and hauing many turnings and +windings betweene them, making many faire harborougbs and chanels as they +doe in the gulfe of Venice in Sclauonia, and Dalmatia, we had no knowledge +or acquaintance with the people: we suppose they are of the same maners +and nature as the others are. (M346) Sayling Northeast for the space of +150. leagues we approched to the land that in times past was discouered by +the Britons, which is in fiftie degrees. Hauing now spent all our +prouision and victuals, and hauing discouered about 700 leagues and more +of new Countreys, and being furnished with water and wood, we concluded to +returne into France. + +Touching the religion of this people, which wee haue found, for want of +their language wee could not vnderstand neither by signes nor gesture that +they had any religion or lawe at all, or that they did acknowledge any +first cause or moouer, neither that they worship the heauen or stars the +Sunne or Moone or other planets, and much lesse whither they be idolaters, +neither could wee learne whither that they vsed any kind of sacrifices or +other adorations, neither in their villages haue they any Temples or +houses of prayer. We suppose that they haue no religion at all, and that +they liue at their owne libertie. And that all this proceedeth of +ignorance, for that they are very easie to be perswaded: and all that they +see vs Christians doe in our diuine seruice, they did the same with the +like imitation as they saw vs to doe it. + + + + +XXXV. A notable historie containing foure voyages made by certaine French +Captaines into Florida: Wherein the great riches and fruitefulnesse of the +Countrey with the maners of the people hitherto concealed are brought to +light, written all, sauing the last, by Monsieur Laudonniere, who remained +there himselfe as the French Kings Lieutenant a yeere and a quarter. + + +Translated out of French into English by M. Richard Haklvyt. + +To the right honourable Sir Walter Ralegh Knight, Captaine of her +Maiesties Gard, Lord Warden of the Stanneries, and her Highnesse +Lieutentant generall of the County of Cornewall, R.H. wisheth true +felicitie. + +Sir, after that this historie, which had bene concealed many yeeres, was +lately committed to print and published in France vnder your Name by my +learned friend M. Marline Basanier of Paris, I was easily enduced to turne +it into English, vnderstanding that the same was no lesse gratefull to you +here, then I know it to be acceptable to many great and worthie persons +there. And no maruaile though it were very welcome vnto you, and that you +liked of the translation thereof, since no history hitherto set forth hath +more affinitie, resemblance or conformitie with yours of Virginia, then +this of Florida. (M347) But calling to minde that you had spent more +yeeres in France then I, and vnderstand the French better then my selfe, I +forthwith perceiued that you approoued mine endeuour, not for any priuate +ease or commoditie that thereby might redound vnto you, but that it argued +a singular and especiall care you had of those which are to be employed in +your owne like enterprise, whom, by the reading of this my translation, +you would haue forewarned and admonished aswell to beware of the grosse +negligence in prouiding of sufficiency of victuals, the securitie, +disorders, and mutinies that fell out among the French, with the great +inconueniencies that thereupon ensued, that by others mishaps they might +learne to preuent and auoyde the like, as also might be put in minde, by +the reading of the manifolde commodities and great fertilitie of the +places herein at large described and so neere neighbours vnto our +Colonies, that they might generally bee awaked and stirred vp vnto the +diligent obseruation of euery thing that might turne to the aduancement of +the action, wherinto they are so cheerefully entred. Many speciall poynts +concerning the commodities of these partes, the accidents of the French +mens gouernment therein, the causes of their good or bad successe, with +the occasions of the abandoning one of their forts, and the surprise of +the other by the enemie are herein truely and faithfully recorded: Which +because they be quoted by me in the margents, and reduced into a large +alphabeticall table, which I haue annexed to the ende of the worke, it +shall be needlesse to recken vp againe. And that the rather, because the +same with diuers other things of chiefest importance are liuely drawne in +colours at your no smal charges by the skillfull painter Iames +Morgues,(112) sometime liuing in the Black-fryers in London (whom Monsieur +Chastillion then Admirall of France sent thither with Laudonniere for that +purpose) which was an eye-witnesse of the goodnesse and fertility of those +regions, and hath put downe in writing many singularities which are not +mentioned in this treatise: which since he hath published together with +the purtratures. These foure voyages I knew not to whom I might better +offer then to your selfe, and that for diuers iust considerations. First, +for that as I haue sayd before, they were dedicated vnto you in French; +secondly because now foure times also you haue attempted the like vpon the +selfe same coast neere adioyning: thirdly in that you haue persed(113) as +farre vp into the maine and discouered no lesse secrets in the partes of +your aboad, then the French did in the places of their inhabiting: lastly +considering you are now also ready (vpon the late returne of Captaine +Stafford and good newes which he brought you of the safe arriual of your +last Colony in their wished hauen) to prosecute this action more throughly +then euer. And heare to speake somewhat of this your enterprise, I +affirme, that if the same may speedily and effectually be pursued, it will +prooue farre more beneficiall in diuers respects vnto this our realme, +then the world, yea many of the wiser sort, haue hitherto imagined. (M348) +The particular commodities whereof are wel knowen vnto your selfe and some +few others, and are faithfully and with great iudgement committed to +writing, as you are not ignorant, by one of your followers, which remained +there about a tweluemonth with your worshipful Lieutenant M. Ralph Lane, +in the diligent search of the secrets of those Countreys. Touching the +speedy and effectual pursuing of your action, though I wrote well it would +demaund a princes purse to haue it throughly followed without lingering, +yet am I of opinion, that you shall drawe the same before it be long to be +profitable and gainful aswel to those of our nation there remaining, as to +the merchants of England that shall trade hereafter thither, partly by +certaine secret commodities already discouered by your seruants, and +partly by breeding of diuers sorts of beasts in those large and ample +regions, and planting of such things in that warme climat as wil best +prosper there, and our realme standeth most in need of. (M349) And this I +find to haue bin the course that both the Spaniards and Portugals tooke in +the beginnings of their discoueries and conquests. (M350) For the +Spaniards at their first entrance into Hispaniola found neither sugercanes +nor ginger, growing there, nor any kind of our cattell: But finding the +place fit for pasture they sent kine and buls and sundry sorts of other +profitable beastes thither, and transported the plants of suger canes, and +set the rootes of ginger: the hides of which oxen, with suger and ginger, +are now the chiefe merchandise of that Island. The Portugals also at their +first footing in Madera, as Iohn Barros writes in his first Decade, found +nothing there but mighty woods for timber, whereupon they called the +Island by that name. Howbeit the climate being fauourable, they inriched +it by their own industry with the best wines and sugers in the world. +(M351) The like maner of proceeding they vsed in the Isles of Acores by +sowing therin great quantity of Woad. So dealt they in S. Thomas vnder the +Equinoctial, and in Brasil and sundry other places. And if our men will +follow their steps, by your wise direction I doubt not but that in due +time they shall reape no lesse commodity and benefite. Moreouer there is +none other likelihood but that her Maiesty, which hath Christned, and +giuen the name to your Virginia if need require, will deale after the +maner of honourable godmothers, which, seeing their gossips not fully able +to bring vp their children themselues, are wont to contribute to their +honest education, the rather if they find any towardlines or reasonable +hope of goodnesse in them. And if Elizabeth Queene of Castile and +Aragon,(114) after her husband Ferdinando and she had emptied their cofers +and exhausted their treasures in subduing the kingdome of Granada and +rooting the Mores, a wicked weed, out of Spaine, was neuerthelesse so +zealous of Gods honour, that (as Fernandus Columbus the son of Christopher +Columbus recordeth in the history of the deedes of his father) she layd +part of her owne iewels, which she had in great account, to gage, to +furnish his father foorth vpon his first voyage, before any foot of land +of all the West Indies was discouered; what may we expect of our most, +magnificent and gracious prince ELIZABETH of England, into whose lappe the +Lord hath most plentifully throwne his treasures, what may wee, I say, +hope of her forwardnesse and bounty in aduancing of this your most +honourable enterprise, being farre more certaine then that of Columbus, at +that time especially, and tending no lesse to the glorie of God then that +action of the Spanyardes? (M352) For as you may read in the very last +wordes of the relation of Newe Mexico extant nowe in English, the maine +land, where your last Colonie meane to seate themselues, is replenished +with many thousands of Indians, Which are of better wittes then those of +Mexico and Peru, as hath bene found by those that haue had some triall of +them: whereby it may bee gathered that they will easily embrace the +Gospell, forsaking their idolatrie, wherein at this present for the most +part they are wrapped and intangled. A wise Philosopher noting the sundry +desires of diuers men, writeth, that if an oxe bee put into a medowe hee +will seeke to fill his bellie with grasse, if a Storke bee cast in shee +will seeke for Snakes, if you turne in a Hound he will seeke to start a +Hare: So sundry men entering into these discoueries propose vnto +themselues seuerall endes. Some seeke authoritie and places of +commandement, others experience by seeing of the worlde, the most part +wordly and transitorie gaine, and that often times by dishonest and +vnlawfull meanes, the fewest number the glorie of God and, the sauing of +the soules of the poore and blinded infidels. (M353) Yet because diuers +honest and well disposed persons were entred already into this your +businesse, and that I know you meane hereafter to send some such good +Churchmen thither, as may truely say with the Apostle to the Sauages, wee +seeke not yours but you: I conceiue (M354) great comfort of the successe +of this your action, hoping that the Lorde, whose power is wont to bee +perfected in weaknesse, will bless the feeble foundations of your +building. Only bee you of a valiant courage and faint not, as the Lord +sayd vnto Iosue, exhorting him to proceede on forward in the conquest of +the land of promise, and remember that priuate men haue happily wielded +and waded through as great enterprises as this, with lesser meanes then +those which God in his mercie hath bountifully bestowed vpon you, to the +singuler good, as I assure my selfe, of this our Common wealth wherein you +liue. Hereof we haue examples both domesticall and forreigne. (M355) +Remember I pray you, what you find in the beginning of the Chronicle of +the conquest of Ireland newly dedicated vnto your selfe. Read you not that +Richard Stranbow the decayed earle of Chepstow in Monmuthshire, being in +no great fauour of his soueraigne, passed ouer into that Island in the +yere 1171. and accompanied onely with certaine of his priuate friends had +in short space such prosperous successe, that he opened the way for king +Henry the second to the speedy subjection of all that warlike nation to +this crowne of England? The like conquest of Brasilia, and annexing the +same to the kingdome of Portugall was first begun by mean and priuate men, +as Don Antonio de Castillio, Ambassadour here for that realme and by +office keeper of all the records and monuments of their discoueries, +assured me in this citie in the yere 1581. (M356) Now if the greatnes of +the maine of Virginia, and the large extension thereof, especially to the +West, should make you thinke that the subduing of it were a matter of more +difficulty then the conquest of Ireland, first I answere, that as the late +experience of that skilfull pilote and Captaine M. Iohn Dauis to the +Northwest (toward which his discovery your selfe haue thrise contributed, +with the forwardest) hath shewed a great part to be maine sea, where +before was thought to be maine land, so for my part I am fully perswaded +by Ortelius late reformation of Culuacan and the gulfe of California, that +the land on the backe part of Virginia extendeth nothing so far westward +as is put downe in the maps of those parts. Moreouer it is not to be +denied, but that one hundred men will do more now among the naked and +vnarmed people in Virginia, then one thousand were able then to do in +Ireland against that armed and warlike nation in those daies. I say +further, that these two yeeres last experience hath plainly shewed, that +we may spare 10000. able men without any misse. And these are as many as +the kingdome of Portugal had euer in all their garrisons of the Acores, +Madera, Arguin, Cape verde, Guinea, Brasill, Mozambique, Melinde, +Zocotora, Ormus, Diu, Goa, Malaca, the Molucos, and Macao vpon the coast +of China. Yea this I say by the confession of singuler expert men of their +own nation (whose names I suppresse for certain causes) which haue bene +personally in the East Indies, and haue assured me that their kings had +neuer aboue ten thousand natural borne Portugals(115) (their slaues +excepted) out of their kingdome remaining in all the aforesaid +territories. Which also this present yeere I saw confirmed in a secrete +extract of the particular estate of that kingdome and of euery gouernement +and office subiect to the same with the seueral pensions thereunto +belonging. Seeing therefore we are so farre from want of people, that +retyring daily home out of the Lowe Countreyes they go idle vp and downe +in swarms for lack of honest intertainment, I see no fitter place to +employ some part of the better sort of them trained vp thus long in +seruice, then in the inward partes of the firme of Virginia against such +stubborne Sauages as shal refuse obedience to her Maiestie. And doubtlesse +many of our men will bee glad and faine to accept this condition, when as +by the reading of this present treatie they shall vnderstand the +fertilitie and riches of the regions confining so neere vpon yours, the +great commodities and goodnesse whereof you haue bin contented to suffer +to come to light. In the meane season I humbly commend my selfe and this +my translation vnto you, and your selfe, and all those which vnder you +haue taken this enterprise in hand to the grace and good blessing of the +Almighty, which is able to build farther, and to finish the good worke +which in these our dayes he hath begun by your most Christian and +charitable endeuour. From London the 1 of May 1587. + +Your L. humble at commandement R. Hakluyt. + + + +The Preface of M. Rene Laudonniere. + + +There are two things, which according to mine opinion haue bene the +principall causes, in consideration whereof aswell they of ancient times, +as those of our age haue bene induced to trauell into farre and remote +regions. The first hath beene the naturall desire which wee haue to search +out the commodities to liue happily, plentifully, and at ease: be it +whither one abandon his naturall Countrey altogether to dwell in a better, +or bee it that men make voyages thither, there to search out and bring +from thence such things as are there to be found, and are in greatest +estimation and in most request in our Countreys. The second cause hath +bene the multitude of people too fruitefull in generation, which being no +longer able to dwell in their natiue soyles, haue entred vpon their +neighbours limites, and oftentimes passing further haue pearced euen vnto +the vttermost regions. After this sort the North climate, a fruitfull +father of so many nations hath oftentimes sent foorth this way and that +way his valiant people, and by this meane hath peopled infinite Countreys: +so that most of the nations of Europe drawe their originall from these +parts. Contrariwise the more Southerne regions, because they bee too +barren by reason of their insupportable heate which raineth in them, neede +not any such sending forth of their inhabitants, and haue bene oftentimes +constrained to receiue other people more often by force of armes then +willingly. All Afrike, Spaine, and Italie can also testifie the same, +which neuer so abounded with people that they had neede to send them +abroad to inhabite elsewhere: as on the contrary Scythia, Norway, Gotland +and France haue done. The posterity of which nations remaineth yet not +only in Italy, Spaine and Afrike but also in fruitful and faire Asia. +(M357) Neuerthelesse I find that the Romans proceeding further, or rather +adding vnto these two chiefe causes aforesaid, (as being most curious to +plant not onely their ensignes and victories, but also their lawes, +customes, and religion in those prouinces which they had conquered by +force of armes) haue oftentimes by the decree of their soueraigne Senate +sent forth inhabitants, which they called Colonies (thinking by this way +to make their name immortall) euen to the vnfurnishing of their own +Countrey of the forces which should haue preserued the same in her +perfection: a thing which hindred them much more, then aduanced them to +the possession of the vniuersal monarchy, whereunto their intention did +aspire. For it came to passe that their Colonies here and there being +miserably sacked by strange people did vtterly ruin and ouerthrow their +Empire. The brinks of the riuer of Rene are yet red, those of Danubius are +no lesse bloody, and our France became fat with their blood which they +lost. (M358) These are the effects and rewards of al such as being pricked +forward with this Romane and tyrannical ambition will goe about thus to +subdue strange people: effects, I say, contrary to the profit which those +shall receiue, which onely are affectioned to the common benefite, that is +to say, to the generall policie of all men, and endeuour to vnite them one +with another as well by trafficke and ciuill conuersations, as by military +vertues, and force of armes, when as the Sauages will not yeeld vnto their +enduours so much tending vnto their profit. + +For this cause princes haue sent forth out of their Dominions certaine men +of good actiuity to plant themselues in strange Countreys, there to make +their profite to bring the Countrey to ciuilitie, and if it might be, to +reduce the inhabitants to the true knowledge of our God: an end so much +more commendable, as it is farre from all tyrannical and cruel +gouernement: and so they haue alwayes thriued in their enterprises, and by +little and little gained the heartes of them which they haue conquered or +wonne vnto them by any meanes. Hereof we may gather that sometimes it is +good, yea, very expedient to send forth men to discouer the pleasure and +commoditie of strange Countreys: But so, that the Countrey out of which +these companies are to passe remaine not weakned, nor depriued of her +forces: And againe in such sort that the company sent forth be of so iust +and sufficient number, that it may not be defeited by strangers, which +euery foote endeuour nothing else but to surprise the same vpon the +sudden. (M359) As within these few daies past the French haue proued to my +great griefe, being able by no means possible to withstand the same, +considering that the elements, men, and all the fauours which might be +hoped for of a faithfull and Christian alliance fought against vs: which +thing I purpose to discouer in this present historie with so euident +trueth, that the Kings Maiesty my soueraigne prince shall in part be +satisfied of the diligence which I haue vsed in his seruice, and mine +aduersaries shall find themselues so discouered in their false reports, +that they shall haue no place of refuge. But before I begin, I will +briefly set downe the situation and description of the land whereunto we +haue sailed and where we haue inhabited from the yeere 1561. vnto sixty +fiue, to the ende that those things may the more easily be borne away, +which I meane to describe in this discourse. + + + +The description of the West Indies in generall, but chiefly and +particularly of Florida, + + +(M360) That part of the earth which at this day we call the fourth part of +the world, or America, or rather the West India, was vnknowen vnto our +ancestours by reason of the great distance thereof. In like maner all the +Westerne Islands and fortunate Isles were not discouered but by those of +our age. Howbeit there haue bin some which haue said that they were +discouered in the time of Augustus Caesar, and that Virgil hath, made +mention thereof in the sixt booke of his AEneidos, when he saith, There is +a land beyond the starres, and the coarse of the yeere and of the Sunne, +where Atlas the Porter of Heauen sustaineth the pole vpon his shoulders: +neuerthelesse it is easie to iudge that hee meaneth not to speake of this +land, whereof no man is found to haue written before his time, neither yet +aboue a thousand yeeres after. (M361) Christopher Colon did first light +vpon land in the yeere 1592. And fiue yeeres after Americus went thither +by the commandement of the king of Castile, and gaue vnto it his owne +name, whereupon afterward it was called America. This man was very well +seene in the Arte of Nauigation and in Astronomie: whereby hee discouered +in his time many lands vnknowen vnto the ancient Geographers. This +countrey is named by some, the land of Brasil, and the lande of Parots. It +stretcheth it selfe, according vnto Postell, from the one Pole to the +other, sauing at the streight of Magellan, whereunto it reacheth 53. +degrees beyond the Equator. I will diuide it for the better vnderstanding +into three principall parts. That which is toward the Pole Articke on the +North is called new France, because that in the yeere 1514. Iohn +Verrazzanno a Florentine was sent by King Francis the first and by Madam +the Regent his mother vnto these newe Regions, where he went on land, and +discouered all the coast which is from the Tropicke of Cancer, to wit, +from the eight add twentieth vnto the fiftieth degree, and farther vnto +the North. He planted in this Countrey the Ensignes and Armes of the king +of France: so that the Spaniardes themselues which were there afterwarde, +haue named this countrey Terra Francesca. The same then extendeth it selfe +in Latitude from the 25. degree vnto the 54. toward the North: and in +Longitude from 210. vnto 330. The Easterne part thereof is called by the +late writers The land of Norumbega, which beginneth at the bay of Gama, +which separateth it from the Isle of Canada whither Iaques Carthiers +sayled the yeere 1535. About the which there are many Ilands, among which +is that which is named Terra de Labrador stretching towarde Groenland. In +the Westerne part there are many knowen countreys, as the Regions of +Quiuira, Ciuola, Astatlan, and Terlichichimici. The Southerne part is +called Florida, because it was discouered on Palme-sunday, which the +Spaniardes call Pascha Florida. The Northerne part is altogether vnknowen. + +The second part of all America is called newe Spaine. It extendeth from +the Tropicke of Cancer in twentie three degrees and a halfe, vnto the +ninth degree. In the same is situated the Citie of Themistitan, and it +hath many Regions, and many Ilandes adioyning vnto it, which are called +the Antilles, whereof the most famous and renoumed are Hispaniola and +Isabella, with an infinite number of others. All this land, together with +the Bay of Mexico, and all the Ilands aforesayd, haue not in Longitude +past seuentie degrees, to wit, from the two hundreth and fortie, vnto +three hundreth and ten: it is also long and narrowe as Italie. The third +part of America is called Peru, it is very great, and extendeth it selfe +in Latitude from the tenth degree vnto the three and fiftieth beyond the +Equator, to wit, as I haue sayde before, vnto the streight of Magelan. It +is made in fashion like to an egge, and is very well knowen vpon all +sides. The part where it is largest hath threescore degrees, and from +thence it waxeth narrower and narrower toward both the endes. In one part +of this lande Villegagnon planted right vnder the Tropicke of Capricorne, +and he called it France Antarctick, because it draweth toward the pole +Antarctick, as our France doeth toward the Arctick. + +New France is almost as great as all our Europe. Howbeit the most knowen +and inhabited part thereof is Florida, whither many Frenchmen haue made +diuers voyages at sundry times, insomuch that now it is the best knowen +Countrey which is in all this part of new France. The Cape thereof is as +it were a long head of land stretching out into the Sea an hundred +leagues, and runneth directly towarde the South: it hath right ouer +against it fiue and twentie leagues distant the Isle of Cuba otherwise +called Isabella toward the East the Isles of Bahama and Lucaya, and toward +the West the Bay of Mexico. The Countrey is flat, and diuided with diuers +riuers, and therefore moyst, and is sandie towards the Sea shore. (M362) +There groweth in those partes great quantitie of Pinetrees, which haue no +kernels in the aples which they beare. Their woods are full of Oakes, +Walnuttrees, blacke Cherrietrees, Mulberry trees, Lentiskes, and Chestnut +trees, which are more wild then those in France. There is great store of +Cedars, Cypresses, Bayes, Palme trees, Hollies, and wilde Vines, which +climbe vp along the trees and beare good Grapes. (M363) There is there a +kinde of Medlers, the fruit whereof is better then that of France, and +bigger. There are also Plum-trees, which beare very faire fruite, but such +as is not very good. There are Raspasses, and a little berrie which we +call among vs Blues, which are very good to eate. There growe in that +Countrey a kinde of Rootes which they call in their language Hasez, +whereof in necessitie they make bread. There is also there the tree called +Esquine, which is very good against the Pockes and other contagious +diseases. (M364) The beastes best knowen in this Countrey are Stagges, +Hindes, Goates, Deere, Leopards, Ounces, Luserns, diuers sortes of wolues, +wilde Dogs, Hares, Cunnies, and a certaine kinde of beast that differeth +little from the Lyon of Africa. (M365) The foules are Turkeycocks, +Partridges, Parrots, Pigions, Ringdoues, Turtles, Blackbirdes, Crowes, +Tarcels, Faulcons, Laynerds, Herons, Cranes, Storkes, wilde Geese, +Malards, Cormorants, Hernshawes, white, red, blacke, and gray, and an +infinite sort of all wilde foule. There is such abundance of Crocodiles, +that ofentimes in swimming men are assayled by them: of Serpents there are +many sorts. There is found amongst the Sauages good quantitie of Gold and +Siluer, which is gotten out of the shippes that are lost vpon the coast, +as I haue vnderstood by the Sauages themselues. They vse traffique thereof +one with another. And that which maketh me the rather beleeue it, is, that +on the coast towarde the Cape, where commonly the shippes are cast away, +there is more store of Siluer then towards the North, neuerthelesse they +say, that in the Mountaines of Appalatcy there are Mines of Copper, which +I thinke to be Golde. There is also in this Countrey great store of +graynes and herbes, whereof might be made excellent good dyes and +paintings of all kindes of colours. And in trueth the Indians which take +pleasure in painting of their skins, know very well how to vse the same. +(M366) The men are of an Oliue colour, of great stature, faire, without +any deformitie, and well proportioned. They couer their priuies with the +skinne of a Stagge well dressed. The most part of them haue their bodies +armes, and thighes painted with faire deuises: the painting whereof can +neuer be taken away, because the same is pricked into their flesh. (M367) +Their haire is very blacke and reacheth euen downe to their hips, howbeit +they trusse it vp after a fashion that becommeth them very well. They are +great dissemblers and traitours, valiant of their persons and fight very +well. They haue none other weapons but their bowes and arrowes. They make +the string of their bow of a gut of a Stag, or of a Stagges skin, which +they know how to dresse as well as any man in France, and with as +different sorts of colours. They head their arrowes with the teeth of +fishes and stone, which they work very finely and handsomly. They exercise +their yong men to runne well, and they make a game among themselues which +he winneth that has the longest breath. They also exercise themselues much +in shooting. They play at ball in this maner: they set vp a tree in the +middest of a place which is eight or nine fathome high, in the top whereof +there is set a square mat made of reedes or Bulrushes, which whosoeuer +hitteth in playing therat, winneth the game. They take great pleasure in +hunting and fishing. The kings of the Countrey make great warre one +against the other, which is not executed but by surprise, and they kill +all the men they can take: afterward they cut off their heads to haue +their haire, which returning home they carry away to make thereof their +triumph when they come to their houses. They saue the women and children +and nourish them and keepe them alwayes with them. Being returned home +from the warre, they assemble all their subiects, and for ioy three dayes +and three nights they make good cheare, they dance and sing, likewise they +make the most ancient women of the Countrey to dance, holding the haires +of their enemies in their hands: and in dancing they sing praises to the +Sunne, ascribing vnto him the honour of the victory. They haue no +knowledge of God, nor of any religion, sauing of that which they see, as +the Sunne and the Moone. They haue their priests to whom they giue great +credit, because they are great magicians, great sooth-sayers, and callers +vpon diuels. These Priests serue them in stead of Physitions and +Chirurgions. They cary alwayes about them a bag full of herbes and drugs +to cure the sicke diseased which for the most part are sick of the pocks, +for they loue women and maidens exceedingly, which they call the daughters +of the Sunne: and some of them are Sodomites. They marry, and euery one +hath his wife, and it is lawfull for the King to haue two or three: yet +none but the first is honoured and acknowledged for Queene: and none but +the children of the first wife inherite the goods and aucthoritie of the +father. The women doe all the businesse at home. They keepe not house with +them after they know they be with child. And they eate not of that which +they touch as long as they haue their flowers. (M368) There are in all +this Countrey many Hermaphrodites, whice take all the greatest paine, and +beare the victuals when they goe to warre. They paint their faces much, +and sticke their haire full of feathers or downe, that they may seeme more +terrible. The victuals which they carry with them, are of bread, of hony, +and of meale made of Maiz parched in the fire, which they keepe without +being marred a long while. They carry also sometimes fish, which they +cause to be dressed in the smoke. In necessitie they eat a thousand +rifraffes, euen to the swallowing downe of coales, and putting sand into +the pottage that they make with this meale. (M369) When they goe to warre, +their King marcheth first, with a clubbe in the one hand, and his bowe in +the other, with his quiuer full of arrowes. All his men follow him, which +haue likewise their bowes and arrowes. While they fight, they make great +cries and exclamations. They take no enterprize in hand, but first they +assemble oftentimes their Councell together, and they take very good +aduisement before they growe to a resolution. They meete together euery +morning in a great common house, whither their King repaireth, and setteth +him downe vpon a seate which is higher then the seates of the other: where +all of them one after another come and salute him: and the most ancient +begin their salutations, lifting vp both their handes twise as high as +their face, saying, ha, he, ya, and the rest answer ha, ha. Assoone as +they haue done their salutation, euery man sitteth him downe vpon the +seates which are round about in the house. If there be any thing to +intreate of, the King calleth the Iawas, that is to say their Priestes, +and the most ancient men, and asketh them their aduise. (M370) Afterward +he commaundeth Cassine to be brewed, which is a drinke made of the leaues +of a certaine tree: They drinke this Cassine very hotte: he drinketh +first, then he causeth to be giuen thereof to all of them one after +another in the same boule, which holdeth well a quart measure of Paris. +They make so great account of this drinke, that no man may taste thereof +in this assembly, vnlesse hee hath made proof of his valure in the warre. +Moreouer this drinke hath such a vertue, that assoone as they haue drunke +it, they become all in a sweate, which sweate, being past, it taketh away +hunger and thirst for foure and twenty houres after. (M371) When a King +dyeth, they burie him very solemnly, and vpon his graue they set the cuppe +wherein he was woont to drinke: and round about the sayde graue they +sticke many arrowes, and weepe and fast three dayes together without +ceasing. All the kings which were his friends make the like mourning: and +in token of the loue which they bare him, they cut of more then the one +halfe of their haire, as well men as women. During the space of sixe +Moones (so they reckon their moneths) there are certaine women appoynted +which bewaile the death of this King, crying with a loude voyce thrise a +day, to wit, in the Morning, at Noone, and at Euening. All the goods of +this King are put into his house, and afterward they set it on fire, so +that nothing is euer more after to be seene. (M372) The like is done with +the goods of the Priestes, and besides they burie the bodies of the +Priests in their houses, and then they set them on fire. They sowe their +Maiz twise a yere, to wit, in March and in Iune, and all in one and the +same soyle. The sayd Maiz from the time that it is sowed vntill the time +that it be ready to be gathered, is but three moneths on the ground. The +other 6. moneths they let the earth rest. They haue also faire Pumpions, +and very good Beanes. They neuer dung their land, onely when they would +sowe, they set the weedes on fire, which grewe vp the 6. moneths, and +burne them all. They dig their ground with an instrument of wood which is +fashioned like a broad mattocke, wherewith they digge their Vines in +France, they put two graines of Maiz together. When the land is to be +sowed, the King commaundeth one of his men to assemble his subiects euery +day to labour, during which labour the King causeth store of that drinke +to be made for them, whereof we haue spoken. At the time when the Maiz is +gathered, it is all carried into a common house, where it is distributed +to euery man according to his qualitie. They sowe no more but that which +they thinke will serue their turnes for sixe moneths, and that very +scarcely. (M373) For during the Winter they retire themselues for three or +foure moneths in the yeere into the woods, where they make little cotages +of Palme boughes for their retraite, and liue there of Maste, of fish +which they take, of Oisters, of Stagges, of Turkeycockes, and other +beastes which they take. They eate all their meate broyled on the coales, +and dressed in the smoake, which in their language they call Boucaned. +They eate willingly the flesh of the Crocodile: and in deede it is faire +and white: and where it not that it sauoureth too much like Muske we would +oftentimes haue eaten thereof. They haue a custome among them, that when +they finde themselues sicke, where they feele the paine, whereas we cause +our selues to be let blood, their Physitions sucke them vntill they make +the blood follow. + +The women are likewise of good proportion and tall, and of the same colour +that the men be of, painted as the men be: Howbeit when they are borne, +they be not so much of an Oliue colour, and are farre whiter. (M374) For +the chiefe cause that maketh them to be of this colour proceedes of +annointings of oyle which they vse among them: and they doe it for a +certaine ceremonie which I could not learne, and because of the Sunne +which shineth hote vpon their bodies. The agilitie of the women is so +great, that they can swimme ouer the great Riuers bearing their children +vpon one of their armes. They climbe vp also very nimbly vpon the highest +trees in the Countrey. + +Beholde in briefe the description of the Countrey, with the nature and +customes of the Inhabitants: which I was very willing to write, before I +entred any further into the discourse of my historie, to the end that the +Readers might be the better prepared to vnderstand that, which I meane +hereafter to entreate of. + +My Lord Admirall of Chastillon, a noble man more desirous of the publique +then of his priuate benefite, vnderstanding the pleasure of the King his +prince, which was to discouer new and strange Countreys, caused vessels +fit for this purpose to be made ready with all diligence, and men to bee +leuied meete for such an enterprise: (M375) Among whom hee chose Captaine +Iohn Ribault, a man in trueth expert in sea causes: which hauing receiued +his charge, set himselfe to Sea the yeere 1562. the eighteenth of +Februarie, accompanied onely with two of the kings shippes, but so well +furnished with Gentlemen, (of whose number I myselfe was one) and with +olde Souldiers, that he had meanes to atchieue some notable thing and +worthy of eternall memorie. (M376) Hauing therefore sayled two moneths, +neuer holding the usuall course of the Spaniards, hee arriued in Florida, +landing neere a Cape or Promontorie, which is no high lande, because the +coast is all flatte, but onely rising by reason of the high woods, which +at his arriuall he called Cape Francois in honour of our France. (M377) +This Cape is distant from the Equator about thirtie degrees. (M378) +Coasting from this place towards the North, he discouered a very faire and +great Riuer, which gaue him occasion to cast anker that hee might search +the same the next day very early in the morning: which being done by the +breake of day, accompanied with Captaine Fiquinuille and diuers other +souldiers of his shippe, he was no sooner arriued on the brinke of the +shoare, but straight hee perceiued many Indians men and women, which came +of purpose to that place to receiue the Frenchmen with all gentlenesse and +amitie, as they well declared by the Oration which their king made, and +the presents of Chamois skinnes wherewith he honoured our Captaine, which +the day following caused a pillar of hard stone to be planted within the +sayde Riuer, and not farre from the mouth of the same vpon a little sandie +knappe, in which pillar the Armes of France were carued and engraued. This +being done hee embarked himselfe againe, to the ende alwayes to discouer +the coast toward the North which was his chiefe desire. After he had +sayled a certaine time he crossed ouer to the other side of the riuer, and +then in the presence of certaine Indians, which of purpose did attend +(M379) him, hee commaunded his men to make their prayers, to giue thankes +to GOD, for that of his grace hee had conducted the French nation vnto +these strange places without any danger at all. The prayers being ended, +the Indians which were very attentiue to hearken vnto them, thinking in my +iudgment, that wee worshipped the Sunne, because wee alwayes had our eyes +lifted vp toward heauen, rose all vp and came to salute the Captaine Iohn +Ribault, promising to shew him their King, which rose not vp as they did, +but remained still sitting vpon greene leaues of Bayes and Palmetrees: +toward whom the Captaine went and sate downe by him, and heard him make a +long discourse, but with no great pleasure, because hee could not +vnderstand his language, and much lesse his meaning. (M380) The King gaue +our Captaine at his departure a plume or fanne of Hernshawes feathers died +in red, and a basket made of Palme-boughes after the Indian fashion, and +wrought very artificially, and a great skinne painted and drawen +throughout with the pictures of diuers wilde beasts so liuely drawen and +pourtrayed, that nothing lacked but life. The Captaine to shew himselfe +not vnthankfull, gaue him pretie tinne bracelets, a cutting hooke, a +looking glasse, and certaine kniues: whereupon the King shewed himselfe to +be very glad and fully contented. Hauing spent the most part of the day +with these Indians, the Captaine imbarked himselfe to passe ouer to the +other side of the Riuer, whereat the king seemed to be very sorie. +Neuerthelesse being not able to stay vs, hee commaunded that with all +diligence they should take fish for vs: which they did with all speede. +(M381) For being entred into their Weares or inclosures made of reedes and +framed in the fashion of a Labirynth or Mase, they loaded vs with Troutes, +great Mullets, Plaise, Turbuts, and marueilous store of other sortes of +fishes altogether different from ours. + +(M382) This done, we entred into our Boates and went toward the other +shore. But before we came to the shore, we were saluted with a number of +other Indians, which entring into the water to their armepits, brought vs +many litle baskets full of Maiz, and goodly Mulberries both red and white: +Others offered thamselues to beare vs on shoare, where being landed we +perceiued their King sitting vpon a place dressed with boughes, and vnder +a little Arbour of Cedars and Bay trees somewhat distant from the waters +side. He was accompanied with two of his sonnes which were exceeding faire +and strong, and with a troope of Indians who had all their bowes and +arrowes in marueilous good order. His two sonnes receiued our Captaine +very graciously: but the king their father, representing I wot not what +kinde of grauitie, did nothing but shake his head a little: then the +Captaine went forward to salute him, and without any other mouing of +himselfe he reteined so constant a kind of grauitie, that hee made it +seeme vnto vs that by good and lawfull right hee bare the title of a King. +Our Captaine knowing not what to iudge of this mans behauiour, thought he +was ielous because wee went first vnto the other king, or else that he was +not well pleased with the Pillar or Columne which he had planted. While +thus he knew not what hereof to thinke, our Captaine shewed him by signes, +that he was come from a farre Countrey to seeke him, to let him to +vnderstand the amitie which he was desirous to haue with him: for the +better confirmation whereof, hee drewe out of a budget certaine trifles, +as certaine bracelets couered as it were with siluer and guilt, which he +presented him withall, and gave his sonnes certaine other trifles. +Whereupon the King beganne very louingly to entreate both our Captaine and +vs. And after these gentle intertainments we went ourselues into the +woods, hoping there to discouer some singularities; where were great store +of Mulberrie trees white and red, on the toppes whereof there was an +infinite number of silkewormes. Following our way wee discouered a faire +and great medowe, diuided notwithstanding with diuers Marishes which +constrained vs by reason of the water which enuironed it about, to returne +backe againe towarde the Riuers side. Finding not the King there, which by +this time was gone home to his house, wee entred into our boates and +sayled toward our shippes: where after we arriued, we called this Riuer +the Riuer of May, because wee discouered it the first day of the sayde +moneth. + +Soone after we returned to our shippes, wee weighed our ankers and hoysed +our sailes to discouer the coast farther forward, along the which wee +discouered another faire Riuer, which the Captaine himselfe was minded to +search out, and hauing searched it out with the king and inhabitants +thereof, hee named it Seine, because it is very like vnto the Riuer of +Seine in France. From this Riuer wee retired toward our shippes, where +being arriued, we trimmed our sailes to saile further toward the North, +and to descry the singularities of the coast. But wee had not sayled any +great way before wee discovered another very faire Riuer, which caused vs +to cast anker ouer against it, and to trimme out two Boates to goe to +search it out. Wee found there an Ile and a king no lesse affable then the +rest, afterwarde we named this Riuer Somme. From thence wee sayled about +sixe leagues, after wee discouered another Riuer, which after wee had +viewed was named by vs by the name of Loyre. And consequently we there +discouered fiue others: whereof the first was named Charente, the second +Garonne, the third Gironde, the fourth Belle, the fift Grande: which being +very well discouered with such things as were in them, by this time in +lesse then the space of three score leagues we had found out many +singularities along nine Riuers. Neuerthelesse not fully satisfied we +sayled yet further toward the North, following the course that might bring +vs to the Riuer of Iordan one of the fairest Riuers of the North, and +holding our wonted course, great fogges and tempests came vpon vs, which +constrained vs to leaue the coast to beare toward the maine Sea, which was +the cause we lost the sight of our Pinnesses a whole day and a night +vntill the next day in the morning, what time the weather waxing faire and +the Sea calme wee discouered a Riuer which we called Belle a veoir.(116) +After wee had sayled three or four leagues, wee began to espie our +Pinnesses which came straight toward vs, and at their arriuall they +reported to the Captaine, that while the fogges and wild weather endured +they harboured themselues in a mightie Riuer which in bignesse and beautie +exceeded the former: wherewithall the Captaine was exceeding ioyfull, for +his chiefe desire was to finde out an Hauen to harbour his shippes, and +there to refresh our selues for a while. (M383) Thus making thitherward +wee arriued athwart the sayde Riuer, (which because of the fairenesse and +largenesse thereof wee named Port Royall) wee strooke our sailes and cast +anker at ten fathom of water: for the depth is such, namely when the Sea +beginneth to flowe, that the greatest shippes of France, yea, the Arguzes +of Venice may enter in there. Hauing cast anker, the Captaine with his +Souldiers went on shoare, and hee himself went first on land: where we +found the place as pleasaunt as was possible, for it was all couered ouer +with mightie high Oakes and infinite store of Cedars, and with Lentiskes +growing vnderneath them, smelling so sweetly, that the very fragrant odor +only made the place to seeme exceeding pleasant. As we passed thorow these +woods we saw nothing but Turkeycocks flying in the Forrests, Partridges +gray and red, little different from ours, but chiefly in bignesse. Wee +heard also within the woods the voyces of Stagges, of Beares, of Lusernes, +of Leopards, and diuers other sortes of Beastes vnknowen vnto vs. Being +delighted with this place, we set ourselues to fishing with nets, and we +caught such a number of fish, that it was wonderfull. And amongst other +wee tooke a certaine kind of fish which we call Salicoques, which were no +lesse then Creuises, so that two draughts of the net were sufficient to +feede all the companie of our two ships for a whole day. (M384) The Riuer +at the mouth thereof from Cape to Cape is no lesse then 3 French leagues +broad; it is diuided into two great armes whereof the one runneth toward +the West, the other towards the North: And I beleeue in my iudgement that +the arme which stretcheth towarde the North runneth vp into the Countrey +as farre as the Riuer Iordan, the other arme runneth into the Sea, as it +was knowen and vnderstoode by those of our company, which were left behind +to dwell in this place. These two armes are two great leagues broad: and +in the middest of them there is an Ile, which is poynted towardes the +opening of the great Riuer, in which Iland there are infinite numbers of +all sortes of strange beasts. There are Simples growing there of so rare +properties, and in so great quantitie, that is an excellent thing to +behold them. On euery side there is nothing to be seene but Palmetrees, +and other sorts of trees bearing blossoms and fruite of very rare shape +and very good smell. But seeing the euening approch, and that the Captaine +determined to returne vnto the shippes, wee prayed him to suffer vs to +passe the night in this place. In our absence the Pilots and chiefe +Mariners aduertised the Captaine that it was needefull to bring the +shippes further vp within the Riuer, to auoyde the dangers of the windes +which might annoy vs, by reason of our being so neere to the mouth of the +Riuer: and for this cause the Captaine sent for vs. Being come to our +shippes, wee sayled three leagues vp within the Riuer, and there we cast +anker. A little while after, Iohn Ribault accompanied with a good number +of souldiers imbarked himselfe, desirous to sayle further vp into the arme +that runneth toward the West, and to search the commodities of the place. +(M385) Hauing sayled twelue leagues at the least, we perceiued a troope of +Indians which assoone as they espied the Pinnesses, they were so afrayd +that they fled into the woods leauing behind them a young Lucerne which +they were a turning vpon a spit: for which the place was called Cape +Lucerne: proceeding foorth on our way, we found another arme of the Riuer, +which ranne toward the East, vp which the Captaine determined to sayle and +to leaue the great current. A little while after they began to espie +diuers other Indians both men and women halfe hidden within the woods: who +knowing not that we were such as desired their friendship, were dismayed +at the first, but soone after were emboldened, for the Captaine caused +store of merchandise to be shewed them openly whereby they knew that we +meant nothing but well vnto them; and then they made a signe that he +should come on lande, which we would not refuse. At our comming on shoare +diuers of them came to salute our Generall according to their barbarous +fashion. Some of them gaue him skinnes of Chamois, others little baskets +made of Palme leaues, some presented him with Pearles, but no great +number. Afterwards they went about to make an arbour to defend us in that +place from the parching heate of the Sunne. But wee would not stay as +then. Wherefore the Captaine thanked them much for their good will, and +gaue presents to each of them: wherewith he pleased them so well before he +went thence, that his suddaine departure was nothing pleasant vnto them. +For knowing him to bee so liberall, they would haue wished him to haue +stayed a little longer, seeking by all meanes to giue him occasion to +stay, shewing him by signes that he should stay but that day onely, and +that they desired to aduertise a great Indian Lorde which had Pearles in +great abundance, and Silver also, all which things should bee giuen vnto +him at the Kings arriuall: saying further that in the meane time while +that this great Lord came thither, they would lead him to their houses, +and shewe him there a thousand pleasures in shooting, and seeing the +Stagge killed therefore they prayed him not to denie them their request. +Notwithstanding wee returned to our shippes, where after wee had bene but +one night, the Captaine in the morning commanded to put into the Pinnesse +a pillar of hard stone fashioned like a columne, wherein the armes of the +king of France were grauen, to plant the same in the fairest place that he +could finde. (M386) This done, wee imbarked ourselues, and sayled three +leagues towards the West: where wee discouered a little riuer vp which we +sayled so long, that in the ende we found it returned into the great +current, and in his returne to make a litle Iland separated from the firme +land where wee went on shore: and by commandement of the Captaine, because +it was exceeding faire and pleasant, there wee planted the Pillar vpon a +hillock open round about to the view, and inuironed with a lake halfe a +fathom deepe of very good and sweete water. In which Iland wee sawe two +Stagges of exceeding bignesse, in respect of those which we had seene +before, which we might easily haue killed with our harguebuzes, if the +Captaine had not forbidden vs, mooued with the singular fairenesse and +bignesse of them. But before our departure we named the little riuer which +enuironed this Ile The Riuer of Liborne. Afterward we imbarked our selues +to search another Ile not farre distant from the former: wherein after wee +had gone a land, wee found nothing but tall Cedars, the fairest that were +seene in this Countrey. For this cause wee called it The Ile of Cedars: so +wee returned into our Pinnesse to go towards our shippes. + +A few dayes afterward Iohn Ribault determined to returne once againe +toward the Indians which inhabited that arme of the Riuer which runneth +toward the West, and to carrie with him good store of souldiers. For his +meaning was to take two Indians of this place to bring them into France, +as the Queene had commaunded him. (M387) With this deliberation againe wee +tooke our former course so farre foorth, that at the last wee came to the +selfe same place where at the first we found the Indians, from thence we +tooke two Indians by the permission of the king, which thinking that they +were more fauoured then the rest, thought themselues very happy to stay +with vs. But these two Indians seeing we made no shew at all that we would +goe on land, but rather that wee followed the middest of the current, +began to be somewhat offended, and would by force haue leapt into the +water, for they are so good swimmers that immediatly they would haue +gotten into the forestes. Neuerthelesse being acquainted with their +humour, wee watched them narrowly and sought by all meanes to appease +them: which we could not by any meanes do for that time, though we offered +them things which they much esteemed, which things they disdained to take, +and gaue backe againe whatsoeuer was giuen them, thinking that such giftes +should haue altogether bound them, and that in restoring them they should +be restored vnto their libertie. (M388) In fine, perceiuing that all that +they did auayled them nothing, they prayed vs to giue them those things +which they had restored, which we did incontinent: then they approched one +toward the other and began to sing, agreeing so sweetely together, that in +hearing their song it seemed that they lamented the absence of their +friendes. They continued their songs all night without ceasing: all which +time we were constrained to ly at anker by reason of the tyde that was +against vs, but we hoysed sayle the next day very early in the morning, +and returned to our ships. Assoone as we were come to our ships, euery one +sought to gratifie these two Indians, and to shew them the best +countenance that was possible: to the intent that by such courtesies they +might perceiue the good desire and affection which we had to remaine their +friends in time to come. (M389) Then we offered them meate to eate, but +they refused it, and made vs vnderstand that they were accustomed to wash +their face and to stay vntill the Sunne were set before they did eate, +which is a ceremonie common to all the Indians of Newe France. +Neuerthelesse in the end they were constrained to forget their +superstitions, and to apply themselues to our nature, which was somewhat +strange vnto them at the first. They became therefore more iocunde, euery +houre made vs a 1000 discourses, being merueilous sory that we could not +vnderstand them. A few daies after they began to beare so good wil towards +mee, that, as I thinke, they would rather haue perished with hunger and +thirst, then haue taken their refection at any mans hand but mine. Seeing +this their good wil, I sought to learne some Indian words, and began to +aske them questions, shewing them the thing whereof I desired to know the +name, how they called it. They were very glad to tell it me, and knowing +the desire that I had to learne their language, they encouraged me +afterward to aske them euery thing. (M390) So that putting downe in +writing the words and phrases of the Indian speech, I was able to +vnderstand the greatest part of their discourses. Euery day they did +nothing but speak vnto me of the desire that they had to vse me wel, if we +returned vnto their houses, and cause me to receiue all the pleasures that +they could deuise, aswell in hunting as in seeing their very strange and +superstitious ceremonies at a certaine feast which they call Toya. Which +feast they obserue as straightly as we obserue the Sunday. They gaue me to +vnderstand, that they would bring me to see the greatest Lord of this +countrey which they called Chiquola, which exceedeth them in height (as +they tolde me) a good foote and a halfe. They said vnto me that he dwelt +within the land in a very large place and inclosed exceeding high, but I +could not learne wherewith. (M391) And as farre as I can iudge, this place +whereof they spake vnto me, was a very faire citie. For they said vnto me +that within the inclosure there was great store of houses which were built +very high, wherein there was an infinite number of men like vnto +themselues, which made none account of gold, of siluer, nor of pearles, +seeing they had thereof in abundance. I began then to shew them al the the +parts of heauen, to the intent to learne in which quarter they dwelt. And +straightway one of them stretching out his hand shewed me that they dwelt +toward the North, which makes me thinke that it was the riuer of Iordan. +And now I remember that in the raigne of the Emperour Charles the fift, +certaine Spaniards inhabitants of S. Domingo (which made a voyage to get +certaine slaues to work in their mines) stole away by subtilty the +inhabitants of this riuer, to the number of 40, thinking to cary them into +their New Spaine. But they lost their labour: for in despite they died al +for hunger, sauing one that was brought to the Emperor, which a litle +while after he caused to be baptised, and gaue him his own name and called +him Charles of Chiquola, because he spake so much of this Lorde of +Chiquola whose subiect hee was. Also, he reported continually, that +Chiquola made his abode within a very great inclosed citie. Besides this +proof, those which were left in the first voyage haue certified me, that +the Indians shewed them by euident signes, that farther within the land +toward the North, there was a great inclosure or citie, where Chiquola +dwelt. After they had staied a while in our ships, they began to be sory, +and stil demanded of me when they should returne. I made them vnderstand +that the Captaines will was to send them home againe, but that first he +would bestow apparell of them, which fewe dayes after was deliuered vnto +them. But seeing he would not giue them licence to depart, they resolued +with themselues to steale away by night, and to get a litle boat which we +had, and by the help of the tyde to saile home toward their dwellings, and +by this meanes to saue themselues. (M392) Which thing they failed not to +doe, and put their enterprize in execution, yet leauing behinde them the +apparel which the Captaine had giuen them, and carrying away nothing but +that which was their owne, shewing well hereby that they were not void of +reason. The Captaine cared not greatly for their departure, considering +they had not bene vsed otherwise then well: and that therefore they woulde +not estrange themselues from the Frenchmen. (M393) Captaine Ribault +therefore knowing the singular fairenes of this riuer, desired by all +meanes to encourage some of his men to dwell there, well foreseeing that +this thing might be of great importance for the Kings seruice, and the +reliefe of the Common wealth of France. Therefore proceeding on with this +intent he commanded the ankers to be weighed and to set things in order to +returne vnto the opening of the riuer, to the ende that if the winde came +faire he might passe out to accomplish the rest of his meaning. When +therefore we were come to the mouth of the riuer, he made them cast anker, +whereupon we stayed without discouering any thing all the rest of the day. +The next day he commanded that all the men of his ship should come vp vpon +the decke, saying that he had somewhat to say vnto them. They all came vp, +and immediately the Captaine began to speake vnto them in this maner. + +(M394) I thinke there is none of you that is ignorant of how great +consequence this our enterprize is, and how acceptable it is vnto our yong +King. Therefore my friendes (as one desiring your honour and benefite) I +would not faile to aduertise you all of the exceeding good happe which +should fall to them, which, as men of valure and worthy courage, would +make tryall in this our first discouerie of the benefits and commodities +of this new land: which should be, as I assure my selfe, the greatest +occasion that euer could happen vnto them, to arise vnto the title and +degree of honour. And for this cause I was desirous to propose vnto you +and set downe before your eyes the eternall memorie which of right they +deserue, which forgetting both their parents and their countrey haue had +the courage to enterprize a thing of such importance, which euen kings +themselues vnderstanding to be men aspiring to so high degree magnanimitie +and increase of their maiesties, doe not disdaine so wel to regard, that +afterwards imploying them in maters of weight and of high enterprize, they +make their names immortall for euer. Howbeit, I would not haue you +perswade your selues, as many doe, that you shall neuer haue such good +fortune as not being knowen neither to the king nor to the Princes of the +Realme, and besides descending of so poore a stocke, that few or none of +your parents, hauing euer made profession of armes, haue bene knowen vnto +the great estates. For albeit that from my tender yeeres I myselfe haue +applyed all my industry to follow them; and haue hazarded my life in so +many dangers for the seruice of my prince, yet could I neuer attaine +thereunto (not that I did not deserue this title and degree of gouernment) +as I haue seene it happen to many others, onely because they descend of a +noble race, since more regard is had of their birth then of their vertue. +For wel I know that if vertue were regarded ther would more be found +worthy to deserue the title, and by good right to be named noble and +valiant. I will therefore make sufficient answere to such propositions and +such things as you may obiect against me, laying before you the infinite +examples which we haue of the Romans: which concerning the point of honour +were the first that triumphed ouer the world. For how many finde we among +them, which for their so valiant enterprizes, not for the greatnesse of +their parentage, haue obtained the honour to tryumph? If we haue recourse +vnto their ancestors, wee shall finde that their parents were of so meane +condition, that by labouring with their hands they liued very basely. +(M395) As the father of AElius Pertinax, which was a poore artisan, his +Grandfather likewise was a bond man, as the historiographers do witnes: +and neuerthelesse, being moued with a valiant courage, he was nothing +dismayed for all this, but rather desirous to aspire vnto high things, he +began with a braue stomacke to learne feates of armes, and profited so wel +therein, that from step to step he became at length to be Emperour of the +Romans. For all this dignitie he despised not his parents: but +contrariwise and in remembrance of them, he caused his fathers shop to be +couered with a fine wrought marble, to serue for an example to men +descended of base and poore linages, to giue them occasion to aspire vnto +high things notwithstanding the meannesse of their ancestors. (M396) I wil +not passe ouer in silence the excellencie and prowesse of the valiant and +renowned Agathocles the sonne of a simple potter, and yet forgetting the +contemptible estate of his father, he so applied himselfe to vertue in his +tender yeeres, that by the fauour of armes he came to be king of Sicilie: +and for all this title he refused not to be counted the sonne of a Potter. +But the more to eternize the memory of his parentes and to make his name +renowned, he commanded that he should be serued at the Table in vessels of +gold and siluer and others of earth: declaring thereby that the dignitie +wherein hee was placed came not vnto him by his parents, but by his owne +vertue onely. (M397) If I shal speake of our time, I will lay before you +onely Rusten Bassha, which may be sufficient example to all men: which +though he were the sonne of a poore heard-man, did so apply his youth in +all vertue, that being brought vp in the seruice of the great Turke, he +seemed to aspire to great and high matters, in such sort that growing in +yeeres he increased also in courage, so far forth, that in fine for his +excellent vertues he married the daughter of the great Turke his Prince. +Howe much then ought so many worthy examples to moue you to plant here? +Considering also that you shalbe registered for euer as the first that +inhabited this strang countrey, I pray you therefore all to aduise your +selues thereof, and to declare your mindes freely vnto mee, protesting +that I will so well imprint your names in the kinges eares, and the other +princes, that your renowne shall hereafter shine vnquenchable through our +Realme of France. (M398) He had scarcely ended his Oration, but the +greatest part of our souldiers replyed: that a greater pleasure could +neuer betide them, perceiuing well the acceptable seruice which by this +meanes they shoulde doe vnto their Prince: besides that this thing should +be for the increase of their honours: therefore they besought the +Captaine, before he departed out of the place, to begin to build them a +Fort, which they hoped afterward to finish, and to leaue them munition +necessarie for their defence, shewing as it seemed that they were +displeased, that it was so long in doing. Wherevpon Iohn Ribault being as +glad as might be to see his men so well willing, determined the next day +to search the most fit and conuenient place to be inhabited. Wherefore he +embarked himselfe very earely in the morning and commanded them to followe +him that were desirous to inhabite there, to the intent that they might +like the beter of the place. Hauing sayled vp the great riuer on the North +side, in coasting an Isle which ended with a sharpe point toward the mouth +of the riuer, hauing sailed a while, he discouered a small riuer, which +entred into the Islande, which hee would not faile to search out. Which +done, and finding the same deep inough to harbour therein Gallies and +Galliots in good number, proceeding further, he found a very open place, +ioyning vpon the brinke thereof, where he went on land, and seeing the +place fit to build a Fortresse in, and commodious for them that were +willing to plant there, he resolued incontinent to cause the bignes of the +fortification to be measured out. (M399) And considering that there stayed +but sixe and twentie there, he caused the Fort to be made in length but +sixteene fathome, and thirteene in breadth, with flankes according to the +proportion thereof. The measure being taken by me and Captaine Salles, we +sent vnto the shippes for men, and to bring shouels, pickaxes and other +instruments necessarie to make the fortification. We trauailed so +diligently, that in a short space the Fort was made in some sort +defenciable. In which meane time Iohn Ribault caused victuals and +warrelike munition to be brought for the defence of the place. After he +had furnished them with all such things as they had neede of, he +determined to take his leaue of them. But before his departure he vsed +this speech vnto Captaine Albert, which he left in this place. + +(M400) Captaine Albert, I haue to request you in the presence of al these +men, that you would quit yourselfe so wisely in your charge, and gouern so +modestly your small companie which I leaue you, which with so good cheere +remaineth vnder your obedience, that I neuer haue occasion but to commend +you, and to recount vnto the king (as I am desirous) the faithfull seruice +which before vs all you vndertake to doe him in his new France: And you +companions, (quoth he to the Souldiers) I beseech you also to esteeme of +Captaine Albert as if he were myselfe that stayed here with you, yeelding +him that obedience which a true souldier oweth vnto his Generall and +Captaine, liuing as brethern one with another without all dissention: and +in so doing God wil assist you and bless your enterprises. Hauing ended +his exhortation, we tooke our leaues of each of them, and sayled toward +our shippes, calling the Forte by the name of Charles-fort, and the Riuer +by the name Chenonceau. The next daye we determined to depart from this +place being as wel contented as was possible that we had so happily ended +our busines, with good hope, if occasion would permitte, to discouer +perfectly the riuer of Iordan. For this cause we hoysed our sayles about +ten of the clocke in the morning: after wee were ready to depart Captaine +Ribault commanded to shoote off our Ordinance to giue a farewel vnto our +Frenchmen, which failed not to doe the like on their part. This being done +wee sayled toward the North: and then we named this Riuer Porte Royal, +because of the largenes and excellent fairenes of the same. (M401) After +that wee had sailed about 15 leagues from thence, we espied a riuer, +whereupon wee sent our pinnesse thither to discouer it. At their returne +they brought vs word that they found not past halfe a fathom water in the +mouth thereof. Which when we vnderstood, without doing any thing els, we +continued our way, and called it the Base or Shallow riuer. As we stil +went on sounding we found not past fiue or sixe fathome water, although we +were sixe good leagues from the shoare: at length we found not past three +fathomes, which gaue vs occasion greatly to muse. And without making any +further way we strook our sayles, partly because we wanted water, and +partly because the night approched: during which time Captaine Iohn +Ribault bethought with himselfe whether it were best for him to passe any +farther, because of the eminent dangers which euery houre we sawe before +our eyes: or whither he should content himselfe with that which he had +certainely discouered, and also left men to inhabite the countrey. Being +not able for that time to resolue with himselfe, he referred it vntill the +next day. The morning being come he proposed to all the company what was +best to be done, to the end that with good aduisement euery man might +deliuer his opinion. Some made answere that according to their iudgement +he had occasion fully to content himselfe, considering that he could doe +no more: laying before his eyes, that he had discouered more in sixe +weekes, then the Spaniards had done in two yeres in the conquest of their +New Spaine: and that he should do the king very great seruice, if he did +bring him newes in so short a time of his happy discouerie. Other shewed +vnto him the losse and spoile of his victuals, and on the other side the +inconuenience that might happen by the shallow water that they found +continually along the coast. Which things being well and at large debated +we resolued to leaue the coast forsaking the North, to take our way toward +the East, which is the right way and course to our France, where we +happily arriued the twentieth day of Iuly the yere 1562. + + + +The state and condition of those which were left behind in Charles-fort. + + +Our men after our departure neuer rested, but night and day did fortifie +themselues being in good hope that after their fort was finished, they +would begin to discouer farther vp within the riuer. It happened one day, +as certaine of them were in cutting of rootes in the groues, that they +espied on the sudden an Indian that hunted the Deere, which finding +himselfe so neere vpon them, was much dismayed, but our men began to draw +neere vnto him, and to vse him so courteously, that he became assured and +followed them to Charles-fort, where euery man sought to doe him pleasure. +Captaine Albert was very ioyfull of his comming, which after he had giuen +him a shirt and some other trifles, he asked him of his dwelling: the +Indian answered him that it was farther vp within the riuer, and that he +was vassal of king Audusta: he also shewed him with his hand the limits of +his habitation. After much other talke the Indian desired leaue to depart, +because it drew toward night, which Captaine Albert granted him very +willingly. (M402) Certaine dayes after the Captaine determined to saile +toward Audusta, where being arriued, by reason of the honest entertaynment +which he had giuen to the Indian, he was so courteously receiued, that the +king talked with him of nothing else but of the desire which he had to +become his friend: giuing him besides to vnderstand that he being his +friend and allie, he should haue the amitie of foure other kings, which in +might and authoritie were able to do much for his sake: Besides all this, +in his necessitie they might be able to succour him with victuals. One of +these kings was called Mayon, another Hoya, the third Touppa, and the +fourth Stalame. He told him moreouer, that they would be very glad, when +they should vnderstand the newes of his comming, and therefore he prayed +him to vouchsafe to visit them. The Captaine willingly consented vnto him, +for the desire that he had to purchase friends in that place. Therefore +they departed the next morning very earely, and first arriued at the house +of king Touppa, and afterward went into the other kings houses except the +house of king Stalame. He receiued of each of them all the amiable +courtesies that might be: they shewed themselues to be as affectioned +friends vnto him as was possible, and offered vnto him a thousand small +presents. After that he remained by the space of certaine daies with these +strange kings he determined to take his leaue: and being come backe to the +house of Audusta, he commanded al his men to goe aboord their Pinnesse: +for he was minded to goe towardes the countrey of king Stalame, which +dwelt toward the North the distance of 15 great leagues from Charles-fort. +Therefore as they sailed vp the riuer they entred into a great current, +which they followed so farre till they came at the last to the house of +Stalame: which brought him into his lodging, where he sought to make them +the best cheere he could deuise. He presented immediatly vnto Captaine +Albert his bow and arrowes, which is a signe and confirmation of alliance +betweene them. He presented him with Chamoys skinnes. The Captaine seeing +the best part of the day was now past, tooke his leaue of king Stalame to +return to Charles-fort, where hee arriued the day following. By this time +the friendship was growne so great betweene our men and king Audusta, that +in a manner all things were common betweene him and them: in such sort +that this good Indian king did nothing of importance, but he called our +men thereunto. (M403) For when the time drew neere of the celebrating +their feasts of Toya, which are ceremonies most strange to recite, he sent +Ambassadours to our men to request them on his behalfe to be there +present. Whereunto they agreed most willingly for the desire that they had +to vnderstand what this might be. They imbarked themselues therefore and +sailed towards the kings house, which was already come forth on the way +towards them, to receiue them courteously, to bid them welcome and bring +them to his house, where he sought to intreat them the best he might. In +the meane while the Indians prepared themselues to celebrate the feast the +morrow after, and the king brought them to see the place, wherein the +feast should be kept: where they saw many women round about, which +laboured by al meanes to make the place cleane and neat. This place was a +great circuit of ground with open prospect and round in figure. (M404) On +the morrow therefore early in the morning, all they which were chosen to +celebrate the feast, being painted and trimmed with rich feathers of +diuers colours, put themselues on the way to go from the kings house +toward the place of Toya: whereunto when they were come they set +themselues in order, and followed three Indians, which in painting and in +gesture were differing from the rest: each of them bare a Tabret in their +hand, dancing and singing in lamentable tune, when they began to enter +into the middest of the round circuit, being followed of others which +answered them again. After that they had sung, danced, and turned 3 times, +they fel on running like vnbridled horses, through the middest of the +thickest woods. And then the Indian women continued all the rest of the +day in teares as sad and woful as was possible: and in such rage they cut +the armes of the yong girles, which they lanced so cruelly with sharpe +shels of Muskles that the blood followed which they flang into the ayre, +crying out three times, He Toya. The king Audusta had gathered all our men +into his house, while the feast was celebrated, and was exceedingly +offended when he saw them laugh. This he did, because the Indians are very +angry when they are seene in their ceremonies. Notwithstanding one of our +men made such shift that by subtile meanes he gatte out of the house of +Audusta, and secretly went and hid himselfe behinde a very thicke bush, +where at his pleasure, he might easily discry the ceremonies of the feast. +They three that began the feast are named Iawas: and they are as it were +three Priestes of the Indian law: to whom they giue credite and beliefe +partly because that by kinred they are ordained to be ouer their +Sacrifices, and partly also because they be so subtile magicians that +anything that is lost is straightway recouered by their meanes. Againe +they are not onely reuerenced for these things, but also because they +heale diseases by I wotte not what kinde of knowledge and skill they haue. +Those that ran so through the woodes returned in two dayes after: after +their returne they began to dance with a cherefull courage in the middest +of the faire place, and to cheere vp their good olde Indian fathers, which +either by reason of their too great age or by reason of their naturall +indisposition and feeblenesse were not called to the feast. When all these +dances were ended, they fell on eating with such a greedinesse, that they +seemed rather to deuoure their meate then to eate it, for they had neither +eaten nor drunke the day of the feast, nor the two dayes following. Our +men were not forgotten at this good cheere, for the Indians sent for them +all thither, shewing themselues very glad of their presence. While they +remained certain time with the Indians, a man of ours got a yong boy for +certaine trifles, and inquired of him, what the Indians did in the wood +during their absence: (M405) which boy made him vnderstand by signes that +the Iawas had made inuocations to Toya, and that by Magicall Characters +they had made him come that they might speake with him and demand diuers +strange things of him, which for feare of the Iawas he durst not vtter. +They haue also many other ceremonies, which I will not here rehearse for +the feare of molesting the reader with a matter of so small importance. + +When the feast therefore was finished our men returned vnto Charles-fort: +where hauing remained but a while their victualles beganne to waxe short, +which forced them to haue recourse vnto their neighbours, and to pray them +to succour them in their necessitie: which gaue them part of all the +victualles which they had, and kept no more vnto themselues then would +serue to sow their fieldes. (M406) They told them farther that for this +cause it was needefull for them to retire themselues into the woods, to +liue of Mast and rootes vntill the time of haruest, being as sory as might +be that they were not able any farther to ayde them. They gaue them also +counsell to goe toward the countrey of King Couexis a man of might and +renowme in this prouince, which maketh his aboad toward the South +abounding at all seasons and replenished with such quantitie of mill, +corne, and beanes that by his onely succour they might be able to liue a +very long time. But before they should come into his territories, they +were to repayre vnto a king called Ouade the brother of Couexis, which in +mill, beanes, and corne was no lesse wealthy, and withall is very +liberall, and which would be very ioyfull if he might but once see them. +Our men perceiuing the good relation which the Indians made them of those +two kings resolued to go thither; for they felt already the necessity +which oppressed them. Therefore they made request vnto king Maccou, that +it would please him to giue them one of his subiects to guide them the +right way thither: whereupon he condescended very willingly, knowing that +without his fauour they should haue much ado to bring their interprize to +passe. Wherefore after they had giuen order for all things necessary for +the voyage, they put themselues to Sea, and sayled so farre that in the +end they came into the countrey of Ouade, which they found to be in the +riuer Belle. Being there arriued they perceiued a company of Indians, +which assoone as they knew of their being there came before them. Assoone +as they were come neere them, their guides shewed them by signes that +Ouade was in this company, wherefore our men set forward to salute him. +And then two of his sonnes which were with him, being goodly and strong +men saluted them againe in very good sort, and vsed very friendly +entertainment on their part. The king immediatly began to make an Oration +in his Indian language of the great pleasure and contentment which he had +to see them in that place, protesting that he would become so loyall a +friend of theirs hereafter, that he would be their faithfull defendour +against all them that would offer to be their enemies. After these +speeches he led them toward his house, where he sought to entreate them +very courteously. His house was hanged about with Tapistrie of feathers of +diuers colours the height of a pike. Moreouer the place where the king +tooke his rest was couered with white Couerlettes embroydered with deuises +of very wittie and fine workemanship, and fringed round about with a +Fringe dyed in the colour of Skarlet. They aduertised the king by one of +the guides which they brought with them, how that (hauing heard of his +great liberalitie) they had put to the Sea to come to beseech him to +succour them with victuals in their great want and necessitie: and that in +so doing, he should binde them all hereafter to remaine his faithfull +friends and loyall defenders against all his enemies. (M407) This good +Indian assoone ready to doe them pleasure, as they were to demand it, +commanded his subiects that they should fill our Pinnesse with mil and +beanes. Afterward he caused them to bring him sixe pieces of his Tapistry +made like litle couerlets, and gaue them to our men with so liberal a +minde, as they easily perceiued the desire which he had to become their +friend. In recompence of all these giftes our men gaue him two cutting +hookes and certaine other trifles, wherewith he held himselfe greatly +satisfied. This being done, our men tooke their leaue of the king, which +for their farewell, sayd nothing els but that they should returne if they +wanted victuals, and that they might assure themselues of him, that they +should neuer want any thing that was in his power. Wherefore they imbarked +themselues, and sayled towards Charles-fort, which from this place might +be some fiue and twenty leagues distant. (M408) But as soone as our men +thought themselues at their ease, and free from the dangers whereunto they +had exposed themselues night and day in gathering together of victuals +here and there: Lo, euen as they were asleepe, the fire caught in their +lodgings with such furie, being increased by the winde, that the roome +that was built for them before our mens departure, was consumed in an +instant, without being able to saue any thing, sauing a little of their +victualles. Whereupon our men being farre from all succours, found +themselues in such extremitie, that without the ayd of Almighty God, the +onely searcher of the hearts of men, which neuer forsaketh and thoughts +those that seeke him in their afflictions, they had bene quite and cleane +out of all hope. For the next day betimes in the morning the King Audusta +and King Maccou came thither, accompanied with a very good companie of +Indians, which knowing the misfortune were very sorry for it. And then +they vttered vnto their subiects the speedy diligence which they were to +vse in building another house, shewing vnto them that the Frenchmen were +their louing friends, and that they had made it euident vnto them by the +gifts and presents which they had receiued: protesting that whosoeuer put +not his helping hand vnto the worke with all his might, should be esteemed +as vnprofitable, and as one that had no good part in him, which the +Sauages feare aboue all things. This was the occasion that euery man began +to endeauour himselfe in such sort, that in lesse then 12 houres, they had +begun and finished a house which was very neere as great as the former. +Which being ended, they returned home fully contented with a few cutting +hookes, and hatchets, which they receiued of our men. Within a small while +after this mischance, their victualls began to waxe short: and after our +men had taken good deliberation, thought and bethought themselues againe, +they found that there was no better way for them then to returne againe to +the King Ouade and Couexis his brother. Wherefore they resolued to send +thither some of their companie the next day following: which with an +Indian Canoa sayled vp into the countrey about 10 leagues: afterward they +found a very faire and great riuer of fresh water, which they failed not +to search out: they found therein great number of Crocodils, which in +greatnes passe those of the riuer Nilus: moreouer al along the bankes +thereof, there grow mighty high Cypresses. (M409) After they had stayed a +smal while in this place, they purposed to follow their iourney, helping +themselues so wel with the tydes, that without putting themselues in +danger of the continuall perill of the Sea, they came into the Countrey of +Ouade: of whom they were most courteously receiued. They aduertised him of +the occassion wherefore they came againe to visite him, and told him of +the mischance, which happened vnto them since their last voyages: how they +had not onely lost their houshold stuffe by casualtie of fire, but also +their victuals which he had giuen them so bountifully: that for this cause +they were so bolde as to come once againe vnto him, to beseech him to +vouchsafe to succour them in such neede and necessitie. + +After that the King had vnderstood their case, he sent messengers vnto his +brother Couexis, to request him vpon his behalfe to send him some of his +mill and beanes, which thing he did: and the next morning, they were come +againe with victuals, which the king caused to be borne into their Canoa. +Our men would haue taken their leaue of him, finding themselues more then +satisfied with this liberalitie. But for that day hee would not suffer +them, but retained them, and sought to make them the best cheere hee could +deuise. The next day very earely in the morning, he tooke them with him to +shewe them the place where his corne grewe, and saide vnto them that they +should not want as long as all that mil did last. Afterward he gaue them a +certaine number of exceeding faire pearles, and two stones of fine +Christal, and certaine siluer oare. Our men forgot not to giue him +certaine trifles in recompence of these presentes, and required of him the +place whence the siluer oare and the Christall came. (M410) He made them +answere, that it came ten dayes iourney from his habitation vp within the +countrey: and that the inhabitants of the countrey did dig the same at the +foote of certaine high mountaines, where they found of it in very good +quantitie. Being ioyfull to vnderstand so good newes, and to haue come to +the knowledge of that which they most desired, they tooke their leaue of +the king, and returned by the same saw, by which they came. + +(M411) Behold therefore how our men behaued themselues very well hitherto, +although they had endured many great mishaps. But misfortune or rather the +iust iudgement of God would haue it, that those which could not bee +ouercome by fire nor water, should be vndone by their owne selues. This is +the common fashion of men, which cannot continue in one state, and had +rather to ouerthrow themselues, then not to attempt some new thing dayly. +We haue infinite examples in the ancient histories, especially of the +Romanes, vnto which number this litle handfull of men, being farre from +theyr countrey and absent from their countreynmen, haue also added this +present example. (M412) They entred therefore into partialities and +dissentions, which began about a souldier named Guernache, which was a +drummer of the French bands: which, as it was tolde me, was very cruelly +hanged by his owne captaine, and for a smal fault: which captaine also +vsing to threaten the rest of his souldiers which staied behind vnder his +obedience, and peraduenture (as it is to be presumed) were not so obedient +to him as they should haue bene, was the cause that they fell into a +mutinie, because that many times he put his threatnings in execution: +wherevpon they so chased him, that at the last they put him to death. And +the principall occasion that mooued them thereunto was because he degraded +another souldier named La Chere (which he had banished) and because he had +not performed his promise: for hee had promised to send him victuals, from +8 dayes to 8 dayes, which thing he did not, but said on the contrary that +he would be glad to heare of his death. He said moreouer, that he would +chastise others also, and vsed so euil sounding speeches, that honestie +forbiddeth me to repeat them. (M413) The souldiers seeing his madnes to +increase from day to day, and fearing to fall into the dangers of the +other, resolued to kil him. Hauing executed their purpose, they went to +seeke the banished, which was in a small Iland distant from Charles-fort +about 3 leagues, where they found him almost half dead for hunger. When +they were come home againe, they assembled themselues together to choose +one to be gouernour ouer them whose name was Nicholas Barre a man worthy +of commendation, and one who knew so well to quite himselfe of his charge, +that all rancour and dissention ceased among them, and they liued peacably +one with another. During this time, they began to build a smal Pinnesse, +with hope to returne into France, if no succours came vnto them, as they +expected from day to day. And though there were no man among them that had +any skill, notwithstanding necessitie, which is the maistress of all +sciences, taught them the way to build it. After that it was finished, +they thought of nothing else sauing how to furnish it with all things +necessarie to vndertake the voyage. But they wanted those things that of +all other were most needefull, as cordage and sayles, without which the +enterprise could not come to effect. Hauing no meanes to recouer these +things, they were in worse case then at the first, and almost ready to +fall into despayre. But that good God, which neuer forsaketh the afflicted +did succour them in their necessitie. + +As they were in these perplexities, king Audusta and Maccou came to them, +accompanied with two hundred Indians at the least, whom our Frenchmen went +forth to meete withall, and shewed the King in what neede of cordage they +stood: who promised them to returne within two dayes, and to bring so much +as should suffice to furnish the Pinnesse with tackling. Our men being +pleased with these good newes and promises, bestowed vpon them certaine +cutting hookes and shirts. After their departure our men sought all meanes +to recouer rosen in the woodes, wherein they cut the Pine tree round +about, out of which they drew sufficient reasonable quantitie to bray the +vessell. Also they gathered a kind of mosse which groweth on the trees of +this countrey, to serue to calke the same withall. There now wanted +nothing but sayles, which they made of their owne shirtes and of their +sheetes. Within few dayes after the Indian kings returned to Charles fort +with so good store of cordage, that there was found sufficient for +tackling of the small Pinnesse. Our men as glad as might be, vsed great +liberalitie towards them, and at their leauing of the countrey, left them +all the marchandise that remained, leauing them thereby so fully +satisfied, that they departed from them with all the contentation in the +worlde. They went forward therefore to finish the Brigandine, and vsed so +speedie diligence, that within a short time afterward they made it ready +furnished with all things. In the meane season the wind came so fit for +their purpose that it seemed to inuite them to put to the Sea: which they +did without delay, after they had set all their things in order. But +before they departed they embarked their artillerie, their forge, and +other munitions of warre which Captaine Ribault had left them, and then as +much mill as they could gather together. (M414) But being drunken with too +excessiue ioy, which they had conceiued for their returning into France, +or rather depriued of all foresight and consideration, without without +regarding the inconstancie of the winds, which change in a moment, they +put themselues to sea, and with so slender victuals, that the end of their +enterprise became vnlucky and vnfortunate. + +For after they had sayled the third part of their way, they were surprised +with calmes which did so much hinder them, that in three weekes they +sailed not aboue fiue and twentie leagues. (M415) During this time their +victuals consumed, and became so short, that euery man was constrained to +eate not past twelue graines of mill by the day, which may be in value as +much as twelue peason. Yea, and this felicitie lasted not long: for their +victualls failed them altogether at once: and they had nothing for their +more assured refuge but their shooes and leather ierkins which they did +eat. (M416) Touching their beuerage, some of them dranke the sea water, +others did drinke their owne vrine: and they remained in such desperate +necessitie a very long space, during the which part of them died for +hunger. Beside this extreme famine, which did so grieuously oppresse them, +they fell euery minute of an houre out of all hope euer to see France +againe, insomuch that they were constrained to cast the water continually +out, that on all sides entred into their Barke. And euery day they fared +worse and worse: for after they had eaten vp their shooes and leather +ierkins, there arose so boystrous a winde and so contrary to their course, +that in the turning of a hande, the waues filled their vessel halfe full +of water and brused it vpon the one side. Being now more out of hope then +euer to escape out of this extreme peril, they cared not for casting out +of the water which now was almost ready to drowne them. And as men +resolued to die, euery one fell down backewarde, and gaue themselues ouer +to the will of the waues. When as one of them a little hauing taken heart +vnto him declared vnto them how litle way they had to sayle, assuring them +that if the winde held, they should see land within three dayes. This man +did so encourage them, that after they had throwne the water out of the +Pinnesse they remained three dayes without eating or drinking, except it +were of the sea water. When the time of his promise was expired, they were +more troubled then they were before, seeing they could not descry any +land. (M417) Wherefore in their extreme dispaire certaine among them made +this motion that it was better that one man should dye, then that so many +men should perish: they agreed therefore that one should die to sustaine +the others. Which thing was executed in the person of La Chere, of whom we +have spoken heretofore, whose flesh was diuided equally among his +fellowes: a thing so pitiful to recite, that my pen is loth to write it. + +After so long time and tedious trauels, God of his goodnesse vsing his +accustomed fauour, changed their sorow into ioy, and shewed vnto them the +sight of land. Whereof they were so exceeding glad, that the pleasure +caused them to remaine a long time as men without sence: whereby they let +the Pinnesse flote this and that way without holding any right way or +course. (M418) But a small English barke boarded the vessell, in the which +there was a Frenchman which had bene in the first voyage into Florida, who +easily knew them, and spake vnto them, and afterward gaue them meat and +drinke. (M419) Incontinently they recouered their naturall courages, and +declared vnto him at large all their navigation. The Englishmen consulted +a long while what were best to be done, and in fine they resolued to put +on land those that were most feeble, and to cary the rest vnto the Queene +of England, which purposed at that time to send into Florida. Thus you see +in briefe that which happened to them which Captaine Iohn Ribault had left +in Florida. And now will I go forward with the discourse of mine owne +voyage. + + + +The second voyage vnto Florida, made and Written by Captaine Laudonniere, +which fortified and inhabited there two Summers and one whole Winter. + + +(M420) After our arriuall at Diepe, at our comming home, from our first +voyage (which was the twentieth of Iuly 1562) we found the ciuil warees +begun,(117) which was in part the cause why our men were not succoured, as +Captaine Iohn Ribault had promised them: whereof it followed that Captaine +Albert was killed by his souldiers, and the countrey abandoned, as +heretofore we haue sufficiently discoursed, and as it may more at large be +vnderstood by those men which were there in person. After the peace was +made in France,(118) my Lord Admirall de Chastillon shewed vnto the king, +that he heard no newes at all of the men which Captaine Iohn Ribault had +left in Florida, and that it were pitty to suffer them to perish. In which +respect the king was content he should cause 3 ships to be furnished, the +one of sixe score tunnes, the other of 100, and the third of 60, to seeke +them out, and to succour them. + +(M421) My Lord Admirall therefore being well informed of the faithfull +seruice which I had done, aswell vnto his Maiestie as to his predecessors +kings of France, aduertised the king how able I was to doe him seruice in +this voyage, which was the cause that he made me chiefe Captaine ouer +these 3 shippes, and charged me to depart with diligence to performe his +commandenent, which for mine owne part I would not gainesay, but rather +thinking my selfe happy to haue bene chosen out among such an infinite +number of others, which in my iudgement were very well able to haue +quitted themselues in this charge, I embarked my selfe at New Hauen the 22 +of Aprill 1564, and sayled so, that we fell neere vnto the coast of +England: and then I turned towards the South, to sayle directly to the +fortunate Islands, at this present called the Canaries, one of which +called the Isle Saluage (because as I thinke it is altogether without +inhabitants) was the first that our ships passed. Sayling therefore on +forward, we landed the next day in the Isle of Teneriffa, otherwise called +the Pike, because that in the middest thereof there is an exceeding high +mountaine, neere as high as that of Etna, which riseth vp like a pike, +into the top whereof no man can go vp but from the middest of May vntill +the middest of August, by reason of the ouer great colde which is there +all the yere; which is a wonderfull strange thing, considering that it is +not past 27 degrees and an half distant from the Equator. We saw it all +couered ouer with snow, although it were then but the fift of May. The +inhabitants in this Isle being heretofore pursued but by Spaniards, +retired themselues into this mountaine, where for a space they made warre +with them, and would not submit themselues to their obedience, neither by +foule nor faire meanes, they disdained so much the losse of their Island. +For those which went thither on the Spaniards behalfe, left their carkases +there, so that not so much as one of them returned home to bring newes. +Notwithstanding in the ende, the inhabitants not able to liue in that +place according to their nature, or for want of such things as were +necessary for the commoditie of their liuelyhood, did all die there. After +I had furnished my selfe with some fresh water, very good and excellent, +which sprang out of a rocke at the foote of this mountaine, I continued my +course toward the West, wherein the windes fauoured me so well, that 15 +dayes after our ships arriued safe and sound at the Antilles: and going on +land at the Isle of Martinino, one of the first of them, the next day we +arriued at Dominica, twelue leagues distant from the former. + +Dominica is one of the fayrest Islands of the West, full of hilles, and of +very good smell. Whose singularities desiring to know as we passed, and +seeking also to refresh our selues with fresh water, I made the Mariners +cast anker, after wee had sayled about halfe along the coast thereof. As +soone as we had cast anker, two Indians (inhabitants of that place) sayled +toward vs in two Canoas full of a fruite of great excellencie which they +call Ananas.(119) As they approched vnto our Barke, there was one of them +which being in some misdoubt of vs, went backe againe on land, and fled +his way with as much speede as he could possibly. Which our men perceiued +and entred with diligence into the other Canoa, wherein they caught the +poore Indian, and brought him vnto me. But the poore fellow became so +astonied in beholding vs, that he knew not which way to behaue himselfe, +because that (as afterward I vnderstood) he feared that he was fallen into +the Spaniards hands, of whom he had bene taken once before, and which, as +he shewed vs, had cut of his stones. At length this poore Indian was +secure of vs, and discoursed vnto vs of many things, wherof we receiued +very small pleasure, because we vnderstood not his minde but by his +signes. Then he desired me to giue him leaue to depart, and promised me +that he would bring me a thousand presents, whereunto I agreed on +condition that he would haue patience vntill the next day, when I purposed +to goe on land, where I suffered him to depart, after I had giuen him a +shirte, and certaine small trifles, wherwith he departed very well +contented from vs. + +The place where we went on shore was hard by a very high Rocke, out of +which there ran a litle riuer of sweet and excellent good water: by which +riuer we stayed certaine dayes to discouer the things which were worthy to +be seene, and traffiqued dayly with the Indians: which aboue all things +besought vs that none of our men should come neere their lodgings nor +their gardens, otherwise that we should giue them great cause of +iealousie, and that in so doing, wee should not want of their fruite which +they call Ananas, whereof they offered vs very liberally, receiuing in +recompence certaine things of small value. This notwithstanding, it +happened on a day that certaine of our men desirous to see some new things +in these strange countries, walked through the woods: and following still +the litle riuers side, they spied two serpents of exceeding bignes, which +went side by side ouerthwart the way. My souldiers went before them +thinking to let them from going into the woods: but the serpents nothing +at all astonied at these gestures glanced into the bushes with fearful +hyssings: yet for all that, my men drew their swords and killed them, and +found them afterward 9 greate foote long, and as big as a mans leg. During +this combate, certaine others more vndiscreete went and gathered their +Ananas in the Indians gardens, trampling through them without any +discretion: and not therewithall contented, they went toward their +dwellings; whereat the Indians were so much offended, that without, +regarding any thing they rushed vpon them and discharged their shot, so +that they hit one of my men named Marline Chaueau, which remained behind. +We could not know whether hee were killed on the place, or whether he were +taken prisoner: for those of his company had inough to doe to saue +themselues without thinking of their companion. Whereof Monsieur de +Ottigni my Lieutenant being aduertised, sent vnto me to know whether I +thought good that he should lay an ambush for the Indians which had either +taken or killed our man, or whether he should go directly to our dwellings +to know the trueth. I sent vnto him after good deliberation herevpon, that +he should not attempt any thing, and that for diuers occasions: but +contrariwise that he should embark himselfe with al diligence, and +consequently al they that were on land: which he did with speed. But as he +sayled towards our ships he perceiued along the shore a great number of +Indians which began to charge them with their arrowes: hee for his part +discharged store of shot against them, yet was not able to hurt them, or +by any meanes to surprise them: for which cause he quite forsooke them, +and came vnto our ship. Where staying vntill the next day morning we set +sayle following our wonted course, and keeping the same, we discouered +diuerse Isles conquered by the Spaniards, as the Isles of S. Christopher, +and of the Saintes, of Monserrate, and La Redonda: Afterward we passed +betweene Anguilla and Anegada, sayling toward New France. (M422) Where we +arriued 15 dayes after, to witte, on Thurseday the 22 of Iune about 3 of +the clocke in the afternoone, and landed neere a litte riuer, which is 30 +degrees distant from the Equator, and 10 leagues aboue Cape Francois +drawing toward the South, and aboue 30 leagues aboue the Riuer of May. +After wee had strooken sayle and cast anker athwart the Riuer, I +determined to goe on shore to discouer the same. Therefore being +accompanied with Monsieur Ottigni, with Monsieur de Arlac mine Ensigne, +and a certaine number of Gentlemen and souldiers, I embarked my selfe +about 3 or 4 of the clocke in the euening. And being arriued at the mouth +of the riuer, I caused the chanell to be sounded, which was found to be +very shallow, although that farther within the same the water was there +found reasonably deepe, which separateth it selfe into two great armes, +whereof one runneth toward the South, and the other toward the North. +Hauing thus searched the Riuer, I went on land to speake with the Indians +who waited for vs vpon the shore, which at our comming on land came before +vs, crying with a loud voyce in their Indian language, Antipola Bonassou, +which is as much as to say, as brother, friend, or some such like thing. +After they had made very much of vs, they shewed vs their Paracoussy, that +is to say, their King and Gouernour, to whom I presented certaine toyes, +wherewith he was well pleased. And for mine owne part, I prayse God +continually, for the great loue which I haue found in these Sauages, which +were sory for nothing, but that the night approached, and made vs retire +vnto our ships. + +For though they endeuoured by al meanes to make vs tary with them, and +shewed by signes the desire that they had to present vs with some rare +things, yet neuerthelesse for many iust and reasonable occasions I would +not stay on shore all night: but excusing my selfe for all their offers, I +embarked my selfe againe, and returned toward my ships. Howbeit, before my +departure I named this Riuer, the riuer of Dolphines, because (M423) that +at mine arriuall, I saw there a great number of Dolphines, which were +playing in the mouth thereof. The next day the 23 of this moneth (because +that toward the South I had not found any commodious place for vs to +inhabite, and to build a fort) I gaue commandement to weigh anker, and to +hoise our sailes to saile toward the riuer of May, where wee arriued two +days after, and cast anker. Afterward going on land, with some number of +Gentlemen and Souldiers to know for a certaintie the singularitie of this +place, we espied the Paracoussy of the countrey, which came towards vs +(this was the very same that we saw in the voyage of Captaine Iohn +Ribault) which hauing espied vs, cryed very far off, Antipola, Antipola: +and being so ioyfull that he could not containe himselfe, he came to meet +vs, accompanied then with two of his sonnes, as faire and mightie persons +as might be found in al the world, which had nothing in their mouthes but +this word, Amy, Amy: that is to say, friend, friend: yea, and knowing +those which were there in the first voyage, they went principally to them +to vse this speech vnto them. Their was in their trayne a great number of +men and women, which stil made very much of vs, and by euident signes made +vs vnderstand how glad they were of our arriuall. This good entertainment +past, the Paracoussy prayed me to goe see the pillar which we had erected +in the voyage of Iohn Ribault (as we haue declared heretofore) as a thing +which they made great account of. + +Hauing yeelded vnto him and being come to the place where it was set vp, +wee found the same crowned with crownes of Bay, and at the foote thereof +many little baskets full of Mill which they call in their language Tapaga +Tapola.(120) Then when they came thither they kissed the same with great +reuerence and besought vs to do the like, which we would not denie them, +to the ende we might drawe them to be more friendship with vs. This done, +the Paracoussy tooke me by the hand, as if he had desire to make me +vnderstand some great secret, and by signes shewed me very well vp within +the riuer the limits of his dominion, and said that he was called +Paracoussy Satourioua, which is as much as King Satourioua. His children +haue the selfe same title of Paracoussy: The eldest is named Athore, a +man, I dare say, perfect in beautie, wisedome, and honest sobrietie, +shewing by his modest grauitie that he deserueth the name which be +beareth, besides that he is gentle and tractable. After we had soiourned a +certaine space with them, the Paracoussy prayed one of his sonnes to +present vnto me a wedge of siluer, which hee did and that with a good wil: +in recompence whereof I gave him a cutting hooke and some other better +present: wherewith he seemed to be very well pleased. Afterward we tooke +our leaue of them, because the night approched, and then returned to lodge +in our shippes. Being allured with this good entertainment I failed not +the next day to imbarke my selfe againe with my Lieutenant Ottigni and a +number of souldiers to returne toward the Paracoussy of the riuer of May, +which of purpose waited for vs in the same place, where the day before we +conferred with him. We found him vnder the shadow of an arbour accompanied +with fourescore Indians at the least, and apparelled at that time after +the Indian fashion, to wit, with a great Harts skinne dressed like +Chamois, and painted with deuices of strange and diuers colours, but of so +liuely a portrature, and representing antiquity, with rules so iustly +compassed, that there is no Painter so exquisite that could finde fault +therewith: the naturall disposition of this strange people is so perfect +and well guided that without any ayd and fauour of artes, they are able by +the helpe of nature onely to content the eye of artizans, yea euen of +those which by their industry are able to aspire vnto things most +absolute. + +Then I aduertised Paracoussy Satourioua, that my desire was to discouer +farther vp into the riuer, but that it should be with such diligence that +I would come againe vnto him very speedily: wherewith he was content, +promising to stay for me in the place where he was: and for an earnest of +his promise, he offered me his goodly skinne, which I refused then, and +promised to receiue it of him at my returne. For my part I gaue him +certaine small trifles, to the intent to retain him in our friendship. + +Departing from thence, I had not sayled three leagues vp the fiuer, still +being followed by the Indians, which coasted me a long the riuer, crying +still, Amy, Amy, that is to say, friende, friende: but I discovered an +hill of meane height, neere which I went on land, hard by the fieldes that +were sowed with mil, at one corner whereof there was an house built for +their lodging, (M424) which keepe and garde the mill: for there are such +numbers of Cornish choughes in this Countrey, which continually deuoure +and spoyle the mill, that the Indians are constrained to keepe and watch +it, otherwise they should be deceiued of their haruest. I rested my selfe +in this place for certaine houres, and commanded Monsieur de Ottigni, and +my Sergeant to enter into the woodes to search out the dwellings of the +Indians: where after they had gone a while, they came vnto a Marish of +Reeds, where finding their way to be stopped, they rested vnder the shadow +of a mightie Bay tree to refresh themselves a little and to resolue which +way to take. Then they discouered, as it were on the suddaine, fiue +Indians halfe hidden in the woodes, which seemed somewhat to distrust our +men, vntill they said vnto them in the Indian language Antipola Bonassou, +to the end that vnderstanding their speech they might come vnto vs more +boldely, which they did incontinently. But because they sawe, that the +foure that went last, bare vp the traine of the skinne wherewith he that +went foremost was apparelled our men imagined that the foremost must +needes bee some man of greater qualitie then the rest, seeing that withal +they called him Paracoussy, Paracoussy, wherfore, some of our company went +towards him, and vsing him courteously shewed him, Monsieur de Ottigni, +their Lieutenant, for whom they had made an harbour with Bay and Palme +boughes after the Indian fashion, to the ende that by such signes the +Sauages might thinke the Frenchmen had companied with such as they at +other times. + +(M425) The Indian Paracoussy drew neere to the French, and began to make +him a long Oration, which tended to no other end, but that he besought the +Frenchmen very earnestly to come and see his dwelling and his parents, +which they granted him, and straight for pledge of better amitie, he gaue +vnto my Lieutenant Ottigni, the very skinne that he was clad with. + +Then he tooke him by the hande, leading him right toward the Marishes, +ouer which the Paracoussy, Monsieur Ottigni, and certaine other of our men +were borne vpon the Indians shouldiers: and the rest which could not passe +because of the myre and reedes, went through the woodes, and followed a +narrow path which led them foorth vntill they came vnto the Paracoussyes +dwelling; out of which there came about fiftie Indians to receiue our men +gallantly, and to feast them after their manner. After which they brought +at their entrance a great vessel of earth, made after a strange fashion +full of fountaine water cleare and very excellent. + +This vessell was borne by an Indian, and there was another younger which +bare of this water in another little vessel of wood, and presented thereof +to euery one to drinke, obseruing in doing the same, a certaine order and +reuerence, which hee made to each of them, to whome hee gaue drinke. Our +thirst well quenched by this meanes, and our men beeing sufficiently +refreshed, the Paracoussy brought them to his fathers lodging, one of the +oldest men that liued vpon the earth. Our men regarding his age, began to +make much of him, vsing this speech, Amy, Amy, that is to say, friende, +friende, whereat the olde sier shewed himselfe very glad. + +(M426) Afterward they questioned with him concerning the course of his +age: whereunto he made answere, shewing that he was the first liuing +originall, from whence fiue generations were descended, as he shewed vnto +them by another olde man that sate directly ouer against him, which farre +exceeded him in age. And this man was his father, which seemed to be +rather a dead carkeis then a liuing body: for his sinewes, his veines, his +artiers, his bones, and other parts, appeared so cleerely thorow his +skinne, that a man might easily tell them, and discerne them one from +another. Also his age was so great, that the good man had lost his sight, +and could not speake one onely word but with exceeding great paine. +Monsieur de Ottigni hauing seene so strange a thing, turned to the yoonger +of these two olde men, praying him to vouchsafe to answere him to that +which he demanded touching his age. Then the olde man called a company of +Indians, and striking twise vpon his thigh, and laying his hand vpon two +of them, he shewed him by signes that these two were his sonnes: againe +smiting vpon their thighes he shewed him others not so olde, which were +the children of the two first, which he continued in the same maner vntill +the fift generation. But though this olde man had his father aliue more +olde then himselfe, and that both of them did weare their haire very long, +and as white as was possible, yet it was tolde them, that they might yet +liue thirtie or fortie yeeres more by the course of nature: although the +younger of them both was not lesse then two hundred and fiftie yeeres +olde. (M427) After he had ended his communication, hee commaunded two +young Egles to be giuen to our men, which he had bred vp for his pleasure +in his house. Hee caused also litle Paniers made of Palme leaues full of +Gourds red and blew to be deliuered vnto them. For recompence of which +presents he was satisfied with French toyes. + +These two olde men caused our men to bee guided backe againe to the place +from whence they came, by the young Paracoussy which had brought them +thither. And hauing taken leaue of the Paracoussy, they came and sought me +out in the place where I stayed, and rehearsed vnto mee all that they had +seene, praying mee also that I would rewarde their guide, which so +frankely and heartely had receiued them into his house, which I would not +faile to doe by any meanes. + +Nowe was I determined to search out the qualities of the hill. Therefore I +went right to the toppe thereof, where we found nothing else but Cedars, +Palme, and Baytrees of so souereigne odour, that Baulme smelleth nothing +like in comparison. The trees were enuironed rounde about with Vines +bearing grapes in such quantitie, that the number would suffice to make +the place habitable. Besides this fertilitie of the soyle for Vines, a man +may see Esquine wreathed about the shrubs in great quantitie. Touching the +pleasure of the place, the Sea may be seene plaine and open from it, and +more then sixe leagues off, neere the Riuer Belle, a man may behold the +medowes diuided asunder into Iles and Islets enterlacing one another: +Briefly the place is so pleasant, that those which are melancholicke would +be enforced to change their humour. + +After I had stayed there a while, I imbarked againe my people to sayle +towards the month of the Riuer, where wee found the Paracoussy, which +according to his promise waited tor vs. Wherefore to content him, we went +on shore, and did him that reuerence that on our part was requisite. Then +hee gaue me the skinne so richly painted, and I recompensed him with +somewhat of our marchandise. I forgat not to demaund of him the place +whence the wedge of siluer came which he had giuen me before; whereunto he +made me a very sudden answere, which notwithstanding I vnderstoode not, +which he well perceiued. And then he shewed me by euident signes that all +of it came from (M428) a place more within the Riuer by certaine dayes +iourneyes from this place, and declared vnto vs that all that which they +had thereof, they gat it by force of armes of the inhabitants of the +place, named by them Thimogoa, their most ancient and naturall enemies, as +he largely declared. Whereupon when I sawe with what affection he spake +when he pronounced Thimogoa, I vnderstoode what he would say. And to bring +my selfe more into his fauour, I promised to accompanie him with all my +force, if hee would fight against them: which thing pleased him in such +sorte, that from henceforth he promised himselfe the victorie of them, and +assured mee that hee would make a voyage thither within a short space, +would cause store of Mill to be prepared, and would commaund his men to +make ready their Bowes, and furnish themselues with such store of arrowes, +that nothing should bee wanting to giue battaile to Thimogoa. In fine hee +prayed mee very earnestly not to faile of my promise, and in so doing hee +hoped to procure mee Golde and Siluer in such good quantitie, that mine +affaires shoulde take effect according to mine owne and his desire. + +The matter thus fully resolued vpon, I tooke my leaue of him to returne +vnto my shippes, where after wee had rested ourselues all the night +following, we hoysed sayles the next day very earely in the morning, and +sayled towarde the Riuer of Seine, distant from the Riuer of May about +foure leagues: and there continuing our course towarde the North, we +arriued at the mouth of Somme, which is not past sixe leagues distant from +the Riuer of Seine: where wee cast Anker, and went on shoare to discouer +that place as wee had done the rest. There wee were gratiously and +courteously receiued of the Paracoussy of the Countrey, which is one of +the tallest men and best proportioned that may bee founde. His wife sate +by him, which besides her Indian beautie, wherewith shee was greatly +endowed, had so vertuous a countenance and modest grauitie, that there was +not one amongst vs but did greatly commend her; shee had in her traine +fiue of her daughters of so good grace and so well brought vp, that I +perswaded my selfe that their mother was their Mistresse, and had taught +them well and straightly to preserue their honestie. After that the +Paracoussy had receiued vs as I haue sayde, hee commaunded his wife to +present mee with a certaine number of bullets of siluer, for his owne part +bee presented mee with his bowe and his arrowes, as hee had done vnto +Captaine Iohn Ribault in our first voyage, which is a signe of a +perpetuall amitie and alliance with those which they honour with suche a +kinde of present. In our discoursing with one another, wee entred into +speech as touching the exercise of armes. Then the Paracoussy caused a +corselet to be set on end, and prayed me to make a proofe of our +Harguebuzes and their bowes: but this proof pleased him very little; for +assoone as he knew that our Harguebuzes did easily pearce that which all +the force of their bowes could not hurt, he seemed to be sorie, musing +with himselfe how this thing might be done. Neuerthelesse going about to +dissemble in his minde that which his countenance could not doe by any +meanes, he began to fall into another matter and prayed vs very earnestly +to stay with him that night in his house or lodging, affirming that no +greater happinesse could come vnto him then our long abode, which he +desired to recompence with a thousand presents. + +(M429) Neuerthelesse wee could not grant him this poynt, but tooke our +leaue of him to returne to our shippes: where soone after I caused all my +companie to be assembled, with the Masters and Pilots of my shippes, to +consult together of the place whereof wee should make choice to plant our +habitation. First I let them vnderstand, howe none of them were ignorant, +that the part which was towarde the Cape of Florida, was altogether a +marish Countrey, and therefore vnprofitable for our inhabitation: A thing +which could yeelde neither profite to the King, nor any contentment or +pleasure to vs, if peraduenture we would inhabite there. On the other side +if wee passed further toward the North to seeke out Port Royall, it would +be neither very profitable nor conuenient: at the least if wee should giue +credit to the report of them which remained there a long time, although +the Hauen were one of the fairest of the West Indies: but that in this +case the question was not so much of the beautie of the place, as of +things necessary to sustaine life. And that for our inhabiting it was much +more needefull for vs to plant in places plentifull of victuall, then in +goodly Hauens, faire, deepe and pleasaunt to the view. In consideration +whereof that I was of opinion, if it seemed good vnto them, to seate our +selues about the Riuer of May: seeing also that in our first voyage wee +found the same onely among all the rest to abounde in Maiz and corne, +besides the Golde and Siluer that was found there: a thing that put me in +hope of some happie discouerie in time to come. + +After I had proposed these things, euery one gaue his opinion thereof: and +in fine all resolued, namely those which had beene with me in the first +voyage, that it was expedient to seate themselues rather on the Riuer of +May then on any other, vntill they might heare newes out of France. This +point being thus agreed vpon, wee sayled toward the Riuer, and vsed such +diligence, that with the fauor of the windes wee arriued there the morrow +after about the breake of day, which was on Thursday the 29. of the moneth +of Iune. Hauing cast anker, I embarked all my stuffe and the souldiers of +my companie, to sayle right toward the opening of the Riuer: wherein we +entred a good way vp and found a Creeke of a reasonable bignesse, which +inuited vs to refresh our selues a little, while wee reposed our selues +there. Afterward wee went on shoare to seeke out a place plaine without +trees, which wee perceiued from the Creeke. + +But because wee found it not very commodious for vs to inhabite there: wee +determined to returne vnto the place which wee had discouered before, when +wee had sayled vp the Riuer. This place is ioyning to a mountaine, and it +seemed vnto vs more fit and commodious to build a fortresse, then that +where we were last. Therefore we tooke our way towards the forests being +guided therein by the young Paracoussy which had ledde vs before to his +fathers lodging. Afterward we found a large plaine couered with high +Pinetrees distant a little from the other: vnder which wee perceiued an +infinite number of Stagges which brayed amidst the plaine, athwart the +which we passed: then wee discouered a little hill adioyning vnto a great +vale very greene and in forme flat: wherein were the fairest meadowes of +the world, and grasse to feede cattel. Moreouer it is inuironed with a +great number of brookes of fresh water, and high woodes, which make the +vale more delectable to the eye. After I had taken the viewe thereof at +mine ease, I named it at the request of our souldiers, The Vale of +Laudonniere. Thus we went forward. Anon hauing gone a little forward, we +met an Indian woman of tall stature, which also was a Hermaphrodite, who +came before vs with a great vessel full of cleere fountaine water, +wherewith she greatly refreshed vs. For we were exceeding faint by reason +of the ardent heate which molested vs as we passed through those high +woods. And I beleeue that without the succour of that Indian +Hermaphrodite, or rather, if it had not bene for the great desire which we +had to make vs resolute of our selues, we had taken vp our lodging all +night in the wood. Being therefore refreshed by this meane, wee gathered +our spirits together, and marching with a cheerefull courage, wee came to +the place which wee had chosen to make our habitation in: whereupon at +that instant neere the riuers brinke we strowed a number of boughes and +leaues, to take our rest on them the night following, which wee found +exceeding sweete, because of the paine which before we had taken in our +trauell. + +On the morrow about the breake of day, I commaunded a trumpet to be +sounded, that being assembled we might giue God thankes for our fauourable +and happie arriuall. (M430) There we sang a Psalme of thankesgiuing vnto +God, beseeching him that it would please him of his grace to continue his +accustomed goodnesse toward vs his poore seruants, and ayde vs in all our +enterprises, that all might turne to his glory and the aduancement of our +King. The prayer ended, euery man began to take courage. + +Afterward hauing measured out a piece of ground in forme of a triangle, +wee indeuoured our selues of all sides, some to bring earth, some to cut +fagots, and others to raise and make the rampire, for there was not a man +that had not either a shouell, or cutting hooke, or hatchet, as well to +make the ground plaine by cutting downe the trees, as for the building of +the Fort, which we did hasten with such cheerfulnesse, that within few +dayes the effect of our diligence was apparant: in which meane space the +Paracoussy Satourioua our neerest neighbour, and on whose ground wee built +our Fort, came vsually accompanyed with his two sonnes and a great number +of Indians to offer to doe vs all courtesie. And I likewise for my part +bestowed diuers of our trifles frankely on him, to the end he might know +the good will we bare him, and thereby make him more desirous of our +friendship, in such sort, that as the dayes increased, so our amitie and +friendship increased also. + +After that our Forte was brought into forme, I began to build a Grange to +retire my munition and things necessarie for the defence of our Fort: +praying the Paracoussy to command his subiects to make vs a couering of +Palme leaues, and this to the ende that when that was done, I might +vnfraight my shippes, and put vnder couerture those things that were in +them. (M431) Suddenly the Paracoussy commaunded in my presence all the +Indians of his companie to dresse the next day morning so good a number of +Palme leaues, that the Grange was couered in lesse then two dayes: so that +businesse was finished. For in the space of those two dayes, the Indians +neuer ceased from working, some in fetching Palme leaues, others in +interlacing of them: in such sort that their Kings commandement was +executed as he desired. + +(M432) Our Fort was built in forme of a triangle. The side toward the +West, which was toward the lande, was inclosed with a little trench and +raised with turues made in forme of a Battlement of nine foote high: the +other side which was toward the Riuer, was inclosed with a Pallisado of +plankes of timber after the maner that Gabions are made. On the South side +there was a kinde of bastion within which I caused an house for the +munition to be built: it was all builded with fagots and sand, sauing +about two or three foot high with turfes, whereof the battlements were +made. (M433) In the middest I caused a great Court to be made of eighteene +paces long and broad, in the middest whereof on the one side drawing +toward the South I builded a Corps de gard, and an house on the other side +toward the North, which I caused to bee raised somewhat too high: for +within a short while after the wind beat it down: and experience taught +me, that we may not build with high stages in this Countrey, by reason of +the windes whereunto it is subiect. One of the sides that inclosed my +Court, which I made very faire and large, reached vnto the Grange of my +munitions: and on the other side towardes the Riuer was mine owne lodging, +round about which were galleries all couered. (M434) The principall doore +of my lodging was in the middest of the great place, and the other was +towarde the Riuer. A good distance from the Fort I built an Ouen to auoyde +the danger against fire, because the houses are of Palme leaues, which +will soone be burnt after the fire catcheth holde of them, so that with +much adoe a man shall haue leasure to quench them. Loe here in briefe the +description of our Fourtresse, which I named Caroline in the honour of our +Prince King Charles. + +After wee were furnished with that which was most necessarie, I would not +lose a minute of an houre, without imploying of the same in some vertuous +exercise: therefore I charged Monsieur de Ottigni my Lieutenant, a man in +trueth worthy of all honour for his honestie and vertue, to search vp +within the Riuer, what this Thimogoa might be, whereof the Paracoussy +Satourioua had spoken to vs so often at our comming on shoare. For +execution hereof the Paracoussy gaue him two Indians for his guides, which +taking vpon them to lead him in this voyage, seemed to goe vnto a wedding, +so desirous they were to fight with their enemies. + +(M435) Being imbarked they hoised sayle, and hauing sayled about twentie +leagues, the Indians which still looked on this side and that side to +espie some of their enemies, discouered three Canoas. And immediatly they +began to crie Thimogoa, Thimogoa, and spake nothing else but to hasten +forward to goe fight with them: which the Captaine seemed to be willing to +doe, to content them. When they came to boord them, one of the Indians gat +holde of an Halbert, another of an Coutelas in such a rage, that hee would +haue leapt into the water to haue fought with them alone. Neuerthelesse +Ottigni would not let them doe it, for while hee deferred to boord them, +he gaue the others respite to turne the prowes of their Canoas toward the +shoare, and so to escape into the woods. Againe the meaning of Ottigni was +not to make warre vpon them of Thimogoa, but rather to make them friendes, +and to make them thenceforth to liue in peace one with another if it were +possible, hoping by this meane to discouer dayly some new thing, and +especially the certaine course of the Riuer. For this purpose he caused +the barke to retire, wherein were the two Indians his guides, and went +with his men towards the Canoas which were on the Riuers side. Being come +vnto them, he put certaine trifles into them, and then retired a good way +from them, which thing caused the Indians which were fled away to returne +to their boats, and to understand by this signe, that those of our Barke +were none of their enemies, but rather come onely to traffique with them. +Wherefore being thus assured of vs, they called to our men to come neere +vnto them: which they did incontinently and set foote on lande, and spake +freely vnto them, with diuers ceremonies ouer long to recount. In the ende +Ottigni demaunded of them by signes if they had any Golde or Siluer among +them. But they tolde him they had none as then: and that if he would send +one of his men with them, they would bring him without danger into a place +where they might haue some. (M436) Ottigni seeing them so willing, +deliuered them one of his men which seemed very resolute, to vndertake +this voyage: this fellow stayed with them vntill tenne of the clocke the +next morning, so that Captaine Ottigny somewhat offended with his long +stay, sayled ten great leagues further vp the Riuer: although he knew not +which way he should goe, yet he went so farre vp that hee espied the Boate +wherein his souldier was: which reported vnto him, that the Indians would +haue carried him three great dayes iourney further, and told him that a +King named Mayrra rich in Gold and Siluer, dwelt in those quarters, and +that for small quantitie of marchandise enough might be had of him: yet +that hee would not hazard himselfe without his leaue, and that he brought +but a very little Golde. This being done, our men returned toward our Fort +Caroline, after they had left the souldier with the Indians to informe +himselfe more and more of such things as he might discouer more at +leasure. + +(M437) Fifteene dayes after this voyage to Thimogoa, I dispatched Captaine +Vasseur and my Sergeant also to returne againe into this Countrey, and to +seeke out the souldier which remained there in the former voyage. Being +therefore imbarked, they sayled two whole dayes: and before they came to +the dwelling of the Indians, they found two of them on the Riuers side, +which were expressly sent vnto that place to descry whether any of their +enemies were come to that part, with intention to surprise them, as they +did vsually. + +When they perceiued Captaine Vasseur, they knew incontinently that he was +none of their enemies, and therefore made no difficultie to come neere +vnto the Barke, and shewed him by signes that the Souldier which they +sought was not in that place, but was at that present in the house of King +Molloua which was vassall vnto another great King named by them Olata Ouae +Vtina: and that if the Captaine would sayle thitherward, hee should come +thither very quickly: wherewith he was content, and caused his men to rowe +to that part which the Indians shewed him: whereat they were so glad, that +they ranne quickly before by land to declare his arriuall, which was at +the lodging of king Molloua, after he had rowed not past halfe a league. +While king Molloua had ended intertaining Captaine Vasseur and his men, +the souldier came in with fiue or sixe pounds weight of siluer which he +had trucked and traffiqued with Indians. + +This King caused bread to bee made, and fish to bee dressed after the +Indian fashion to feast our men: to whom, while they were at meate, hee +made a discourse of diuers other kings his friends and allies, reckoning +vp to the number of nine of them by name, to wit, Codecha, Chilili, +Eclauou, Enacappe, Calany, Anacharaqua, Omittaqua, Aequara, Moquoso: all +which with him to the number of more then fortie, hee assured vs to bee +the vassals of the most renowned Olata Ouae Vtina. + +This done, hee went about likewise to discouer the enemies of Ouae Vtina, +in which number he placed at the first the Paracoussy Satourioua Monarch +of the confines of the riuer of May, which hath vnder his obeysance +thirtie other Paracoussies, whereof there were ten which were all his +brethren, and that therefore hee was greatly esteemed in those partes: +then hee named three others no lesse puissant then Satourioua, whereof the +first dwelt two dayes iourney from his lord Olata Ouae Vtina, and +ordinarily made warre vpon him, whose name was Potanou, a man cruell in +warre, but pitifull in the execution of his furie. For hee tooke the +prisoners to mercy, being content to marke them on the left arme with a +great marke like vnto a seale, and so imprinted as if it had bene touched +with an hotte yron, then hee let them goe without any more hurt. (M438) +The two others were named Onatheaqua, and Houstaqua, being great Lords, +and abounding in riches and principally Onatheaqua, which dwelt neere vnto +the high mountaines, wherein there was abundance of many rare things, and +infinite quantitie of a kinde of slate stone, wherewith they made wedges +to cleaue their wood. The occasion which (as he sayd) mooued Pontanou to +wage warre against Olata Ouae Vtina, was the feare that he had, lest he +and his companions should get of that hard stone in his Countrey, +wherewith they headed their arrowes, and could not get it in any neerer +place. + +Besides all this, Molloua recited to Captaine Vasseur, that the kings +allies the vassals of the great Olata, armed their brests, armes, thighes, +legs and foreheads with large plates of gold and siluer: and that by this +meanes the arrowes that were discharged vpon them could do them no maner +of hurt at all, but rather were broken against them. Hereupon Captaine +Vasseur inquired whether the Kings Onetheaqua and Houstaqua were like vnto +vs. For by the description that they made of them, he began to doubt +whether they were Spaniards or no: but Molloua tolde him that (M439) they +were not, but that they were Indians like the rest, sauing that they +painted their faces with blacke and that the rest as Molloua painted them +with red. Then my Lieutenant Vasseur, and my Seargent promised him that +one day I should march with my forces into those Countreys, and that +ioyning my selfe with his Lord Olata, I would subdue the inhabitants of +the highest of those mountaines. Hee was very glad of this speach, and +answered that the least of these Kings which hee had named should present +vnto the Generall of these succours the height of two foot of gold and +siluer, which by force of armes they had already gotten of those two +Kings, Onatheaqua, and Houstaqua. + +The good cheere being done, and the discourses ended, my men imbarked +themselves againe, with intention to bring mee those good newes vnto the +Fort Caroline. But after they had sayled a very long while downe the +Riuer, and were come within three leagues of vs, the tyde was so strong +against them, that they were constrained to goe on lande, and to retire +themselues because of the night, vnto the dwelling of a certaine +Paracoussy named Molona, which shewed himselfe very glad of their +arriuall: for hee desired to know some newes of Thimogoa, and thought that +the French men went thither for none other occasion but for to inuade +them. Which Captaine Vasseur perceiuing, dissembled so wel, that he made +him beleeue that he went to Thirmogoa with none other intention, but to +subdue them, and to destroy them with the edge of the sworde without +mercy, but that their purpose had not such successe as they desired, +because that the people of Thimogoa being aduertised of this enterprise, +retired into the woods, and saued themselues by flight: that neuerthelesse +they had taken some as they were fleeing away, which carried no newes +thereof vnto their fellowes. + +The Paracoussy was so glad of this relation, that he interrupted him, and +asked Vasseur of the beginning and maner of his execution, and prayed him +that hee would shew him by signes howe all things passed. Immediatly +Francis la Caille the Sergeant of my band tooke his sword in his hand, +saying, that with the point thereof he had thrust through two Indians +which ranne into the woods, and that his companions had done no lesse for +their partes. And that if fortune had so fauoured them, that they had not +beene discouered by the men of Thimogoa, they had had a victorie most +glorious and worthie of eternall memorie. Hereupon the Paracoussy shewed +himselfe so well satisfied, that he could not deuise how to gratifie our +men, which hee caused to come into his house to feast them more +honourably; and hauing made Captaine Vasseur to sit next him, and in his +owne chaire (which the Indians esteeme for the chiefest honour) and then +vnderneath him two of his sonnes, goodly and mightie fellowes, hee +commanded all the rest to place themselues as they thought good. This +done, the Indians came according to their good custome, to present their +drinke Cassine to the Paracoussy, and then to certaine of his chiefest +friends, and the Frenchmen. Then hee which brought it set the cup aside, +and drew out a little dagger stucke vp in the roofe of the house, and like +a mad man he lift his head aloft, and ranne apace, and went and smote an +Indian which sate alone in one of the corners of the hall, crying with a +loud voyce, Hyou, the poore Indian stirring not at all for the blowe, +which he seemed to endure patiently. He which held the dagger went quickly +to put the same in his former place, and began againe to giue vs drinke as +hee did before: but he had not long continued, and had scarce giuen three +or foure thereof, but he left his bowle againe, tooke the dagger in his +hand, and quickly returned vnto him which hee had strocken before, to whom +he gaue a very sore blow on the side, crying Hyou, as he had done before: +and then hee went to put the dagger in his place, and set himselfe downe +among the rest. A little while after he that had bene stricken fell downe +backwards, stretching out his armes and legs, as if hee had bene ready to +yeeld vp the latter gaspe. And then the younger sonne of the Paracoussy +apparelled in a long white skinne, fell downe at the feete of him that was +fallen backward, weeping bitterly halfe a quarter of an houre: after, two +other of his brethren clad in like apparell, came about him that was so +stricken, and began to sigh pitifully. Their mother bearing a little +infant in her armes came from another part, and going to the place where +her sonnes were, at the first shee vsed infinite numbers of outcries, the +one while lifting vp her eyes to heauen, another while falling downe vnto +the ground, shee cryed so dolefully, that her lamentable mournings would +haue moued the most hard and stony heart in the world with pitie. Yet this +sufficed not, for there came in a companie of young gyrles, which did +neuer leaue weeping for a long while in the place where the Indian was +fallen downe, whom afterward they tooke, and with the saddest gestures +they could deuise, carried him away into another house a little way off +from the great hall of the Paracoussy, and continued their weepings and +mournings by the space of two long houres: in which meane while the +Indians ceased not to drinke Cassine, but with such silence that one word +was not heard in the parlour. + +Vasseur being grieued that he vnderstood not these ceremonies, demanded of +the Paracoussy what these things meant: which answered him slowly, +Thimogoa, Thimogoa, without saying any more. (M440) Being more displeased +then he was before with so sleight an answere, he turned vnto another +Indian the Paracoussyes brother, who was a Paracoussy as well as his +brother, called Malica, which made him a like answere as hee did at the +first, praying him to aske no more of these matters, and to haue patience +for that time. The subtil old Paracoussy prayed him within a while after +to shew him his sword, which he would not denie him, thinking that hee +would haue held the fashion of his weapons: but he soone perceiued that it +was to another ende: for the old man holding it in his hand, behelde it a +long while on euery place, to see if he could finde any blood vpon it, +which might shew that any of their enemies had bene killed: for the +Indians are woont to bring their weapons wherewith their enemies haue +beene defeated, with some blood vpon them, for a token of their victories. +But seeing no signe thereof vpon it, he was vpon the point to say vnto him +that he had killed none of them of Thimogoa: when as Vasseur, preuenting +that which hee might obiect, declared and shewed vnto him by signes, the +maner of his enterprise, adding, that by reason of the two Indians which +he had slaine, his sword was so bloudy, that hee was inforced to wash and +make it cleane a long while in the Riuer: which the olde man beleeued to +be like to be true, and made no maner of replie thereunto. + +Vasseur, La Caille, and their other companions went out of the hal to goe +into the roome whither they had carried the Indian; there they found the +Paracoussy sitting vpon tapestries made of small reedes, which was at +meate after the Indian fashion, and the Indian that was smitten hard by +him, lying vpon the selfe same tapistry, about whom stoode the wife of the +Paracoussy, with all the young damsels which before bewailed him in the +hall: which did nothing else but warme a great deal of mosse instead of +napkins to rub the Indians side. Hereupon our men asked the Paracoussy +againe for what occasion the (M441) Indian was so persecuted in his +presence: hee answered, that this was nothing else but a kinde of +ceremonie, whereby they would call to minde the death and persecutions of +the Paracoussies their ancestours executed by their enemie Thimogoa: +alleaging moreouer that as often as he him selfe, or any of his friends +and allies returned from the Countrey, without they brought the heads of +their enemies or without bringing home some prisoner, hee vsed for a +perpetuall memorie of his predecessors, to beate the best beloued of his +children with the selfe same weapons wherewith they had beene killed in +times past: to the ende that by renewing of the wound their death should +be lamented afresh. Now when they were thus informed of those ceremonies, +they thanked the Paracoussy for their good intertainement which they had +receiued, and so setting saile came to me vnto the fort: where they +declared all vnto me as I haue recited it heretofore. (M442) The eight and +twentieth day of Iuly our shippes departed to returne into France. And +within a while, about two moneths after our arriuall in Florida, the +Paracoussy Satourioua sent certaine Indians vnto mee to know whether I +would stande to my promise which I had made him at my first arriuall in +that Countrey, which was that I should shewe my selfe friend to his +friendes, and enemie vnto his enemies, and also to accompany him with a +good number of Harquebuzes, when he should see it expedient and should +finde a fit occasion to go to warre. Now seeing he rested vpon this +promise, hee prayed mee not to deferre the same: seeing also that making +accompt thereof, hee had taken such good order for the execution of his +enterprise, that he was ready, and was furnished with all things that were +necessary for the voyage: I made him answere, that for his amitie I would +not purchase the enmitie of the other, and that albeit I would yet +notwithstanding I wanted meanes to doe it. For it behoued mee at that +present to make prouision of victuals and munition for the defence of my +Fort. On the other side, that my Barkes were nothing ready, and that this +enterprise would require time: Moreouer, that the Paracoussy Satourioua +might holde himselfe ready to depart within three moneths, and that then I +would thinke of fulfilling my promise to him. + +The Indians caried this answere to their Paracoussy, which was litle +pleased with it, because hee could not deferre his execution or +expedition, aswell because all his victuals were ready, as also because +tenne other Paracoussies were assembled with him for the performance of +this enterprise. (M443) The ceremonie which this Sauage vsed before hee +embarked his armie deserueth not to be forgotten. For when hee was set +downe by the Riuers side, being compassed about with tenne other +Paracoussies, hee commaunded water to be brought him speedily. This done, +looking vp into heauen, hee fell to discourse of diuers things with +gestures that shewed him to be in exceeding great choller, which made him +one while shake his head hither and thither, and by and by with I wote not +what furie to turne his face toward the Countrey of his enemies, and to +threaten to kill them. Hee oftentimes looked vpon the Sunne, praying him +to graunt him a glorious victory of his enemies. Which when hee had done +by the space of halfe an houre, he sprinkled with his hand a litle of the +water which hee helde in a vessel vpon the heads of the Paracoussies, and +cast the rest as it were in a rage and despite into a fire which was there +prepared for the purpose. This done hee cried out thrise, He Thimogoa, and +was followed by at least fiue hundred Indians, which were there assembled, +which cried all with one voyce, He Thimogoa. This ceremonie, as a certaine +Indian tolde mee familiarly signified nothing else, but that Satourioua +besought the Sunne to graunt vnto him so happy a victory, that he might +shed his enemies blood, as he had shed that water at his pleasure. +Moreouer that the Paracoussies which were sprinkled with a part of that +water, might returne with the heads of their enemies, which is the onely +and chiefe triumph of their victories. + +The Paracoussy Satourioua had no sooner ended his ceremonies and had taken +a viewe of all his company, but he embarked himselfe, and vsed such +diligence with his Almadies or boates, that the next day two houres before +the Sunnes set, he arriued on the territories of his enemies about eight +or tenne leagues from their villages. (M444) Afterward causing them all to +goe on land, hee assembled his counsell, wherein it was agreed that fiue +of the Paracoussies should saile vp the Riuer with halfe of the troupes, +and by the break of day should approch vnto the dwelling of their eniemie: +for his owne part, that hee would take his iourney through the woods and +forrests as secretly as hee coulde: that when they were come thither as +well they that went by water as hee which went by land should not faile by +the breake of the day to enter into the village, and cut them all to +pieces, except the women and little children. + +(M445) These things which were thus agreed vpon, were executed with as +great fury as was possible: which when they had done they tooke the heads +of their enemies which they had slaine, and cut off their haire round +about with a piece of their sculles: they tooke also foure and twentie +prisoners, which they led away, and retired themselues immediatly vnto +their Boates which wayted for them. Being come thither, they beganne to +sing praises vnto the Sunne, to whom they attributed their victorie. And +afterwards they put the skins of those heads on the end of their +iauelings, and went altogether toward the territories of Paracoussy +Omoloa, one of them which was in the company. Being come thither, they +diuided their prisoners equally to each of the Paracoussies, and left +thirteene of them to Satourioua, which straightway dispatched an Indian +his subject, to carry newes before of the victory to them which stayed at +home to guard their houses, which immediately beganne to weepe. But +assoone as night was come, they neuer left dancing and playing a thousand +gambols, in honour of the feast. + +(M446) The next day the Paracoussy Satourioua came home, who before he +entred into his lodging caused all the haire skuls of his enemies to bee +set vp before his doore, and crowned them with branches of Lawrell, +shewing by this glorious spectacle the triumph of the victory which hee +had obtained. Straight way beganne lamentation and mournings, which +assoone as the night beganne were turned into pleasures and dances. + +After that I was aduertised of those things, I sent a Souldier vnto +Satourioua, praying him to send mee two of his prisoners: which hee denied +mee, saying that hee was nothing beholding vnto mee, and that I had broken +my promise, against the oath which I had sworn vnto him at my arriuall. +Which when I vndentoode by my Souldier, which was come hacke with speede, +I deuised howe I might be reuenged of this Sauage, and to make him know +how dearly this bolde brauado of his should cost him: therefore I +commaunded my Sergeant to provide mee twentie souldiers to goe with mee to +the house of Satourioua: Where after I was come and entred into the hall +without any maner of salutation, I went and sate downe by him, and stayed +a long while without speaking any woorde vnto him, or shewing him any +signe of friendship, which thing put him deeply in his dumpes: besides +that certaine Souldiers remained at the gate, to whom I had giuen expresse +commaundement to suffer no Indian to goe foorth: hauing stood still about +halfe an houre with this countenance, at length I demaunded where the +prisoners were which hee had taken at Thimogoa, and commaunded them +presently to bee brought vnto mee. + +Whereunto the Paracoussy angry at the heart, and astonied wonderfully, +stoode a long while without making any answere, notwithstanding at last +hee answered me very stoutly, that being afraide to see vs comming thither +in such warrelike manner they fled into the woods, and that not knowing +which way they were gone, they were not able by any meanes to bring them +againe. Then I seemed to make as though I understood not what he saide, +and asked for his prisoners againe, and for some of his principall allies. +Then Satourioua commaunded his sonne Athore to seeke out the prisoners, +and to cause them to be brought into that place, which thing he did within +an houre after. + +After they were come to the lodging of the Paracoussy, they humbly saluted +mee, and lifting vp their hands before me, they would haue fallen downe +prostrate as it were at my feet: but I would not suffer them, and soone +after ledde them away with me vnto my owne Fort. The Paracoussy being +wonderfully offended with this brauado, bethought himselfe by all meanes +how hee might be reuenged of vs. But to giue vs no suspition thereof, and +the better to couer his intention, hee sent his messengers oftentimes vnto +vs bringing alwayes with them some kinde of presents. (M447) Among others +one day hee sent three Indians, which brought vs two baskets full of great +Pompions, much more excellent then those which we haue in France, and +promised me in their Kings behalfe, that during mine abode in that +Countrey, I should neuer want victuals: I thanked them for their Kings +good will, and signified vnto them the great desire which I had, aswell +for the benefit of Satourioua, as for the quiet of his Subjects, to make a +peace betweene him and those of Thimogoa: which thing coulde not choose +but turne to their great benefite, seeing that being allied with the Kings +of those parts, hee had an open passage against Onatheaqua his ancient +enemie, which otherwise he could not set vpon. Moreouer that Olata Ouae +Vtina was so mightie a Paracoussy, that Satourioua was not able to +withstand his forces: but being agreed together they might easily +ouerthrow all their enemies, and might passe the confines of the farthest +Riuers that were towards the South. The messengers prayed mee to haue +patience vntil the morowe, at what time they would come againe vnto me to +certifie me of their Lords inclination: which they failed not to doe, +aduertising me that Paracoussy Satourioua was the gladdest man in the +world to treate of this accord (although indeed hee was quite contrary) +and that he besought mee to be diligent therein, promising to obserue and +performe whatsoever I should agree vpon with those of Thimogoa: which +things the messengers also rehearsed vnto the prisoners which I had ledde +away. After they were departed, I resolued within two dayes to sende backe +againe the prisoners to Olata Ouae Vtina, whose subiects they were: but +before I embarked them, I gaue them certaine small trifles, which were +little kniues or tablets of glasse, wherein the image of King Charles the +ninth was drawen very liuely, for which they gaue me very great thankes, +as also for the honest entertainment which was giuen them at the Fort +Caroline. After this they embarked themselues, with Captaine Vasseur, and +with Monsieur de Arlac mine Ensigne, which I had sent of purpose to +remaine a certaine time with Ouae Vtina, hoping that the fauour of this +great Paracoussy would serue my turne greatly to make my discoueries in +time to come. I sent with him also one of my Sergeants, and sixe gallant +Souldiers. + +(M448) Thus things passed on this maner, and the hatred of Paracoussy +Satourioua against mee did still continue, vntill that on the nine and +twentieth of August a lightning from heauen, fell within halfe a league of +our Fort, more worthy I beleeue to be wondered at, and to bee put in +writing, then all the strange signes which haue bene seene in times past, +and whereof the histories haue neuer bene written. For although the +medowes were at that season all greene, and halfe couered ouer with water, +neuerthelesse the lightning in one instant consumed aboue fiue hundred +acres therewith, and burned with the ardent heate thereof all the foules +which tooke their pastime in the meddowes, which thing continued for three +dayes space, which caused vs not a little to muse, not being able to iudge +whereof this fire proceeded: for one while wee thought that the Indians +had burnt their houses, and abandoned their places for feare of vs: +another while wee thought that they had discouered some shippes in the +Sea, and that according to their custome they had kindled many fires here +and there, to signifie that their Countrey was inhabited: neuerthelesse +being not assured, I determined to sende to Paracoussy Serrany to knowe +the trueth thereof. But euen as I was vpon the point to sende one by boate +to discouer the matter, sixe Indians came vnto mee from Paracoussy +Allimacany, which at their first entrie made vnto mee a long discourse, +and a very large and ample oration (after they had presented mee with +certaine baskets full of Maiz, of Pompions and of Grapes) of the louing +amity which Allimacany desired to continue with mee, and that he looked +from day to day when it would please mee to employ him in my seruice. +(M449) Therefore considering the seruiceable affection that hee bare vnto +mee, hee found it very strange, that I thus discharged mine Ordinance +against his dwelling, which had burnt vp an infinite sight of greene +medowes, and consumed euen downe vnto the bottome of the water, and came +so neere vnto his mansion, that hee thought hee saw the fire in his house: +wherefore hee besought mee most humbly to commaund my men that they would +not shoote any more towards his lodging, otherwise that hereafter he +should be constrained to abandon his countrey, and to retire himselfe into +some place further off from vs. + +(M450) Hauing vnderstood the foolish opinion of this man, which +notwithstanding coulde not choose but be very profitable for vs, I +dissembled what I thought thereof for that time, and answered the Indians +with a cheerefull countenance, that the relation which they made vnto mee +of the obedience of their Paracoussy did please mee right well, because +that before hee had not behaued himselfe in such sort towards mee, +especially when I summoned him to sende mee the prisoners of great Olata +Ouae Vtina which he detained, whereof notwithstanding he made no great +accompt, which was the principall cause whereof I had discharged mine +Ordinance against him: not that I meant to reach vnto his house (as I +might haue done easily, if it had pleased me) but that I was content to +shoote the halfe way to make him knowe my force: assuring him furthermore, +that on condition that he would continue in his good affection, no more +Ordinance should be discharged against him hereafter; and besides that I +would become his faithfull protectour against his greatest enemies. + +The Indians contented with mine answere returned to assure their +Paracoussy, which notwithstanding the assurance withdrewe himselfe from +his dwelling twentie or fiue and twentie leagues off and that for the +space of more then two moneths. After that three dayes were expired, the +fire was quite extinguished. (M451) But for two dayes after there followed +such an excessiue heate in the aire, that the Riuer neere vnto which we +planted our habitation, became so hoat, that I thinke it was almost ready +to seeth. (M452) For there died so great abundance of fish, and that of so +many diuers sorts, that in the mouth of the Riuer onely there were founde +dead ynough to haue loaden fiftie Carts, whereof there issued a +putrefaction in the aire, which bred many dangerous diseases amongst vs, +inasmuch that most of my men fell sicke, and almost ready to ende their +dayes. Yet notwithstanding it pleased our mercifull God so to prouide by +his prouidence, that all our men recouered their health without the losse +of any one of them. + +(M453) Monsieur de Arlac, Captaine Vasseur, and one of my Sergeants, being +embarked with their tenne Souldiers about the tenth of September to cary +backe the prisoners vnto Vtina, sailed so farre vp the Riuer, that they +discouered a place called Mayarqua distant from our Fort about fourescore +leagues, where the Indians gaue them good entertainetment, and in many +other villages which they found. (M454) From this place they rowed to the +dwelling of Paracoussy Vtina, which after hee had feasted them according +to his abilitie and power, prayed Monsieur de Arlac and all his Souldiers +to stay a while with him, to ayde and assist him in battaile against one +of his enemies, called Potanou, whereunto Monsieur de Arlac consented +willingly. And because hee knew not how long he might haue occasion to +stay in these parts, hee sent mee Captaine Vasseur and the Barke backe +againe, which brought home onely fiue Souldiers with him. + +(M455) Nowe because the custome of the Indians is alwayes to wage war by +surprise, Vtina resolued to take his enemie Potanou in the morning by the +breake of the day: to (M456) bring this to passe, hee made his men to +trauaile all the night, which might be in number two hundred persons, so +well aduised, that they prayed our French-shot to be in the fore-front, +the ende (as they saide) that the noyse of their pieces might astonish +their enemies: notwithstanding they coulde not march so secretly, but that +those of the village of Potanou, distant from the dwelling of Vtina about +fiue and twentie leagues, were ware of them: which suddenly employed and +bestowed all their endeuour to defend their village enclosed all with +trees, and issued out in great companies: but finding themselues charged +with shotte, (a thing wherewith they neuer had bene acquainted) also +beholding the Captaine of their bande fall downe dead in the beginning of +their skirmish, with a shot of an Harquebuse which strooke him in the +forehead, discharged by the hande of Monsieur de Arlac, they left the +place: and the Indians of Vtina gate into the village, taking men, women, +and children prisoners. (M457) Thus Paracoussy Vtina obtained the victory +by the ayde of our men, which slew many of his enemies, and lost in his +conflict one of their companions, wherewith Vtina was very much grieued. +Eight or tenne dayes after, sent Captaine Vasseur backe againe with a +Barke to fetch home Monsieur de Arlac and his Souldiers, which at their +returne brought mee certaine presents from Vtina, as some siluer, a small +quantitie of golde painted skinnes, and other things, with a thousand +thankes, which the Paracoussy gaue me, which promised that if in any +enterprise of importance I should haue neede of his men, he would furnish +mee with three hundreth and about. + +(M458) While I thus trauailed to purchase friends, and to practise one +while with one here, an other while with another there, certaine Souldiers +of my company were suborned vnder hand by one named La Roquette of the +Countrey of Perigort, which put in their heads that hee was a great +Magician, and that by the secrets of Art-magicke he had discouered a Mine +of golde and siluer farre vp within the Riuer, whereby (vpon the losse of +his life,) euery Souldier should receiue in ready Bullion the value of +tenne thousand Crownes, beside and aboue fifteene hundred thousand should +be reserued for the Kings Maiestie: wherefore they allied themselues with +La Roquette and another of his confederates, whose name was Le Genre, in +whom (M459) notwithstanding I had great affiance. (M460) This Genre +exceeding desirous to enrich himselfe in those parts, and seeking to be +reuenged, because I would not giue him the carriage of the Paquet into +France, secretly enfourmed the Souldiers that were already suborned by La +Roquette, that I would depriue them of this great gaine, in that I did set +them dayly on worke, not sending them on euery side to discouer the +Countreys: therefore that it were a good deede, after they had made mee +vnderstande so much, to seeke meanes to dispatch me out of the way, and to +choose another Captaine in my place, if I would not giue them victuals +according to their disordinate appetite. (M461) Hee also brought mee word +hereof himselfe, making a large discourse vnto mee of the good affection +of the Souldiers, which all besought mee that I would conduct them to the +Countrey where the Mine was: I made him answere that all could not goe +thither, and that it was necessary before their departure to settle our +Fortresse in such estate, that those which which were to stay at home +behind should remaine in securitie against the Indians which might +surprise them. Furthermore, that their manner of proceeding seemed strange +vnto mee, for that they imagined, that the Kings Maiestie was at the +charges of our voyage for none other ende, but onely to enrich them at +their first arriuall, in as much as they shewed themselues much more giuen +vnto couetousnesse, then vnto the seruice of their Prince: But seeing mine +answere tended vnto none other ende but to make our Fortresse strong and +defensible, they determined to trauaile in the worke, and made an ensigne +of olde linnen, which ordinarily they bare vpon the rampart when they went +to woorke, alwayes wearing their weapons, which I thought they had done to +incourage themselues to worke the better. (M462) But as I perceiued +afterwards, and that by the confession of Genre sent mee in letters which +he writ to mee of that matter, these gentle Souldiers did the same for +none other ende, but to haue killed mee and my Lieutenant also, if by +chance I had giuen them any hard speeches. + +About the twentieth of September, as I came home from the woods and +coppises to finish the building of my Fort, (and that according to my +vsual maner, I marched first to giue encouragement vnto my Souldiers) I +chafed my selfe into such sort, that I (M463) fell into a sore and +grieuous sicknesse, whereof I thought I should haue died: During which +sicknesse, I called Le Genre often vnto mee, as one that I trusted aboue +all others, and of whose conspiracies I doubted not any whit at all. +(M464) In this meane while assembling his complices, sometime in his +chamber and sometime in the woods to consult with them, hee spake vnto +them to choose another Captaine besides mee, to the intent to put mee to +death: but being not able by open force to execute his mischieuous +intention, hee gate him vnto mine Apothecarie praying him instantly to +mingle in my medicine, which I was to receiue one or two dayes after, some +drugge that should make mee pitch ouer the pearch, or at the least that +hee would giue him a little Arsenike or Quicke Siluer, which hee himselfe +would put into my drinke. But the Apothecarie denied him, as did in like +maner Master S. which was Master of the fire-workes. Thus wholly +disappointed of both his meanes, hee with certaine others resolued to hide +a little barrell of gunne powder vnderneath my bed, and by a traine to set +it on fire. + +(M465) Vpon these practises a Gentleman which I had dispatched to returne +into France, being about to take his leaue of me, aduertised me that +Gienre had giuen him a booke full of all kinde of lewde inuectiues and +slanders against me, against Monsieur de Ottigny, and against the +principal of my company: vpon which occasion, I assembled all my Souldiers +together, and Captaine Bourdet with all his, which on the fourth of +September arriued in the roade, and were come into our Riuer. In their +presence I caused the contents of the booke to bee read alowde, that they +might beare record of the vntruths that were written against mee. Gienre, +which had gotten him into the woods for feare of being taken, (where he +liued for a while after with the Sauages by my permission,) writ vnto mee +often, and in many of his letters confessed vnto mee, that hee had +deserued death, condemning himselfe so farrefoorth, that he referred all +to my mercie and pitie. + +(M466) The seuenth or eighth day of Nouember, after I had caused +sufficient prouision of such victuals as were needefull to bee made, I +sent two of my men, to wit, La Roche Ferriere, and another towarde King +Vtina, to discouer euery day more and more of the Countrey: where he was +the space of fiue or sixe moneths, during which hee discouered many small +villages, and among others one named Hostaqua, the King whereof being +desirous of my friendship, sent vnto me a quiuer made of Luserns skinne +full of arrowes, a couple of bowes, foure or fiue skinnes painted after +their maner, and a cheine of Siluer weying about a pounde weight. In +recompence of which presents I sent him two whole sutes of apparell, with +certaine cutting hookes or hatchets. + +After these things therefore in this sort passed, about the tenth of this +moneth, Captaine Bourdet determined to leaue mee and returne into France. +Then I requested him, yea rather was exceeding importunate with him, to +carry home with him some sixe or seuen Souldiers, whom I could not trust +by any meanes: which hee did for my sake, and would not charge himselfe +with Gieure, which offered him a great summe of money, if it would please +him to carry him into France: hee transported him onely to the other side +of the Riuer. (M467) Three dayes after his departure thirteene Mariners +which I had brought out of France suborned by certaine other Mariners +which Captaine Bourdet had left me, stole away my Barkes in maner +following. These Mariners of Captaine Bourdet put mine in the head, that +if they had such Barkes as mine were, they might gaine very much in the +Iles of the Antilles, and make an exceeding profitable voyage. Hereupon +they beganne deuise howe they might steale away my Barkes, and consulted +that when I should command them to goe vnto the village of Sarauahi +distant about a league and a halfe from our Fort, and situated vpon an +arme of the Riuer, (whither according to my maner I sent them dayly to +seeke clay, to make bricke and morter for our houses) they would returne +no more, but would furnish themselues with victuals as well as they might +possibly: and then would embarke themselues all in one vessell, and would +goe their way: as indeede they did. (M468) And that which was worse, two +Flemish Carpenters, which the saide Bourdet had left mee, stole away the +other Barke, and before their departure cut the cables of the Barke, and +of the ship boate, that it might goe away with the tyde, that I might not +pursue them: so that I remained without either Barke or boate, which fell +out as vnluckily for mee as was possible. For I was ready to imbarke my +selfe with all speede, to discouer as farre vp our Riuer, as I might by +any meanes. (M469) Nowe my Mariners, (as I vnderstood afterwards) tooke a +Barke that was a passenger of the Spaniards neere the Isle of Cuba, +wherein they founde a certaine quantitie of golde and siluer, which they +seazed vpon. And hauing this bootie they lay a while at Sea, vntill their +victuals beganne to faile them: which was the cause, that oppressed with +famine they came vnto Hauana the principall Towne of the Isle of Cuba: +whereupon proceeded that mischiefe which hereafter I will declare more at +large. When I saw my Barkes returned not at their wanted houre, and +suspecting that which fell out in deed, I commanded my Carpenters with all +diligence to make a little boat with a flat bottome, to searce those +Riuers for some newes of these Mariners. The boate dispatched within a day +and a night, by reason that my Carpenters found planks and timber ready +sawed to their hands, as commonly I caused my Sawyers to prouide it, I +sent men to seeke some newes of my thieues: but all was in vaine. (M470) +Therefore I determined to cause two great Barkes to be built, ech of which +might be thirtie fiue, or thirtie sixe foote long in the keele. + +(M471) And now the worke was very well forwarde which I set my workemen +about, when ambition and auarice, the mother of all mischiefe, tooke roote +in the hearts of foure or fiue souldiers which could not away with the +worke and paines taking: and which from henceforward (namely one +Fourneaux, and one La Croix, and another called Steuen le Geneuois, the +three principall authors of the sedition) beganne to practise with the +best of my troupe, shewing them that it was a vile thing for men of honest +parentage, as they were, to moyle themselues thus with abiect and base +worke, seeing they had the best occasion of the worlde offered them to +make themselues all riche: which was to arme the two Barkes which were in +building, and to furnish them with good men: (M472) and then to saile vnto +Peru, and the other Isles of the Antilles, where euery Souldier might +easily enrich himselfe with tenne thousand Crownes. And if their +enterprise should bee misliked withall in France, they should bee alwayes +able, by reason of the great wealth that they should gaine, to retire +themselues into Italy, vntill the heate were ouerpassed, and that in the +meane season some warre would fall out, which would cause all this to be +quite forgotten. + +This word of riches sounded so well in the eares of my Souldiers, that in +fine, after they had oftentimes consulted of their affaires, they grew to +the number of threescore and sixe: which to colour their great desire +which they had to goe on stealing, they caused a request to bee presented +vnto mee by Francis de la Callie Sergeant of my company, contayning in sum +a declaration of the small store of victuals that was left to maintaine +vs, vntil the time that shippes might returne from France: for remedy +whereof they thought it necessary to sende to New Spaine, Peru, and all +the Isles adioyning, which they besought mee to be content to graunt. But +I made them answere, that when the Barkes were finished, I would take such +good order in generall, that by meanes of the Kings marchandise, without +sparing mine owne apparell, wee would get victuals of the inhabitants of +the Countrey: seeing also that wee had ynough to serue vs for foure +moneths to come. (M473) For I feared greatly, that vnder pretence of +searching victuals, they would enterprise somewhat against the King of +Spaines Subiects, which in time to come might iustly bee layde to my +charge, considering that at our departure out of France, the Queene had +charged me very expresly, to doe no kinde of wrong to the King of Spaines +Subiects, nor any thing whereof he might conceiue any ielousie. + +They made as though they were content with this answere. But eight dayes +after, as I continued in working vpon our Fort, and on my Barkes, I fell +sicke. Then my seditious companions forgetting all honour and duetie, +supposing that they had found good occasion to execute their rebellious +enterprise, beganne to practise afresh their former designes, handling +their businesse so well, during my sicknesse, that they openly vowed that +they would seaze on the Corps de gard, and on the Fort, yea, and force mee +also, if I woulde not consent vnto their wicked desire. My Lieutenant +being hereof aduertised, came and tolde mee that he suspected some euill +practise: and the next day in the morning I was saluted at my gate with +men in complet harnesse, what time my Souldiers were about to play mee a +shrewde tricke: then I sent to seeke a couple of Gentlemen whom I most +trusted, which brought mee word that the Souldiers were determined to come +to me to make a request vnto me: But I tolde them that this was not the +fashion to present a request vnto a Captaine in this maner, and therefore +they should send some few vnto me to signifie vnto mee what they would +haue. Hereupon the fiue chiefe authors of the sedition armed with +Corslets, their Pistolles in their handes already bent, prest into my +chamber saying vnto mee, that they would goe to New Spaine to seeke their +aduenture. Then I warned them to bee well aduised what they meant to doe: +but they foorthwith replyed, that they were fully aduised already, and +that I must graunt them this request. Seeing then (quoth I) that I am +enforced to doe it, I will sende Captaine Vasseur and my Sergeant, which +will make answere and giue mee an accompt of euery thing that shall be +done in this voyage: And to content you, I thinke it good that you take +one man out of euery chamber, that they may accompany Captaine Vasseur and +my Sergeant. Whereupon, blaspheming the Name of God, they answered that +they must goe thither: and that there lacked nothing, but that I should +deliuer them the armour which I had in my custodie, for feare least I +might vse them to their disaduantage (being so villanously abused by +them:) wherein notwithstanding I would not yeeld vnto them. (M474) But +they tooke all by force, and caried it out of my house, yea and after they +had hurt a Gentleman in my chamber, which spake against their doings, they +layd hands on mee, and caried me very sicke, as I was, prisoner into a +shippe which rode at ancker in the middest of the Riuer, wherein I was the +space of fifteene dayes attended vpon with one man onely without +permission for any of my seruants to come to visite mee: from euery one of +whom, as also from the rest that tooke my part, they tooke away their +armour. And they sent mee a passeport to signe, telling me plainely after +I had denied them, that if I made any difficulty, they would all come and +cut my throat in the shippe. Thus was I constrained to signe their +Passe-port, and forthwith to grant them certaine mariners, with Trenchant +an honest and skilfull Pilot. When the barks were finished, they armed +them with the kings munition, with powder, with bullets, and artillery, +asmuch as they needed, and chose one of my Sergeants for their Captain, +named Bertrand Conferrent, and for their Ensigne one named La Croix. They +compelled Captaine Vasseur to deliuer them the flag of his ship. Then +hauing determined so saile vnto a place of the Antilles called Leauguaue, +belonging vnto the king of Spaine, and there to goe on land on Christmasse +night, with intention to enter into the Church while the Masse was sayd +after midnight, and to murder all those that they found there, they set +saile the eight of December. But because the greatest part of them by this +time repented them of their enterprise, and that now they began to fall +into mutinies among themselues, when they came foorth of the mouth of the +riuer, the two barks diuided themselues: the one kept along the coast vnto +Cuba, to double the Cape more easily, and the other went right foorth to +passe athwart the Isles of Lucaya: by reason whereof they met not vntill +sixe weekes after their departure. During which time the barke that tooke +her way along the coast, wherein one of the chiefe conspiratours named De +Orange was Captaine, and Trenchant his Pilot, neere vnto a place called +Archaha, tooke a Brigantine laden with a certaine quantity of Cassaui, +which is a kinde of bread made of rootes, and yet neuerthelesse is very +white, and good to eate, and some little wine, which was not without some +losse of their men: for in one assault that the inhabitants of Archaha +made vpon them, two of their men were taken, to wit, Steuen Gondeau, and +one named Grand Pre, besides two more that were slaine in the place, +namely Nicolas Master and Doublet: yet neuerthelesse they tooke the +Brigantine, wherein they put all their stuffe that was in their owne +Barke, because it was of greater burthen and better of saile then their +owne. Afterward they sailed right vnto the Cape of Santa Maria nere to +Leauguaue, where they went on land to calke and bray their ship which had +a great leake. In this meane while they resolued to saile to Baracou, +which is a village of the Isle of Iamaica: where at their arriuall they +found a carauel of fifty or three score tunnes burden, which they tooke +without any body in it: and after they had made good cheere in the village +the space of fiue or sixe dayes, they embarked themselues in it, leauing +their second ship: then they returned to the Cape of Tiburon, where they +met with a Patach, which they tooke by force after a long conflict. In +this Patach the gouernour of Iamaica was taken, with great store of +riches, aswell of golde and siluer as of merchandise and wine, and many +other things; wherewith our seditious companions not content, determined +to seeke more in their carauell, and their gouernour of Iamaica also. +After they were come to Iamaica, they missed of another carauel which did +saue it selfe in the hauen. The gouernour being fine and subtile, seeing +himselfe brought vnto the place which he desired and where he commanded, +obtained so much by his faire words, that they which had taken him let him +put two little boyes which were taken with him into a little cocke boat, +and send them to his wife into the village, to aduertise her that she +should make prouision of victuals to send vnto him. But in stead of +writing vnto his wife, he spake vnto the boyes secretly that with all +diligence she should send the vessels that were in the hauens neere that +place to succour and rescue him. Which she did so cunningly, that on a +morning about the breake of the day, as our seditious companions were at +the hauens mouth (which reacheth aboue two leagues vp within the land) +there came out of the hauen a malgualire which maketh saile both forward +and backward, and then two great shippes, which might be ech of them of +fourescore or an hundred tunnes a piece, with good store of ordinance, and +well furnished with men: at whose comming our mutinous fellowes were +surprised, being not able to see them when they came, as well because of +the darknesse of the weather, as also by reason of the length of the +hauen, considering also they mistrusted nothing. True it is that fiue or +six and twenty that were in the brigantine discouered these ships when +they were nere them, which seeing themselues pressed for want of leasure +to weagh their anker, cut their cable, and the trumpeter which was in it +aduertised the rest: whereupon the Spanyards seeing themselues descried, +discharged a volley of canon shot against the French men, which they +followed by the space of three leagues, and recouered their own ships: the +brigantine which escaped away, passed in the sight of the Cape des +Aigrettes, and the Cape of S. Anthony situate in the Isle of Cuba, and +from thence passed within the sight of Hauana; but Trenchant their pilot, +and the trumpeter, and certaine other mariners of this brigantine, which +were led away by force in this voyage (as elsewhere we haue declared) +desired nothing more then to returne to me: wherefore these men agreed +together (if peraduenture the wind serued them well) to passe the chanell +of Bahama, while their seditious companions were asleepe: which they did +accomplish with such good successe, that in the morning toward the breake +of the day about the fiue and twentieth of March they arriued vpon the +coast of Florida: where knowing the fault which they had committed, in a +kinde of mockery they counterfaited the Iudges: but they played not this +pranke vntill they had tippled well of the Wine which remained yet in +their prize. One counterfeited the Iudge, another presented my person: one +other after he had heard the matter pleaded, concluded thus: Make you your +causes as good as it pleaseth you, but if when you come to the fort +Caroline the Captaine cause you not to be hanged, I will neuer take him +for an honest man: others thought that my choller being passed, I would +easily forget this matter. Their saile was no sooner descried vpon the +coast, but the king of the place named Patica, dwelling eight leagues +distant from our fort, and being one of our good friends, sent an Indian +to aduertise me that he had descried a shippe vpon the coast, and that he +thought it was one of our nation. (M475) Hereupon the brigantine oppressed +with famine, came to an anker at the mouth of the Riuer of May, when at +the first blush we thought they had bene shippes come from France; which +gaue vs occasion of great ioy: but after I had caused her to be better +viewed, I was aduertised that they were our seditious companions that were +returned. Therefore I sent them word by Captaine Vasseur and my Seargeant, +that they should bring vp their brigantine before the fortresse: which +they promised to doe. Now there was not aboue two leagues distance from +the mouth of the riuer where they cast anker vnto the fortresse. The next +day I sent the same Captaine and Sergeant with thirty souldiers, because I +saw they much delayed their comming. Then they brought them: and because +certaine of them had sworne at their departure, that they would neuer come +againe within the fort, I well pleased they should keep their oth. For +this purpose I waited for them at the riuers mouth, where I made my barks +to be built and commanded my Sergeant to bring the foure chiefe authours +of the mutiny on shore: whom I caused immediatly to be put in fetters: for +my meaning was not to punish the rest, considering that they were +suborned, and because my counsell expressly assembled for this purpose had +concluded that these foure only should die, to serue for an example to the +rest In the same place I made an Oration vnto them in this maner. + +(M476) My friends, you know the cause why our king sent vs vnto this +countrey: you know that he is our naturall Prince, whom we are bound to +obey according to the commandement of God, in such sort, that we ought +neither to spare our goods nor our liues to do those things that concerne +his seruice: ye know, or at least you cannot be ignorant, that besides +this generall and naturall obligation, ye haue this also ioyned thereunto, +that in receiuing of him reasonable pay and wages, you are bound to follow +those whom he hath established ouer you to be your gouernours, and to +command you in his name, hauing for this purpose giuen him an oth of +fidelitie, which you cannot by any meanes reuoke for any faire apparance +which you haue to doe the contrary: for this is reason that seeing you +liue vpon his charges on this condition (this is reason I say) that you +should be faithfull vnto him. Notwithstanding you haue had more regard +vnto your vnbridled affections then vnto vertue, which inuited you, to the +obseruance of your oth, in such sort that being become contemners of all +honesty, you haue passed your bonds, and thought that all things were +lawfull for you. Whereupon it is fallen out that while you thought to +escape the iustice of men, you could not auoid the iudgement of God, which +as a thing by no meanes to be auoided hath led you, and in spight of you +hath made you to arriue in this place, to make you confesse how true his +iudgements are, and that he neuer suffereth so foule a fault to escape +vnpunished. + +(M477) After that I had vsed vnto them these or the like speeches, +following that which wee had agreed vpon in councell, in respect of the +crimes which they had committed, aswel against the kings Maiesty as +against mee which was their Captaine, I commanded that they should be +hanged. Seeing therefore that there was no starting hole, nor meanes at +all to saue themselues from this arrest, they tooke themselues vnto their +prayers: yet one of the foure, thinking to raise a mutiny among my +souldiers, sayd thus vnto them: What, brethem and companions, will you +suffer vs to die so shamefully? And taking the word out of his mouth, I +sayd vnto him, that they were not companions of authours of sedition and +rebels vnto the kings seruice. (M478) Heerevpon the souldiers besought me +not to hang them, but rather let them be shot thorow, and then afterward, +if I thought good, their bodies might be hanged vpon certaine gibbets +along the hauens mouth: which I caused presently to be put into execution. +Loe here what was the end of my mutinous souldiers, without which I had +alwayes liued peaceably, and enioyed the good desire which I had to make +an happy and quiet voyage. But because I haue spoken of nothing but their +accident and aduentures which happened vnto them after their departure, +without making any mention of our fort, I will returne vnto the matters +from which I digressed, to declare that which fell out after their +departure. First, I beganne to consider to the ende I might confirme and +make myselfe more constant in mine affliction, that these murmurers could +not ground their sedition vpon want of victuals: for from the time of our +arriuall, euery souldier dayly vnto this day, and besides vntill the eight +and twentieth day of February, had a loafe of bread weighing two and +twenty ounces. Againe I recounted with my selfe that all new conquest by +sea or by land are ordinarily troubled with rebellions, which are easie to +be raised, as well in respect of the distance of place, as in respect of +the hope that the souldiers haue to make their profit, as we may be well +informed both by ancient histories and also by the troubles which lately +happened vnto Christopher Columbus, after his first discouery, to Francis +Pizarro, and Diego de Almagro in Peru, and to Fernando Cortes. An hundred +thousand other things came vnto my minde, to incourage and confirme me. My +Lieutenant Ortigny, and my Sergeant of my band came to seeke me in the +ship, where I was prisoner, and caried me from thence in a barke assoone +as our rebels were departed. (M479) After I was come vnto the fort I +caused all my company that remained, to be assembled in the midst of the +place before the Corps de garde, and declared vnto them the faults which +they that had forsaken vs had committed, praying them to beare them in +memory, to beare witnesse thereof when need should require. Foorthwith I +ordained new Captaines to command the troups; and prescribed them an +order, according whereunto they were to gouerne themselues from thence +forward, and to enter into their watch: for the greatest part of the +souldiers, of whom I had the best opinion, were gone away with them. My +declaration ended, they promised mee all with one accord to obey mee most +humbly, and to doe whatsoeuer I should command them, though it were to die +at my feet for the Kings seruice; wherein assuredly they neuer after +failed: so that I dare say, after the departure of my mutinous companions +I was as well obeyed as euer was Captaine in place where he commanded. The +next day after my returne vnto the fort, I assembled my men together +againe, to declare vnto them that our fort was not yet finished, and that +it was needfull that all of vs should put thereto our helping hands, to +assure our selues against the Indians: wherein hauing willingly agreed +vnto mee, they raised it all with turfes from the gate vnto the riuer +which is on the West side. (M480) This done, I set my Carpenters on worke +to make another barke of the same bignesse that the others were of: I +commanded the Sawyers that they should prepare plancks, the Smithes to +prepare yron and nailes, and certaine others to make coales: so that the +barke was finished in eighteene dayes. Afterward I made another lesser +then the first, the better to discouer vp the riuer. In this meane space +the Indians visited me, and brought me dayly certaine presents, as: Fish, +Deere, Turki-cocks, Leopards, little Beares, and other things according to +the place of their habitation. I recompensed them with certaine Hatchets, +Kniues, Beads of glasse, Combes, and Looking-glasses. Two Indians came +vnto me one day to salute me on the behalfe of their King, whose name was +Marracou, dwelling from the place of our fort some forty leagues toward +the South, and tolde mee that there was one in the house of King Onathaqua +which was called Barbu or the bearded man, and in the house of King +Mathiaca another man whose name they knew not, which was not of their +nation: whereupon I conceiued that these might be some Christians. +Wherefore I sent to all the kings my neighbours to pray them, that if +there were any Christian dwelling in their countreys, they would finde +meanes that he might be brought vnto mee, and that I would make them +double recompense. They which loue rewards, tooke so much paine, that the +two men, whereof we haue spoken, were brought vnto the fort vnto me. +(M481) They were naked, wearing their haire long vnto their hammes as the +Sauages vse to do, and were Spanyards borne, yet so well accustomed to the +fashion of the countrey, that at the first sight they found our maner of +apparell strange; After that I had questioned of certaine matters with +them, I caused them to be apparelled, and to cut their haire; which they +would not loose, but lapped it vp in a linnen cloth, saying that they +would cary it into their countrey to be a testimony of the misery that +they had indured in the Indies. In the haire of one of them was found a +little gold hidden, to the value of fiue and twenty crownes, which he gaue +vnto me. And examining them of the places where they had bene, and how +they came thither, they (M482) answered me that fifteene yeeres past, +three shippes, in one of which they were, were cast away ouer against a +place named Calos vpon the Flats which are called The Martyres, and that +the king of Calos recouered the greatest part of the riches which were in +the sayd shippes, trauelling in such sort that the greatest part of the +people was saued, and many women; among which number there were three or +foure women maried, remaining there yet, and their children also, with +this king of Calos. I desired to learne what this king was. They answered +me, that he was the goodliest and the tallest Indian of the countrey, a +mighty man, a warrier, and hauing many subiects vnder his obedience. They +tolde me moreouer, that he had great store of golde and siluer, so farre +foorth that in a certaine village he had a pit full thereof, which was at +the least as high as a man, and as large as a tunne: all which wealth the +Spanyards fully perswaded themselues that they could cause me to recouer, +if I were able to march thither with an hundred shot, besides that which I +might get of the common people of the countrey, which had also great store +thereof. (M483) They further also aduertised me, that the women going to +dance, did weare about their girdles plates of golde as broad as a sawcer, +and in such number that the weight did hinder them to dance at their ease; +and that the men ware the like also. The greatest part of these riches was +had, as they sayd, out of the Spanish shippes, which commonly were cast +away in this straight; and the rest by the traffique which this king of +Calos had with the other kings of the countrey: Finally, that he was had +in great reuerence of his subiects; and that hee made them beleeue that +his sorceries and charmes were the causes that made the earth bring foorth +her fruit: and that hee might the easier perswade them that it was so, he +retired himselfe once or twise a yeere to a certaine house, accompanied +with two or three of his most familiar friends, where hee vsed certaine +inchantments; and if any man intruded himselfe to goe to see what they did +in this place, the king immediatly caused him to be put to death. +Moreouer, they tolde me, that euery yeere in the time of haruest, this +Sauage king sacrificed one man, which was kept expresly for this purpose, +and taken out of the number of the Spanyards which by tempest were cast +away vpon that coast. (M484) One of these two declared vnto me, that hee +had serued him a long time for a (M485) messenger; and that oftentimes by +his commandement he had visited a king named Oathcaqua, distant from Calos +foure or fiue dayes iourney, which alwayes remained his faithfull friend: +but that in the midway there was an Island situate in a great lake of +fresh water named Sarrope, about fiue leagues in bignesse, abounding with +many sorts of fruits, specially in Dates, which growe on the Palme trees, +whereof they make a woonderfull traffique; yet not so great as a kinde of +root, whereof they make a kinde of meale, so good to make bread of, that +it is vnpossible to eate better, and that for fifteene leagues about, all +the countrey is fed therewith: which is the cause that the inhabitants of +the Isle gaine of their neighbours great wealth and profit: for they will +not depart with this root without they be well payed for it. Besides that, +they are taken for the most warlike men of all that countrey, as they made +good proofe when the king of Calos, hauing made alliance with Oathcaqua, +was depriued of Oathcaquaes daughter, which he had promised to him in +mariage. (M486) He tolde me the whole matter in this sort: As Oathcaqua +well accompanied with his people caried one of his daughters, exceeding +beautifull, according to the colour of the countrey, vnto king Calos, to +giue her vnto him for his wife, the inhabitants of this Isle aduertised of +the matter, layed an ambush for him in a place where he should passe, and +so behaued themselues that Oathcaqua was discomfited, the betrothed yoong +spouse taken, and all the damosels that accompanied her: which they caried +vnto their Isle; which thing in all the Indians countrey they esteeme to +be the greatest victory: for afterward they marry these virgins, and loue +them aboue all measure. The Spanyard that made this relation, tolde mee +that after this defeat he went to dwell with Oathcaqua, and had bene with +him full eight yeeres, euen vntill the time that he was sent vnto me. The +place of Calos is situate vpon a riuer which is beyond the Cape of +Florida, forty or fifty leagues towards the Southwest: and the dwelling of +Othcaqua is on this side the Cape toward the North, in a place which we +call in the Chart Cannaueral, which is in 28 degrees. + +About the fiue and twentieth of Ianuary Paracoussy Satourioua my neighbour +sent me certaine presents by two of his subiects, to perswade me to ioyne +with him, and to make warre vpon Ouae Vtina; which was my friend: and +further besought me to retire certaine of my men which were with Vtina; +for whom if it had not beene, he had oftentimes set vpon him, and defeited +him. He besought me heerein by diuers other kings his allies, which for +three weekes or a moneths space sent messengers vnto mee to this end and +purpose: but I would not grant vnto them that they should make warre vpon +him; yea rather contrariwise I endeaured to make them friends; wherein +they condescended vnto mee, so farre foorth that they were content to +allow of any thing that I would set downe: (M487) wherevpon the two +Spanyards which of long time knew well the nature of the Indians, warned +me that in any case I should not trust vnto them, because that when they +shewed good countenance and the best cheere vnto men, then was the time +that they would surprise and betray them; and that of their nature they +were the greatest traitours and most deepe dissemblers of the world. +Besides I neuer trusted them but vpon good ground, as one that had +discouered a thousand of their crafts and subtilties, aswell by experience +as by reading of the histories of late yeres. Our two barks were not so +soone finished, but I sent Captaine Vasseur to discouer along the coast +lying toward the North, and commanded him to saile vnto a riuer, the king +whereof was called Audusta, which was lord of that place, where those of +the yere 1562 inhabited. I sent him two sutes of apparell, with certaine +hatchets, kniues, and other small trifles, the better to insinuate my +selfe into his friendship. And the better to win him, I sent in the barke +with captaine Vasseur a souldier called Aimon, which was one of them which +returned home in the first voyage, hoping that king Audusta might remember +him. (M488) But before they were imbarked I commanded them to make inquiry +what was become of another called Rouffi, which remained alone in those +parts, when Nicholas Masson and those of the first voyage imbarked +themselues to returne into France. They vnderstood at their arriuall +there, that a barke passing that way had caried away the same souldier: +and afterward I knew for a certainty that they were Spaniards which had +caried him to Hauana. (M489) The king Audusta sent me backe my barke full +of mill, with a certaine quantity of beanes, two stags, some skinnes +painted after their maner, and certaine pearles of small value, because +they were burnt: and sent me word that if I would dwel in his quarters, he +would giue me a great countrey: and that after he had gathered his mill, +he would spare me as much as I would haue. In the meane while there came +vnto our fort a flocke of stocke-doues in so great number that for the +space of seuen weeks together, that euery day wee killed with harquebush +shot two hundred in the woods about our fort.(121) After that Captaine +Vasseur was returned, I caused the two barks to be furnished againe with +souldiers and mariners, and sent them to cary a present from me vnto the +widow of king Hiocaia, whose dwelling was distant from our fort about +twelue leagues Northward. (M490) She courteously receiued our men; sent me +backe my barks full of mill and acornes with certaine baskets full of the +leaues of Cassine, wherewith they make their drinke. And the place where +this widow dwelleth is the most plentifull of mill that is in all the +coast, and the most pleasant. (M491) It is thought that the queene is the +most beautifull of all the Indians, and of whom they make most account: +yea, and her subjects honour her so much, that almost continually they +beare her on their shoulders, and will not suffer her to go on foot. +Within a few dayes after the returne of my barks, she sent to visit me by +her Hiatiqui, which is as much to say, as her interpreter. (M492) Now +while I thought I was furnished with victuals vntill the time that our +ships might come out of France (for feare of keeping my people idle) I +sent my two barks to discouer along the riuer, and vp toward the head +thereof, which went so far vp that they were thirty leagues good beyond a +place named Mathiaqua, and there they discovered the entrance of a lake, +vpon the one side whereof no land can be seene, according to the report of +the Indians, which had oftentimes climed on the highest trees in the +countrey to see land, and notwithstanding could not discerne any: which +was the cause that my men went no further, but returned backe; and in +comming home went to see the Island of Edelona, situated in the midst of +the riuer, as faire a place as any that may be seene thorow the world: for +in the space of some three leagues, that it may conteine in length and +bredth, a man may see an exceeding rich countrey, and maruellously +peopled. At the comming out of the village of Edelano to go vnto the +riuers side a man must passe thorow an alley about three hundred paces +long and fifty paces broad: on both sides wherof great tres are planted, +the boughes whereof are tied together like an arch, and meet together so +artificially that a man would thinke it were an arbour made of purpose, as +faire I say, as any in all christendome, although it be altogether +natural. Our men departing from this place rowed to Eneguape, then to +Chilily, from thence to Patica, and lastly they came vnto Coya: where +leauing their barks in a little creeke of the riuer with men to guard +them, they went to visit Vtina, which receiued them very courteously: and +when they departed from his house, he intreated them so earnestly, that +sixe of my men remained with him: of which number there was one gentleman, +named Groutald, which after he had abode there about two moneths, and +taken great paines to discouer the countrey, with another which I had left +a great while there to that intent, came vnto me to the fort, and tolde me +that he neuer saw a fairer countrey. Among other things, he reported vnto +me that he had seene a place named Hostaqua, and that the king thereof was +so mighty, that he was able to bring three or foure thousand Sauages to +the field; with whom if I would ioyne and enter into league, we might be +able to reduce all the rest of the inhabitants vnto our obedience: besides +that this king knew the passages vnto the mountaine of Apalatci, which the +French men desired so greatly to atteine vnto, and where the enemy of +Hostaqua made his abode; which was easie to be subdued, if so be wee would +enter into league together. The king sent me a plate of a minerall that +came out of this mountaine, out of the foot whereof there runneth a +streame of golde or copper, as the Sauages thinke, out of which they dig +vp the sand with an hollow and drie cane of reed vntill the cane be full; +afterward they shake it, and finde that there are many small graines of +copper and siluer among this sand: which giueth them to vnderstand, that +some rich mine must needs be in the mountaine. And because the mountaine +was not past fiue or sixe dayes iourney from our fort, lying toward the +Northwest, I determined assoone as our supply should come out of France, +to remooue our habitation vnto some riuer more toward the North, that I +might be nerer therevnto. One of my souldiers whose name was Peter Gamby, +which had remained a long space before in this countrey to learne the +languages and traffique with the Indians, at the last came to the village +of Edelano, where hauing gotten together a certaine quantitie of golde and +siluer, and purposing to returne vnto me, he prayed the king of the +village to lend him a canoa (which is a vessell made of one whole piece of +wood, which the Indians vse to fish withal, and to row vpon the riuers) +which this lord of Edelano granted him. But being greedy of the riches +which he had, he commanded two Indians, which he had charged to conduct +him in the canoa, to murder him and bring him the merchandise and the gold +which he had. Which the two traitours villanously executed: for they +knockt him on the head with an hatchet, as he was blowing of the fire in +the canoa to see the fish. (M493) The Paracoussy Vtina sent certeine dayes +afterward, to pray me to lend him a dozen or fifteene of my shot, to +inuade his enemy Potanou, and sent me word, that this enemy once +vanquished, he would make me passage, yea, and would conduct me vnto the +mountaines in such sort, that no man, should be able to hinder me. Then I +assembled my men to demand their aduice, as I was woont to do in all mine +enterprises. (M494) The greater part was of opinion, that I should do well +to send succour vnto this Paracoussy, because it would be hard for me to +discouer any further vp into the countrey without his helpe: and that the +Spanyards when they were imployed in their conquests, did alwayes enter +into alliance with some one king to ruine another. Notwithstanding, +because I did alwayes mistrust the Indians, and that the more after the +last aduertisement that the Spanyards had giuen me, I doubted lest the +small number which Vtina demanded might incurre some danger; wherefore I +sent him thirty shot vnder the charge of my Lieutenant Ottigny, which +stayed not aboue two dayes with Vtina, while he prepared victuals for his +voyage, which ordinarily and according to the custome of the countrey are +caried by women and yoong boyes, and by hermaphrodites. (M495) Vtina +setting forward with three hundred of his subiects, hauing ech of them +their bowe and quiuer full of arrowes, caused our thirty shot to be placed +in the foreward, and made them march all the day, vntill that the night +approching, and hauing not gone past halfe the way, they were inforced to +lie all night in the woods, nere a great lake, and there to incampe +themselues: they separated themselues by sixe and sixe, making ech of them +a fire about the place where their king lay, for whose guard they ordeined +a certeine number of those archers, in whom he put most confidence. +Assoone as day was come, the campe of the Indians marched within three +leagues of Potanou: there king Vtina requested my Lieutenant to grant him +foure or fiue of his men to go and discouer the countrey; which departed +immediatly, and had not gone farre, but they perceiued vpon a lake, +distant about three leagues from the village of Potanou, three Indians +which fished in a canoa. Now the custome is that when they fish in this +lake, they haue alwayes a company of watchmen, armed with bowes and +arrowes to guard the fishers. Our men being hereof aduertised by those of +the company, durst not passe any further, for feare of falling into some +ambush: wherefore they returned towards Vtina, which suddenly sent them +backe with a greater company to surprise the fishers before they might +retire and aduertise their king Potanou of the comming of his enemies. +Which they could not execute so politikely, but that two of them escaped; +the third also did the best he could to saue himselfe by swimming, in +which meane while he was stayed with shot of arrowes, and they drew him +starke dead vnto the banks side, where our Indians flayed off the skinne +of his head, cut off both his armes in the high way, reseruing his haire +for the triumph, which their king hoped to make for the defeat of his +enemy. (M496) Vtina, fearing least Potanou aduertised by the fishers which +were escaped, should put himselfe in armes to withstand him valiantly, +asked counsell of his Iawa, which is asmuch to say in their language as +his Magician, whether it were best to goe any further. (M497) Then this +Magician made certeine signes, hidious and fearefull to beholde, and vsed +certeine words: which, being ended, he sayd vnto his king, that it was not +best to passe any further, and that Potanou accompanied with two thousand +Indians at the least stayed in such and such a place for him, to bidde him +battell: and besides this, that all the sayd Indians were furnished with +cords to binde the prisoners which they made full account to take. + +This relation caused Vtina to be vnwilling to passe any further: whereupon +my Lieutenant being as angry as euer he might be, because hee had taken so +great paines without doing of any thing of account, sayd vnto him, that +hee would neuer thinke well of him nor of his people, if hee would not +hazzard himselfe: and that if he would not doe it, at the least, that he +would giue him a guide to conduct him and his small company to the place +where the enemies were encamped. (M498) Heereupon Vtina was ashamed, and +seeing the good affection of Monsieur de Ottigny determined to go forward: +and he failed not to finde his enemies in the very place which the +Magician had named: where the skirmish beganne, which lasted three long +houres; wherein without doubt Vtina had beene defeated, vnlesse our +harquebusiers had not borne the burthen and brunt of all the battell, and +slaine a great number of the souldiers of Potanou, vpon which occasion +they were put to flight. Wherewithall Vtina being content for the present, +caused his people to retire and returne homeward to the great +discontentment of Monsieur de Ottigny, which desired nothing more, then to +pursue his victorie. (M499) After he was come home to his house he sent +messengers to eighteene or twentie villages of other kings his vassals, +and summoned them to be present at the feasts and dances which he purposed +to celebrate because of his victorie. In the meane while Monsieur de +Ottigny refreshed himselfe for two dayes: and then taking his leaue of the +Paracoussi, and leauing him twelue of his men to see that Potamou, +bethinking himselfe of his late losse, should not come to burne the houses +of Vtina, he set forward on his way to come vnto me vnto our Fort, where +he vp and told me how euery thing had passed: and withall that he had +promised the twelue souldiers, that he would come backe againe to fetch +them. Then the kings my neighbours all enemies to Vtina, being aduertised +of the returne of my Lieutenant, came to visite me with presents and to +enquire how things had passed, praying me all to receiue them into my +fauour, and to become enemie to Vtina, which notwithstanding I would not +grant them for many reasons that mooued me. + +(M500) The Indians are wont to leaue their houses and to retire themselues +into the woods the space of three moneths, to wit Ianuary, February, and +March: during which time by no meanes a man can see one Indian. For when +they goe on hunting, they make little cottages in the woods, whereunto +they retire themselues, liuing vpon that which they take in hunting. This +was the cause that during this time, we could get no victuals by their +meanes: and had it not beene that I had made good (M501) prouision +thereof, while my men had store, vntill the end of Aprill (which was the +time when at the vttermost, we hoped to haue had succour out of France) I +should haue beene greatly amazed. This hope was the cause that the +souldiers tooke no great care to looke well vnto their victuals, although +I deuided equally among them that which I could get abroad in the +countrey, without reseruing vnto my selfe any more then the least souldier +of al the company. The moneth of May approching and no manner of succour +come out of France, we fell into extreme want of victuals, constrained to +eate the rootes of the earth and certaine sorrell which we found in the +fields. For although the Sauages were returned by this time vnto their +villages, yet they succoured vs with nothing but certaine fish, without +which assuredly wee had perished with famine. Besides they had giuen vs +before the greatest part of their maiz and of their beanes for our +marchandise. (M502) This famine held vs from the beginning of May vntill +the middest of Iune. During which time the poore souldiers and +handicraftsmen became as feeble as might be, and being not able to worke +did nothing but goe one after nothing in Centinel vnto the clift of an +hill, situate very neere vnto the Fort, to see if they might discouer any +French ship. In fine being frustrated of their hope, they assembled +altogether, and came to beseech me to take some order that they might +returne into France, considering that if we let passe the season to +embarke our selues, we were neuer like to see our countrey, where it could +not be chosen but that some troubles were fallen out, seeing they had +broken their promise made vnto vs, and that no succour was come from +thence. Thereupon it was consulted and resolued by all the company, that +the barke Breton should be trimmed vp, whereof Captaine Vasseur had +charge. But because the ship was not bigge enough to receiue vs all, some +thought good to build the Brigandine two deckes higher, which our mutinous +souldiers had brought backe, and that 25 men should hazard themselues to +passe therein into France. The rest being better aduised said that it +should be farre better to build a faire ship vpon the keele of the Galiote +which I had caused to be made, promising to labour couragiously therupon. +Then I enquired of my shipwrights to knowe in what space they could make +this shippe readie. They assured the whole company that being furnished +with all things necessarie they would make it readie by the 8. of August. +Immediatly I disposed of the time to worke vpon it, I gaue charge to +Monsieur de Ottigny my Lieutenant to cause timber necessary for the +finishing of both the vessels to be brought, and to Monsieur de Arlac my +Standart-bearer to goe with a barke a league off from the Fort to cut +downe trees fit to make plankes, and to cause the sawiers which he carried +with him to saw them: and to my Sergeant of the company to cause fifteene +or sixteene men to labour in making coales: and to Master Hance keeper of +the Artillery, and to the gunner to gather store of rosen to bray the +vessels: wherein he vsed such diligence, that in lesse then 3 weekes he +gathered 2 hogs-heads of the same together. There remained now but the +principal, which was to recouer victuals to sustaine vs while our worke +endured: which I vndertooke to doe with the rest of my company and the +Mariners of the ship. To this end I embarked my selfe making vp the +thirtieth in my great barke, to make a voyage of forty or fifty leagues, +hauing with vs no prouision at all of victuals: whereby it may easily he +gathered how simply those of our Fort were prouided. True it is that +certaine souldiers being better husbandes then the rest, and hauing made +some prouision of mast, solde a little measure thereof for fifteene and +twentie sous vnto their companions. During our voyage we liued of nothing +else but raspices, of a certaine round graine little and blacke, and of +the rootes of palmitos which we got by the riuer sides: wherein after we +had sayled a long time in vaine, I was constrained to returne to the Fort: +where the souldiers beginning to be wearie of working, because of the +extreme famine which did consume them, assembled themselues and declared +vnto me, that seeing we could get no victuals of the Indians, it was +expedient for the sauing of their liues, to seaze vpon the person of one +of the Kings of the Countrey: assuring themselues that one being taken, +the subiects would not suffer our men to want victuals. I made them +answere that this enterprise was not rashly to be attempted: But that wee +ought to haue good regarde vnto the consequence that might insue thereof. +Hereupon they replyed vnto me, that seeing the time was past of our +succour from France, and that we were resolued to abandon the Countrie, +that there was no danger to constraine the Sauages to furnish vs with +victuals: which for the present I would not grant vnto them, but promised +them assuredly that I would send to aduertise the Indians that they should +bring me victuals for exchange of marchandise and apparell: which they +also did for the space of certaine daies, during which they brought of +their mast and of their fish: (M503) which these Indians being traiterous +and mischieuous of nature and knowing our exceeding strange famine, sold +vs at so deere a price, for that lesse then nothing they had gotten from +vs all the rest of our marchandise which remained. And which was worse, +fearing to be forced by vs and seeing that they had gotten all from vs, +they came no neere to our Fort then the shot of an Harquebuze. Thither +they brought their fish in their little boats, to which our poore +souldiers were constrained to goe, and oftentimes (as I haue seene) to +giue away the very shirts from their backs to get one fish. If at any time +they shewed vnto the Sauages the excessiue price which they tooke, these +villaines would answere them roughly and churlishly: if thou make so great +account of thy merchandise, eat it, and we will eat our fish: then fell +they out laughing and mocked vs with open throat. Whereupon our souldiers +vtterly impatient, were oftentimes ready to cut them in pieces, and to +make them pay the price of their foolish arrogancy. Notwithstanding +considering the importance hereof, I tooke paines to appease the impatient +souldier: for I would not by any meanes enter into question with the +Sauages, and it suffised me to delay the time. Wherefore I deuised to send +vnto Vtina, to pray him to deale so farre foorth with his subiects, as to +succour me with mast and maiz: which he did very sparingly, sending me 12 +or 15 baskets of mast, and two of pinocks, which are a kind of little +greene fruits which grow among the weedes in the riuer, and are as big as +cheries: yea, and this was not but by giuing of them in exchange twise as +much marchandise and apparell as they were worth. For the subiectes of +Vtina perceiued euidently the necessitie wherein we were, and began to vse +the like speech vnto vs, as the others did: as it is commonly seene that +neede altereth mens affections. While these things were in doing, a +certaine breathing space presented it selfe for Vtina gaue me to +vnderstand that there was a king his subiect whose name was Astina, which +he determined to take prisoner, and to chastise him for his disobedience: +that for this cause if I would giue him aide with a certaine number of my +souldiers, he would bring them to the village of Astina, where there was +meanes to recouer mast and maiz. In the meane season he excused himselfe +vnto me because he had sent me no more maiz, and sent me word that the +little store he had left was scarcely sufficient for his seede-corne. Now +being relieued, as I thought, by the hope which I had of this offer, I +would not faile to send him the men which he had desired of me, which +neuerthelesse were very euill intreated: for he deceiued them, and in +stead of leading them against Astina, he caused them to march against his +other enemies. My Lieutenant which had the charge of this enterprise with +Captaine Vasseur, and my Sergeant was determined to be reuenged of Vtina +and to cut him to pieces and his people: and had it not bene that they +feared to do any thing against my wil, without all doubt they would haue +put their enterprise in execution. Therefore they would not passe any +further without aduertising me thereof. Wherefore being come backe againe +vnto the Fort, angry and pricked deeply to the quicke for being so mocked, +they made their complaints vnto me, declaring vnto me that they were +almost dead for hunger. They told the whole matter to the rest of the +souldiers, which were very glad that they had not entred into that action, +and resolued, assembling themselues againe together, to let me vnderstand +that they did persist in their first deliberation, which was, to punish +the boldnesse and maliciousnes of the Sauages, which they could no longer +endure, and were determined to take one of their kings prisoner: which +thing I was enforced to grant vnto them to the ende to auoid a greater +mischiefe, and the sedition which I foresaw would ensue, if I had made +refusall thereof. For, sayd they, what occasion haue you to deny vs, +considering the necessitie wherein we are, and the small account that they +make of vs. Shall it not be lawfull for vs to punish them for the wrongs +which they doe vnto vs, besides that we know apparently how little they +respect vs? Is not this sufficient although there were no necessitie at +all, since they thus delude vs, and haue broken promise with vs? After I +had therefore resolued with them to seaze vpon the person of Vtina, which +besides that he had giuen vs occasion hereof, was also most able to help +vs to recouer victualls, I departed with fiftie of my best souldiers all +embarked in two Barkes and wee arriued in the dominions of Vtina, distant +from our Fort about 40 or 50 leagues: (M504) then going on shore we drew +towards his village situated 6 leagues from the riuer, where we tooke him +prisoner, howbeit not without great cries and alarmes, and led him away in +our barkes, hauing first signified vnto his Father in law and his chiefe +subiects, that in that I had taken him, it was not for any desire that I +had to doe him any harme, but onely to relieue my necessitie and want of +victuals which oppressed me, and that in case they would helpe me to some, +I would find meanes to set him againe at libertie: that in the meane space +I would retire myselfe into my Barkes (for I feared least they would there +assemble themselues together, and that some mischiefe might thereof insue) +where I would stay for him two dayes to receiue his answere: +notwithstanding that my meaning was not to haue any thing without exchange +of marchandise. This they promised they would doe. And in very deede the +very same euening, his wife accompanied with all the women of the village +came vnto the riuers brinke, and cryed vnto me to enter into the barke, to +see her husband and her sonne, which I held both prisoners. I discovered +the next day fiue or sixe hundred Indian archers, which drew neere vnto +the riuer side, and came to me to signifie vnto me how that during the +absence of their king, their enemie Potanou, being thereof aduertised, was +entred into their village and had set all on fire. They prayed me that I +would succour them: neuerthelesse in the mean while they had one part of +their troope in ambush, with intent to set vpon me if I had come on land, +which was easie for me to discerne. For seeing that I refused so to doe, +they greatly doubted that they were discouered, and sought by all meanes +to remooue out of my minde that euill opinion which I had conceiued of +them. They brought mee therefore fish in their little boates and of their +meale of Mast, they made also of their drinke which they call cassine, +which they sent to Vtina and we. + +Now albeit I had gotten this point of them that I held their king +prisoner, yet neuerthelesse I could not get any great quantity of victuals +for the present: the reason was, because they thought that after I had +drawen victuals from them, I would put their king to death. For they +measured my wil according to their custome whereby they put to death all +the men prisoners that they take in warre. And thus being out of all hope +of his libertie, they assembled themselues in a great house, and hauing +called all the people together they proposed the election of a new king, +at which time the Father in lawe of Vtina set one of the kings young +sonnes vpon the Royall throne: and tooke such paynes that euery man did +him homage by the maior part of the voyces. This election had like to haue +bene the cause of great troubles among them. For there was a kinsman of +the kings neere adioyning, which pretended a Title to the kingdome, and in +deede he had gotten one part of the subiects: notwithstanding this +enterprise could not take effect, forasmuch as by a common consent of the +chiefe, it was consulted and concluded, that the sonne was more meete to +succeede the Father then any other. Now all this while I kept Vtina with +me, to whom I had giuen some of mine apparell to cloth him, as I had +likewise done vnto the sonne. But his subiects which before had an opinion +that I would haue killed him, being aduertised of the good entertainment +which I vsed towards him, sent two men which walked along the riuer, and +came to visite him, and brought vs some victuals. These two men at their +comming were receiued by me with all courtesie, and entertained according +to the victuals which I had. While these things thus passed, there arriued +from all quarters many Sauages of the countries adioyning, which came to +see Vtina, and sought by all meanes to perswade me to put him to death, +offering that if I would do so, they would take order that I should want +no victuals. (M505) There was also a king my neighbour whose name was +Saturioua, a subtile and crafty man and one that shewed by proofe that he +was greatly practised in affaires. This King sent me ordinarily messengers +vnto me, to pray me to deliuer Vtina vnto him: and to win me the more +easily, he sent twise seuen or eight baskets of Maiz or of Mast thinking +by this means to allure me, and to make me come to composition with him: +in the end notwithstanding when he saw he lost his time, he ceased to +visite me with ambassages and victuals: and in the meane while I was not +able with the same store of victuals which I had, so well to proportion +out the trauaile vpon the ships which we built to returne into France, but +that in the end we were constrained to endure extreme famine, which +continued among vs all the moneth of May: (M506) for in this latter +season, neither Maiz nor Beanes, nor Mast was to be found in the villages, +because they had employed all for to sowe their fields, insomuch that we +were constrayned to eate rootes, which the most part of our men punned in +the morters which I had brought with me to beate gunnepowder in, and the +graine which came to vs from other places: some tooke the wood of Esquine, +beate it, and made meale thereof, which they boyled with water, and eate +it: others went with their harquebusies to seeke to kill some foule. Yea +this miserie was so great, that one was found that gathered vp among the +filth of my house, all the fish bones that he could finde, which he dried +and beate into powder to make bread thereof. The effects of this hideous +famine appeared incontinently among vs, for our bones eftsoones beganne to +cleaue so neere vnto the skinne, that the most part of the souldiers had +their skinnes pierced thorow with them in many partes of their bodies: in +such sort that my greatest feare was, least the Indians would rise vp +against vs, considering that it would haue bene very hard for vs to haue +defended our selues in such extreme decay of all our forces, besides the +scarsitie of all victuals, which fayled vs all at once. For the very riuer +had not such plentie of fish as it was wont, and it seemed that the land +and water did fight against vs. (M507) Now as we were thus vpon termes of +dispayre, about the end of the moneth of May and the beginning of Iune, I +was aduertised by certaine Indians that were my neighbours, that in the +high Countrey vp aboue the riuer, there was new Maiz, and that that +countrey was most forward of all. This caused me to take vpon me to go +thither with a certaine number of my men, and I went vp the riuer to a +place called Enecaque: where I met the sister of Vtina in a village where +she made vs very good cheere and sent vs fish. We found that which was +tolde vs to be true: for the maiz was now ripe: but by this good lucke one +shrewde turne happened vnto me. For the most part of my souldiers fell +sicke with eating more of it then their weakened stomackes could digest. +(M508) We had also beene the space of foure dayes since we departed from +our Fort, without eating any thing, sauing little pinockes, and a little +fish, which we got of the fishers which wee met sometimes along the riuer. +And yet this was so little that certaine souldiers eate priuily little +whelpes which were newly whelped. The next day I purposed to go into the +Ile of Edelano to take the king which had caused one of my men to be +slaine, as I haue mentioned before: but being aduertised of my departing +out of my Fort, and of the way which I tooke vp the riuer, he feared that +I went foorth with a purpose to be reuenged of the euill turne which he +played: so that when I came thither I found the houses emptie, for he was +retyred a little before with all his people: and I could not by any meanes +keepe my souldiers, being angry because they had lost one of their +companions, from setting the village on fire. At my departure from thence +I passed backe againe by Enecaque, where I gathered as much maiz as I +could possibly: which with great diligence I conueied to our Fort to +succour my poore men, which I had left in great necessitie. They therefore +seeing me a farre off comming, ranne to that side of the riuer where they +thought I would come on land: for hunger so pinched them to the heart, +that they could not stay vntill the victuals were brought them to the +Fort. And that they well shewed assoone as I was come, and that I had +distributed that little maiz among them, which I had giuen to ech man, +before I came out of the barke: for they eate it before they had taken it +out of the huske. But seeing my selfe in this extreme nede, I tooke paines +day by day to seeke some villages where there was some food. (M509) And as +I trauailed this way and that way, it happened that two of my Carpenters +were killed by the two sonnes of king Emola, and by one whose name was +Casti, as they went on walking to the village called Athore. The cause of +this murder was, because they could not refraine themselues as they walked +through the fields from gathering a little maiz, which as they were doing, +they were taken in the maner: wherof I was presently aduertised by an +Indian which a little before had brought me a present from Nia Cubacani +Queene of a village, and neighbour to our Fort. Vpon receipt of this +aduertisement, I sent my Sergeant with a number of souldiers which found +nothing else but the 2 dead corpses, which they buried and returned +without doing any other exploit, because the inhabitants were fled away, +fearing they should be punished for such a foule fact. As these things +thus passed, and that by this time we had almost driuen out the moneth of +May, two subjects of king Vtina came vnto me with an Hermaphrodite, which +shewed mee that by this time the maiz was ripe in the greatest part of +their quarters. Whereupon Vtina signified vnto me that in case I would +carrie him home to his house, he would take such good order that I should +haue plentie of maiz and beanes: and withall, that the field which he had +caused to be sowen for me, should be reserued to my vse. I consulted with +my men concerning this matter, and found by the aduice of all my company, +that it was best to grant him his request, saying that he had meanes to +succour vs with food sufficient to serue our turnes for our embarkement, +and that therefore I might do well to carry him home. (M510) Wherefore I +caused the two barks forthwith to be made readie, wherein I sailed to +Patica, a place distant from his village 8 or 9 leagues, where I found no +bodie, for they were gotten into the woods, and would not shew themselues, +albeit Vtina shewed himselfe vnto them, for as much as they imagined that +I should be constrained to let him go. But seeing no body to shew +themselues, I was constrained to hazard one of my men which had bene +acquainted with the state of the countrie, to whom I deliuered the young +sonne of Vtina, and commanded him to goe with diligence to the village of +Vtina, vnto his father in law and his wife, to aduertise them that if they +would haue their king againe, they should bring me victuals vnto the side +of the little riuer whither I was gone. At my mans comming euery one made +much of the little childe, neither was there a man that thought not +himselfe well appaide to touch him. His father in law and his wife hearing +of these newes came presently towards our barkes, and brought bread which +they gaue vnto my souldiers, they held me there three dayes, and in the +meane while did all that they could to take me: which presently I +discouered, and therefore stood diligently vpon my gard. Wherefore +perceiuing they could not haue their purpose, and that they were already +discouered, they sent to aduertise me that as yet they could not helpe me +to victuals, and that the corne was not yet ripe. Thus I was constrained +to returne and to carry backe Vtina home, where I had much adoe to saue +him from the rage of my souldiers: which perceiuing the maliciousnes of +the Indians, went about to haue murdered him. Moreouer it seemed they were +content that they had gotten the sonne, and that they cared not greatly +for the father. Now my hope fayling me on this side, I deuised to send my +men to the villages where I thought the maiz was by this time ripe; I went +to diuers places, and continued so doing 15 daies after, when as Vtina +besought me again to send him vnto his village, assuring himselfe that his +subiects would not sticke to giue me victuals: and that in case they +refused so to do, he was content that I should do what I thought good with +him. I vndertooke this voyage the second time, the two barkes furnished as +before. At my comming vnto the little riuer, we found his subiects there, +which failed not to come thither with some quantitie of bread, beanes, and +fish, to giue my souldiers. Neuerthelesse returning againe to (M511) their +former practise they sought all meanes to entrap me, hoping to cry +quittance for the imprisonment of their king if they might haue gotten the +victorie of me. But after that they sawe the small meanes, which they had +to annoy me, they returned to intreaties, and offered that if I would giue +them their king with certaine of my souldiers, they would conduct them +vnto the village, and that the subiects seeing him, would be more willing +to giue vs victuals. Which thing notwithstanding I would not grant vnto +them (mistrusting their subtilitie, which was not so couert,) vntill they +had first giuen me two men in pledge with charge that by the next day they +should bring me victuals. Which thing they granted, and gaue mee two men +which I put in chaines for feare they should escape away, as I knew well +they were instructed to doe. Foure dayes were spent in these conferences, +at the end whereof they declared vnto me, that they could not fully and +wholly performe their promise: and that the vttermost that they could doe +for the present, was to cause ech subiect to bring his burthen of mill. To +conclude, they were content to doe so on condition that I would send them +their two pledges within ten dayes. (M512) As my Lieutenant was ready to +depart, I warned him aboue all things to take heede he fell not into the +Indians hands: because I knew them to be very subtill and craftie to +enterprize and execute any thing to our disaduantage. He departed +therefore with his troope, and came to the small riuer whereinto we were +accustomed to enter to approch as neere as we could vnto the village of +Vtina, being sixe French leagues distant from thence. There he went on +shore, put his men in good array, and drew streight towards the great +house that was the kings, where the chiefe men of the countrey were +assembled, which caused very great store of victuals to be brought now one +and then another, in doing whereof they spent notwithstanding three or +foure dayes: in which meane while they gathered men together, to set vpon +vs in our retreit. They vsed therefore many meanes to holde vs still in +breath. (M513) For one while they demanded their pledges, another while +(seeing my Lieutenant would not yeeld to them, vntill such time as they +had brought the victuals vnto the boats; according to the agreement passed +betwene vs) they signified vnto him that the women and young children were +afraide out of all measure to see fire in their matches so neere their +harquebuses: and that therefore they most earnestly besought them to put +them out, that they might more easily get people ynough to carry the +victuals, and that they for their partes would leaue their bowes and +arrowes, and would be contented that their seruants should carrie them. +This second request was as flatly denied them as the former: For it was an +easie matter to smel out their intention. But while these things were thus +in handling, Vtina by no meanes was to be seene, but hid and kept himselfe +secret in a little house apart, where certaine chosen men of mine went to +see him shewing themselues agreeued with him for the long delayes of his +subiectes: whereunto he answered, that his subiectes were so much incensed +against vs, that by no meanes possible he was able to keepe them in such +obedience as he willingly would haue done, and that he could not hold them +from waging of warre against Monsieur de Ottigny. (M514) That he also +called to minde, that euen while he was prisoner, at what time our men +ledde him into his Countrey to obtaine some victuals, he saw along the +high wayes arrowes stucke vp, at the endes whereof long haires were +fastened, which was a certaine signe of open warre proclaimed, which +arrowes the Captaine also carried with him to the fort. He said further +that in respect of the good will he bare to the Captaine, he forewarned +his Lieutenant that his subiectes were determined to cut downe the trees, +and cause them to fall a thwart the little riuer where the boates were, to +keepe them from departing thence, that they might fight with them at their +ease, and that if it thus fell out, he assured him for his part he would +not be there to meddle in the matter. And that which much more augmented +the suspition of warre was, that as my messengers departed from Vtina, +they heard the voyce of one of my men which during the voyage had alwayes +beene among the Indians, and whom as yet they would neuer render, vntill +they had gotten their pledges home. This poore fellow cryed out amaine +because two Indians would haue carried him into the woods to haue cut his +throat: whereupon he was succoured and deliuered. These admonitions being +well vnderstoode, after ripe deliberation thereof Monsieur de Ottigny +resolued to retire himselfe the seuen and twentieth of Iuly. Wherefore he +set his souldiers in order, and deliuered to ech of them a sacke full of +mill: and afterward hee marched toward his barkes, thinking to preuent the +enterprise of the sauages. There is at the comming forth of the village a +great alley about three or foure hundred paces long, which is couered on +both sides with great trees. My Lieutentent disposed his men in this alley +and set them in such order as they desired to march: for he was well +assured that if there were any ambush, it would be at the comming out of +the trees. Therefore he caused Monsieur de Arlac mine Ensigne to march +some what before with 8 harquebusiers to discouer whether there were any +danger; besides he commanded one of my Sergeants and Corporals to march on +the out side of the alley with foure harquebusiers while he himselfe +conducted the rest of his company through it. (M515) Now as he suspected, +so it fell out: for Monsieur de Arlac met with two or three hundred +Indians at the end of the alley, which saluted him with an infinite number +of their arrowes, and with such furie that it was easie to see with what +desire they sought to charge vs. Howbeit they were so well sustained in +the first assault which mine Ensigne gaue them, that they which fell downe +dead, did somewhat abate the choler of those which remained aliue. This +done my Lieutenant hasted to gaine ground in such sort as I haue already +said. (M516) After he had marched about foure hundred paces, he was +charged afresh with a newe troope of Sauages which were in number about +300, which assayled him before, while the rest of the former set vpon him +behind. This second assault was so valiantly sustained, that I may iustly +say that Monsieur de Ottigny so well discharged his dutie as was possible +for a good Captaine to doe. And so it stood them vpon: for he had to deal +with such kind of men, as knewe well how to fight and to obey their head +which conducted them, and which knewe so well to behaue themselues in this +conflict, as if Ottigny had not preuented their practise, he had beene in +danger to haue beene defeated. (M517) Their maner in this fight was, that +when two hundred had shot, they retyred themselues and gaue place to the +rest that were behind, and all the while had their eye and foote so quicke +and readie, that assoone as euer they saw the harquebuze laide to the +cheeke, so soone were they on the ground, and eftsoone vp to answere with +their bowes and to flie their way, if by chance they perceiued we went +about to take them: for there is nothing that they feare so much, because +of our swords and daggers. This conflict continued and lasted from nine of +the clocke in the morning, vntill the night departed them. And if Ottigny +had not bethought himselfe to cause his men to breake the arrowes which +they found in their way, and so to depriue the Sauages of the meanes to +beginne againe, without all doubt he should haue had very much to do: for +by this mean they lacked arrowes, and so were constrayned to retire +themselues. During the time of the conflict they cryed and made signes +that they were the Captaines and Lieutenants friends: and that they fought +for none other cause but to be reuenged on the Souldiers, which were their +mortall enemies. My Lieutenant being come vnto his boates tooke a reuiew +of his companie, and found two men wanting which were killed, of whom the +one was called Iames Sale, and the others name was Mesurer. He found +moreouer 22 of them wounded, which with much adoe he caused to be brought +vnto the boates. All the mill that he found among his company came but to +two mens burdens, which he deuided equally among them. For assoone as the +conflict began, euery man was constrained to leaue his sacke to put his +hand to his weapon. In this meane while I remained at the Forte, and +caused euery man diligently to trauell, hoping that my Lieutenant would +bring vs victuals. But seeing the time consume away, I began to suspect +the truth of that which fell out, whereof I was assured immediately after +at their returne. Seeing therefore mine hope frustrate on that side, I +made my prayer vnto God, and thanked him of his grace which hee had shewed +vnto my poore souldiers which were escaped: Afterward I thought vpon newe +meanes to obtaine victuals, aswell for our returne into France, as to +driue out the time vntill our embarking. I was aduertised by certaine of +our company, which vsually went on hunting into the woods and through the +villages, that in the village Sarauahi situated on the other side of the +riuer, and two leagues distant from the Forte, and in the village Emoloa +there were fields wherein the mill was very forward, and that there was +thereof in those partes in great abundance. Wherefore I caused my boates +to be made ready, and sent my Sergeant thither with certaine Souldiers +which vsed such diligence, that wee had great store of mill. I sent also +to the Riuer which the Sauages call Iracana, named by Captaine Ribault the +Riuer of Somme, where Captaine Vasseur and my Sergeant arriued with two +boates and their ordinary furniture, and found there a great assembly of +the Lords of the Countrey, among whome was Athore the sonne of Satourioua, +Apalou, and Tacadocorou, which were there assembled to make merrie: +because in this place are the fairest maids and women of the countrey. +(M518) Captaine Vasseur in my name gaue certaine small trifles to all the +Lords, to the Queene, to the maids and women of the villages. Wherevpon +the boates were foorthwith laden with mill, after they had made our men as +good cheere as they could deuise. The Queene sent me two small Mats so +artificially wrought as it was vnpossible to make better. Nowe finding +ourselues by this meane sufficiently furnished with victuals, we beganne +each of vs in his place, to trauaile and vse such diligence, as the desire +to see our natiue countrey might mooue vs. But because two of our +Carpenters were slaine by the Indians (as heretofore I mentioned) Iohn de +Hais, master Carpenter, a man very worthy of his vocation, repaired vnto +me and tolde me that by reasom of want of men hee was not able to make me +vp the ship against the time that he had promised me: which speech caused +a mutinie among the souldiers that very hardly he escaped killing: howbeit +I appeased them as well as I could, and determined to worke no more from +thencefoorth vpon the shippe, but to content our selues to repaire the +Brigandine which I had. (M519) So we began to beate downe all the houses +that were without the Fort, and caused coles to be made of the timber +thereof: likewise the souldiers beate downe the pallisade which was toward +the waters side, neither was I euer able to keepe them from doing it. I +had also determined to beat downe the Fort before my departure and to set +it on fire, for feare least some new-come guest should haue enioyed and +possessed it. In the meane while there was none of vs to whom it was not +an extreme griefe to leaue a countrey, wherein wee had endured so great +trauailes and necessities, to discouer that which we must forsake through +our owne countreymens deficit. (M520) For if wee had bene succoured in +time and place, and according to the promise that was made vnto vs, the +warre which was betweene vs and Vtina, had not fallen out, neither should +wee haue had occasion to offend the Indians, which with all paines in the +world I entertained in good amitie, aswell with merchandise and apparel, +as with promise of greater matters, and with whom I so behaued myself, +that (M521) although sometimes I was constrained to take victuals in some +few villages, yet I lost not the alliance of eight Kings and Lords my +neighbours, which continually succoured and ayded me with whatsoeuer they +were able to afford. (M522) Yea this was the principall scope of all my +purposes, to winne and entertaine them, knowing how greatly their amitie +might aduance our enterprise, and principally while I discouered the +commodities of the countrey, and sought to strengthen my selfe therein. +(M523) I leaue it to your cogitation to thinke how neere it went to our +hearts, to leaue a place abounding in riches (as we were throughly +enformed thereof) in comming whereunto, and doing seruice vnto our Prince, +we left our owne countrey, wiues, children, parents, and friends, and +passed the perils of the sea and were therein arriued, as in a plentifull +treasure of all our hearts desire. (M524) As ech of vs were much tormented +in minde with these or such like cogitations, the third of August I +descried foure sayles in the sea, as I walked vpon a little hill, whereof +I was exceeding well apaid: I sent immediately one of them which were with +me to aduertise those of the Fort thereof, which were so glad of those +newes, that one would haue thought them to bee out of their wittes to see +them laugh and leape for ioy. After these ships had cast anker, we +descried that they sent one of their ship boates to land: whereupon I +caused one of mine to be armed with diligence to send to meete them, and +to know who they were. In the meane while, fearing lest they were +Spaniards, I set my souldiers in order and in readinesse, attending the +returne of Captaine Vasseur and my Lieutenant, which were gone to meete +them, which brought me word that they were Englishmen: (M525) and in +trueth they had in their company one whose name was Martine Atinas of +Diepe, which at that time was in their seruice, which on the behalfe of +Master Iohn Hawkins their Generall came to request mee that I would suffer +them to take fresh water, whereof they stood in great neede, signifying +vnto me that they had bene aboue fifteene dayes on the coast to get some. +Hee brought vnto mee from the Generall two flagons of wine, and bread made +of wheate: which greatly refreshed me, forasmuch as for seuen moneths +space I neuer tasted a drop of wine: neuerthelesse it was all diuided +among the greatest part of my souldiers. This Martine Atinas had guided +the Englishmen vnto our coast, wherewith he was acquainted: for in the +yeere 1562 he came thither with me, and therefore the Generall sent him to +me. Therefore after I had granted his request, hee signified the same vnto +the Generall, which the next day following caused one of his small shippes +to enter into the riuer, and came to see me in a great shipboate, +accompanied with gentlemen honourably apparelled, yet vnarmed. (M526) He +sent for great store of bread and wine, to distribute thereof to euery +one: On my part I made him the best cheere I could possibly, and caused +certaine sheepe and poultry to be killed, which vntill this present I had +carefully preserued hoping store the countrey withall. For notwithstanding +all the necessities and sicknesse that happened vnto me, I would not +suffer so much as one chicken to be killed: by which meanes in a short +time I had gathered together aboue an hundred pullets. (M527) Nowe three +dayes passed, while the English General remained with me, during which +time the Indians came in from all parts to see him, and asked me whether +he were my brother: I tolde him he was so, and signified vnto them, that +he was come to see me and ayde me with so great store of victuals, that +from thence forward I should haue no neede to take any thing of them. The +bruite hereof incontinently was spread ouer all the countrey, in such sort +as Ambassadours came vnto me from all parts, which on the behalfe of the +kings their masters desired to make alliance with me: and euen they, which +before sought to make warre against me, came to offer their friendship and +seruice vnto me: Whereupon I receiued them and gratified them with +certaine presents. The General immediately vnderstood the desire and +vrgent occasion which I had to returne into France: whereupon he offred to +transport me and all my company home: whereunto notwithstanding I would +not agree, being in doubt vpon what occasion he made so large an offer. +(M528) For I knewe not how the case stood betweene the French and the +English: and although hee promised me on his faith to put mee on land in +France, before hee would touch in England, yet I stood in doubt least he +would attempt somewhat in Florida in the name of his mistresse. Wherfore I +flatly refused his offer: whereupon there arose a great mutinie among my +souldiers, which sayd that I sought to destroy them all, and that the +Brigandine, wherof I spake before, was not sufficient to transport them, +considering the season of the yeere wherein wee were. The bruite and +mutiny increased more and more: for after that the Generall was returned +to his ships, he told certaine gentlemen and souldiers which went to see +him, partly to make good cheere with him, hee declared, I say vnto them, +that he greatly doubted that hardly we should be able to passe safely in +those vessels which we had: and that in case we should enterprise the +same, we should no doubt be in great ieopardy: notwithstanding, if I were +so contented, he would transport part of my men in his ships, and that he +would leaue me a small ship to transport the rest. The souldiers were no +sooner come home, but they signified the offer vnto their companions, +which incontinently consented together that in case I would not accept the +same, they would embarke themselues with him and forsake mee, so that he +would receiue them according to his promise. They therefore assembled +themselues all together and came to seeke me in my chamber, and signified +vnto me their intention, wherunto I promised to answere within one houre +after. In which meane space I gathered together the principall members of +my company, which after I had broken the matter with them, answered me all +with one voyce, that I ought not to refuse this offer, nor contemne the +occasion which presented it selfe, and that they could not thinke euill of +it in France, if being forsaken, as we were, we aided our selues with such +means as God had sent vs. (M529) After sundry debatings of this matter, in +conclusion I gaue mine aduise, that wee ought to deliuer him the price of +the ship which he was to leaue vs, and that for my part I was content to +giue him the best of my stuffe, and the siluer which I had gathered in the +countrey. (M530) Wherupon notwithstanding it was determined that I should +keepe the siluer, for feare lest the Queene of England seeing the same, +should the rather bee encouraged to set footing there, as before she had +desired: that it was far better to carie it into France to giue +encouragement vnto our Princes not to leaue off an enterprise of so great +importance for our commonwealth, and that seeing wee were resolued to +depart, it was farre better to giue him our Artillerie, which otherwise we +should be constrained to leaue behinde vs, or to hide it in the ground by +reason of the weakenesse of our men, being not able to embarke the same. +This point being thus concluded and resolued on, I went myselfe vnto the +English Generall, accompanied with my Lieutenant, and Captaine Vasseur, +Captaine Verdier, and Trenchant the Pilot, and my Sergeant, all men of +experience in such affaires, and knowing sufficiently how to driue such a +bargaine. We therefore tooke a view of the ship which the Generall would +sell, whom we drew to such reason, that he was content to stand to mine +owne mens iudgement, who esteemed it to be worth seuen hundreth crownes, +whereof we agreed very friendly. Wherefore I deliuered him in earnest of +the summe, two bastards, two mynions, one thousand of iron, and one +thousand of powder. (M531) This bargain thus made, he considered the +necessity wherin we were, hauing for all our sustenance but mill and +water: wherupon being mooued with pitie, he offered to relieue me with 20 +barels of meale, sixe pipes of beanes, one hogshead of salt, and a hundred +of waxe to make candels. Moreouer forasmuch as he sawe my souldiers goe +bare foote, he offered me besides fifty paires of shoes, which I accepted +and agreed of a price with him, and gaue him a bill of mine hand for the +same, for which vntill this present I am indebted to him. He did more then +this: for particularly he bestowed vpon my selfe a great iarre of oyle, a +iarre of viniger, a barrell of Oliues, and a great quantitie of Rice, and +a barrell of white Biscuit. Besides he gaue diuers presents to the +principall Officers of my company according to their qualities: so that I +may say that we receiued as many courtesies of the Generall as it were +possible to receiue of any man liuing. Wherein doubtlesse he hath wonne +the reputation of a good and charitable man, deseruing to be esteemed +asmuch of vs all as if he had saued all our liues. (M532) Incontinent +after his departure I spared no paine to hasten my men to make biscuits of +the meale which he had left me, and to hoope my caske to take in water +needfull for the voyage. A man may well thinke what diligence we vsed, in +respect of the great desire we had to depart, wherein we continued so well +that the fifteenth day of August the biscuit, the greatest part of our +water, and all the souldiers stuffe was brought aboord: so that from that +day forward wee did nothing but stay for good windes to driue vs to +France: which had freed vs from an infinite number of mischiefes which +afterward we suffred, if they had come as we desired: but it was not Gods +good pleasure, as shall appeare hereafter. Being thus in readinesse to set +sayle, we bethought ourselues that it would doe well to bring certaine men +and women of the countrey into France, to the ende that if this voyage +should be taken in hand againe they might declare vnto their Kings the +greatnesse of our King, the excellencie of our Princes, the goodnesse of +our Countrey, and the maner of liuing of the Frenchmen: and that they +might also learne our language, to serue our turnes thereby in time to +come. Wherein I tooke so good order, that I found meanes to bring away +with me the goodliest persons of all the countrey, if our intentions had +succeeded as I hoped they would haue done. In the mean season the Kings my +neighbours came often to see and visite me: which, that after they +vnderstoode that I would returne into France, demaunded of mee whether I +meant to returne againe or no, and whether it should be in short time. I +signified vnto them that within tenne Moones (so they call their Moneths) +I would visite them againe with such force, that I would be able to make +them Conquerors ouer all their enemies. They prayed me that I would leaue +them my house, that I would forbid my souldiers to beate downe the Fort +and their lodgings, and that I would leaue them a boate to ayde them +withall in their warre against their enemies. Which I made as though I +would grant vnto them, to the ende I might alwaies remaine their friend +vntil my last departure. + + + +The third voyage of the Frenshmen made by Captaine Iohn Ribault vnto +Florida. + + +(M533) As I was thus occupied in these conferences, the winde and the tide +serued well to set sayle, which was the eight and twentieth of August, at +which instant Captaine Vasseur which commanded in one of my shippes, and +Captaine Verdier which was chiefe in the other, now ready to goe foorth, +began to descry certaine sayles at sea, whereof they aduertised mee with +diligence: whereupon I appointed to arme foorth a boate in good order to +goe and discrie and know what they were. I sent also to the Centinels, +which I caused to be kept on a little knappe, to cause certaine men to +climbe vp to the toppe of the highest trees the better to discouer them. +(M534) They descried the great boate of the shippes, which as yet they +could not perfectly discerne, which as farre as they could iudge, seemed +to chase my boate, which by this time was passed the barre of the riuer: +so that we could not possibly iudge whether they were enemies which would +haue caried her away with them: for it was too great a ken to iudge the +trueth thereof. Vpon this doubt I put my men in order and in such array as +though they had beene enemies: and in deede I had great occasion to +mistrust the same: for my boate came vnto their ship about two of the +clocke in the afternoone, and sent me no newes all that day long to put me +out of doubt who they should be. The next day in the morning about eight +or nine of the clocke I saw seuen boates (among which mine owne was one) +full of souldiers enter into the riuer, hauing euery man his harquebuze +and morion on his head, which marched all in battaile along the cliffes +where my centinels were, to whom they would make no kind of answere, +notwithstanding all the demandes that were made vnto them, insomuch as one +of my souldiers was constrained to bestowe a shot at them without doing +hurt neuerthelesse to any of them, by reason of the distance betweene him +and the boates. The report hereof being made vnto me, I placed each of my +men in his quarter, with full deliberation to defend ourselues, if they +had beene enemies, as in trueth we thought them to haue bene: likewise I +caused two small field pieces which I had left me, to be trimmed in such +sort, as if in approching to the Fort they had not cryed that it was +Captaine Ribault, I had not failed to haue discharged the same vpon them. +(M535) Afterward I vnderstoode that the cause why they entred in this +maner, proceeded of the false reports which had bene made vnto mine Lord +Admirall by those which were returned into France in the first shippes. +For they had put in his head, that I played the Lord and the King, and +that I would hardly suffer that any other saue my selfe should enter in +thither to gouerne there. (M536) Thus we see how the good name of the most +honest is oftentimes assayled by such, as hauing no meanes to win +themselues credit by vertuous and laudable endeauours, thinke by debasing +of other mens vertues to augment the feeble force of their faint courage, +which neuerthelesse is one of the most notable dangers which may happen in +a commonwealth, and chiefly among men of warre which are placed in +gouernment. For it is very hard yea vtterly vnpossible, that in gouerning +of a company of men gathered out of diuers places and sundry Nations, and +namely such as we know them to be in our warres, it is, I say, vnpossible +but there will be alwayes some of euil conditions and hard to be ruled, +which easily conceiue an hatred against him, which by admonitions and +light corrections endeauoureth to reduce them to the discipline of warre. +For they seeke nothing else, but for a small occasion grounded vpon a +light pretext to sound into the eares of great lords that which +mischieuously they haue contriued against those, whose execution of +iustice is odious vnto them. And albeit I will not place my selfe in the +ranke of great and renowmed Captaines, such as liued in times passed, yet +we may iudge by their examples, how hurtfull backbiters haue beene vnto +commonwealths. (M537) I will onely take Alcibiades for witnesse in the +commonwealth of the Athenians, which by this meane was cast into +banishment, whereupon his citizens felt the smart of an infinite number of +mischiefes: insomuch as in the end they were constrained to call him home +againe, and acknowledge at length the fault they had committed in +forgetting his good seruices, and rather beleeuing a false report, then +hauing had regard vnto so many of his notable exploits which in former +time hee had atchieued. But that I loose not my selfe in digressing so +farre in this my iustification, I will returne againe to my first course. +(M538) Being therfore aduertised that it was Captaine Ribault, I went +foorth of the Fort to goe to meete him, and to do him all the honour I +could by any means, I caused him to be welcommed with the artillery, and a +gentle volley of my shot whereunto he answered with his. Afterward being +come on shore and receiued honourably with ioy, I brought him to my +lodging, reioycing not a little because that in his company I knew a good +number of my friends, which I intreated in the best sorte that I was able, +with such victuall as I could get in the countrey, and that small store +which I had left me, with that which I had of the English Generall. +Howbeit I marueiled not a little when as all of them with one voyce began +to vtter vnto me these or the like speeches. My Captaine, we praise God +that we haue found you aliue, and chiefly because we know that the reports +which haue beene made of you are false. These speeches mooued me in such +sort, that I would needes out of hand know more, mistrusting some euill. +Wherefore hauing accosted Captaine Iohn Ribault, and going both of vs +aside together out of the Fort, he signified vnto me the charge which he +had, praying mee not to returne into France, but to stay with him my selfe +and my company, and assured me that he would make it well thought of at +home. Whereupon I replyed that out of this place I would do him all +seruice: that for the present I could not nor ought not to accept this +offer, since he was come for no other intent then to occupie the place +which I before possessed, that I could haue no credite to be there +commanded: that my friends would neuer like of it, and that he would +hardly giue me that counsaile, if in good earnest I should demand his +aduise therein. He made me answere that he would not command me, that we +should be companions, and that he would build another fortresse and that +he would leaue mine owne vnto me. This notwithstanding I fully aduertised +him that I could not receiue a greater comfort then the newes which he +brought me to returne into France: and farther that though I should stay +there, yet it must needes be that one of vs both was to command with title +of the Kings Lieutenant, that this could not well agree together: that I +had rather haue it cast in my teeth to be the poorest begger in the world, +then to be commanded in that place, where I had endured so much to +inhabite and plant there, if it were not by some great Lord or Knight of +the order: and that in these respects I prayed him very hartily to deliuer +me the letters which my Lord Admirall had written vnto me, which he +performed. + +The contents of those letters were these. + +(M539) Captaine Laudonniere, because some of them which are returned from +Florida speake indifferently of the Countrey, the King desireth your +presence, to the end, that according to your tryall, he may resolue to +bestow great cost thereon, or wholly to leaue it: and therefore I send +Captaine Iohn Ribault to bee gouernour there, to whom you shall deliuer +whatsoeuer you haue in charge, and informe him of all things you haue +discouered. And in a postscript of the letter was thus written. Thinke +not, that whereas I send for you, it is for any euill opinion or mistrust +that I haue of you, but that it is for your good and for your credit, and +assure your selfe that during my life you shall find me your good Master. + +CHASTILLON. + +(M540) Now after I had long discoursed with Captaine Ribault, Captaine la +Grange accosted mee, and told me of an infinite number of false reports +which had bene made of mee to my great hinderance: and among other things +he informed me, that my Lord Admirall tooke it very euill that I had +caried a woman with mee: likewise that some bodie had tolde him that I +went about to counterfeit the King, and to play the tyrant: that I was too +cruell vnto the men that went with mee: that I sought to be aduanced by +other meanes then by my Lord Admirall: and that I had written to many +Lords of the Court, which I ought not to haue done. (M541) Whereunto I +answered, that the woman was a poore chambermayd, which I had taken vp in +an Inne, to ouersee my houshold businesse, to looke to an infinite sort of +diuers beasts, as sheepe and poultrie which I caried ouer with me to store +the countrey withall: that it was not meete to put a man to attend this +businesse: likewise, considering the length of the time that I was to +abide there, mee thought it should not offend any body to take a woman +with me, aswell to help my souldiers in their sickenesses, as in mine +owne, whereinto I fell afterward. And how necessary her seruice was for +vs, ech one at that time might easily perceiue: That all my men thought so +well of her, that at one instant there were sixe or seuen which did demand +her of mee in mariage; as in very deede one of them had her after our +returne. Touching that which was sayd that I playd the King, these reports +were made, because I would not beare with any thing which was against the +duety of my charge, and the Kings seruice. Moreouer, that in such +enterprises it is necessary for a Gouernour to make himselfe knowen and +obeyed, for feare least euery body would become a master, perceiuing +themselues far from greater forces. And that if the tale-tellers called +this rigour, it rather proceeded of their disobedience, then of my nature +lesse subiect to cruelty then they were to rebellion. For the two last +points, that I had not written to any of the Lords of the Court but by the +aduice and commandement of my Lord Admirall, which willed me at my +departure to send part of such things as I should find in the countrey +vnto the Lords of the Counsel: to the end that being mooued by this meane, +they might deale with the Queene mother for the continuance of this +enterprise: that hauing bene so small time in the countrey, continually +hindred with building of fortresses, and vnlading of my ships, I was not +able to come by any newe or rare things to send them, wherupon I thought +it best to content them in the meane while with letters, vntill such time +as I might haue longer space to search out the Countrey, and might recouer +something to sende them: the distribution of which letters I meant not +otherwise but to referre to my Lord Admirals good pleasure: that if the +bearer had forgot himselfe so farre, as that he had broken the couering of +the letters, and presented them himselfe for hope of gaine, it was not my +commandement. And that I neuer honoured noble man so much, nor did to any +man more willing and faithfull seruice then to my Lord Admirall, nor euer +sought aduancement but by his meanes. You see how things passed for this +day. The next day the Indians came in from all parts, to know what people +these were: to whom I signified that this was he which in the yeere 1562. +arriued in this countrey, and erected the pillar which stood at the entrie +of the riuer. Some of them knew him: for in trueth he was easie to be +knowen by reason of the great bearde which he ware. He receiued many +presents of them which were of the villages neere adioyning, among whom +there were some that he had not yet forgotten. (M542) The kings Homoloa, +Serauahi, Alimacani, Malica, and Casti came to visit him and welcome him +with diuers gifts according to their manner. I aduertised them that hee +was sent thither by the king of France, to remaine there in my roome, and +that I was sent for. (M543) Then they demanded and prayed him, if it might +stand with his good pleasure, to cause the merchandise that hee had +brought with him to be deliuered them, and that in fewe daies they would +bring him to the mountaines of Apalatcy, whither they promised to conduct +me, and that in case they performed not their promise, that they were +content to be cut in pieces. In those mountaines, as they sayd, is found +redde copper, which they call in their language Sieroa Pira, which is as +much to say as red mettall, whereof I had a piece, which at the very +instant I shewed to Captaine Ribault, which caused his gold-finer to make +an assay thereof, which reported vnto him that it was perfect golde. About +the time of these conferences, commings and goings of the kings of the +countrey, being weakened with my former trauaile, and fallen into a +melancholy vpon the false reports that had bene made of mee, I fell into a +great continuall feuer, which held me eight or nine dayes: during which +time Captaine Ribault caused his victuals to be brought on shore, and +bestowed the most part thereof in the house which my lieutenant had built +about two hundred pases without the forte: (M544) which hee did to the +ende they might bee the better defended from the weather, and likewise to +the intent that the meale might bee neerer to the bake-house, which I had +built of purpose in that place, the better to auoide the danger of the +fire, as I sayd before. But loe howe oftentimes misfortune doth search and +pursue vs, euen then when we thinke to be at rest! loe see what happened +after that captaine Ribault had brought vp three of his small ships into +the riuer, which was the fourth of September! Sixe great Spanish ship +arriued in the rode, where foure of our greatest ships remained, which +cast anker, assuring our men of good amity. (M545) They asked how the +chiefe captaines of the enterprise did, and called them by all their names +and surnames. I report me to you if it could be otherwise but these men +before they went out of Spaine must needs be informed of the enterprise +and of those that were to execute the same. About the breake of day they +began to make toward our men: but our men which trusted them neuer a +deale, had hoysed their sayles by night, being ready to cut the strings +that tyed them. Wherefore perceiuing that this making toward our men of +the Spaniards was not to doe them any pleasure and knowing wel that their +furniture was too smal to make head against them, because that the most +part of their men were on shore, they cut their cables, left their ankers, +and set saile. The Spaniards seeing themselues discouered, lent them +certaine volleis of their great ordinance, made saile after them, and +chased them all day long: but our men got way of them still toward the +sea. And the Spaniards seeing they could not reach them, by reason that +the French ships were better of saile then theirs, and also because they +would not leaue the coast, turned backe and went on shore in the riuer +Seloy,(122) which we cal the riuer of Dolphines 8 or 10 leagues distant +from the place where we were. Our men therefore finding themselues better +of saile then they, followed them to discry what they did, which after +they had done, they returned vnto the riuer of May, where Captaine Ribault +hauing descried them, embarked himselfe in a great boat to know what newes +they had. Being at the entry of the riuer he met with the boat of captaine +Cousets ship, wherin there was a good number of men which made relation +vnto him of all the Spaniards doings: and how the great ship named the +Trinitie had kept the sea, and that she was not returned with them. They +told him moreouer that they had seen three Spanish ships enter into the +riuer of Dolphins, and the other three remained in the rode; farther that +they had put their souldiers, their victuals and munition on land. After +he vnderstood these newes hee returned to the fortresse, and came to my +chamber where I was sick, and there in the presence of the Captaines, La +Grange, S. Marie, Ottigny, Visty, Yonuille, and other gentlemen, he +propounded, that it was necessary for the kings seruice, to embarke +himselfe with all his forces, and with the three ships that were in the +rode to seeke the Spanish fleete, whereupon he asked our aduise. (M546) I +first replyed, and shewed vnto him the consequence of such an enterprise, +aduertising him among other things of the perilous flawes of windes that +rise on this coast, and that if it chanced that hee were driuen from the +shore, it would be very hard for him to recouer it againe, that in the +meane while they which should stay in the Forte should be in feare and +danger. The Captaines, Saint Marie, and La Grange declared vnto him +farther, that they thought it not good to put any such enterprise in +execution, that it was farre better to keepe the land, and do their best +indeuour to fortifie themselues: And that after that the Trinitie (which +was the principall ship) were returned, there would be much more +likelyhood to enterprise this voyage. (M547) This notwithstanding he +resolued to vndertake it, and that which more is, after he vnderstoode by +king Emola, one of our neighbours which arriued vpon the handling of these +matters, that the Spaniards in great numbers were gone on shore, which had +taken possession of the houses of Seloy, in the most part whereof they had +placed their Negroes, which they had brought to labour, and also lodged +themselues and had cast diuers trenches about them. Thus for the +considerations which he had, and doubting (as he might well doe) that the +Spanyards would encampe themselues there to molest vs, and in the ende to +chase vs out of the Countrey, he resolued and continued in his embarkment, +caused a Proclamation to be made, that all souldiers that were vnder his +charge should presently with their weapons embarke them, and that his two +ensignes should march: which was put in execution. He came into my +chamber, and prayed me to lend him my Lieuteuant, mine ensigne, and my +sergeant, and to let all my good souldiers, which I had, goe with him, +which I denied him, because my selfe being sicke, there was no man to stay +in the fort. Thereupon he answered me that I needed not to doubt at all, +and that he would returne the morrow after, that in the meane space +Monsieur de Lys should stay behind to looke to all things. Then I shewed +vnto him that he was chiefe in this Countrey, and that I for my part had +no further authoritie: that therefore hee would take good aduisement what +hee did, for feare least some inconuenience might ensue. Then he tolde me +that he could doe no lesse, then to continue this enterprise, and that in +the letter which he had receiued from my Lord Admirall, there was a +postcript, which hee shewed mee written in these wordes: (M548) Captain +Iohn Ribault, as I was enclosing vp this letter, I receiued a certaine +aduice, that Don Pedro Melendes departeth from Spaine to goe to the coast +of Newe France: see you that you suffer him not to encroch vpon you, no +more then he would that you should encroch vpon him. You see (quoth he) +the charge that I haue, and I leaue it vnto your selfe to iudge, if you +could do any lesse in this case, considering the certaine aduertisement +that we haue, that they are already on lande, and will inuade vs. This +stopped my mouth. Thus therefore confirmed or rather obstinate in this +enterprise, and hauing regard rather vnto his particular opinion then vnto +the aduertisements which I had giuen him, and the inconueniences of the +time whereof I had forewarned him, he embarked himselfe the eight of +September, and tooke mine ensigne and eight and thirtie of my men away +with him. I report mee to those that know what warres meane, if when an +ensigne marcheth, any souldier that hath any courage in him will stay +behind, to forsake his ensigne: Thus no man of commandement stayed behind +with mee, for ech one followed him as chiefe, in whose name straight after +his arriuall, all cries and proclamations were made. Captaine Grange, +which liked not very well of this enterprise, was vnto the tenth of the +month with mee and would not haue gone aborde, if it had not beene for the +instant requestes that Captaine Ribault made vnto him, which staid two +dayes in the rode attending vntill La Grange was come vnto him; who being +come abord, they set sayle altogether, and from that time forward I neuer +saw them more. (M549) The very day that he departed, which was the tenth +of September, there arose so great a tempest accompanied with such +stormes, that the Indians themselues assured me that it was the worst +weather that euer was seene on the coast: wherevpon two or three dayes +after, fearing least our shippes might be in some distresse, I sent for +Monsieur du Lys vnto mee, to take order to assemble the rest of our people +to declare vnto them what neede wee had to fortifie our selues: which was +done accordingly: and then I gaue them to vnderstand the necessity and +inconueniences whereinto we were like to fall, aswel by the absence of our +ships, as by the neernesse of the Spanyards, at whose hand we could looke +for no lesse then an open and sufficient proclaimed war, seeing that they +had taken land and fortified themselues so neere vnto us. And if any +misfortune were fallen vnto our men which were at Sea, we ought to make a +full account with ourselves that wee were to endure many great miseries, +being in so small number, and so many wayes afflicted as we were. (M550) +Thus euery one promised mee to take paines: and therefore considering that +their proportion of victuals was small and that so continuing, they would +not be able to doe any great worke, I augmented their allowance: although +that after the arriuall of Captaine Ribault my portion of victuals was +allotted vnto mee as vnto a common souldier, neither was I able to giue so +much as part of a bottell of wine to any man which deserued it: for I was +so farre from hauing meanes to doe so, that the Captaine himselfe tooke +two of my boates, wherein the rest of the meale was, which was left me of +the biscuits which I caused to bee made to returne into France: so that if +I should say that I receiued more fauour at the handes of the Englishmen, +beeing Strangers vnto mee, I should say but a trueth. (M551) Wee beganne +therefore to fortifie our selues and to repaire that which was broken +downe, principally toward the water side, where I caused three score foote +of trees to be planted, to repaire the Palissado with the plankes which I +caused to bee taken of the ship that I had builded. Neuerthelesse +notwithstanding all our diligence and truaille, wee were neuer able fully +to repaire it by reason of the stormes which commonly did vs so great +annoy, that wee could not finish our inclosure. (M552) Perceiuing myselfe +in such extremitie I tooke a muster of the men, which captaine Ribault had +left me, to see if there were any that wanted weapon: I found nine or +tenne whereof not past two or three had euer drawen sword out of the +scabbard, as I thinke. Let them which haue bene bold to say, that I had +men ynough left me, so that I had meanes to defend my selfe, giue eare a +little vnto mee, and if they haue eyes in their heads, let them see what +men I had. Of the nine there were foure but yong striplings, which serued +Captaine Ribault and kept his dogs, the fift was a cooke: among those that +were without the fort, and which were of the foresaid company of Captaine +Ribault, there was a Carpenter of threescore yeeres olde, one a Beere +brewer, one olde Crosse-bowe maker, two Shoomakers, and foure or fiue men +that had their wiues, a player on the virginals, two seruants of Monsieur +du Lys, one of Monsieur de Beauhaire, one of Monsieur de la Grange, and +about fourescore and fiue or sixe in all, counting aswel Lackeys as women +and children. Behold the goodly troupe so sufficient to defend themselues, +and so couragious as they haue esteemed them to be: and for my part I +leaue it to others consideration to imagine whether Captaine Ribault +woulde haue left them with me to haue borrowed my men, if they had bene +such. Those that were left me of mine owne company were about sixeteene or +seuenteene that coulde beare armes, and all of them poore and leane: the +rest were sicke and maymed in the conflict which my Lieutenant had against +Vtina. This view being taken, wee set our watches, whereof wee made two +Centinels, that the Souldiers might haue one night free. Then wee +bethought our selues of those which might bee most sufficient, among whome +wee choose two, one of whom was named Monsieur Saint Cler, and the other +Monsieur de la Vigne, to whom we deliuered candles and Lanterns to goe +round about the fort to viewe the watch because of the foule and foggie +weather. I deliuered them also a sandglasse or clocke, that the Centinels +might not be troubled more one then another. In the meane while I ceased +not, for all the foule weather nor my sickenesse which I had, to ouersee +the Corps de garde. The night betweene the nineteenth and twentieth of +September La Vigne kept watch with his company, wherein he vsed all +endeauour, although it rayned without ceasing. When the day was therefore +come, and that he saw that it rayned still worse then it did before, hee +pitied the Centinels so too moyled and wette: and thinking the Spanyardes +would not haue come in such a strange time, hee let them depart, and to +say the trueth, he went himselfe vnto his lodging. (M553) In the meane +while one which had something to doe without the fort, and my trumpet +which went vp vnto the rampart perceiued a troupe of Spanyards which came +downe from a little knappe. Where incontinently they beganne to cry +alarme, and the Trumpetter also: Which assoone as euer I vnderstoode, +foorthwith I issued out, with my target and sword in my hand, and gatte +mee into the middest of the Court, where I beganne to crie vpon my +souldiers. Some of them which were of the forward sort went toward the +breach, which was on the Southside, and where the munitions of the +artillerie lay, where they were repulsed and slaine. (M554) By the selfe +same place two ensignes entred, which immediately were planted on the +wals. Two other ensignes also entred on the other side toward the West, +where there was another breach: and those which were lodged in this +quarter, and which shewed themselues, were likewise defeated. (M555) And +as I went to succour them which were defending the breach on the southwest +side, I encountred by chance a great company of Spaniards, which had +already repulsed our men and were now entred, which draue me backe vnto +the court of the fort: being there I espied with them one called Francis +Iean, which was one of the Mariners which stole away my barks, and had +guided and conducted the Spanyards thither. Assoone as he sawe me, he +began to say, This is the Captaine. (M556) This troupe was led by a +captaine whose name as I thinke, was Don Pedro Melendes: these made +certain pushes at me with their pikes which lighted on my target. But +perceiuing that I was not able to withstand so great a company, and that +the court was already wonne, and their ensignes planted on the ramparts, +and that I had neuer a man about me, sauing one only whose name was +Bartholomew, I entred into the yard of my lodging, into which they +followed me, and had it not bene for a tent that was set vp, I had bin +taken: but the Spanyards which followed me were occupied in cutting of the +cordes of the tent, and in the meane while I saued my selfe by the (M557) +breach which was on the West side neere vnto my Lieutenants lodging, and +gate away into the woods: where I found certain of my men which were +escaped, of which number there were three or foure which were sore hurt. +Then spake I thus vnto them: Sirs, since it hath pleased God that this +mischance is happened vnto vs, we must needs take the paines to get ouer +the marshes vnto the ships which are at the mouth of the riuer. Some would +needs go to a little village which was in the woods, the rest followed me +through the reedes in the water, where being able to go no farther by +reason of my sicknesse which I had, I sent two of my men which were with +me, which could swim well, vnto the ships to aduertise them of that which +had happened, and to send them word to come and helpe me. They were not +able that day to get vnto the ships to certifie them thereof: so I was +constrained to stand in the water vp to the shoulders all that night long, +with one of my men which would neuer forsake me. (M558) The next morning, +being scarcely able to draw my breath any more, I betooke me to my prayers +with the souldier which was with mee, whose name was Iohn du Chemin: for I +felt my selfe so feeble, that I was afraid I should die suddenly: and in +trueth if he had not imbraced me in both his armes, and so held me vp, it +had not bene possible to saue me. After we had made an ende of our +prayers, I heard a voyce, which in my iudgement was one of theirs which I +had sent, which were ouer against the ships and called for the ship boat, +which was so in deed: and because those of the ships had vnderstanding of +the taking of the fort by one called Iohn de Hais, master Carpenter, which +fled vnto them in a shallop; (M559) they had set saile to run along the +coast to see if they might saue any: wherin doubtlesse they did very well +their endeuour. They went straight to the place where the two men were +which I had sent, and which called them. Assoone as they had receiued them +in and vnderstood where I was, they came and found me in a pitifull case. +Fiue or sixe of them tooke me and caried me into the shallop: for I was +not able by any means to go on foot. After I was brought into the shallop +some of the Mariners took their clothes from their backs to lend them me, +and would haue caried me presently to their ships to giue me a little Aqua +vitae. Howbeit I would not goe thither, vntill I had first gone with the +boat along the reeds, to seeke out the poore soules which were scattered +abroad, where we gathered vp 18 or 20 of them. (M560) The last that I took +in was the nephew of the Treasurer le Beau. After we were al come to the +ship, I comforted them as well as I could, and sent back the boat againe +with speed to see if they could find yet any more. (M561) Vpon her +returne, the Mariners told mee how that captaine Iames Ribault which was +in his ship about two muskets shot distant from the fort, had parled with +the Spaniards, and that Francis Iean came vnto his ship, where hee staied +a long space, whereat they greatly marueiled, considering hee was the +cause of this enterprise, how hee would let him escape. After I was come +into the ship called the Greyhound, captaine Iames Ribault and captaine +Valuot came to see me: and there we concluded to returne into France. Now +forasmuch as I found the ship vnfurnished of Captaine, Pilot, Master, and +Masters-mate, I gaue aduice to choose out one of the most able men among +al the mariners, and that by their owne voices. I tooke also sixe men out +of another small ship, which we had sunke because it wanted ballast and +could not be saued. Thus I increased the furniture of the ship wherein I +was myselfe embarked, and made one, which had bene Masters mate in the +foresaid small ship, Master of mine. (M562) And because I lacked a pilot, +I prayed Iames Ribault that he would grant me one of the foure men that he +had in his ship, which I should name vnto him, to serue me for a Pilot: he +promised to giue me them, which neuerthelesse he did not at the instant +when wee were ready to depart, notwithstanding all the speech I vsed to +him, in declaring that it was for the kings seruice. I was constrained to +leaue the ship behind me which I had bought of the English Captaine, +because I wanted men to bring her away. For captaine Iames Ribault had +taken away her furniture: I tooke away her ordinance onely, which was all +dismounted, whereof I gaue nine pieces to Iames Ribault to carie into +France, the other fiue I put into my ship. (M563) The 25 of September wee +set sailes to returne into France, and Captain Iames Ribault and I kept +company all that day and the next vntill three or foure a clock in the +afternoone: but because his ship was better at bowline then ours, he kept +him to the wind and left vs the same day. Thus we continued our voyage, +wherein we had marueilous flawes of wind. And about the eight and +twentieth of October in the morning at the breake of the day we discried +the Isle of Flores, one of the Acores, where immediatly vpon our +approching to the load we had a mightie gust of wind which came from the +Northeast, which caused vs to beare against it foure dayes: afterward the +wind came South and Southeast, and was alwayes variable. In all the time +of our passage we had none other foode sauing biscuit and water. About the +tenth or eleuenth of Nouember, after we had sailed a long time, and +supposing we were not farre from land, I caused my men to sound, where +they found threescore and fifteene fathoms water, whereat we all reioyced, +and praised God because we had sailed so prosperously. Immediatly after I +caused them to set saile again and so we continued our way: but forasmuch +as we had borne too much toward the Northeast we entred into Saint Georges +chanell, a place much feared of all Sailers, and whereas many ships are +cast away: But it was a faire gift of God that we entred in it when the +weather was cleare. We sailed all the night, supposing wee had bene shot +into the narrow Sea betweene England and France, and by the next day to +reach Diepe, but we were deceiued of our longing: for about two or three +of the clocke after midnight as I walked vpon the hatches, I descried land +round about me, whereat wee were astonied. Immediatly I caused them to +strike saile and sound: we found we had not vnder vs past 8 fathoms of +water, whereupon I commanded them to stay till breake of day: which being +come, and seeing my Mariners told me that they knew not this land, I +commanded them to approch vnto it. Being neere thereunto I made them cast +anker, and sent the boat on shore to vnderstand in what Countrey we were. +Word was brought me that we were in Wales a prouince of England. I went +incontinently on land, where after I had taken the ayre, a sicknesse tooke +mee whereof I thought I should haue dyed. (M564) In the meane while I +caused the ship to be brought into the bay of a small towne called +Swansey, where I found merchants of S. Malo, which lent me money, +wherewith I made certaine apparel for my selfe and part of my company that +was with me: and because there were no victuals in the ship, I bought two +Oxen, and salted them, and a tunne of Beere which I deliuered into his +hands which had charge of the ship, praying him to cary it into France, +which he promised me to doe: (M565) for mine owne part I purposed with my +men to passe by land, and after I had taken leaue of my Mariners, I +departed from Swansey, and came that night with my company to a place +called Morgan, where the Lord of the place, vnderstanding what I was, +stayed me with him for the space of 6 or 7 dayes, and at my departure +mooued with pitie to see me goe on foot, especially being so weake as I +was, gaue me a litle Hackny. (M566) Thus I passed on my iourney first to +Bristoll and then to London, where I went to doe my duty to Monsieur de +Foix, which for the present was the kings Ambassador, and holpe me with +mony in my necessitie. From thence I passed to Caleis, afterward to Paris, +where I was informed that the king was gone to Molins to soiourne there: +incontinently, and with all the hast I could possibly make, I gate me +thither with part of my company. (M567) Thus briefly you see the discourse +of all that happened in New France since the time it pleased the kings +Maiesty to send his subiects thither to discouer those parts. The +indifferent and vnpassionate readers may easily weigh the truth of my +doings, and be vpright iudges of the endeuour which I there vsed. For mine +owne part I wil not accuse nor excuse any: it sufficeth mee to haue +followed the trueth of the history, whereof many are able to beare +witnesse, which were there present. (M568) I will plainly say one thing, +That the long delay that Captaine Iohn Ribault vsed in his embarking, and +the 15. daies that he spent in rouing along the coast of Florida, before +he came to our fort Caroline, were the cause of the losse that we +susteined. For he discouered the coast the 14 of August, and spent the +time in going from riuer to riuer, which had bene sufficient for him to +haue discharged his ships in, and for me to haue embarked my selfe to +returne into France. I wote well that al that he did was vpon a good +intent: yet in mine opinion he should haue had more regard vnto his +charge, then to the deuises of his owne braine, which sometimes hee +printed in his head so deeply, that it was very hard to put them out: +which also turned to his vtter vndoing: for hee was no sooner departed +from vs, but a tempest tooke him, which in fine wrackt him vpon the coast, +where all his shippes were cast away, and he with much adoe escaped +drowning, to fall into their hands which cruelly massacred him and all his +company. + + + +The fourth voyage of the Frenchmen into Florida, vnder the conduct of +Captaine Gourgues, in the yeere, 1567. + + +Captaine Gourgues a Gentleman borne in the Countrey neere Bourdeaux +incited with a desire of reuenge, to repaire the honour of his nation, +borowed of his friends and sold part of his owne goods to set forth and +furnish three ships of indifferent burthen with all things necessary, +hauing in them an hundred and fiftie souldiers, and fourescore chosen +Mariners vnder Captaine Cazenoue his lieutenant, and Francis Bourdelois +Master ouer the Mariners. He set forth the 22 of August 1567. And hauing +endured contrary winds and stormes for a season, at length hee arriued and +went on shore in the Isle of Cuba. From thence he passed to the Cape of +Saint Antony at the end of the Ile of Cuba, about two hundred leagues +distant from Florida, where the captaine disclosed vnto them his intention +which hitherto he had concealed from them, praying and exhorting them not +to leaue him being so neere the enemie, so well furnished, and in such a +cause: (M569) which they all sware vnto him, and that with such courage +that they would not stay the full Moone to passe the chanell of Bahama, +but speedily discouered Florida, where the Spanyards saluted them with two +Canon shot from their fort, supposing that they had beene of their nation; +and Gourgues saluted them againe to entertaine them in this errour that +hee might surprise them at more aduantage, yet sailing by them, and making +as though he went to some other place vntil he sailed out of sight of the +place, (M570) so that about euening, hee landed 15 leagues from the fort, +at the mouth of the Riuer Tacatacourou, which the Frenchmen called Seine, +because they thought it to bee like Seine in France. Afterward perceiuing +the shore to bee couered with Sauages with their bowes and arrowes, +(besides the signe of peace and amitie which he made them from his ships) +he sent his Trumpetter, to assure them, that they were come thither for +none other ende but to renew the amitie and ancient league of the French +with them. The Trumpetter did his message so well (by reason he had bene +there before vnder Laudonniere) that he brought backe from king +Satourioua, the greatest of all the other kings, a kidde and other meat to +refresh vs, besides the offer of his friendship and amitie. Afterward they +retired dansing in signe of ioy, to aduertise all the kings Satouriouaes +kinsmen to repaire thither the next day to make a league of amitie with +the Frenchmen. Whereupon in the meane space our generall went about to +sound the chanel of the riuer to bring in his ships, and the better to +traffike and deale with the Sauages, of whom the chief the next day in the +morning presented themselues, namely the great king Satourioua, +Tacatacourou, Halmacanir, Athore, Harpaha, Helmacape, Helicopile, Molloua, +and others his kinsmen and allies, with their accustomed weapons. Then +sent they to intreat the French generall to come on shore, which he caused +his men to do with their swords and harquebusies, which he made them leaue +behind, in token of mutuall assurance, leauing his men but their swords +only, after that the Sauages complaining thereof had left and likewise +sent away their weapons at the request of Gourgues. This done Satourioua +going to meet him, caused him to sit on his right hand in a seat of wood +of lentisque couered with mosse made of purpose like vnto his owne. Then +two of the company pulled vp the brambles and other weeds which were +before them, and after they had made the place very cleane, they all sate +round about them on the ground. (M571) Afterward Gourgues being about to +speake, Satourioua preuented him, declaring at large vnto him the +incredible wrongs, and continuall outrages that all the Sauages, their +wiues and children had receiued of the Spanyards since their comming into +the Countrey and massacring of the Frenchmen, with their continuall desire +if we would assist them throughly to reuenge so shame full a treason, +aswell as their owne priuate griefes, for the firme good will they alwayes +had borne vnto the Frenchmen. Whereupon Gourgues giuing them his faith, +and making a league betweene them and him with an othe gaue them certaine +presents of daggers, kniues, looking glasses, hatchets, rings, belles, and +such other things, trifles vnto vs, but precious vnto these kings: which +moreouer, seeing his great liberality, demanded eche one a shirt of him to +weaire onely on their festiuall dayes, and to be buried in at their death. +Which things after they had receiued, and Satourioua had giuen in +recompense to Captaine Gourgues two chaines of siluer graines which hung +about his necke, and ech of the kings certaine deere skinnes dressed after +their manner, they retired themselues dancing and very iocund, with +promise to keep all things secret, and to bring vnto the sayd place good +companies of their subiects all well armed to be auenged throughly on the +Spanyards. (M572) In the meane space Gourgues very narrowly examined Peter +de Bre borne in Newhauen, which being but a young stripling escaped out of +the fort into the woods while the Spanyards murdered the rest of the +French, and was afterward brought vp with Satourioua, which at that time +bestowed him on our generall, whose aduise stoode him in great steade: +Whereupon he sent to discouer the fort and the estate of the enemies by +certaine of his men, being guided by Olotacara Satouriouaes nephew which +hee had giuen him for this purpose and for assurance of Estampes a +gentleman of Cominges, and others which he sent to descry the state of the +enemies. (M573) Moreouer he gaue him a sonne of his starke naked as all of +them are, and his wife which he loued best of all the rest, of eighteene +yeeres olde, apparelled with the mosse of trees, which for 3 dayes space +were in the ships, vntill our men returned from discrying the state of the +enemie, and the kings had furnished their preparation at their rende-uous. +Their marching being concluded, and the Sauages rende-uous being appointed +them beyond the riuer Salincani, of our men called Somme, they all dranke +with great solemnitie their drinke called Cassine, made of the iuice of +certaine hearbs (as they are wont to do, when they go to any place of +danger,) which hath such force, that it taketh from them hunger and thirst +for 24 houres, and Gourgues was faine to make as though he dranke thereof +for company. Afterward they lift vp their handes and sware all that they +would neuer forsake him. Olotocara followed him with pike in hand. Being +all met at the riuer of Sarauahi, not without great trouble, by reason of +the raine and places full of water which they must needes passe, which +hindred their passage, they were distressed with famine finding nothing by +the way to eat, their bark of prouision being not arriued which was come +unto him from the ships, the ouersight and charge whereof he had left vnto +Burdelois with the rest of the Mariners. (M574) Now he had learned that +the number of the Spanyards were foure hundred strong, diuided into three +forts builded and flanked, and well fortified upon the riuer of May, the +great fort especially begunne by the French, and afterward repaired by +them: vpon the most dangerous and principall landing place whereof, two +leagues lower and neerer towarde the Riuers mouth, they had made two +smaller Forts, which were defended, the riuer passing betweene them, with +sixe score souldiers, good store of artillery and other munition, which +they had in the same. (M575) From Saracary vnto these smal forts was two +leagues space, which he found very painful, because of the bad waies and +continual raines. Afterward he departed from the riuer Catacouru with 10 +shot, to view the first fort, and to assault it the next day in the +morning by the breake of day, which hee could not doe, because of the +foule weather, and darknesse of the night. King Helicopile seeing him out +of quiet in that he had failed of his purpose there, assured him to guide +him a more easie way, though it were further about. Insomuch as leading +him through the woods, he brought him within sight of the fort, where he +discerned one quarter which was but begun to bee entrenched. Thus after he +had sounded the small riuer that falleth downe thereby, hee stayed vntill +ten of the clock in the morning for an ebbe water, that his men might +passe ouer there, vnto a place where he had seene a litle groue between +the riuer and the fort (that he might not be seene to passe and set his +souldiers in array) causing them to fasten their flasks to their Morions, +and to hold vp their swords and kaliuers in their hands, for feare least +the water, which reached vp to their girdles, should not wet them: where +they found such abundance of great oysters, and shels which were so +sharpe, that many had their legs cut with them, and many others lost their +shoes. Notwithstanding assoone as they were passed ouer, with a French +courage they prepared themselues to the assault on the Sunday eue next +after Easter day, in April 1568. (M576) Insomuch that Gourgues to employ +the ardent heat of this good affection, gaue twenty shot to his Lieutenant +Cazenoue, and ten Mariners laden with pots and balles of wild fire to +burne the gate: and then he assaulted the Fort on another side, after he +had made a short speech vnto his men of the strange treasons which the +Spanyards had paid their companions. But being descried as they came +holding downe their heads within two hundred paces from the Fort, the +Gunner being vpon the terrace of the Fort, after he had cried, Arme, Arme, +these be French men, discharged twise vpon them a coluerine, wherein the +Armes of France were grauen, which had bin taken from Laudonniere. But as +he went about (M577) to charge it the third time, Olotocara, which had not +learned to keepe his ranke, or rather moued with rage, lept on the +platforme, and thrust him through the bodie with his pike and slew him. +Whereupon Gourgues aduanced forward, and after he had heard Cazenoue cry, +that the Spaniards which issued out armed at the cry of the alarme, were +fled, hee drew to that part, and so hemmed them in betweene him and his +Lieutenant, that of threescore there escaped not a man, sauing only +fifteene reserued vnto the same death which they had put the French vnto. +The Spanyards of the other fort in the meane while ceased not to play with +their ordinance, which much annoied the assailants: although to answere +them they had by this placed and oftentimes pointed the foure pieces found +in the first Fort. (M578) Whereupon Gourgues being accompanied with +fourescore shot went abord the barke which met him there to good purpose +to passe into the wood neere vnto the Fort, out of which he supposed the +Spanyards would issue to saue themselues thorow the benefit of the woods +in the great fort, which was not past one league distant from the same. +(M579) Afterward the Sauages not staying for the returne of the bark, lept +al into the water holding vp their bowes and arrowes in one hand, and +swimming with the other, so that the Spaniards seeing both the shores +couered with so great a number of men, thought to flee towards the woods: +but being charged by the French, and afterward repulsed by the Sauages, +toward whom they would haue retired, they were sooner then they would +bereft of their liues. (M580) To conclude they al there ended their dayes +sauing 15 of those which were reserued to be executed for the example of +others. Whereupon Captaine Gourgues hauing caused al that he found in the +second fort to be transported vnto the first, where he ment to strengthen +himselfe to take resolution against the great Fort, the state whereof hee +did not vnderstand: in fine a Sergeant of a band one of the prisoners +assured him that they might be there very neere 300 wel furnished vnder a +braue Gouernor, which had fortified there, attending farther succours. +(M581) Thus hauing obtained of him the platforme, the height, the +fortification and passages vnto it, and hauing prepared eight good +lathers, and raised all the Countrey against the Spanyard, that he neither +might haue newes, nor succours, nor retract on any side, he determined to +march forward. (M582) In the meane while the Gouernour sent a Spanyard +disguised like a Sauage to spie out the state of the French. And though he +were discouered by Olotocara, yet he vsed all the cunning he could +possibly to perswade them that he was one of the second fort, out of which +hauing escaped, and seeing none but sauages on euery side, he hoped more +in the Frenchmens then their mercy, vnto whom he came to yeeld himself +disguised like a sauage, for feare lest if he should haue bin knowen, he +should haue bin massacred by those Barbarians: but the spie being brought +face to face with the sergeant of the band, and conuicted to be one of the +great fort, was reserued vntil an other time: after that he had assured +Gourgues that the bruit was that he had 2000 Frenchmen with him for feare +of whom the 200 and threescore Spaniards which remained in the great fort, +were greatly astonied. Whereupon Gourgues being resolued to set vpon them, +while they were thus amazed, and leauing his Standard-bearer and a +Captaine with fifteene shot to keepe the Fort, and the entry of the Riuer, +he caused the Sauages to depart by night to lye in ambush within the woods +on both sides of the riuer, then he departed in the Morning, leading the +Sergeant and the spy fast bound along with him, to shew him that in deede, +which they had only made him vnderstand in paynting. As they marched +Olotocara a resolute Sauage which newer left the Captaine, said vnto him, +that he had serued him faithfully, and done whatsoeuer hee had commaunded +him, that he was assured to dye in the conflict at the great Fort, wherein +neuerthelesse he would not faile, though it were to saue his life: (M583) +but he prayed him to giue that vnto his wife, if hee escaped not, which he +had meant to be tow on him, that shee might bury the same with him, that +thereby hee might be better welcome vnto the village of the soules or +spirits departed. To whom Captaine Gourgues answered, after he had +commended his faithfull valour, the loue toward his wife, and his noble +care of immortall honour, that he desired rather to honour him aliue then +dead, and that by Gods helpe he would bring him home againe with victorie. +After the discouerie of the Fort, the Spaniards were no niggards of their +Canon shotte, nor of two double Coluerines, which being mounted vpon a +Bulwarke, commaunded all along the Riuer, (M584) which made captaine +Gorgues to get to the hill couered with wood, at the foot whereof the Fort +beginneth, and the forrest or wood continueth and stretcheth foorth beyond +it: so that he had sufficient couerture to approch thereunto without +offence. He purposed also to remaine there vntill the Morning, wherein hee +was resolued to assault the Spaniards by scalling their walles on the side +toward the hill, where the Trench seemed not sufficiently flanked for the +defence of the courtains, and from whence part of his men might draw them +that were besieged, which should shew themselues to defend the rampart +while the rest were comming vp. But the Gouernour hastened his vnhappie +destinie, causing threescore shotte to sallie foorth, which passing +through the Trenches, aduanced forward to descrye the number and valour of +the French, whereof twentie vnder the conduct of Cazanoue, getting +betweene the Fort and them which now were issued forth, cut off their +repassage, while Gourgues commanded the rest to charge them in the Front, +but not to discharge but neere at hand, and so that they might be sure to +hitte them, that afterward with more ease they might cut them in pieces +with their swordes. (M585) So that turning their backes assoone as they +were charged and compassed in by his Lieutenant, they remayned all slaine +vpon the place. Whereat the rest that were besieged were so astonied, that +they knew none other meane to saue their liues but by fleeing into the +Wooddes adioyning, where neuerthelesse being incountred againe by the +arrowes of the Sauages which lay in wayte there for them (whereof one +ranne through the target and body of a Spanyard, which therewithall fell +downe starke dead) some were constrayned to turne backe, choosing rather +to dye by the hand of the French, which pursued them: assuring themselues +that none of them coulde finde any fauour neyther with the one nor the +other Nation, whom they had alike and so out of measure cruelly intreated, +sauing those which were reserued to be an example for the time to come. +The Fort when it was taken, was found well prouided of all necessaries: +namely of fiue double Coluerines, and foure Mynions, with diuers other +small pieces of all sorts, and eighteene grosse cakes of gunne powder, all +sorts of weapons, which Gourgues caused with speede to be imbarked, sauing +the powder and other moueables, by reason it was all consumed with fire +through the negligence of a Sauage, which in seething of his fish, set +fire on a tunne of powder which was made and hidden by the Spanyardes, to +haue blasted the French at the first assault, thus blowing vp the store +house and the other houses buylt of Pine trees. The rest of the Spaniards +beeing led away prisoners with the others, after that the generall had +shewed them the wrong which they had done without occasion to all the +French Nation, were all hanged on the boughes of the same trees, whereon +the French hung: of which number fiue were hanged by one Spaniard, which +perceiuing himselfe in the like miserable estate, confessed his fault, and +the iust iudgement which God had brought vpon him. (M586) But in stead of +the writing which Pedro Melendes had hanged ouer them, imprinting these +words in Spanish, I doe not this as vnto French men, but as vnto +Lutherans, Gourgues caused to be imprinted with a searing iron in a table +of Firewood, I doe not this as vnto Spaniardes, nor as vnto Mariners, but +as vnto Traitors, Robbers, and Murtherers. Afterward considering he had +not enough to keep his Forts which he had wonne, much lesse to store them, +fearing also lest the Spaniard which hath Dominions neere adioyning should +renew his forces, or the Sauages should prevaile against the French men, +vnlesse his Maiestie would send thither, hee resolued to raze them. (M587) +And indeede, after he had assembled and in the ende perswaded all the +Sauage kings so to doe, they caused their subiects to runne thither with +such affection, that they ouerthrew all the three forts flatte euen with +the ground in one day. (M588) This done by Gourgues, that he might returne +to his Shippes which he had left in the Riuer of Seyne called +Tacatacourou, fifteene leagues distant from thence, he sent Cazenoue and +the artillery by water: afterward with fourescore harquebusiers, armed +with corslets, and matches light, followed with fortie Mariners bearing +pikes, by reason of the small confidence he was to haue in so many +Sauages, he marched by land alwayes in battell ray, finding the wayes +couered with Sauages, which came to honour him with presents and prayses, +as the deliuerer of all the countries round about adioyning. An old woman +among the rest sayd vnto him, that now she cared not any more to dye, +since she had seene the Frenchmen once againe in Florida, and the +Spaniards chased out. Briefly being arriued, and finding his ships set in +order, and euery thing ready to set sayle, hee counselled the kings to +continue in the amitie and ancient league which they had made with the +king of France, which would defend them against all Nations: which they +all promised, shedding teares because of his departure. Olocotara +especially: for appeasing of whom he promised them to returne within +twelue Moones, (so they count the yeeres) and that his king would send +them an army, and store of kniues for presents, and other things +necessary. (M589) So that after he had taken his leaue of them, and +assembled his men, he thanked God of all his successe since his setting +foorth, and prayed to him for an happy returne. (M590) The third of May +1568, all things were made ready, the Rendez-uous appoynted, and the +Ankers weighed to set sayle so prosperously, that in seuenteene dayes they +ranne eleuen hundred leagues: continuing which course they arriued at +Rochel the sixt of Iune, the foure and thirtieth day after their departure +from the Riuer of May, hauing lost but a small Pinnesse and eight men in +it, with a few gentlemen and others which were slaine in the assaulting of +the Forts. After the cheere and good intertainment which he receiued of +those of Rochel, hee sayled to Burdeaux to informe Monsieur Monluc of the +things aboue mentioned, albeit hee was aduertised of eighteene Pinnesses, +and a great Shippe of two hundred Tunnes full of Spanyardes, which being +assured of the defeat in Florida, and that he was at Rochel, came as farre +as Che-de-Bois, the same day that he departed thence, and followed him as +farre as Blay (but he was gotten already to Bordeaux) to make him yeeld +another account of his voyage, then that, wherewith hee made many +Frenchmen right glad. The Catholicke king being afterward informed that +Gourgues could not easily be taken, offered a great summe of money to him +that could bring him his head, praying moreover king Charles to doe +iustice on him as of the authour of so bloody an act contrary to their +alliance and good league of friendshippe. In so much as comming to Paris +to present himselfe vnto the King, to signifie vnto him the successe of +his Voyage, and the meanes which hee had to subdue this whole Countrey +vnto his obedience, (wherein hee offered to imploy his life, and all his +goods) hee found his entertainment and answere so contrary to his +expectation, that in fine hee was constrayned to hide himselfe a long +space in the Court of Roan, about the yeere 1570. And without the +assistance of President Marigny, in whose house he remained certayne +dayes, and of the Receiuer of Vacquieulx, which alwayes was his faithful +friend, hee had beene in great danger. Which grieued not a litle Dominique +de Gourgues, considering the services which hee had done aswell vnto him +as to his prdecessours kings of France. (M591) Hee was borne in Mount +Marsan in Guyenne, and imployed for the seruice of the most Christian +Kings in all the Armies made since these twentie fiue or thirty yeeres: at +last he had the charge and honour of a Captaine, which in a place neere +vnto Siene, with thirtie Souldyers sustayned the brunt of a part of the +Spanish Armie, by which beeing taken in the assault, and hauing all his +men cutte in pieces, hee was put into a Galley in token of the good warre +and singular fauour which the Spanyard is woont to shew vs. But as the +Galley was going toward Sicillie, beeing taken by the Turkeys, ledde away +to Rhodes, and thence to Constantinople, it was shortly afterwarde +recouered by Romeguas, commaunder ouer the Armie of Malta. By this meane +returning home, hee made a Voyage on the coast of Africa, whence hee tooke +his course to Bresil, and to the South Sea. At length beeing desirous to +repayre the honour of France, he set vpon Florida with such successe as +you haue heard. So that being become by his continuall warlike actions +both by Land and Sea no lesse valiant Captaine then skillfull Mariner, hee +hath made himselfe feared of the Spanyard, and acceptable vnto the Queene +of England for the desert of his vertues. To conclude, he dyed in the +yeere 1582, to the great griefe of such as knew him. + + + + +XXXVI. The relation of Pedro Morales a Spaniard, which sir Francis Drake +brought from Saint Augustines in Florida, where he had remayned sixe +yeeres, touching the state of those parts, taken from his mouth by Master +Richard Hakluyt 1586. + + +Three score leagues vp from the Northwest from Saint Helena are the +mountaines of the golde and Chrystall Mines, named Apalatci. + +The riuer of Wateri is thirtie leagues from S. Helena Northward, which is +able to receiue any Fleete of ships of great burden. + +Wateri and Caiowa are two kings, and two riuers to the North of Saint +Helena. + +The Spaniards haue killed three hundred of the subiects of Potanou. + +The greatest number of Spaniards that haue bene in Florida this sixe +yeeres, was three hundred, and now they were but two hundred in both the +Forts. + +There is a great City sixteene or twentie dayes iourney from Saint Helena +Northwestward, which the Spaniards, call La grand Copal, which they thinke +to bee very rich and exceeding great and haue bene within the sight of it, +some of them. + +They haue offered in generall to the King to take no wages at all of him, +if he will giue them leaue to discouer this citie, and the rich +mountaines, and the passage to a sea or mighty Lake which they heare to be +within foure and twenty dayes trauel from Saint Helena, which is in 32. +degrees of latitude: and is that riuer which the French called Port-royal. + +He saith also that he hath seene a rich Diamond which was brought from the +mountaines that lye vp in the countrey Westward from S. Helena. These hils +seeme wholy to be the mountaines of Apalatci, whereof the Sauages +aduertised Laudonniere; and it may bee they are the hils of Chaunis +Temoatam, which Master Lane had aduertisement of. + + + + +XXXVII. The relation of Nicholas Burgoignon, alias Holy, whom sir Francis +Drake brought from Saint Augustine also in Florida, where he had remayned +sixe yeeres, in mine and Master Heriots hearing. + + +This Nicholas Burgoignon sayth, that betweene S. Augustine and S. Helen +there is a Casique whose name is Casicola, which is lord of ten thousand +Indians, and another casique whose name is Dicasca, and another called +Touppekyn toward the North, and a fourth named Potanou toward the South, +and another called Moscita toward the South likewise. Besides these he +acknowledgth Oristou, Ahoia, Ahoiaue, Isamacon, alledged by the Spaniard. + +He further affirmeth, that there is a citie Northwestward from S. Helenes +in the mountaines, which the Spaniards call La grand Copal, and is very +great and rich, and that in these mountains there is great store of +Christal, golde, and Rubies, and Diamonds: And that a Spaniard brought +from thence a Diamond which was worth fiue thousand crownes, which Pedro +Melendes the marques nephew to olde Pedro Melendes that slew Ribault, and +is now gouerner of Florida, weareth. He saith also, that to make passage +vnto these mountaines, it is needefull to haue store of Hatchets to giue +vnto the Indians, and store of Pickaxes to breake the mountaines, which +shine so bright in the day in some places, that they cannot behold them, +and therefore they trauell vnto them by night. Also corslets of Cotton, +which the Spanyards call Zecopitz, are necessary to bee had against the +arrowes of the Sauages.(123) + +He say farther, that a Tunne of the sassafras of Florida is solde in +Spaine for sixtie ducates: and that they haue there great store of Turkie +cocks, of Beanes, of Peason, and that there are great store of pearles. + +The things, as he reporteth, that the Floridians make most account of, are +red Cloth, or redde Cotton to make baudricks or gyrdles: copper, and +hatchets to cut withall. + +The Spaniards haue all demaunded leaue at their owne costs, to discouer +these mountaines, which the King denyeth, for feare lest the English or +French would enter into the same action once knowen. + +All the Spaniards would passe vp by the riuer of Saint Helena vnto the +mountaines of golde and Chrystall. + +The Spaniards entring 50. leagues vp Saint Helena, found Indians wearing +golde rings at their nostrels and eares. They found also Oxen, but lesse +then ours. + +Sixe leagues from Saint Helena toward the North, there is a poynt that +runneth farre into the sea, which is the marke to the Seamen to finde +Saint Helena and Waterin. + +Waterin is a riuer fortie leagues distant Northward from Saint Helena, +where any fleete of great ships may ride safely. I take this riuer to be +that which we call Waren in Virginia, whither at Christmasse last 1585. +the Spaniards sent a barke with fortie men to discouer where we were +seated: in which barke was Nicholas Burgoignon the reporter of all these +things. + +The Spaniards of S. Augustine haue slaine three hundred or the subjects of +Potanou. One Potassi is neighbour to Potanou. Oratina is he which the +French history calleth Olala Outina. + +Calauai is another casique which they knowe. + + + + +XXXVIII. Virginia Richly Valued, by the Description of the Maine Land of +Florida, Her Next Neighbour: Out of the Foure Yeeres Continuall Trauell +and Discouuerie, For Aboue One Thousand Miles East and West, of Don +Ferdinando De Soto, and Sixe Hundred Able Men in his Companie. + + + +Preface By Richard Hakluyt. + + +This worke, right Honourable, right Worshipfull, and the rest, though +small in shew, yet great in substance, doth yeeld much light to our +enterprise now on foot: whether you desire to know the present and future +commodities of our countrie; or the qualities and conditions of the +Inhabitants, or what course is best to be taken with them. + +(M592) Touching the commodities, besides the generall report of Cabeca de +Vaca to Charles the Emperour (who first trauelled through a great part of +the Inland of Florida, next adioyning vpon our Virginia) That Florida was +the richest countrie of the world; and that after hee had found clothes +made of cotton wooll, he saw gold and siluer, and stones of great value: I +referre you first to the rich mines of gold reported to be in the prouince +of Yupaha, and described in the twelfth Chapter of this Treatise to come +within our limits: And againe, to the copper hatchets found in +Cutifachiqui, standing vpon the Riuer of Santa Helena, which were said to +haue a mixture of gold. (M593) It seemeth also that the last Chronicler of +the West Indies, Antonio de Herrera,(124) speaking of the foresaid Riuer +of Santa Helena, which standeth in 32. degrees and an halfe, alludeth to +the prouince of Yupaha, in these words: Y el oro, y plata, que hailaron, +no era de aquella tierra, sino de 60. leguas, adentro al norte, de los +pueblos dichos Otapales y Olagatanos, adonde se intiende, que ay minas de +oro, plata, y cobre. That is to say, that the gold and siluer which they +found, was not of that countrie (of Santa Helena) but 60. leagues distant +toward the North, of the townes called Otapales and Olagatanos, where we +vnderstand that there are mines of gold, siluer, and copper. By which +reckoning these rich mines are in the latitude of 35. degrees and an +halfe. (M594) I desire you likewise to take knowledge of the famous golden +prouince of Chisca, stretching further to the North, whereof the Cacique +of Coste gaue notice to Ferdinando de Soto in the towne of Chiaha, +affirming, that there were mines of copper, and of another mettall of the +same colour, saue that it was finer, and of a farre more perfect lustre, +and farre better in sight, and that they vsed it not so much, because it +was softer. And the selfsame thing was before told the Gouernour in +Cutifachiqui: who sent two Christians from Chiaha with certaine Indians +which knew the countrie of Chisca, and the language thereof, to view it, +and to make report of that which they should find. (M595) We likewise +reade not long after, that the Gouernour set forward to seeke a prouince +called Pacaha, which hee was informed to bee neere vnto Chisca where the +Indians told him, that there was gold. (M596) And in another place hee +saith: That from Pacaha hee sent thirtie horsemen and fiftie footmen to +the prouince of Caluca, to see if from thence he might trauell to Chisca, +where the Indians said, there was a worke of gold and copper. So that here +is fours times mention, and that in sundrie places, of the rich and famous +golden mines of Chisca, and that they lie beyond the mountaines toward the +North, ouer which they were not able to trauell for the roughnes thereof. +But what neede I to stand vpon forren testimonies, since Master Thomas +Heriot, a man of much iudgement in these causes, signified vnto you all, +at your late solemne meeting at the house of the right honourable the +Earle of Exeter, how to the Southwest of our old fort in Virginia, the +Indians often informed him, that there was a great melting of red mettall, +reporting the manner in working of the same. Besides, our owne Indians +haue lately reuealed either this or another rich mine of copper or gold in +a towne called Ritanoe, neere certaine mountaines lying West of Roanoac. + +(M597) Another very gainfull commoditie is, the huge quantitie of +excellent perles, and little babies and birds made of them; that were +found in Cutifachiqui. The abundance whereof is reported to be such, that +if they would haue searched diuers graues in townes thereabout, they might +haue laded many of their horses. Neither are the Turkie stones and cotton +wooll found at Guasco to be forgotten, nor passed ouer in silence. + +But that, which I make no small account of, is, the multitude of Oxen, +which, from the beginning of the 16. to the end of the 26. Chapter, are +nine seuerall times made mention of, and that along from Chiaha, Coste, +Pacaha, Coligoa, and Tulla, still toward the North, to wit, toward vs, +there was such store of them, that they could keepe no corne for them: and +that the Indians liued vpon their flesh. The haire of these Oxen is +likewise said to be like a soft wooll, betweene the course and fine wooll +of sheepe: and that they vse them for couerlets, because they are very +soft and woolled like sheep: and not so onely, but they make bootes, +shooes, targets and other things necessarie of the same. Besides the +former benefits, their young ones may be framed to the yoke, for carting +and tillage of our ground. And I am in good hope, that ere it be long we +shall haue notice of their being neerer vs, by that which I reade in the +Italian relation of Cabeca de Vaca, the first finder of them; which +writeth, That they spread themselues within the countrie aboue foure +hundred leagues. Moreouer, Vasquez de Coronado, and long after him, +Antonio de Espejo (whose voiages are at large in my third volume) +trauelled many leagues among these herds of Oxen, and found them from 33. +degrees ranging very farre to the North and Northeast. + +A fourth chiefe commoditie wee may account to be the great number of +Mulberrie trees, apt to feede Silke-wormes to make silke: whereof there +was such plentie in many places, that, though they found some hempe in the +countrie, the Spaniards made ropes of the barks of them for their +brigandines, when they were to put to sea for Noua Hispania. + +A fifth is the excellent and perfect colours, as blacke, white, greene, +yellow, and red, and the materials to dye withall, so often spoken of in +this discourse: among which I haue some hope to bring you to the knowledge +of the rich graine of Cochonillio, so much esteemed, and of so great +price. I speake nothing of the seuerall sorts of passing good grapes for +Wine and Raisons. + +(M598) Neither is it the least benefit, that they found salt made by the +Indians at Cayas, and in two places of the prouince of Aguacay: the manner +also how the Inhabitants make it, is very well worth the obseruation. + +(M599) One of the chiefest of all the rest may be the notice of the South +Sea, leading vs to Iapan and China, which I finde here twice to be spoken +of. Whereof long since I haue written a discourse, which I thinke not fit +to be made ouer common. + +For closing vp this point, The distances of places, the qualities of the +soiles, the situations of the regions, the diuersities and goodnesse of +the fruits, the seuerall sorts of beasts, the varietie of fowles, the +difference betweene the Inhabitants of the mountaines and the plaines, and +the riches of the Inland in comparison of the Sea coast, are iudicially +set downe in the conclusion of this booke, whereunto for mine owne ease I +referre you. + +To come to the second generall head, which in the beginning I proposed, +concerning the manners and dispositions of the Inhabitants: among other +things, I finde them here noted to be very eloquent and well spoken, as +the short Orations, interpreted by Iohn Ortiz, which liued twelue yeeres +among them, make sufficient proofe. And the author, which was a gentleman +of Eluas in Portugall, emploied in all the action, whose name is not set +downe, speaking of the Cacique of Tulla, saith, that aswell this Cacique, +as the others, and all those which came to the Gouernour on their behalfe, +deliuered their message or speech in so good order, that no Oratour could +vtter the same more eloquently. But for all their faire and cunning +speeches, they are not ouermuch to be trusted: for they be the greatest +traitors of the world, as their manifold most craftie contriued and bloody +treasons, here set down at large, doe euidently proue. They be also as +vnconstant as the wethercock, and most readie to take all occasions of +aduantages to doe mischiefe. They are great liars and dissemblers; for +which faults often times they had their deserued paiments. And many times +they gaue good testimonie of their great valour and resolution. To handle +them gently, while gentle courses may be found to serue, it will be +without comparison the best: but if gentle polishing will not serue, then +we shall not want hammerours and rough masons enow, I meane our old +soldiours trained vp in the Netherlands, to square and prepare them to our +Preachers hands. To conclude, I trust by your Honours and Worships wise +instructions to the noble Gouernour, the worthy experimented Lieutenant +and Admirall, and other chiefe managers of the businesse, all things shall +be so prudently carried, that the painfull Preachers shall be reuerenced +and cherished, the valiant and forward soldiour respected, the diligent +rewarded, the coward emboldened, the weake and sick relieued, the mutinous +suppressed, the reputation of the Christians among the Saluages preserued, +our most holy faith exalted, all Paganisme and Idolatrie by little and +little vtterly extinguished. And her reposing and resting my selfe vpon +this sweete hope, I cease, beseeching the Almightie to blesse this good +work in your hands to the honour and glorie of his most holy name, to the +inlargement of the dominions of his sacred Majestie, and to the generall +good of all the worthie Aduenturers and vndertakers. From my lodging in +the Colledge of Westminster this 15. of Aprill, 1609.(125) + +By one publikely and anciently deuoted to Gods seruice, and all yours in +this so good action, +RICHARD HAKLUYT. + + + +Chap. I. Which declareth who Don Ferdinando de Soto was, and how he got +the gouernment of Florida. + + +Captaine Soto was the son of a Squire of Xerez of Badaioz. He went into +the Spanish Indies, when Peter Arias of Auila was Gouernour of the West +Indies: And there he was without any thing else of his owne, saue his +sword and target: and for his good qualities and valour, Peter Arias made +him Captaine of a troope of horsemen, and by his commandement hee went +with Fernando Pizarro to the conquest of Peru: where (as many persons of +credit reported which were there present) as well at the taking of +Atabalipa, Lord of Peru, as at the assault of the citie of Cusco, and in +all other places where they found resistance, wheresoeuer hee was present, +hee parted all other Captaines and principall persons. For which came, +besides his part of the treasure of Atabalipa, he had a good share: +whereby in time he gathered an hundred and foure score thousand Duckets +together with that which fell to his part: which he brought into Spaine: +whereof the Emperour borrowed a certaine part, which he repaied againe +with 60000 Rials of plate in the rent of the silkes of Granada, and all +the rest was deliuered him in the Contractation house of Siuil. He tooke +seruents, to wit, a Steward, a Gentleman Vsher, Pages, a Gentleman of the +House, a Chamberlaine, Lakies, and al other officers that the house of a +Noble man requireth. From Siuil hee went to the Court, and in the Court, +there accompanied him Iohn Doierces of Siuil, and Lewis Moscoso +D'Aluarado, Nuncio de Tetuan, and John Rodriguez Lobillo. Except Iohn D, +all the rest came with him from Peru: and euery one of them brought +fourteene or fifteene thousand Duckets: all of them went well and costly +apparelled. And although Soto of his owne nature was not liberall, yet +because that was the first time that hee was to showe himselfe in the +Court, he spent frankely and went accompanied with those which I haue +named, and with his seruants, and many other which resorted vnto him. Hee +married with Donna Isabella en Bouadilla, daughter of Peter Arias de +Auila. Farie of Punno de Rostro. The Emperour made him the Gouernour of +the Isle of Cuba, and Adelantado or President of Florida, with a title of +Marques of certaine part of the lands which he should conquer. + + + +Chap. II. How Cabeca de Vaca came to the Court and gave relation of the +Countrie of Florida: And of the Companie that was assembled in Siuil to +goe with Ferdinando de Soto. + + +When Don Ferdinando had obtained the gouernment, there came a Gentle man +from the Indies to the Court, named Cabeca de Vaca, which had been with +the gouernour Pamphilo de Naruaez which died in Florida, who reported that +Naruaez was cast away at sea with all the companie that went with him. And +how he with foure more escaped and arrived in Nueua Espanna: Also he +brought a relation in writing of that which he had seene in Florida; which +said in some places: In such a place I haue seene this; and the rest which +here I saw, I leaue to conferre of betweene his Majestie and my selfe. +Generally he reported the miserie of the Countrie, and the troubles which +hee passed: and he tolde some of his kinsfolke, which were desirous to goe +into the Indies, and vrged him very much to tell them whether he had seene +any rich country in Florida, that he might not tell them, because hee and +another, whose name was Orantes, (who remained in Nueua Espanna with +purpose to returne into Florida: for which intent hee came into Spaine to +beg the gouernment thereof of the Emperour) had sworne not to discouer +some of those things which they had seene, because no man should preuent +them in begging the same: And hee informed them, that it was the richest +Countrie of the world. Don Ferdinand de Soto was very desirous to haue him +with him, and made him a fauourable offer: and after they were agreed, +because Soto gaue him not a summe of money which he demanded to buy a ship +they broke off againe. Baltasar de Gallegos, and Christopher de Spindola, +the kinesmen of Cabeca de Vaca, told him, that for that which hee had +imparted to them, they were resolued to passe with Soto into Florida, and +therefore they prayed him to aduise them what they were best to doe. +Cabeca de Vaca told them, that the cause why he went not with Soto was, +because hee hoped to beg another gouernment, and that hee was loth to goe +vnder the command of another: and that hee came to beg the conquest of +Florida: but seeing Don Ferdinando de Soto had gotten it alreadie, for his +others sake hee might tell them nothing of that which they would know: but +he counselled them to sell their goods and goe with him, and that in so +doing they should doe well. As soone as he had opportunitie hee spake with +the Emperour, and related vnto him whatsoeuer hee had passed and seene, +and come to vnderstand. Of this relation made by word of mouth to the +Emperour, the Marques of Astorga had notice, and forthwith determined to +send with Don Ferdinando de Soto his brother Don Antonio Osorio: and with +him two kinsmen of his prepared themselues, to wit, Francis Osorio, and +Garcia Osorio. Don Antonio dispossessed himselfe of 60000 Rials of rent +which hee held by the Church: and Francis Osorio of a town of Vassals, +which he had in the Countrie de Campos. And they made their Rendezuous +with the Adelantado in Siuil. The like did Nunnez de Tonar, and Lewis de +Moscoso, and Iohn Rodriguez Lobillo, each of whom had brought from Peru +fourteene or fifteene thousand Duckets. Lewis de Moscoso carried with him +two brethren: there went also Don Carlos, which had married the Gouernours +Neece, and tooke her with him. From Badaioz there went Peter Calderan, and +three kinsemen of the Adelantado, to wit, Arias Tinoco, Alfonso Romo, and +Diego Tinoco. (M600) And as Lewis de Moscoso passed through Eluas, Andrew +de Vasconselos spake with him, and requested him to speake to Don +Ferdinando de Soto concerning him, and deliuered him certaine warrants +which he had receiued from the Marques of Villa real, wherein he gaue him +the Captaineship of Ceuta in Barbarie, that he might shew them vnto him. +And the Adelantado saw them; and was informed who hee was, and wrote vnto +him, that hee would fauour him in all things, and by al meanes, and would +giue him a charge of men in Florida. And from Eluas went Andrew de +Vasconselos, and Fernan Pegado, Antonio Martinez Segurado, Men Roiz +Fereira, Iohn Cordero, Stephen Pegado, Benedict Fernandez, and Aluaro +Fernandez. And out of Salamanca and Iaen, and Valencia, and Albuquerque, +and from other partes of Spaine, many people of Noble birth assembled at +Siuil: insomuch that in Saint Lucar many men of good account which had +sold their goods remained behind for want of shipping, whereas for other +known and rich Countries, they are wont to want men: and this fell out by +occasion of that which Cabeca de Vaca told the Emperour, and informed such +persons as hee had conference withall touching the State of that Countrie. +Soto made him great offers: and being agreed to goe with him (as I haue +said before) because he would not giue him monie to pay for a ship, which +he had brought, they brake off, and he went for Gouernour to the Riuer of +Plate. (M601) His kinsemen Christopher de Spindola, and Baltasar de +Gallegos went with Soto. Baltasar de Gallegos sold houses and vineyards, +and rent corne, and ninetie rankes of Oliue trees in the Xarafe of Siuil: +Hee had the office of Alcalde Mayor, and tooke his wife with him: and +there went also many other persons of account with the President, and had +the officers following by great friendship, because they were officers +desired of many: to wit, Antonie de Biedma was Factor, Iohn Danusco was +Auditor, and Iohn Gaytan nephew to the Cardinall of Ciguenza had the +office of Treasurer. + + + +Chap. III. How the Portugales went to Siuil, and from thence to S. Lucar: +he appointed Captaines ouer the ships, and distributed the people which +were to goe in them. + + +The Portugales departed from Eluas the 15. of Ianuarie, and came to Siuil +the 19. of the same moneth, and went to the lodging of the Gouernour, and +entred into a court, ouer the which were certaine galleries where hee was, +who came downe and receiued them at the staires, whereby they went vp into +the galleries: when he was come vp, he commanded chaires to be giuen them +to sit on. And Andrew de Vasconcellos told him who hee and the other +Portugales were, and how they all were come to accompany him, and serue +him in his voiage. He gaue him thanks and made shew of great contentment +for his comming and offer. And the table being alreadie laid he inuited +them to dinner. And being at dinner he commanded his steward to seeke a +lodging for them neere vnto his owne, where they might bee lodged. The +Adelantado departed from Siuil to Saint Lucar with al the people which +were to goe with him: And he commanded a muster to be made, at the which +the Portugales shewed themsetues armed in verie bright armour, and the +Castellans very gallant with silke vpon silke, with many pinkings and +cuts. The Gouernour, because these brauaries in such an action did not +like him, commanded that they should muster another day, and euery one +should come foorth with his armour: at the which the Portugales came as at +the first armed with very good armour. The Gouernour placed them in order +neere vnto the standard which the ensigne-bearer carried. The Castellanes +for the most part did weare very bad and rustie shirts of maile, and all +of them head peeces and steele cappes, and very bad lances. And some of +them sought to come among the Portugales. (M602) So those passed and were +counted and enroled, which Soto liked and accepted of, and did accompanie +him into Florida; which were in all sixe hundred men. He had alreadie +bought seuen ships, and had all necessarie prouision aboord them: he +appointed Captaines, and deliuered to euery one his ship, and gaue them in +a role what people euery one should carrie with them. + + + +Chap. IV. How the Adelantado with his people departed from Spaine, and +came to the Canaries, and afterward to the Antiles. + + +In the yeere of our Lord 1538. in the moneth of Aprill, the Adelantado +deliuered his shippes to the Captaines which were to goe in them: and +tooke for himselfe a new ship, and good of saile, and gaue another to +Andrew de Vasconcelos in which the Portugales went: hee went ouer the +barre of S. Lucar on Sunday being S. Lazarus day, in the morning, of the +moneth and yeere aforesaid, with great ioy, commanding his trumpets to be +sounded, and many shots of the ordinance to be discharged. Hee sailed +foure daies with a prosperous wind: and suddenly it calmed: the calmes +continued eight daies with swelling seas, in such wise, that wee made no +way. The 15th day after his departure from S. Lucar, hee came to Gomera, +one of the Canaries, on Easter day in the morning. The Earle of that +Island was apparrelled all in white, cloke, ierkin, hose, shooes, and +cappe, so that hee seemed a Lord of the Gypses. He receiued the Gouernour +with much ioy: hee was well lodged, and all the rest had their lodgings +gratis, and gat great store of victuals for their monie, as bread, wine +and flesh: and they tooke what was needfull for their ships: and the +Sunday following, eight daies after their arriuall, they departed from the +Isle of Gomera. The Earle gaue to Donna Isabella the Adelantados wife a +bastard daughter that hee had to bee her waiting maid. They arriued at the +Antilles, in the Isle of Cuba, at the port of the City of Sant Iago vpon +Whitsunday. Assone as they came thither, a Gentleman of the Citie sent to +the sea side a very faire roan horse and well furnished for the Gouernour, +and a mule for Donna Isabella: and all the horsemen and footemen that were +in the towne came to receiue him at the sea side. The Gouernour was well +lodged, visited, and serued of all the inhabitants of that Citie, and all +his companie had their lodgings freely: those which desired to goe into +the countrie, were diuided by foure and foure, and sixe and sixe in the +farmes or granges, according to the abilitie of the owners of the farmes, +and were furnished by them with all things necessarie. + + + +Chap. V. Of the inhabitants which are in the Citie of S. Iago, and in the +other townes of the Island: and of the qualitie of the soile, and fruites +that it yeeldeth. + + +The Citie of S. Iago hath fourescore houses which are great and well +contriued. The most part haue their walls made of bords, and are couered +with thatch; it hath some houses builded with lime and stone, and couered +with tiles. (M603) It hath great Orchards and many trees in them, +differing from those of Spaine: there be figgetrees which beare figges as +big as ones fist, yellow within, and of small taste; and other trees which +beare a fruit which they call Ananes, in making and bignes like to a small +Pineapple: it is a fruite very sweete in taste: the shel being taken away, +the kernel is like a peece of fresh cheese. In the granges abroad in the +countrie there are other great pineapples, which grow on low trees, and +are like the Aloe tree:(126) they are of a very good smell and exceeding +good taste. Other trees do beare a fruit, which they call Mameis of the +bignes of Peaches. This the Islanders do hold for the best fruit of the +country. There is another fruit which they call Guayahas like Filberds, as +bigge as figges. There are other trees as high as a iaueline, hauing one +only stocke without any bough, and the leaues as long as a casting dart: +and the fruite is of the bignesse and fashion of a Cucumber, one bunch +beareth 20. or 30. and as they ripen, the tree bendeth downeward with +them: they are called in this countrie Plantanos; and are of a good taste, +and ripen after they be gathered, but those are the better which ripen +vpon the tree it selfe: they beare fruite but once: and the tree being cut +downe, there spring vp others out of the but, which beare fruite the next +yeere. (M604) There is another fruit; whereby many people are sustained, +and chiefly the slaues, which are called Batatas. These grow now in the +Isle of Tercera, belonging to the Kingdome of Portugal, and they grow +within the earth, and are like a fruit called Iname, they haue almost the +taste of a chestnut. (M605) The bread of this countrie is also made of +rootes which are like the Batatas. And the stocke whereon those rootes doe +grow is like an Elder tree: they make their ground in little hillocks and +in each of them they thrust 4. or 5. stakes; and they gather the rootes a +yeere and an halfe after they set them. If any one, thinking it is a +Batata or Potato roote, chance to eate of it neuer so little, he is in +great danger of death: which was seene by experience in a souldier, which +assone as hee had eaten a very little of one of those rootes, hee died +quicklie. They pare these rootes and stamp them and squese them in a thing +like a presse: the iuyce that commeth from them is of an euill smell. The +bread is of little taste and lesse substance. Of the fruits of Spaine, +there are Figges and Oranges, and they beare fruite all the yeere, because +the soile is very ranke and fruitfull. (M606) In this countrie are many +good horses, and there is greene grasse all the yeere. There be many wild +oxen and hogges, whereby the people of the Island is well furnished with +flesh: Without the townes abroad in the Countrie are many fruites. And it +happeneth sometimes that a Christian goeth out of the way and is lost 15. +or 20. daies, because of the many paths in the thicke groues that crosse +too and fro made by the oxen: and being thus lost, they sustaine them +selues with fruites and palmitos: for there be many great groues of Palme +trees through all the Island: they yeeld no other fruite that is of any +profit. (M607) The Isle of Cuba is 300. leagues long from the East to the +West, and in some places 30. in others 40. leagues from North to South. It +hath 6. townes of Christians: to wit, S. Iago, Baracoa, Bayamo, Puerto de +Principes, S. Espirito, and Hauana. Euery one hath betweene 30. and 40. +households, except S. Iago and Hauana, which hath about 60. or 80. houses. +They haue Churches in each of them, and a Chaplen which confesseth them +and saith Masse. In S. Iago is a Monasterie of Franciscan Friars: it hath +but few Friers, and is well prouided of almes, because the countrie is +rich: The Church of S. Iago hath honest reuenew, and there is a Curat and +Prebends and many Priests, as the Church of that Citie, which is the +chiefe of all the Island. There is in this countrie much gold, and few +slaues to get it: For many haue made away themselues, because of the +Christians euill vsage of them in the mines. (M608) A steward of Vasques +Porcallo, which was an inhabitour in that Island, vnderstanding that his +slaues would make away themselues, staid for them with a cudgill in his +hand at the place where they were to meete, and told them, that they could +neither doe nor thinke any thing, that hee did not know before; and that +hee came thither to kill himselfe with them, to the end, that if hee had +vsed them badly in this world, hee might vse them worse in the world to +come: And this was a meane that they changed their purpose, and turned +home againe to doe that which he commanded them. + + + +Chap. VI. How the Gouernour sent Donna Isabella with the ships to Hauana, +and he with some of his people went thither by land. + + +The Gouernour sent from S. Iago his Nephew Don Carlos with the ships in +company of Donna Isabella to tarrie for him at Hauana, which is an hauen +in the west part toward the head of the Island, 180. leagues from the +Citie of Saint Iago. The Gouernour and those which staied with him bought +horses and proceeded on their iournie. The first towne they came vnto was +Bayamo: they were lodged foure and foure, and sixe and sixe, as they went +in company, and where they lodged they tooke nothing for their diet, for +nothing cost them ought saue the Maiz or corne for their horses, because +the Gouernour went to visit them from towne to towne, and seased them in +the tribute and seruice of the Indians. Bayamo is 25. leagues from the +Citie of S. Iago. Neere vnto the towne passeth a great Riuer, which is +called Tanto; it is greater then Guadiana, and in it be very great +Crocodiles, which sometimes hurt the Indians, or the cattell which passeth +the Riuer. In all the countrie are neither Wolfe, Foxe, Beare, Lion, nor +Tiger. There are wild dogges which goe from the houses into the woods and +feed vpon swine. There be certaine Snakes as bigge as a mans thigh or +bigger, they are very slow, they doe no kind of hurt. From Bayamo to +Puerto dellos principes are 50. leagues. In al the Iland from towne to +towne, the way is made by stubbing vp the vnderwood: and if it bee left +but one yeere vndone, the wood groweth so much, that the way cannot be +seene, and the paths of the oxen are so many, that none can trauell +without an Indian of the Countrie for a guide: for all the rest is very +hie and thicke woods. From Puerto dellos principes the Gouernour went to +the house of Vasques Porcallo by sea in a bote, (for it was neere the sea) +to know there some newes of Donna Isabella, which at that instant (as +afterward was knowne) was in great distresse, in so much that the ships +lost one another: and two of them fell on the coast of Florida, and all of +them endured great want of water and victuals. When the storme was ouer, +they met together, without knowing where they were: in the end they +descried the Cape of S. Anton, a countrie not inhabited of the Island of +Cuba: there they watered; and at the end of 40. daies, which were passed +since their departure from the City of S. Iago, they arriued at Hauana. +The Gouernour was presently informed thereof, and went to Donna Isabella. +And those which went by land which were one hundred and fiftie horsemen, +being diuided into two parts, because they would not oppresse the +inhabitants, trauelled by S. Espirito, which is 60. leagues from Puerto +dellos principes. The food which they carried with them was Cacabe bread, +which is that whereof I made mention before: and it is of such a qualitie, +that if it be wet, it breaketh presently, whereby it happened to some to +eate flesh without bread for many daies. They carried dogges with them, +and a man of the Country, which did hunt; and by the way, or where they +were to lodge that night, they killed as many hogges as they needed. In +this iourney they were well prouided of beefe and porke: And they were +greatly troubled with Muskitos, especially in a lake, which is called the +mere of Pia, which they had much adoe to passe from noone till night, the +water might be some halfe league ouer, and to be swome about a crosse bowe +shot, the rest came to the waste, and they waded vp to the knees in the +mire, and in the bottome were cockle shels, which cut their feete very +sore; in such sort, that there was neither boote nor shoe sole that was +hole at halfe way. Their clothes and sandels were passed in baskets of +Palme trees. Passing this lake, stripped out of their clothes, there came +many muskitos, vpon whose bitting there arose a wheale that smarted very +much: they strooke them with their hands, and with the blow which they +gaue they killed so many, that the blood did runne downe the armes and +bodies of the men. That night they rested very little for them, and other +nights also in the like places and times. They came to Santo Espirito, +which is a towne of thirtie houses; there passeth by it a little Riuer: it +is very pleasant and fruitfull, hauing great store of Oranges and citrons, +and fruites of the Countrie: One halfe of the companie were lodged here, +and the rest passed forward 25. leagues to another towne called la +Trinidad of 15 or 20 households. Here is an hospitall for the poore, and +there is none other in all the Island. And they say, that this towne was +the greatest of all the Countrie and that before the Christians came into +this land, as a ship passed along the coast, there came in it a very sicke +man which desired the Captaine to set him on shore: and the Captaine did +so, and the ship went her way: The sicke man remained set on shore in that +countrie, which vntill then had not bene haunted by Christians; wherevpon +the Indians found him, carried him home, and looked vpon him till he was +whole; and the Lord of that towne maried him vnto a daughter of his, and +had warre withall the inhabitants round about, and by the industrie and +valour of the Christian, he subdued and brought vnder his command all the +people of that Island. A great while after, the Gouernour Diego Velasques +went to conquer it, and from thence discouered new Spaine: And this +Christian which was with the Indians did pacifie them, and brought them to +the obedience and subiection of the Gouernour. From this towne della +Trinidad vnto Hauana are 80. leagues, without any habitation, which they +trauelled. They came to Hauana in the end of March; where they found the +Gouernor, and the rest of the people which came with him from Spaine. The +Gouernour sent from Hauana Iohn Danusco with a carauele and two +brigantines with 50. men to discouer the hauen of Florida; and from thence +hee brought two Indians, which he tooke vpon the coast, wherwith (aswell +because they might be necessarie for guides and for interpretours, as +because they said by signes that there was much gold in Florida) the +Gouernour and all the companie receiued much contentment, and longed for +the houre of their departure, thinking in himselfe that this was the +richest Countrie, that vnto that day had been discouered. + + + +Chap. VII. How we departed from Hauana, and ariued in Florida, and of such +things as happened vnto vs. + + +Before our departure, the Gouernour depriued Nunno de Touar of the office +of Captaine Generall, and gaue it to Porcallo de Figueroa, an inhabitant +of Cuba, which was a meane that the shippes were well furnished with +victuals: for he gaue a great many loads of Casabe bread, and manie +hogges. The Gouernour tooke away this office from Nonno de Touar, because +he had fallen in loue with the daughter of the Earle of Gomera, Donna +Isabellas waighting maid, who, though his office were taken from him, (to +returne againe to the Gouernours fauour) though she were with child by +him, yet tooke her to his wife, and went with Soto into Florida. The +Gouernour left Donna Isabella in Hauana; and with her remained the wife of +Don Carlos, and the wiues of Baltasar de Gallegos, and of Nonno de Touar. +And hee left for his lieutenant a Gentleman of Hauana, called Iohn de +Roias, for the gouernment of the Island. + +On Sunday the 18. of May, in the yeere of our Lord, 1539. the Adelantado +or president departed from Hauana in Cuba with his fleete, which were nine +vessels, fiue great ships, two carauels, and two brigantines: They sailed +seuen daies with a prosperous wind. The 25. day of May, the day de Pasco +de Spirito Santo, (which we call Whitson Sonday,) they saw the land of +Florida; and because of the shoalds, they came to an anchor a league from +the shore. (M609) On Friday the 30. of May they landed in Florida, two +leagues from a towne of an Indian Lord, called Vcita. They set on land two +hundred and thirteene horses, which they brought with them, to vnburden +the shippes, that they might draw the lesse water. Hee landed all his men, +and only the sea men remained in the shippes, which in eight daies, going +vp with the tide euery day a little, brought them vp vnto the towne. +(M610) Assoone as the people were come on shore, hee pitched his campe on +the sea side, hard vpon the Bay which went vp vnto the towne. And +presently the Captaine generall Vasques Porcallo with other 7. horsemen +foraged the Countrie halfe a league round about, and found sixe Indians, +which resisted him with their arrowes, which are the weapons which they +vse to fight withall: The horsemen killed two of them, and the other foure +escaped; because the countrie is cumbersome with woods and bogs, where the +horses stacke fast, and fell with their riders, because they were weake +with trauelling vpon the sea. The same night following the Gouernour with +an hundred men in the brigantines lighted vpon a towne, which he found +without people, because, that assoone as the Christians had sight of land, +they were descried, and saw along the coast many smokes, which the Indians +had made to giue aduice the one to the other. The next day Luys de +Moscoso, Master of the Campe set the men in order, the horsemen in three +squadrons, the Vantgard, the Batallion, and the Rerewarde: and so they +marched that day, and the day following, compassing great Creekes which +came out of the Bay: They came to the towne of Vcita, where the Gouernour +was, on Sunday the first of Iune, being Trinitie Sunday. The towne was of +seuen or eight houses. The Lordes house stoode neere the shore vpon a very +hie mount, made by hand for strength. At another ende of the towne stood +the Church, and on the top of it stood a fowle made of wood with gilded +eies. Heere were found some pearles of small valew, spoiled with the fire, +which the Indians do pierce and string them like beades, and weare them +about their neckes and hand wrists, and they esteeme them very much. The +houses were made of timber, and couered with Palme leaues. The Gouernour +lodged himselfe in the Lords houses, and with him Vasques Porcallo, and +Luys de Moscoso: and in others that were in the middest of the towne, was +the chiefe Alcalde or Iustice, Baltasar de Gallegos lodged; and in the +same houses was set in a place by it selfe, al the prouision that came in +the ships: the other houses and the Church were broken down, and euery +three or foure souldiers made a little cabin wherein they lodged. The +Countrie round about was very fennie, and encombred with great and hie +trees. The Gouernor commanded to fel the woods a crossebow shot round +about the towne, that the horses might runne, and the Christians might +haue the aduantage of the Indians, if by chance they should set vpon them +by night. In the waies and places conuenient, they had their Centinelles +of footemen by two and two in euery stand, which did watch by turnes, and +the horsemen did visit them, and were readie to assist them, if there were +any alarme. The Gouernour made foure Captaines of the horsemen, and two of +the footemen. The Captaines of the horsemen were, one of them Andrew de +Vasconcelos, and another Pedro Calderan de Badaioz: and the other two were +his kinsemen, to wit, Arias Tinoco, and Alfonso Romo, borne likewise in +Badaioz. The Captaines of the footemen, the one was Francisco Maldonado of +Salamanca, and the other Iuan Rodriguez Lobillo. While wee were in this +towne of Vcita, the two Indians, which Iohn Danusco had taken on that +coast, and the Gouernor caried along with him for guides and +interpretours, through carelessnes of two men, which had the charge of +them, escaped away one night. For which the Gouernour and all the rest +were very sorie, for they had alreadie made some roades, and no Indians +could bee taken, because the countrie was full of marish grounds, and in +many places full of very hie and thicke woods. + + + +Chap. VIII. Of some inrodes that were made into the Countrie: and how +there was a Christian found, which had bin long time in the power of an +Indian Lord. + + +From the towne of Vcita, the Gouernour sent the Alcalde Mayor, Baltasar de +Gallegos with 40. horsemen and 80. footemen into the Countrie to see if +they could take any Indians: and the Captaine Iohn Rodriguez Lobillo +another way with 50. footemen, the most of them were swordmen and +targettours, and the rest were shot and crossebowmen. They passed through +a countrie full of bogges, where horses could not trauell. Halfe a league +from the campe, they lighted vpon certaine cabins of Indians neere a +Riuer: The people that were in them leaped into the Riuer; yet they tooke +foure Indian women; And twentie Indians charged vs, and so distressed vs, +that wee were forced to retire to our campe, being, as they are, exceeding +readie with their weapons. It is a people so warlike and so nimble, that +they care not awhit for any footemen. For if their enemies charge them, +they runne away, and if they turne their backs, they are presently vpon +them. And the thing that they most flee, is the shot of an arrow. They +neuer stand still, but are alwaies running and trauersing from one place +to another: by reason whereof neither crossebow nor arcubuse can aime at +them: and before one crossebowman can make one shot, an Indian will +discharge three or foure arrowes; and he seldome misseth what hee shooteth +at. An arrow, where it findeth no armour, pierceth as deeply as a +crossebow. Their bowes are very long, and their arrowes are made of +certaine canes like reedes, very heauie, and so strong, that a sharpe cane +passeth thorow a target: Some they arme in point with a sharpe bone of a +fish like a chisel, and in others they fasten certaine stones like points +of Diamants. For the most part when they light vpon an armour, they breake +in the place where they are bound together. Those of cane do split and +pierce a coate of maile, and are more hurtfull then the other. Iohn +Rodriguez Lobillo returned to the campe with sixe men wounded, whereof one +died; and brought the foure Indian women which Baltasar Gallegos had taken +in the cabins or cotages. Two leagues from the towne, comming into the +plaine field, he espied ten or eleuen Indians, among whom was a Christian, +which was naked, and scorched with the Sunne, and had his armes razed +after the manner of the Indians, and differed nothing at all from them. +And assoone as the horsemen saw them they ran toward them. The Indians +fled, and some of them hid themselues in a wood, and they ouertooke two or +three of them, which were wounded: and the Christian, seeing an horseman +runne vpon him with his lance, began to crie out, Sirs, I am a Christian, +slay me not, nor these Indians, for they haue saued my life. And +straightway he called them, and put them out of feare, and they came +foorth of the wood vnto them. The horse men tooke both the Christian and +the Indians vp behind them; and toward night came into the Campe with much +ioy; which thing being known by the Gouernour, and them that remained in +the Campe, they were receiued with the like. + + + +Chap. IX. How this Christian came to the land of Florida, and who he was: +and what conference he had with the Gouernour. + + +(M611) This Christians name was Iohn Ortiz, and he was borne in Siuil, of +worshipful parentage. He was 12. yeeres in the hands of the Indians. He +came into this Countrie with Pamphilo de Naruaez, and returned in the +ships to the Island of Cuba, where the wife of the Gouernour Pamphilo de +Naruaez was: and by his commandement with 20. or 30. other in a brigandine +returned backe againe to Florida: and comming to the port in the sight of +the towne, on the shore they saw a cane sticking in the ground, and riuen +at the top, and a letter in it: and they beleeued that the Gouernour had +left it there to giue aduertisement of himselfe, when he resolued to goe +vp into the land: and they demanded it of foure or fiue Indians, which +walked along the sea shore: and they had them by signes to come on shore +for it: which against the will of the rest Iohn Ortiz and another (M612) +did. And assoone as they wereon land, from the houses of the towne issued +a great number of Indians, which compassed them about, and tooke them in a +place where they could not flee: and the other which sought to defend +himselfe, they presentlie killed vpon the place, and tooke Iohn Ortiz +aliue, and carried him to Vcita their Lord. And those of the brigandine +sought not to land, but put themselues to sea, and returned to the Island +of Cuba. Vcita commaunded to bind Iohn Ortiz hand and foote vpon foure +stakes aloft vpon a raft, and to make a fire vnder him, that there he +might bee burned: But a daughter of his desired him that he would not put +him to death, alleaging, that one only Christian could do him neither hurt +nor good, telling him, that it was more for his honor to keepe him as a +captiue. And Vcita granted her request, and commaunded him to be cured of +his wounds: and assoone as he was whole, he gaue him the charge of the +keeping of the Temple: because that by night the wolues did cary away the +dead corpse out of the towne, who commended himselfe to God and tooke vpon +him the charge of his temple. One night the wolues gatte from him the +corpse of a little child, the sonne of a principal Indian: and going after +them he threw a darte at one of the wolues and wounde him that carried +away the corps, who feeling himselfe wounded, left it, and fell downe dead +neere the place: and hee not seeing what he had done, because it was +night, went backe againe to the Temple: the morning being come, and +finding not the bodie of the child, he was very sad. Assoone as Vcita knew +therof, he resolued to put him to death; and sent by the track, which he +said the wolues went, and found the bodie of the child and the wolfe dead +a little beyond: whereat Vcita was much concerned with the Christian, and +with the watch which hee kept in the Temple, and from thence forward +esteemed him much. Three yeeres after he fell into his hands there came +another Lord called Mococo, who dwelleth two daies iourney from the Port, +and burned his towne. Vcita fled to another towne that he had in another +sea port. Thus Iohn Ortiz lost his office and fauour that he had with him. +These people being worshippers of the deuill, are wont to offer vp vnto +him the liues and blood of their Indians, or of any other people they can +come by: and they report, that when he will haue them doe that sacrifice +vnto him, he speaketh with them, and telleth them, that he is athirst, and +willeth them to sacrifice vnto him. Iohn Ortiz had notice by the damsell +that had deliuered him from the fire, how her father was determined to +sacrifice him the day following, who willed him to flee to Mococo: for +shee knew that he would vse him wel: for she heard say, that he had asked +for him, and said hee would bee glad to see him: and because he knew not +the way, she went with him halfe a league out of the towne by night, and +set him in the way, and returned, because she would not be discouered. +Iohn Ortiz trauailed all that night, and by the morning came vnto a Riuer, +which is in the territorie of Mococo: and there he saw two Indians +fishing; and because they were in war with the people of Vcita, and their +languages were different, and hee knew not the language of Mococo, he was +afraid, because he could not tell them who hee was, nor how hee came +thither, nor was able to answer any thing for himselfe, that they would +kill him, taking him for one of the Indians of Vcita; and before they +espied him he came to the place where they had laid their weapons: and +assoone as they saw him, they fled toward the towne, and although he +willed them to stay, because he meant to do them no hurt, yet they +vnderstood him not, and ran away as fast as euer they could. And assone as +they came to the towne with great outcries, many Indians came forth +against him, and began to compasse him to shoote at him: Iohn Ortiz seeing +himselfe in so great danger, sheilded himselfe with certaine trees, and +began to shreeke out, and crie very loud, and to tell them that he was a +Christian, and that he was fled from Vcita, and was come to see and serue +Mococo his Lord. It pleased God that at that very instant there came +thither an Indian that could speake the language and vnderstood him; and +pacified the rest; who told them what hee said. Then ran from thence three +or foure Indians to beare the newes to their Lord: who came foorth a +quarter of a league from the towne to receiue him; and was very glad of +him. He caused him presently to sweare according to the custome of the +Christians, that hee would not run away from him to any other Lord: and +promised him to entreate him very well; and that if at any time there came +any Christians into that countrie, he would freely let him goe, and giue +him leaue to goe to them: and likewise tooke his oth to performe the same +according to the Indian custome. (M613) About three yeeres after certaine +Indians, which were fishing at sea two leagues from the towne, brought +newes to Mococo that they had seene ships: and hee called Iohn Ortiz, and +gaue him leaue to go his way: who taking his leaue of him, with all the +haste he could came to the sea, and finding no ships, he thought it to be +some deceit, and that the Cacique had done the same to learne his mind. So +he dwelt with Mococo nine yeeres, with small hope of seeing any +Christians. Assoone as our Gouernour arriued in Florida, it was knowne to +Mococo, and straightway he signified to Iohn Ortiz, that Christians were +lodged in the towne of Vcita: And he thought he had iested with him, as he +had done before, and told him, that by this time he had forgotten the +Christians, and thought of nothing else but to serue him. But he assured +him that it was so, and gaue him licence to goe vnto them: saying vnto +him, that if hee would not doe it, and if the Christians should goe their +way, he should not blame him, for hee had fulfilled that which he had +promised him. The ioy of Iohn Ortiz was so great, that he could not +beleeue that it was true: notwithstanding he gaue him thankes, and tooke +his leaue of him: and Mococo gaue him tenne or eleuen principall Indians +to beare him companie: and as they went to the port where the Gouernour +was, they met with Baltasar de Gallegos, as I haue declared before. (M614) +Assoone as he was come to the campe, the Gouernour commanded to giue him a +suite of apparell, and very good armour, and a faire horse: and enquired +of him, whether hee had notice of any countrie, where there was any gold +or siluer: He answered, No, because he neuer went ten leagues compasse +from the place where he dwelt: But 30. leagues from thence dwelt an Indian +Lord, which was called Parocossi, to whom Mococo and Vcita, with al the +rest of that coast paied tribute, and that hee peraduenture might haue +notice of some good countrie: and that his land was better then that of +the sea coast, and more fruitfull and plentifull of maiz. Whereof the +Gouernour receiued great contentment: and said that he desired no more +then to finde victuals, that hee might goe into the maine land, for the +land of Florida, was so large, that in one place or other there could not +chuse but bee some rich Countrie. The Cacique Mococo came to the Port to +visit the Gouernor and made this speech following. + +Right hie and mightie Lord, I being lesser in mine owne conceit for to +obey you, then any of those which you haue vnder your command; and greater +in desire to doe you greater seruices, doe appeare before your Lordship +with so much confidence of receiuing fauour, as if in effect this my good +will were manifested vnto you in workes: not for the small seruice I did +vnto you touching the Christian which I had in my power, in giuing him +freely his libertie, (For I was bound to doe it to preserue mine honour, +and that which I had promised him:) but because it is the part of great +men to vse great magnificences: And I am perswaded, that as in bodily +perfections, and commanding of good people, you doe exceede all men in the +world, so likewise you doe in the parts of the minde, in which you may +boast of the bountie of nature. The fauour which I hope for of your +Lordship is, that you would hold mee for yours, and bethinke your selfe to +command me any thing, wherein I may doe you seruice. + +The Gouernour answereth him, That although in freeing and sending him the +Christian, he had presented his honour and promise, yet he thanked him, +and held it in such esteeme, as it had no comparison; and that hee would +alwaies hold him as his brother, and would fauour him in all things to the +vtmost of his power. Then he commanded a shirt to be giuen him, and other +things, where with the Cacique being verie well contented, tooke his leaue +of him, and departed to his owne towne. + + + +Chap. X. How the Gouernour sent the ships to Cuba: and left an hundred men +at the Hauen de Spirito Santo, and himself with the rest of his people +went into the maine land. + + +From the Port de Spirito Santo where the Gouernour lay, he sent the +Alcalde Mayor Baltasar de Gallegos with 50. horsemen, and 30. or 40. +footemen to the prouince of Paracoussi, to view the disposition of the +countrie, and enforme himselfe of the land farther inward, and to send him +word of such things as he found. Likewise he sent his shippes backe to the +Iland of Cuba, that they might returne within a certaine time with +victuals. Vasques Porcallo de Figueroa, which went with the Gouernour as +Captaine Generall, (whose principall intent was to send slaues from +Florida, to the Iland of Cuba, where he had his goods and mines;) hauing +made some inrodes, and seeing no Indians were to be got, because of the +great bogs and thicke woods that were in the Countrie, considering the +disposition of the same, determined to returne to Cuba. And though there +was some difference between him and the Gouernour, whereupon they neither +dealt nor conuersed together with good countenance, yet notwithstanding +with louing words he asked him leaue and departed from him. Baltasar de +Gallegos came to the Paracossi: There came to him 30. Indians from the +Cacique, which was absent from his town, and one of them made this speech: + +Paracossi, the Lord of this prouince, whose vassals we are sendeth vs vnto +your worship, to know what it is that you seeke in this his countrie, and +wherein he may doe you seruice. + +Baltasar de Gallegos said vnto him, that hee thanked them very much for +their offer, willing them to warne their Lord to come to his towne, and +that there they would talke and confirme their peace and friendship, which +he much desired. The Indians went their way, and returned the next day, +and said, that their Lord was ill at ease, and therefore could not come, +but that they came on his behalfe to see what he demanded. He asked them +if they knew or had notice of any rich Countrie where there was gold or +siluer. They told them, they did: and that toward the West, there was a +prouince which was called Cale; and that others that inhabited other +Countries had warre with the people of that Countrie, where the most part +of the yeere was sommer, and that there was much gold: and that when those +their enemies came to make ware with them of Cale, these inhabitants of +Cale did weare hats of gold, in manner of head peeces. Baltasar de +Gallegos, seeing that the Cacique came not, thinking all that they said +was fained, with intent that in the meane time they might set themselues +in safetie, fearing, that if he did let them goe, they would returne no +more, commanded the thirty Indians to be chained, and sent word to the +Gouernour, by eight horsemen, what had passed: whereof the Gouernour and +al that were with him, at the Port de Spirito Santo receiued great +comfort, supposing, that that which the Indians reported, might be true. +Hee left Captaine Calderan at the Port, with thirtie horsemen, and +seuentie footemen, with prouision for two yeeres, and himselfe with all +the rest marched into the maine land, and came to the Paracossi, at whose +towne Baltasar de Gallegos was: and from thence with all his men tooke the +way to Cale. He passed by a little towne called Acela, and came to another +called Tocaste: and from thence he went before with 30 horsemen, and 50 +footemen toward Cale. And passing by a towne, whence the people were fled, +they saw Indians a little from thence in a lake; to whom the Interpreter +spake. They came vnto them and gaue them an Indian for a guide: and hee +came to a Riuer with a great current, and vpon a tree, which was in the +midst of it, was made a bridge, whereon the men passed: the horses swam +ouer by a hawser, that they were pulled by from the otherside: for one, +which they droue in without it, was drowned. From thence the Gouernour +sent two horsemen to his people that were behind, to make haste after him; +because the way grew long and their victuals short. Hee came to Cale, and +found the towne without people. He tooke three Indians, which were spies, +and tarried there for his people that came after, which were sore vexed +with hunger and euill waies, because the Countrie was very barren of Maiz, +low, and full of water, bogs, and thicke woods; and the victuals, which +they brought with them from the Port de Spirito Santo, were spent. +Whersoeuer any towne was found, there were some beetes, and hee that came +first gathered them, and sodden with water and salt, did eate them without +any other thing: and such as could not get them, gathered the stalkes of +Maiz and eate them, which because they were young, had no Maiz in them. +When they came to the Riuer which the Gouernour had passed, they found +palmitos vpon lowe Palmetrees like those of Andaluzia. There they met with +the two horsemen which the Gouernour sent vnto them, and they brought +newes that in Cale there was plentie of Maiz: at which newes they all +reioyced. Assoone as they came to Cale, the Gouernour commanded them to +gather all the Maiz that was ripe in the field, which was sufficient for +three moneths. At the gathering of it the Indians killed three Christians +and one of them which were taken told the Gouernour that within seuen +dayes iournie, there was a very great Prouince, and plentifull of Maiz, +which was called Apalache. And presently he departed from Cale with 50 +horsemen and 60. footemen. He left the master of the Campe Luys de Moscoso +with all the rest of the people there, with charge that hee should not +depart thence vntill hee had word from him. And because hitherto none had +gotten any slaues, the bread that euery one was to eate, he was faine +himselfe to beate in a morter made in a piece of timber with a pestle, and +some of them did sift the flower through their shirts of maile. They baked +their bread vpon certaine tileshares which they set ouer the fire, in such +sort as heretofore I haue said they vse to doe in Cuba. It is so +troublesome to grind their Maiz, that there were many that would rather +not eate it, then grind it: and did eate the Maiz parched and sodden. + + + +Chap. XI. How the Gouernour came to Caliquen, and carrying from thence the +Cacique with him went to Napetuca, where the Indians sought to haue taken +him from him, and in an assault many of them were slaine, and taken +prisoners. + + +The 11. day of August 1539, the Gouernour departed from Cale: hee lodged +in a little town called Ytara, and the next day in another called Potano, +and the third day at Vtinama, and came to another towne, which they named +the towne of Euil peace; because an Indian came in peace, saying, That he +was the Cacique, and that he with his people would serue the Gouernour, +and that if he would set free 28. persons, men and women, which his men +had taken the night before, he would command prouision to be brought him, +and would giue him a guide to instruct him in his way: The Gouernour +commanded them to be set at libertie, and to keepe him in safegard. The +next day in the morning there came many Indians, and set themselues round +about the towne neere to a wood. The Indian wished them to carrie him +neere them; and that he would speake vnto them, and assure them, and that +they would doe whatsoeuer hee commanded them. And when he saw himselfe +neere vnto them he brake from them, and ran away so swiftly from the +Christians, that there was none that could ouertake him, and all of them +fled into the woods. The Gouernour commanded to loose a grayhound, which +was alreadie fleshed on them, which passing by many other Indians, caught +the counterfait Cacique, which had escaped from the Christians, and held +him till they came to take him. From thence the Gouernour lodged at a +towne called Cholupaha: and because it had store of Maiz in it, they named +it Villa farta. Beyond the same there was a Riuer, on which he made a +bridge of timber, and trauelled two daies through a desert. The 17. of +August, he came to Caliquen, where he was informed of the Prouince of +Apalache: They told him that there Pamphilo de Naruaez had bin there, and +that hee tooke shipping, because hee could find no way to goe forward: +that there was none other towne at al; but that on both sides was all +water. The whole companie were very sad for these newes: and counselled +the Gouernour to goe backe to the Port de Spirito Santo, and to abandon +the Countrie of Florida, lest hee should perish as Naruaez had done: +declaring, that if he went forward, he could not returne backe when he +would, and that the Indians would gather vp that small quantitie of Maiz +which was left. Whereunto the Gouernour answered, that he would not go +backe, till he had seene with his eies that which they reported: saying, +that he could not beleeue it, and that wee should be put out of doubt +before it were long. And he sent to Luys de Moscoso to come presently from +Cale, and that he tarried for him here. Luys de Moscoso and many others +thought, that from Apalache they should returne backe; and in Cale they +buried their yron tooles, and diuers other things. They came to Caliquen +with great trouble; because the Countrie, which the Gouernour had passed +by, was spoiled and destitute of Maiz. After all the people were come +together, hee commanded a bridge to bee made ouer a Riuer that passed +neere the towne. Hee departed from Caliquen the 10. of September, and +carried the Cacique with him. After hee had trauelled three daies, there +came Indians peaceably, to visit their Lord, and euery day met vs on the +way playing vpon flutes: which is a token that they vse, that men may know +that they come in peace. They said, that in our way before there was a +Cacique, whose name was Vzachil, a kinseman of the Cacique of Caliquen +their Lord, waiting for him with many presents, and they desired the +Gouernour that he would loose the Cacique. But he would not, fearing that +they would rise, and would not giue him any guides, and sent them away +from day to day with good words. He trauelled fiue daies, he passed by +some smal townes, he came to a towne called Napetuca, the 15. day of +September. Thither came 14. or 15. Indians, and besought the Gouernor to +let loose the Cacique of Caliquen their Lord. He answered them that he +held him not in prison, but that hee would haue him to accompanie him to +Vzachil. The Gouernour had notice by Iohn Ortiz, that an Indian told him +how they determined to gather themselues together, and come vpon him, and +giue him battell, and take away the Cacique from him. The day that it was +agreed vpon, the Gouernour commanded his men to bee in a readines, and +that the horsemen should bee readie armed and on horsebacke euery one in +his lodging, because the Indians might not see them, and so more +confidently come to the towne. There came four hundred Indians in sight of +the campe, with their bowes and arrowes, and placed themselues in a wood, +and sent two Indians to bid the Gouernour to deliuer them the Cacique. The +Gouernour with sixe footemen leading the Cacique by the hand, and talking +with him, to secure the Indians, went toward the place where they were: +And seeing a fit time, commanded to sound a trumpet: and presently those +that were in the towne in the houses, both horse and foot, set vpon the +Indians, which were so suddenly assaulted, that the greatest care they had +was which way they should flee: They killed two horses; one was the +Gouernours, and hee was presently horsed againe vpon another. There were +30. or 40. Indians slaine. The rest fled to two very great lakes, that +were somewhat distant the one from the other: There they were swimming, +and the Christians round about them. The caliuermen and crossebowmen shot +at them from the banke: but the distance being great and shooting afarre +off, they did them no hurt. The Gouernour commanded that the same night +they should compasse one of the lakes, because they were so great, that +there were not men enow to compasse them both: being beset, assoone as +night shut in, the Indians, with determination to runne away, came +swimming very softly to the banke; and to hide themselues, they put a +water lillie leafe on their heads. The horsemen assoone as they perceiued +it to stirre, ran into the water to the horses breasts, and the Indians +fled againe into the lake. So this night passed without any rest on both +sides, Iohn Ortiz perswaded them, that seeing they could not escape, they +should yeeld themselues to the Gouernour: which they did, enforced +thereunto by the coldnes of the water; and one by one, hee first whom the +cold did first ouercome, cried to Iohn Ortiz desiring that they would not +kill him, for he came to put himselfe into the hands of the Gouernour. By +the morning watch they made an end of yeelding themselues: only 12. +principall men, being more honorable and valorous then the rest, resolued +rather to die then to come into his hands. And the Indians of Paracossi, +which were now loosed out of chaines, went swimming to them, and pulled +them out by the haire of their heads, and they were all put in chaines; +and the next day were diuided among the Christians for their seruice. +Being thus in captiuitie, they determined to rebell; and gaue in charge +(M615) to an Indian, which was interpretour, and held to be valiant, that +assoone as the Goueruour did come to speak with him, hee should cast his +hands about his necke, and choke him: Who, when he saw opportunitie, laid +hands on the Gouernour, and before he cast his hands about his necke, he +gaue him such a blow on the nostrils, that hee made them gush out with +blood, and presently all the rest did rise. He that could get any weapons +at hand, or the handle wherewith he did grind the Maiz, sought to kill his +master, or the first hee met before him: and hee that could get a lance or +sword at hand, bestirred himselfe in such sort with it, as though he had +vsed it all his life time. One Indian in the market place enclosed +betweene 15. or 20. footemen, made a way like a bull with a sword in his +hand, till certaine halbardiers of the Gouernour came, which killed him. +Another gat vp with a lance to a left made of canes, which they build to +keep their Maiz in, which they call a Barbacoa, and there hee made such a +noise, as though tenne men had been there defending the doore: they slew +him with a partisan. (M616) The Indians were in all about two hundred men. +They were all subdued. And some of the youngest the Gouernour gaue to them +which had good chaines, and were carefull to looke to them that they gat +not away. Al the rest he commanded to be put to death, being tied to a +stake in the midst of the market place: and the Indians of the Paracossi +did shoote them to death. + + + +Chap. XII. How the Gouernour came to Apalache, and was informed, that +within the land, there was much gold. + + +The Gouernour departed from Napetuca the 23. of September: he lodged by a +Riuer, where two Indians brought him a buck from the Cacique of Vzachil. +The next day he passed by a great towne called Hapaluya and lodged at +Vzachil, and found no people in it, because they durst not tarrie for the +notice the Indians had of the slaughter of Napetuca. He found in that +towne great store of Maiz, French beanes, and pompions, which is their +foode, and that wherewith the Christians there sustained themselues. The +Maiz is like course millet, and the pompions are better and more sauorie +than those of Spaine. From thence the Gouernour sent two Captaines each a +sundry way to seeke the Indians. They tooke an hundred men and women: of +which aswel there as in other places where they made any inrodes, the +Captaine chose one or two for the Gouernour, and diuided the rest to +himselfe, and those that went with him. They led these Indians in chaines +with yron collars about their neckes: and they serued to carrie their +stuffe, and to grind their Maiz, and for other seruices that such captiues +should doe. Sometimes it happened that going for wood or Maiz with them, +they killed the Christian that led them, and ran away with the chaine: +others filed their chaines by night with a peece of stone, wherewith they +cut them, and vse it in stead of yron. Those that were perceiued paid for +themselues, and for the rest, because they should not dare to doe the like +another time. The women and young boyes, when they were once an hundred +leagues from their Countrie, and had forgotten things, they let goe loose, +and so they serued; and in a very short space they vnderstood the language +of the Christians. From Vzachil the Gouernour departed toward Apalache, +and in two daies iournie, hee came to a towne called Axille, and from +thence forward the Indians were carelesse, because they had as yet no +notice of the Christians. The next day in the morning, the first of +October, he departed from thence, and commanded a bridge to bee made ouer +a Riuer which hee was to passe. The deepe of the Riuer where the bridge +was made, was a stones cast, and forward a crossebow shot the water came +to the waste; and the wood, whereby the Indians came to see if they could +defend the passage, and disturbe those which made the bridge, was very hie +and thicke. The crossebow men so bestirred themselues that they made them +giue back: and certaine plancks were cast into the Riuer, whereon the men +passed, which made good the passage. The Gouernour passed vpon Wednesday, +which was S. Francis his day, and lodged at a towne which was called +Vitachuco, subiect to Apalache: he found it burning; for the Indians had +set it on fire. From thence forward the countrie was much inhabited, and +had great store of Maiz. Hee passed by many granges, like hamlets. On +Sunday the 25. of October, he came to a towne, which is called Vzela, and +vpon Tuesday to Anaica Apalache, where the Lord of all that Countrie and +Prouince was resident: in which towne the Campemaster, whose office it is +to quarter out, and lodge men, did lodge all the companie round about +within a league, and halfe a league of it. There were other townes, where +was great store of Maiz, Pomions, French Beanes, and Plummes of the +Countrie, which are better then those of Spaine, and they grow in the +fields without planting. The victuals that were thought necessarie to +passe the winter, were gathered from these townes to Anaica Apalache. The +Gouernour was informed, that the sea was ten leagues from thence. Hee +presently sent a Capiaine thither with horsemen and footemen: And sixe +leagues on the way, he found a towne, which was named Ochete, and so came +to the Sea: and found a great tree felled, and cut into peeces, with +stakes set vp like mangers, and saw the skulles of horses. Hee returned +with this newes. And that was held for certaine, which was reported of +Pamphilo de Naruaez, that there hee had builded the barkes wherewith he +went out of the land of Florida, and was cast away at sea. Presently the +Gouernour sent Iohn Danusco with 30. horsemen to the port de Spirito +Santo, where Calderan was, with order, that they should abandon the port, +and all of them come to Apalache. Hee departed on Saturday the 17 of +Nouember. In Vzachil and other townes that stood in the way he found great +store of people already carelesse. Hee would take none of the Indians, for +not hindring himselfe, because it behoued him to giue them no leasure to +gather themselues together. Hee passed through the townes by night, and +rested without the townes three or foure houres. In tenne daies he came to +the Port de Spirito Santo. Hee carried with him 20. Indian women which hee +tooke in Ytara, and Potano, neere vnto Cale, and sent them to Donna +Isabella in the two carauels, which hee sent from the Port de Spirito +Santo to Cuba. And he carried all the footemen in the brigandines, and +coasting along the shore, came to Apalache. And Calderan with the +horsemen, and some crossebowmen on foot went by land; and in some places +the Indians set vpon him, and wounded some of his men. Assoone as he came +to Apalache presently the Gouernour sent sawed plankes and spikes to the +sea side, wherewith was made a piragua or barke, wherein were embarked 30. +men well armed; which went out of the Bay to the Sea, looking for the +brigandines. Sometimes they fought with the Indians, which passed along +the harbour in their canoes. Vpon Saturday the 29. of Nouember, there came +an Indian through the Watch vndiscouered, and set the towne on fire, and +with the great wind that blew, two parts of it were consumed in a short +time. On Sonday the 28. of December came Iohn Danusco with the +brigandines. The Gouernour sent Francisco Maldonado a captaine of footemen +with 50 men to discouer the coast Westward, and to seeke some Port, +because he had determined to goe by land, and discouer that part. That day +there went out eight horsemen by commandement of the Gouernour into the +field, two leagues about the towne to seeke Indians: for they were now so +emboldened, that within two crossebow shot of the camp, they came and slew +men. They found two men and a woman gathering French Beanes: the men, +though they might haue fled, yet because they would not leaue the woman, +which was one of their wiues, they resolued to die fighting: and before +they were slaine, they wounded three horses, whereof one died within a few +daies after. Calderan going with his men by the Sea-coast, from a wood +that was neere the place, the Indians set vpon him, and made him forsake +his way, and many of them that went with him forsooke some necessarie +victuals, which they carried with them. Three or foure daies after the +limited time giuen by the Gouernour to Maldonado for his going and +comming, being alreadie determined and resolued, if within eight daies he +did not come to tarrie no longer for him, he came and brought an Indian +from a Prouince, which was called Ochus, sixtie leagues Westward from +Apalache; where he had found a good Port of good depth and defense against +weather. And because the Gouernour hoped to find a good countrie forward +he was well contented. And he sent Maldonado for victuals to Hauana, with +order, that he should tarrie for him at the Port of Ochus, which hee had +discouered, for hee would goe seeke it by land: and if he should chance to +stay, and not come thither that summer, that then he should returne to +Hauana, and should come again the next summer after and tarrie for him at +that port, for he said hee would doe none other thing but goe to seeke +Ochus. Francisco Maldonado departed, and in his place for captaine of the +footemen remained Iohn de Guzman. (M617) Of those Indians which were taken +in Napetuca, the treasurer Iohn Gaytan had a young man, which said, that +he was not of that countrie, but of another farre off toward the +Sunrising, and that it was long since he had trauelled to see countries; +and that his countrie was called Yupaha, and that a woman did gouern it; +and that the towne where she was resident was of a wonderfull bignesse, +and that many lords round about were tributaries to her; and some gaue her +clothes, and others gold in abundance; and hee told, how it was taken out +of the mines, and was moulten and refined, as if hee had seene it done, or +the diuel had taught it him. So that all those which knew anything +concerning the same, said that it was impossible to giue so good a +relation, without hauing seene it; And all of them, as if they had seene +it, by the signes that he gaue, beleeued all that hee said to be true. + + + +Chap. XIII. How the Gouernour departed from Apalache to seeke Yupaha, and +of that which happened vnto him. + + +On Wednesday the third of March, of the yeere 1540. the Gouernor departed +from Anaica Apalache to seeke Yupaha. He commanded his men to goe prouided +with Maiz for sixtie leagues of desert. The horsemen carried their Maiz on +their horses, and the footemen at their sides; because the Indians that +were for seruice, with their miserable life that they lead that winter, +being naked and in chaines, died for the most part. Within foure daies +iournie they came to a great Riuer: and they made a piragua or ferrie +bote, and because of the great current, they made a cable with chaines, +which they fastened on both sides of the Riuer; and the ferrie bote went +along by it; and the horses swam ouer, being drawne with capstans. Hauing +passed the Riuer, in a day and an halfe, they came to a towne called +Capachiqui. Vpon Friday the 11. of March, they found Indians in armes. The +next day fiue Christians went to seeke morters, which the Indians haue to +beate their Maiz, and they went to certaine houses on the backside of the +Campe enuironed with a wood: And within the wood were many Indians which +came to spie vs; of the which came other fiue and set vpon vs. One of the +Christians came running away, giuing an alarme vnto the Campe. Those which +were most readie answered the alarme. They found one Christian dead, and +three sore wounded. The Indians fled vnto a lake adioyning neere a very +thicke wood, where the horses could not enter. The Gouernour departed from +Capachiqui, and passed through a desert. On Wednesday the 21. of the +moneth he came to a towne called Toalli. And from thence forward there was +a difference in the houses. For those which were behind vs were thatched +with straw, and those of Toalli were couered with reeds in manner of +tiles. These houses are verie cleanly. Some of them had walles daubed with +clay, which shewed like a mudwall. In all the cold countrie the Indians +haue euery one a house for the winter daubed with clay within and without, +and the doore is very little: they shut it by night, and make fire within; +so that they are in it as warme as in a stoue: and so it continueth all +night that they need not clothes: and besides these, they haue others for +summer; and their kitchins neere them, where they make fire and bake their +bread: and they haue barbacoas wherein they keepe their Maiz; which is an +house set vp in the aire vpon foure stakes, boorded about like a chamber, +and the floore of it is of cane hurdles. The difference which Lords or +principall mens houses haue from the rest, besides they be greater, is, +that they haue great galleries in their fronts, and vnder them seates made +of canes in manner of benches: and round about them they haue many lofts, +wherein they lay vp that which the Indians doe giue them for tribute, +which is Maiz, Deeres skins, and mantles of the Countrie, which are like +blankets: they make them of the inner rinde of the barke of trees, and +some of a kind of grasse like vnto nettles, which being beaten, is like +vnto flaxe. The women couer themselues with these mantles; they put one +about them from the wast downeward; and another ouer their shoulder, with +their right arme out, like vnto the Egyptians. The men weare but one +mantle vpon their shoulders after the same manner: and haue their secrets +hid with a Deeres skin, made like a linen breech, which was wont to be +vsed in Spaine. The skins are well corried, and they giue them what colour +they list, so perfect, that if it be red, it seemeth a very fine cloath in +graine, and the blacke is most fine: and of the same leather they make +shooes; and they die their mantles in the same colours. The Gouernour +departed from Toalli the 24. of March: he came on Thursday at euening to a +small Riuer, where a bridge was made whereon the people passed, and Benit +Fernandez a Portugall fell off from it, and was drowned. Assoone as the +Gouernour had passed the Riuer, a little distance thence he found a towne +called Achese. The Indians had no notice of the Christians: they leaped +into a Riuer: some men and women were taken; among which was one that +vnderstood the youth which guided the Gouernour to Yupaha: whereby that +which he had reported was more confirmed. For they passed through +Countries of diuers languages, and some which he vnderstood not. The +Gouernour sent by one of the Indians that were taken to call the Cacique, +which was on the other side of the Riuer. Hee came and made this speech +following: + +Right high, right mightie, and excellent Lord, those things which seldome +happen doe cause admiration. What then may the sight of your Lordship, and +your people doe to mee and mine, whom we neuer saw? especially being +mounted on such fierce beasts as your horses are, entring with such +violence and furie into my Countrie, without my knowledge of your comming. +It was a thing so strange, and caused such feare and terrour in our +mindes, that it was not in our power to stay and receiue your Lordship +with the solemnitie due to so high and renowmed a Prince, as your Lordship +is. And trusting in your greatnesse and singular vertues, I doe not onely +hope to be freed from blame, but also to receiue fauours: and the first +which I demand of your Lordship is, that you will vse me, my Countrie, and +subiects as your owne; and the second, that you will tell mee who you are, +and whence you come, and whither you goe, and what you seeke, that I the +better may serue you therein. + +The Gouernour answered him that hee thanked him as much for his offer and +good will, as if hee had receiued it, and as if hee had offered him a +great treasure; and told him that he was the sonne of the Sun, and came +from those parts where he dwelt, and trauelled through that Countrie, and +sought the greatest Lord, and richest Prouince that was in it. The Cacique +told him; that farther forward dwelt a great Lord, and that his dominion +was called Ocute. He gaue him a guide, and an interpretour for that +Prouince. The Gouernour commanded his Indians to bee set free, and +trauelled through his Countrie vp a Riuer very well inhabited. He departed +from his towne the first of Aprill; and left a very high crosse of Wood +set vp in the middest of the market place: and because the time gaue no +more leasure, hee declared to him onely, that that crosse was a memorie of +the same, whereon Christ, which was God and man, and created the heauens +and the earth, suffered for our saluation: therefore he exhorted them that +they should reuerence it: and they made shew as though they would doe so. +The fourth of Aprill the Gouernour passed by a towne called Altamaca, and +the 10. of the moneth he came to Ocute. The Cacique sent him two thousand +Indians with a present, to wit, many conies, and partridges, bread of +Maiz, two hens, and many dogs: which among the Christians were esteemed as +if they had been fat wethers, because of the great want of flesh meate and +salt, and hereof in many places, and many times was great need; and they +were so scarse, that if a man fell sicke, there was nothing to cherish him +withall: and with a sicknesse, that in another place easilie might haue +been remedied, he consumed away till nothing but skinne and bones were +left: and they died of pure weaknes, some of them saying, If I had a slice +of meate, or a few cornes of salt, I should not die. The Indians want no +fleshmeat; for they kill with their arrowes many deere, hennes, conies, +and other wild fowle: for they are very cunning at it: which skill the +Christians had not: and though they had it, they had no leasure to vse it: +for the most of the time they spent in trauell, and durst not presume to +straggle aside. And because they were thus scanted of flesh, when sixe +hundred men that went with Soto, came to any towne, and found 30. or 40. +dogs, he that could get one and kill it, thought himselfe no small man: +and he that killed it, and gaue not his Captaine one quarter, if he knew +it, he frowned on him, and made him feele it, in the watches, or in any +other matter of labour that was offered, wherein hee might doe him a +displeasure. On Monday the 12. of Aprill, the Gouernour departed from +Ocute. (M618) The Cacique gaue him two hundred Tamenes, to wit, Indians to +carrie burdens: hee passed through a towne, the Lord whereof was named +Cofaqui, and came to a prouince of an Indian Lord, called Patofa, who, +because he was in peace with the Lord of Ocute, and with the other +bordering Lords, had many daies before notice of the Gouernour, and +desired to see him: He came to visit him, and made this speech following. + +Mightie Lord, now with good reason I will craue of fortune to requite this +my so great prosperitie with some small aduersitie; and I will count my +selfe verie rich, seeing I haue obtained that, which in this world I most +desired, which is, to see, and bee able to doe your Lordship some seruice. +And although the tongue bee the image of that which is in the heart, and +that the contentment which I feele in my heart I cannot dissemble, yet is +it not sufficient wholly to manifest the same. Where did this your +countrie, which I doe gouerne, deserue to be visited of so soueraigne, and +so excellent a Prince, whom all the rest of the world ought to obey and +serue? And those which inhabite it being so base, what shall be the issue +of such happines, if their memorie doe not represent vnto them some +aduersitie that may betide them, according to the order of fortune? If +from this day forward we may be capable of this benefit, that your +Lordship will hold vs for your owne, we cannot faile to be fauoured and +maintained in true iustice and reason, and to haue the name of men. For +such as are void of reason and iustice, may be compared to brute beastes. +For mine owne part, from my very heart with reuerence due to such a +Prince, I offer my selfe vnto your Lordship, and beseech you; that in +reward of this my true good will, you will vouchsafe to make vse of mine +owne person, my countrie and subiects. + +The Gouernour answered him, that his offers and good wil declared by the +effect, did highly please him, whereof he would alwaies be mindfull to +honour and fauour him as his brother. This countrie, from the first +peaceable Cacique, vnto the Prouince of Patofa, which were fiftie leagues, +is a fat countrie, beautifull, and very fruitfull, and very well watered, +and full of good Riuers. And from thence to the Port de Spirito Santo, +where wee first arriued in the land of Florida, (which may bee 350. +leagues little more or lesse) is a barren land, and the most of it groues +of wild Pine-trees, low and full of lakes, and in some places very hie and +thicke groues, whither the Indians that were in armes fled, so that no man +could finde them, neither could any horses enter into them. Which was an +inconuenience to the Christians, in regard of the victuals which they +found conueied away: and of the trouble which they had in seeking of +Indians to bee their guides. + + + +Chap. XIIII. How the Gouernour departed from the Prouince of Patofa, and +went through a desert, where he and all his men fell into great distresse, +and extreme miserie. + + +In the towne of Patofa the youth, which the Gouernour carried with him for +an interpretour and a guide, began to fome at the mouth, and tumble on the +ground, as one possessed with the diuell: They said a Gospell ouer him; +and the fit left him. And he said, that foure daies iournie from thence +toward the Sunne rising, was the Prouince that he spake of. The Indians of +Patofa said, that toward that part they knew no habitation; but that +toward the Northwest, they knew a Prouince which was called Coca, a verie +plentifull countrie, which had very great townes in it. The Cacique told +the Gouernour, that if he would go thither, he would giue him guides and +Indians for burdens; and if he would goe whither the youth spake of, that +he would likewise giue him those that he needed: and so with louing words +and offers of courtesie, they tooke their leaues the one of the other. Hee +gaue him seuen hundred Indians to beare burdens. He tooke Maiz for foure +daies iournie. Hee trauelled sixe daies by a path which grew narrow more +and more, till it was lost altogether: (M619) He went where the youth did +lead him, and passed two Riuers which were waded: each of them was two +crossebowshot ouer: the water came to the stirrops, and had so great a +current, that it was needfull for the horsemen to stand one before +another, that the footemen might passe aboue them leaning vnto them. +(M620) He came to another Riuer of a greater current and largenes, which +was passed with more trouble, because the horses did swim at the comming +out about a lances length. Hauing passed this Riuer, the Gouernor came to +a groue of pinetrees, and threatned the youth, and made as though hee +would haue cast him to the dogges, because he had told him a lie, saying +it was but foure daies iournie, and they had trauelled nine, and euery day +7. or 8. leagues, and the men by this time were growne wearie and weake, +and the horses leane through the great scanting of the Maiz. The youth +said, that hee knew not where hee was. It saued him that he was not cast +to the dogges, that there was neuer another whom Iohn Ortiz did +vnderstand. The Gouernour with them two, and with some horsemen and +footemen, leauing the Campe in a groue of pinetrees, trauelled that day 5. +or 6. leagues to seek a way, and returned at night very comfortlesse, and +without finding any signe of way or towne. The next day there were sundrie +opinions deliuered, whether they should goe backe, or what they should +doe: and because backward the Countrie whereby they had passed was greatly +spoiled and destitute of Maiz, and that which they brought with them was +spent, and the men were very weake, and the horses likewise, they doubted +much whether they might come to any place where they might helpe +themselues. And besides this, they were of opinion, that going in that +sort out of order, that any Indians would presume to set vpon them, so +that with hunger, or with warre, they could not escape. The Gouernour +determined to send horsemen from thence euery way to seeke habitation: and +the next day he sent foure Captaines, euery one a sundrie way with eight +horsemen. At night they came againe, leading their horses, or driuing them +with a sticke before; for they were so wearie, that they could not lead +them; neither found they any way nor signe of habitation. The next day, +the Gouernour sent other foure with as many horsemen that could swim, to +passe the Ose and Riuers which they should find, and they had choice +horses the best that were in the Campe. The Captaines were Baltasar de +Gallegos, which went vp the Riuer; and Iohn Danusco, downe the Riuer: +Alfonso Romo, and Iohn Rodriguez Lobillo went into the inward parts of the +land. (M621) The Gouernour brought with him into Florida thirteene sowes, +and had by this time three hundred swine: He commanded euery man should +haue halfe a pound of hogs flesh euery day: and this hee did three or +foure daies after the Maiz was all spent. With this small quantitie of +flesh, and some sodden hearbs, with much trouble the people were +sustained. The Gouernour dismissed the Indians of Patofa, because hee had +no food to giue them; who desiring to accompanie and serue the Christians +in their necessitie, making shew that it grieued them very much to +returne, vntill they had left them in a peopled Countrie, returned to +their owne home. Iohn Danusco came on Sunday late in the euening, and +brought newes that he had found a little towne 12. or 13. leagues from +thence: he brought a woman and a boy that he tooke there. With his comming +and with those newes, the Gouernour and all the rest were so glad, that +they seemed at that instant to haue returned from death to life. Vpon +Monday the twentie sixe of Aprill, the Gouernour departed to goe to the +towne, which was called Aymay; and the Christians named it the towne of +Reliefe. He left where the Camp had lien at the foote of a Pinetree a +letter buried, and letters carued in the barke of the pine, the contents +whereof was this: Dig heere at the foot of this pine, and you shal find a +letter. And this he did, because when the Captaines came, which were sent +to seeke some habitation, they might see the letter, and know what was +become of the Gouernour, and which way he was gone. There was no other way +to the town, but the markes that Iohn Danusco left made vpon the trees. +The Gouernour with some of them that had the best horses came to it on the +Monday: And all the rest inforcing themselues the best they could, some of +them lodged within two leagues of the towne, some within three or foure, +euery one as he was able to goe, and his strength serued him. There was +found in the towne a storehouse full of the flowre of parched Maiz; and +some Maiz, which was distributed by allowance. Here were foure Indians +taken, and none of them would confesse any other thing, but that they knew +of none other habitation. (M622) The Gouernour commanded one of them to be +burned; and presently another confessed, that two daies iourney from +thence, there was a Prouince that was called Cutifa Chiqui. Vpon Wednesday +came the Captaines Baltasar de Gallegos, Alfonso Romo, and Iohn Rodriguez +Lobillo: for they had found the letter, and followed the way which the +Gouernour had taken toward the towne. Two men of Iohn Rodriguez companie +were lost, because their horses tired: the Gouernour checked him very sore +for leauing them behind, and sent to seeke them: and assoone as they came, +he departed toward Cutifa Chiqui. In the way three Indians were taken, +which said, that the Ladie of that Countrie had notice alreadie of the +Christians, and staied for them in a towne of hers. The Gouernour sent by +one of them to offer her his friendship, and to aduertise her how he was +comming thither. The Gouernour came vnto the towne: and presently there +came foure canoes to him; in one of them came a sister of the Ladie, and +approching to the Gouernour she said these words: + +Excellent Lord, my sister sendeth vnto you by me to kisse your Lordships +hands, and to signifie vnto you, that the cause why she came not in +person, is, that she thinketh to do you greater seruice staying behind, as +she doth, giuing order, that with all speed, al her canoes be readie, that +your Lordship may passe the Riuer, and take your rest, which shall be +presentlie performed. + +The Gouernour gaue her thankes, and she returned to the other side of the +Riuer. Within a little while the Ladie came out of the towne in a Chaire, +whereon certaine of the principall Indians brought her to the Riuer. She +entred into a barge, which had the sterne tilted ouer, and on the floore +her mat readie laied with two cushions vpon it one vpon another, where she +sate her downe; and with her came her principall Indians in other barges, +which did wait vpon her. She went to the place where the Gouernour was, +and at her comming she made this speech following: + +Excellent Lord, I wish this comming of your Lordship into these your +Countries, to be most happie: although my power be not answerable to my +wil, and my seruices be not according to my desire, nor such as so high a +Prince, as your Lordship, deserueth; yet since the good will is rather to +be accepted, then all the treasures of the world, that without it are +offered, with most vnfaileable and manifest affection, I offer you my +person, lands, and subiects, and this small seruice. + +And therewithal she presented vnto him great store of clothes of the +Countrie, which shee brought in other canoes; to wit, mantles and skinnes; +and tooke from her owne necke a great cordon of perles, and cast it about +the necke of the Gouernour, entertaining him with very gracious speeches +of loue and courtesie, and commanded canoes to be brought thither, wherein +the Gouernour and his people passed the Riuer. (M623) Assoone as hee was +lodged in the towne, she sent him another present of many hens. This +Countrie was verie pleasant, fat, and hath goodly meadows by the Riuers. +Their woods are thin, and ful of Walnut trees and Mulberrie trees. They +said the sea was two daies journey from thence. Within a league, and a +halfe a league about this towne, was great townes dispeopled, and +ouergrowne with grasse; which shewed, that they had been long without +inhabitants. The Indians said, that two yeere before there was a plague in +that countrie, and that they remooued to other townes. There was in their +storehouses great quantitie of clothes, mantles of yarne made of the +barkes of trees, and others made of feathers, white, greene red, and +yellow, very fine after their vse, and profitable for winter. There were +also many Deeres skinnes, with many compartiments traced in them, and some +of them made into hose, stockings and shooes. And the Ladie perceiuing, +that the Christians esteemed the perles, aduised the Gouernour to send to +search certaine graues that were in that towne, and that hee should find +many: and that if hee would send to the dispeopled townes, hee might load +all his horses. They sought the graues of the towne, and there found +fourteene rooues of perles, and little babies and birdes made of them. The +people were browne, well made, and well proportioned, and more ciuill then +any others that were seene in all the countrie of Florida, and all of them +well shod and clothed. The youth told the Gouernour, that hee began now to +enter into the land which hee spake of: and some credit was giuen him that +it was so, because hee vnderstood the language of the Indians: and hee +requested that hee might bee christened, for hee said he desired to become +a Christian: Hee was christened, and named Peter; and the Gouernour +commanded him to be loosed from a chaine, in which vntill that time he had +gone. This countrie, as the Indians reported, had beene much inhabited, +and had the fame of a good countrie. And, as it seemeth, the youth which +was the Gouernours guide, had heard of it, and that which he knew by +heresay, hee affirmed that hee had seene, and augmented at his pleasure. +In this towne was found a dagger, and beades, that had belonged to +Christians. (M624) The Indians reported that Christians had been in the +hauen, which was two daies iourney from this towne, many yeeres agoe. Hee +that came thither was the Gouernour, the Licenciate Lucas Vasquez de +Ayllon, which went to conquer this countrie, and at his comming to the +Port hee died; and there was a diuision, quarrels and slaughters betweene +some principall men which went with him, for the principall gouernment: +And without knowing anything of the countrie they returned home to +Hispaniola. All the company thought it good to inhabite that countrie, +because it was in a temperat climate: And that if it were inhabited, al +the shippes of New Spaine, of Peru, Santa Martha, and Tierra firme in +their returne for Spaine, might well touch there: because it was in their +way; and because it was a good countrie, and sited fit to raise +commoditie. The Gouernour, since it was his intent to seeke another +treasure, like that of Atabalipa Lord of Peru, was not contented with a +good countrie, nor with perles, though many of them were worth their +weight in gold. And if the countrie had been diuided among the Christians, +those which the Indians had fished for afterward, would haue been of more +value; for those which they had, because they burned them in the fire, did +leese their colour. The Gouernour answered them, that vrged him to +inhabit, That in all the countrie there were not victuals to susteine his +men one moneth; and that it was needfull to resort to the Port of Ocus, +where Maldanado was to stay for them: and that if no richer Countrie were +found, they might returne againe to that whensoeuer they would: and in the +meane time the Indians would sow their fields, and it would be better +furnished with Maiz. He inquired of the Indians, whether they had notice +of any great Lord farther into the land. They told him, that 12. daies +iournie from thence, there was a Prouince called Chiaha, subiect to the +Lord of Coca. Presently the Gouernour determined to seeke that land. And +being a sterne man, and of few words, though he was glad to sift and know +the opinion of all men, yet after hee had deliuered his owne, he would not +be contraried, and alwaies did what liked himselfe, and so all men did +condescend vnto his will. And though it seemed an errour to leaue that +Countrie, (for others might haue been sought round about, where the people +might haue been sustained, vntill the haruest had been readie there, and +the Maiz gathered) yet there was none that would say any thing against +him, after they knew his resolution. + + + +Chap. XV. How the Gouernour departed from Cutifa-Chiqui to seeke the +Prouince of Coca; and what happened vnto him in the way. + + +The Gouernour departed from Cutifa-Chiqui the third day of May. And +because the Indians had reuolted, and the will of the Ladie was perceiued, +that if she could, she would depart without giuing any guides or men for +burdens, for the wrongs which the Christians had done to the Indians: (for +there neuer want some among many of the base sort, that for a little doe +put themselues and others in danger of vndoing.) The Gouernour commanded +her to be kept in safegard, and carried with him, not with so good vsage +as she deserued for the good wil she shewed and good entertainment that +she had made him. And he verified that old prouerb which saith; For +weldoing I receiue euill. And so he carried her on foot with his bondwomen +to looke vnto her. In all the townes where the Gouernour passed, the Ladie +commanded the Indians to come and carrie the burdens from one towne to +another. We passed through her Countrie an hundred leagues, in which, as +we saw, she was much obeyed; For the Indians did all that she commanded +them with great efficacie and diligence. Peter the youth that was our +guide, said, that she was not the Ladie her selfe, but a neece of hers, +which came to that towne to execute certaine principal men by commandement +of the Ladie, which had withheld her tribute: which words were not +beleeued, because of the lies which they had found in him before: but they +bare with all things, because of the need which they had of him, to +declare what the Indians said. (M625) In seuen daies space the Gouernour +came to a Prouince called Chalaque, the poorest Country of Maiz that was +seene in Florida. The Indians fed vpon rootes and herbes which they seeke +in the fields, and vpon wild beasts, which they kil with their bowes and +arrowes: and it is a verie gentle people. All of them goe naked, and are +very leane. There was a Lord, which for a great present, brought the +Gouernour two Deeres skins: and there were in that Countrie many wild +hennes. In one towne they made him a present of 700. hennes, and so in +other townes they sent him those which they had or could get. From this +Prouince to another, which is called Xualla, he spent fiue daies: here he +found very little Maiz; and for this cause, though the people were +wearied, and the horses very weake, he staied no more but two daies. From +Ocute to Cutifa-chiqui, may bee some hundred and thirtie leagues, whereof +80. are wildernesse. From Cutifa-chiqui to Xualla, two hundred and fiftie, +and it is an hillie Countrie. The Gouernour departed from Xualla toward +Guaxule: he passed very rough and hie hilles. In that iournie, the Ladie +of Cutifa-chiqui (whom the Gouernour carried with him, as is afore said, +with purpose to carrie her to Guaxule, because her territorie reached +thither) going on a day with the bondwomen which lead her, went out of the +way, and entred into a wood, saying, she went to ease her selfe, and so +she deceiued them, and hid her selfe in the wood; and though they sought +her they could not find her. She carried away with her a little chest made +of canes in manner of a coffer, which they call Petaca, full of vnbored +perles. Some which could iudge of them, said, that they were of great +value. An Indian woman that waited on her did carrie them. The Gouernour +not to discontent her altogether, left them with her, making account that +in Guaxule he would ask them of her, when he gaue her leaue to returne: +which coffer she carried away, and went to Xualla with three slaues which +fled from the Campe, and one horseman which remained behind, who falling +sicke of an ague went out of the way, and was lost. This man, whose name +was Alimamos, dealt with the slaues to change their euill purpose, and +returne with him to the Christians: which two of them did; and Alimamos +and they ouertooke the Gouernour 50. leagues from thence in a Prouince +called Chiaha; and reported how the Ladie remained in Xualla with a slaue +of Andrew de Vasconcellos, which would not come backe with them, and that +of a certaintie they liued as man and wife together, and meant to goe both +to Cutifa-chiqui. Within fiue daies the Gouernour came to Guaxule. The +Indians there gaue him a present of 300 dogges, because they saw the +Christians esteeme them, and sought them to feed on them: for among them +they are not eaten. In Guaxule, and all that way was very little Maiz: The +Gouernour sent from thence an Indian with a message to the Cacique of +Chiaha, to desire him to gather some Maiz thither, that he might rest a +few daies in Chiaha. The Gouernour departed from Guaxule, and in two daies +iournie came to a towne called Canasagua. There met him on the way 20. +Indians euery one laden with a basket full of Mulberries: for there be +many, and those very good, from Culifa-chiqui thither, and so forward in +other Prouinces, and also nuts and plummes. And the trees grow in the +fields without planting or dressing them, and are as big and rancke, as +though they grew in gardens digged and watered. From the time that the +Gouernour departed from Canasagua, hee iournied fiue daies through a +desert; and two leagues before hee came to Chiaha, there met him 15. +Indians loaded with Maiz, which the Cacique had sent; and they told him on +his behalfe that he waited his comming with 20. barnes full of it; and +farther that himselfe his countrie, and subiects, and al things els were +at his seruice. On the 5. day of Iune, the Gouernour entred into Chiaha: +The Cacique voided his owne houses, in which he lodged and receiued him +with much ioy, saying these words following: + +Mightie and excellent Lord, I hold my selfe for so happie a man, in that +it hath pleased your Lordship to vse me, that nothing could haue happened +vnto me of more contentment, nor that I would haue esteemed so much. From +Guaxule your Lordship sent vnto me, that I should prepare Maiz for you in +this towne for two moneths: Here I haue for you 20. barnes full of the +choisest that in all the countrie could be found. If your lordship bee not +entertained by mee in such sort, as is fit for so hie a Prince, respect my +tender age, which excuseth me from blame, and receiue my good will, which +with much loyaltie, truth, and sinceritie, I will alwaies shew in any +thing, which shall concerne your Lordships seruice. + +The Gouernour answered him, that he thanked him very much for his seruice +and offer, and that he would alwaies account him as a brother. There was +in this towne much butter in gourds melted like oile: they said it was the +fat of beares. There was found also great store of oile of walnuts, which +was cleare as butter, and of good taste, and a pot full of honie of bees, +which neither before or afterward was seene in all the countrie. The towne +was in an Island betweene two armes of a Riuer, and was seated nigh one of +them. The Riuer diuided it selfe into those two branches two crossebow +shot aboue the towne, and meeteth againe a league beneath the same. The +plaine betweene both the branches is sometimes one crosse-bowe shot ouer. +The branches are very broad, and both of them may be waded ouer. There +were all along them verie good meadowes, and many fields sowne with Maiz. +And because the Indians staid in their towns the Gouernour only lodged in +the houses of the Cacique, and his people in the fields; where there was +euer a tree, euerie one tooke one for himselfe. Thus the camp lay +separated one from another, and out of order. The Gouernour winked at it, +because the Indians were in peace, and because it was very hot, and the +people should haue suffered great extremities, if it had not bin so. +(M626) The horses came thither so weake, that for feeblenesse, they were +not able to carrie their masters: because that from Cutifa-chiqui, they +alwaies trauelled with very little prouender, and were hunger-starued and +tired euer since they came from the desert of Ocute. And because the most +of them were not in case to vse in battell, though need should require, +they sent them to feed in the night a quarter of a league from the Camp. +The Christians were there in great danger, because that if at this time +the Indians had set vpon them, they had been in euill case to haue +defended themselues. The Gouernour rested there thirtie daies, in which +time, because the Countrie was very fruitfull, the horses grew fat. At the +time of his departure, by the importunitie of some, which would haue more +then was reason, hee demanded of the Cacique 30. women to make slaues of. +Hee answered that hee would conferre with his chiefe men. And before hee +returned answere, one night all of them with their wiues and children +forsooke the towne, and fled away. The next day the Gouernour purposing to +goe to seeke them, the Cacique came vnto him, and at his comming vsed +these words vnto the Gouernour: + +Mightie Lord, with shame and feare of your Lordship, because my subiects +against my will haue done amisse in absenting themselues, I went my way +without your license; and knowing the errour which I haue committed, like +a loyall subiect, I come to yeeld my selfe into your power, to dispose of +mee at your owne pleasure. For my subiects do not obey mee, nor do any +thing but what an Vncle of mine commandeth, which gouerneth this Countrie +for me, vntill I be of a perfect age. If your lordship will pursue them, +and execute on them that, which for their disobedience they deserue, I +will be your guide, since at this present my fortune will not suffer me to +performe any more. + +(M627) Presently the Gouernour with 30. horsemen, and as many footmen, +went to seeke the Indians, and by passing by some townes of the principall +Indians which had absented themselues, hee cut and destroyed great fields +of Maiz; and went vp the Riuer, where the Indians were in an Island, where +the horsemen could not come at them. There he sent them word by an Indian +to returne to their towne and feare nothing, and that they should giue him +men to carrie burdens, as al those behind had done; for he would haue no +Indian women, seeing they were so loth to part with them. The Indians +accepted his request, and came to the Gouernour to excuse themselues; and +so all of them returned to their towne. A Cacique of a Prouince called +Coste, came to this towne to visit the Gouernour. (M628) After hee had +offered himselfe, and passed with him some words of tendring his seruice +and curtesie; the Gouernour asking him whether he had notice of any rich +Countrie? he said, yea: to wit, "that toward the North, there was a +Prouince named Chisca: and that there was a melting of copper, and of +another metall of the same colour, saue that it was finer, and of a farre +more perfect colour, and farre better to the sight and that they vsed it +not so much, because it was softer." And the selfe same thing was told the +Gouernour in Cutifa-chiqui; where we saw some little hatchets of copper, +which were said to haue a mixture of gold. (M629) But in that part the +Countrie was not well peopled, and they said there were mountaines, which +the horses could not passe: and for that cause the Gouernour would not goe +from Cutifa-chiqui directly thither: And hee made account, that trauelling +through a peopled Countrie, when his men and horses should be in better +plight, and hee were better certified of the truth of the thing, he would +returne toward it, by mountaines, and a better inhabited Countrie, whereby +hee might haue better passage. (M630) He sent two Christians from Chiaha +with certain Indians which knew the Countrie of Chisca, and the language +thereof to view it, and to make report of that which they should find; +where he told them that he would tarrie for them. + + + +Chap. XVI. How the Gouernour departed from Chiaha, and at Coste was in +danger to haue been slaine by the hands of the Indians, and by a +stratageme escaped the same: And what more happened vnto him in this +iourney, and how he came to Coca. + + +When the Gouernour was determined to depart from Chiaha to Coste, he sent +for the Cacique to come before him, and with gentle words tooke his leaue +of him, and gaue him certaine things, wherewith he rested much contented: +In seuen daies he came to Coste. The second of Iulie he commanded his +campe to be pitched two crossebow shot from the towne: and with eight men +of his guard he went where he found the Cacique, which to his thinking +receiued him with great loue. As hee was talking with him, there went from +the campe certaine footemen to the towne to seeke some Maiz, and not +contented with it, they ransacked and searched the houses, and tooke what +they found. With this despite the Indians began to rise and take their +armes: and some of them with cudgils in their hands, ran vpon fiue or sixe +Christians, which had done them wrong, and beat them at their pleasure. +(M631) The Gouernour seeing them al in an vprore, and himselfe among them +with so few Christians, to escape their hands vsed a stratagem, farre +against his owne disposition, being as hee was very francke and open: and +though it grieued him very much that any Indian should be so bold, as with +reason, or without reason to despise the Christians, he tooke vp a cudgel, +and tooke their parts against his owne men; which was a meanes to quiet +them: And presently he sent word by a man very secretly to the Campe, that +some armed men should come toward the place where he was; and hee tooke +the Cacique by the hand, vsing very mild words vnto him, and with some +principall Indians that did accompanie him, he drew them out of the towne +into a plaine way, and vnto the sight of the Campe, whither by little and +little with good discretion the Christians began to come and to gather +about them. Thus the Gouernour led the Cacique, and his chiefe men vntill +he entred with them into the Campe: and neere vnto his tent, hee commanded +them to be put in safe custodie: and told them, that they should not +depart without giuing him a guide and Indians for burthens, and till +certaine sicke Christians were come, which he had commanded to come downe +the Riuer in canoes from Chiaha; and those also which he had sent to the +Prouince of Chisca: (for they were not returned; and he feared that the +Indians had slaine the one, and the other.) Within three daies after, +those which were sent to Chisca returned, and made report, that the +Indians had carried them through a countrie so poore of Maiz, and so +rough, and ouer so hie mountaines, that it was impossible for the armie to +trauell that way; and that seeing the way grew very long, and that they +lingered much, they consulted to returne from a little poore towne, where +they saw nothing that was of any profit, and brought an oxe hide, which +the Indians gaue them, as thinne as a calues skinne, and the haire like a +soft wool, betweene the course and fine wooll of sheepe. The Cacique gaue +a guide, and men for burdens, and departed with the Gouernours leaue. The +Gouernour departed from Coste the ninth of Iulie, and lodged at a towne +called Tali: the Casique came foorth to receiue him on the way, and made +this speech: + +Excellent Lord and Prince, worthie to be serued and obeyed of all the +Princes in the world; howsoeuer for the most part by the outward +phisiognomie, the inward vertue may bee iudged, and that who you are, and +of what strength was knowne vnto mee before now: I will not inferre +hereupon how meane I am in your presence, to hope that my poore seruices +will be gratefull and acceptable: since whereas strength faileth, the will +doth not cease to be praised and accepted. And for this cause I presume to +request your Lordship, that you will be pleased onely to respect the same, +and consider wherein you will command my seruice in this your countrie. + +The Gouernour answered him, that his good will and offer was as acceptable +vnto him, as if he had offered him all the treasures of the world, and +that hee would alwaies intreate, fauour, and esteeme him as if he were his +owne brother. The Cacique commanded prouision necessarie for two daies, +while the Gouernour was there, to be brought thither: and at the time of +his departure, he gaue him foure women and two men, which hee had need of +to beare burthens. The Gouernour trauelled sixe daies through many townes +subiect to the Cacique of Coca: and as he entred into his Countrie many +Indians came vnto him euery day from the Cacique, and met him on the way +with messages, one going, and another comming. Hee came to Coca vpon +Friday, the 26. of Iulie. The Cacique came foorth to receiue him two +crossebow shot from the towns in a chaire, which his principall men +carried on their shoulders, sitting vpon a cushion, and couered with a +garment of Marterns, of the fashion and bignes of a womans huke: hee had +on his head a diadem of feathers, and round about him many Indians playing +vpon flutes, and singing. Assoone as he came vnto the Gouernour, he did +his obeysance, and vttered these words following: + +Excellent and mightie Lord, aboue all them of the earth; although I come +but now to receiue you, yet I haue receiued you many daies agoe in my +heart, to wit, from the day wherein I had first notice of your Lordship; +with so great desire to serue you, with so great pleasure and contentment, +that this which I make shew of is nothing in regard of that which is in my +heart neither can it haue any kind of comparison. This you may hold for +certaine, that to obtaine the dominion of the whole world, would not haue +reioyced me so much, as your sight, neither would I haue held it for so +great a felicitie. Doe not looke for me to offer you that which is your +owne: to wit, my person, my lands, and subiects: onely I busie my selfe in +commanding my men with all diligence and due reuerence to welcome you from +hence to the towne with playing and singing, where your Lordship shall be +lodged and attended ypon by my selfe and them: and all that I possesse, +your Lordship shall vse as it were your owne. For your Lordship shall doe +mee a verie great fauour in so doing. + +The Gouernour gaue him thankes, and with great ioy they both were +conferring together, till they came to the towne: and he commanded his +Indians to void their houses, wherein the Gouernour and his men lodged. +There was in the barnes, and in the fields, great store of Maiz and French +Beanes: The Country was greatly inhabited with many great townes, and many +sowne fields, which reach from the one to the other. It was pleasant, fat, +full of good meadowes vpon Riuers. There were in the fields, many Plum +trees, aswell of such as grow in Spaine, as of the Countrie: and wild tall +vines, that runne vp the trees; and besides these, there were other low +vines with big and sweet grapes; but for want of digging and dressing, +they had great kirnels in them. The Gouernour vsed to set a guard ouer the +Caciques, because they should not absent themselues, and carried them with +him, till he came out of their Countries, because that carrying them along +with him, hee looked to find people in the townes, and they gaue him +guides, and men to carrie burdens: and before hee went out of their +Countries, he gaue them licence to returne to their houses, and to their +porters likewise, assoone as he came to any other Lordship, where they +gaue him others. The men of Coca seeing their Lord detained, tooke it in +euill part, and reuolted and hid themselues in the woods, aswell those of +the towne of the Cacique, as those of the other townes of his principall +subjects. The Gouernour sent out foure Captaines, euery one his way to +seeke them. They tooke many men and women, which were put into chaines: +They seeing the hurt which they receiued, and how little they gained in +absenting themselues, came againe, promising to do whatsoeuer they were +commanded. Of those which were taken prisoners, some principall men were +set at libertie, whom the Cacique demanded: and euery one that had any, +carried the rest in chaines like slaues, without letting them goe to their +Countrie: neither did any returne, but some few, whose fortune helped them +with the good diligence which they vsed to file off their chaines by +night, or such as in their trauelling could slippe aside out of the way, +seeing any negligence in them that kept them: some escaped away with the +chaines, and with the burdens, and clothes which they carried. + + + +Chap. XVII. How the Gouernour went from Coca to Tascaluca. + + +The Gouernour rested in Coca 25. daies. He departed from thence the 20. of +August to seeke a Prouince called Tascaluca: hee carried with him the +Cacique of Coca. He passed that day by a great towne called Tallimuchase, +the people were fled: he lodged halfe a league farther neere a brooke. The +next day he came to a towne called Ytaua, subiect to Coca. Hee staied +there sixe daies because of a Riuer that passed by it, which at that time +was very hie; and assoone as the Riuer suffered him to passe, he set +forward, and lodged at a towne named Vllibahali. There came to him on the +way, on the Caciques behalfe of that Prouince, ten or twelue principall +Indians to offer him his seruice; all of them had their plumes of +feathers, and bowes and arrowes. The Gouernour comming to the towne with +twelue horsemen, and some footemen of his guard, leauing his people a +crossebow shot from the towne, entred into it, hee found all the Indians +with their weapons: and as farre as he could ghesse, they seemed to haue +some euill meaning. It was knowne afterward, that they were determined to +take the Cacique of Coca, from the Gouernour, if hee had requested it. +(M632) The Gouernour commanded all his people to enter the towne, which +was walled about, and neere vnto it passed a small Riuer. The wall, aswell +of that, as of others, which afterward wee saw, was of great posts thrust +deepe into the ground and very rough, and many long railes as big as ones +arme laid acrosse between them, and the wall was about the height of a +lance, and it was daubed within and without with clay, and had loope +holes. On the other side of the Riuer was a towne, where at that present +the Cacique was. The Gouernour sent to call him, and hee came presently. +After he had passed with the Gouernour some words of offering his +seruices, he gaue him such men for his cariages as he needed, and thirtie +women for slaues. In that place was a Christian lost, called Mancano, home +in Salamanca, of noble parentage, which went astray to seeke for grapes, +whereof there is great store, and those very good. The day that the +Gouernour departed from thence, he lodged at a towne subiect to the Lord +of Vllibahali: and the next day hee came to another towne called Toasi. +The Indians gaue the Gouernour thirtie women, and such men for his +cariages as he needed. Hee trauelled ordinarily 5. or 6. leagues a day +when he trauelled through peopled Countries: and going through deserts, he +marched as fast as he could, to eschew the want of Maiz. From Toasi, +passing through some townes subiect to a Cacique, which was Lord of a +prouince called Tallise, hee trauelled fiue daies: He came to Tallise the +18. of September: The towne was great, and situated neere vnto a maine +Riuer. On the other side of the Riuer were other townes, and many fields +sowne with Maiz. On both sides it was a very plentifull Countrie, and had +store of Maiz: they had voided the towne. The Gouernour commanded to call +the Cacique; who came, and betweene them passed some words of loue and +offer of his seruices, and hee presented vnto him 40. Indians. There came +to the Gouernour in this towne a principall Indian in the behalfe of the +Cacique of Tascaluca, and made this speech following: + +Mightie, vertuous, and esteemed Lord, the great Cacique of Tascaluca my +Lord, sendeth by me to kisse your Lordships hands, and to let you +vnderstand, that he hath notice, how you iustly rauish with your +perfections and power, all men on the earth; and that euerie one by whom +your Lordship passeth doth serue and obey you; which he acknowledgeth to +be due vnto you, and desireth, as his life, to see, and to serue your +Lordship. For which cause by me he offereth himselfe, his lands and +subiects, that when your Lordship pleaseth to go through his Countrie, you +may be receiued with all peace and loue, serued and obeyed; and that in +recompence of the desire he hath to see you, you will doe him the fauour +to let him know when you will come: for how much the sooner, so much the +greater fauour he shall receiue. + +The Gouernour receiued and dispatched him graciously, giuing him beades, +which among them were not much esteemed, and some other thinges to carrie +to his Lord. And he gaue licence to the Cacique of Coca to returne home to +his owne Countries. The Cacique of Tallise gaue him such men for burthens +as he needed. And after he had rested there 20. daies, hee departed thence +toward Tascaluca. That day when he went from Tallise, hee lodged at a +great towne called Casiste. And the next day passed by another, and came +to a small towne of Tascaluca; and the next day hee camped in a wood two +leagues from the towne where the Cacique resided, and was at that time. +And he sent the Master of the Camp, Luys de Moscoso, with 15. horsemen, to +let him know how hee was comming. The Cacique was in his lodgings vnder a +Canopie: and without doores, right against his lodgings, in an high place, +they spread a mat for him, and two cushions one vpon another, where he sat +him downe, and his Indians placed themselues round about him, somewhat +distant from him, so that they made a place, and a void roome where he +sate: and his chiefest men were neerest to him, and one with a shadow of +Deeres skinne, which keept the Sunne from him, being round, and of the +bignes of a target, quartered with black and white, hauing a rundell in +the middest: a farre off it seemed to be of taffata, because the colours +were very perfect. It was set on a small staffe stretched wide out. This +was the deuice which hee carried in his warres. He was a man of a very +tall stature, of great limmes, and spare, and well proportioned, and was +much feared of his neighbours and subiects. He was Lord of many +territories and much people: In his countenance hee was very graue. After +the Master of the Campe had spoken with him, hee and those that went with +him coursed their horses, pransing them to and fro, and now and then +toward the place where the Cacique was, who with much grauitie and +dissimulation now and then lifted vp his eies, and beheld them as it were +with disdaine. At the Gouernours comming, hee made no offer at all to +rise. The Gouernour tooke him by the hand, and both of them sate downe +together on a seate which was vnder the cloth of estate. The Cacique said +these words vnto him: + +Mighty Lord, I bid your Lordship right hartily welcome. I receiue as much +pleasure and contentment with your sight, as if you were my brother whom I +dearly loued: vpon this point it is not needfull to vse many reasons; +since it is no discretion to speake that in many wordes, which in few may +be vttered. How much the greater the will is, so much more giueth it name +to the workes, and the workes giue testimonie of the truth. Now touching +my will, by it you shall know, how certaine and manifest it is, and how +pure inclination I haue to serue you. Concerning the fauour which you did +me, in the things which you sent me, I make as much account of them as is +reason to esteeme them: and chiefly because they were yours. Now see what +seruice you will command me. + +The Gouernor satisfied him with sweet words, and with great breuitie. When +hee departed from thence he determined to carrie him along with him for +some causes, and at two daies iournie he came to a towne called Piache, by +which there passed a great Riuer. The Gouernour demanded canoes of the +Indians: they said, they had them not, but that they would make rafts of +canes and drie timber, on which he might passe well enough. And they made +them with all diligence and speed, and they gouerned them; and because the +water went very slow, the Gouernour and his people passed very well. + +From the Port de Spirito Santo to Apalache, which is about an hundred +leagues, the Gouernour went from East to West: And from Apalache to +Cutifa-chiqui, which are 430. leagues, from the Southwest to the +Northeast: and from Cutifa-chiqui to Xualla, which are about two hundred +and fiftie leagues, from the South to the North: And from Xualla to +Tascaluca, which are two hundred and fiftie leagues more, an hundred and +ninetie of them he trauelled from East to West, to wit, to the Prouince of +Coca: and the other 60. from Coca to Tascaluca from the North to the +South. + +Hauing passed the Riuer of Piache, a Christian went from his companie from +thence to seeke a woman slaue that was runne away from him, and the +Indians either tooke him captiue, or slue him. The Gouernor vrged the +Cacique that he should giue account of him, and threatened him, that if he +were not found, he would neuer let him loose. The Cacique sent an Indian +from thence to Mauilla, whither they were trauelling, which was a towne of +a principall Indian and his subiect, saying, that he sent him to aduise +them to make readie victuals, and men for carriages. But, (as afterward +appeared) hee sent him to assemble all the men of warre thither, that hee +had in his Countrie. The Gouernour trauelled three daies; and the third +day he passed all day through a peopled Countrie: and he came to Mauilla +vpon Monday the 18. of October. He went before the Camp with 15. horsemen +and 30. footemen. And from the towne came a Christian, whom he had sent to +the principall man, three or foure daies before, because he should not +absent himselfe, and also to learne in what sort the Indians were: who +told him that hee thought they were in an euill purpose: for while hee was +there, there came manie people into the towne, and many weapons, and that +they made great haste to fortifie the wall. Luys de (M633) Moscoso told +the Gouernour, that it would bee good to lodge in the field, seeing the +Indians were of such disposition: and hee answered, that he would lodge in +the towne, for hee was wearie of lodging in the field. When hee came neere +vnto the towne, the Cacique came foorth to receiue him with many Indians +playing vpon flutes and singing: And after hee had offered himselfe, hee +presented him with three mantels of marterns. The Gouernour, with both the +Caciques, and seuen or eight men of his guard, and three or foure horsemen +which alighted to accompanie him, entred into the towne, and sat him downe +vnder a cloth of estate. The Cacique of Tascaluca requested him, that hee +would let him remaine in that towne, and trouble him no more with +travelling: And seeing he would not giue him leaue, in his talke he +changed his purpose, and dissemblinglie fained that he would speake with +some principall Indians, and rose vp from the place where hee sate with +the Gouernour, and entred into a house, where many Indians were with their +bowes and arrowes. The Gouernour when he saw he returned not, called him, +and he answered, that he would not come out from thence, neither would he +goe any farther then that towne, and that if he would goe his way in +peace, hee should presently depart, and should not seeke to carrie him +perforce out of his Countrie and territorie. + + + +Chap. XVIII. How the Indians rose against the Gouernour, and what ensued +thereupon. + + +The Gouernour seeing the determination, and furious answere of the +Cacique, went about to pacifie him with faire words: to which he gaue no +answere, but rather with much pride and disdaine, withdrew himselfe where +the Gouernor might not see him, nor speake with him. As a principall +Indian passed that way, the Gouernor called him, to send him word, that +hee might remaine at his pleasure in his Countrie, and that it would +please him to giue him a guide, and men for carriages, to see if he could +pacifie him with mild words. The Indians answered with great pride, that +hee would not hearken vnto him. Baltasar de Gallegos, which stood by tooke +hold of a gowne of marternes which hee had on; and he cast it ouer his +head, and left it in his hands: and because all of them immediatly began +to stirre, Baltasar de Gallegos gaue him such a wound with his coutilas, +that hee opened him downe the backe, and presently all the Indians with a +great crie came out of the houses shooting their arrowes. The Gouernour +considering, that if hee tarried there, hee could not escape, and if hee +commanded his men to come in, which were without the towne, the Indians +within the houses might kill their horses, and doe much hurt, ranne out of +the towne, and before hee came out, hee fell twice or thrice, and those +that were with him did helpe him vp againe; and he and those that were +with him were sore wounded: and in a moment there were fiue Christians +slaine in the towne. The Gouernour came running out of the towne, crying +out, that euery man should stand farther off, because from the wall they +did them much hurt. The Indians seeing that the Christians retired, and +some of them, or the most part, more then an ordinary pase, shot with +great boldnesse at them, and strooke downe such as they could ouertake. +The Indians which the Christians did lead with them in chaines, had laid +downe their burthens neere vnto the wall: and assoone as the Gouernour and +his men were retired, the men of Mauilla laid them on the Indians backs +againe, and tooke them into the towne, and loosed them presently from +their chaines, and gaue them bowes and arrowes to fight withall. (M634) +Thus they possessed themselues of al the clothes and perles, and all that +the Christians had, which their slaues carried. And because the Indians +had been alwaies peaceable vntill wee came to this place, some of our men +had their weapons in their fardels and remained vnarmed. And from others +that had entred the towne with the Gouernour they had taken swords and +halebards, and fought with them. When the Gouernour was gotten into the +field, hee called for an horse, and with some that accompanied him, hee +returned and slew two or three Indians: All the rest retired themselues to +the towne, and shot with their bowes from the wall. And those which +presumed of their nimblenes, sallied foorth to fight a stones cast from +the wall: And when the Christians charged them, they retired themselues at +their leasure into the towne. At the time that the broile began, there +were in the towne a Frier, and a Priest, and a seruant of the Gouernour, +with a woman slave: and they had no time to come out of the towne: and +they tooke an house, and so remained in the towne. The Indians beeing +become Masters of the place, they shut the doore with a field gate: and +among them was one sword which the Gouernors seruant had, and with it he +set himselfe behind the doore, thrusting at the Indians which sought to +come into them: and the Frier and the Priest stood on the other side, each +of them with a barre in their hands to beate him downe that first came in. +The Indians seeing they could not get in by the doore, began to vncouer +the house top. By this time, all the horsemen and footemen which were +behind, were come to Mauilla. Here there were sundrie opinions, whether +they should charge the Indians to enter the towne, or whether they should +leaue it, because it was hard to enter: and in the end it was resolued to +set vpon them. + + + +Chap. XIX. How the Gouernour set his men in order, and entred the towne of +Mauilla, + + +Assoone as the battell and the rereward were come to Mauilla, the +Gouernour commanded all those that were best armed to alight, and made +foure squadrons of footmen. (M635) The Indians, seeing how he was setting +his men in order, concluded with the Cacique, that hee should goe his way, +saying vnto him, as after it was knowne by certaine women that were taken +there, that he was but one man, and could fight but for one man, and that +they had there among them many principall Indians verie valiant and expert +in feates of armes, that any one of them was able to order the people +there; and forasmuch as matters of warre were subiect to casualtie, and it +was vncertaine which part should overcome, they wished him to saue +himselfe, to the end, that if it fel out that they should end their daies +there, as they determined, rather then to be ouercome, there might remaine +one to gouerne the Countrie. For all this hee would not haue gon away: but +they vrged him so much, that with fifteene or twentie Indians of his owne, +hee went out of the towne, and carried away a skarlat cloke, and other +things of the Christians goods; as much as hee was able to carrie, and +seemed best vnto him. The Gouernour was informed how there went men out of +the towne, and hee commanded the horsemen to beset it, and sent in euery +squadron of footemen one souldier with a firebrand to set fire on the +houses, that the Indians might haue no defense: all his men being set in +order, hee commanded an harcubuz to bee shot off. The signe being giuen, +the foure squadrons, euery one by it selfe with great furie, gaue the +onset, and with great hurt on both sides they entred the towne. The Frier +and the Priest, and those that were with them in the house were saued, +which cost the liues of two men of account, and valiant, which came +thither to succour them. The Indians fought with such courage, that many +times they draue our men put of the towne. The fight lasted so long, that +for wearinesse and great thirst many of the Christians went to a poole +that was neere the wal, to drink, which was all stained with the blood of +the dead, and then came againe to fight. Thie Gouernour seeing this, +entred among the footemen into the towne on horseback, with certaine that +accompanied him, and was a meane that the Christians came to set fire on +the houses, and brake and ouercame the Indians, who running out of the +towne from the footemen, the horsemen without draue in at the gates again, +where being without all hope of life, they fought valiantly, and after the +Christians came among them to handy blowes, seeing themselues in great +distresse without any succour, many of them fled into the burning houses, +where one vpon another they were smothered and burnt in the fire. (M636) +The whole number of the Indians that died in this towne, were two thousand +Indians and fiue hundred, little more or lesse. Of the Christians there +died eighteene; of which one was Don Carlos, brother in law to the +Gouernour, and a nephew of his, and one Iohn de Gamez, and Men Rodriguez +Portugals, and Iohn Vasquez de Villanoua de Barca Rota, all men of honour, +and of much valour: the rest were footemen. Besides those that were +slaine, there were an hundred and fiftie wounded with 700. wounds of their +arrowes: and it pleased God that of very dangerous wounds they were +quickly healed; Moreouer, there were twelue horses slaine, and seuentie +hurt. All the clothes which the Christians carried with them to clothe +themselues withall, and the ornaments to say Masse, and the perles, were +all burnt there: and the Christians did set them on fire themselues; +because they held for a greater inconuenience, the hurt which the Indians +might doe them from those houses, where they had gathered all those goods +together, then the losse of them. Here the Gouernour vnderstood, (M637) +that Francisco Maldonado waited for him at the Port of Ochuse, and that it +was sixe daies iournie from thence; and he dealt with Iohn Ortiz to keepe +it secret, because he had not accomplished that which he determined to +doe; and because the perles were burnt there, which he meant to haue sent +to Cuba for a shew, that the people hearing the newes, might be desirous +to come to that Countrie. He feared also, that if they should haue newes +of him without seeing from Florida neither gold nor siluer, nor any thing +of value, it would get such a name, that no man would seeke to goe +thither, when he should haue neede of people. And so he determined to send +no newes of himselfe, vntill hee had found some rich Countrie. + + + +Chap. XX. How the Gouernour departed from Mauilla toward Chicaca, and what +happened vnto him. + + +From the time that the Gouernour entred into Florida, vntill his departure +from Mauilla, there died an hundred and two Christians, some of sicknesse, +and others which the Indians slew. He staied in Mauilla, because of the +wounded men, eight and twentie daies: all which time he lay in the field. +It was a well inhabited and a fat countrie, there were some great and +walled townes: and many houses scattered all about the fields, to wit, a +crossebow shot or two, the one from the other. Vpon Sonday, the eighteenth +of Nouember, when the hurt men were knowne to bee healed, the Gouernour +departed from Mauilla. Euery one furnished himselfe with Maiz for two +daies, and they trauelled fiue daies through a desert: they came to a +Prouince called Pafallaya, vnto a towne, named Taliepataua: and from +thence they went to another, called Cabusto: neere vnto it ran a great +Riuer. The Indians on the other side cried out, threatning the Christians +to kill them, if they sought to passe it. The Gouernour commanded his men +to make a barge within the towne, because the Indians should not perceiue +it: it was finished in foure daies, and being ended, he commanded it to be +carried one night vpon sleds halfe a league vp the Riuer. In the morning +there entred into it thirtie men well armed. The Indians perceiued what +was attempted, and those which were neerest, came to defend the passage. +They resisted what they could, till the Christians came neere them; and +seeing that the barge came to the shore, they fled away into the groues of +canes. The Christians mounted on horsebacke, and went vp the Riuer to make +good the passage, whereby the Gouernour and his companie passed the Riuer. +There was along the Riuer some townes well stored with Maiz and French +Beanes. From thence to Chicaca the Gouernour trauelled fiue daies through +a desert. Hee came to a Riuer, where on the otherside were Indians to +defend the passage. He made another barge in two daies; and when it was +finished, the Gouernour sent an Indian to request the Cacique to accept of +his friendship, and peaceably to expect his comming: whom the Indians that +were on the other side the Riuer slew before his face, and presently +making a great shout went their way. Hauing passed the Riuer, the next +day, being the 17. of December, the Gouernour came to Chicaca, a small +towne of twentie houses. And after they were come to Chicaca, they were +much troubled with cold, because it was now winter and it snowed, while +most of them were lodged in the field, before they had time to make +themselues houses. This countrie was very well peopled, and the houses +scattered like those of Mauilla, fat and plentifull of Maiz, and the most +part of it was fielding: they gathered as much as sufficed to passe the +winter. Some Indians were taken, among which was one whom the Cacique +esteemed greatly. The Gouernour sent an Indian to signifie to the Cacique, +that he desired to see him and to haue his friendship. The Cacique came +vnto him, to offer him his person, countrie and subiects, and told him, +that he would cause two other Caciques to come to him in peace; who within +few daies after came with him, and with their Indians: the one was called +Alimamu, the other Nicalasa. They gaue a present vnto the Gouernour of an +hundred and fiftie conies, and of the countrie garments, to wit, of +mantles and skinnes. The Cacique of Chicaca came to visit him many times; +and sometimes the Gouernour sent to call him, and sent him a horse to goe +and come. He complained vnto him, that a subiect of his was risen against +him, and depriued him of his tribute, requesting his aide against him, for +he meant to seeke him in his countrie, and to punish him according to his +desert. (M638) Which was nothing els but a fained plot. For they +determined assoone as the Gouernour was gone with him, and the campe was +diuided into two parts, the one of them to set vpon the Gouernour, and the +other vpon them that remained in Chicaca. Hee went to the towne where he +vsed to keepe his residence, and brought with him two hundred Indians with +their bowes and arrowes. The Gouernour tooke thirtie horsemen, and eightie +footemen, and they went to Saquechuma (for so was the Prouince called of +that chiefe man, which he said had rebelled.) They found a walled towne, +without any men: and those which went with the Cacique set fire on the +houses, to dissemble their treason. But by reason of the great care and +heedfullnesse, that was as well in the Gouernors people which hee carried +with him, as of those which remained in Chicaca, they durst not assault +them at that time. The Gouernour inuited the Cacique, and certaine +principall Indians, and gaue them hogges flesh to eate. And though they +did not commonly vse it, yet they were so greedie of it, that euery night +there came Indians to certaine houses a crossebow shot from the Camp, +where the hogges lay, and killed, and carried away as many as they could. +And three Indians were taken in the manner. Two of them the Gouernour +commanded to be shot to death with arrowes; and to cut off the hands of +the other; and he sent him so handled to the Cacique. Who made as though +it grieued him that they had offended the Gouernor, and that he was glad +that he had executed that punishment on them. He lay in a plaine countrie +half a league from the place, where the Christians lodged. Foure horsemen +went a straggling thither, to wit Francisco Osorio, and a seruant of the +Marques of Astorga, called Reynoso, and two seruants of the Gouernour, the +one his page called Ribera, and the other Fuentes his Chamberlaine: and +these had taken from the Indians some skinnes, and some mantles, wherewith +they were offended and forsooke their houses. The Gouernour knew of it, +and commanded them to be apprehended; and condemned to death Francisco +Osorio, and the Chamberlaine as principalls, and all of them to losse of +goods. The Friers and Priests and other principall persons were earnest +with him to pardon Francisco Osorio his life, and to moderate his +sentence, which hee would not grant for any of them. While he was readie +to command them to be drawne to the market place to cut off their heads, +there came certaine Indians from the Cacique to complaine of them. Iohn +Ortiz, at the request of Baltasar de Gallegos and other persons changed +their words, and told the Gouernour that the Cacique said he had notice +how his Lordship held those Christians in prison for his sake, and that +they were in no fault, neither had they done him any wrong, and that if he +would do him any fauour he would set them free. And he told the Indians; +That the Gouernour said, he had them in prison, and that he would punish +them in such sort, that they should bee an example to others. Hereupon the +Gouernour commanded the prisoners to be loosed. (M639) Assoone as March +was come, hee determined to depart from Chicaca, and demanded of the +Cacique two hundred men for cariages. He sent him answere, that hee would +speake with his principall men. Vpon Twesday the eight of March, the +Gouernour went to the towne where he was, to aske him for the men; Hee +told him, he would send them the next day. Assoone as the Gouernour was +come to Chicaca, he told Luys de Moscoso the Camp-master, that hee +misliked the Indians, and that he should keepe a strong watch that night, +which hee remembred but a little. The Indians came at the second watch in +foure squadrons, euery one by it selfe, and assoone as they were descried, +they sounded a drum, and gaue the assault with a great cry, and with so +great celeritie, that presently they entred with the scoutes, that were +somewhat distant from the Campe. (M640) And when they were perceiued of +them which were in the towne, halfe the houses were on fire, which they +had kindled. That night three horsemen chanced to bee skouts, two of them +were of base calling, and the worst men in all the Camp, and the other, +which was a nephew of the Gouernour, which vntill then was held for a tall +man, shewed himselfe there as great a coward, as any of them: for all of +them ran away. And the Indians without any resistance came and set the +towne on fire; and taried without behind the doores for the Christians, +which ran out of the houses, not hauing any leasure to arme themselues: +and as they ran hither and thither amazed with the noise, and blinded with +the smoke and flame of the fire, they knew not which way they went, +neither could they light vpon their weapons, nor saddle their horses, +neither saw they the Indians that shot them. Manie of the horses were +burned in the stables, and those which could breake their halters gat +loose. The disorder and flight was such, that euery man fled which way he +could, without leauing any to resist the Indians. But God (which +chastiseth his according to his pleasure, and in the greatest necessities +and dangers sustaineth them with his hand,) so blinded the Indians, that +they saw not what they had done, and thought that the horses which ran +loose, were men on horsebacke, that gathered themselues together to set +vpon them. The Gouernour only rod on horsebacke, and with him a souldier +called Tapia, and set vpon the Indians, and striking the first he met with +his lance, the saddle fell with him, which with haste was euill girded, +and so hee fell from his horse. And all the people that were on foote were +fled to a wood out of the towne, and there assembled themselues together. +And because it was night, and that the Indians thought the horses were men +on horsebacke which came to set vpon them, as I said before, they fled; +and one onely remained dead, and that was he whom the Gouernour slew with +his lance. The towne lay all burnt to ashes. There was a woman burned, +who, after shee and her husband were both gone out of their house, went in +againe for certaine perles, which they had forgotten and when she would +haue come out, the fire was so great at the doore that shes could not, +neither could her husband succour her. Other three Christians came out of +their lodgings so cruelly burned, that one of them died within three +daies, and the other two were carried many daies each of them vpon a couch +betweene staues, which the Indians carried on their shoulders, for +otherwise they could not trauell. There died in this hurlieburlie eleuen +Christians, and fiftie horses; and there remained an hundred hogges, and +foure hundred were burned. If any perchance had saued any clothes from the +fire of Mauilla, here they were burned, and many were clad in skinnes, for +they had no leasure to take their coates. They endured much cold in this +place, and the chiefest remedie were great fires. They spent all night in +turnings without sleepe: for if they warmed one side, they freesed on the +other. Some inuented the weauing of certaine mats of drie iuie, and did +weare one beneath, and another aboue: many laughed at this deuice, whom +afterward necessitie inforced to doe the like. The Christians were so +spoiled, and in such want of saddles and weapons which were burned, that +if the Indians had come the second night, they had ouercome them with +little labour. They remooued thence to the towne where the Cacique was +wont to lie, because it was in a champion countrie. Within eight daies +after, there were many lances and saddles made. There were ash trees in +those parts, whereof they made as good lances as in Biscay. + + + +Chap. XXI. How the Indians set againe vpon the Christians, and how the +Gouernour went to Alimamu, beyond which towne in warlike sort they tarried +for him in the way. + + +Vpon Wednesday the 15. of March 1541. after the Gouernour had lodged 8. +daies in a plaine, halfe a league from the place which he had wintered in, +after he had set vp a forge, and tempered the swords which in Chicaca were +burned, and made many targets, saddles, and lances, on Tuesday night, at +the morning watch, many Indians came to assault the Campe in three +squadrons, euery one by themselues: Those which watched gaue the alarme. +The Gouernour with great speed set his men in order in other three +squadrons, and leauing some to defend the Campe, went out to incounter +them. The Indians were ouercome and put to flight. The ground was champion +and fit for the Christians to take the aduantage of them; and it was now +breake of day. But there happened a disorder, whereby there were not past +thirtie or fortie Indians slaine: and this it was: that a Frier cried out +in the Campe without any iust occasion, To the Campe, To the Campe: +Whereupon the Gouernour and all the rest repaired thither, and the Indians +had time to saue themselues. There were some taken, by whom the Gouernour +informed himselfe of the Countrie, through which he was to passe. The 25. +of Aprill, he departed from Chicaca, and lodged at a small towne called +Alimamu. They had very little Maiz, and they were to passe a desert of +seuen daies iournie. The next day, the Gouernour sent three Captaines +euerie one his way with horsemen and footemen to seeke prouision to passe +the desert. And Iohn Dannusco the Auditor went with fifteene horsemen, and +40. footemen that way that the Gouernour was to goe, and found a strong +fort made, where the Indians staied for him, and many of them walked on +the top of it with their weapons, hauing their bodies, thighes and armes +okered and died with blacke, white, yellow and red, striped like vnto +paines, so that they shewed as though they went in hose and doublets: and +some of them had plumes, and others had hornes on their heads, and their +faces blacke, and their eies done round about with strakes of red, to +seeme more fierce. Assoone as they saw that the Christians approched, with +a great crie sounding two drummes with great furie they sallied foorth to +receiue them. Iohn Dannusco and those that were with him, thought good to +auoid them, and to acquaint the Gouernour therewith. They retired to a +plaine place, a crossebowshot from the fort in sight of it, the footemen, +the crossebowmen, and targetters placed themselues before the horsemen, +that they might not hurt the horses. The Indians sallied out by seuen and +seuen, and eight and eight to shoote their arrowes, and retired againe: +and in sight of the Christians they made a fire, and tooke an Indian, some +by the feete, and some by the head, and made as though they went to cast +him into the fire, and gaue him first many knocks on the head: signifying, +that they meant so to handle the Christians. Iohn Danusco sent three +horsemen to aduertise the Gouernour hereof. He came presently: for his +intent was to driue them from thence, saying, that if he did it not, they +would be emboldened to charge him another time, when they might doe him +more harme. He made the horsemen to alight, and set his men in foure +squadrons: The signe being giuen, they set vpon the Indians, which made +resistance till the Christians came neere the fort, and assoone as they +saw they could not defend themselues, by a place where a brooke passed +neere the fort, they ran away, and from the otherside they shot some +arrowes: and because at that instant we knew no ford for the horses to +passe, they had time enough to get out of our danger. Three Indians were +slaine there, and many Christians were hurt, whereof within few daies, +there died fifteene by the way. All men thought the Gouernour to bee in +fault, because he sent not to see the disposition of the place on the +other side of the Riuer, and to know the passage before hee set vpon them. +For with the hope they had to saue themselues by flight that way, when +they saw none other meanes, they fought til they were broken, and it was +an incouragement to defend themselues vntill then, and to offend the +Christians without any danger to themselues. + + + +Chap. XXII. How the Gouernour went from Alimamu to Quizquiz, and from +thence to Rio Grande, or the great Riuer. + + +Three daies after they had sought some Maiz, whereof they found but little +store, in regard of that which was needfull, and that for this cause, as +well for their sakes that were wounded, it was needfull for them to rest, +as for the great iournie they were to march to come where store of Maiz +was: yet the Gouernour was inforced to depart presentlie toward Quizquiz. +He trauelled seuen daies through a desert of many marishes and thicke +woods: but it might all be trauelled on horseback, except some lakes which +they swamme ouer. Hee came to a towne of the Prouince of Quizquiz without +being descried, and tooke all the people in it before they came out of +their houses. The mother of the Cacique was taken there: and he sent vnto +him by an Indian, that he should come to see him, and that he would giue +him his mother, and al the people which he had taken there. The Cacique +sent him answere againe, that his Lordship should loose and send them to +him, and that he would come to visit and serue him. The Gouernour, because +his people for want of Maiz were somewhat weake and wearie, and the horses +also were leane, determined to accomplish his request, to see if hee could +haue peace with him, and so commanded to set free his mother and all the +rest, and with louing words dismissed them and sent them to him. The next +day, when the Gouernour expected the Cacique, there came many Indians with +their bowes and arrowes with a purpose to set vpon the Christians. The +Gouernour had commanded all the horsemen to be armed, and on horsebacke, +and in a readines. When the Indians saw that they were readie, they staied +a crossebowe shot from the place where the Gouernour was neere a brooke. +(M641) And after halfe an houre that they had stood there stil, there came +to the Camp sixe principall Indians, and said, they came to see what +people they were, and that long agoe, they had been informed by their +forefathers, "That a white people should subdue them: and that therefore +they would returne to their Cacique, and bid him come presently to obey +and serue the Gouernour:" and after they had presented him with sixe or +seuen skinnes and mantles which they brought, they tooke their leaue of +him, and returned with the other, which waited for them by the brookeside. +The Cacique neuer came againe nor sent other message. (M642) And because +in the towne where the Gouernour lodged, there was small store of Maiz, he +remooued to another halfe a league from Rio Grande, where they found +plentie of Maiz: And he went to see the Riuer, and found, that neere vnto +it was great store of timber to make barges, and good situation of ground +to incampe in. Presently he remooued himselfe thither. They made houses, +and pitched their Campe in a plaine field a crossebow shot from the Riuer. +And thither was gathered all the Maiz of the townes, which they had lately +passed. They began presently to cut and hew down timber, and to saw +plankes for barges. (M643) The Indians came presently down the Riuer: they +leaped on shore, and declared to the Gouernor, That they were subiects of +a great Lord, whose name was Aquixo, who was Lord of many townes, and +gouerned many people on the other side of the Riuer, and came to tell him +on his behalfe, that the next day he with al his men would come to see, +what it would please him to command him. The next day with speed, the +Cacique came with two hundred canoes full of Indians with their bowes and +arrowes, painted, and with great plumes of white feathers, and many other +colours, with shields in their hands, wherewith they defended the rowers +on both sides, and the men of warre stood from the head to the sterne, +with their bowes and arrowes in their hands. The canoe wherein the Cacique +was, had a tilt ouer the sterne, and hee sate vnder the tilt; and so were +other canoes of the principall Indians. And from vnder the tilt where the +chiefs man sat, hee gouerned and commanded the other people. All ioyned +together, and came within a stones cast of the shore. From thence the +Cacique said to the Gouernour, which walked along the Riuers side with +others that waited on him, that he was come thither to visit, to honour, +and to obey him; because he knew he was the greatest and mightiest Lord on +the earth: therefore he would see what he would command him to doe. The +Gouernour yeelded him thankes, and requested him to come on shore, that +they might the better communicate together. And without any answere to +that point, hee sent him three canoes, wherein was great store of fish and +loaues, made of the substance of prunes like vnto brickes. After he had +receiued al, he thanked him, and prayed him againe to come on shore. And +because the Caciques purpose was, to see if with dissimulation he might +doe some hurt, when they saw that the Gouernour and his men were in +readinesse, they began to goe from the shore: and with a great crie, the +crossebowmen which were ready, shot at them, and slue fiue or sixe of +them. They retired with great order: none did leaue his oare, though the +next to him were slaine; and shielding themselues, they went farther off. +Afterward they came many times and landed: and when any of vs came toward +them, they fled vnto their canoes, which were verie pleasant to behold: +for they were very great and well made, and had their tilts, plumes, +paueses, and flagges, and with the multitude of people that were in them, +they seemed to be a faire armie of gallies. In thirtie dayes space, while +the Gouernour remained there, they made foure barges: In three of which +hee commanded twelue horsemen to enter, in each of them foure; in a +morning, three houres before day, men which hee trusted would land in +despight of the Indians, and make sure the passage, or die, and some +footemen being crossebowmen went with them, and rowers to set them on the +other side. And in the other barge he commanded Iohn de Guzman to passe +with the footemen, which was made Captaine in stead of Francisco +Maldonado. And because the streame was swift, they went a quarter of a +league vp the Riuer along the bancke, and crossing ouer, fell downe with +the streame, and landed right ouer against the Camp. (M644) Two stones +cast before they came to land, the horsemen went out of the barges on +horsebacke to a sandie plot very hard and cleere ground, where all of them +landed without any resistance. Assoone as those that passed first, were on +land on the other side, the barges returned to the place where the +Gouernour was: and within two houres after Sunnerising, all the people +were ouer. The Riuer was almost halfe a league broad. If a man stood still +on the other side, it could not be discerned, whether he were a man or no. +The Riuer was of great depth, and of a strong current: the water was +alwaies muddie: there came downe the Riuer continually many trees and +timber, which the force of the water and streame brought downe. There was +great store of fish in it of sundrie sorts, and the most of it differing +from the freshwater fish of Spaine, as hereafter shall be shewed. + + + +Chap. XXIII. How the Gouernour departed from Aquixo to Casqui, and from +thence to Pacaha: and how this Countrie differeth from that which we had +passed. + + +Hauing passed Rio grande, the Gouernour trauelled a league and an halfe, +and came to a great towne of Aquixo, which was dispeopled before hee came +thither. They espied thirtie Indians comming ouer a plaine, which the +Cacique sent, to discouer the Christians determination: and assoone as +they had sight of them, they tooke themselues to flight. The horsemen +pursued them, and slue tenne, and tooke fifteene. And because the towne, +whither the Gouernour went, was neere vnto the Riuer, he sent a Captaine, +with as many men as he thought sufficient to carrie the barges vp the +Riuer. And because in his trauelling by land many times he went farre from +the Riuer to compasse the creekes that came from it, the Indians tooke +occasion to set vpon them of the barges, and put them in great danger, +because that by reason of the great current, they durst not leaue the +shore, and from the bancke they shot at them. Assoone as the Gouernour was +come to the towne, hee presently sent crossebow men downe the Riuer, which +came to rescue them; and vpon the comming of the barges to the towne, hee +commanded them to bee broken, and to saue the iron for others, when it +should bee needfull. Hee lay there one night, and the day following, hee +set forward to seeke a Prouince, called Pacaha: which hee was informed to +bee neere vnto Chisca, where the Indians told him there was gold. He +passed through great townes of Aquixo, which were all abandoned for feare +of the Christians. Hee understood by certaine Indians that were taken, +that three daies iournie from thence dwelt a great Cacique, whose name was +Casqui. Hee came to a small Riuer, where a bridge was made, by which they +passed: that day till Sunset, they went all in water, which in some places +came to the waste, and in some to the knees. When they saw themselues on +dry land, they were very glad, because they feared they should wander vp +and downe as forlorne men al night in the water. At noone they came to the +first towne of Casqui: they found the Indians carelesse, because they had +no knowledge of them. There were many men and women taken, and store of +goods, as mantles and skinnes, as well in the first towne, as in another, +which stood in a field halfe a league from thence in sight of it; whither +the horsemen ran. This Countrie is higher, drier, and more champion, than +any part bordering neere the Riuer, that vntill then they had seene. There +were in the fields many Walnut trees, bearing soft shelled Walnuts in +fashion like bullets, and in the houses they found many of them, which the +Indians had laid vp in store. The trees differed in nothing else from +those of Spaine, nor from those which we had seene before, but onely that +they have a smaller leafe. There were many Mulberrie trees and Plum trees, +which bare red plums like those of Spaine, and other gray, somewhat +differing, but farre better. And all the trees are all the yeere so +fruitfull, as if they were planted in orchards: and the woods were verie +thinne. The Gouernour trauelled two daies through the Countrie of Casqui, +before hee came to the towne where the Cacique was: and most of the way +was alway by champion ground, which was full of great townes, so that from +one towne, you might see two or three. He sent an Indian to certifie the +Cacique, that hee was comming to the place where he was, with intent to +procure his friendship, and to hold him as his brother. Whereunto he +answered, That he should be welcome, and that he would receiue him with +speciall good wil, and accomplish all that his Lordship would command him. +Hee sent him a present vpon the way; to wit, skinnes, mantles, and fish: +And after these complements, the Gouernour found all the townes, as he +passed, inhabited with people, which peaceablie attended his comming, and +offered him skinnes, mantles, and fish. The Cacique accompanied with many +Indians came out of the towne, and staied halfe a league on the way to +receiue the Gouernour, and when hee came to him, he spake these words +following: + +Right high, right mighty, and renowned Lord, your Lorship is most hartilie +welcome. Assoone as I had notice of your Lordship, of your power, and your +perfections, although you came into my Countrie, killing and taking +captiues the inhabitants thereof and my subiects: yet I determined to +conforme my will vnto yours, and as your owne to interpret in good part +all that your Lordship did: beleeuing, that it was conuenient it should be +so for some iust respect, to preuent some future matter reuealed vnto your +Lordship, and concealed from me. For well may a mischiefe be permitted to +auoid a greater, and that good may come thereof: which I beleeue will so +fall out. For it is no reason to presume of so excellent a Prince, that +the noblenesse of his heart, and the effect of his will would permit him +to suffer any vniust thing. My abilitie is so small to serue you as your +Lordship deserueth, that if you respect not mine abundant good will, which +humblie offereth all kind of seruice, I deserue but little in your +presence. But if it bee reason that this be esteemed, receiue the same; my +selfe, my Countrie, and subiects for yours, and dispose of me and them at +your pleasure. For if I were Lord of all the world, with the same good +will should your Lordship by me be receiued, serued and obeyed. + +The Gouernour answered him to the purpose, and satisfied him in few words. +Within a while after both of them vsed words of great offers and courtesie +the one to the other, and the Cacique requested him to lodge in his +houses. The Gouernour, to preserue the peace the better, excused himselfe, +saying, that hee would lodge in the fields. And because it was very hot, +they camped neere certaine trees a quarter of a league from the towne. +(M645) The Cacique went to his towne, and came againe with many Indians +singing. Assoone as they came to the Gouernour, all of them prostrated +themselues vpon the ground. Among these came two Indians that were blind. +The Cacique made a speech: to auoid tediousnesse, I will onely tell in few +words the substance of the matter. Hee said, that seeing the Gouernour was +the sonne of the Sunne, and a great Lord, he besought him to doe him the +fauour to giue sight to those two blind men. The blind men rose vp +presently, and very earnestly requested the same of the Gouernour. He +answered, That in the high heauens was he that had power to giue them +health, and whatsoeuer they could aske of him, whose seruant he was: And +that this Lord made the heauens and the earth, and man after his owne +likenesse, and that he suffered vpon the crosse to saue mankind, and rose +againe the third day, and that he died as he was man, and as touching his +diuinitie, he was, and is immortall; and that he ascended into heauen, +where he standeth with his armes open to receiue all such as turne vnto +him: and straightway he commanded him to make a verie high crosse of wood, +which was set vp in the highest place of the towne; declaring vnto him, +that the Christians worshipped the same in resemblance and memorie of that +whereon Christ suffered. The Gouernour and his men kneeled downe before +it, and the Indians did the like. The Gouernour willed him, that from +thencefoorth hee should worship the same, and should aske whatsoeuer they +stood in need of, of that Lord that he told him was in heauen. Then he +asked him how far it was from thence to Pacaha: He said, one daies +iournie, and that at the end of his Countrie, there was a lake like a +brooke which falleth into Rio Grande, and that hee would send men before +to make a bridge whereby he might passe. The same day that the Gouernour +departed thence, he lodged at a towne belonging to Casqui: and the next +day hee passed in sight of other townes, and came to the lake, which was +halfe a crossebow shot ouer, of a great depth and current. At the time of +his comming, the Indians had made an end of the bridge, which was made of +timber, laid one tree after another: and on one side it had a course of +stakes higher then the bridge, for them that passed to take hold on. The +Cacique of Casqui came to the Gouernour, and brought his people with him. +The Gouernour sent word by an Indian to the Cacique of Pacaha, that though +hee were enemie to the Cacique of Casqui, and though hee were there, yet +he would doe him no disgrace nor hurt, if he would attend him peaceablie, +and embrace his friendship; but rather would intreate him as a brother. +The Indian, which the Gouernour sent, came againe, and said, that the +Cacique made none account of that which hee told him, but fled with all +his men out at the other side of the towne. Presentlie the Gouernour +entred, and ran before with the horsemen, that way, by which the Indians +fled; and at another towne distant a quarter of a league from thence, they +tooke many Indians: and assoone as the horsemen had taken them, they +deliuered them to the Indians of Casqui, whom, because they were their +enemies, with much circumspection and reioycing, they brought to the towne +where the Christians were: and the greatest griefe they had, was this, +that they could not get leaue to kill them. There were found in the towne +many mantles, and Deere skinnes, Lions skins, and Beares skinnes, and many +Cats skins. Many came so farre poorely apparrelled, and there they clothed +themselues: of the mantles, they made them cotes and cassocks, and some +made gownes, and lined them with Cats skins; and likewise their cassocks. +Of the Deeres skinnes, some made them also ierkins, shirts, hose and +shooes: and of the Beare skinnes, they made them verie good clokes: for no +water could pierce them. There were targets of raw oxe hides found there; +with which hides they armed their horses. + + + +Chap. XXIIII. How the Cacique of Pacaha came peaceablie to the Gouernour, +and the Cacique of Casqui absented himselfe, and came againe to make his +excuse, and how the Gouernour made them both friends. + + +Vpon Wednesday, the 19. of Iune, the Gouernour entred into Pacaha: He +lodged in the towne, where the Cacique vsed to reside, which was very +great, walled, and beset with towers, and many loopeholes were in the +towers and wall. And in the towne was great store of old Maiz, and great +quantitie of new in the fields. Within a league and halfe a league were +great townes all walled. Where the Gouernour was lodged, was a great lake, +that came neere vnto the wall: and it entred into a ditch that went round +about the towne, wanting but a little to enuiron it round. From the lake +to the great Riuer was made a weare by the which the fish came into it; +which the Cacique kept for his recreation and sport: with nets, that were +founde in the towne, they tooke as much as they would: and tooke they +neuer so much, there was no want perceiued. There was also great store of +fish in many other lakes that were thereabout, but it was soft, and not so +good as that which came from the Riuer, and the most of it was different +from the fresh water fish of Spaine. There was a fish which they call +Bagres: the third part of it was head, and it had on both sides the +gilles, and along the sides great pricks like very sharpe aules: those of +this kind that were in the lakes were as big as pikes: and in the Riuer, +there were some of an hundred, and of an hundred and fiftie pounds weight, +and many of them were taken with the hooke. There was another fish like +barbilles; and another like breames, headed like a delicate fish, called +in Spaine besugo,(127) betweene red and gray. This was there of most +esteeme. There was another fish called a pele fish: it had a snout of a +cubit long, and at the end of the vpper lip it was made like a peele. +There was another fish like a Westerne shad; And all of them had scales, +except the bagres, and the pele fish. There was another fish, which +sometimes the Indians brought vs, of the bignes of a hog, they call it the +Pereo fish: it had rowes of teeth beneath and aboue. The Cacique of Casqui +sent many times great presents of fish, mantles, and skinnes. Hee told the +Gouernour that he would deliuer the Cacique of Pacaha into his hands. He +went to Casqui, and sent many canoes vp the Riuer, and came himselfe by +land with many of his people. The Gouernour with 40. horsemen and 60. +footemen tooke him along with him vp the Riuer. And his Indians which were +in the canoes, discouered where the Cacique of Pacaha was in a little +Island, situated betweene two armes of the River. And fiue Christians +entred into a canoe, wherein Don Antonio Osorio went before, to see what +people the Cacique had with him. There were in the Isle fiue or six +thousand soules. And assoone as they saw them, supposing that the Indians +which were in the other canoes were also Christians, the Cacique, and +certaine which were in three canoes, which they had there with them, fled +in great haste to the other side of the Riuer: The rest with great feare +and danger, lept into the Riuer, where much people was drowned, especially +women and little children. Presently the Gouernour which was on land, not +knowing what happened to Don Antonio, and those that went with him, +commanded the Christians with all speed to enter with the Indians of +Casqui in the canoes, which were quickly with Don Antonio in the little +Island, where they tooke many men and women, and much goods. Great store +of goods, which the Indians had lain vpon hurdles of canes, and rafts of +timber to carrie ouer to the other side, draue downe the river, wherewith +the Indians of Casqui filled their canoes: and for feare lest the +Christians would take it from them, the Cacique went home with them downe +the Riuer, without taking his leave of the Gouernour: whereupon the +Gouernour was highly offended with him: and presently returned to Pacaha, +he ouerran the Countrie of Casqui the space of two leagues, where hee +tooke twentie or thirtie of his men. And because his horses were wearie, +and he wanted time that day to goe any farther, hee returned to Pacaha, +with determination within three or four daies after to inuade Casqui. And +presently hee let loose one of the Indians of Pacaha, and sent word by him +to the Cacique, that if hee would haue his friendship, he should repaire +vnto him, and that both of them would make warre upon Casqui. And +presently came many Indians that belonged to Pacaha, and brought an +Indian, in stead of the Cacique, which was discouered by the Caciques +brother which was taken prisoner. The Gouernour wished the Indians that +their Master himselfe should come: for hee knew very well that that was +not hee, and told them, that they could doe nothing which he knew not +before they thought it. (M646) The next day the Cacique came, accompanied +with many Indians, and with a present of much fish, skinnes and mantles. +He made a speech that all were glad to heare, and concluded, saying, That +though his Lordship, without his giuing occasion of offence had done him +hurt in his Countrie and subiects; yet hee would not therefore refuse to +bee his, and that he would alwaies be at his commandement. The Gouernour +commanded his brother to be loosed, and other principall Indians that were +taken prisoners. That day came an Indian from the Cacique of Casqui, and +said, that his Lord would come the next day to excuse himselfe of the +error which he had committed, in going away without licence of the +Gouernour. The Gouernour willed the messenger to signifie vnto him that if +he came not in his owne person, hee would seeke him himselfe, and giue him +such punishment as he deserued. The next day with all speede came the +Cacique of Casqui, and brought a present to the Gouernour of many mantles, +skinnes, and fish, and gaue him a daughter of his, saying, that he greatly +desired to match his blood with the blood of so great a Lord as he was, +and therefore he brought him his daughter, and desired him to take her to +his wife. Hee made a long and discreet oration, giuing him great +commendations, and concluded, saying, that hee should pardon his going +away without licence, for that Crosses sake, which he had left with him: +protesting that hee went away for shame of that which his men had done +without his consent. The Gouernour answered him, that hee had chosen a +good patrone; and that if hee had not come to excuse himselfe, hee had +determined to seeke him, to burne his townes, to kill him and his people, +and to destroy his countrie. To which he replied saying: + +My Lord, I and mine are yours, and my countrie likewise is yours: +therefore if you had done so, you should haue destroyed your owne +countrie, and haue killed your owne people: whatsoeuer shall come vnto me +from your hand, I will receiue as from my Lord, as well punishment as +reward: And know you, that the fauour which you did me in leauing me the +Crosse, I do acknowledge the same to be a very great one, and greater then +I haue euer deserued. For you shall vnderstand, that with great droughts, +the fields of Maiz of my countrie were withered; and assoone as I and my +people kneeled before the Crosse, and prayed for raine, presently our +necessitie was relieued. + +The Gouernour made him and the Cacique of Pacaha friends; and set them +with him at his table to dine with him: and the Caciques fell at variance +about the seats, which of them should sit on his right hand. The Gouernour +pacified them; telling them that among the Christians, all was one to sit +on the one side or on the other, willing them so to behaue themselues, +seeing they were with him, that no bodie might heare them, and that euery +one should sit in the place that first hee lighted on. From thence he sent +thirtie horse men, and fiftie footemen to the Prouince of Caluca, to see +if from thence hee might trauel to Chisca, where the Indians said, there +was a worke of gold and copper. They trauelled seuen daies iournie through +a desert, and returned verie wearie, eating greene plummes and stalkes of +Maiz, which they found in a poore towne of sixe or seuen houses. From +thence forward toward the North; the Indians said, That countrie was very +ill inhabited, because it was very cold: (M647) And that there were such +store of Oxen, that they could keep no corne for them: that the Indians +liued vpon their flesh. The Gouernour seeing that toward that part the +countrie was so poore of Maiz, that in it they could not be sustained, +demanded of the Indians, which way it was most inhabited; and they said, +they had notice of a great Prouince, and a verie plentifull countrie, +which was called Quigaute, and that it was toward the South. + + + + + + +FOOTNOTES + + + M1 The principall causes why this voyage is vndertaken. + M2 The seconde kinde of planting + M3 Iosua 4. + M4 Iosua 6. + M5 Ioshua 8. + M6 Ioshua 9. + M7 Iudg. 11. 13. + M8 Iudg. 1. + M9 A good note for al Conquerers to be mercifull. Iudg. 6. 7. + M10 Ruffinus lib. I. cap. 9. + M11 Meropius slaine; Edesius and Frumentius preserued by the Indians. + M12 Frumentius in great fauour with the Queene of the Indias; Another + great worke begunne by a man a meane birth. + M13 Ruffinus the Author of this storie. + +_ 1 Marginal note_. Euseb. in his Ecclesiasticall historie, testifieth + how that Constantine the great did enlarge his dominions by subduing + of Infidels and Idolatrous nations. Eusebius lib. I. de vita + Constant. cap. 4. et cap. 9. Euseb. cod. lib. cap. 39. + + M14 Theodoret in eccle. lib. 5. cap 20. + M15 Theodoretus cap. 26. eodem lib. + M16 1170. Owen Guyneth was then Prince of Northwales. + M17 Nullum tempus occurrit Regi. This Island was discouered by Sir + Humfrey and his company, in this his last iourney. + + 2 Montezuma. + + M18 Mutezuma his Oration to his subiects in presence of Hermando Cortes, + which Oration was made about the yeere 1520. + M19 M. Oliuer Dalbony. M. Edward Reow. M.R.H. M.I.A. + M20 Cox the master. + +_ 3 Marginal note_.--Clothiers. Woolmen. Carders. Spinners. Weauers + Fullers. Sheermen. Diers. Drapers. Cappers. Hatters, &c. and many + decayed townes repayred. + + M21 The idle persons of this realme shall by occasion of this iourney + bee well imployed and set on worke. + M22 Hempe doeth growe neere S. Laurence riuer naturally. + M23 Read the beginning of the booke intituled Diuers touching the + discouery of America. + M24 Beasts for pleasure. + M25 Hides solde for forty shillings a piece. + M26 Great grapes. Wine of the Palme tree. + M27 Commodities found in August last. + M28 2 Corinth. 9. + M29 This bargen cannot be uniust, where both parties are gainers. + + 4 Equator + + M30 2. Decad. lib. 5. fol. 77. of the West Indies in English. Canoa is a + kind of boat. 3. Decad. lib. I. fol. 97. About the yere of our Lord + 1511. + M31 Conquest of the West Indies. fol. 43. and 45. English. + M32 A marueilous victorie. + + 5 Louis Cadamosto, a Venetian, born about 1422, sailed from Madeira in + 1455. under the auspices of Dom Henry, son of King John of Portugal. + He discovered Senegal, Cape Verd, and Gambia River. In a second + voyage, in 1456, he pushed as far as the Saint Dominic River. On his + return to his native land in 1464, he published an account of his + travels. + + M33 Ceffella accompted to be the place where the noble and wise king + Salomon did fetch his gold. + + 6 Vasco da Gama was the first to double the Cape of Good Hope. Died at + Cochin, 24th December 1525. + + 7 Alonzo, Duke of Albuquerque, an illegitimate descendant of the Kings + of Portugal, established the Portuguese power on the East Coast of + Africa, in Arabia, the Persian Gulf, further India, the Moluccas, + etc. As Viceroy of the East Indies, his justice and chivalrous + nature won the love and respect of all, and many years after his + death, which happened in 1515, the natives used to make pilgrimages + to his tomb to pray for justice against his cruel successors. + + 8 Ceylon. + + M34 These are the furthest parts of the world from England. At these + Islands hath sir Francis Drake bene, where the fame of the Queenes + most excellent Maiestie was renowmed. + M35 Remember the great arrest of the Hollanders. An. 1598. + M36 Commodities of this voyage in shortnesse. + M37 Commodities of the countrey more then those of Moscouie. + M38 The seuerall merchandise. + M39 A lake of salt in Vasques his voyage. + +_ 9 Marginal note_.--The ewer of metal brought by M. Fromisher, caused + two seuerall supplies, the two yeeres next following; whereof the + latter was of thirteene tall ships. + + M40 Master Carliles owne experience + M41 The Frenchmens trade renewed in Canada, in the yeere 1581. + M42 The South part best for inhabiting and traffique. + M43 The furnishing foorth of 100. men for one yeere will cost 4000. li. + M44 The fleete of Canada. + M45 The markes of the harbour of the Isle Ramea. + M46 An Isle like a Floure de lice. + M47 A banke of sand. + M48 The maine a shold coast. + M49 Lisle Blanche. The place where they killed 1500. Morses. + M50 Sands and sholds. A smal Island conteining a league of ground. + M51 A hard hauen. + M52 Markes to come into the hauen. + M53 The barre. + M54 The best anchorage. + M55 Another entrance. The Isle of Cormorants. + + 10 This page refers to Vol. III. of the Edition of 1812. For Jacques + Cartier's voyage, see farther on. + + 11 A very curious account of the Unicorn is to be found in Goldsmid's + Myths of Ancient Science, 1886. + + M56 The voyage of M. Drake of Apsham to Ramea. + M57 The Isle of Ramea, or Menquit. + M58 The English men land vpon Cape Briton. + M59 They goe on shore in another place. + M60 The people of the countrey came downe to our men. + M61 Blacke dogs. + M62 A secret trade to the Southwest of Cape Briton. + M63 Soundings to the South and Southwestward of Cape Briton. + M64 They sayle 50 or 60 leagues to the South-West of Cape Briton. + M65 Great store of Seales, Porposes, Whales and Cods. + M66 They continue on the coast from Cape Briton Westwards full eleuen + weekes. + M67 An huge Whale pursued their ship by the space of many dayes till one + of their men fell ouerboord. + + 12 Probably a Shark. + + M68 The Islands of the Martyers. The Isles of S. Peter. + M69 They land on the Isle of Natiscotec. + M70 The Isle of Menego. + M71 The 2 Islands of Birdes. + M72 Store of Morsses. + M73 In Bryans Island excellent ground for corne and meadow. + M74 Another harbourough in Ramea. + M75 A skirmish betweene the French men and vs. + M76 A new treason of the Britons. + M77 The bar of the hauen of Ramea. + M78 They depart from Ramea. + M79 Isle Blanch or the White Isle. + M80 The riuer of Cape Briton. + M81 Their arriuall in the Isle of Cape Briton. + M82 The Chancewel cast away 18 leagues within Cape Briton. + M83 Woods on the Isle of Cape Briton. + M84 The Sauages of Cape Briton come aboord of our ship. + M85 Cibo an harborow in the Isle of Cape Briton. + M86 They departed from Cape Briton. + M87 S. Peters Islands. + M88 A Spanish ship taken. + M89 M. Crafton. + M90 The harborow of Cape S. Marie. + M91 A Briton ship of 200 tunnes taken. + + 13 Blank in original. + + M92 A great white bear. + M93 Les Chasteaux. + M94 Blanc Sablon or white Sands. + M95 Brest a place to the North in Newfoundland. + + 14 Blank in original. + + M96 The riuer of S. Iaques. + M97 Boats made of the barke of birch trees. + + 15 Blank in original. + + M98 The Islands of Margaulx. + M99 Morses or Sea oxen. + M100 An exceeding goodly land. + M101 Varietie of goodly trees. + + 16 Blank in original. + + M102 The passage de Chasteaux. + M103 Trees able to mast ships of 300. tunnes. + M104 Fortie or 50 boates of sauages. + M105 Three hundred gentle Sauages. + M106 Bay du Chaleur, or the Bay of heat. + + 17 Sous. + + M107 Maize. + M108 This hauen seemeth to be Gaspay. + M109 Two sauages taken. + + 18 Blank in original. + + M110 Fifty degrees of latitude. + M111 The Streit of S. Peter. + + 19 Gulf of Mexico. + + M112 The Isle of birds in 49 degrees 40 minutes. + M113 The Bay des Chasteaux or The Grant Bay. + M114 A Cape of the Isle of Assumption. + M115 A mighty skull of Whales. + M116 The mouth of the riuer of Hochelaga about thirty leagues broad. + M117 The Isle of Assumption or Natiscotec. + M118 A hauen on the Southerne coast. + M119 This is the riuer of Tadascu, or of Saguenay. + M120 The Ile of Condres or Filberds. + M121 This great Iland is called The Ile of Orleans. Maiz. + M122 Santa Croix. + M123 Goodly hemp. + M124 The Ile of Bacchus, or the Ile of Orleans. + M125 Vines laden with grapes. + M126 Hochelay. + M127 The lake of Angolesme. + M128 Wild rats as big as Conies. + M129 They leaue their Pinnesse behind. + M130 Hochelaga distant from the lake of Angolesme 45 leagues. + M131 The third of October. + M132 Hochelaga sixe miles from the riuer side. + M133 This Millet is Maiz. + M134 The description of Hochelaga. + M135 Maiz, pease, beanes, musk-millions, cucumbers, and other fruits. + Plentie of fish and the preseruing thereof. + M136 Esurgni good to stanch blood. + M137 A ridge of mountaines to the North of Hochelaga and another to the + South. + M138 The 3 faults or falls of water in 44 degrees of latitude. + M139 The riuer of Saguenay commeth from the West, where there is gold and + siluer. + M140 Toudamani dwelling Southward of Canada. + M141 They desire to be baptised. + M142 Tobacco described. + M143 It is now found to be but 200 leagues. + M144 Riuers falling from mountaines. + M145 Beasts. + M146 Birds. + M147 Fishes. + M148 The right way to Saguenay. + M149 Store of gold and red copper. + M150 Two or three great lakes. Maredulcum aquarum. + M151 A perfect remedy against the French Pocks. + M152 A long winter. + M153 Rubies, Gold, and wollen cloth with other riches in Saguenay. + M154 A people called Picquemians. + M155 The towne of Sidatin. + M156 Donnacona, Taignoagny, and Domagaia taken. + M157 Four and twenty chains of Esurgny. + M158 The Isle of Orleans. Isle de Coudres. + M159 A knife of red coper brought from Saguenay. + M160 The Isle of Hares. + M161 Ten Sauages brought into France. Great riches and very good soile in + Saguenay, which is beyond the saults. + + 20 Near Boulogne, between that town and Calais. + + M162 The kings letters to Cartier. + M163 The great mischiefe of leesing the season. + M164 Carpont Hauen. + M165 Transporting of diuers sorts of cattell for breed. + M166 The new king of Canada. + M167 Great dissimulation of a Sauage. + M168 A good roade 4. leagues aboue Saincte Croix. + M169 Trees aboue 3. fathoms about. Hanneda the most excellent tree of the + world. + M170 Abundance of Vines of grapes. + M171 Fruit like Medlers. + M172 Seed sprong out of the ground within 8 days. + + 21 Turnips. (French, _Navets_). + + M173 A great Plaine of very good arable ground. + M174 Diamants of Canada. + M175 Excellent and strong hempe. + M176 The rich countrey of Saquenay situated beyond the Saults which are + in 44. deg. + M177 They depart from Charlesburg Royal the 7. of Septem. + M178 They delight in red cloth. + M179 The 11 of September. + M180 Bad ground and a great current. + M181 Another village of good people which dwell ouer against the second + Sault. + M182 400 persons about their boates. + M183 Like those of New Albion. + M184 The sauages are great dissemblers. + M185 The Sauages conspire together against the French. + M186 A very great number of Sauages assembled together. + + 22 This may refer either to Lake St. Peter or Lake Ontario; I should + think the latter. + + M187 The Saults are in 44. deg. and easie to passe. + M188 But 5. leagues iourney to passe the 3 Saults. + M189 Ten dayes iourney from the Saults to this great Lake. + M190 The Isle of Blanc Sablon or white sand. + M191 The Isle Ascention, Assumption or Naliscotec. + M192 The commendation of the Isle of Ascension. + + 23 Hedgehogs. + + 24 Query, Mount Logan. + + 25 Cape Gaspe. + + 26 Chaleur Bay. + + M193 Greater store and better fish then in Newfoundland. + M194 The mouth of the riuer of Canada twenty fiue leagues broad. + + 27 Filbert. + + M195 The riuer is here but 10 leagues broad. + M196 The riuer 8 leagues broad. + + 28 Saguenay River really rises in Lake St. John. + + M197 The riuer not past 4 leagues ouer. + + 29 The word _Canada_ in the native tongue meant, as we have seen above, + a town, and is probably the modern Rimouski. + + M198 The beginning of the fresh water. + M199 The riuer but a quarter of a league broad. + M200 Why the countrey is colder in the Winter then France. + M201 A second reason. + M202 The variation of the compasse. + + 30 The name _Norumbega_ had a different meaning at different periods. + First, there was the fabulous city of Norumbega, situated on the + Penobucot. Secondly, there was the country of Norumbega, embracing + Nova Scotia and New England, and at one time reaching from Cape + Breton to 30 deg. in Florida. Subsequently it receded to narrower + limits and embraced only the region on both sides of the river above + named. (Woods, Introduction to Western Planting, p. lii.) + + M203 Gold and siluer like to be found in Canada. + M204 A Bay in 42 degrees giuing some hope of a passage. + + 31 The Bay of Fundy is probably here alluded to. + + M205 The cause of the often snowing in Canada. + M206 Iaques Cartier stole away. + M207 August 1542. September 14. + M208 The proportion of their victuals. + M209 The length of the Winter. + M210 So haue they of Ceuola, and Quiuira, and Meta Incognita. + M211 Their gouernment. + + 32 He was only knighted some time between December 1584 and February + 1585. + + 33 Public Record Office. Dom. Eliz. Addenda, Vol. xxix., No. 9. This + letter was printed in full in the Maine Historical Society's + _Documentary History of the State of Maine_, Vol. ii. + + 34 See the Introduction by Leonard Woods to the Reprint of Hakluyt's + Discourse for the Maine Historical Society. + + 35 A great collector of Rare Books, who died in 1770, and whose library + was sold in 1815. + + 36 This "last edition" is evidently the limited one of Hakluyt's + Collection of Voyages of 1809-12, 5 vols. 4to, edited by R. H. Evans + and printed by Woodfall. + + 37 Stevens's Historical and Geographical Notes, p. 20. + + 38 Estavan Gomes, a Portuguese pilot, sailed with Magellan on his + famous voyage in 1519, but deserted with his ship and crew. In 1525 + (_not_ 1524) he sailed from Corunna. He coasted Newfoundland as far + south as 40 deg. Here he took on board certain Indians and carried + them to Spain. (C.D.) + + 39 Born 1478. His _Historia general de los Indias_ was not published in + its entirety until 1851-55. (C.D.) + + 40 It appears from a passage in Chapter xvii. of this Discourse that + Hakluyt had seen an original manuscript account of Cartier's second + voyage in the Royal Library at Paris. + + M212 The Prynces of England called the defenders of the faithe. + + 41 This title was conferred on Henry VIII. by Leo X. by a bull dated + the fifth of the Ides of October 1521, for his book "Assertio Septem + Sacramentorum adversus Martin Lutherum," etc., printed by Pynson, + 1521. + + M213 Plantings fyrste necessarye. + + 42 Friar Luys Cancel of Balvastro was, with other friars, sent to + Florida by Philip II. in 1549, where they were massacred and eaten. + (See Eden's version of Gomara's Historia general, cap. xiv. Woods.) + + M214 A question of the adversary. + + 43 For an account of this earliest colony of Protestantism in America, + consult Bayle's _Dictionnaire_, Art. _Villegagnon_ and _Ricker_; + Cotton Mather, _Magnalia_, Book I., Southey's History of Brazil; De + Thou, Maimbourg, etc. + + 44 Dr. Woods thinks Hakluyt is mistaken in saying ministers went out + with Ribault to Florida. It is indeed hardly likely that Coligny + would have thus alienated the sympathy of Charles IX. + + 45 Master Wolfall was the name of the minister who accompanied + Frobisher, (see vol. xii. of this edition, p. 81), and Master + Francis Fletcher was with Drake in his voyage round the world in + 1577-80. His notes of the voyage were republished by the Hakluyt + Society in 1854. + + M215 Barbary + + 46 See the accounts of Voyages to Barbary given in Vol. xi. of this + Edition. + + M216 The Domynions of the Kinge of Spayne. + + 47 See Vol xi. of this Edition. + + M217 France. + + 48 Hakluyt was chaplain to the English Ambassador in Paris for five + years. + + M218 Flaunders. + M219 Estlande. + M220 Denmarke. + + 49 Russye. + + 50 This is Ivan III., surnamed _the Great_; he asked Queen Elizabeth in + marriage in 1579. + + M221 In the first volume of Ramusius, fol. 374, pag. 2. + + 51 When Hakluyt speaks of Florida, he means not only the peninsula so + called now, but as far north as 36 degrees. The most northerly + European colony in 1584 was situated south of the present town of + Savannah. It was probably St. Augustine. + + 52 The work alluded to is Ribault's "The whole and true discoverye of + Terra Florida.... Prynted at London by Rouland Hall for Thomas + Hacket. 1563." A copy is in the British Museum. The French version + is one of the lost books of the world. + + M222 Sylke wormes exceedinge faire. + M223 The gentleness of the people. + M224 Harvest twise yn the yere. + M225 Pepper groweth here; yt is longe pepper. + + 53 This "Joyfull Newes" was a translation by Frampton of the "Historia + Medicinal ... de nuestras Indias," (1574), of Nicholas Monardes, a + learned Spaniard, who died in 1578. The English version was + published in 1577. (C.D.) A copy is in my library. + + M226 These apples growe in Italy, and are yellowe like a pipen. + + 54 Probably Jean Parmentier, of Dieppe. + + M227 Excellent colours for dyenge. + + 55 Not improbably the old seaport of _Brouage_, near La Rochelle, now + deserted. This appears to be the only notice extant of an expedition + by de La Roche in 1584. For an account of his later expedition, + consult Parkman, _Pioneers of France_, pp. 210-212.--C.D. + + 56 The full account in English of de Coronado's travels is given by + Hakluyt in this collection. Hakluyt probably was ignorant of + Spanish, as be always quotes the French or Italian versions. + + 57 Captain Richard Whitbourne, of Exmouth, in his Preface to "A + Discourse and Discovery of Newfoundland," London, 1620, says he was + an eye-witness to Sir H. Gilbert's taking possession of the + countrey--C.D. + + 58 This work was reprinted in full by Hakluyt in this collection. _See + ante._ + + M228 Letters the last yere, in Latin, out of Newfoundelande. + + 59 Also reprinted in full in the collection. _See ante._ + + M229 Afterwardes they sett the woodds on fire, which burnt three weekes + together. + M230 Greate heate in Newfoundelande in sommer. + + 60 This voyage of Cortereale took place in 1500. + + 61 In all these Italian quotations, the edition by Dr. Deane has the + word _e_ or _ed_ spelled _et_, a curious blunder. + + 62 In a "True Discourse of the late voyages of discoverie," written by + George Best, who accompanied Frobisher, London, 1578, and reprinted + by the Hakluyt Society. + + M231 A singuler commoditie for dyenge of Englishe clothe. Thinges + incident to a navy. + M232 Prevention to be taken hede of. + M233 Idle persons mutynous and desire alteration in the state. + + 63 This is a lost book. Emden was the capital of East Friseland. With + reference to the removal of the English merchants at Antwerp to + Emden, consult Strype's Life of Grindall, Oxford, cap, ix. + + 64 No less than seven editions of Sleidan's _De quatuor monarchiis_ + were printed by the Elzeviers alone, a proof of the popularity of + the work. An English translation by John Daus was published in + London in 1560. + + M234 Six hundred thousand pounde gayned yerely by Englishe wolles. + + 65 Reprinted in Hakluyt's "Divers Voyages," 1582. + + M235 Objection. Aunswer. + + 66 See Myles Phillip's Voyage, _post_. Also consult Nicholas, + _Pleasaunt Historie of the Conquest of the Weast India_, 1578, pp. + 378-9. + + M236 The benefits of plantings aboute Cape Bryton or Newfounde lande. + + 67 Utrecht. + + M237 Kinge Phillipps injuries offred by his treasures. + + 68 These baseless assertions of complicity on the part of Phillip in + the attempts on the life of William of Nassau, only prove the bitter + prejudices of the Protestant party. I am surprised to find Dr. + Deane, in a note on this passage, endorsing Hakluyt's unfounded + charges. + + 69 Marnix de Sainte Aldegonde was born at Brussels in 1538. Died 1598. + He was at one time Ambassador to England.--See Motley's United + Netherlands, I. 145.--C.D. + + M238 The example of Antigonus. + + 70 Golfo Dulce. + + M239 A speciall note of a passage. + + 71 No such river was ever cut.--C.D. + + M240 The Frenche. + + 72 Off the cost of Venezuela. + + 73 Port-au-Prince. + + 74 It is strange the Hakluyt should omit St. Vincent, Dominica, + Guadeloupe, etc., and mention such small islands as Marigalante. The + other two islands named are probably Urala and Curasoa. + + M241 Bishop Bartholomewe de las Casas an eye wytnes of these cruelties. + + 75 This quotation is from the English translation, "The Spanish + Colonie," London, 1583. + + M242 Johannes Metellus Sequanus. + M243 The Spanishe monarchy is like unto the monarchy of Alexander the + Greate. + + 76 Hakluyt here refers to his "Divers Voyages," published in 1582. + + M244 A lecture of the arte of navigation. + M245 Marques de la Cruz Admyrall of the Ocean. + M246 A meane to avoid the sodden arrests of our navy. + M247 The cause why these discoveries went not forward in King Henry the + Seavenths tyme. + M248 (a symbol of a finger pointing) + + 77 This is not the case. + + M249 Sawe milles. + + 78 See the translation of Zeno's Voyages, printed by the Hakluyt + Society, and edited by Major. + + 79 See Introductory note. + + 80 The illegitimate son of the Infant Don Luiz and Violante Gomes. + Consult Froude, _Hist. of England_, vol. ix. + + 81 See Vol. xii of this collection of Voyages. + + 82 See Lamartine's "Columbus" in my _Bibliotheca Curiosa_. + + M250 The reason why the discovery was lefte of in Kinge Henry the + Seaventh's tyme. + M251 N f land discoverd. + M252 Math. 16 + + 83 Evidently memoranda added to the Manuscript from time to time. + + M253 A most nedeful note. + M254 Free Denization graunted. + M255 Anno 1584. + + 84 This is the voyage that was taking place while Hakluyt was writing + his Discourse on Planting I have given above. + + M256 A Southerly course not greatly needful for Virginia. + M257 A sweet smell from the land. + M258 The first riuer. Iuly 13 possession taken. + M259 Abundance of grapes. + M260 The Isle of Wokokon. + M261 Conference with a Sauage. + M262 Abundance of fish. + M263 The ariuall of the kings brother. + M264 Trafficke with the Sauages. Tinne much esteemed. + M265 White corall. Perles. + M266 Pitch trees. + M267 The manner or making their boates. + M268 Their Idole. + M269 Skicoak a great towne. + M270 A ship cast away. + M271 Their weapons. + M272 Or Pananuaioc. + M273 Roanoak sixteen miles long. + + 85 This is the same Sir Richard Grenville whose heroic fight in the + "Revenge" is so well known. + + M274 The land vpon the Iland of S. Iohn de Porto Rico. + + 86 Should be 24th. + + M275 Iune + M276 They land on the Iles of Caicos. + + 87 Off Smith's Island. + + M277 They land in Florida. + M278 Iuly. + + 88 Probably Lake Matimuskeet. + + M279 August. + M280 September. + M281 October. + M282 The rich and manifold commodities of Virginia. + M283 Commodities fit to carie to Virginia. + M284 2 parts of this discourse. + + 89 Pamlico Sound. + + 90 Chesapeake Bay. + + M285 The excellencie of the seat of Chesepioock. + + 91 Albemarle Sound. + + 92 River Meherrin. + + M286 The towne of Chawanook able to make 700. men of warre. + M287 Pearles in exceeding quantitie. + M288 An enterprise of speciall importance. + M289 Whither M. Ralfe Lane meant to remoue. + + 93 River Appomatox? + + 94 James River? + + M290 Wingina changeth his name. Conspiracie of the Sauages against the + English. + M291 Their women. + M292 A marueilous Mineral in the countrey of Caunis Temoatan. + M293 This skill of making weares would be learned. + M294 The beginning of their haruest in Iuly. + M295 The conspiracie of Pemisapan. + M296 The forme of the treason. + M297 The sufficiencie of our men to deal against the Sauages. 10 to an + hundred. + + 95 Night surprise. So called from having been made by horsemen with + white shirts over their armour so as to recognise each other in the + darkness. + + M298 The slaughter and surprise of the Sauages. + M299 Pemisapan slaine. + M300 A letter from Sir Francis Drake. + M301 This ship arriued in Virginia. + M302 Sir Richard Grinuils third voyage. + + 96 See the different account given above by one of the colonists. + + M303 Fifteen men more left in Virginia. + M304 Fiue thousand pearles gathered. + M305 Tabacco. + M306 Monardes parte 2, lib. 1. cap. 4. + + 97 This is no doubt, that most useful vegetable, the potato. + + M307 The iuice of Coscushaw is poison. + M308 There are iii. kinds of Tunas whereof that which beareth no fruith + bringeth foorth the Cochinillo. + + 98 Of course, this is an error. + + M309 In the gulfe of California they vse the like fishing. + + 99 Thanet + + M310 Iaques Cartier voyage 2. chap. 8. + + 100 This is quite different from the Indians of South America, who + "rarely attacked in the night." (Prescott, _Conquest of Peru_, II, + cap. X.) + + M311 This want is hereafter to be supplied. + M312 One of the Isles of the Indies inhabited with Sauages. + + 101 One of the Virgin Islands. + + M313 Circumspection to be vsed in strange places. + + 102 Now called Crux Bay. + + M314 Musketos Bay, is a harbour vpon the south side of S. Iohns Island, + where we take in fresh water. + M315 A pleasant and fruitfull countrey, lying on the west end of S. Iohns + Island, where groweth plenty of Orenges, Limons, Plantans, and + Pines. + M316 An intent to plant in the Bay of Chesepiok + M317 Their meaning to remoue 50 miles into the countrey. + M318 Smerwick in the West of Ireland. + + 103 Littlehampton. + + 104 Probably Dingle, County Kerry. + + M319 The fight was in sight of the Iland of Nauaza.(105) + + 105 Novassa, south of the Windward Passage. + + 106 Or Florida Keys. + + M320 The state of the currents from the cape of Florida to Virginia. + + 107 The Gulf Stream. + + M321 Great diuersity of soundings. + + 108 This is either the Core Bank or Hatteras Bank. + + M322 Hatorask in 36 degr. and a terce. + M323 They land. + M324 Captaine Spicer drowned. + M325 They leaue the coast of Virginia. + + 109 Heave to. + + M326 13. Pipes of siluer + + 110 Between 1587 and 1602 Raleigh sent out five expeditions to Virginia. + To the last be firmly believed in the future of the country. + + M327 The Isle of Madera + M328 They discouer land. + M329 The coast trendeth to the East in 34. degrees of latitude. + + 111 North-East. + + M330 Courteous and gentle people. + M331 They run 50 leagues farther. + M332 They ran along the coast 200 leagues. They make hollow their Canoes + with fire. + M333 Vines like those of Lombardie. + M334 A mighty riuer. + M335 People clad with feathers of diuers colours. + M336 The pleasantness and riches of the land. + M337 The description of Claudia, Iland, tenne leagues from the mayne. + Claudia was mother of king Francis. + M338 Most pleasant and fruitful lands. + M339 The fashion of their houses. + M340 The coast full of good havens. + M341 Their curing with Tobacco and perfumes. + M342 The description of a notable hauen in 41. deg. and 2 tierces. + M343 Here the people begin to be more sauage. + M344 Beades of copper. + M345 32 pleasant Islands. + M346 They ran almost to 50. degrees. + M347 Other mens misfortune ought to be our warning. + +_ 112 Marginal note_.--The chiefe things worthie obseruation in Florida + are drawen in colours by Iames Morgues painter sometime liuing in + the Black fryers in London. + + 113 Pierced. + + M348 A collection of the commodities of Virginia. + M349 Meanes to raise benefit in new discoueries vsed by the Spaniards and + Portugals. + M350 Kine, sugar-canes and ginger transported into Hispaniola and Madera + &c. + M351 Woad and vines planted in the Azores. + +_ 114 Marginal note._--The great zeal of Elizabeth Queene of Castile and + Aragon in aduancing of new discoueries tending to Gods glory. + + M352 The aptnesse of the people in the maine of Virginia to embrace + Christianitie. Seneca. + M353 2 Cor. 12. 14. + M354 Iosue 1. 6. + M355 The good successe in Ireland of Richard Strangbow earle of + Chepstowe. + M356 The happy late discouery of the Northwest of Captaine Dauis. + + 115 [Marginal note: The kings of Poartugal had neuer aboue ten thousand + of their naturall subiects in all their new conquered dominions.] + + M357 Planting of Colonies. + M358 When force of armes is to be vsed. + M359 Nota. + M360 America vnknowen to all antiquity. + M361 Christopher Colon or Columbe. Americus Vespucius of whom America + took the name. The first generall part of America. Cabota in the + yeere 1597 had discouered all this tract for the crowne of England. + M362 The trees of Florida. + M363 These are perhaps those which the Sauages call Tunas. + M364 The beasts of Florida. + M365 The foule of Florida. + M366 The disposition and maners of the Floridians. + M367 The wearing of their haire. + M368 Many Hermaphrodites which have the nature of both sexes. + M369 Their order in marching to the warre. + M370 The drinking of Cassine before they goe to battell. + M371 Their maner of the buriall of Kings. + M372 The buriall of their Priests. + M373 Their maner of liuing in the Winter. + M374 Oile in Florida. + M375 The first voyage of Iohn Ribault to Florida. 1562. + M376 The course of the Spaniards not altogether necessary. + M377 Cape Francois in 30. degrees. + M378 A pillar set vp. + M379 Prayiers and thankes to God. + M380 Presents giuen to Ribault. + M381 Their fish weares like those of Virginia. + M382 They passe ouer the riuer. + + 116 Belle a voir. + + M383 The Riuer of Port Royall in 32. degrees of latitude. + M384 A passage by a riuer into the Sea. + M385 Ribault saileth 12 leagues vp the Riuer. + M386 A Pillar of free stone wherein the Armes of France were grauen, set + vp in an Iland in the riuer of Port Royal. + M387 Two Indians taken away. + M388 The dolefull songs of the Indians. + M389 The Indians eat not before the sun be set. + M390 Landonniers putting down in writing the words and phrases of the + Indians speech. + M391 This seemeth to be La grand Copal. + M392 The 2 Indians escape away. + M393 The benefite of planting. + M394 The Oration of Iohn Ribault to his company. + M395 AElius Pertinax descending from base parentage became Emperour of + Rome. + M396 Agathocles a potters sonne became king of Sicilie. + M397 Rusten Bassha of an heard-mans sonne through his valure became the + greate Turkes sonne in law. + M398 The souldiers answere to Ribaults Oration. + M399 The length and bredth of the fort taken by Laudonnier and Captaine + Salles. + M400 Ribaults speech to Captaine Albert. + M401 The riuer Base 15 leagues Northwards of Port Royall. + M402 Note. + M403 The feast of Toya largely described. + M404 The Indians trimming of themselues with rich feathers. + M405 Inuocations of the Iawas or Priests vnto Toya. + M406 The Indians manner of liuing in the Winter time of Mast and rootes. + M407 The liberalitie of king Ouade. + M408 The fort set on fire by casualtie. + M409 Their second iourney to the countrey of Ouade. + M410 The place where christall groweth in very good quantitie ten dayes + iourney from the riuer Belle. + M411 Note. + M412 Mutiny against the captaine, and the causes thereof. + M413 Captaine Albert slaine by his owne souldiers. + M414 They put to sea without sufficient victuals. + M415 Their victuals vtterly consumed. + M416 They drinke their vrine for want of fresh water. + M417 Extreme famine. + M418 The French succoured by an English Barke. + M419 It seemeth hee meaneth the voyage intended by Stukely. + M420 The ciuill warres the cause why the Frenchmen were not supplied, + which were left behinde in their first voyage. + + 117 The masacre of Huguenots at Vassy had taken place on March 1st 1562; + the battle of Dreux was fought in December. + + 118 The temporary Peace of Amboise. + + M421 Laudonniers second voyage to Florida, with three ships the 22 of + Aprill 1564. + + 119 Pine Apples. + + M422 Cape Francois between the riuer of Dolphins and the riuer of May, + maketh the distance 30 leagues about which is but 10 leagues ouer + land. + M423 The riuer of Dolphins called Seloy by the Sauages. + +_ 120 Marginal note_.--The pillar set vp before by Ribault crowned with + garlands of Laurell and inuironed with small paniers full of corne, + worshipped by the Sauages. + + M424 Grosses. + M425 The curtesie of the Floridians to the French. + M426 Men of exceeding old age. + M427 Sauages in Florida of 250. yeres olde. + M428 Siluer certain dayes iourney vp within the riuer of May. Thimogoa + mortall enemies to Satourioua. + M429 Laudionniers consultation with his company where it might be best + for them to plant. + M430 They begin their planting with prayer to God. + M431 In Florida they couer their houses with Palme leaues. + M432 The forme of the Fort Caroline. + M433 High building is not good for this Countrey. + M434 Note. + M435 The first voyage twentie leagues. + M436 Mayrra a king rich in golde and siluer. + M437 The second voyage. + M438 An exceeding rich place. + M439 Some paint their faces with blacke, and some with red. + M440 King Malica. + M441 They lappe mosse about their woundes and vse it instead of napkins. + M442 The returne of their shippes toward France the 28 of Iuly. + M443 The ceremonie which they vse before they goe to warre. + M444 Consultation before they assault their enemies. + M445 How they vse their enemies which they take in war. + M446 Their maner of triumph. + M447 Excellent Pumpions. + M448 A wonderfull lightning the 29. of August. + M449 The Sauages thinke the lightning to be discharging of the Christians + Ordinance. + M450 Laudonnier vsed the present occasion to his profite. + M451 A wonderfull heate. + M452 Fiftie cart load of fish dead in the Riuer with this heat. + M453 The thirde voyage the tenth September. Mayarqua a place 80 leagues + vp the Riuer of May. + M454 King Patanou. + M455 The Indians maner of war. + M456 Two hundreth Indians. + M457 Vtina getteth the victory of Potanou by the helpe of the French. + M458 La Roquettes conspiracie. + M459 Monsieur de Genre. + M460 Gienres message to Laudoniere in the Souldiers name. + M461 His answere. + M462 A dangerous practice against the Captaine and his Lieute'nt. + M463 Laudonniers sicknesse. + M464 Laudonniers Apothecarie. + M465 Captaine Bourdet arriued in Florida the 4. of September. + M466 The 4. voyage the 7. of Nouember. + M467 One of his Barks stolne away by his Mariners. + M468 Another of his Barks stolne away by two Carpenters. + M469 One of these Mariners named Francis Iean betrayed his own countrey + men to the Spaniard, and brought them into Florida. + M470 A Saw-mill necessary here. + M471 The thirde sedition. + M472 By Peru the French meane the coast of Carthagena and Nombre de Dios. + M473 The captaines charge at his setting forth. + M474 Landonniere kept 15. dayes prisoner by his owne souldiers. + M475 The returne of part of Laudonnieres seditious souldiers. + M476 Laudonnieres oration to his mutinous souldiers. + M477 The sentence of death. + M478 Execution. + M479 Laudonniere setteth things in order after his returne out of prison + to the fort. + M480 Reparation of the West side of the fort. + M481 Two Spanyards brought vnto Laudonniere by the Sauages. + M482 Calos a place uopn the Flats called The Martyres neere the Cape of + Florida. + M483 Plates of gold as broad as a sawcer. + M484 One of these Spanyards names was Martin Gomes. + M485 King Oathcaqua or Houathca. + M486 The greatest victory among the Floridians. + M487 The Floridians great traitours and dissemblers. + M488 Nicholas Masson otherwise called Nicolas Barre. + M489 King Audustas great humanity. + +_ 121 Marginal note_.--Peter Martyr writeth cap. 1. decad. 7. that the + like flocks of pigeons are in the isles of the Lucayos. + + M490 The widow of King Hioacaia, or Hihouhacara. + M491 This queenes name was Nia Cubicani. + M492 The fift voyage vp the riuer of May. + M493 Vtina sendeth to Laudonniere for his helpe. + M494 A good note. + M495 Three hundred Indians. + M496 Iawa signifieth their Priest or Magician. + M497 Potanou accompanied with two thousand Indians. + M498 The prediction of the Magician found true. + M499 Vtina hath 18 or 20 kings to his Vassals. + M500 A custome of the Indians to leaue their houses for 3 or 4 moneths + and to liue in the woods. + M501 They looke for succour out of France by the end of April at the + vttermost. + M502 Extreme famine for sixe weekes space. + M503 The vile nature of the Indians. + M504 Vtina taken prisoner in his village by Laudonniere and 50 of his + souldiers. + M505 Note. + M506 Note. + M507 New corne by the end of May in Florida. + M508 A little greene fruite that groweth in the riuers as big as cheries. + M509 Two Carpenters killed for gathering the Indians maize. + M510 Patica a village. + M511 Desire of reuenge rooted in the sauage. + M512 A necessarie admonition. + M513 The Floridians subtilities. + M514 A certaine signe of warre. + M515 A skirmish betwene the Sauages and the French. + M516 A second fresh charge of Sauages. + M517 The Floridians maner of fight. + M518 Courtesie and liberalitie the best meanes to deale with the sauages. + M519 The beating downe of the houses without the fort, and the Palisade. + M520 The cause why the French lost Florida. + M521 Eight kings Laudonniers friends and allies. + M522 The principall scope of planters in strange countreys. + M523 Florida a rich countrey. + M524 Aug. 1565. + M525 M. Iohn Hawkins the English Generall. + M526 Sheepe and poulterie carried into Florida. + M527 An aduantage wisely taken. + M528 The French mistrusted that the Englishmen would plant in Florida. + M529 Silver found in Florida. + M530 Note. The great importance of this enterprise. + M531 The great humanitite and bounty of Master Iohn Hawkins to the + French. + M532 The departure of the English Generall. + M533 The arriual of Captaine Iohn Ribault at the Fort the 28 of August + 1565. + M534 Note. + M535 False reports of Laudonniere to the Admirall of France. + M536 The danger of back-biting. + M537 Alcibiades banished by backbiters. + M538 Laudonnieres receiuing of Captaine Ribault. + M539 Letters of the Lord Admirall vnto Laudonniere. + M540 Accusations against him. + M541 Laudonnieres answere thereunto. + M542 Five Indian kings. + M543 The mountaines of Apalatcy wherein are mines of perfect gold. Sieroa + Pira red mettall. + M544 Good meanes to auoid the danger of fire. + M545 The Spaniards undermining and surprizing of the French. + +_ 122 Marginal note_.--The Riuer Seloy or the riuer of Dolphins but 8 or + 10 leagues ouer land from the fort: but it is thirty doubling the + Cape by sea. + + M546 Dangerous flawes of wind on the coast of Florida in September. + M547 A village and riuer both of that name. + M548 An aduertisment of my Lord Admirall to Captaine Ribault. + M549 A mighty tempest the 10 of September. + M550 Landonniere hardly vsed by Ribault. + M551 Landonniere and his company begin to fortifie themselues. + M552 A muster of men left in the fort by Ribault. + M553 The Spanyards discryed the 20 of September. + M554 The Spaniards enter the fort. + M555 Francis Iean a traitour to his nation. + M556 Don Pedro Melendes captaine of the Spaniards. + M557 Laudonniers escape. + M558 Iohn du Chemin a faithful seruant. + M559 The diligence of the Mariners to saue them that escaped out of the + fort. + M560 Among these was Iaques Morgues painter sometime liuing in the + Blackfryers in London. + M561 Francis Iean cause of this enterprise. + M562 The bad dealing of Iames Ribault. + M563 Our returne into France the 25. of September 1565. + M564 Laudonniers arriuall in Swansey Bay in Glamorganshire in South + Wales. + M565 The courtesie of our Master Morgan. + M566 Monsieur de Foix Ambassador for the French king in England. + M567 The conclusion. + M568 The causes why the French lost Florida. + M569 The chanell of Bahama betweene Florida and the Isles of Lucayos. + M570 The Frenchmens landing at the riuer Tacatacourou. + M571 Complaints of the Sauages against the Spanyards. + M572 Peter de Bre had liued about two yeeres with Satourioua. + M573 Three pledges deliuered to Gourges by Satourioua. + M574 The estate of the Spanyards in Florida. + M575 The riuer Saracary, or Sarauahi. + M576 The assault and taking of the first Fort. + M577 The valure of Olotocara. + M578 The assault and taking of the second fort. + M579 The Sauages great swimmers. + M580 The Spaniards of the second Fort all slaine. + M581 Note. + M582 A notable Spanish subtiltie. + M583 The cause why the Floridans bury their goods with them. + M584 Note. + M585 The slaughter of the Spaniards at the third fort. + M586 The writings hanged ouer the French and Spaniards slaine in Florida. + M587 The three Forts razed. + M588 Great honour done by the Sauages to Gourgues. + M589 Kniues in great estimation. + M590 The arriuall of Gourgues at Rochel, the sixt of Iune. + M591 The birth, life and death of captaine Gourgues. + + 123 See an account of these cotton breastplates in Prescott's _Mexico_. + + M592 Chap. 35. + M593 Decad. 3. lib. 8. cap. 8. + + 124 For a full account of Herrera and his writings, consult Prescott's + _Mexico_. + + M594 Chap. 15. + M595 Chap. 23. + M596 Chap. 24. + M597 Chap. 14. + M598 Chap. 31 and 32. + M599 Chap. 31 and 32. + + 125 From this preface it is clear that Hakluyt interested himself in + Virginia even after Raleigh's disgrace. + + M600 Eluas is a Citie in Portugal. + M601 Cabeca de Vaca was the Gouernour of the Riuer of Plate. + M602 Sixe hundred men went with Soto into Florida. + M603 Great figges. + + 126 Marginal note: Erua babosa Mameia, an excellent fruite. + + M604 Batatas, or Potatos. + M605 The Cassaui root. + M606 Store of good horses. + M607 The length and breadth of Cuba. + M608 A wittie stratagem. + M609 This place was called Baya de Sirito Sancto, being on the West side + of Florida, in 29 degrees. 1/2. + M610 The ships came vp to the towne of Vcita. + M611 Iohn Ortiz liued 12. yeeres, among the Floridians of Vcita and + Mococo. + M612 Mococo dwelleth two daies iournie from Vcita. + M613 Mococo his towne within 2. leagues of the sea. + M614 Paracossi 30. leagues from Puerto de Spirito Santo. + M615 A new conspiracie. + M616 Two hundred Indians taken. + M617 Chap. 11. + M618 Cosaqui. Patofa. + M619 Two swift Riuers. + M620 Another greater Riuer. + M621 The great increase of swine. + M622 An Indian burned for his falsehood. + M623 Cutifa-Chiqui. + M624 This towne was but two daies iourney from the hauen of Santa Helena. + In the yeere 1525. It is 32 degrees 1/2. + M625 Chalaque seuen daies iournie from Cutifa-Chiqui. + M626 The desert of Ocute, chap. 14. + M627 Certaine townes. + M628 Mines of copper and gold in Chisca toward the North. + M629 Chisca is directly North from Cutifa-Chiqui which is within two + daies of Santa Helena. + M630 Two Christians sent from Chiaha to seeke Chisca. + M631 A wise strategem. + M632 Vllibahali walled about. + M633 Mauilla walled. + M634 Al the clothes and perles of the Christians were lost. + M635 A consultation of the Indians to send away their Cacique. + M636 The death of 2500. Indians. + M637 The Port of Ochuse sixe daies iournie from Mauilla. + M638 An Indian stratagem. + M639 March, 1541. + M640 Chicaca set on fire by the Indians. + M641 An olde prophecie. + M642 Another towne, Rio Grande, or Rio de Espiritu Santo. + M643 Aquixo, a great Lord on the West side of Rio grande. + M644 They passe ouer Rio Grande. + M645 The chiefe towne of the Cacique of Casqui. + + 127 "Pez muy comun en los mares setentrionales de Espana, de un pie de + largo, comprimido, de color por el lomo azul claro, y por el vientre + bianco." (_Diccionario de la Academia_.)--Probably the Sparus of + Pliny. + + M646 The Cacique of Pacaha cometh to the Gouernour. + M647 Great store of Oxen toward the North of Pacaha. This is like + Quiuira. + + + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PRINCIPAL NAVIGATIONS, VOYAGES, TRAFFIQUES AND DISCOVERIES OF THE ENGLISH NATION. VOL. XIII. AMERICA. PART II.*** + + + +CREDITS + + +May 29, 2008 + + Project Gutenberg TEI edition 1 + Produced by Karl Hagen, David King, and the Online Distributed + Proofreading Team at <http://www.pgdp.net/>. Page-images + available at + <http://www.pgdp.net/projects/projectID3ebc02446f92c/> + + + +A WORD FROM PROJECT GUTENBERG + + +This file should be named 25645.txt or 25645.zip. + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + + + http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/5/6/4/25645/ + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one -- the old editions will be +renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no one +owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation (and +you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without permission +and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth in the +General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying and +distributing Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} electronic works to protect the Project +Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered +trademark, and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you +receive specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of +this eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook +for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, +performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given away +-- you may do practically _anything_ with public domain eBooks. +Redistribution is subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE + + +_Please read this before you distribute or use this work._ + +To protect the Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or +any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project Gutenberg"), +you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} +License (available with this file or online at +http://www.gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. + + +General Terms of Use & Redistributing Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} electronic works + + +1.A. + + +By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} electronic work, +you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the +terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright) +agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this +agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of +Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee +for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} electronic work +and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may +obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set +forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + + +1.B. + + +"Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be used on or +associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be +bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can +do with most Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} electronic works even without complying +with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are +a lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} electronic works if you +follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to +Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. + + +1.C. + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" or +PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual +work is in the public domain in the United States and you are located in +the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from copying, +distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works based on +the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of +course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} mission of +promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project +Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for +keeping the Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} name associated with the work. You can +easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the +same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} License when you +share it without charge with others. + + +1.D. + + +The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern what you +can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a constant +state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the laws of +your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before +downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating +derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} work. +The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status of +any work in any country outside the United States. + + +1.E. + + +Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + + +1.E.1. + + +The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate access +to, the full Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} License must appear prominently whenever +any copy of a Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} work (any work on which the phrase +"Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" +is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied or +distributed: + + + This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with + almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away + or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License + included with this eBook or online at http://www.gutenberg.org + + +1.E.2. + + +If an individual Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} electronic work is derived from the +public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is posted with +permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied and +distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees or +charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work with the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you +must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 +or obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} +trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + + +1.E.3. + + +If an individual Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} electronic work is posted with the +permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply +with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed +by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project +Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} License for all works posted with the permission of the +copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + + +1.E.4. + + +Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} License +terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any +other work associated with Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~}. + + +1.E.5. + + +Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this electronic +work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently displaying +the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or immediate +access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} License. + + +1.E.6. + + +You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, compressed, +marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any word +processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version posted +on the official Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} web site (http://www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other form. +Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} License as +specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + + +1.E.7. + + +Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing, +copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} works unless you comply +with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + + +1.E.8. + + +You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to or +distributing Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} electronic works provided that + + - You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} works calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to + the owner of the Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} trademark, but he has agreed to + donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg + Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 + days following each date on which you prepare (or are legally + required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments + should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg + Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, + "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary + Archive Foundation." + + You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} License. + You must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the + works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and + all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} works. + + You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of + any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of + receipt of the work. + + You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} works. + + +1.E.9. + + +If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} electronic +work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in this +agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from both the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael Hart, the owner of the +Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in +Section 3 below. + + +1.F. + + +1.F.1. + + +Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable effort to +identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread public domain +works in creating the Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} collection. Despite these +efforts, Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} electronic works, and the medium on which they +may be stored, may contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, +incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright +or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk +or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot +be read by your equipment. + + +1.F.2. + + +LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES -- Except for the "Right of +Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} +trademark, and any other party distributing a Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} +electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to you for +damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE +NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH +OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE +FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT +WILL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, +PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY +OF SUCH DAMAGE. + + +1.F.3. + + +LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND -- If you discover a defect in this +electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can receive a refund +of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a written explanation to +the person you received the work from. If you received the work on a +physical medium, you must return the medium with your written explanation. +The person or entity that provided you with the defective work may elect +to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the +work electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may choose +to give you a second opportunity to receive the work electronically in +lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a +refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem. + + +1.F.4. + + +Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in +paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + + +1.F.5. + + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or the +exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or +limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state +applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make +the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state +law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement +shall not void the remaining provisions. + + +1.F.6. + + +INDEMNITY -- You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the trademark +owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone providing copies of +Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and +any volunteers associated with the production, promotion and distribution +of Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs +and expenses, including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from +any of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of +this or any Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} work, (b) alteration, modification, or +additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} work, and (c) any Defect +you cause. + + +Section 2. + + + Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} + + +Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic +works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including +obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the +efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks +of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance +they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~}'s goals and ensuring +that the Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} collection will remain freely available for +generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for +Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} and future generations. To learn more about the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations +can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation web page at +http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. + + + Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of +Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service. +The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541. +Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. Contributions to the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full +extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. +S. Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 North +1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact information +can be found at the Foundation's web site and official page at +http://www.pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + + + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. + + + Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive + Foundation + + +Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} depends upon and cannot survive without wide spread +public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the +number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment +including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are +particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States. +Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable +effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these +requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not +received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or +determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit +http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have +not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against +accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us +with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any +statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the +United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation methods +and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including +checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please +visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. + + + General Information About Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} electronic works. + + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with +anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} +eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~} eBooks are often created from several printed editions, +all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. unless a copyright +notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in compliance +with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's eBook +number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, compressed +(zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected _editions_ of our eBooks replace the old file and take over the +old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +_Versions_ based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + + http://www.gutenberg.org + + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg{~TRADE MARK SIGN~}, including how +to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, +how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email +newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + + + + + +***FINIS*** +
\ No newline at end of file |